Gastrointestinal tract detection methods, devices and systems

ABSTRACT

The present disclosure relates to gastrointestinal (GI) tract detection methods, devices and systems.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

The application claims priority to the following co-pending U.S. PatentApplications: U.S. Ser. No. 62/431,297, entitled “Compositions, Methods,and Devices for Bacteria Detection and Quantitation,” filed on Dec. 7,2016; U.S. Ser. No. 62/434,320, entitled “An Ingestible Device forSampling, Diluting and Culturing a Biological Sample,” filed on Dec. 14,2016; U.S. Ser. No. 62/502,383, entitled “Devices for Analyte Detection”filed on May 5, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/560,618, entitled “IngestibleDevices and Related Systems and Methods,” filed on Sep. 19, 2017; U.S.Ser. No. 62/478,753, entitled “Treatment of a Disease of theGastrointestinal Tract with an IL-6R Inhibitor,” filed on Mar. 30, 2017;U.S. Ser. No. 62/545,157, entitled “Treatment of a Disease of theGastrointestinal Tract with an Immunosuppressant,” filed on Aug. 14,2017; and U.S. Ser. No. 62/583,768, entitled “Treatment of a Disease ofthe Gastrointestinal Tract with a TNF Inhibitor,” filed on Nov. 9, 2017.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

The application incorporates by reference the following co-pending U.S.patent applications: U.S. Ser. No. 62/431,297, entitled “Compositions,Methods, and Devices for Bacteria Detection and Quantitation,” filed onDec. 7, 2016; U.S. Ser. No. 62/434,320, entitled “An Ingestible Devicefor Sampling, Diluting and Culturing a Biological Sample,” filed on Dec.14, 2016; U.S. Ser. No. 62/502,383, entitled “Devices for AnalyteDetection” filed on May 5, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/560,618, entitled“Ingestible Devices and Related Systems and Methods,” filed on Sep. 19,2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/478,753, entitled “Treatment of a Disease of theGastrointestinal Tract with an IL-6R Inihibitor,” filed on Mar. 30,2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/545,157, entitled “Treatment of a Disease of theGastrointestinal Tract with an Immunosuppressant,” filed on Aug. 14,2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/583,768, entitled “Treatment of a Disease of theGastrointestinal Tract with a TNF Inihibitor,” filed on Nov. 9, 2017;U.S. Ser. No. 14/460,893, entitled “Ingestible Medical Device,” andfiled Aug. 15, 2014; U.S. Ser. No. 15/514,413, entitled“Electromechanical Pill Device with Localization Capabilities,” andfiled Mar. 24, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 15/680,400, entitled “Systems andMethods for Obtaining Samples using Ingestible Devices,” filed on Aug.18, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 15/680,430, entitled “Sampling Systems andRelated Materials and Methods,” filed on Aug. 18, 2017; U.S. Ser. No.15/699,848, entitled “Electromechanical Ingestible Delivery of aDispensable Substance,” filed on Sep. 8, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/480,187,entitled “Localization Systems and Methods for an OptoelectromechanicalPill Device,” filed on Mar. 31, 2017; and U.S. Ser. No. 62/540,873,entitled “Localization Systems and Methods for an Ingestible Device,”filed on Aug. 3, 2017.

FIELD

The disclosure relates to gastrointestinal (GI) tract detection methods,devices and systems.

BACKGROUND

The GI tract can contain information regarding an individual's body.

SUMMARY

The disclosure relates to gastrointestinal (GI) tract detection methods,devices and systems.

The technology disclosed herein allows for rapid, real time assessmentof information relating to a subject (e.g., information relating to thesubject's GI tract). In some embodiments, the information can relate tothe presence and/or quantity of an analyte of interest (e.g., an analyteof interest in the GI tract of a subject). In certain embodiments, thetechnology can be implemented using an ingestible device that may beused to take one or more samples of a subject (e.g., one or more samplesin one or more locations of the GI tract of the subject). Such a devicecan be implemented in an autonomous fashion. For example, informationcan be exchanged between the ingestible device when present in thesubject (in vivo) and outside the subject (ex vivo). In someembodiments, the information can be exchanged in real time. In certainembodiments, the technology can be used to help determine whether asubject has a given GI disorder. In some embodiments, the technology canbe used to help determine a treatment protocol and/or to monitor orassess efficacy of a treatment protocol for a subject (e.g., a GIdisorder treatment protocol for the subject). The detection techniquesdisclosed herein can be used individually or in any combination, asdesired. In some embodiments, an ingestible device is configured suchthat different detection techniques are performed in different chambers(e.g., sample chambers) of an ingestible device. Optionally, multipledifferent detection methods may be used to provide complementaryinformation regarding a subject (e.g., provide information relating tothe subject's GI tract) and/or supplementary information regarding asubject e.g., provide information relating to the subject's GI.

In one aspect, provided herein a method, comprising transferring a fluidsample from the gastrointestinal (GI) tract or from the reproductivetract of a subject into a first dilution chamber of a device in vivo;and combining the fluid sample and a first dilution fluid in the firstdilution chamber to produce a first diluted sample. In some embodiments,the device comprises a plurality of dilution chambers; and for each atleast some of the plurality of dilution chambers, the method comprises:transferring a fluid sample into the dilution chamber; and combining thefluid sample and the first dilution fluid in the first dilution chamberto produce a diluted sample. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises combining diluted samples from at least two different dilutionchambers to provide a further diluted sample.

In some embodiments, the device is an ingestible device. In someembodiments, the method further comprises orally administering thedevice to the subject. In some embodiments, the method further comprisesintroducing the device into the reproductive tract of the subject.

In some embodiments, the first dilution fluid comprises a sterilemedium.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises culturing the dilutedsample to produce a cultured sample. In some embodiments, the culturingis performed in vivo. In some embodiments, the culturing is performed exvivo.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises recovering the deviceex vivo. In some embodiments, the method further comprises removing thesample from the device.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises detecting an analytein the sample. In some embodiments, the detecting occurs in vivo. Insome embodiments, the analyte comprises a cell. In some embodiments, thecell comprises a bacteria. In some embodiments, the cell comprises aeukaryotic cell. In some embodiments, the eukaryotic cell is selectedfrom the group consisting of an epithelial cell and a peripheral bloodmononuclear cell (PBMC).

In some embodiments, the device comprises a port, a valve and/or a pump;and transferring the fluid sample to the dilution first chambercomprises controlling the port, valve and/or pump.

In some embodiments, the device comprises a port having an open positionand a first position; in the open position, the port is in fluidcommunication with the GI tract or with the reproductive tract of thesubject, and the fluid sample enters the port; and in the firstposition, the port is in fluid communication with the first dilutionchamber and the fluid sample combines with the first dilution fluid. Insome embodiments, when the port is in its open position, the fluidsample enters the port; and when the port is in its first position, thefluid sample combines with the first dilution fluid to provide a firstdilution. In some embodiments, the port has a second position in whichthe port is in fluid communication with a second dilution chambercomprising a fluid; and the method further comprises moving the portfrom its first position to its second position so that the firstdilution combines with the fluid in the second chamber to provide asecond dilution. In some embodiments, before the port moves from itsfirst position to its second position, the fluid in the second dilutionchamber comprises a sterile medium; and the second dilution comprisesthe sterile medium. In some embodiments, the method comprises moving inthe port sequentially from its open position to its first and thensecond positions, to sequentially provide the first and then seconddilutions. In some embodiments, the port has a third position in whichthe port is in fluid communication with a third dilution chamber whichcomprises a fluid; and the method further comprises moving the port fromits second position to its third position so that the second dilutioncombines with the fluid in the third chamber to provide a thirddilution. In some embodiments, the method comprises moving in the portsequentially from its open position to its first, second and then thirdpositions, to sequentially provide the first, second and then thirddilutions. In some embodiments, the port has a fourth position in whichthe port is in fluid communication with a fourth dilution chamber whichcomprises a fluid; and the method further comprises moving the port fromits third position to its fourth position so that the third dilutioncombines with the fluid in the fourth chamber to provide a fourthdilution. In some embodiments, the method comprises moving in the portsequentially from its open position to its first, second, third and thenfourth positions, to sequentially provide the first, second, third andfourth dilutions.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a microcontrollerconfigured to control an actuator configured to rotate the port. In someembodiments, the microcontroller is configured to control a rotatableelement which is configured to move the port.

In some embodiments, a ratio of a volume of the fluid sample to a volumeof the dilution fluid is from about 1:1 and about 1:1000. In someembodiments, the ratio is from about 1:1 and to about 1:100. In someembodiments, the ratio is from about 1:1 to about 1:20. In someembodiments, the ratio is from about 1:1 to about 1:10.

In some embodiments, the first dilution fluid comprises an anti-fungalagent. In some embodiments, the anti-fungal agent comprises amphotericinB.

In some embodiments, the first dilution fluid comprises a sterilemedium. In some embodiments, the first dilution medium comprises apreservative. In some embodiments, the sterile medium comprise an agentthat inhibits growth of a cell and/or an agent that promotes the growthof a cell. In some embodiments, the cell comprises a bacterium. In someembodiments, the sterile medium is selective for one or more types ofbacteria. In some embodiments, the medium is selective for Gram-negativebacteria.

In some embodiments, the first dilution fluid comprises sterile media,and the sterile media comprise an antibiotic.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises culturing the firstdiluted sample to produce a cultured sample. In some embodiments, themethod further comprises detecting the presence or absence of bacterialgrowth within the cultured sample. In some embodiments, the presence ofbacterial growth indicates the presence of bacteria that are resistantto the antibiotic in the fluid sample.

In some embodiments, the first dilution fluid comprises an indicatormedia. In some embodiments, the method further comprises detecting ananalyte in the first dilution at a plurality of time points. In someembodiments, the analyte comprises a cell.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises detecting an analytein one or more of the first dilution, the second dilution, the thirddilution and/or the fourth dilution at a first time point and at asecond time point. In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a cell. Insome embodiments, the first time point represents a control. In someembodiments, the second time point is between about 1 hour and about 6hours after the first time point. In some embodiments, the second pointin time is between about 1 hour and 4 hours after the first time point.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises culturing the one ormore diluted samples to produce one or more cultured samples, anddetecting the presence or absence of an analyte in the one or morecultured samples. In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a cell. Insome embodiments, the cell is a bacterium, and the method comprisesdetecting the presence or absence of bacterial growth in the one or morecultured samples.

In some embodiments, the volume of the fluid sample is about 5 μL, thedilution of the fluid sample is a dilution of about 1:10000 anddetecting the presence of bacterial growth in the dilution is indicativeof a bacterial concentration of 10⁵ or greater colony forming units(CFU)/mL in the fluid sample. In some embodiments, the fluid sample isjejunal fluid and a bacterial concentration of 10⁵ CFU/mL or greater inthe jejunal fluid is indicative that the subject has Small IntestinalBacterial Overgrowth (SIBO).

In some embodiments, the method further comprises detecting a level ofbacteria in the one or more diluted or cultured samples, wherein thefluid sample is jejunal fluid and a bacterial concentration of 10⁵CFU/mL or greater in the jejunal fluid is indicative that the subjecthas SIBO. In some embodiments, the method comprises detecting the levelof bacteria at three or more time points to generate one or more growthcurves for the one or more cultured samples. In some embodiments, themethod further comprises comparing the one or more growth curves to oneor more standard growth curves. In some embodiments, the standard growthcurves are representative of fluid samples with a known total bacterialcount. In some embodiments, the standard growth curves arerepresentative of samples from subjects with SIBO.

In some embodiments, the method comprises detecting the level of ananalyte in the one or more diluted samples or cultured samples in theone or more dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises transferring thediluted sample or cultured sample to a detection chamber, and detectingthe level of an analyte in the diluted sample or cultured sample in thedetection chamber. In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a cell.

In some embodiments, detecting comprises using a Coulter counter.

In some embodiments, detecting comprises using a light source and aphotodetector. In some embodiments, detecting comprises measuring anabsorbance of the one or more diluted samples or cultured samples at awavelength. In some embodiments, the wavelength is between about 400 and1000 nm. In some embodiments, the wavelength is between about 500 and700 nm. In some embodiments, the wavelength is about 600 nm.

In some embodiments, the device comprises an environmental sensor. Insome embodiments, the method further comprises measuring environmentaldata of the GI tract or reproductive tract external to the device in thesubject. In some embodiments, the method further comprises measuringenvironmental data of the GI tract external to the device in the subjectat a plurality of time points as the device passes through the GI tractof the subject. In some embodiments, the method comprises measuring atleast one parameter selected from the group consisting of capacitance,temperature, impedance, pH, and reflectance. In some embodiments, themethod further comprises using the environmental data to determine alocation of the device within the GI tract of the subject.

In some embodiments, the transferring the fluid sample into the firstdilution chamber happens when the device is in the small intestine ofthe subject.

In some embodiments, transferring the fluid sample into the firstdilution chamber happens when the device is in the jejunum of thesubject.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises determining the totalbacterial count (TBC) of the fluid sample based on the level of bacteriawithin the one or more diluted samples or cultured samples. In someembodiments, the fluid sample is jejunal fluid, and the method comprisesdiagnosing the subject as having SIBO if the TBC of the fluid sample isgreater than 10⁵ CFU/mL.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises identifying one ormore characteristics of a cell within the one or more diluted samples orcultured samples. In some embodiments, the cell is a bacterium and themethod comprises identifying the bacterium as Gram-positive orGram-negative. In some embodiments, the dilution fluid comprisesconjugated bile acids, and the method comprises measuring bile salthydrolase activity in the one or more diluted samples or culturedsamples. In some embodiments, the cell is a eukaryotic cell and themethod comprises detecting one or more biomarkers associated with canceror inflammation.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises transmitting data fromthe device to an external base station and/or receiving operatingparameters from an external base station. In some embodiments, the datacomprises a measure of the concentration of an analyte in the fluidsample. In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a cell. In someembodiments, the operating parameters comprise timing instructions fortransferring all or part of the fluid sample from the GI tract or fromthe reproductive tract into the one or more dilution chambers.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device, comprising a chamberconfigured to dilute a fluid sample from the GI tract or thereproductive tract of a subject; and a dilution chamber configured tohouse dilution fluid to dilute the fluid sample in the dilution chamber,wherein the device is an ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the device comprises one or more ports, valvesand/or pumps configured to control transfer of fluid from the GI tractor from the reproductive tract into the dilution chamber. In someembodiments, the device comprises a plurality of dilution chambers andone or more ports, valves and/or pumps configured to control transfer offluid between the dilution chambers. In some embodiments, the devicefurther comprises a microcontroller configured to control the one ormore ports, valves and/or pumps. In some embodiments, the device isconfigured to combine fluid sample with dilution fluid in the pluralityof dilution chambers to produce a dilution series. In some embodiments,the device comprises a port configured to receive the fluid sample fromthe GI tract or reproductive tract. In some embodiments, the port ismovable between an open position and a first position; in the openposition, the port is exposed on an external surface of the device; andin the first position, the port is in fluid communication with a firstdilution chamber of the device. In some embodiments, the port is movablebetween its first position and a second position; in its secondposition, the port is in fluid communication with a second dilutionchamber of the device. In some embodiments, the port is movable betweenits second position and a third position; and in its third position, theport is in fluid communication with a dilution incubation chamber of thedevice. In some embodiments, the port is movable between its thirdposition and a fourth position; and in its fourth position, the port isin fluid communication with a fourth dilution chamber of the device. Insome embodiments, the device further comprises an actuator configured tomove the port. In some embodiments, the actuator is coupled to arotatable element, and the rotatable element is configured to rotate theport. In some embodiments, the port has a fluid volume of about 1 μL toabout 50 μL. In some embodiments, the port is a depression on a surfaceof the rotatable element. In some embodiments, the one or more dilutionchambers are positioned circumferentially around an axis of rotation ofthe rotatable element.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises the dilution fluid. Insome embodiments, the dilution fluid comprises an anti-fungal agent. Insome embodiments, the anti-fungal agent comprises amphotericin B. Insome embodiments, the dilution fluid comprises sterile media. In someembodiments, the sterile media comprises at least one member selectedfrom the group consisting of an agent that promotes growth of a cell,and an agent that inhibits growth of a cell. In some embodiments, thesterile media comprises an antibiotic. In some embodiments, the sterilemedia is selective for the growth of one or more types of cells. In someembodiments, the sterile media is selective for the growth of aeukaryotic cell.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a detection systemconfigured to detect an analyte in the fluid sample or dilution thereof.In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a cell. In some embodiments,the device further comprises a detection chamber in fluid communicationwith the one or more dilution incubation chambers. In some embodiments,fluid communication between the detection chamber and the one or moredilution chambers is controlled by one or more ports, valves and/orpumps. In some embodiments, the detection system is configured to detectthe analyte in the fluid sample or dilution thereof at a plurality oftime points. In some embodiments, the detection system is configured todetect the analyte at a first time point and at a second time point. Insome embodiments, the first time point represents a control. In someembodiments, the second time point is between 1 hour and 6 hours afterthe first time point.

In some embodiments, the detection system is configured to detect thepresence or absence of bacterial growth in the one or more dilutionchambers or in the one or more detection chambers.

In some embodiments, the volume of the fluid sample is about 5 μL.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a detection systemconfigured to detect a level of bacteria in the one or more dilutionchambers or in the one or more detection chambers. In some embodiments,the detection system is configured to detect the level of bacteria atthree or more time points to produce a growth curve.

In some embodiments, the device comprises a Coulter counter.

In some embodiments, the device comprises a light source and aphotodetector. In some embodiments, the light source and photodetectorare operable to define a light path through the one or more dilutionchambers or through the one or more detection chambers.

In some embodiments, the device comprises a detection system configuredto detect an analyte in the fluid sample or dilution thereof. In someembodiments, the analyte is a byproduct from a bacterium.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises an environmentalsensor configured to measure environmental data of the GI tract or ofthe reproductive tract external to the device in the subject. In someembodiments, the environmental sensor comprises at least one memberselected from the group consisting of a capacitance sensor, atemperature sensor, an impedance sensor, a pH level sensor, and a lightsensor. In some embodiments, the environmental data is usable todetermine a location of the device within the GI tract of the subject.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a microcontrollerconfigured to control operation of the device. In some embodiments, themicrocontroller is configured to control transfer of the fluid samplefrom the GI tract to the one or more dilution chambers based on thelocation of the device within the GI tract. In some embodiments, themicrocontroller controls one or more ports, valves and/or pumps.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a sensor configured toidentify the types of cells or the characteristics of the cells withinthe one or more dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a communicationsub-unit that is configured to receive operating parameters from anexternal base station and/or transmit data to an external base station.In some embodiments, the operating parameters comprise timinginstructions for obtaining a fluid sample from the GI tract or from thereproductive tract and transferring the fluid sample into one or moredilution chambers. In some embodiments, the data is indicative of thepresence and/or absence of bacterial growth in the one or more dilutionchambers.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device, comprising an element havinga port on a wall of the element; and a shell surrounding the element todefine a first dilution chamber between the element and the shell,wherein the device is configured to allow relative movement between theelement and the shell; the shell has an aperture configured to expose aportion of the wall of the element to an exterior of the device; and thedevice is an ingestible device. In some embodiments, the device isconfigured to allow relative rotational movement between the element andthe shell. In some embodiments, the element is rotatable. In someembodiments, the element is cylindrical. In some embodiments, the shellis cylindrical.

In some embodiments, the device is configured so that relative movementbetween the element and the shell aligns the port with the aperture sothat an exterior of the device is in fluid communication with the portvia the aperture.

In some embodiments, the element and the shell define a first dilutionchamber; and the device is configured so that relative movement betweenthe element results in fluid communication between the port and thefirst dilution chamber. In some embodiments, the shell and the elementdefine a second dilution chamber that is separate from the firstdilution chamber; and the device is configured so that relative movementbetween the element results in fluid communication between the port anda second dilution chamber. In some embodiments, the first dilutionchamber contains a first dilution fluid, and the second dilution chambercontains a second dilution fluid. In some embodiments, the device isconfigured so that, during use of the device, the first dilution fluidis pumped into the first dilution chamber from a reservoir of theingestible device when the ingestible device arrives at a targetlocation of the GI tract.

In some embodiments, the wall of the element comprises any of one ormore ports, valves and pumps configured to transfer fluid from anexterior of the device to the first dilution chamber.

In some embodiments, the shell and the element define a plurality ofdilution chambers, and one or more ports, valves and/or pumps areconfigured to control transfer of fluid between the dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, the device comprises an actuator coupled to theelement to move the port.

In some embodiments, the port is a depression on the wall of therotatable element. In some embodiments, the first dilution chamber andthe second dilution chamber are positioned circumferentially about theelement.

In some embodiments, the first dilution fluid comprises a media toculture a GI fluid sample. In some embodiments, the device is configuredso that the dilution and culturing of the GI fluid sample are performedin vivo. In some embodiments, the device is configured so that culturingof the GI fluid sample is performed ex vivo after the ingestible devicehas been evacuated and recovered from the subject.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a microcontrollerconfigured to control a movement of the element.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a sensor configured toidentify types of cells and/or characteristics of the cells.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a communicationsub-unit that is configured to receive operating parameters from anexternal base station and/or transmit data to an external base station.In some embodiments, the operating parameters include timinginstructions for obtaining a fluid sample from the GI tract or from thereproductive tract and transferring the fluid sample into one or moredilution chambers. In some embodiments, the data is indicative of thepresence and/or absence of bacterial growth in the one or more dilutionchambers.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method comprising using the deviceto obtain a fluid sample in the GI tract of a subject. In someembodiments, the method further comprises serially rotating the elementto sequentially align the port with a series of dilution chambers.

In one aspect, provided herein is a composition, comprising a dye; and areagent capable of selectively lysing eukaryotic cells. In someembodiments, the dye is capable of binding to or reacting with a targetcomponent of a viable cell. In some embodiments, the dye exhibitsfluorescence that is measurably altered when the dye is bound to orreacted with the target component of the viable cell. In someembodiments, the dye is internalizable by the viable cell.

In some embodiments, the target component of the viable cell comprises amember selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid, actin,tubulin, an enzyme, a nucleotide-binding protein, an ion-transportprotein, mitochondria, a cytoplasmic component, and a membranecomponent.

In some embodiments, the dye exhibits fluorescence when bound to anucleic acid. In some embodiments, the dye comprises a member selectedfrom the group consisting of acridine orange, calcein-AM, DAPI, Hoechst33342, Hoechst 33258, PicoGreen, SYTO 16, SYBR Green I, Texas Red,Redmond Red, a Bodipy dye, Oregon Green, ethidium bromide, and propidiumiodide.

In some embodiments, the dye is a fluorogenic dye that exhibitsfluorescence when metabolized by the viable cell.

In some embodiments, the dye is a lipophilic dye that exhibitsfluorescence when metabolized by a cell.

In some embodiments, the dye exhibits fluorescence when reduced by acell or a cell component.

In some embodiments, the dye comprises a member selected from the groupconsisting of resazurin, C¹²-resazurin, 7-hydroxy-9H-(1,3dichloro-9,9-dimethylacridin-2-ol) N-oxide,6-chloro-9-nitro-5-oxo-5H-benzo[a]phenoxazine, and a tetrazolium salt.

In some embodiments, the dye exhibits fluorescence when oxidized by acell or a cell component. In some embodiments, the dye comprises amember selected from the group consisting of dihydrocalcein AM,dihydrorhodamine 123, dihydroethidium;2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorotetramethyldihydrorosamine, and 3′-(p-aminophenyl)fluorescein.

In some embodiments, the dye exhibits fluorescence when de-acetylatedand/or oxidized by a cell or a cell component.

In some embodiments, the dye comprises a member selected from the groupconsisting of dihydrorhodamines, dihydrofluoresceins,2′,7′-dichlorodihydrofluorescein diacetate; 5-(and6-)carboxy-2′,7′-dichlorodihydrofluorescein diacetate, andchloromethyl-2′,7′-dichlorodihydrofluorescein diacetate acetyl ester.

In some embodiments, the dye exhibits fluorescence when reacted with apeptidase. In some embodiments, the dye comprises a member selected fromthe group consisting of: (CBZ-Ala-Ala-Ala-Ala)2-R110 elastase 2;(CBZ-Ala-Ala-Asp)2-R110 granzyme B; and 7-amino-4-methylcoumarin; andN-CBZ-L-aspartyl-L-glutamyl-L-valyl-L-aspartic acid amide.

In some embodiments, the dye comprises a chemiluminescent dye thatexhibits chemiluminescence when metabolized by a viable cell.

In some embodiments, the dye comprises luminol.

In some embodiments, the reagent comprises a detergent. In someembodiments, the reagent comprises a non-ionic detergent. In someembodiments, the reagent comprises a member selected from the groupconsisting of Nonidet P40, deoxycholate, Igepal CA 630, Triton-X 100,Zwittergent, SDS, and Tween 20.

In some embodiments, the reagent comprises deoxycholate. In someembodiments, the composition comprises deoxycholate at a concentrationof from 0.0001 wt % to 1 wt %. In some embodiments, the compositioncomprises deoxycholate at a concentration of 0.005 wt %.

In some embodiments, the composition further comprises a second reagentcapable of selectively lysing eukaryotic cells. In some embodiments, thesecond reagent comprises a detergent. In some embodiments, the secondreagent comprises a member selected the group consisting of Nonidet P40,deoxycholate, Igepal CA 630, Triton-X 100, Zwittergent, sodium dodecylsulfate (SDS), and Tween 20. In some embodiments, the second reagent isTriton X-100. In some embodiments, the composition comprises TritonX-100 at a concentration of from0.1 wt % to 0.05 wt %.

In some embodiments, the composition further comprises an electrolyte.In some embodiments, the electrolyte is a divalent electrolyte. In someembodiments, the electrolyte is MgCl₂. In some embodiments, thecomposition comprises MgCl₂ at a concentration of from 0.1 mM to 100 mM.In some embodiments, the composition comprises MgCl₂ at a concentrationof from 0.5 mM to 50 mM.

In some embodiments, the composition further comprises water.

In some embodiments, the composition is an aqueous solution.

In some embodiments, the composition has a pH of from 5 to 8. In someembodiments, the composition has a pH of from 6 to 7.8.

In some embodiments, the composition is a solid or semi-solid.

In some embodiments, the viable cell is a bacterial cell.

In one aspect, provided herein is an article comprising a membercomprising an absorptive material; and a composition described herein,wherein the composition is at least partially absorbed in the absorptivematerial. In some embodiments, the absorptive material comprises asponge. In some embodiments, the sponge comprises a hydrophilic sponge.In some embodiments, the absorptive material comprises a materialselected from the group consisting of cotton, rayon, glass, polyester,polyethylene, polyurethane, and nitrocellulose.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device comprising a membercomprising an absorptive material; and a composition provided herein,wherein the composition is at least partially absorbed in the absorptivematerial, and the device is an ingestible device. In some embodiments,the device further comprises a housing with an opening configured,wherein the absorptive material is disposed within the housing such thatthe absorptive material is in fluid communication with an exterior ofthe device via the opening in the housing.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device, comprises a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system has first, second and thirdstates; the first state of the multi-stage valve system is differentfrom the second and third states of the multi-stage valve system; thesecond state of the multi-stage valve system is different from the firstand third states of the multi-stage valve system; when the multi-stagevalve system is in its first state, the opening prevents fluidcommunication between the interior of the ingestible device and theexterior of the ingestible device; when the multi-stage valve system isin its second state, the opening allows fluid communication between theinterior of the ingestible device and the exterior of the ingestibledevice; and when the multi-stage valve system is in its third state, theopening prevents fluid communication between the interior of theingestible device and the exterior of the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system comprises: an actuator systemcomprising a first member; a trigger comprising a first peg and a firstlip; a gate comprising a protrusion, and a gate leg having an opening;and a biasing system comprising first and second biasing members; whenthe multi-stage valve system is in a first stage: the first biasingmember applies a force to the trigger so that the first peg contacts thefirst member; the first member opposes the force applied to the triggerby the first biasing member; the second biasing member applies a forceto the gate so that the protrusion contacts the first lip; the first lipopposes the force applied to the gate by the second biasing member; andthe opening in the gate leg is not aligned with the opening in theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device, wherein: the samplingsystem comprises: a first member comprising absorptive material; and asecond member comprising a second absorptive material different from thefirst absorptive material; and the sampling system is configured so thatfluid that flows from the exterior of the ingestible device to theinterior of the ingestible device enters the first absorptive material;and the sampling system is configured to allow fluid to flow from thefirst absorptive material to the second absorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device configured to absorb afluid that enters the interior of the ingestible device via the opening,the sampling system comprising the absorptive material and at least onepreservative at least partially absorbed in the absorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing, wherein thesampling chamber contains an absorptive material; an inlet portconnecting the opening in the housing to the sampling chamber; a singleuse sealing device positioned within the inlet port that seals the inletport; and a heating element proximate to the single use sealing device,wherein: the heating element is configured to apply heat to the singleuse sealing device to unseal the inlet port and open the samplingchamber, and at least a portion of the absorptive material proximate tothe inlet port is configured to expand when in contact with a sample andreseal the inlet port.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing having an entryport and an exit port on an opposite end of the sampling chamber fromthe entry port, wherein the exit port is configured to allow gas to exitthe chamber and prevent at least a portion of a sample from exiting thechamber; an inlet region connecting the opening in the housing to theentry port of the sampling chamber; and a moveable valve positioned toopen and close the inlet region, wherein: the moveable valve in an openposition allows the sample to enter the sampling chamber; and themoveable valve in a closed position prevents the sample from enteringthe sampling chamber.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to determine a location of the ingestible device in aportion of a gastrointestinal (GI) tract of a subject to an accuracy ofat least 85%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to determine that the ingestible device is in thececum of a subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to transmit data to a device capable of implementingthe data to determine a location of the ingestible device in a portionof a GI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to transmit data to an external device capable ofimplementing the data to determine that the ingestible device is in thececum of subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises first and second lightsources, wherein the first light source is configured to emit light at afirst wavelength, and the second light source is configured to emitlight at a second wavelength different from the first wavelength. Insome embodiments, the device further comprises first and seconddetectors, wherein the first detector is configured to detect light atthe first wavelength, and the second detector is configured to detectlight at the second wavelength.

In one aspect, provided herein is a kit, comprising: a member comprisingan absorptive material; and a composition described herein, wherein thecomposition is at least partially absorbed in the absorptive material.

In one aspect, provided herein is a kit, comprising an article describedherein or a device described herein.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method, comprising: contacting asample with either a composition described herein, an article describedherein, or a device described herein, to yield a product; and measuringfluorescence of the product to detect viable bacterial cells in thesample.

In some embodiments, the method comprises measuring the totalfluorescence of the product to detect viable bacterial cells in thesample. In some embodiments, the method further comprises comparing themeasured total fluorescence of the product to a total fluorescenceproduced by a control, to detect viable bacterial cells in the sample.In some embodiments, the method further comprises correlating thecomparative total fluorescence to the number of viable bacterial cellsin the sample.

In some embodiments, the method comprises measuring a change influorescence of the product as a function of time to detect viablebacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the method furthercomprises comparing a measured rate of change of fluorescence of theproduct as a function of time to a rate of change of fluorescence as afunction of time produced by a control, to detect viable bacterial cellsin the sample. In some embodiments, the method further comprisescorrelating the comparative rate of change of fluorescence as a functionof time to the number of viable bacterial cells in the sample.

In some embodiments, the control comprises a composition identical tothe sample but that does not comprise viable bacterial cells.

In some embodiments, the control comprises a composition identical tothe sample but comprises a known number of viable bacterial cells.

In some embodiments, the sample comprises a biological sample. In someembodiments, the sample comprises an environmental sample. In someembodiments, the sample comprises a human sample. In some embodiments,the sample comprises a human GI tract sample.

In some embodiments, the viable bacterial cells comprise bacterial cellsselected from the group consisting of Escherichia coli, Bacillusanthraces, Bacillus cereus, Clostridium botulinum, Yersinia pestis,Yersinia enterocolitica, Brucella species, Clostridium perfringens,Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei, Staphylococcus species,Mycobacterium species, Group A Streptococcus, Group B Streptococcus,Streptococcus pneumoniae, Helicobacter pylori, Francisella tularensis,Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasma hominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasmasalivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacteriumbovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacteriumleprae, Rickettsia rickettsia, Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii,Rickettsia canada, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillusthuringiensis, Coxiella burnetti, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii,Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcusalbus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method of assessing or monitoringthe need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of overgrowth ofbacterial cells in the GI tract, the method comprising: contacting asample from the GI tract of the subject with a composition describedherein to provide a product; measuring a parameter selected from: i)total fluorescence of the product; or ii) rate of change of fluorescenceof the product as a function of time; and correlating the parameter to anumber of viable bacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, themethod further comprises using the correlation to determine whether thesubject is suffering from or at risk of overgrowth of bacterial cells inthe GI tract. In some embodiments, the method further comprisesdetermining that when the number of the viable bacterial cells in thesample is greater than about 10⁵ colony forming units (CFU)/mL, thesubject needs treatment for overgrowth of bacterial cells in the GItract. In some embodiments, the parameter comprises the totalfluorescence of the product. In some embodiments, the parametercomprises the rate of change of fluorescence of the product as afunction of time.

In some embodiments, the method comprises obtaining the sample from theGI tract of the subject; measuring the total fluorescence of theproduct; comparing the measured total fluorescence to a totalfluorescence produced by a control; and correlating the comparativefluorescence to the number of viable bacterial cells present in thesample. In some embodiments, the method further comprises determiningthat when the number of the viable bacterial cells in the sample isgreater than about 10⁵ CFU/mL, the subject needs treatment forovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract.

In some embodiments, the method comprises obtaining the sample from theGI tract of the subject; measuring the total fluorescence of theproduct; comparing a rate of change of fluorescence of the product as afunction of time to a rate of change of fluorescence as a function oftime produced by a control; and correlating the comparative rate ofchange of fluorescence as a function of time to the number of viablebacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the controlcomprises a composition identical to the sample that does not compriseviable bacterial cells. In some embodiments, the control comprises acomposition identical to the sample but that comprises a known number ofviable bacterial cells.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method, comprising: disposing asample in an article described herein, thereby producing a product; andmeasuring a parameter selected from total fluorescence of the product inthe article, and a rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timeof the product in the article.

In some embodiments, the sample comprises an aqueous solution. In someembodiments, the method further comprises removing water from theproduct.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises heating the product.In some embodiments, the product is heated to a temperature above 0° C.In some embodiments, the product is heated to a temperature of at most100° C.

In some embodiments, the method comprises reducing a total water contentof the product by at least 50%.

In some embodiments, the parameter is total fluorescence of the productin the article.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises comparing the measuredtotal fluorescence detected in the product to a total fluorescenceproduced by a control, and correlating the comparative fluorescence todetect viable bacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, themethod further comprises correlating the comparative total fluorescencedetected in the product to the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample.

In some embodiments, the parameter is the rate of change of fluorescenceas a function of time of the product in the article, and the methodfurther comprises comparing the rate of change of fluorescence as afunction of time to a rate of change of fluorescence as a function oftime produced by a control to detect the viable bacterial cells in thesample. In some embodiments, the method further comprises correlatingthe comparative rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time tothe number of viable bacterial cells in the sample.

In some embodiments, the control comprises a product identical to theproduct but that is devoid of viable bacterial cells. In someembodiments, the control comprises a product identical to the productbut comprises a known number of viable bacterial cells.

In some embodiments, the method comprises continuously measuring for upto 330 minutes.

In some embodiments, the sample comprises a biological sample. In someembodiments, the sample comprises an environmental sample. In someembodiments, the sample comprises a human sample. In some embodiments,the sample comprises a human GI tract sample.

In some embodiments, the viable bacterial cells comprise bacterial cellsselected from the group consisting of Escherichia coli, Bacillusanthraces, Bacillus cereus, Clostridium botulinum, Yersinia pestis,Yersinia enterocolitica, Francisella tularensis, Brucella species,Clostridium perfringens, Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei,Staphylococcus species, Mycobacterium species, Group A Streptococcus,Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Helicobacter pylori,Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasma hominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasmasalivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacteriumbovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacteriumleprae, Rickettsia rickettsia, Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii,Rickettsia canada, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillusthuringiensis, Coxiella burnetti, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii,Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcusalbus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method of assessing or monitoringthe need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of overgrowth ofbacterial cells in the GI tract, the method comprising: obtaining asample from the gastrointestinal tract of the subject; disposing thesample in an article described herein to provide a product; measuring aparameter selected from a total fluorescence of the product; and a rateof change of fluorescence of the product as a function of time;correlating the measured parameter to a number of viable bacterial cellsin the sample; and determining that the subject is in need of treatmentfor or at risk of overgrowth of bacterial cells in the gastrointestinaltract, when the number of viable bacterial cells is greater than about10⁵ CFU/mL.

In some embodiments, the parameter comprises the total fluorescence ofthe product, and the method further comprises: comparing the measuredtotal fluorescence to a total fluorescence produced by a control; andcorrelating the comparative total fluorescence to the number of viablebacterial cells in the sample.

In some embodiments, the parameter comprises the rate of change offluorescence of the product as a function of time, and the methodfurther comprises: comparing the measured rate of change of fluorescenceof the product as a function of time to a rate of change of fluorescenceas a function of time produced by a control; correlating the comparativerate of change of fluorescence as a function of time to the number ofviable bacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the controlcomprises a composition identical to the sample but does not compriseviable bacterial cells. In some embodiments, the control comprises acomposition identical to the sample but comprises a known number ofviable bacterial cells.

In some embodiments, the method comprises collecting the sample from theGI tract of a subject. In some embodiments, the method comprisesdisposing the sample into an ingestible device while the ingestibledevice is in the GI tract of the subject.

In some embodiments, the method is performed within the body of thesubject.

In some embodiments, the method is partially performed outside the bodyof the subject.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device, comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system has first, second and thirdstates; the first state of the multi-stage valve system is differentfrom the second and third states of the multi-stage valve system; thesecond state of the multi-stage valve system is different from the firstand third states of the multi-stage valve system; when the multi-stagevalve system is in its first state, the opening prevents fluidcommunication between the interior of the ingestible device and theexterior of the ingestible device; when the multi-stage valve system isin its second state, the opening allows fluid communication between theinterior of the ingestible device and the exterior of the ingestibledevice; and when the multi-stage valve system is in its third state, theopening prevents fluid communication between the interior of theingestible device and the exterior of the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system comprises: an actuator systemcomprising a first member; a trigger comprising a first peg and a firstlip; a gate comprising a protrusion, and a gate leg having an opening;and a biasing system comprising first and second biasing members; whenthe multi-stage valve system is in a first stage: the first biasingmember applies a force to the trigger so that the first peg contacts thefirst member; the first member opposes the force applied to the triggerby the first biasing member; the second biasing member applies a forceto the gate so that the protrusion contacts the first lip; the first lipopposes the force applied to the gate by the second biasing member; andthe opening in the gate leg is not aligned with the opening in theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device, wherein: the samplingsystem comprises: a first member comprising a first absorptive material;and a second member comprising a second absorbent member different fromthe first absorptive material; and the sampling system is configured sothat fluid that flows from the exterior of the ingestible device to theinterior of the ingestible device enters the first absorptive material;and the sampling system is configured to allow fluid to flow from thefirst absorptive material to the second absorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device configured to absorb afluid that enters the interior of the ingestible device via the opening,the sampling system comprising a member which comprises an absorptivematerial and at least one preservative at least partially absorbed inthe absorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing, wherein thesampling chamber contains an absorptive material; an inlet portconnecting the opening in the housing to the sampling chamber; a singleuse sealing device positioned within the inlet port that seals the inletport; and a heating element proximate to the single use sealing device,wherein: the heating element is configured to apply heat to the singleuse sealing device to unseal the inlet port and open the samplingchamber, and at least a portion of the absorptive material proximate tothe inlet port is configured to expand when in contact with a sample andreseal the inlet port.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing having an entryport and an exit port on an opposite end of the sampling chamber fromthe entry port, wherein the exit port is configured to allow gas to exitthe chamber and prevent at least a portion of a sample from exiting thechamber; an inlet region connecting the opening in the housing to theentry port of the sampling chamber; and a moveable valve positioned toopen and close the inlet region, wherein: the moveable valve in an openposition allows the sample to enter the sampling chamber; and themoveable valve in a closed position prevents the sample from enteringthe sampling chamber.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to determine a location of the ingestible devicein a portion of a GI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to determine that the ingestible device is inthe cecum of a subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to transmit data to a device capable ofimplementing the data to determine a location of the ingestible devicein a portion of a GI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to transmit data to an external device capableof implementing the data to determine that the ingestible device is inthe cecum of subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises first andsecond light sources, wherein the first light source is configured toemit light at a first wavelength, and the second light source isconfigured to emit light at a second wavelength different from the firstwavelength. In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprisesfirst and second detectors, wherein the first detector is configured todetect light at the first wavelength, and the second detector isconfigured to detect light at the second wavelength.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device, comprising: a samplingchamber; and a composition in the sampling chamber, wherein: thecomposition comprises a plurality of donor particles and a plurality ofacceptor particles, each donor particle comprises a photosensitizercoupled to a first analyte-binding agent that binds to an analyte, in anexcited state, the photosensitizer generates singlet oxygen; eachacceptor particle comprises a chemiluminescent compound coupled to asecond analyte-binding agent that binds to the analyte; thechemiluminescent compound reacts with singlet oxygen to emitluminescence; and the device is an ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the composition further comprises an aqueous mediumcomprising the donor and acceptor particles. In some embodiments, thedonor and acceptor particles are suspended in the aqueous medium.

In some embodiments, the acceptor particles comprise particles selectedfrom the group consisting of latex particles, lipid bilayers, oildroplets, silica particles, and metal sols.

In some embodiments, the acceptor particles comprise latex particles.

In some embodiments, the chemiluminescent compound comprises a compoundselected from the group consisting of Chemiluminescer, Thioxene+Diphenylanthracence, Thioxene+Umbelliferone derivative, Thioxene+Europiumchelate, Thioxene+Samarium Chelate, Thioxene+terbium Chelate, N-PhenylOxazine+Umbelliferone derivative, N-Phenyl Oxazine+Europium chelate,N-phenyl Oxazine+Samarium Chelate, N-phenyl Oxazine+terbium Chelate,Dioxene+Umbelliferone derivative, Dioxene+Europium chelate,Dioxene+Samarium Chelate, and N-phenyl Oxazine+terbium Chelate.

In some embodiments, the donor particles comprise particles selectedfrom the group consisting of latex particles, lipid bilayers, oildroplets, silica particles, and metal sols.

In some embodiments, the donor particles comprise latex particles. Insome embodiments, the donor particles further comprise streptavidin. Insome embodiments, the streptavidin is coated on the latex particles.

In some embodiments, the photosensitizer comprises a material selectedfrom the group consisting of a dye, an aromatic compound, an enzyme, anda metal salt.

In some embodiments, a ratio of a number of the donor particles to anumber of the acceptor particles in the composition is between 10:1 to10:1.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device, comprising: a samplingchamber; and a composition in the sampling chamber, wherein thecomposition comprises: a first analyte-binding agent comprising a firstfluorescent dye, wherein the first analyte-binding agent is capable ofbinding to an analyte; and a second analyte-binding agent comprising asecond fluorescent dye, wherein the second analyte-binding agent iscapable of binding to the analyte, and wherein the second fluorescentdye exhibits increased fluorescence when spatially proximal to the firstfluorescent dye; and wherein the device is an ingestible device. In someembodiments, the spatial proximity between the first fluorescent dye andthe second fluorescent dye results in energy transfer from the firstfluorescent dye to the second fluorescent dye.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device, comprising: a samplingchamber; and a composition in the sampling chamber, wherein thecomposition comprises: a first analyte-binding agent comprising aphotosensitizer, wherein the first analyte-binding agent is capable ofbinding to an analyte, and wherein the photosensitizer generates singletoxygen in an excited state; and a second analyte-binding agentcomprising a fluorogenic dye, wherein the fluorogenic dye emitsfluorescence upon reacting with singlet oxygen; and wherein the deviceis an ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the composition comprises an aqueous medium. Insome embodiments, the aqueous medium comprises a preservative.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent and/or the secondanalyte-binding agent is an antigen-binding agent.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent and/or the secondanalyte-binding agent is an antibody.

In some embodiments, the device is configured detect the analyte invivo.

In some embodiments, the sampling chamber is configured to house anabsorptive material. In some embodiments, the absorptive material isconfigured to at least partially absorb the composition. In someembodiments, the absorptive material comprises a sponge.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a biomolecule, amicroorganism, a therapeutic agent, a drug, a biomarker, a pesticide, apollutant, a fragment thereof, or a metabolite thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a protein, an aptamer, anucleic acid, a steroid, a polysaccharide, or a metabolite.

In some embodiments, the protein is selected from the group consistingof an antibody, an affimer, a cytokine, a chemokine, an enzyme, ahormone, a cancer antigen, a tissue-specific antigen, a histone, analbumin, a globulin, a scleroprotein, a phosphoprotein, a mucoprotein, achromoprotein, a lipoprotein, a nucleoprotein, a glycoprotein, areceptor, a membrane-anchored protein, a transmembrane protein, asecreted protein, a human leukocyte antigen (HLA), a blood clottingfactor, a microbial protein, and fragments thereof.

In some embodiments, the metabolite is selected from the groupconsisting of serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindole acetic acid (5-HIAA),5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid (KA),3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilic acid (3-HAA),quinolinic acid, anthranilic acid, and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the microorganism is a bacterium, a virus, a prion,a protozoan, a fungus, or a parasite.

In some embodiments, the bacterium is selected from the group consistingof Escherichia coli, Bacillus anthraces, Bacillus cereus, Clostridiumbotulinum, Clostridium difficile, Yersinia pestis, Yersiniaenterocolitica, Francisella tularensis, Brucella species, Clostridiumperfringens, Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei,Staphylococcus species, Mycobacterium species, Group A Streptococcus,Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Helicobacter pylori,Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasma hominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasmasalivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacteriumbovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacteriumleprae, Rickettsia rickettsia, Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii,Rickettsia canada, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillusthuringiensis, Coxiella burnetti, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii,Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcusalbus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii.

In some embodiments, the therapeutic agent is selected from the groupconsisting of a TNFα inhibitor, an IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor, an IL-6receptor inhibitor, an integrin inhibitor, a toll-like receptor (TLR)agonist, a TLR antagonist, a SMAD7 inhibitor, a JAK inhibitor, animmunosuppressant, a live biotherapeutic, a carbohydratesulfotransferase 15 (CHST15) inhibitor, an IL-1 inhibitor, an IL-13inhibitor, an IL-10 receptor agonist, glatiramer acetate, a CD40/CD40Linhibitor, a CD3 inhibitor, a CD14 inhibitor, a CD20 inhibitor, a CD25inhibitor, a CD28 inhibitor, a CD49 inhibitor, a CD89 inhibitor, and achemokine/chemokine receptor inhibitor.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a bile acid or a bile acid salt. Insome embodiments, the analyte is an antibiotic. In some embodiments, theanalyte is associated with a disease, a disorder, or a pathogen.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises TNFα, lipoteichoic acid(LTA), lipopolysaccharide (LPS), lipopolysaccharide binding protein(LBP), a cytokine, a chemokine, IL12/23, IL-6, IL-10, MADCAM, α4β7integrin, hepatocyte growth factor (HGF), epidermal growth factor (EGF),heparin-binding epidermal growth factor (HB-EGF), TGFβ, adalimumab,infliximab, certolizumab pegol, vedolizumab, natalizumab, golimumab,bevacizumab, or cetuximab.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent comprises an agentselected from the group consisting of an antibody, an affimer, anantigen, a small molecule, a nucleic acid, a receptor, an aptamer, areceptor ligand, biotin, streptavidin, avidin, protein A, protein G,protein L, and derivatives thereof.

In some embodiments, the second analyte-binding agent are comprises anagent selected from the group consisting of an antibody, an affimer, anantigen, a small molecule, a nucleic acid, a receptor, an aptamer, areceptor ligand, biotin, streptavidin, avidin, protein A, protein G,protein L, and derivatives thereof.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent is different fromthe second analyte-binding agent. In some embodiments, the firstanalyte-binding agent is the same as the second analyte-binding agent.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent comprises anantibody. In some embodiments, the second analyte-binding agentcomprises an antibody. In some embodiments, the first analyte-bindingagent comprises a biotinylated antibody. In some embodiments, theantibody comprises an anti-bacterial antibody. In some embodiments, theantibody comprises an antibody selected from the group consisting of ananti-Gram-positive bacteria antibody, an anti-Gram-negative bacteriaantibody, an anti-lipoteichoic acid (LTA) antibody, an anti-E. coliantibody, an anti-lipid A antibody, an anti-TNFα antibody, andderivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the antibody comprises anantibody selected from the group consisting of MA1-7401 antibody,MA1-40134 antibody, ab127996 antibody, ab35654 antibody, ab35654antibody, ab137967 antibody, ab8467 antibody, and derivatives orfragments thereof.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent comprises abiotinylated antibody, and the donor particles comprise a coating whichcomprises streptavidin. In some embodiments, the second analyte-bindingagent comprises an antibody covalently conjugated to the acceptorparticles.

In some embodiments, the composition further comprises cyclodextrinhaving a concentration range of 25-50 nM.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises an internalcalibrator.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a light source. Insome embodiments, the light source is configured to provide light havingat least one wavelength selected from the group consisting of 678 nm,633 nm, and 780 nm. In some embodiments, the light source is configuredto irradiate the composition with light.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a detector configuredto detect luminescence emitted by the chemiluminescent compound. In someembodiments, the detector comprises a photodiode configured to detectluminescence emitted by the chemiluminescent compound. In someembodiments, the detector comprises a photodiode configured to detectluminescence emitted by the chemiluminescent compound at at least onewavelength selected from the group consisting of 613 nm and 660 nm.

In one aspect, provided herein is a kit comprising a device describedherein.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method comprising using a devicedescribed herein to detect the analyte.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises disposing a samplefrom a subject into the sampling chamber. In some embodiments, thesample is disposed in the sampling chamber in vivo. In some embodiments,the method further comprises irradiating the sample, and detectingluminescence emitted from the sample.

In some embodiments, detecting luminescence comprises measuring anamount of luminescence. In some embodiments, detecting luminescencecomprises measuring a total amount of luminescence. In some embodiments,detecting luminescence comprises measuring a rate of change ofluminescence as a function of time.

In some embodiments, the fluid sample is taken from the gastrointestinal(GI) tract of the subject.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises quantifying an amountof the analyte based on measured total luminescence. In someembodiments, the method further comprises quantifying an amount of theanalyte based a rate of change of luminescence.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a biomolecule, amicroorganism, a therapeutic agent, a drug, a biomarker, a pesticide, apollutant, a fragment thereof, or a metabolite thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a protein, an aptamer,nucleic acid, a steroid, a polysaccharide, or a metabolite.

In some embodiments, the protein is selected from the group consistingof an antibody, an affimer, a cytokine, a chemokine, an enzyme, ahormone, a cancer antigen, a tissue-specific antigen, a histone, analbumin, a globulin, a scleroprotein, a phosphoprotein, a mucoprotein, achromoprotein, a lipoprotein, a nucleoprotein, a glycoprotein, areceptor, a membrane-anchored protein, a transmembrane protein, asecreted protein, a human leukocyte antigen (HLA), a blood clottingfactor, a microbial protein, and fragments thereof.

In some embodiments, the metabolite is selected from the groupconsisting of serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindole acetic acid (5-HIAA),5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid (KA),3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilic acid (3-HAA),quinolinic acid, anthranilic acid, and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the microorganism is a bacterium, a virus, a prion,a protozoan, a fungus, or a parasite.

In some embodiments, the bacterium is selected from the group consistingof Escherichia coli, Bacillus anthraces, Bacillus cereus, Clostridiumbotulinum, Clostridium difficile, Yersinia pestis, Yersiniaenterocolitica, Francisella tularensis, Brucella species, Clostridiumperfringens, Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei,Staphylococcus species, Mycobacterium species, Group A Streptococcus,Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Helicobacter pylori,Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasma hominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasmasalivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacteriumbovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacteriumleprae, Rickettsia rickettsia, Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii,Rickettsia canada, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillusthuringiensis, Coxiella burnetti, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii,Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcusalbus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii.

In some embodiments, the therapeutic agent is selected from the groupconsisting of a TNFα inhibitor, an IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor, an IL-6receptor inhibitor, an integrin inhibitor, a toll-like receptor (TLR)agonist, a TLR antagonist, a SMAD7 inhibitor, a JAK inhibitor, animmunosuppressant, a live biotherapeutic, a carbohydratesulfotransferase 15 (CHST15) inhibitor, an IL-1 inhibitor, an IL-13inhibitor, an IL-10 receptor agonist, glatiramer acetate, a CD40/CD40Linhibitor, a CD3 inhibitor, a CD14 inhibitor, a CD20 inhibitor, a CD25inhibitor, a CD28 inhibitor, a CD49 inhibitor, a CD89 inhibitor, and achemokine/chemokine receptor inhibitor.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a bile acid or a bile acid salt. Insome embodiments, the analyte is an antibiotic. In some embodiments, theanalyte is associated with a disease, a disorder, or a pathogen.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises TNFα, lipoteichoic acid(LTA), lipopolysaccharide (LPS), lipopolysaccharide binding protein(LBP), a cytokine, a chemokine, IL12/23, IL-6, IL-10, MADCAM, α4β7integrin, hepatocyte growth factor (HGF), epidermal growth factor (EGF),heparin-binding epidermal growth factor (HB-EGF), TGFβ, adalimumab,infliximab, certolizumab pegol, vedolizumab, natalizumab, golimumab,bevacizumab, or cetuximab.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises determining, based onthe detected luminescence, that the subject is suffering from or at riskof overgrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract. In some embodiments,the method further comprises correlating a total luminescence and/or arate of change of luminescence as a function of time measured in thesample to the amount of the analyte in the sample. In some embodiments,the method further comprises correlating the amount of the analyte inthe sample to the number of viable bacterial cells in the sample. Insome embodiments, determining that the determined number of the viablebacterial cells is greater than about 10⁵ CFU/mL indicates a need fortreatment.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises determining, based onthe detected luminescence, that the subject is suffering from or at riskof overgrowth of bacterial cells in the gastrointestinal tract.

In some embodiments, the subject is suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the gastrointestinal tract.

In some embodiments, the device comprises a plurality of samplingchambers, and the method further comprises disposing different samplesin different sampling chambers. In some embodiments, the methodcomprises taking different samples at different times. In someembodiments, the method comprises taking different samples at differentlocations within the gastrointestinal tract. In some embodiments, thedifferent locations comprise locations selected from the groupconsisting of the mouth, the throat, the esophagus, the stomach, thesmall intestine, the large intestine, the duodenum, the jejunum, theileum, the ascending colon, the transverse colon, and the descendingcolon. In some embodiments, the method further comprises creating amolecular map that maps each location from the number of differentlocations within the GI tract to a respective measurement of theanalyte.

In one aspect, provided herein is a device, comprising a diffractiveoptics sensor, wherein the device is an ingestible device. In someembodiments, the diffractive optics sensor is configured to detect ananalyte present in the device. In some embodiments, the diffractiveoptics sensor comprises: a diffraction grating; an analyte-binding agentlinked to the diffraction grating, wherein the analyte-binding agent iscapable of binding to the analyte; and a detector configured to detectlight diffracted by the diffraction grating, wherein the device isconfigured so that, when the analyte is bound to the analyte-bindingagent, a diffraction pattern of light diffracted by the diffractiongrating changes. In some embodiments, the change in the diffractionpattern comprises a change in an intensity of light diffracted by thediffraction grating. In some embodiments, a magnitude of the change inthe intensity of light diffracted by the diffraction grating isindicative of the concentration of the analyte in the sample.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a light sourceconfigured so that light emitted by the light source impinges on thediffraction grating with an angle of incidence 60° measured fromsurface. In some embodiments, the light source is configured to generatelight having a wavelength of 670 nm.

In some embodiments, the diffraction grating has a period of 15 μm. Insome embodiments, the diffraction grating comprises a series of groovescomprising adjacent recessed portions and wherein raised portions of thegrooves have a depth from about 1 nm to about 1000 nm.

In some embodiments, the diffraction pattern comprises light in aplurality of diffraction orders, and the detector detects an intensityof light in one or more of the diffraction orders.

In some embodiments, the diffraction optics are configured for totalinternal reflection.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a member selected from thegroup consisting of a biomolecule, a microorganism, a therapeutic agent,a drug, a biomarker, a pesticide, a pollutant, fragments thereof, andmetabolites thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a member selected from thegroup consisting of a protein, a nucleic acid, a steroid, apolysaccharide, and a metabolite. In some embodiments, the analytecomprises a protein selected from the group consisting of an antibody,an aptamer, an affimer, a cytokine, a chemokine, an enzyme, a hormone, acancer antigen, a tissue-specific antigen, a histone, an albumin, aglobulin, a scleroprotein, a phosphoprotein, a mucoprotein, achromoprotein, a lipoprotein, a nucleoprotein, a glycoprotein, areceptor, a membrane-anchored protein, a transmembrane protein, asecreted protein, a human leukocyte antigen (HLA), a blood clottingfactor, a microbial protein, and fragments thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a metabolite selected fromthe group consisting of serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindole acetic acid(5-HIAA), 5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid(KA), 3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilic acid (3-HAA),quinolinic acid, anthranilic acid, and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a bile acid or a bile acidsalt.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises an antibiotic.

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises a microorganism selected fromthe group consisting of a bacterium, a virus, a prion, a protozoan, afungus, and a parasite.

In some embodiments, the bacterium comprises a member selected from thegroup consisting of Escherichia coli, Bacillus anthraces, Bacilluscereus, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Yersinia pestis,Yersinia enterocolitica, Francisella tularensis, Brucella species,Clostridium perfringens, Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei,Staphylococcus species, Mycobacterium species, Group A Streptococcus,Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Helicobacter pylori,Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasma hominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasmasalivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacteriumbovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacteriumleprae, Rickettsia rickettsia, Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii,Rickettsia canada, Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillusthuringiensis, Coxiella burnetti, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii,Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcusalbus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii.

In some embodiments, the therapeutic agent comprises a member selectedfrom the group consisting of a TNFα inhibitor, an IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor,an IL-6 receptor inhibitor, an integrin inhibitor, a toll-like receptor(TLR) agonist, a TLR antagonist, a SMAD7 inhibitor, a JAK inhibitor, animmunosuppressant, a live biotherapeutic, a carbohydratesulfotransferase 15 (CHST15) inhibitor, an IL-1 inhibitor, an IL-13inhibitor, an IL-10 receptor agonist, glatiramer acetate, a CD40/CD40Linhibitor, a CD3 inhibitor, a CD14 inhibitor, a CD20 inhibitor, a CD25inhibitor, a CD28 inhibitor, a CD49 inhibitor, a CD89 inhibitor, and achemokine/chemokine receptor inhibitor.

In some embodiments, the analyte is associated with a disease, adisorder, or a pathogen. In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agentcomprises an antibody, an affimer, an antigen, a small molecule, anucleic acid, a receptor, or an aptamer.

In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent specifically binds to ananalyte present in a particular genus, species or strain ofmicroorganism.

In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent is covalently linked tothe substrate. In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent isnon-covalently linked to the substrate. In some embodiments, theanalyte-binding agent is directly linked to the substrate. In someembodiments, the analyte-binding agent is indirectly linked to thesubstrate. In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent is indirectlylinked to the substrate through a spacer.

In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent comprises an antibodywhich comprises an Fc region, and the analyte-binding agent is directlyor indirectly linked to the substrate through the Fc region.

In some embodiments, the diffraction grating comprises a series ofgrooves comprising adjacent recessed portions and raised portions, andthe analyte-binding agent is linked to the raised portions. In someembodiments, the diffraction grating comprises a series of groovescomprising adjacent recessed portions and raised portions, and theanalyte-binding agent is linked to the recessed portions.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a first chamberconfigured to contain a sample. In some embodiments, the first chamberhas a volume of at most 1000 μL. In some embodiments, the diffractiveoptics sensor is configured to analyze the sample when the sample iscontained in the first chamber.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises an opening and acover, wherein: the cover has a first position and a second position; inthe first position, the cover prevents fluid from entering the firstchamber from an exterior of the device and also prevents fluid fromexiting the first chamber to the exterior of the device; and in thesecond position, the cover allows fluid to enter the first chamber fromthe exterior of the device.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a second chamberconfigured so that the sample can move from the first chamber to thesecond chamber, wherein the second chamber is configured to incubate thesample when the sample is in the second chamber. In some embodiments,the second chamber has a volume of at most 1000 μL. In some embodiments,the diffractive optics sensor is configured to analyze the sample whenthe sample is contained in the second chamber.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises at least one memberselected from the group consisting of a port, a valve and a pump,wherein the at least one member is configured to move the sample whenthe sample is in the device. In some embodiments, the device isconfigured so that the sample movement in the device does notsubstantially disrupt binding of the analyte to the analyte-bindingagent.

In some embodiments, the device is configured so that flow of the samplethrough the incubation chamber is less than 500 μL/min. In someembodiments, the diffractive optics sensor comprises a plurality ofdiffraction gratings, wherein each diffraction grating comprises ananalyte-binding agent capable of binding to a different analyte.

In some embodiments, the device is configured to detect the analyte at alocation within the gastrointestinal (GI) tract of a subject. In someembodiments, the location within the GI tract of the subject comprises amember selected from the group consisting of the mouth, the throat, theesophagus, the stomach, the small intestine, the large intestine, therectum, the anus, the sphincter, the duodenum, the jejunum, the ileum,and the colon.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a system configured todetermine a location of the device within the GI tract of a subject.

In some embodiments, the system comprises at least one member selectedfrom the group consisting of a spectrometer, a capacitance sensor, atemperature sensor, an impedance sensor, a pH sensor, a heart ratesensor, an acoustic sensor, a reflected light sensor, an image sensor,and a movement sensor.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a unit configured to:a) transmit data to a base station; and/or b) receive data from the basestation. In some embodiments, the base station is ex vivo.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a processing unitconfigured to determine a presence and/or an amount of an analyte in asample contained in the device based on a signal generated by thediffractive optics sensor. In some embodiments, the processing unit isconfigured to determine the presence and/or the level of the analyte bycomparing a signal generated by the diffractive optics sensor to one ormore control levels.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises a secondary detectionagent that binds to the analyte and increases a refractive index of acomplex comprising the analyte bound to the analyte-binding agent whenbound to the complex. In some embodiments, the secondary detection agentcomprises a nanoparticle.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device, comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system has first, second and thirdstates; the first state of the multi-stage valve system is differentfrom the second and third states of the multi-stage valve system; thesecond state of the multi-stage valve system is different from the firstand third states of the multi-stage valve system; when the multi-stagevalve system is in its first state, the opening prevents fluidcommunication between the interior of the ingestible device and theexterior of the ingestible device; when the multi-stage valve system isin its second state, the opening allows fluid communication between theinterior of the ingestible device and the exterior of the ingestibledevice; and when the multi-stage valve system is in its third state, theopening prevents fluid communication between the interior of theingestible device and the exterior of the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system comprises: an actuator systemcomprising a first member; a trigger comprising a first peg and a firstlip; a gate comprising a protrusion, and a gate leg having an opening;and a biasing system comprising first and second biasing members; whenthe multi-stage valve system is in a first stage: the first biasingmember applies a force to the trigger so that the first peg contacts thefirst member; the first member opposes the force applied to the triggerby the first biasing member; the second biasing member applies a forceto the gate so that the protrusion contacts the first lip; the first lipopposes the force applied to the gate by the second biasing member; andthe opening in the gate leg is not aligned with the opening in theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device, wherein: the samplingsystem comprises: a first member comprising a first absorptive material;and a second member comprising a second absorptive material differentfrom the first absorptive material; and the sampling system isconfigured so that fluid that flows from the exterior of the ingestibledevice to the interior of the ingestible device enters the firstabsorptive material; and the sampling system is configured to allowfluid to flow from the first absorptive material to the secondabsorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device configured to absorb afluid that enters the interior of the ingestible device via the opening,the sampling system comprising a member which comprises an absorptivematerial and at least one preservative at least partially absorbed inthe absorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing, wherein thesampling chamber contains a member comprising an absorptive material; aninlet port connecting the opening in the housing to the samplingchamber; a single use sealing device positioned within the inlet portthat seals the inlet port; and a heating element proximate to the singleuse sealing device, wherein: the heating element is configured to applyheat to the single use sealing device to unseal the inlet port and openthe sampling chamber, and at least a portion of the absorptive materialproximate to the inlet port is configured to expand when in contact witha sample and reseal the inlet port.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing having an entryport and an exit port on an opposite end of the sampling chamber fromthe entry port, wherein the exit port is configured to allow gas to exitthe chamber and prevent at least a portion of a sample from exiting thechamber; an inlet region connecting the opening in the housing to theentry port of the sampling chamber; and a moveable valve positioned toopen and close the inlet region, wherein: the moveable valve in an openposition allows the sample to enter the sampling chamber; and themoveable valve in a closed position prevents the sample from enteringthe sampling chamber.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to determine a location of the ingestible device in aportion of a GI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to determine that the ingestible device is in thececum of a subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises: one or moreprocessing devices; and one or more machine readable hardware storagedevices storing instructions that are executable by the one or moreprocessing devices to transmit data to a device capable of implementingthe data to determine a location of the medical device in a portion of aGI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises one or more processingdevices; and one or more machine readable hardware storage devicesstoring instructions that are executable by the one or more processingdevices to transmit data to an external device capable of implementingthe data to determine that the ingestible device is in the cecum ofsubject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises first and second lightsources, wherein the first light source is configured to emit light at afirst wavelength, and the second light source is configured to emitlight at a second wavelength different from the first wavelength.

In some embodiments, the device further comprises first and seconddetectors, wherein the first detector is configured to detect light atthe first wavelength, and the second detector is configured to detectlight at the second wavelength.

In one aspect, provided herein is a system, comprising an ingestibledevice described herein; and a processing unit configured to determine apresence and/or a level of an analyte in a sample based on a signalgenerated by the diffractive optics sensor, wherein the processing unitis external to the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to determine thepresence and/or the level of the analyte by comparing a signal generatedby the diffractive optics sensor to one or more control levels. In someembodiments, the processing unit is located ex vivo, and the ingestibledevice comprises a communications unit for transmitting the signal tothe processing unit.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method comprising operating aningestible device within the GI tract of a subject to detect an analyte,wherein the ingestible device is a device described herein.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises: collecting a samplefrom the GI tract of the subject; after collecting the sample, using thediffractive optics sensor to measure a diffraction pattern; and usingthe diffraction pattern to detect a presence and/or a level of theanalyte in the sample. In some embodiments, the method further comprisesmeasuring the diffraction pattern at more than one point in time.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises using a secondarydetection agent to bind to the analyte, thereby increasing a refractiveindex of a complex comprising the analyte bound to the analyte-bindingagent. In some embodiments, the secondary detection agent comprises ananoparticle.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises incubating the sample.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises, before administeringthe device to the subject, determining the location within the GI tractof the subject.

In some embodiments, the method further comprises transmitting data fromthe device to a base station and/or transmitting data from the basestation to the device, wherein the base station is external to thesubject. In some embodiments, the data is representative of a signalgenerated by the diffractive optics biosensor.

In one aspect, provided herein is a method, comprising: using aningestible device to obtain a sample within a GI tract of a subject; andusing diffractive optics to analyze the sample. In some embodiments, theingestible device comprises the diffractive optics. In some embodiments,the sample is analyzed in vivo.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device, comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system has first, second and thirdstates; the first state of the multi-stage valve system is differentfrom the second and third states of the multi-stage valve system; thesecond state of the multi-stage valve system is different from the firstand third states of the multi-stage valve system; when the multi-stagevalve system is in its first state, the opening prevents fluidcommunication between the interior of the ingestible device and theexterior of the ingestible device; when the multi-stage valve system isin its second state, the opening allows fluid communication between theinterior of the ingestible device and the exterior of the ingestibledevice; and when the multi-stage valve system is in its third state, theopening prevents fluid communication between the interior of theingestible device and the exterior of the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and amulti-stage valve system in the interior of the ingestible device,wherein: the multi-stage valve system comprises: an actuator systemcomprising a first member; a trigger comprising a first peg and a firstlip; a gate comprising a protrusion, and a gate leg having an opening;and a biasing system comprising first and second biasing members; whenthe multi-stage valve system is in a first stage: the first biasingmember applies a force to the trigger so that the first peg contacts thefirst member; the first member opposes the force applied to the triggerby the first biasing member; the second biasing member applies a forceto the gate so that the protrusion contacts the first lip; the first lipopposes the force applied to the gate by the second biasing member; andthe opening in the gate leg is not aligned with the opening in theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device, wherein: the samplingsystem comprises: a first member comprising a first absorptive material;and a second member comprising a second absorptive material differentfrom the first absorptive material; and the sampling system isconfigured so that fluid that flows from the exterior of the ingestibledevice to the interior of the ingestible device enters the firstabsorptive material; and the sampling system is configured to allowfluid to flow from the first absorptive material to the secondabsorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device has an opening between aninterior of the ingestible device and an exterior of the ingestibledevice, and the ingestible device comprises: a chamber; and a samplingsystem in the interior of the ingestible device configured to absorb afluid that enters the interior of the ingestible device via the opening,the sampling system comprising a member which comprises an absorptivematerial and at least one preservative at least partially absorbed inthe absorptive material.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,and a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the secondend; a first opening in the wall of the housing; a second opening in thefirst end of the housing, the second opening being orientedsubstantially perpendicular to the first opening; and a curved chamberconnecting the first opening and the second opening, wherein at least aportion of the curved chamber forms a sampling chamber within theingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing, wherein thesampling chamber contains an absorptive material; an inlet portconnecting the opening in the housing to the sampling chamber; a singleuse sealing device positioned within the inlet port that seals the inletport; and a heating element proximate to the single use sealing device,wherein: the heating element is configured to apply heat to the singleuse sealing device to unseal the inlet port and open the samplingchamber, and at least a portion of the absorptive material proximate tothe inlet port is configured to expand when in contact with a sample andreseal the inlet port.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device comprises: a housing definedby a first end, a second end substantially opposite from the first end,a wall extending longitudinally from the first end to the second end,and an opening; a sampling chamber within the housing having an entryport and an exit port on an opposite end of the sampling chamber fromthe entry port, wherein the exit port is configured to allow gas to exitthe chamber and prevent at least a portion of a sample from exiting thechamber; an inlet region connecting the opening in the housing to theentry port of the sampling chamber; and a moveable valve positioned toopen and close the inlet region, wherein: the moveable valve in an openposition allows the sample to enter the sampling chamber; and themoveable valve in a closed position prevents the sample from enteringthe sampling chamber.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to determine a location of the ingestible devicein a portion of a GI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to determine that the ingestible device is inthe cecum of a subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to transmit data to a device capable ofimplementing the data to determine a location of the medical device in aportion of a GI tract of a subject to an accuracy of at least 85%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises: one ormore processing devices; and one or more machine readable hardwarestorage devices storing instructions that are executable by the one ormore processing devices to transmit data to an external device capableof implementing the data to determine that the ingestible device is inthe cecum of subject to an accuracy of at least 70%.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises first andsecond light sources, wherein the first light source is configured toemit light at a first wavelength, and the second light source isconfigured to emit light at a second wavelength different from the firstwavelength.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further comprises first andsecond detectors, wherein the first detector is configured to detectlight at the first wavelength, and the second detector is configured todetect light at the second wavelength.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Exemplary embodiments of the disclosure are provided below withreference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 shows an ingestible device.

FIG. 2 shows an ingestible device.

FIG. 3 shows a valve.

FIGS. 4 and 5 illustrate operation of a valve.

FIG. 6 shows an ingestible device.

FIG. 7 shows valve designs.

FIG. 8 shows a sampling chamber.

FIG. 9 shows a pumping mechanism.

FIG. 10 shows an ingestible device.

FIG. 11 shows an ingestible device.

FIG. 12 illustrates a valve system.

FIGS. 13A and 13B illustrate a portion of a two-stage valve system inits first and second stages, respectively.

FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate a portion of a two-stage valve system inits first and second stages, respectively.

FIGS. 15A and 15B illustrate a portion of a two-stage valve system inits first and second stages, respectively.

FIG. 16 illustrates a more detailed view of an ingestible device.

FIGS. 17A-17C illustrate a portion of a three-stage valve system in itsfirst, second and third stages, respectively.

FIGS. 18A-18C illustrate a portion of a three-stage valve system in itsfirst, second and third stages, respectively.

FIGS. 19A-19C illustrate a portion of a three-stage valve system in itsfirst, second and third stages, respectively.

FIG. 20 illustrates a three-stage valve system in its first stage.

FIG. 21A illustrates a portion of an ingestible device.

FIG. 21B illustrates a portion of an ingestible device.

FIG. 22 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 23 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 24 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 25 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 26 is an exploded view of an ingestible device.

FIG. 27 illustrates a portion of an ingestible device.

FIG. 28 illustrates a portion of an ingestible device.

FIG. 29 illustrates a member forming part of a set of five incubationchambers suitable for an ingestible device.

FIG. 30 illustrates a partial cross-sectional view of optics in aningestible device.

FIG. 31 illustrates components of the optics and flow chamber systems inan ingestible device.

FIG. 32 shows a partial view of an ingestible device

FIGS. 33A, 33B and 33C illustrate operation of ingestible device.

FIG. 34 illustrates an exploded view of the components of ingestibledevice.

FIG. 35 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 36 illustrates aspects of a mechanism for an ingestible device.

FIG. 37 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 38 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 39 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIGS. 40, 41 and 42 illustrate exemplary anchoring mechanisms of aningestible device.

FIG. 43 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 44A illustrates a portion of an ingestible device.

FIG. 44B illustrates a partial sectional view of a burst disc holder.

FIG. 45 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 46 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 47 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 48 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 49 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 50 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 51 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 52 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 53 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 54 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 55 illustrates an ingestible device.

FIG. 56 is a view of an ingestible device.

FIG. 57 is an exploded view of an ingestible device.

FIG. 58 is a diagram of an ingestible device during an example transitthrough a GI tract.

FIG. 59 is a diagram of an ingestible device during an example transitthrough a jejunum.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for determining a locationof an ingestible device as it transits through a GI tract.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting transitionsfrom a stomach to a duodenum and from a duodenum back to a stomach.

FIG. 62 is a plot illustrating data collected during an exampleoperation of an ingestible device.

FIG. 63 is another plot illustrating data collected during an exampleoperation of an ingestible device.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting a transitionfrom a duodenum to a jejunum.

FIG. 65 is a plot illustrating data collected during an exampleoperation of an ingestible device.

FIG. 66 is a plot illustrating muscle contractions detected by aningestible device over time.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting a transitionfrom a jejunum to an ileum.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting a transitionfrom a jejunum to an ileum.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting a transitionfrom an ileum to a cecum.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting a transitionfrom a cecum to a colon.

FIG. 71 illustrates an exemplary system for collecting, communicatingand/or analyzing data about a subject

FIG. 72A shows the use of a Thorlabs FESH0550 shortpass filter forfiltering excitation wavelength.

FIG. 72B shows the use of a Thorlabs FB580-10 bandpass filter forfiltering emission wavelength.

FIG. 72C shows a cross sectional view of an exemplary fluorescent assaytest fixture depicting collimating, focusing, and filtering lenses.

FIG. 73A shows a first proximity assay, where a bacteria-specificantibody to Linker of T cell activation (LTA) or lipopolysaccharide(LPS) is labeled with F2 dye. F1 dye has a hydrophobic chain, whichenables it to incorporate in bacterial membranes. F1 dye becomesfluorescent upon binding to the bacterial membranes. Binding of theanti-LPS or anti-LTA antibody labeled with F2 to the bacterial surfacewould result in close proximity of F1 and F2 dyes, leading to an energytransfer from F1 to F2 (i.e., F1 fluorescence decreases and F2fluorescence increases).

FIG. 73B shows a second proximity assay, where F1 dye is attached to afirst antibody against LTA (or a specific antigen on a bacteria), and F2dye is attached to a second antibody against LTA (or a specific antigenon a bacteria). Binding of both antibodies to the bacterial surface(e.g., to LTA or the specific antigen) would result in close proximityof Fl and F2dyes, leading to an energy transfer from F1 to F2 (i.e., F1fluorescence decreases and F2 fluorescence increases).

FIG. 74 shows a forest plot showing the results of 11 studies thatcompared the results of glucose breath test and endoscopy aspirateculture.

FIG. 75A shows kinetic analysis of Resazurin when added to varyingconcentrations of E. coli ATCC 25922. Four replicates were run in 4different plates on the same day, where FU=relative fluorescence units.

FIG. 75B shows an expanded view of the kinetic analysis of Resazurinwhen added to 10⁴ and 10⁵ CFU/mL of E. coli ATCC 25922.

FIG. 75C shows a sample challenge plate lay out. Each plate represents 1replicate (4 replicates performed).

FIG. 76A shows the wells in the presence or absence of an absorptivesponge.

FIG. 76B shows fluorescence detection plotted over time (120 min to 240min) in the presence of RSS Sponge, which is saturated with a solutioncontaining a dye, and 0.01% Mucin/0.05% Triton.

FIG. 76C shows fluorescence detection plotted over time (120 min to 240min) in the presence of a solution containing a dye and 0.01%Mucin/0.05% Triton (no sponge was present).

FIG. 76D shows fluorescence detection plotted over time (120 min to 240min) in the presence of RSS sponge, which is saturated with a solutioncontaining a dye and 0.01% Mucin/0.1% Triton.

FIG. 76E shows fluorescence detection plotted over time (120 min to 240min) in the presence of a solution containing a dye and 0.01% Mucin/0.1%Triton (no sponge was present).

FIG. 76F shows fluorescence detection plotted over time (120 min to 240min) in the presence of a solution containing a dye and 1% Mucin/0.1%Triton (no sponge was present).

FIG. 76G shows fluorescence detection plotted over time (120 min to 240min) in the presence of RSS sponge, which is saturated with a solutioncontaining a dye and 0.01% Mucin/0.1% Triton.

FIG. 76H summarizes the mean slopes presented in the fluorescencedetection over time in the presence of sponge.

FIG. 76I summarizes the mean slopes presented in the fluorescencedetection over time in the absence of sponge.

FIG. 77A shows the effect of pH on detection of live bacterial cells ina sample. The data demonstrates that the pH variation within the pHrange of 6.5-8 does not impact the ability to accurately discernpositive and negative calls.

FIG. 77B shows the effect of bile on detection of live bacterial cellsin a sample. The use of deoxycholate buffers the effects of bileconcentration. The presence of bile in the tested concentration rangesshowed no impact on the ability to accurately discern positive andnegative calls.

FIG. 77C shows the effect of mucin on detection of live bacterial cellsin a sample. With both E. coli and S. aureus, there was a decrease inmean slope which correlated to an increase in mucin concentration. This,however, did not impact the ability to accurately discern positive andnegative calls. The effect of mucin can be further mitigated usinghigher mucin concentrations in the dye formulation.

FIG. 77D shows the effect of yeast on detection of live bacterial cellsin a sample. Use of amphotericin B buffered the effects of increasedyeast concentration. Yeast at tested concentrations showed no impact onthe ability to accurately discern positive and negative calls.

FIG. 78A shows simulated data demonstrating Failure Mode #1 where aningestible device of this disclosure (e.g., a capsule) samples early inthe stomach. The low pH of the stomach acid (pH 1-4) reduces thebaseline fluorescence (sampled at activation) rapidly (within 5 minutesafter sample acquisition). Capsule reports: ERROR, DX data not valid.

FIG. 78B shows simulated data demonstrating Failure Mode #2 where acapsule samples late in the colon. The high levels of bacteria (>10¹²CFU/mL rapidly convert Resazurin to Resorufin (within 1 minute duringsample acquisition). Rapid auto quenching reduces the signal quicklybelow 3,000 RFU within 5 minutes. Capsule reports: ERROR, DX data notvalid.

FIG. 78C shows simulated data demonstrating early detection of a SIBO+Vecase presenting with >10⁷ CFU/mL. The high levels of bacteria rapidlyconvert Resazurin to Resorufin (within 60 minutes after Sampleacquisition). Rapid auto quenching reduces the signal quickly below20,000 RFU within 240 minutes. Capsule reports: Positive SIBO callwithin 60 minutes.

FIG. 78D shows simulated data demonstrating early detection of a SIBO+Vecase presenting with >10⁵ CFU/mL. The low levels of bacteria slowlyconvert Resazurin to Resorufin (within 240 minutes after Sampleacquisition). Capsule reports: Positive SIBO call with 240 minutes.

FIG. 78E shows simulated data demonstrating early detection of a SIBO+Vecase presenting with ≤10⁴ CFU/mL. The low levels of bacteria slowlyconvert Resazurin to Resorufin (within 240 minutes after Sampleacquisition). Slope <10. Capsule reports: Negative SIBO call with 240minutes;

FIG. 79A shows an exemplary sample challenge plate in triplicate byusing a Sterilin 96 well round bottom microtitre plate (P/N H511A),where the plate was loaded with 100 μL of a diluted dynamic range ofbacteria or failure modes.

FIG. 79B shows fluorescence detection plotted over time in duodenalaspirate spiked with various concentrations of E. coli. The datademonstrated that there is a strong, discernable signal response fromspiked duodenal samples in good agreement with the simulated data.

FIG. 80A shows a simulated performance with jejunal samples, wherePe=(PP+PN)×(PP+NP)/N̂2+(PN+NN)×(NP+NN)/N̂2. A kappa statistic equal tozero indicates that agreement is no better than chance, a kappa of 1.0indicates perfect agreement, 0-0.4 indicates poor agreement, 0.4-0.75indicates fair to good agreement and greater than 0.75 indicatesexcellent agreement (Fleiss 1981).

FIG. 80B shows a simulated performance with Human Duodenal Samples,where Pe=(PP+PN)×(PP+NP)/N̂2+(PN+NN)×(NP+NN)/N̂2. A kappa statistic equalto zero indicates that agreement is no better than chance, a kappa of1.0 indicates perfect agreement, 0-0.4 indicates poor agreement,0.4-0.75 indicates fair to good agreement and greater than 0.75indicates excellent agreement (Fleiss 1981).

FIG. 81A shows results from testing E. coli DH5-Alpha, usingSpectrophotometer 1, Absorbance (600 nm) Y-axis, plotted over actualmean log10 CFU/mL.

FIG. 81B shows the % transmittance over actual mean log10 CFU/mL.

FIG. 82A shows results from testing E. coli ATCC 25922, usingSpectrophotometer 1, Absorbance (600 nm) Y-axis, plotted over actualmean log10 CFU/mL.

FIG. 82B shows the % transmittance over actual mean log10 CFU/mL.

FIG. 83A shows results from testing S. epidermidis ATCC 12228, usingSpectrophotometer 1, Absorbance (600 nm) Y-axis, plotted over actualmean log10 CFU/mL.

FIG. 83B shows the % transmittance over actual mean log10 CFU/mL.

FIGS. 84A and 84B show a graphical representation of OD prediction ofCFU/mL at time=4 hours for E. coli ATCC 25922 (84A) and S. epidermidisATCC 12228 (84B). Bars represent actual mean Log₁₀ CFU/mL recoveredafter a 4 hour incubation at 37° C. The line represents the Mean OD 600measurement for each initial inoculum density. Initial inoculumdensities sampled cover a dynamic range of 10⁴, 10⁵ and 10⁶ CFU/mL.

FIGS. 85A and 85B show a graphical representation of OD (A 600 nm) (85A)and % Transmittance (85B) data over a 5 hour time course assay for E.coli ATCC 25922 using a 50 μL sample volume.

FIGS. 86A and 86B show a graphical representation of OD (A 600 nm) (86A)and % Transmittance (86B) data over a 5 hour time course assay for E.coli ATCC 25922 using a 200 μL sample volume.

FIGS. 87A and 87B show a graphical representation of OD (A 600 nm) (87A)and % Transmittance (87B) data over a 5 hour time course assay for S.epidermidis ATCC 12228 using a 50 μL sample volume.

FIGS. 88A and 88B show a graphical representation of OD (A 600 nm) (88A)and % Transmittance (88B) data over a 5 hour time course assay for S.epidermidis ATCC 12228 using a 200 μL sample volume.

FIG. 89 shows results from a bile acid concentration test with E. coliATCC 25922 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hours over adynamic range of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL sample volume.Growth control (GC) data is also plotted for reference.

FIG. 90 shows results from a mucin concentration test with E. coli ATCC25922 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hours over a dynamicrange of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL sample volume. Growthcontrol (GC) data is also plotted for reference.

FIG. 91 shows results from a pH range test with E. coli ATCC 25922Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hours over a dynamic range ofinitial inoculum densities in a 50 μL sample volume. Growth control (GC)data is also plotted for reference.

FIG. 92 shows results from a fungal interference test with E. coli ATCC25922 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hours over a dynamicrange of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL Sample volume. Growthcontrol (GC) data is also plotted for reference. A=amphotericin B.

FIG. 93 shows results from a bile acid concentration test with S.epidermidis ATCC 12228 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hoursover a dynamic range of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL samplevolume. Growth Control (GC) data is also plotted for reference.

FIG. 94 shows results from a mucin concentration test with S.epidermidis ATCC 12228 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hoursover a dynamic range of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL samplevolume. Growth Control (GC) data is also plotted for reference.

FIG. 95 shows results from a pH range test with S. epidermidis ATCC12228 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hours over a dynamicrange of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL sample volume. GrowthControl (GC) data is also plotted for reference.

FIG. 96 shows results from a fungal interference test with S.epidermidis ATCC 12228 Optical Density (A 600 nm) plotted at t=4 hoursover a dynamic range of initial inoculum densities in a 50 μL samplevolume. Growth Control (GC) data is also plotted for reference.A=amphotericin B.

FIG. 97 shows the results from dynamic range testing of a miniature ODreader (SCDBS OD) compared to a lab spectrometer (Lab Spec) usingCoomassie R-250. Primary vertical axis is % Transmittance (Lab Spec);Secondary vertical axis is voltage (SCDBS OD output). Comparative dataoutputs plotted against the dye concentration range (% dye in 0.9%Saline).

FIG. 98 shows the results from dynamic range testing of a miniature ODreader (SCDBS OD) compared to a lab spectrometer (Lab Spec) usingbacterial samples of E. coli ATCC 25922. Primary vertical axis is %Transmittance (Lab Spec); Secondary vertical axis is voltage (SCDBS ODoutput). Comparative data outputs plotted against the bacterialconcentration range (CFU/mL in 0.9% Saline).

FIG. 99 shows the visual appearance of a plate incubated for 16 hourswith serial dilutions of a 5 μl sample of bacterial culture of S. aureusATCC 29213 having initial bacterial concentrations from 0 (control) to10⁸ CFU/ml. Wells without bacterial growth have a clear appearance andare clearly distinguished from wells with bacterial growth that have acloudy appearance.

FIG. 100 shows results for detection of TNFα with varying concentrationsof Acceptor and Donor Beads. This test matrix was composed of varyingconcentrations of both Donor and Acceptor Beads with a constantconcentration of Biotinylated Antibody. Each varying bead concentrationwas tested against three different TNFα concentrations and comparedagainst a control. Retest of this matrix narrowed down which combinationof Donor/Acceptor Beads resulted in the best assay data.

FIG. 101 shows results for detection of TNFα with varying concentrationsof Acceptor and Donor Beads. This test matrix was composed of varyingconcentrations of both Donor and Acceptor Beads being tested in a 5:1and 10:1 ratio, with a constant concentration of Biotinylated Antibody.Each varying concentration was tested against three different TNFαconcentrations and compared against a control. Retest of this matrixnarrowed down which ratio of Donor: Acceptor beads resulted in the bestassay data.

FIG. 102 shows results for detection of TNFα with varying concentrationsof biotinylated antibody. This matrix tested an integrated test method(no intermediate incubations) against various concentrations of Donor:Acceptor Beads. Each varying concentration was tested against threedifferent concentrations of TNFα and compared against a control. Thedonor and acceptor beads concentration may be varied, e.g., the donorbead concentration is 10 and 5 ugs/ml and the acceptor beadconcentration is 1 and 2 ugs/ml, respectively.

FIG. 103A shows the upper range of TNFα concentrations with varyingcyclodextrin addition. Hydroxy propyl cyclodextrin is used to overcomesample interference, especially bile acid interferences; bile acids bindto hydroxy propyl cyclodextrin.

FIG. 103B shows the lower range of TNFα concentrations with varyingcyclodextrin concentrations.

FIG. 104 shows samples of absorptive sponge material (M13: Ahlstrom(6613H)) and (O3: Whatman (Grade F/F) (29009411) cut to fit the 96 wellmicrotitire plate configuration using a whole punch and trimmed withsterile scissors.

FIG. 105 shows results for detection of TNFα in samples on an absorptivesample pad. This test matrix consisted of running the optimized beadconcentration on a sponge, with an n=3. The limit of detection for thisassay is shown to be around 10 pg/ml for O3 and 100 pgs/ml for M3. Insetgraph showing higher ranges of TNFα concentrations.

FIG. 106A shows the results of repeat TNFα detection in the same assaymixture over time. TNFα was added to the well containing the assaymixture after 15 minute incubations.

FIG. 106B shows the results of repeat TNFα detection in the same assaymixture over time. The test matrices consisted of exemplary beadconcentrations (2 μL Acceptor Beads, 2.5 μL Biotinylated Antibody and 10μL Donor Beads) tested in wells, with continuous reads on a lowerinstrument setting. Every 15 minutes, 5 μL of TNFα was added to thewell, and the test well was re-read.

FIG. 107A shows results for TNFα detection and quantification onabsorptive sample pads, where the assay was prepared with 50 mg ofcyclodextrin.

FIG. 107B shows results for TNFα detection and quantification onabsorptive sample pads, where the assay was prepared with 25 mg ofcyclodextrin.

FIG. 108 shows assay signal readouts over the tested dilution range ofOMNI beads. The OMNI beads 5 μg/mL stock solution was added into PEBuffer to make a 0.5 μg/mL solution, which was subsequently seriallydiluted down 1:10 from Row A to Row G, and read on the plate reader at680/615 nm. The OMNI beads are used to calibrate the capsule and tocharacterize signal uniformity and reliability of the capsule. The OMNIbeads may be loaded with Napthalo-silicon pthalocyanine (Excitation: 780nm and emission 615 nm).

FIG. 109A shows results of preliminary antibody specificityinvestigation. Specificity of antibodies Ab11, Ab12 and Ab2 were testedusing the antibody screening protocol. The assay was performed in 50 μLvolume. Graph bars represent mean and standard deviation (SD) fromtriplicates determination.

FIG. 109B shows results for antibody screening of Gram negativebacteria. Specificity of the anti-Gram-negative antibodies Ab11 andAb12, and of the anti-Gram-positive antibody Ab2 using the antibodyscreening protocol. Two separate batches of bacteria were used for eachcondition, as indicated (N=new batch; 0=old batch). The assay wasperformed in 50 μL. Graph bars represent mean and SD from triplicatesdetermination.

FIG. 109C shows results for antibody screening of Gram positivebacteria. The assay was performed in 25 μL volume using the AlphaLISAbuffer. Two lots of biotin-Ab were tested for ab#2 and 4 and only onelot for ab#6. Biotin-Ab and high concentration acceptor-Ab beads weretested at 1 nM and 10 μg/mL, respectively. The Streptavidin-Donor(SA-Donor) beads were used at 20 μg/mL.

FIG. 109D shows results for the detection of a dynamic range of S.aureus. High conjugation (HC) acceptor beads or normal acceptor beads(AB10) were used at 40 μg/mL final and the Biotin-Ab at 0.3 nM final forS. aureus (Ab2, Ab6) using different dilutions of bacteria. The SA-Donorbeads were used at 10 μg/mL. Bacteria were washed twice in PBS beforefinal resuspension in Buffer B. Assay protocol is given below each graphalong with signal-to-background ratio (S/B) obtained for each dilutionof bacteria tested (no bacteria condition as background). Graph barsrepresent mean and SD from triplicate determination.

FIG. 109E shows detection of a dynamic range of E. coli. Highconjugation (HC) acceptor beads or normal acceptor beads (AB10) wereused at 40 μg/mL final and the Biotin-Ab at 3 nM final for E. coli(Ab10) using different dilutions of bacteria. The SA-Donor beads wereused at 10 μg/mL. Bacteria were washed twice in PBS before finalresuspension in Buffer B. Assay protocol is given below each graph alongwith S/B obtained for each dilution of bacteria tested (no bacteriacondition as background). Graph bars represent mean and SD fromtriplicate determination.

FIG. 109F shows interference of simulated intestinal fluid and bile.FASSIF-V2, a complex of taurocholate and lecithin, which is used as anexample substitute for gas trointestinal fluids, and Oxgall, which canbe usually obtained from cows, and is mixed with alcohol, were testedusing TruHits, whereTruHits assay principle and protocols were used. TheOxgall is a greenish-brown liquid mixture containing cholesterol,lecithin, taurocholic acid, and glycocholic acid, which is used as anexample subsititute for GI fluids.

FIG. 109G shows interference of simulated intestinal fluid and bile.FASSIF-V2 and Oxgall were tested using TruHits, where increasingconcentrations (percentages) of FASSIF-V2 and Oxgall were tested usingthe standard protocol shown in Panel A, e.g., St-Av Donar beads andbiotin labeled acceptor beads.

FIG. 109H shows results of LBP-based assays using fresh bacteria. Afixed dilution of S. aureus and E. coli (washed twice in PBS beforefinal resuspension in Buffer B) was tested in with increasingconcentrations of tagged LBP. The detection involved an equimolar mix ofHis-LBP and Bio-LBP.

FIG. 109I shows results of LBP-based assays using fresh bacteria. Afixed dilution of S. aureus and E. coli (washed twice in PBS beforefinal resuspension in Buffer B) was tested with increasingconcentrations of tagged LBP. The assay involved His-LBP only.

FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of an exemplary diffraction grating.

FIG. 111 depicts exemplary diffraction signals at different steps in aprocess.

FIG. 112 shows diffraction intensity data and bead distribution data.

FIG. 113 shows diffraction intensity data and bead distribution data.

FIG. 114 shows bead distribution data.

FIG. 115 shows data relating to incubation flow rate and binding signal.

FIG. 116 shows data relating to binding.

FIG. 117 shows data relating to binding signal for incubation withoutflow.

FIG. 118 shows binding signal data.

FIG. 119 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 120 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 121 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 122 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 123 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 124 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 125 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 126 shows diffraction intensity data.

FIG. 127 shows gold nanoparticle amplification-related data.

FIG. 128 shows exemplary data for the impact of grating design ondiffraction efficiency.

FIG. 129 shows exemplary data for the impact of angle of incidence ondiffraction efficiency.

FIG. 130 is a bar graph showing the calculated regression slopes fortotal bacterial count determinations using a resazurin-based assay withsamples comprising either anaerobically enriched fecal or duodenalaspirate clinical samples plated at a dynamic dilution range using aliquid format (10⁴-10⁶ CFU/mL dynamic range) or in pad format (1×10⁶CFU/mL.) The assay was read after 330 minutes or 22 hours. RFU: relativefluorescence units; Control: samples diluted in PBS.

FIGS. 131A and 131B show the quantitation of anaerobic bacterial strainsusing a resazurin-based assay in liquid format. S/D=standard deviation;Mean max signal shown as relative fluorescence units (RFU); diagonalfrom upper right to lower left=<6 CFU; diagonal from upper left to lowerright=<5 CFU; cross-hatch=regression slope >3 standard deviations ofblank control (3.10+(3×0.438))=4.41); 1:10=dilution of exponential phaseculture in cell above in SJFA.

FIG. 132A shows the quantitation of anaerobic bacterial strains using aresazurin-based assay in liquid format performed under microaerophilicconditions and read over 330 minutes. Mean max signal shown as relativefluorescence units (RFU); diagonal from upper left to lowerright=regression slope >20; diagonal from upper right to lowerleft=regression slope <10; F 1:100 O/N=overnight control read; CONT=PBScontrol.

FIG. 132B shows the quantitation of anaerobic bacterial strains using aresazurin-based assay in liquid format performed under microaerophilicconditions and read over 20 hours. Mean max signal shown as relativefluorescence units (RFU); diagonal from upper left to lowerright=regression slope >20; diagonal from upper right to lowerleft=regression slope <10; F 1:100 O/N=overnight control read; CONT=PBScontrol.

FIG. 132C shows the quantitation of anaerobic bacterial strains using aresazurin-based assay in liquid format performed under strict aerobicconditions and read over 24 hours. Mean max signal shown as relativefluorescence units (RFU); diagonal from upper left to lowerright=regression slope >20; diagonal from upper right to lowerleft=regression slope <10; F 1:100 O/N=overnight control read; CONT=PBScontrol.

FIGS. 133A-133H are regression plots showing the relation between thenumber of bacterial colony forming units (CFU)/mL and the time to reachmaximum signal detection in resazurin-based assays using samplescomprising the aerobic bacteria Escherichia coli (FIG. 133A),Staphylococcus aureus (FIG. 133B), Klebsiella pneumoniae (FIG. 133C),Pseudomonas aeruginosa (FIG. 133D), Enterobacter aerogenes (FIG. 133E),Streptococcus mutans (FIG. 133F), Enterococcus faecalis (FIG. 133G), andProteus mirabilis (FIG. 133H). Charted data are mean (n=3) regressionslopes to maximum signal detection.

FIG. 134A is a bar graph showing the calculated regression slopes fortotal bacterial count determinations using a resazurin-based assay withsamples comprising a dynamic dilution range of Escherichia coli,Staphylococcus aureus, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, ornegative control (“CTRL”). Charted data are mean (n=3) regression slopesto maximum signal detection.

FIG. 134B is a bar graph showing the calculated regression slopes fortotal bacterial count determinations using a resazurin-based assay withsamples comprising a dynamic dilution range of Enterobacter aerogenes,Streptococcus mutans, Enterococcus faecalis, Proteus mirabilis ornegative control (“CTRL”).

FIGS. 135A-135D are line graphs showing the relative fluorescent units(RFU) as a function of time for resazurin-based assay with samplescomprising a dynamic dilution range of Escherichia coli, Staphylococcusaureus, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, or negativecontrol (“CTRL”). FIG. 135A corresponds to 10³ CFU/mL; FIG. 135Bcorresponds to 10⁴ CFU/mL; FIG. 135C corresponds to 10⁵ CFU/mL; and FIG.135D corresponds to 10⁶ CFU/mL.

FIGS. 136A-136D are line graphs showing the relative fluorescent units(RFU) as a function of time for resazurin-based assay with samplescomprising a dynamic dilution range of Enterobacter aerogenes,Streptococcus mutans, Enterococcus faecalis, Proteus mirabilis, ornegative control (“CTRL”). FIG. 136A corresponds to 10³ CFU/mL; FIG.136B corresponds to 10⁴ CFU/mL; FIG. 136C corresponds to 10⁵ CFU/mL; andFIG. 136D corresponds to 10⁶ CFU/mL.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS

Various apparatuses, systems, devices, components and/or processes willbe described below to provide illustrative and non-limiting examples. Noembodiment described below limits the subject matter covered by anyclaim, and any claim may cover processes or apparatuses that differ fromthose described below. As an example, the subject matter covered by theclaims is not limited to apparatuses, systems, devices, componentsand/or processes having all of the features of any one apparatus,system, device, component and/or process described below or to featurescommon to multiple or all of the apparatuses or processes describedbelow. It is possible that a given apparatus, system, device, componentand/or or process described below is not covered by a given claim. Anyembodiment disclosed herein that is not covered by one or more claims inthis document may be coveed by one or more claims in one or more otherprotective instruments, such as, for example, one or more continuingpatent applications and/or one or more divisional patent applications.The Applicants, inventors and/or owners do not necessarily intend toabandon, disclaim or dedicate to the public any subject matter disclosedherein but not covered by a claim herein.

Furthermore, it will be appreciated that for simplicity and clarity ofillustration, where considered appropriate, reference numerals may berepeated among the figures to indicate corresponding or analogouselements. In addition, numerous specific details are set forth in orderto provide a thorough understanding of the embodiments described herein.However, it is to be understood that the embodiments described hereinmay be practiced without these specific details. In other instances,well-known methods, procedures and components may have not beendescribed in detail so as not to obscure the embodiments describedherein. Also, the description is not to be considered as limiting thescope of the embodiments described herein.

Definitions

Unless otherwise defined herein, scientific and technical terms used inthis disclosure shall have the meanings that are commonly understood bythose of ordinary skill in the art. Generally, nomenclature used inconnection with, and techniques of, chemistry, cell and tissue culture,molecular biology, cell and cancer biology, neurobiology,neurochemistry, virology, immunology, microbiology, pharmacology,genetics and protein and nucleic acid chemistry, described herein, arethose well-known and commonly used in the art.

The methods and techniques of the present disclosure are generallyperformed, unless otherwise indicated, according to conventional methodswell known in the art and as described in various general and morespecific references that are cited and discussed throughout thisspecification.

Chemistry terms used herein are used according to conventional usage inthe art, as exemplified by “The McGraw-Hill Dictionary of ChemicalTerms,” Parker S., Ed., McGraw-Hill, San Francisco, Calif. (1985).

All of the publications, patents and published patent disclosuresreferred to in this disclosure are specifically incorporated byreference herein. In case of conflict, the present specification,including its specific definitions, will control.

The term “reproductive tract” as used herein refers to all portions ofan organ system responsible for sexual reproduction in a woman,including but not limited to, the ovaries, Fallopian tube, uterus,cervix and vagina.

A “patient,” “subject,” or “individual” are used interchangeably andrefer to either a human or a non-human animal. These terms includemammals, such as humans, primates, livestock animals (including bovine,porcine, etc.), companion animals (e.g., canine, feline, etc.) androdents (e.g., mice and rats). The term “animal” refers to humans (maleor female), companion animals (e.g., dogs, cats and horses), food-sourceanimals, zoo animals, marine animals, birds and other similar animalspecies. “Edible animals” refers to food-source animals such as cows,pigs, sheep and poultry.

The terms “treating,” “treat,” or “treatment” embrace both preventative,i.e., prophylactic, and palliative treatment. In some embodiments, themethods described herein include the use of an ingestible device fordetecting a GI disorder in a subject who has or is at risk of developinga GI disorder. In some embodiments, the subject has been previouslyidentified as having a GI disorder. Some embodiments of any of themethods provided herein further include, prior to the providing aningestible device step, determining that the subject has a GI disorder.Some embodiments of any of the methods can further include identifyingor diagnosing a subject as having a GI disorder.

“Eukaryotic” as recited herein relates to any type of eukaryoticorganism excluding fungi, such as animals, in particular animalscontaining blood, and includes invertebrate animals such as crustaceansand vertebrates. Vertebrates include both cold-blooded (fish, reptiles,amphibians) and warm blooded animal (birds and mammals). Mammals includein particular primates and more particularly humans.

“Selective lysis” as used in the present disclosure is obtained in asample when a certain type of cell (e.g., a bacterial cell (e.g., aGram-positive or a Gram-negative bacterial cell) or a eukaryotic cell)is preferentially lysed over a different type of cell in the sample(e.g., eukaryotic cell or a bacterial cell). In some embodiments cellsof a particular genera, species or strain are preferentially lysed overcells of a different genera, species or strain. In some embodiments, thepercentage of cells of a first genera, species, or strain in the samplethat remain intact is significantly higher (e.g. 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100,250, 500, or 1,000 times more) than the percentage of cells of a secondgenera, species, or strain in the sample that remain intact, upontreatment of or contact with a composition or device as describedherein. In some embodiments, the percentage of the bacterial cell in thesample is significantly lower (e.g., 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 250, 500, or1,000 times less) than the percentage of the eukaryotic cells in thesample that remain intact, upon treatment of or contact with acomposition or device described herein. In some embodiments, thepercentage of bacterial cells in the sample that remain intact issignificantly higher (e.g. 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1,000times more) than the percentage of the eukaryotic cells in the samplethat remain intact, upon treatment of or contact with a composition ordevice as described herein. In some embodiments, the percentage ofGram-positive bacterial cell in the sample that remain intact issignificantly higher (e.g. 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1,000times more) than the percentage of the Gram-negative bacterial cells inthe sample that remain intact, upon treatment of or contact with acomposition or device as described herein. In some embodiments, thepercentage of Gram-negative bacterial cell in the sample that remainintact is significantly higher (e.g. 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 250, 500, or1,000 times more) than the percentage of the Gram-positive bacterialcells in the sample that remain intact, upon treatment of or contactwith a composition or device as described herein.

A “sample” as used in the present disclosure may be a biological sampleor an environmental sample. Such samples may be obtained from anyorganism or environmental site desired. For example, the compositions,methods and devices of this disclosure may be used for detecting andquantifying bacterial cells in a sample obtained from, withoutlimitation, soil, rock, plants, animals, cell or tissue culture,biofilms, organic debris, or water. In some embodiments, samples areobtained from mammals such as humans. In some embodiments, samples areobtained from a human's GI tract. In some embodiments, samples are bodyfluid samples including, but not limited to urine, blood, plasma, serum,saliva, semen, stool, sputum, cerebral spinal fluid, tears, mucus, andthe like. In some embodiments, a single device collects multiplesamples, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 100 or moresamples. In some embodiments, the sample is between 1-2000 μL (e.g.,1-1500 μL, 1-1900 μL, 1-1000 μL, 1-500 ul, 1-250 ul, 1-100 μl, 1-50 μl,1-10 μl, and 1-5 μl).

A “colony-forming unit” or “CFU” refers to a unit used to estimate thenumber of viable bacteria or fungal cells in a sample. Viable is definedby the cell's ability to divide and form a population (or colony). Insome embodiments, the viable bacterial cells in a sample may be derivedfrom bacteria selected from the group consisting of: Escherichia coli(or E. coli), Bacillus anthraces, Bacillus cereus, Bacteroides vulgatus,Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium butyricum, Yersinia pestis, Yersiniaenterocolitica, Francisella tularensis, Brucella species, Clostridiumperfringens, Clostridium sporogenes, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Enterobacteraerogenes, Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei,Staphylococcus species, Staphylococcus aureus, Mycobacterium species,Enterococcus faecalis, Group A Streptococcus, Group B Streptococcus,Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus mutans, Proteus mirabilis,Helicobacter pylori, Francisella tularensis, Salmonella enteritidis,Mycoplasma hominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasma salivarium, Mycoplasmafermentans, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacteriumtuberculosis, Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacterium leprae, Rickettsiarickettsia, Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii, Rickettsia canada,Bacillus subtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillus thuringiensis andCoxiella burnetti.

As used herein, the term “coupled” indicates that two elements can bedirectly coupled to one another or coupled to one another through one ormore intermediate elements.

The term “saturate” means to permeate or be permeated with a liquid. Insome embodiments, an absorptive sponge of the present disclosure may befully saturated with an amount of a liquid such that no more liquid canbe held. In some embodiments, an absorptive sponge of the presentdisclosure may be partially saturated with a liquid at an amount that isless than the maximum amount of the liquid that can be held by thesponge. For instance, in some embodiments, a sponge is half-saturatedwith a liquid at half of the maximum amount of the liquid that can beheld by the sponge.

The term “semi-solid” means a material that is neither solid (elasticbehavior) nor liquid (viscous behavior) and possesses thecharacteristics of both viscosity and elasticity. Examples of semi-solidmaterials include gels, ointments, creams, and highly viscous liquids.

As used herein “culturing” refers to maintaining cells in an environmentthat allows a population of one or more cells to increase in numberthrough cell division. For example, in some embodiments “culturing” mayinclude combining the cells with media in a dilution chamber at atemperature that permits cell growth, optionally a temperature found invivo within the GI tract or reproductive tract of a subject. In someembodiments, the cells are cultured at a temperature between about 35°C. and 42° C. In some embodiments, the cells are cultured at atemperature of about 37° C.

As used herein “dilution fluid” refers to a fluid within the device fordiluting a fluid sample from the GI tract or reproductive tract. In someembodiments, the dilution fluid is an aqueous solution. In someembodiments, the dilution fluid includes one or more agents that promoteor inhibit the growth of an organism, such as a fungus or bacteria. Insome embodiments, the dilution fluid includes one or more agents thatfacilitate the detection of an analyte, such as dyes or binding agentsfor analytes.

In some embodiments, a dilution fluid is a sterile media. As usedherein, “sterile media” refers to media that does not contain any viablebacteria or other cells that would grow and increase in number throughcell division. Media may be rendered sterile by various techniques knownin the art such as, but not limited to, autoclaving and/or preparing themedia using asceptic techniques. In some embodiments, the media is aliquid media. Examples of media suitable for culturing bacteria includenutrient broth, Lysogeny Broth (LB) (also known as Luria Broth), Wilkinschalgren, and Tryptic Soy Broth (TSB). Other growth or culture mediaknown in the art may also be used in the methods and devices describedherein. In some embodiments, the media has a carbon source, such asglucose or glycerol, a nitrogen source such as ammonium salts ornitrates or amino acids, as well as salts and/or trace elements andvitamins for microbial growth. In some embodiments, the media issuitable for maintaining eukaryotic cells. In some embodiments, themedia includes one or more agents that promote or inhibit the growth ofbacteria, optionally agents that promote or inhibit the growth ofspecific types of bacteria.

In some embodiments, the media is a selective media. As used herein,“selective media” refers to a media that allows certain types of cellsto grow and inhibits the growth of other organisms. Accordingly, thegrowth of cells in a selective media indicates the presence of certaintypes of cells within the cultured sample. For example, in someembodiments the media is selective for Gram-positive or Gram-negativebacteria. In some embodiments, the media contains crystal violet andbile salts (such as found in MacConkey agar) that inhibit the growth ofGram-positive organisms and allows for the selection and isolation ofGram-negative bacteria. In another embodiment, the media contains a highconcentration of salt (e.g., NaCl) (such as found in Mannitol salt agar)and is selective for Gram-positive bacteria. In some embodiments, themedia selectively kills eukaryotic cells or only grows prokaryoticcells. In another embodiment, the media selectively kills prokaryoticcells (or alternatively only grows eukaryotic cells), for example, usinga media that includes antibiotics.

In some embodiments, the media is an indicator media. As used herein,“indicator media” refers to a media that contains specific nutrients orindicators (such as, but not limited to neutral red, phenol red, eosiny, or methylene blue) that produce a detectable signal when a certaintype of cells are cultured in the indicator media.

As used herein, “detecting bacteria” refers to determining the presenceor absence of bacteriawithin a sample or estimating the concentration ofbacteria within a sample. For example, in some embodiments, bacterialgrowth can be determined based on the concentration of bacteria within asample. In some embodiments, the detection system detects and/orquantitates a particular bacterial genus, species or strain within asample. In some embodiments, the detection system detects the productsof bacterial growth within the cultured and/or diluted sample or achange in concentration of certain components within the media due tobacterial growth. In some embodiments, products of bacterial growthinclude analytes produced and/or secreted by the bacteria that arepresent in the media, including, but not limited to, bacterial toxins,exosomes, secreted proteins, and metabolites.

A “photosensitizer” as used herein refers to a sensitizer for generationof singlet oxygen usually by excitation with light. Exemplaryphotosensitizers suitable for use in the present application includethose described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,251,581, 5,516,636, 8,907,081,6,545,012, 6,331,530, 8,247,180, 5,763,602, 5,705,622, 5,516,636,7,217,531, and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2007/0059316, all of whichare herein expressly incorporated by reference in their entireties. Thephotosensitizer can be photoactivatable (e.g., dyes and aromaticcompounds) or chemiactivated (e.g., enzymes and metal salts). Whenexcited by light, the photosensitizer is usually a compound included ofcovalently bonded atoms, usually with multiple conjugated double ortriple bonds. The compound should absorb light in the wavelength rangeof 200-1100 nm, usually 300-1000 nm, e.g., 450-950 nm, with anextinction coefficient at its absorbance maximum greater than 500 M⁻¹cm⁻¹, e.g., at least 5000 M⁻¹ cm⁻¹, or at least 50,000 M⁻¹ cm⁻¹ at theexcitation wavelength. The lifetime of an excited state producedfollowing absorption of light in the absence of oxygen will usually beat least 100 nsec, e.g., at least 1 μsec. In general, the lifetime isdesirably sufficiently long to permit energy transfer to oxygen, whichwill normally be present at concentrations in the range of 10⁻⁵ to10⁻¹³M depending on the medium. The sensitizer excited state willusually have a different spin quantum number (S) than its ground stateand will usually be a triplet (S=1) when, as is usually the case, theground state is a singlet (S═O). In some embodiments, the sensitizerwill have a high intersystem crossing yield. That is, photoexcitation ofa sensitizer will produce the long lived state (usually triplet) with anefficiency of at least 10%, at least 40%, e.g., greater than 80%. Thephotosensitizer will usually be at most weakly fluorescent under theassay conditions (quantum yield usually less that 0.5, or less that0.1).

GI Tract

As used herein, the term “gastrointestinal tract” or “GI tract” refersto all portions of an organ system responsible for consuming anddigesting foodstuffs, absorbing nutrients, and expelling waste. Thisincludes orifices and organs such as the mouth, throat, esophagus,stomach, small intestine, large intestine, rectum, anus, and the like,as well as the various passageways and sphincters connecting theaforementioned parts. The device may be used to detect, analyze and/orquantify an analyte, e.g., bacterial cells, in a sample from the GItract (e.g., in one or more of the mouth, throat, esophagus, stomach,small intestine, large intestine, rectum, anus, sphincter, duodenum,jejunum, ileum, ascending colon, transverse colon, and descending colon)of a subject. The device may also be used to detect or quantifybacterial cells from outside the GI tract, including the femalereproductive tract. In some embodiments, the samples from the subjectare environmental samples that do not contain eukaryotic cells.

The GI tract is a large organ that extends from the buccal cavity to theanus. The primary function of the GI tract is to digest food, absorbnutrients and eliminated any waste. The GI tract is composed of theesophagus, the stomach, and the intestines. The different segments ofthe GI tract are generally associated with different characteristics.Chewed food flows through the esophagus, and into the stomach where itis temporarily stored and mixed with gastric acid. Involuntary musclecontractions, termed peristalsis, push the food out of the stomach andinto the small intestine. The small intestine can be divided into theduodenum, the jejunum and the ileum. The majority of food digestion andabsorption occurs in the ileum. Waste and unwanted products are passedinto the colon, or large intestine. Typically, food resides for 10 to 14seconds in the esophagus, and travels within the small intestine for 2to 4 hours. Half of the contents of the stomach is emptied within 60 to90 minutes (Khutoryanskiy (2015) Nature Materials 14: 963-964). Whilefood enters the esophagus at approximately pH 7.0, foods are acidifiedwithin the stomach (pH 1-5). The pH in the proximal small intestine isbetween 6.8 and 7.88; between 5.26 and 6.72 in the distal smallintestine, between 5.26-6.72 in the ascending colon, and between 5.20and 7.02 in the descending colon (Khutoryanskiy (2015) Nature Materials14: 963-964).

Over 1000 different microbial species have been identified that can livein the human GI tract, e.g., Actinobacteria, Bifidobacterium spp.,Coriobacteriales, Eggerthella, Slackia spp., Actinomycetales,Bacteroidetes, Firmicutes, Gemella, Clostridia, Lachnospiraceae,Negativicutes, Fusobacteria, and fungi (e.g., Eukarya). See, e.g.,Rajilic-Stojanovic and de Vos (2014) FEMS Microbiol. Rev. 38(5):996-1047; and Carroll et al. (2015) Mamm. Genome 20(7): 395-403. Whereasthe small intestine contains very few bacteria, the colon comprisesbetween 10¹³ and 10¹⁴ commensal bacteria (Johansson et al. (2013) Nat.Rev. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 10(6): 352-361).

The intestinal fluid can contain a variety of digestive enzymes (e.g.,pepsin, lipase, amylase, enterokinase, sucrose, maltase, lactase,secretin, motilin). See, e.g., Ulleberg et al. (2011) Food Dig. 2(1-3):52-61.

Diseases or Disorders

The detection and/or analysis of an analyte described herein may be usedto determine whether the subject has or is at risk of developing adisease or disorder (e.g., a GI disorder). These diseases and disordersare not limited to diseases and disoders present in the GI tract of thesubject, and can include diseases or disoders at sites other than the GItract of the subject. For example, in some embodiments, analytes presentin the GI tract may be indicative of a systemic disease or disorder. Insome embodiments, the analytes are associated with a systemic disease ordisorder. In some embodiments, analytes present in the GI tract may beindicative of a disease or disorder described herein, including, but notlimited to an infectious disease, IBD, Crohn's disease, and cancer.

In some embodiments of any of the methods described herein, the subjecthas a GI disorder. In some embodiments, the analytes disclosed hereinmay be indicative of a GI disorder in a subject. Examples of such GIdisorders include inflammatory bowel disease (IBD), Crohn's disease(e.g., active Crohn's disease, refractory Crohn's disease, orfistulizing Crohn's disease), ulcerative colitis, indeterminate colitis,infectious colitis, microscopic colitis, drug or chemical-inducedcolitis, diverticulitis, ischemic colitis, pseudomembranous colitis,hemorrhagic colitis, hemolytic-uremic syndrome colitis, collagenouscolitis, colitis associated with disorders of innate immunity as inleukocyte adhesion deficiency-1, diversion colitis, gastritis, pepticulcers, stress ulcers, bleeding ulcers, gastric hyperacidity, dyspepsia,gastroparesis, Zollinger-Ellison syndrome, gastroesophageal refluxdisease, short-bowel (anastomosis) syndrome, mucositis (e.g., oralmucositis, gastrointestinal mucositis, nasal mucositis and proctitis),necrotizing enterocolitis, esophagitis, a hypersecretory stateassociated with systemic mastocytosis, basophilic leukemia,hyperhistaminemia, Celiac disease (e.g., nontropical Sprue), enteropathyassociated with seronegative arthropathies, eosinophilicgastroenteritis, colitis associated with radiotherapy or chemotherapy(such as checkpoint inhibitor chemotherapy), colitis associated withdisorders of innate immunity such as leukocyte adhesion deficiency-1,gastritis, chronic granulomatous disease, food allergies, infectiousgastritis or enterocolitis (e.g., Helicobacter pylori-infected chronicactive gastritis), other forms of gastrointestinal inflammation causedby an infectious agent, irritable colon syndrome, small intestinalbacterial overgrowth (SIBO) and pouchitis.

“Inflammatory Bowel Disease” or “IBD” is a chronic inflammatoryautoimmune condition of the GI tract. Although the cause of IBD remainsunknown, several factors such as genetic, infectious and immunologicsusceptibility have been implicated. IBD is much more common inCaucasians, especially those of Jewish descent.

A chronic inflammatory autoimmune condition of the GI tract presentsclinically as either ulcerative colitis (UC) or Crohn's disease (CD).Both IBD conditions are associated with an increased risk for malignancyof the GI tract. “Crohn's disease” (“CD”) is a chronic transmuralinflammatory disease with the potential to affect any part of the entireGI tract, and UC is a mucosal inflammation of the colon. Both conditionsare characterized clinically by frequent bowel motions, malnutrition,and dehydration, with disruption in the activities of daily living. CDis frequently complicated by the development of malabsorption,strictures, and fistulae and may require repeated surgery. UC, lessfrequently, may be complicated by severe bloody diarrhea and toxicmegacolon, also requiring surgery. The most prominent feature of Crohn'sdisease is the granular, reddish-purple edematous thickening of thebowel wall. With the development of inflammation, these granulomas oftenlose their circumscribed borders and integrate with the surroundingtissue. Diarrhea and obstruction of the bowel are the predominantclinical features. As with ulcerative colitis, the course of Crohn'sdisease may be continuous or relapsing, mild or severe, but unlikeulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease is not curable by resection of theinvolved segment of bowel. Most patients with Crohn's disease requiresurgery at some point, but subsequent relapse is common and continuousmedical treatment is usual. Crohn's disease may involve any part of thealimentary tract from the mouth to the anus, although typically itappears in the ileocolic, small-intestinal or colonic-anorectal regions.Histopathologically, the disease manifests by discontinuousgranulomatomas, crypt abscesses, fissures and aphthous ulcers. Theinflammatory infiltrate is mixed, consisting of lymphocytes (both T andB cells), plasma cells, macrophages, and neutrophils. There is adisproportionate increase in IgM- and IgG-secreting plasma cells,macrophages and neutrophils.

“Ulcerative colitis (UC)” afflicts the large intestine. The course ofthe disease may be continuous or relapsing, mild or severe. The earliestlesion is an inflammatory infiltration with abscess formation at thebase of the crypts of Lieberkuhn. Coalescence of these distended andruptured crypts tends to separate the overlying mucosa from its bloodsupply, leading to ulceration. Symptoms of the disease include cramping,lower abdominal pain, rectal bleeding, and frequent, loose dischargesconsisting mainly of blood, pus and mucus with scanty fecal particles. Atotal colectomy may be required for acute, severe or chronic,unremitting ulcerative colitis.

A “symptom” of a disease or disorder (e.g., an inflammatory boweldisease, e.g., ulcerative colitis or Crohn's disease) is any morbidphenomenon or departure from the normal in structure, function, orsensation, experienced by a subject and indicative of disease.

In certain embodiments, the subject has small intestinal bacterialovergrowth (SIBO). The small intestine houses less than 10³ bacteria/mLunder healthy conditions. When the homeostasis of the gut microbiome isdisrupted or aberrant, various functions of the gut microbiota areuncontrolled. See, e.g., Shreiner et al. (2016) Curr. Opin.Gastroenterol. 31(1): 69-75; Bures et al. (2010) World J. Gastroenterol.16(24): 2978-2990. Excessive levels of bacteria (over 10⁵ bacteria/mL)and abnormal types of bacteria in the small intestine leads to thedevelopment of SIBO. SIBO is associated with chronic diarrhea, abdominaldiscomfort, bloating, malabsorption, flatulence, and unintentionalweight loss. While Gram-positive bacteria are typically found in thesmall intestine, subjects suffering from SIBO have a variety of bacteriain the small intestine including Gram-negative bacteria, which arenormally only present in very small numbers or not at all within thesmall intestine. For example, bacteria present in SIBO may secretemucosal damaging toxins or metabolize bile salts, which can lead tomalabsorption and bloating. A study comparing the prevalence of SIBO insubjects aged 24 to 50 and in subjects aged 61 or older found that SIBOwas more prevalent in older subjects as compared to younger subjects(15.6% and 5.9% respectively) (Parlesak et al. (2003) J. Am. Geriatr.Soc. 51(6): 768-773). SIBO was also seen more frequently in subjectswith reduced body weight. Risk factors for developing SIBO include:metabolic disorders (e.g., diabetes, hypochloryhydria), malnutrition,irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), Celiac disease, Crohn's disease,cirrhosis, renal failure, gastroparesis, small bowel dysmotility,structural abnormalities of the GI tract (e.g., jejunal diverticula),gastric resection and immuno-deficiency. Additional risk factors includethe use of certain medications (e.g., antibiotics, gastric acidsecretion inhibitors). See, e.g., Dukowicz et al. (2007) Gastronenterol.Hepatol. 3(2): 112-122. In some embodiments, subjects having SIBO havedelayed intestinal transit times (Cuoco et al. (2002)Hepatogastroenterology 49: 1582-1586). In some embodiments, subjectshaving SIBO have accelerated intestinal transit times (Van Citters andLin (2006) Clin. Nutrition in Gastrointestinal Disease. Thorofare: SlackInc; 2006; 271-280).

As used herein, a subject has or is at risk of having SIBO if thesubject has intestinal bacteria levels that are greater than 10³ colonyforming units (CFU)/mL, e.g., greater than 10⁴ CFU/mL, greater than 10⁵CFU/mL, greater than 10⁶ CFU/mL, greater than 10⁷ CFU/mL, greater than10⁸ CFU/mL, greater than 10⁹ CFU/mL, greater than 10¹⁰ CFU/mL. In someembodiments, the bacteria are both Gram-positive and Gram-negativebacteria. In some embodiments, the bacteria are Gram-positive bacteria.In some embodiments, the bacteria are Gram-negative bacteria.

The prevalence of SIBO in healthy individuals varies from about 0-20%(see, e.g., Lombardo et at (2010) Clin. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 8:504-8; Sabaté et al. (2008) Obes. Surg. 18: 371-7; Posserud et al.(2007) Gut 56: 802-8; Teo (2004) J. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 19: 904-9;Lewis et al. (1999) Age Ageing 28: 181-5; Pimentel et al. (2003) Am. J.Gastroenterol. 98: 412-9; Rana et al. (2011) Diabetes Technol. Ther. 13:1115-20; Bratten et al. (2008) Am. J. Gastroenterol. 103: 958-63; andScarpellini et al. (2009) J. Pediatr. 155: 416-20). Several clinicalconditions are associated with SIBO and are referred to herein as“SIBO-related conditions.” Exemplary SIBO-related conditions include,but are not limited to, coeliac disease (see, e.g., Rana et al. (2007)Trop. Gastroenterol. 28: 159-61; Rubio-Tapia et al. (2009) J. Clin.Gastroenterol. 43: 157-61; and Tursi et al. (2003) Am. J. Gastroenterol.98: 839-43), connective tissue diseases such as scleroderma (see, e.g.,Levesque et al. (2009) Rheumatology 48: 1314-9; and Parodi et al. (2008)Am. J. Gastroenterol. 103: 1257-62), Crohn's disease (see, e.g.,Fukushima et al. (1999) Dis. Colon Rectum 42: 1072-7; Klaus et al.(2009) Gastroenterol. 9: 61; and U.S. Publication No. 2002/0039599),diabetes mellitus (see, e.g., Rana et al. (2011) Diabetes Technol Ther13: 1115-20, and Zaccardi et al. (2009) Eur. Rev. Med. Pharmacol. Sci.13: 419-23), hypothyroidism (see, e.g., Lauritano et al. (2007) J. Clin.Endocr. Metab. 92: 4180-4), nonspecific dysmotility (see, e.g., Jacobset al. (2013) Aliment. Pharmacol. Ther. 37: 1103-11), radiationenteropathy (see, e.g., Wedlake et al. (2008) Eur. J Cancer 44: 2212-7),ulcerative colitis (see, e.g., Ibanez et al. (2008) Gastroenterology134: A-350), chronic fatigue syndrome (see, e.g., Ojetti et al. (2009)Eur. Rev. Med. Pharmacol. Sci. 13: 419-23), chronic pancreatitis (see,e.g., Mancilla et al. (2008) 136: 976-80; and Trespi et al (1999) Curr.Med. Res. Opin. 15: 47-52), drug-induced inhibition of acid secretion(see, e.g., Jacobs (2013) Aliment. Pharmacol. Ther. 37: 1103-11; Compareet al. (2010) Eur. J. Clin. Invest. 41: 380-6; and Lombardo et al.(2010) Clin. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 8: 504-8), end-stage renal failure(see, e.g., Strid et al. (2003) Digestion 67: 129-37), fibromyalgia(see, e.g., U.S. Publication No. 2002/0039599), irritable bowel syndrome(Posserud et al. (2007) Gut 56: 802-8; Bratten et al. (2008) Am. J.Gastroenterol. 103: 958-63; 30. Pimentel et al. (2000) Am. J.Gastroenterol. 95: 3503-6; Nucera et al. (2005) Aliment. Pharmacol.Ther. 21: 1391-5; Lupascu et al. (2005) Aliment. Pharmacol. Ther. 22:1157-60; and Grover et al. (2008) Neurogastroenterol. Motil. 20:998-1008), immunodeficiency syndromes such as HIV-infection and chroniclymphocytic leukaemia (see, e.g., Chave et al. Am. J. Gastroenterol. 89:2168-71; and Smith et al. (1990) J. Clin. Pathol. 43: 57-9), livercirrhosis (see, e.g., Yang et al. (1998) Scand. J. Gastroenterol. 33:867-71; and Gunnarsdottir (2003) Am. J. Gastroenterol. 98: 1362-70),obesity (see, e.g., Sabaté et al. (2008) Obes. Surg. 18: 371-7; andMadrid et al. (2011) Dig. Dis. Sci. 56: 155-60), parenteral nutrition(see, e.g., Gutierrez et al. (2012) J. Pediatr. Surg. 47: 1150-4),rosacea (Parodi et al. Clin. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 6: 759-64),muscular dystrophy (see, e.g., Tarnopolsky et al. (2010) Muscle Nerve42: 853-5), and Parkinson's disease (see, e.g., Gabrielli (2011)Movement Disord. 26: 889-92). Thus, in some embodiments of any of themethods described herein, the subject has a SIBO-related conditionselected from the group consisting of coeliac disease, a connectivetissue disease (e.g., scleroderma), Crohn's disease, diabetes mellitus,hypothyroidism, nonspecific dysmotility, radiation enteropathy,ulcerative colitis, chronic fatigue syndrome, chronic pancreatitis,drug-induced inhibition of acid secretion, end-stage renal failure,fibromyalgia, irritable bowel syndrome, an immunodeficiency syndrome(e.g., HIV-infection and chronic lymphocytic leukaemia), obesity,parenteral nutrition, rosacea, muscular dystrophy, and Parkinson'sdisease. For example, the methods described herein may be used to detectSIBO in a subject having a SIBO-related condition.

In some embodiment of any of the methods described herein, the subjectis suspected of having SIBO or a SIBO-related condition. In someembodiments of any of the methods described herein, the subject has oneor more symptoms selected from the group consisting of bloating,diarrhea, flatulence, abdominal pain, constipation, weight loss, fever,abdominal tenderness, nausea, gastric stasis, and steatorrhea.

In some embodiments of any of the methods described herein, the subjecthas been subjected to a surgical intervention. For example, SIBO isprevalent in subjects that have undergone abdominal surgery, bilateralvagotomy, gastrectomy, ileocaecal valve resection, and roux-en-Yreconstruction (see, e.g., Grace et al. (2013) Aliment. Pharmacol. Ther.38(7):674-88, the entire contents of which are expressly incorporatedherein by reference). In some embodiment of any of the methods describedherein, the subject has been subjected to a surgical interventionselected from the group consisting of abdominal surgery, bilateralvagotomy, gastrectomy, ileocaecal valve resection, and roux-en-Yreconstruction.

In some embodiments, detection of analytes disclosed herein areindicative of disorders of the gastrointestinal tract associated withanomalous bacterial populations. The bacteria may include, but are notlimited to, the types of bacteria present in the fluid sample or theconcentration of bacteria in specific regions of the GI tract. Dataobtained using the methods described herein may be used to determinewhether a subject has an infection, such as Small Intestinal BacterialOvergrowth (SIBO), or to characterize bacterial populations within theGI tract for diagnostic or other purposes. In some embodiments,detection of an analyte disclosed herein in a subject may be indicativeof a disease or condition originating from the endoderm in a subject. Insome embodiments of any of the methods described herein, the subject hasa disease or condition orginating from the endoderm selected from thegroup of: gastritis, Celiac disease, hepatitis, alcoholic lever disease,fatty liver disease (hepatic steatosis), non-alcoholic fatty liverdisease (NASH), cirrhosis, primary schlerosing cholangitis,pancreatitis, insterstitial cystitits, asthma, chronic obstructicpulmonary disease, pulmonary fibrosis, pharyngitis, thyroiditis,hyperthyroidism, parathyroiditis, nephritis, Hashimoto's disease,Addison's disease, Graves' disease, Sjogren syndrome, type 1 diabetes,pelvic inflammatory disease, auditory canal inflammation, tinnitus,vestibular neuritis, otitis media, auditory canal inflammation,tracheitis, cholestatic liver disease, primary biliary schlerosis, liverparenchyma, an inherited metabolic disorder of the liver, Bylersyndrome, cerebrotendinous, xanthomatosis, Zellweger's syndrome,neonatal hepatitis, cystic fibrosis, ALGS (Alagilles syndrome), PFIC(progressive familial intrahepatic cholestasis), autoimmune hepatitis,primary biliary cirrhosis (PBC), liver fibrosis, NAFLD, portalhypertension, general cholestasis, such as in jaundice due to drugs orduring pregnancy, intra- and extrahepatic cholestasis, such ashereditary forms of cholestasis, such as PFIC1, gall stones andcholedocholithiasis, malignancy causing obstruction of the biliary tree,symptoms (scratching, pruritus) due to cholestasis/jaundice, chronicautoimmune liver disease leading to progressive cholestasis, andpruritus of cholestatic liver disease, duodenal ulcers, enteritis(radiation-, chemotherapy-, or infection-induced enteritis),diverticulitis, pouchitis, cholecystitis, and cholangitis. In someembodiments of any of the methods described herein, the inflammatorydisease or condition that arises in a tissue originating from theendoderm is inflammation of the liver.

In some embodiments, the detection of analytes disclosed herein isindicative of diseases or disorders of the liver. In some embodiments,detection of an analyte disclosed herein in a subject may be indicativeof a liver disease or disorder in a subject. For example, the methods,devices, and compositions described herein may be used to determinewhether a subject has or is at risk of developing a liver disease ordisorder, and/or to determine or monitor a course of treatment for aliver disease or disorder. A non-exhaustive list of liver diseases anddisorders, include, but are not limited to fibrosis, cirrhosis,alcoholic lever disease, fatty liver disease (hepatic steatosis),non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (NASH), cholestatic liver disease,liver parenchyma, an inherited metabolic disorder of the liver, PFIC(progressive familial intrahepatic cholestasis), autoimmune hepatitis,primary biliary cirrhosis (PBC), liver fibrosis, NAFLD, chronicautoimmune liver disease leading to progressive cholestasis, pruritus ofcholestatic liver disease, inflammation of the liver, and liverfibrosis.

Methods of Selecting and Optimizing Treatment

In some embodiments, the methods described herein include theadministration of one or more treatments, e.g., antibiotics, to asubject identified as having or being at risk of developing a GIdisorder (e.g., SIBO). The methods can also include selecting atreatment for a subject who has a GI disorder or is determined to be atrisk for developing a GI disorder, based upon the presence or absence ofan analyte, or based upon the amount of an analyte. The methods can alsoinclude administering a treatment selected by a method describedhereinto a subject who has or is at risk of developing a GI disorder totreat, delay disease progression, or reduce the risk of developing ofthe disease. For example, in some embodiments, the methods describedherein can include the administration of an antibiotic (e.g., rifaximin)to a subject identified as having or being at risk of developing SIBO.In some embodiments, the methods can also include selecting a subjecthaving SIBO or who is at risk of developing SIBO (e.g., a subject havinga SIBO-related condition), and treating the subject with an antibiotic(e.g., rifaximin) to treat, delay disease progression, or reduce therisk of developing SIBO.

In some embodiments of any of the methods described herein, the methodcan further include the step of monitoring a subject, e.g., for anincrease or decrease in one or more analytes, or any other parameterassociated with clinical outcome. In some embodiments, the step ofmonitoring includes providing the subject with an ingestible device todetermining the presence or absence of an analyte and/or the levels oramount of an analyte. In some embodiments, the step of monitoring occursprior to administering a treatment, during the course of a treatment, orafter treatment. In some embodiments, the step of monitoring includes anadditional step of ingesting an ingestible device that was previouslyprovided to the subject to determine the presence or absence of ananalyte and/or the levels or amounts of an analyte.

Also provided herein are methods of determining the efficacy of a GIdisorder treatment. In some embodiments, providing an ingestible devicecan determine successful treatment of a GI disorder in a subject (e.g.,the presence or absence of an analyte is determined; the levels of ananalyte is decreased as compared to the levels of the analyte determinedin the subject at an early period of time; the levels of an analyte isdecreased as compared to the levels of the analyte determined in acontrol subject (e.g., a subject that does not have a GI disorder, or isnot at risk of developing a GI disorder); the levels of an analyte isincreased as compared to the levels of the analyte determined in thesubject at an early period of time). In some embodiments, prior to theproviding an ingestible device step, the subject received treatment fora GI disorder (e.g., any of the treatment described herein). Forexample, in some embodiments, the level of an analyte (e.g., any of theanalytes described herein) is decreased as compared to the level of theanalyte described herein prior to treatment for a GI disorder, andfurther treatment is discontinued. For example, in some embodiments, thelevel of an analyte (e.g., any of the analytes described herein) isincreased as compared to the level of the analyte described herein priorto treatment for a GI disorder, and a different treatment isadministered.

Non-limiting examples of such agents for treating or preventing agastrointestinal disorder (e.g., Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis)include substances that suppress cytokine production, downregulate orsuppress self-antigen expression, or mask MHC antigens. Examples of suchagents include 2-amino-6-aryl-5-substituted pyrimidines (see U.S. Pat.No. 4,665,077); non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs);ganciclovir; tacrolimus; glucocorticoids such as Cortisol oraldosterone; anti-inflammatory agents such as a cyclooxygenaseinhibitor; a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor; or a leukotriene receptorantagonist; purine antagonists such as azathioprine or mycophenolatemofetil (MMF); alkylating agents such as cyclophosphamide;bromocryptine; danazol; dapsone; glutaraldehyde (which masks the MHCantigens, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,120,649); anti-idiotypicantibodies for MHC antigens and MHC fragments; cyclosporine;6-mercaptopurine; steroids such as corticosteroids orglucocorticosteroids or glucocorticoid analogs, e.g., prednisone,methylprednisolone, including SOLU-MEDROL®, methylprednisolone sodiumsuccinate, and dexamethasone; dihydrofolate reductase inhibitors such asmethotrexate (oral or subcutaneous); anti-malarial agents such aschloroquine and hydroxychloroquine; sulfasalazine; leflunomide; cytokineor cytokine receptor antibodies or 5 antagonists includinganti-interferon-alpha, -beta, or -gamma antibodies, anti-tumor necrosisfactor(TNF)-alpha antibodies (infliximab (REMICADE®) or adalimumab),anti-TNF-alpha immunoadhesin (etanercept), anti-TNF-beta antibodies,antiinterleukin-2 (IL-2) antibodies and anti-IL-2 receptor antibodies,and anti-interleukin-6 (IL-6) receptor antibodies and antagonists;anti-LFA-1 antibodies, including anti-CD 1 la and anti-CD 18 antibodies;anti-L3T4 antibodies; heterologous anti-lymphocyte globulin; pan-Tantibodies, anti-CD3 or anti-CD4/CD4a antibodies; soluble peptidecontaining a LFA-3 binding domain (WO 90/08187 published Jul. 26, 1990);streptokinase; transforming growth factor-beta (TGF-beta);streptodomase; RNA or DNA from the host; FK506; RS-61443; chlorambucil;deoxyspergualin; rapamycin; T-cell receptor (Cohen et al, U.S. Pat. No.5,114,721); T-cell receptor fragments (Offner et al. Science, 251:430-432 (1991); WO90/11294; Janeway, Nature, 341: 482 (1989); and WO91/01133); BAFF antagonists such as BAFF or BR3 antibodies orimmunoadhesins and zTNF4 antagonists (for review, see Mackay and Mackay,Trends Immunol, 23: 113-5 (2002); biologic agents that interfere with Tcell helper signals, such as anti-CD40 receptor or anti-CD40 ligand (CD154), including blocking antibodies to CD40-CD40 ligand. (e.g., Dune etal, Science, 261: 1328-30 (1993); Mohan et al, J. Immunol, 154: 1470-80(1995)) and CTLA4-Ig (Finck et al, Science, 265: 1225-7 (1994)); andT-cell receptor antibodies (EP340,109) such as T10B9. Non-limitingexamples of adjunct agents also include the following: budenoside;epidermal growth factor; aminosalicylates; metronidazole; mesalamine;olsalazine; balsalazide; antioxidants; thromboxane inhibitors; IL-1receptor antagonists; anti-IL-1 monoclonal antibodies; growth factors;elastase inhibitors; pyridinylimidazole compounds; TNF antagonists;IL-4, IL-10, IL-13 and/or TGFβ cytokines or agonists thereof (e.g.,agonist antibodies); IL-11; glucuronide- or dextran-conjugated prodrugsof prednisolone, dexamethasone or budesonide; ICAM-I antisensephosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotides (ISIS 2302; Isis Pharmaceuticals,Inc.); soluble complement receptor 1 (TP1O; T Cell Sciences, Inc.);slow-release mesalazine; antagonists of platelet activating factor(PAF); ciprofloxacin; and lignocaine. In some embodiments, the agentsfor treating or preventing a gastrointestinal disorder (e.g., SIBO)include any antibiotic described herein (e.g., rifaximin). Examples ofagents for UC are sulfasalazine and related salicylate-containing drugsfor mild cases and corticosteroid drugs in severe cases.

Topical administration of either salicylates or corticosteroids issometimes effective, particularly when the disease is limited to thedistal bowel, and is associated with decreased side effects comparedwith systemic use. Supportive measures such as administration of ironand antidiarrheal agents are sometimes indicated. Azathioprine,6-mercaptopurine and methotrexate are sometimes also prescribed for usein refractory corticosteroid-dependent cases.

In some embodiments, the antibiotic selected for treatment is selectedfrom the group consisting of: beta-lactam antibiotics, aminoglycosides,ansa-type antibiotics, anthraquinones, antibiotic azoles, antibioticglycopeptides, macrolides, antibiotic nucleosides, antibiotic peptides,antibiotic polyenes, antibiotic polyethers, quinolones, antibioticsteroids, sulfonamides, tetracycline, dicarboxylic acids, antibioticmetals, oxidizing agents, substances that release free radicals and/oractive oxygen, cationic antimicrobial agents, quaternary ammoniumcompounds, biguanides, triguanides, bisbiguanides and analogs andpolymers thereof and naturally occurring antibiotic compounds.

Beta-lactam antibiotics include, but are not limited to,2-(3-alanyl)clavam, 2-hydroxymethylclavam, 8-epi-thienamycin,acetyl-thienamycin, amoxicillin, amoxicillin sodium, amoxicillintrihydrate, amoxicillin-potassium clavulanate combination, ampicillin,ampicillin sodium, ampicillin trihydrate, ampicillin-sulbactam,apalcillin, aspoxicillin, azidocillin, azlocillin, aztreonam,bacampicillin, biapenem, carbenicillin, carbenicillin disodium,carfecillin, carindacillin, carpetimycin, cefacetril, cefaclor,cefadroxil, cefalexin, cefaloridine, cefalotin, cefamandole,cefamandole, cefapirin, cefatrizine, cefatrizine propylene glycol,cefazedone, cefazolin, cefbuperazone, cefcapene, cefcapene pivoxilhydrochloride, cefdinir, cefditoren, cefditoren pivoxil, cefepime,cefetamet, cefetamet pivoxil, cefixime, cefinenoxime, cefinetazole,cefminox, cefminox, cefmolexin, cefodizime, cefonicid, cefoperazone,ceforanide, cefoselis, cefotaxime, cefotetan, cefotiam, cefoxitin,cefozopran, cefpiramide, cefpirome, cefpodoxime, cefpodoxime proxetil,cefprozil, cefquinome, cefradine, cefroxadine, cefsulodin, ceftazidime,cefteram, cefteram pivoxil, ceftezole, ceftibuten, ceftizoxime,ceftriaxone, cefuroxime, cefuroxime axetil, cephalosporin, cephamycin,chitinovorin, ciclacillin, clavulanic acid, clometocillin, cloxacillin,cycloserine, deoxy pluracidomycin, dicloxacillin, dihydropluracidomycin, epicillin, epithienamycin, ertapenem, faropenem,flomoxef, flucloxacillin, hetacillin, imipenem, lenampicillin,loracarbef, mecillinam, meropenem, metampicillin, meticillin,mezlocillin, moxalactam, nafcillin, northienamycin, oxacillin,panipenem, penamecillin, penicillin, phenethicillin, piperacillin,tazobactam, pivampicillin, pivcefalexin, pivmecillinam, pivmecillinamhydrochloride, pluracidomycin, propicillin, sarmoxicillin, sulbactam,sulbenicillin, talampicillin, temocillin, terconazole, thienamycin,ticarcillin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Aminoglycosides include, but are not limited to,1,2′-N-DL-isoseryl-3′,4′dideoxykanamycin B, 1,2′-N-DL-isoseryl-kanamycinB, 1,2′-N-[(S)-4-amino-2-hydroxybutyryl]-3′,4′-dideoxykanamycin B,1,2′-N—[(S)-4-amino-2-hydroxybutyryl]kanamycin B,1-N-(2-Aminobutanesulfonyl) kanamycin A,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)3′,4′-dideoxyribostamycin,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)3′deoxyribostamycin,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)3′4′-dideoxykanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl) kanamycin A, 1-N-(2aminoethanesulfonyl)kanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)ribostamycin,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)3′-deoxykanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)3′4′-dideoxy kanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl) kanamycin A, 1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)kanamycin B,1-N-(L-4-amino-2-hydroxy-butyryl)2,′3′-dideoxy-2′-fluorokanamy cin A,1-N-(L-4-amino-2-hydroxy-propionyl)2,′3′-dideoxy-2′-fluorokanamycin A,1-N-DL-3′,4′-dideoxy-isoserylkanamycin B, 1-N-DL-isoserylkanamycin,1-N-DL-isoserylkanamycin B,1-N-[L-(−)-(alpha-hydroxygamma-aminobutyryl)]-XK-62-2,2′,3′-dideoxy-2′-fluorokanamycinA, 2-hydroxygentamycin A 3,2-hydroxygentamycin B, 2-hydroxygentamycinB1, 2-hydroxygentamycin JI-20A, 2-hydroxygentamycin JI-20B,3″-N-methyl-4″-C-methyl-3′,4′-dodeoxykanamycin A,3″-N-methyl-4″-C-methyl-3′,4′-dodeoxy kanamycin B,3″-N-methyl-4″-C-methyl-3′,4′-dodeoxy-6′methyl kanamycin B,3′,4′-Dideoxy-3′-eno-ribostamycin,3′,4′-dideoxyneamine,3′,4′dideoxyribostamycin,3′-deoxy-6′-N-methyl-kanamycin B,3′-deoxyneamine,3′deoxyribostamycin,3′-oxysaccharocin,3,3′-nepotrehalosadiamine,3-demethoxy-2″-Nformimidoylistamycin B disulfate tetrahydrate,3-demethoxyistamycin B,3-0-demethyl-2-N-formimidoylistamycin B,3-0-demethylistamycin B,3-trehalosamine,411,611-dideoxydibekacin,4-N-glycyl-KA-6606VI, 5″-Amino-3′,4′,5″-trideoxy-butirosin A,611-deoxydibekacin,61-epifortimicin A, 6-deoxy-neomycin (structure6-deoxy-neomycin B),6-deoxy-neomycin B, 6-deoxy-neomycin C,6-deoxy-paromomycin, acmimycin, AHB-3′,4′-dideoxyribostamycin,AHB-3′-deoxykanamycin B, AHB-3′-deoxyneamine, AHB-3′-deoxyribostamycin,AHB-411-611-dideoxydibekacin, AHB-611-deoxydibekacin,AHB-dideoxyneamine, AHB-kanamycin B, AHB-methyl-3′-deoxykanamycin B,amikacin, amikacin sulfate, apramycin, arbekacin, astromicin, astromicinsulfate, bekanamycin, bluensomycin, boholmycin, butirosin, butirosin B,catenulin, coumamidine gammal, coumamidinegamma2,D,L-1-N-(alpha-hydroxy-betaaminopropionyl)-XK-62-2, dactimicin,de-O-methyl-4-N-glycyl-KA-6606VI, de-0-methyl-KA-66061,de-O-methyl-KA-70381, destomycin A, destomycin B,di-N6′,03-demethylistamycin A, dibekacin, dibekacin sulfate,dihydrostreptomycin, dihydrostreptomycin sulfate,epi-formamidoylglycidylfortimicin B, epihygromycin,formimidoyl-istamycin A, formimidoyl-istamycin B, fortimicin B,fortimicin C, fortimicin D, fortimicin KE, fortimicin KF, fortimicin KG,fortimicin KG1(stereoisomer KG1/KG2), fortimicin KG2 (stereoisomerKG1/KG2), fortimicin KG3, framycetin, framycetin sulphate, gentamicin,gentamycin sulfate, globeomycin, hybrimycin A1, hybrimycin A2,hybrimycin B1, hybrimycin B2, hybrimycin C1, hybrimycin C2,hydroxystreptomycin, hygromycin, hygromycin B, isepamicin, isepamicinsulfate, istamycin, kanamycin, kanamycin sulphate, kasugamycin,lividomycin, marcomycin, micronomicin, micronomicin sulfate, mutamicin,myomycin, N-demethy 1-7-0-demethylcelesticetin, demethylcelesticetin,methanesulfonic acid derivative of istamycin, nebramycin, nebramycin,neomycin, netilmicin, oligostatin, paromomycin, quintomycin,ribostamycin, saccharocin, seldomycin, sisomicin, sorbistin,spectinomycin, streptomycin, tobramycin, trehalosmaine, trestatin,validamycin, verdamycin, xylostasin, zygomycin and analogs, salts andderivatives thereof.

Antibiotic anthraquinones include, but are not limited to, auramycin,cinerubin, ditrisarubicin, ditrisarubicin C, figaroic acid fragilomycin,minomycin, rabelomycin, rudolfomycin, sulfurmycin and analogs, salts andderivatives thereof.

Antibiotic azoles include, but are not limited to, azanidazole,bifonazole, butoconazol, chlormidazole, chlormidazole hydrochloride,cloconazole, cloconazole monohydrochloride, clotrimazol, dimetridazole,econazole, econazole nitrate, enilconazole, fenticonazole, fenticonazolenitrate, fezatione, fluconazole, flutrimazole, isoconazole, isoconazolenitrate, itraconazole, ketoconazole, lanoconazole, metronidazole,metronidazole benzoate, miconazole, miconazole nitrate, neticonazole,nimorazole, niridazole, omoconazol, omidazole, oxiconazole, oxiconazolenitrate, propenidazole, secnidazol, sertaconazole, sertaconazolenitrate, sulconazole, sulconazole nitrate, tinidazole, tioconazole,voriconazol and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic glycopeptides include, but are not limited to, acanthomycin,actaplanin, avoparcin, balhimycin, bleomycin B (copper bleomycin),chloroorienticin, chloropolysporin, demethylvancomycin, enduracidin,galacardin, guanidylfungin, hachimycin, demethylvancomycin,N-nonanoyl-teicoplanin, phleomycin, platomycin, ristocetin,staphylocidin, talisomycin, teicoplanin, vancomycin, victomycin,xylocandin, zorbamycin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Macrolides include, but are not limited to, acetylleucomycin,acetylkitasamycin, angolamycin, azithromycin, bafilomycin, brefeldin,carbomycin, chalcomycin, cirramycin, clarithromycin, concanamycin,deisovaleryl-niddamycin, demycinosyl-mycinamycin,Di-0-methyltiacumicidin, dirithromycin, erythromycin, erythromycinestolate, erythromycin ethyl succinate, erythromycin lactobionate,erythromycin stearate, flurithromycin, focusin, foromacidin,haterumalide, haterumalide, josamycin, josamycin ropionate, juvenimycin,juvenimycin, kitasamycin, ketotiacumicin, lankavacidin, lankavamycin,leucomycin, machecin, maridomycin, megalomicin, methylleucomycin,methymycin, midecamycin, miocamycin, mycaminosyltylactone, mycinomycin,neutramycin, niddamycin, nonactin, oleandomycin, phenylacetyideltamycin,pamamycin, picromycin, rokitamycin, rosaramicin, roxithromycin,sedecamycin, shincomycin, spiramycin, swalpamycin, tacrolimus,telithromycin, tiacumicin, tilmicosin, treponemycin, troleandomycin,tylosin, venturicidin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic nucleosides include, but are not limited to, amicetin,angustmycin, azathymidine, blasticidin S, epiroprim, flucytosine,gougerotin, mildiomycin, nikkomycin, nucleocidin, oxanosine, oxanosine,puromycin, pyrazomycin, showdomycin, sinefungin, sparsogenin,spicamycin, tunicamycin, uracil polyoxin, vengicide and analogs, saltsand derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic peptides include, but are not limited to, actinomycin,aculeacin, alazopeptin, arnfomycin, amythiamycin, antifungal fromZalerion arboricola, antrimycin, apid, apidaecin, aspartocin,auromomycin, bacileucin, bacillomycin, bacillopeptin, bacitracin,bagacidin, beminamycin, beta-alanyl-L-tyrosine, bottromycin,capreomycin, caspofungine, cepacidine, cerexin, cilofungin, circulin,colistin, cyclodepsipeptide, cytophagin, dactinomycin, daptomycin,decapeptide, desoxymulundocandin, echanomycin, echinocandin B,echinomycin, ecomycin, enniatin, etamycin, fabatin, ferrimycin,ferrimycin, ficellomycin, fluoronocathiacin, fusaricidin, gardimycin,gatavalin, globopeptin, glyphomycin, gramicidin, herbicolin, iomycin,iturin, iyomycin, izupeptin, janiemycin, janthinocin, jolipeptin,katanosin, killertoxin, lipopeptide antibiotic, lipopeptide fromZalerion sp., lysobactin, lysozyme, macromomycin, magainin, melittin,mersacidin, mikamycin, mureidomycin, mycoplanecin, mycosubtilin,neopeptifl uorin, neoviri dogrisein, netropsin, nisin, nocathiacin,nocathiacin 6-deoxyglycoside, nosiheptide, octapeptin, pacidamycin,pentadecapeptide, peptifluorin, permetin, phytoactin, phytostreptin,planothiocin, plusbacin, polcillin, polymyxin antibiotic complex,polymyxin B, polymyxin Bl, polymyxin F, preneocarzinostatin, quinomycin,quinupristin-dalfopristin, safracin, salmycin, salmycin, salmycin,sandramycin, saramycetin, siomycin, sperabillin, sporamycin, aStreptomyces compound, subtilin, teicoplanin aglycone, telomycin,thermothiocin, thiopeptin, thiostrepton, tridecaptin, tsushimycin,tuberactinomycin, tuberactinomycin, tyrothricin, valinomycin, viomycin,virginiamycin, zervacin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

In some embodiments, the antibiotic peptide is a naturally-occurringpeptide that possesses an antibacterial and/or an antifungal activity.Such peptide can be obtained from an herbal or a vertebrate source.

Polyenes include, but are not limited to, amphotericin, amphotericin,aureofungin, ayfactin, azalomycin, blasticidin, candicidin, candicidinmethyl ester, candimycin, candimycin methyl ester, chinopricin, filipin,flavofungin, fradicin, hamycin, hydropricin, levorin, lucensomycin,lucknomycin, mediocidin, mediocidin methyl ester, mepartricin,methylamphotericin, natamycin, niphimycin, nystatin, nystatin methylester, oxypricin, partricin, pentamycin, perimycin, pimaricin, primycin,proticin, rimocidin, sistomycosin, sorangicin, trichomycin and analogs,salts and derivatives thereof.

Polyethers include, but are not limited to, 20-deoxy-epi-narasin,20-deoxysalinomycin, carriomycin, dianemycin, dihydrolonomycin,etheromycin, ionomycin, iso-lasalocid, lasalocid, lenoremycin,lonomycin, lysocellin, monensin, narasin, oxolonomycin, a polycyclicether antibiotic, salinomycin and analogs, salts and derivativesthereof.

Quinolones include, but are not limited to, analkyl-methylendioxy-4(1H)-2 5 oxocinnoline-3-carboxylic acid,alatrofloxacin, cinoxacin, ciprofloxacin, ciprofloxacin hydrochloride,danofloxacin, dermofongin A, enoxacin, enrofloxacin, fleroxacin,flumequine, gatifloxacin, gemifloxacin, grepafloxacin, levofloxacin,lomefloxacin, lomefloxacin, hydrochloride, miloxacin, moxifloxacin,nadifloxacin, nalidixic acid, nifuroquine, norfloxacin, ofloxacin,orbifloxacin, oxolinic acid, pazufloxacine, pefloxacin, pefloxacinmesylate, pipemidic acid, piromidic acid, premafloxacin, rosoxacin,rufloxacin, sparfloxacin, temafloxacin, tosufloxacin, trovafloxacin andanalogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic steroids include, but are not limited to, aminosterol,ascosteroside, cladosporide A, dihydrofusidic acid,dehydro-dihydrofusidic acid, dehydrofusidic acid, fusidic acid,squalamine and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Sulfonamides include, but are not limited to, chloramine, dapsone,mafenide, phthalylsulfathiazole, succinylsulfathiazole, sulfabenzamide,sulfacetamide, sulfachlorpyridazine, sulfadiazine, sulfadiazine silver,sulfadicramide, sulfadimethoxine, sulfadoxine, sulfaguanidine,sulfalene, sulfamazone, sulfamerazine, sulfamethazine, sulfamethizole,sulfamethoxazole, sulfamethoxypyridazine, sulfamonomethoxine,sulfamoxol, sulfanilamide, sulfaperine, sulfaphenazol, sulfapyridine,sulfaquinoxaline, sulfasuccinamide, sulfathiazole, sulfathiourea,sulfatolamide, sulfatriazin, sulfisomidine, sulfisoxazole, sulfisoxazoleacetyl, sulfacarbamide and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Tetracyclines include, but are not limited to, dihydrosteffimycin,demethyltetracycline, aclacinomycin, akrobomycin, baumycin,bromotetracycline, cetocyclin, chlortetracycline, clomocycline,daunorubicin, demeclocycline, doxorubicin, doxorubicin hydrochloride,doxycycline, lymecyclin, marcellomycin, meclocycline, meclocyclinesulfosalicylate, methacycline, minocycline, minocycline hydrochloride,musettamycin, oxytetracycline, rhodirubin, rolitetracycline, rubomycin,serirubicin, steffimycin, tetracycline and analogs, salts andderivatives thereof.

Analytes

The compositions and methods described herein can be used to detect,analyze, and/or quantitate a variety of analytes in a human subject.“Analyte” as used in the present application refers to a compound orcomposition to be detected in a sample. Exemplary analytes suitable foruse in the present application include those described in U.S. Pat. No.6,251,581, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.Broadly speaking, an analyte can be any substance (e.g., a substancewith one or more antigens) capable of being detected. An exemplary andnon-limiting list of analytes includes ligands, proteins and fragmentsthereof, blood clotting factors, hormones, cytokines, polysaccharides,nucleic acids, carbohydrates, mucopolysaccharides, lipids, fatty acids,microorganisms (e.g., bacteria), microbial antigens, and therapeuticagents (including fragments and metabolites thereof).

For instance, the analyte may be a substance that binds to ananalyte-binding agent (e.g., a biomolecule) and forms a complex. In someembodiments, the analyte may bemonovalent (monoepitopic) or polyvalent(polyepitopic), usually antigenic or haptenic. In some embodiments, theanalyte is a single compound or plurality of compounds. In someembodiments, the analyte is a plurality of compounds which share atleast one common epitopic or determinant site. The analyte can be a partof a cell such as bacteria or a cell bearing a blood group antigen suchas A, B, D, etc., a human leukocyte antigen (HLA), or other cell surfaceantigen. The analyte can also be a microorganism (e.g., bacterium (e.g.a pathogenic bacterium), a fungus, protozoan, or a virus), a protein, anucleic acid, a lipid, or a hormone. In some embodiments, the analytecan be an exosome or a part of an exosome (e.g., a bacterial exosome).In some embodiments, the analyte is derived from a subject (e.g., ahuman subject). In some embodiments, the analyte is derived from amicroorganism present in the subject. In some embodiments, the analyteis a nucleic acid (e.g., a DNA molecule or a RNA molecule), a protein(e.g., a soluble protein, a cell surface protein), or a fragmentthereof, that can be detected using any of the devices and methodsprovided herein.

The polyvalent ligand analytes will normally be poly(amino acids), i.e.,a polypeptide (i.e., protein) or a peptide, polysaccharides, nucleicacids (e.g., DNA or RNA), and combinations thereof. Such combinationsinclude components of bacteria, viruses, chromosomes, genes,mitochondria, nuclei, cell membranes, and the like.

In some embodiments, the polyepitopic ligand analytes have a molecularweight of at least about 5,000 Da, more usually at least about 10,000Da. In the poly(amino acid) category, the poly(amino acids) of interestmay generally have a molecular weight from about 5,000 Da to about5,000,000 Da, more usually from about 20,000 Da to 1,000,000 Da; amongthe hormones of interest, the molecular weights will usually range fromabout 5,000 Da to 60,000 Da.

In some embodiments, the monoepitopic ligand analytes generally have amolecular weight of from about 100 to 2,000 Da, more usually from 125 to1,000 Da.

A wide variety of proteins may be considered as to the family ofproteins having similar structural features, proteins having particularbiological functions, proteins related to specific microorganisms,particularly disease causing microorganisms, etc. Such proteins include,for example, immunoglobulins, cytokines, enzymes, hormones, cancerantigens, nutritional markers, tissue specific antigens, etc.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a protein. In some embodiments, theanalyte is a protein, e.g., an enzyme (e.g., a hemolysin, a protease, aphospholipase), a soluble protein, a membrane-bound protein, or anexotoxin. In some embodiments, the analyte is a fragment of a protein, apeptide, or an antigen. In some embodiments, the analyte is a peptide ofat least 5 amino acids (e.g., at least 6, at least 7, at least 8, atleast 9, at least 10, at least 25, at least, 50, or at least 100 aminoacids). Exemplary lengths include 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 50, 75, or100 amino acids. Exemplary classes of protein analytes include, but arenot limited to: protamines, histones, albumins, globulins,scleroproteins, phosphoproteins, antibodies, affimers, mucoproteins,chromoproteins, lipoproteins, nucleoproteins, glycoproteins, T-cellreceptors, proteoglycans, cell surface receptors, membrane-anchoredproteins, transmembrane proteins, secreted proteins, HLA, andunclassified proteins. In some embodiments, the analyte is an affimer(see, e.g., Tiede et al. (2017) eLife 6: e24903, which is expresslyincorporated herein by reference).

Exemplary analytes include: Prealbumin, Albumin, α₁-Lipoprotein,α₁-Antitrypsin, α₁-Glycoprotein, Transcortin, 4.6S-Postalbumin,α₁-glycoprotein, α_(1X)-Glycoprotein, Thyroxin-binding globulin,Inter-α-trypsin-inhibitor, Gc-globulin (Gc 1-1, Gc 2-1, Gc 2-2),Haptoglobin (Hp 1-1, Hp 2-1, Hp 2-2), Ceruloplasmin, Cholinesterase,α₂-Lipoprotein(s), Myoglobin, C-Reactive Protein, α₂-Macroglobulin,α₂-HS-glycoprotein, Zn-α₂-glycoprotein, α₂-Neuramino-glycoprotein,Erythropoietin, β-lipoprotein, Transferrin, Hemopexin, Fibrinogen,Plasminogen, β₂-glycoprotein I, β₂-glycoprotein II, Immunoglobulin G(IgG) or γG-globulin, Immunoglobulin A (IgA) or γA-globulin,Immunoglobulin M (IgM) or γM-globulin, Immunoglobulin D (IgD) orγD-Globulin (γD), Immunoglobulin E (IgE) or γE-Globulin (yE), Free κ andλ light chains, and Complement factors: C′1, (C′1q, C′1r, C′1s, C′2, C′3(β₁A, α2D), C′4, C′5, C′6, C′7, C′8, C′9.

Additional examples of analytes include tumor necrosis factor-α (TNFα),interleukin-12 (IL-12), IL-23, IL-6, α2β1 integrin, α1β1 integrin, α4β7integrin, integrin α4β1 (VLA-4), E-selectin, ICAM-1, α5β1 integrin, α4β1integrin, VLA-4, α2β1 integrin, α5β3 integrin, α5≈5 integrin, αIIbβ3integrin, MAdCAM-1, SMAD7, JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, TYK-2, CHST15, IL-1, IL-1α,IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-13, CD40L, CD40,CD3γ, CD3δ, CD3ε, CD3ζ, TCR, TCRα, TCRβ, TCRδ, TCRγ, CD14, CD20, CD25,IL-2, IL-2β chain, IL-2γ chain, CD28, CD80, CD86, CD49, MMP1, CD89, IgA,CXCL10, CCL11, an ELR chemokine, CCR2, CCR9, CXCR3, CCR3, CCR5, CCL2,CCL8, CCL16, CCL25, CXCR1m CXCR2m CXCL1, CXCL2, CXCL3, CXCL4, CXCL5,CXCL6, CXCL7, and CXCL8, and a nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA) encoding any ofthe same.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a blood clotting factor. Exemplaryblood dotting factors include, but are not limited to:

International designation Name I Fibrinogen II Prothrombin IIa ThrombinIII Tissue thromboplastin V and VI Proaccelerin, accelerator globulinVII Proconvertin VIII Antihemophilic globulin (AHG) IX Christmas factorplasma thromboplastin component (PTC) X Stuart-Prower factor,autoprothrombin III XI Plasma thromboplastin antecedent (PTA) XIIHagemann factor XIII Fibrin-stabilizing factor

In some embodiments, the analyte is a hormone. Exemplary hormonesinclude, but are not limited to: Peptide and Protein Hormones,Parathyroid hormone, (parathromone), Thyrocalcitonin, Insulin, Glucagon,Relaxin, Erythropoietin, Melanotropin (melancyte-stimulating hormone;intermedin), Somatotropin (growth hormone), Corticotropin(adrenocorticotropic hormone), Thyrotropin, Follicle-stimulatinghormone, Luteinizing hormone (interstitial cell-stimulating hormone),Luteomammotropic hormone (luteotropin, prolactin), Gonadotropin(chorionic gonadotropin), Secretin, Gastrin, Angiotensin I and II,Bradykinin, and Human placental lactogen, thyroxine, cortisol,triiodothyronine, testosterone, estradiol, estrone, progestrone,luteinizing hormone-releasing hormone (LHRH), and immunosuppressantssuch as cyclosporin, FK506, mycophenolic acid, and so forth.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a peptide hormone (e.g., a peptidehormone from the neurohypophysis). Exemplary peptide hormones from theneurohypophysis include, but are not limited to: Oxytocin, Vasopressin,and releasing factors (RF) (e.g., corticotropin releasing factor (CRF),luteinizing hormone releasing factor (LRF), thyrotropin releasing factor(TRF), Somatotropin-RF, growth hormone releasing factor (GRF), folliclestimulating hormone-releasing factor (FSH-RF), prolactin inhibitingfactor (PIF), and melanocyte stimulating hormone inhibiting factor(MIF)).

In some embodiments, the analyte is a cytokine or a chemokine. Exemplarycytokines include, but are not limited to: interleukin-1 (IL-1),interleukin-2 (IL-2), interleukin-6 (IL-6), epidermal growth factor(EGF), tumor necrosis factor (TNF, e.g., TNF-α or TNF-β), and nervegrowth factor (NGF).

In some embodiments, the analyte is a cancer antigen. Exemplary cancerantigens include, but are not limited to: prostate-specific antigen(PSA), carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA), a-fetoprotein, Acid phosphatase,CA19.9, CA125, CD19, WT-1, CD22, L1-CAM, ROR-1, CD30, CD125, AFP, CEA,ETA, MAGE, and MUC16.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a tissue-specific antigen. Exemplarytissue specific antigens include, but are not limited to: alkalinephosphatase, myoglobin, CPK-MB, calcitonin, and myelin basic protein.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a mucopolysaccharide or apolysaccharide.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a microorganism, or a moleculederived from or produced by a microorganism (e.g., a bacteria, a virus,prion, or a protozoan). For example, in some embodiments, the analyte isa molecule (e.g., a protein or a nucleic acid) that is specific for aparticular microbial genus, species, or strain (e.g., a specificbacterial genus, species, or strain). In some embodiments, themicroorganism is pathogenic (i.e., causes disease). In some embodiments,the microorganism is non-pathogenic (e.g., a commensal microorganism).Exemplary microorganisms include, but are not limited to:

Corynebacteria Corynebacterium diphtheria Pneumococci Diplococcuspneumoniae Streptococci Streptococcus pyrogenes Streptococcus salivarusStaphylococci Staphylococcus aureus Staphylococcus albus NeisseriaNeisseria meningitidis Neisseria gonorrhea EnterobacteriaciaeEscherichia coli Aerobacter aerogenes The coliform Klebsiella pneumoniaebacteria Salmonella typhosa Salmonella choleraesuis The SalmonellaeSalmonella typhimurium Shigella dysenteria Shigella schmitzii Shigellaarabinotarda The Shigellae Shigella flexneri Shigella boydii Shigellasonnei Other enteric bacilli Proteus vulgaris Proteus mirabilis Proteusspecies Proteus morgani Pseudomonas aeruginosa Alcaligenes faecalisVibrio cholerae Hemophilus-Bordetella group Rhizopus oryzae Hemophilusinfluenza, H. ducryi Rhizopus arrhizua Phycomycetes Hemophilushemophilus Rhizopus nigricans Hemophilus aegypticus Sporotrichumschenkii Hemophilus parainfluenza Flonsecaea pedrosoi Bordetellapertussis Fonsecacea compact Pasteurellae Fonsecacea dermatidisPasteurella pestis Cladosporium carrionii Pasteurella tulareusisPhialophora verrucosa Brucellae Aspergillus nidulans Brucella melltensisMadurella mycetomi Brucella abortus Madurella grisea Brucella suisAllescheria boydii Aerobic Spore-forming Bacilli Phialophora jeanselmeiBacillus anthracis Microsporum gypseum Bacillus subtilis Trichophytonmentagrophytes Bacillus megaterium Keratinomyces ajelloi Bacillus cereusMicrosporum canis Anaerobic Spore-forming Bacilli Trichophyton rubrumClostridium botulinum Microsporum adonini Clostridium tetani VirusesClostridium perfringens Adenoviruses Clostridium novyi Herpes VirusesClostridium septicum Herpes simplex Clostridium histoyticum Varicella(Chicken pox) Clostridium tertium Herpes Zoster (Shingles) Clostridiumbifermentans Virus B Clostridium sporogenes Cytomegalovirus MycobacteriaPox Viruses Mycobacterium tuberculosis hominis Variola (smallpox)Mycobacterium bovis Vaccinia Mycobacterium avium Poxvirus bovisMycobacterium leprae Paravaccinia Mycobacterium paratuberculosisMolluscum contagiosum Actinomycetes (fungus-ike bacteria) PicornavirusesActinomyces Isaeli Poliovirus Actinomyces bovis CoxsackievirusActinomyces naeslundii Echoviruses Nocardia asteroides RhinovirusesNocardia brasiliensis Myxoviruses The Spirochetes Influenza (A, B, andC) Treponema pallidum Parainfluenza (1-4) Treponema pertenue Mumps VirusSpirillum minus Streptobacillus monoiliformis Newcastle Disease VirusTreponema carateum Measles Virus Borrelia recurrentis Rinderpest VirusLeptospira icterohemorrhagiae Canine Distemper Virus Leptospira canicolaRespiratory Syncytial Virus Trypanasomes Rubella Virus MycoplasmasArboviruses Mycoplasma pneumoniae Other pathogens Eastern EquineEncephalitis Virus Listeria monocytogenes Western Equine EncephalitisVirus Erysipeothrix rhusiopathiae Sindbis Virus Streptobacillusmoniliformis Chikugunya Virus Donvania granulomatis Semliki Forest VirusEntamoeba histolytica Mayora Virus Plasmodium falciparum St. LouisEncephalitis Plasmodium japonicum California Encephalitis VirusBartonella bacilliformis Colorado Tick Fever Virus Rickettsia(bacteria-like parasites) Yellow Fever Virus Rickettsia prowazekiiDengue Virus Rickettsia mooseri Reoviruses Rickettsia rickettsiiReovirus Types 1-3 Rickettsia conori Retroviruses Rickettsia australisHuman Immunodeficiency Rickettsia sibiricus Viruses I and II (HTLV)Rickettsia akari Human T-cell Lymphotrophic Rickettsia tsutsugamushiVirus I & II (HIV) Rickettsia burnetti Hepatitis Rickettsia quintanaHepatitis A Virus Chlamydia (unclassifiable parasites Hepatitis B Virusbacterial/viral) Hepatitis C Virus Chlamydia agents (naming uncertain)Tumor Viruses Chlamydia trachomatis Fungi Rauscher Leukemia VirusCryptococcus neoformans Gross Virus Blastomyces dermatidis MaloneyLeukemia Virus Histoplasma capsulatum Coccidioides immitis HumanPapilloma Virus Paracoccidioides brasliensis Candida albicansAspergillus fumigatus Mucor corymbifer (Absidia corymbifera)

In some embodiments, the analyte is a bacterium. Exemplary bacteriainclude, but are not limited to: Escherichia coli (or E. coli), Bacillusanthraces, Bacillus cereus, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridiumdifficile, Yersinia pestis, Yersinia enterocolitica, Francisellatularensis, Brucella species, Clostridium perfringens, Burkholderiamallei, Burkholderia pseudomallei, Staphylococcus species, Mycobacteriumspecies, Group A Streptococcus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcuspneumoniae, Helicobacter pylori, Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasmahominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasma salivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans,Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis,Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacterium leprae, Rickettsia rickettsia,Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii, Rickettsia canada, Bacillussubtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillus thuringiensis, Coxiellaburnetti, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii (also known as Bacteroidespraussnitzii), Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialisterinvisus, Ruminococcus albus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcusbromii. Additional exemplary bacteria include bacteria of the phylaFirmicutes (e.g., Clostridium clusters XIVa and IV), bacteria of thephyla Bacteroidetes (e.g., Bacteroides fragilis or Bacteroidesvulgatus), and bacteria of the phyla Actinobacteria (e.g.,Coriobacteriaceae spp. or Bifidobacterium adolescentis). Bacteria of theClostridium cluster XIVa includes species belonging to, for example, theClostridium, Ruminococcus, Lachnospira, Roseburia, Eubacterium,Coprococcus, Dorea, and Butyrivibrio genera. Bacteria of the Clostridiumcluster IV includes species belonging to, for example, the Clostridium,Ruminococcus, Eubacterium and Anaerofilum genera. In some embodiments,the analyte is Candida, e.g., Candida albicans. In some embodiments, theanalyte is a byproduct from a bacterium or other microorganism, e.g.,helminth ova, enterotoxin (Clostridium difficile toxin A; TcdA) orcytotoxin (Clostridium difficile toxin B; TcdB).

In some embodiments, the bacterium is a pathogenic bacterium.Non-limiting examples of pathogenic bacteria belong to the generaBacillus, Bordetella, Borrelia, Brucella, Campylobacter, Chlamydia,Chlamydophila, Clostridium, Corynebacterium, Enterobacter, Enterococcus,Escherichia, Francisella, Haemophilus, Helicobacter, Legionella,Leptospira, Listeria, Mycobacterium, Mycoplasma, Neisseria, Pseudomonas,Rickettsia, Salmonella, Shigella, Staphylococcus, Streptococcus,Treponema, Vibrio, and Yersinia. Non-limiting examples of specificpathogenic bacterial species include a strain of Bacillus anthracis, astrain of a strain of Bordetella pertussis, a strain of a strain ofBorrelia burgdorferi, a strain of a strain of Brucella abortus, a strainof a strain of Brucella canis, a strain of a strain of Brucellamelitensis, a strain of a strain of Brucella suis, a strain of a strainof Campylobacter jejuni, a strain of Chlamydia pneumoniae, a strain ofChlamydia trachomatis, a strain of Chlamydophila psittaci, a strain ofClostridium botulinum, a strain of Clostridium difficile, a strain ofClostridium perfringens, a strain of Clostridium tetani, a strain ofCorynebacterium diphtheria, a strain of Enterobacter sakazakii, a strainof Enterococcus faecalis, a strain of Enterococcus faecium, a strain ofEscherichia coli (e.g., E. coli O157 H7), a strain of Francisellatularensis, a strain of Haemophilus influenza, a strain of Helicobacterpylori, a strain of Legionella pneumophila, a strain of Leptospirainterrogans, a strain of Listeria monocytogenes, a strain ofMycobacterium leprae, a strain of Mycobacterium tuberculosis, a strainof Mycobacterium ulcerans, a strain of Mycoplasma pneumonia, a strain ofNeisseria gonorrhoeae, a strain of Neisseria meningitides, a strain ofPseudomonas aeruginosa, a strain of Rickettsia rickettsia, a strain ofSalmonella typhi and Salmonella typhimurium, a strain of Shigellasonnei, a strain of Staphylococcus aureus, a strain of Staphylococcusepidermidis, a strain of Staphylococcus saprophyticus, a strain ofStreptococcus agalactiae, a strain of Streptococcus pneumonia, a strainof Streptococcus pyogenes, a strain of Treponema palhidum, a strain ofVibrio cholera, a strain of Yersima enterocolitica, and, a strain ofYersinia pestis.

In some embodiments, the bacterium is a commensal bacterium (e.g., aprobiotic). In some embodiments, the bacterium has been previouslyadministered to a subject, e.g., as a live biotherapeutic agent.Exemplary commensal bacteria include, but are not limited to,Faecalibacterium prausnitzii (also referred to as Bacteroidespraussnitzii), Roseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialisterinvisus, Ruminococcus albus, Ruminococcus gnavus, Ruminococcus torques,Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a virus. In some embodiments, thevirus is a pathogenic virus. Non-limiting examples of pathogenic virusesbelong to the families Adenoviridae, Picornaviridae, Herpesviridae,Hepadnaviridae, Flaviviridae, Retroviridae, Orthomyxoviridae,Paramyxoviridae, Papovaviridae, Polyomavirus, Rhabdoviridae, andTogaviridae.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a fungus. In some embodiments, thefungi is a pathogenic fungus. Non-limiting examples of pathogenic fungibelong to the genera Asperfillus, Canidia, Cryptococcus, Histoplasma,Pneumocystis, and Stachybotrys. Non-limiting examples of specificpathogenic fungi species include a strain of Aspergillus clavatus,Aspergillus fumigatus, Aspergillus flavus, Canidla albicans,Cryptococcus albidus, Cryptococcus gattii, Cryptococcus laurentii,Cryptococcus neoformans, Histoplasma capsulatum, Pneumocystis jirovecii,Pneumocystis carinii, and Stachybotrys chartarum.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a protozoan. In some embodiments,the analyte is a pathogenic protozoan. Non-limiting examples ofpathogenic protozoa belong to the genera Acanthamoeba, Balamuthia,Cryptosporidium, Dientamoeba, Endolimax, Entamoeba, Giardia, Iodamoeba,Leishmania, Naegleria, Plasmodium, Sappinia, Toxoplasma, Trichomonas,and Trypanosoma. Non-limiting examples of specific pathogenic protozoaspecies include a strain of Acanthamoeba spp., Balamuthia mandrillaris,Cryptosporidium canis, Cryptosporidium felis, Cryptosporidium hominis,Cryptosporidium meleagridis, Cryptosporidium muris, Cryptosporidiumparvum, Dientamoeba fragilis, Endolimax nana, Entamoeba dispar,Entamoeba hartmanni, Entamoeba histolytica, Entamoeba coli, Entamoebamoshkovsku, Giardia lomblia, Iodamoeba butschlii, Leishmania aethiopica,Leishmania braziliensis, Leishmania chagasi, Leishmania donovani,Leishmania infantum, Leishmania major, Leishmania mexicana, Leishmaniatropica, Naegleria fowleri, Plasmodium falciparum, Plasmodium knowlesi,Plasmodium malariae, Plasmodium ovale, Plasmodium vivax, Sappiniadiploidea, Toxoplasma gondii, Trichomonas vaginalis, Trypanosoma brucei,and Trypanosoma cruzi.

In some embodiments, the analyte is secreted by or expressed on the cellsurface of a microorganism (e.g., a bacterium, a colonic bacterium, aviable bacterium, a dead bacterium, a parasite (e.g., Giardia lamblia,Cryptosporidium, Cystoisosporiasis belli, and Balantidium coli), a virus(e.g., a herpes virus, a cytomegalovirus, a herpes simplex virus, anEpstein-Barr virus, a human papilloma virus, a rotavirus, a humanherpesvirus-8; Goodgame (1999) Curr. Gastroenterol. Rep. 1(4): 292-300).In some embodiments, the analyte is secreted by or expressed on the cellsurface of a Gram-negative bacterium (e.g., E. coli, Helicobacterpylori). In some embodiments, the analyte is secreted by or expressed onthe cell surface (e.g., a bacterial surface epitope) of a Gram-positivebacterium (e.g., Staphylococcus aureus, Clostridium botulinum,Clostridium difficile).

In some embodiments, the analyte is a molecule expressed on the surfaceof a bacterial cell (e.g., a bacterial cell surface protein). In someembodiments, the analyte is a bacterial toxin (e.g., TcdA and/or TcdBfrom Clostridium difficile). In some embodiments, the analyte is CFA/Ifimbriae, flagella, lipopolysaccharide (LPS), lipoteichoic acid, or apeptidoglycan. Non-limiting examples of bacterium that may express ananalyte that can be detected using any of the devices and methodsdescribed herein include: Bacillus anthraces, Bacillus cereus,Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Escherichia coli, Yersiniapestis, Yersinia enterocolitica, Francisella tularensis, Brucellaspecies, Clostridium perfringens, Burkholderia mallei, Burkholderiapseudomallei, Helicobacter pylori, Staphylococcus species, Mycobacteriumspecies, Group A Streptococcus, Group B Streptococcus, Streptococcuspneumoniae, Francisella tularensis, Salmonella enteritidis, Mycoplasmahominis, Mycoplasma orale, Mycoplasma salivarium, Mycoplasma fermentans,Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycobacterium bovis, Mycobacterium tuberculosis,Mycobacterium avium, Mycobacterium leprae, Rickettsia rickettsia,Rickettsia akari, Rickettsia prowazekii, Rickettsia canada, Bacillussubtilis, Bacillus subtilis niger, Bacillus thuringiensis, Coxiellabumetti, Candida albicans, Bacteroides fragilis, Leptospira interrogans,Listeria monocytogenes, Pasteurella multocida, Salmonella typhi,Salmonella typhimurium, Shigella dysenteriae, Shigella flexneria,Shigella sonnei, Vibrio cholera, and Vibrio parahaemolyticus.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a byproduct from a bacterium oranother microorganism, e.g., helminth ova, enterotoxin (Clostridiumdifficile toxin A; TcdA), cytotoxin (Clostridium difficile toxin B;TcdB), and ammonia. In some embodiments, the analyte is an antigen froma microorganism (e.g., a bacteria, virus, prion, fungus, protozoan or aparasite).

In some embodiments, the analytes include drugs, metabolites,pesticides, pollutants, and the like. Included among drugs of interestare the alkaloids. Among the alkaloids are morphine alkaloids, whichincludes morphine, codeine, heroin, dextromethorphan, their derivativesand metabolites; cocaine alkaloids, which include cocaine and benzylecgonine, their derivatives and metabolites; ergot alkaloids, whichinclude the diethylamide of lysergic acid; steroid alkaloids; iminazoylalkaloids; quinazoline alkaloids; isoquinoline alkaloids; quinolinealkaloids, which include quinine and quinidine; diterpene alkaloids,their derivatives and metabolites.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a steroid selected from theestrogens, androgens, andreocortical steroids, bile acids, cardiotonicglycosides and aglycones, which includes digoxin and digoxigenin,saponins and sapogenins, their derivatives and metabolites. Alsoincluded are the steroid mimetic substances, such as diethylstilbestrol.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a bile acid or a bile salt (alsoknown as a conjugated bile acid). Bile acids are products of cholesterolsynthesis that are synthesized in the liver, conjugated to taurine orglycine, and stored in the gallbladder until released into the smallintestine. The primary bile acids are cholic acid, and chenodeoxycholicacid, which are deconjugated and dehydroxylated by instestinal bacteriato form the secondary bile acids deoxycholic acid and lithocholic acid,respectively. The majority of bile acids (about 95%) are reabsorbed inthe distal ileum and returned to the liver (see, e.g., U.S. PublicationNo. 2017/0343535, incorporated herein by reference). Impaired absorptionof bile acids in the ileum can lead to excess bile acids in the colonwhich can cause symptoms of bile acid malabsorption (BAM; also known asbile acid diarrhea), including watery stool and fecal incontinence.Interestingly, up to 50% of patients with irritable bowel syndrome withdiarrhea (IBS-D) also have BAM (see, e.g., Camilleri et al. (2009)Neurogastroeterol. Motil. 21(7): 734-43). In some embodiments, thepresence, absence, and/or a specific level of one or more bile acids orbile salts in the GI tract of a subject is indicative of a condition ordisease state (e.g., a GI disorder and/or a non-GI disorder (e.g., asystemic disorder or a liver disease)). In some embodiments, thecompositions, devices, and methods described herein may be used todetect, analyze and/or quantify at least one bile acid or bile salt inthe GI tract of the subject to diagnose a GI disorder such as BAM or IBS(e.g., IBS-D). In some embodiments, the devices, methods andcompositions described herein can be used to detect, quantitate, and/oranalyze a bile acid or a bile salt in the GI tract of a subject. Forinstance, the presence and/or absence, and/or the concentration of abile acid, a bile salt, or a combination thereof, may be determined at aspecific region of the GI tract of a subject (e.g., one or more of theduodenum, jejunum, ileum, ascending colon, transverse colon ordescending colon) to determine whether the subject has or is at risk ofdeveloping a GI disorder, such as BAM or IBS-D. In some embodiments, thedevices, methods and compositions described herein can be used todetermine the ratio of two or more bile acids or bile acid salts in theGI tract of a subject (e.g., a specific region of the GI tract of asubject including one or more of the duodenum, jejunum, ileum, ascendingcolon, transverse colon or descending colon). In some embodiments, thepresence and/or absence, and/or the concentration of a bile acid, a bilesalt, or a combination thereof, is determined in the ileum of a subject.In some embodiments, the presence and/or absence, and/or theconcentration of a bile acid, a bile salt, or a combination thereof, isdetermined in the colon of a subject. In some embodiments, theconcentration of a bile acid, a bile salt, or a combination thereof, isdetermined in specific regions of the GI tract of the subject, and forexample, compared to determine where along the GI tract the compoundsare accumulating. In some embodiments, the detection of a concentrationof a bile acid, bile salt, or a combination thereof, in a specificregion of the GI tract of the subject (e.g., the colon or the ileum)that is above a reference level of a bile acid, bile salt, or acombination thereof (e.g., the average level of a bile acid in healthysubjects) may be indicative of BAM and/or IBS-D in a subject. In someembodiments, the bile acid is selected from the group consisting ofchenodeoxycholic acid, cholic acid, deoxycholate, lithocholate, andursodeoxycholic acid. In some embodiments, the bile acid comprisescholesten-3-one or a structural variant thereof. In some embodiments,the bile acid is cholesten-3-one or a structural variant thereof. Insome embodiments, the bile acid is cholesten-3-one. In some embodiments,the bile acid is a structural variant of cholesten-3-one. In someembodiments, the bile salt is selected from the group consisting ofglycocholic acid, taurocholic acid, glycodeoxycholic acid,glycochenodeoxycholic acid, taurodeoxycholic acid, taurochenodeoxycholicacid, glycolithocholic acid, and taurolithocholic acid.

In some embodiments, the analyte is 7α-hydroxy-4-cholesten-3-one (7αC4).The measurement of 7αC4 allows for the monitoring of the enzymaticactivity of hepatic cholesterol 7α-hydroxylase, the rate limiting enzymein the synthesis of bile acids and can be used as a surrogate to detectBAM (see, e.g., Galman et al. (2003) J. Lipid. Res. 44: 859-66; andCamilleri et al. (2009) Neurogastroeterol. Motil. 21(7): 734-43,incorporated herein by reference in their entirety).

In some embodiments, the analyte comprises cholesterol, a lipid, a fatsoluble vitamin (e.g., ascorbic acid, cholecalciferol, ergocalciferol, atocopherol, a tocotrienol, phylloquinone, and a menaquinone), bilirubin,fibroblast growth factor 19 (FGF19), TGRS (also known as GP-BAR1 orM-BAR), glycine, taurine, or cholecystokinin (CCK or CCK-PZ). In someembodiments, the analyte comprises cholecystokinin. Cholecystokinin is apeptide hormone that contributes to control intestinal motility (seeRehfeld (2017) Front. Endocrinol. (Lausanne) 8: 47). In someembodiments, the analyte comprises secretin. Secretin is a peptidehormone that regulates the pH of the duodenal content by controllinggastric acid secretion, regulates bile acid and bicarbonate secretion inthe duodenum, and regulates water homeostasis (see, e.g., Afroze et al.(2013) Ann. Transl. Med. 1(3): 29). In some embodiments, a subject hasbeen administered cholecystokinin or secretin to induce the release ofan analyte (e.g., from the liver and/or gall bladder into the GI tract).

In some embodiments, the analyte is a metabolite in the serotonin,tryptophan and/or kynurenine pathways, including but not limited to,serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindole acetic acid (5-HIAA),5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid (KA),3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilic acid (3-HAA),quinolinic acid, anthranilic acid, and combinations thereof 5-HT is amolecule that plays a role in the regulation of gastrointestinalmotility, secretion, and sensation. Imbalances in the levels of 5-HT areassociated with several diseases including inflammatory bowel syndrome(IBS), autism, gastric ulcer formation, non-cardiac chest pain, andfunctional dyspepsia (see, e.g., Faure et al. (2010) Gastroenterology139(1): 249-58 and Muller et al. (2016) Neuroscience 321: 24-41, andInternational Publication No. WO 2014/188377, each of which areincorporated herein by reference). Conversion of metabolites within theserotonin, tryptophan and/or kynurenine pathways affects the levels of5-HT in a subject. Therefore, measuring the levels of one or more of themetabolites in this pathway may be used for the diagnosis, managementand treatment of a disease or disorder associated with 5-HT imbalanceincluding but not limited to IBS, autism, carcinoid syndrome,depression, hypertension, Alzheimer's disease, constipation, migraine,and serotonin syndrome. One or more analytes in the serotonin,tryptophan and/or kynurenine pathways can be detected and/or quantitatedusing, for example, methods and analyte-binding agents that bind tothese metabolites including, e.g., antibodies, known in the art (see,e.g., International Publication No. WO2014/188377, the entire contentsof which are expressly incorporated herein by reference).

In some embodiments, the analyte is a lactam having from 5 to 6 annularmembers selected from barbituates, e.g., phenobarbital and secobarbital,diphenylhydantonin, primidone, ethosuximide, and metabolites thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte is an aminoalkylbenzene, with alkyl offrom 2 to 3 carbon atoms, selected from the amphetamines;catecholamines, which includes ephedrine, L-dopa, epinephrine; narceine;papaverine; and metabolites thereof.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a benzheterocyclic selected fromoxazepam, chlorpromazine, tegretol, their derivatives and metabolites,the heterocyclic rings being azepines, diazepines and phenothiazines.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a purine selected from theophylline,caffeine, their metabolites and derivatives.

In some embodiments, the analyte is marijuana, cannabinol ortetrahydrocannabinol.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a vitamin such as vitamin A, vitaminB, e.g. vitamin B12, vitamin C, vitamin D, vitamin E and vitamin K,folic acid, thiamine.

In some embodiments, the analyte is selected from prostaglandins, whichdiffer by the degree and sites of hydroxylation and unsaturation.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a tricyclic antidepressant selectedfrom imipramine, dismethylimipramine, amitriptyline, nortriptyline,protriptyline, trimipramine, chlomipramine, doxepine, anddesmethyldoxepin.

In some embodiments, the analyte is selected from anti-neoplastics,including methotrexate.

In some embodiments, the analyte is an antibiotic as described herein,including, but not limited to, penicillin, chloromycetin, actinomycetin,tetracycline, terramycin, and metabolites and derivatives.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a nucleoside or nucleotide selectedfrom ATP, NAD, FMN, adenosine, guanosine, thymidine, and cytidine withtheir appropriate sugar and phosphate substituents.

In some embodiments, the analyte is selected from methadone,meprobamate, serotonin, meperidine, lidocaine, procainamide,acetylprocainamide, propranolol, griseofulvin, valproic acid,butyrophenones, antihistamines, chloramphenicol, anticholinergic drugs,such as atropine, their metabolites and derivatives.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a metabolite related to a diseasedstate. Such metabolites include, but are not limited to spermine,galactose, phenylpyruvic acid, and porphyrin Type 1.

In some embodiments, the analyte is an aminoglycoside, such asgentamicin, kanamicin, tobramycin, or amikacin.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a pesticide. Among pesticides ofinterest are polyhalogenated biphenyls, phosphate esters,thiophosphates, carbamates, polyhalogenated sulfenamides, theirmetabolites and derivatives.

In some embodiments, the analyte has a molecular weight of about 500 Dato about 1,000,000 Da (e.g., about 500 to about 500,000 Da, about 1,000to about 100,000 Da).

In some embodiments, the analyte is a receptor, with a molecular weightranging from 10,000 to 2×10⁸ Da, more usually from 10,000 to 10⁶ Da. Forimmunoglobulins, IgA, IgG, IgE and IgM, the molecular weights willgenerally vary from about 160,000 Da to about 10⁶ Da. Enzymes willnormally range in molecular weight from about 10,000 Da to about1,000,000 Da. Natural receptors vary widely, generally having amolecular weight of at least about 25,000 Da and may be 10⁶ or higherDa, including such materials as avidin, DNA, RNA, thyroxine bindingglobulin, thyroxine binding prealbumin, transcortin, etc.

In some embodiments, the term “analyte” further includes polynucleotideanalytes such as those polynucleotides defined below. These includem-RNA, r-RNA, t-RNA, DNA, DNA-DNA duplexes, DNA-RNA duplexes, nucleicacid molecules comprising modified bases, locked nucleic acid molecules(LNA molecules), antagomirs, peptide nucleic acid molecules (PNAmolecules), antisense RNA or DNA molecules (e.g., antisense moleculesincluding modifications to the sugars, bases, backbone linkages thatallow for specific detection), chimeric antisense oligonucleotides,antisense oligonucleotides comprising modified linkages, interferenceRNA (RNAi), short interfering RNA (siRNA); a micro, interfering RNA(miRNA); a small, temporal RNA (stRNA); or a short, hairpin RNA (shRNA);small RNA-induced gene activation (RNAa); small activating RNAs(saRNAs), etc. The term analyte also includes polynucleotide-bindingagents, such as, for example, restriction enzymes, trascription factors,transcription activators, transcription repressors, nucleases,polymerases, histones, DNA repair enzymes, intercalating gagents,chemotherapeutic agents, and the like.

In some embodiments, the analyte may be a molecule found directly in asample such as a body fluid from a host. The sample can be examineddirectly or may be pretreated to render the analyte more readilydetectible. Furthermore, the analyte of interest may be determined bydetecting an agent probative of the analyte of interest (i.e., ananalyte-binding agent), such as a specific binding pair membercomplementary to the analyte of interest, whose presence will bedetected only when the analyte of interest is present in a sample. Thus,the agent probative of the analyte becomes the analyte that is detectedin an assay.

In some embodiments, the analyte a nucleic acid (e.g., a bacterial DNAmolecule or a bacterial RNA molecule (e.g., a bacterial tRNA, atransfer-messenger RNA (tmRNA)). See, e.g., Sjostrom et al. (2015)Scientific Reports 5: 15329; Ghosal (2017) Microbial Pathogenesis 104:161-163; Shen et al. (2012) Cell Host Microbe. 12(4): 509-520.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a component of an outer membranevesicle (OMV) (e.g., an OmpU protein, Elluri et al. (2014) PloS One 9:e106731). See, e.g., Kulp and Kuehn (2010) Annual Review of microbiology64: 163-184; Berleman and Auer (2013) Environmental microbiology 15:347-354; Wai et al. (1995) Microbiology and immunology 39: 451-456;Lindmark et al. (2009) BMC microbiology 9: 220; Sjostrom et al. (2015)Scientific Reports 5: 15329.

In some embodiments, the analyte is G-CSF, which can stimulate the bonemarrow to produce granulocytes and stem cells and release them into thebloodstream.

In some embodiments, the analyte is an enzyme such as glutathioneS-transferase. For example, the ingestible device can include P28GST, a28 kDa helminth protein from Schistosoma with potent immunogenic andantioxidant properties. P28GST prevents intestinal inflammation inexperimental colitis through a Th2-type response with mucosaleosinophils and can be recombinantly produced (e.g., in S. cerevisiae).See, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 9,593,313, Driss et al., MucosalImmunology, 2016 9, 322-335; and Capron et al., Gastroenterology,146(5):S-638.

In some embodiments, the analyte is a metabolite in the serotonin,tryptophan and/or kynurenine pathways, including but not limited to,serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindole acetic acid (5-HIAA),5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid (KA),3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilic acid (3-HAA),quinolinic acid, anthranilic acid, and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, analytes are therapeutic agents, fragments thereof,and metabolites thereof (e.g., antibiotics). In some embodiments,analytes are biomarkers. In some embodiments, the analytes areantibodies. In some embodiments, the analytes are antibiotics.Additional exemplary analytes (e.g., therapeutic agents (e.g., drugs),antibodies, antibiotics and biomarkers) are provided below.

A. Antibodies

In some embodiments, the analyte or the analyte-binding agent is anantibody. An “antibody” is an immunoglobulin molecule capable ofspecific binding to a target, such as a carbohydrate, polynucleotide,lipid, polypeptide, etc., through at least one antigen recognition site,located in the variable region of the immunoglobulin molecule. As usedherein, the term encompasses not only intact polyclonal or monoclonalantibodies, but also fragments thereof (such as Fab, Fab′, F(ab′)2, Fv),single chain (ScFv) and domain antibodies), and fusion proteinsincluding an antibody portion, and any other modified configuration ofthe immunoglobulin molecule that includes an antigen recognition site.The term antibody includes antibody fragments (e.g., antigen-bindingfragments) such as an Fv fragment, a Fab fragment, a F(ab′)2 fragment,and a Fab′ fragment. Additional examples of antigen-binding fragmentsinclude an antigen-binding fragment of an IgG (e.g., an antigen-bindingfragment of IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, or IgG4) (e.g., an antigen-bindingfragment of a human or humanized IgG, e.g., human or humanized IgG1,IgG2, IgG3, or IgG4); an antigen-binding fragment of an IgA (e.g., anantigen-binding fragment of IgA1 or IgA2) (e.g., an antigen-bindingfragment of a human or humanized IgA, e.g., a human or humanized IgA1 orIgA2); an antigen-binding fragment of an IgD (e.g., an antigen-bindingfragment of a human or humanized IgD); an antigen-binding fragment of anIgE (e.g., an antigen-binding fragment of a human or humanized IgE); oran antigen-binding fragment of an IgM (e.g., an antigen-binding fragmentof a human or humanized IgM). An antibody includes an antibody of anyclass, such as IgG, IgA, or IgM (or sub-class thereof), and the antibodyneed not be of any particular class. Depending on the antibody aminoacid sequence of the constant domain of its heavy chains,immunoglobulins can be assigned to different classes. There are fivemajor classes of immunoglobulins: IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG, and IgM, andseveral of these may be further divided into subclasses (isotypes),e.g., IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1 and IgA2. The heavy-chain constantdomains that correspond to the different classes of immunoglobulins arecalled alpha, delta, epsilon, gamma, and mu, respectively. The subunitstructures and three-dimensional configurations of different classes ofimmunoglobulins are well known.

As used herein, “monoclonal antibody” refers to an antibody obtainedfrom a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., theindividual antibodies including the population are identical except forpossible naturally-occurring mutations that may be present in minoramounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directedagainst a single antigenic site. Furthermore, in contrast to polyclonalantibody preparations, which typically include different antibodiesdirected against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonalantibody is directed against a single determinant on the antigen. Themodifier “monoclonal” indicates the character of the antibody as beingobtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, andis not to be construed as requiring production of the antibody by anyparticular method. For example, the monoclonal antibodies to be used inaccordance with the present invention may be made by the hybridomamethod first described by Kohler and Milstein, 1975, Nature 256:495, ormay be made by recombinant DNA methods such as described in U.S. Pat.No. 4,816,567. The monoclonal antibodies may also be isolated from phagelibraries generated using the techniques described in McCafferty et al.,1990, Nature 348:552-554, for example.

A “variable region” of an antibody refers to the variable region of theantibody light chain or the variable region of the antibody heavy chain,either alone or in combination. As known in the art, the variableregions of the heavy and light chain each consist of four frameworkregions (FR) connected by three complementarity determining regions(CDRs) that contain hypervariable regions. The CDRs in each chain areheld together in close proximity by the FRs and, with the CDRs from theother chain, contribute to the formation of the antigen-binding site ofantibodies. There are at least two techniques for determining CDRs: (1)an approach based on cross-species sequence variability (i.e., Kabat etal. Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, (5th ed., 1991,National Institutes of Health, Bethesda Md.)); and (2) an approach basedon crystallographic studies of antigen-antibody complexes (Al-Lazikaniet al, 1997, J. Molec. Biol. 273:927-948). As used herein, a CDR mayrefer to CDRs defined by either approach or by a combination of bothapproaches.

As known in the art, a “constant region” of an antibody refers to theconstant region of the antibody light chain or the constant region ofthe antibody heavy chain, either alone or in combination.

A “derivative” refers to any polypeptide (e.g., an antibody) having asubstantially identical amino acid sequence to the naturally occurringpolypeptide, in which one or more amino acids have been modified at sidegroups of the amino acids (e.g., an biotinylated protein or antibody).The term “derivative” shall also include any polypeptide (e.g., anantibody) which has one or more amino acids deleted from, added to, orsubstituted from the natural polypeptide sequence, but which retains asubstantial amino acid sequence homology to the natural sequence. Asubstantial sequence homology is any homology greater than 50 percent.

In some embodiments, the antibody can be a humanized antibody, achimeric antibody, a multivalent antibody, or a fragment thereof. Insome embodiments, an antibody can be a scFv-Fc (Sokolowska-Wedzina etal., Mol. Cancer Res. 15(8):1040-1050, 2017), a VHH domain (Li et al.,Immunol. Lett. 188:89-95, 2017), a VNAR domain (Hasler et al., Mol.Immunol. 75:28-37, 2016), a (scFv)₂, a minibody (Kim et al., PLoS One10(1):e113442, 2014), or a BiTE. In some embodiments, an antibody can bea DVD-Ig (Wu et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 25(11):1290-1297, 2007; WO08/024188; WO 07/024715), and a dual-affinity re-targeting antibody(DART) (Tsai et al., Mol. Ther. Oncolytics 3:15024, 2016), a triomab(Chelius et al., MAbs 2(3):309-319, 2010), kih IgG with a common LC(Kontermann et al., Drug Discovery Today 20(7):838-847, 2015), acrossmab (Regula et al., EMBO Mol. Med. 9(7):985, 2017), an ortho-FabIgG (Kontermann et al., Drug Discovery Today 20(7):838-847, 2015), a2-in-1-IgG (Kontermann et al., Drug Discovery Today 20(7):838-847,2015), IgG-scFv (Cheat et al., Mol. Cancer Ther. 13(7):1803-1812, 2014),scFv2-Fc (Natsume et al., J. Biochem. 140(3):359-368, 2006), abi-nanobody (Kontermann et al., Drug Discovery Today 20(7):838-847,2015), tanden antibody (Kontermann et al., Drug Discovery Today20(7):838-847, 2015), a DART-Fc (Kontermann et al., Drug Discovery Today20(7):838-847, 2015), a scFv-HSA-scFv (Kontermann et al., Drug DiscoveryToday 20(7):838-847, 2015), DNL-Fab3 (Kontermann et al., Drug DiscoveryToday 20(7):838-847, 2015), DAF (two-in-one or four-in-one), DutaMab,DT-IgG, knobs-in-holes common LC, knobs-in-holes assembly, charge pairantibody, Fab-arm exchange antibody, SEEDbody, Triomab, LUZ-Y, Fcab,kλ-body, orthogonal Fab, DVD-IgG, IgG(H)-scFv, scFv-(H)IgG, IgG(L)-scFv,scFv-(L)-IgG, IgG (L,H)-Fc, IgG(H)-V, V(H)-IgG, IgG(L)-V, V(L)-IgG, KIHIgG-scFab, 2scFv-IgG, IgG-2scFv, scFv4-Ig, Zybody, DVI-IgG, nanobody(e.g., antibodies derived from Camelus bactriamus, Calelus dromaderius,or Lama paccos) (U.S. Pat. No. 5,759,808; Stijlemans et al., J. Biol.Chem. 279:1256-1261, 2004; Dumoulin et al., Nature 424:783-788, 2003;and Pleschberger et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 14:440-448, 2003),nanobody-HSA, a diabody (e.g., Poljak, Structure 2(12):1121-1123, 1994;Hudson et al., J. Immunol. Methods 23(1-2):177-189, 1999), a TandAb(Reusch et al., mAbs 6(3):727-738, 2014), scDiabody (Cuesta et al.,Trends in Biotechnol. 28(7):355-362, 2010), scDiabody-CH3 (Sanz et al.,Trends in Immunol. 25(2):85-91, 2004), Diabody-CH3 (Guo et al.), TripleBody, miniantibody, minibody, TriBi minibody, scFv-CH3 KIH, Fab-scFv,scFv-CH-CL-scFv, F(ab′)2-scFV2, scFv-KIH, Fab-scFv-Fc, tetravalent HCAb,scDiabody-Fc, diabody-Fc, tandem scFv-Fc, intrabody (Huston et al.,Human Antibodies 10(3-4):127-142, 2001; Wheeler et al., Mol. Ther.8(3):355-366, 2003; Stocks, Drug Discov. Today 9(22):960-966, 2004),dock and lock bispecific antibody, ImmTAC, HSAbody, scDiabody-HSA,tandem scFv, IgG-IgG, Cov-X-Body, and scFv1-PEG-scFv2.

In some embodiments, an antibody can be an IgNAR, a bispecific antibody(Milstein and Cuello, Nature 305:537-539, 1983; Suresh et al., Methodsin Enzymology 121:210, 1986; WO 96/27011; Brennan et al., Science229:81, 1985; Shalaby et al., J. Exp. Med. 175:217-225, 1992; Kolstelnyet al., J. Immunol. 148(5):1547-1553, 1992; Hollinger et al., Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6444-6448, 1993; Gruber et al., J. Immunol.152:5368, 1994; Tuft et al., J. Immunol. 147:60, 1991), a bispecificdiabody, a triabody (Schoonooghe et al., BMC Biotechnol. 9:70, 2009), atetrabody, scFv-Fc knobs-into-holes, a scFv-Fc-scFv, a (Fab′scFv)₂, aV-IgG, a IvG-V, a dual V domain IgG, a heavy chain immunoglobulin or acamelid (Holt et al., Trends Biotechnol. 21(11):484-490, 2003), anintrabody, a monoclonal antibody (e.g., a human or humanized monoclonalantibody), a heteroconjugate antibody (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980), alinear antibody (Zapata et al., Protein Eng. 8(10:1057-1062, 1995), atrispecific antibody (Tuft et al., J. Immunol. 147:60, 1991), aFabs-in-Tandem immunoglobulin (WO 15/103072), or a humanized camelidantibody.

In some embodiments, the antibody binds specifically to a metabolite inthe serotonin, tryptophan and/or kynurenine pathways, including but notlimited to, serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindole acetic acid (5-HIAA),5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid (KA),3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilic acid (3-HAA),quinolinic acid, anthranilic acid. Exemplary antibodies that bind tometabolites in these pathways are disclosed, for example, inInternational Publication No. WO2014/188377, the entire contents ofwhich are incorporated herein by reference.

In some embodiments, the antibody is specific for a particular genus,species, or strain of a microorganism, and may therefore be used for thedetection, analysis and/or quantitation of the microorganism using thedetection methods described below. In some embodiments, the antibodyspecifically binds to a surface-specific biomolecule (e.g., a pilussubunit or a flagella protein) present in a particular genus, species orstrain of microorganism, and does not cross-react with othermicroorganisms. In some embodiments, these antibodies may be used in themethods described herein to diagnose a subject with a particularinfection or disease, or to monitor an infection (e.g., during or aftertreatment). In some embodiments, the antibody specifically binds to anantigen present in a particular genera, species or strain of amicroorganism. Exemplary antigens, the corresponding microorganism thatcan be detected, and the disease caused by the microorganism (inparentheticals) include: outer membrane protein A OmpA (Acinetobacterbaumannii, Acinetobacter infections)); HIV p24 antigen, HIV Eenvelopeproteins (Gp120, Gp41, Gp160) (HIV (Human immunodeficiency virus), AIDS(Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome)); galactose-inhibitable adherenceprotein GIAP, 29 kDa antigen Eh29, GaVGaINAc lectin, protein CRT, 125kDa immunodominant antigen, protein M17, adhesin ADH112, protein STIRP(Entamoeba histolytica, Amoebiasis); protective Antigen PA, edema factorEF, lethal facotor LF, the S-layer homology proteins SLH (Bacillusanthraces, Anthrax); nucleocapsid protein NP, glycoprotein precursorGPC, glycoprotein GP1, glycoprotein GP2 (Junin virus, Argentinehemorrhagic fever); 41 kDa allergen Asp v13, allergen Asp f3, majorconidial surface protein rodlet A, protease Peplp, GPI-anchored proteinGellp, GPI-anchored protein Crflp (Aspergillus genus, Aspergillosis);outer surface protein A OspA, outer surface protein OspB, outer surfaceprotein OspC, decorin binding protein A DbpA, flagellar filament 41 kDacore protein Fla, basic membrane protein A precursor BmpA(Immunodominant antigen P39), outer surface 22 kDa lipoprotein precursor(antigen IPLA7), variable surface lipoprotein vIsE (Borrelia genus,Borrelia infection); OmpA-like transmembrane domain-containing proteinOmp31, immunogenic 39-kDa protein M5 P39, 25 kDa outer-membraneimmunogenic protein precursor Omp25, outer membrane protein MotY Omp16,conserved outer membrane protein D15, malate dehydrogenase Mdh,component of the Type-IV secretion system (T4SS) VirJ, lipoprotein ofunknown function BAB1_0187 (Brucella genus, Brucellosis); major outermembrane protein PorA, flagellin FIaA, surface antigen CjaA, fibronectinbinding protein CadF, aspartate/glutamate-binding ABC transporterprotein Peb1A, protein FspA1, protein FspA2 (Campylobacter genus,Campylobacteriosis); glycolytic enzyme enolase, secreted aspartylproteinases SAP1-10, glycophosphatidylinositol (GPI)-linked cell wallprotein, adhesin Als3p, cell surface hydrophobicity protein CSH (usuallyCandida albicans and other Candida species, Candidiasis); envelopeglycoproteins (gB, gC, gE, gH, gI, gK, gL) (Varicella zoster virus(VZV), Chickenpox); major outer membrane protein MOMP, probable outermembrane protein PMPC, outer membrane complex protein B OmcB (Chlamydiatrachomatis, Chlamydia); major outer membrane protein MOMP, outermembrane protein 2 Omp2, (Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Chlamydophilapneumoniae infection); outer membrane protein U Porin ompU, (Vibriocholerae, Cholera); surface layer proteins SLPs, Cell Wall Protein CwpV,flagellar protein FliC, flagellar protein FliD (Clostridium difficile,Clostridium difficile infection); acidic ribosomal protein P2 CpP2,mucin antigens Muc1, Muc2, Muc3 Muc4, Muc5, Muc6, Muc7, surfaceadherence protein CP20, surface adherence protein CP23, surface proteinCP12, surface protein CP21, surface protein CP40, surface protein CP60,surface protein CP15, surface-associated glycopeptides gp40,surface-associated glycopeptides gp15, oocyst wall protein AB, profilinPRF, apyrase (Cryptosporidium genus, Cryptosporidiosis); membraneprotein pp15, capsid-proximal tegument protein pp150 (Cytomegalovirus,Cytomegalovirus infection); prion protein (vCJD prion, VariantCreutzfeldt-Jakob disease (vCJD, nvCJD)); cyst wall proteins CWP1, CWP2,CWP3, variant surface protein VSP, VSP1, VSP2, VSP3, VSP4, VSPS, VSP6,56 kDa antigen (Giardia intestinalis, Giardiasis); minorpilin-associated subunit pilC, major pilin subunit and variants pilE,pilS (Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Gonorrhea); outer membrane protein A OmpA,outer membrane protein C OmpC, outer membrane protein K17 OmpK17(Klebsiella granulomatis, Granuloma inguinale (Donovanosis));fibronectin-binding protein Sfb (Streptococcus pyogenes, Group Astreptococcal infection); outer membrane protein P6 (Haemophilusinfluenzae, Haemophilus influenzae infection); integral membraneproteins, aggregation-prone proteins, O-antigen, toxin-antigens Stx2B,toxin-antigen Stx1B, adhesion-antigen fragment Int28, protein EspA,protein EspB, Intimin, protein Tir, protein IntC300, protein Eae(Escherichia coli O157:H7, O111 and O0104:H4, Hemolytic-uremic syndrome(HUS)); hepatitis A surface antigen HBAg (Hepatitis A Virus, HepatitisA); hepatitis B surface antigen HBsAg (Hepatitis B Virus, Hepatitis B);envelope glycoprotein E1 gp32 gp35, envelope glycoprotein E2 NS1 gp68gp70, capsid protein C, (Hepatitis C Virus, Hepatitis C); type IV pilinPilE, outer membrane protein MIP, major outer membrane protein MompS(Legionella pneumophila, Legionellosis (Legionnaires' disease, Pontiacfever)); minor pilin-associated subunit pilC, major pilin subunit andvariants pilE, pilS (Neisseria meningitidis, Meningococcal disease);adhesin P1, adhesion P30 (Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Mycoplasma pneumonia);F1 capsule antigen, outer membrane protease Pla, (Yersinia pestis,Plague); surface adhesin PsaA, cell wall surface anchored protein psrP(Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pneumococcal infection); flagellin FliC,invasion protein SipC, glycoprotein gp43, outer membrane protein LamB,outer membrane protein PagC, outer membrane protein TolC, outer membraneprotein NmpC, outer membrane protein FadL, transport protein SadA(Salmonella genus, Salmonellosis); collagen adhesin Cna,fibronectin-binding protein A FnbA, secretory antigen SssA(Staphylococcus genus, Staphylococcal food poisoning); collagen adhesinCan (Staphylococcus genus, Staphylococcal infection);fibronectin-binding protein A FbpA (Ag85A), fibronectin-binding proteinD FbpD, fibronectin-binding protein C FbpC1, heat-shock protein HSP65,protein PST-S (Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Tuberculosis); and outermembrane protein FobA, outer membrane protein FobB, type IV piliglycosylation protein, outer membrane protein tolC, protein TolQ(Francisella tularensis, Tularemia). Additional exemplary microorganismsand corresponding antigens are disclosed, e.g., in U.S. Publication No.2015/0118264, the entire contents of which are expressly incorporatedherein by reference.

In some embodiments, a plurality of antibodies (e.g., 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or more antibodies) are used asanalyte-binding agents in any of the methods described herein (e.g., todetect the presence of one or more analytes in a sample). In someembodiments, the plurality of antibodies bind to the same analyte (e.g.,an antigen). In some embodiments, the plurality of antibodes bind to thesame epitope present on the analyte (e.g., an antigen). In someembodiments, the plurality of antibodies bind to different epitopespresent on the same analyte. In some embodiments, the plurality ofantibodies bind to overlapping epitopes present on the same analyte. Insome embodiments, the plurality of antibodies bind to non-overlappingepitopes present on the same analyte.

B. Antibiotics

In some embodiments, the analyte or analyte-binding agent is anantibiotic. An “antibiotic” or “antibiotic agent” refers to a substancethat has the capacity to inhibit or slow down the growth of, or todestroy bacteria and/or other microorganisms. In some embodiments, theantibiotic agent is a bacteriostatic antibiotic agent. In someembodiments, the antibiotic is a bacteriolytic antibiotic agent.Exemplary antibiotic agents are set forth in the U.S. Patent PublicationUS 2006/0269485, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in itsentirety.

In some embodiments, the antibiotic agent is selected from the classesconsisting of beta-lactam antibiotics, aminoglycosides, ansa-typeantibiotics, anthraquinones, antibiotic azoles, antibioticglycopeptides, macrolides, antibiotic nucleosides, antibiotic peptides,antibiotic polyenes, antibiotic polyethers, quinolones, antibioticsteroids, sulfonamides, tetracycline, dicarboxylic acids, antibioticmetals, oxidizing agents, substances that release free radicals and/oractive oxygen, cationic antimicrobial agents, quaternary ammoniumcompounds, biguanides, triguanides, bisbiguanides and analogs andpolymers thereof and naturally occurring antibiotic compounds. In someembodiments, the antibiotic is rifaximin.

Beta-lactam antibiotics include, but are not limited to,2-(3-alanyl)clavam, 2-hydroxymethylclavam, 8-epi-thienamycin,acetyl-thienamycin, amoxicillin, amoxicillin sodium, amoxicillintrihydrate, amoxicillin-potassium clavulanate combination, ampicillin,ampicillin sodium, ampicillin trihydrate, ampicillin-sulbactam,apalcillin, aspoxicillin, azidocillin, azlocillin, aztreonam,bacampicillin, biapenem, carbenicillin, carbenicillin disodium,carfecillin, carindacillin, carpetimycin, cefacetril, cefaclor,cefadroxil, cefalexin, cefaloridine, cefalotin, cefamandole,cefamandole, cefapirin, cefatrizine, cefatrizine propylene glycol,cefazedone, cefazolin, cefbuperazone, cefcapene, cefcapene pivoxilhydrochloride, cefdinir, cefditoren, cefditoren pivoxil, cefepime,cefetamet, cefetamet pivoxil, cefixime, cefinenoxime, cefinetazole,cefminox, cefminox, cefmolexin, cefodizime, cefonicid, cefoperazone,ceforanide, cefoselis, cefotaxime, cefotetan, cefotiam, cefoxitin,cefozopran, cefpiramide, cefpirome, cefpodoxime, cefpodoxime proxetil,cefprozil, cefquinome, cefradine, cefroxadine, cefsulodin, ceftazidime,cefteram, cefteram pivoxil, ceftezole, ceftibuten, ceftizoxime,ceftriaxone, cefuroxime, cefuroxime axetil, cephalosporin, cephamycin,chitinovorin, ciclacillin, clavulanic acid, clometocillin, cloxacillin,cycloserine, deoxy pluracidomycin, dicloxacillin, dihydropluracidomycin, epicillin, epithienamycin, ertapenem, faropenem,flomoxef, flucloxacillin, hetacillin, imipenem, lenampicillin,loracarbef, mecillinam, meropenem, metampicillin, meticillin,mezlocillin, moxalactam, nafcillin, northienamycin, oxacillin,panipenem, penamecillin, penicillin, phenethicillin, piperacillin,tazobactam, pivampicillin, pivcefalexin, pivmecillinam, pivmecillinamhydrochloride, pluracidomycin, propicillin, sarmoxicillin, sulbactam,sulbenicillin, talampicillin, temocillin, terconazole, thienamycin,ticarcillin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Aminoglycosides include, but are not limited to,1,2′-N-DL-isoseryl-3′,4′-dideoxykanamycin B,1,2′-N-DL-isoseryl-kanamycin B,1,2′-N—[(S)-4-amino-2-hydroxybutyryl]-3′,4′-dideoxykanamycin B,1,2′-N—[(S)-4-amino-2-hydroxybutyryl]-kanamycin B,1-N-(2-Aminobutanesulfonyl) kanamycin A,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)3′,4′-dideoxyribostamycin,1-N-(2-Aminoethanesulfonyl)3′-deoxyribostamycin,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)3′4′-dideoxykanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)kanamycin A,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)kanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminoethanesulfonyl)ribostamycin,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)3′-deoxykanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)3′4′-dideoxykanamycin B,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)kanamycin A,1-N-(2-aminopropanesulfonyl)kanamycin B,1-N-(L-4-amino-2-hydroxy-butyryl)2,′3′-dideoxy-2′-fluorokanamycin A,1-N-(L-4-amino-2-hydroxy-propionyl)2,′3′-dideoxy-2′-fluorokanamycin A,1-N-DL-3′,4′-dideoxy-isoserylkanamycin B, 1-N-DL-isoserylkanamycin,1-N-DL-isoserylkanamycin B,1-N4L-(−)-(alpha-hydroxy-gamma-aminobutyryl)]-XK-62-2,2′,3′-dideoxy-2′-fluorokanamycinA,2-hydroxygentamycin A3,2-hydroxygentamycin B, 2-hydroxygentamycin B1,2-hydroxygentamycin JI-20A, 2-hydroxygentamycin JI-20B,3″-N-methyl-4″-C-methyl-3′,4′-dodeoxy kanamycin A,3″-N-methyl-4″-C-methyl-3′,4′-dodeoxy kanamycin B,3″-N-methyl-4″-C-methyl-3′,4′-dodeoxy-6′-methyl kanamycin B,3′,4′-Dideoxy-3′-eno-ribostamycin,3′,4′-dideoxyneamine,3′,4′-dideoxyribostamycin,3′-deoxy-6′-N-methyl-kanamycin B,3′-deoxyneamine,3′-deoxyribostamycin,3′-oxysaccharocin,3,3′-nepotrehalosadiamine,3-demethoxy-2″-N-formimidoylistamycin B disulfate tetrahydrate,3-demethoxyistamycin B,3-O-demethyl-2-N-formimidoylistamycin B,3-O-demethylistamycin B,3-trehalosamine,4″,6″-dideoxydibekacin,4-N-glycyl-KA-6606VI, 5″-Amino-3′,4′,5″-trideoxy-butirosin A,6″-deoxydibekacin,6′-epifortimicin A, 6-deoxy-neomycin (structure6-deoxy-neomycin B),6-deoxy-neomycin B, 6-deoxy-neomycin C,6-deoxy-paromomycin, acmimycin, AHB-3′,4′-dideoxyribostamycin,AHB-3′-deoxykanamycin B, AHB-3′-deoxyneamine, AHB-3′-deoxyribostamycin,AHB-4″-6″-dideoxydibekacin, AHB-6″-deoxydibekacin, AHB-dideoxyneamine,AHB-kanamycin B, AHB-methyl-3′-deoxykanamycin B, amikacin, amikacinsulfate, apramycin, arbekacin, astromicin, astromicin sulfate,bekanamycin, bluensomycin, boholmycin, butirosin, butirosin B,catenulin, coumamidine gammal, coumamidinegamma2,D,L-1-N-(alpha-hydroxy-beta-aminopropionyl)-XK-62-2, dactimicin,de-O-methyl-4-N-glycyl-KA-6606VI, de-O-methyl-KA-6606I,de-O-methyl-KA-7038I, destomycin A, destomycin B,di-N6′,O3-demethylistamycin A, dibekacin, dibekacin sulfate,dihydrostreptomycin, dihydrostreptomycin sulfate,epi-formamidoylglycidylfortimicin B, epihygromycin,formimidoyl-istamycin A, formimidoyl-istamycin B, fortimicin B,fortimicin C, fortimicin D, fortimicin KE, fortimicin KF, fortimicin KG,fortimicin KG1 (stereoisomer KG1/KG2), fortimicin KG2 (stereoisomerKG1/KG2), fortimicin KG3, framycetin, framycetin sulphate, gentamicin,gentamycin sulfate, globeomycin, hybrimycin A1, hyrimycin A2, hybrimycinB1, hybrimycin B2, hybrimycin C1, hybrimycin C2, hydroxystreptomycin,hygromycin, hygromycin B, isepamicin, isepamicin sulfate, istamycin,kanamycin, kanamycin sulphate, kasugamycin, lividomycin, marcomycin,micronomicin, micronomicin sulfate, mutamicin, myomycin,N-demethyl-7-O-demethylcelesticetin, demethylcelesticetin,methanesulfonic acid derivative of istamycin, nebramycin, nebramycin,neomycin, netilmicin, oligostatin, paromomycin, quintomycin,ribostamycin, saccharocin, seldomycin, sisomicin, sorbistin,spectinomycin, streptomycin, tobramycin, trehalosmaine, trestatin,validamycin, verdamycin, xylostasin, zygomycin and analogs, salts andderivatives thereof.

Ansa-type antibiotics include, but are not limited to,21-hydroxy-25-demethyl-25-methylth ioprotostreptovaricin, 3-methylthiorifamycin, ansamitocin, atropisostreptovaricin, awamycin, halomicin,maytansine, naphthomycin, rifabutin, rifamide, rifampicin, rifamycin,rifapentine, rifaximin (e.g., Xifaxan®), rubradirin, streptovaricin,tolypomycin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic anthraquinones include, but are not limited to, auramycin,cinerubin, ditrisarubicin, ditrisarubicin C, figaroic acid fragilomycin,minomycin, rabelomycin, rudolfomycin, sulfurmycin and analogs, salts andderivatives thereof.

Antibiotic azoles include, but are not limited to, azanidazole,bifonazole, butoconazol, chlormidazole, chlormidazole hydrochloride,cloconazole, cloconazole monohydrochloride, clotrimazol, dimetridazole,econazole, econazole nitrate, enilconazole, fenticonazole, fenticonazolenitrate, fezatione, fluconazole, flutrimazole, isoconazole, isoconazolenitrate, itraconazole, ketoconazole, lanoconazole, metronidazole,metronidazole benzoate, miconazole, miconazole nitrate, neticonazole,nimorazole, niridazole, omoconazol, ornidazole, oxiconazole, oxiconazolenitrate, propenidazole, secnidazol, sertaconazole, sertaconazolenitrate, sulconazole, sulconazole nitrate, tinidazole, tioconazole,voriconazol and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic glycopeptides include, but are not limited to, acanthomycin,actaplanin, avoparcin, balhimycin, bleomycin B (copper bleomycin),chloroorienticin, chloropolysporin, demethylvancomycin, enduracidin,galacardin, guanidylfungin, hachimycin, demethylvancomycin,N-nonanoyl-teicoplanin, phleomycin, platomycin, ristocetin,staphylocidin, talisomycin, teicoplanin, vancomycin, victomycin,xylocandin, zorbamycin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Macrolides include, but are not limited to, acetylleucomycin,acetylkitasamycin, angolamycin, azithromycin, bafilomycin, brefeldin,carbomycin, chalcomycin, cirramycin, clarithromycin, concanamycin,deisovaleryl-niddamycin, demycinosyl-mycinamycin,Di-O-methyltiacumicidin, dirithromycin, erythromycin, erythromycinestolate, erythromycin ethyl succinate, erythromycin lactobionate,erythromycin stearate, flurithromycin, focusin, foromacidin,haterumalide, haterumalide, josamycin, josamycin ropionate, juvenimycin,juvenimycin, kitasamycin, ketotiacumicin, lankavacidin, lankavamycin,leucomycin, machecin, maridomycin, megalomicin, methylleucomycin,methymycin, midecamycin, miocamycin, mycaminosyltylactone, mycinomycin,neutramycin, niddamycin, nonactin, oleandomycin, phenylacetyideltamycin,pamamycin, picromycin, rokitamycin, rosaramicin, roxithromycin,sedecamycin, shincomycin, spiramycin, swalpamycin, tacrolimus,telithromycin, tiacumicin, tilmicosin, treponemycin, troleandomycin,tylosin, venturicidin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic nucleosides include, but are not limited to, amicetin,angustmycin, azathymidine, blasticidin S, epiroprim, flucytosine,gougerotin, mildiomycin, nikkomycin, nucleocidin, oxanosine, oxanosine,puromycin, pyrazomycin, showdomycin, sinefungin, sparsogenin,spicamycin, tunicamycin, uracil polyoxin, vengicide and analogs, saltsand derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic peptides include, but are not limited to, actinomycin,aculeacin, alazopeptin, amfomycin, amythiamycin, antifungal fromZalerion arboricola, antrimycin, apid, apidaecin, aspartocin,auromomycin, bacileucin, bacillomycin, bacillopeptin, bacitracin,bagacidin, beminamycin, beta-alanyl-L-tyrosine, bottromycin,capreomycin, caspofungine, cepacidine, cerexin, cilofungin, circulin,colistin, cyclodepsipeptide, cytophagin, dactinomycin, daptomycin,decapeptide, desoxymulundocandin, echanomycin, echinocandin B,echinomycin, ecomycin, enniatin, etamycin, fabatin, ferrimycin,ferrimycin, ficellomycin, fluoronocathiacin, fusaricidin, gardimycin,gatavalin, globopeptin, glyphomycin, gramicidin, herbicolin, iomycin,iturin, iyomycin, izupeptin, janiemycin, janthinocin, jolipeptin,katanosin, killertoxin, lipopeptide antibiotic, lipopeptide fromZalerion sp., lysobactin, lysozyme, macromomycin, magainin, melittin,mersacidin, mikamycin, mureidomycin, mycoplanecin, mycosubtilin,neopeptifluorin, neoviridogrisein, netropsin, nisin, nocathiacin,nocathiacin 6-deoxyglycoside, nosiheptide, octapeptin, pacidamycin,pentadecapeptide, peptifluorin, permetin, phytoactin, phytostreptin,planothiocin, plusbacin, polcillin, polymyxin antibiotic complex,polymyxin B, polymyxin B1, polymyxin F, preneocarzinostatin, quinomycin,quinupristin-dalfopristin, safracin, salmycin, salmycin, salmycin,sandramycin, saramycetin, siomycin, sperabillin, sporamycin, aStreptomyces compound, subtilin, teicoplanin aglycone, telomycin,thermothiocin, thiopeptin, thiostrepton, tridecaptin, tsushimycin,tuberactinomycin, tuberactinomycin, tyrothricin, valinomycin, viomycin,virginiamycin, zervacin and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

In some embodiments, the antibiotic peptide is a naturally-occurringpeptide that possesses an antibacterial and/or an antifungal activity.Such peptide can be obtained from an herbal or a vertebrate source.

Polyenes include, but are not limited to, amphotericin, amphotericin,aureofungin, ayfactin, azalomycin, blasticidin, candicidin, candicidinmethyl ester, candimycin, candimycin methyl ester, chinopricin, filipin,flavofungin, fradicin, hamycin, hydropricin, levorin, lucensomycin,lucknomycin, mediocidin, mediocidin methyl ester, mepartricin,methylamphotericin, natamycin, niphimycin, nystatin, nystatin methylester, oxypricin, partricin, pentamycin, perimycin, pimaricin, primycin,proticin, rimocidin, sistomycosin, sorangicin, trichomycin and analogs,salts and derivatives thereof.

Polyethers include, but are not limited to, 20-deoxy-epi-narasin,20-deoxysalinomycin, carriomycin, dianemycin, dihydrolonomycin,etheromycin, ionomycin, iso-lasalocid, lasalocid, lenoremycin,lonomycin, lysocellin, monensin, narasin, oxolonomycin, a polycyclicether antibiotic, salinomycin and analogs, salts and derivativesthereof.

Quinolones include, but are not limited to, analkyl-methylendioxy-4(1H)-oxocinnoline-3-carboxylic acid,alatrofloxacin, cinoxacin, ciprofloxacin, ciprofloxacin hydrochloride,danofloxacin, dermofongin A, enoxacin, enrofloxacin, fleroxacin,flumequine, gatifloxacin, gemifloxacin, grepafloxacin, levofloxacin,lomefloxacin, lomefloxacin, hydrochloride, miloxacin, moxifloxacin,nadifloxacin, nalidixic acid, nifuroquine, norfloxacin, ofloxacin,orbifloxacin, oxolinic acid, pazufloxacine, pefloxacin, pefloxacinmesylate, pipemidic acid, piromidic acid, premafloxacin, rosoxacin,rufloxacin, sparfloxacin, temafloxacin, tosufloxacin, trovafloxacin andanalogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Antibiotic steroids include, but are not limited to, aminosterol,ascosteroside, cladosporide A, dihydrofusidic acid,dehydro-dihydrofusidic acid, dehydrofusidic acid, fusidic acid,squalamine and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Sulfonamides include, but are not limited to, chloramine, dapsone,mafenide, phthalylsulfathiazole, succinylsulfathiazole, sulfabenzamide,sulfacetamide, sulfachlorpyridazine, sulfadiazine, sulfadiazine silver,sulfadicramide, sulfadimethoxine, sulfadoxine, sulfaguanidine,sulfalene, sulfamazone, sulfamerazine, sulfamethazine, sulfamethizole,sulfamethoxazole, sulfamethoxypyridazine, sulfamonomethoxine,sulfamoxol, sulfanilamide, sulfaperine, sulfaphenazol, sulfapyridine,sulfaquinoxaline, sulfasuccinamide, sulfathiazole, sulfathiourea,sulfatolamide, sulfatriazin, sulfisomidine, sulfisoxazole, sulfisoxazoleacetyl, sulfacarbamide and analogs, salts and derivatives thereof.

Tetracyclines include, but are not limited to, dihydrosteffimycin,demethyltetracycline, aclacinomycin, akrobomycin, baumycin,bromotetracycline, cetocyclin, chlortetracycline, clomocycline,daunorubicin, demeclocycline, doxorubicin, doxorubicin hydrochloride,doxycycline, lymecyclin, marcellomycin, meclocycline, meclocyclinesulfosalicylate, methacycline, minocycline, minocycline hydrochloride,musettamycin, oxytetracycline, rhodirubin, rolitetracycline, rubomycin,serirubicin, steffimycin, tetracycline and analogs, salts andderivatives thereof.

Dicarboxylic acids, having between about 6 and about 14 carbon atoms intheir carbon atom skeleton are particularly useful in the treatment ofdisorders of the skin and mucosal membranes that involve microbial.Suitable dicarboxylic acid moieties include, but are not limited to,adipic acid, pimelic acid, suberic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid,1,11-undecanedioic acid, 1,12-dodecanedioic acid, 1,13-tridecanedioicacid and 1,14-tetradecanedioic acid. Thus, in one or more embodiments ofthe present disclosure, dicarboxylic acids, having between about 6 andabout 14 carbon atoms in their carbon atom skeleton, as well as theirsalts and derivatives (e.g., esters, amides, mercapto-derivatives,anhydraides), are useful immunomodulators in the treatment of disordersof the skin and mucosal membranes that involve inflammation. Azelaicacid and its salts and derivatives are preferred. It has antibacterialeffects on both aerobic and anaerobic organisms, particularlyPropionibacterium acnes and Staphylococcus epidermidis, normalizeskeratinization, and has a cytotoxic effect on malignant or hyperactivemelanocytes. In a preferred embodiment, the dicarboxylic acid is azelaicacid in a concentration greater than 10%. Preferably, the concentrationof azelaic acid is between about 10% and about 25%. In suchconcentrates, azelaic acid is suitable for the treatment of a variety ofskin disorders, such as acne, rosacea and hyperpigmentation.

In some embodiments, the antibiotic agent is an antibiotic metal. Anumber of metals ions have been shown to possess antibiotic activity,including silver, copper, zinc, mercury, tin, lead, bismutin, cadmium,chromium and ions thereof. It has been theorized that these antibioticmetal ions exert their effects by disrupting respiration and electrontransport systems upon absorption into bacterial or fungal cells.Anti-microbial metal ions of silver, copper, zinc, and gold, inparticular, are considered safe for in vivo use. Anti-microbial silverand silver ions are particularly useful due to the fact that they arenot substantially absorbed into the body. Thus, in one or moreembodiment, the antibiotic metal consists of an elemental metal,selected from the group consisting of silver, copper, zinc, mercury,tin, lead, bismutin, cadmium, chromium and gold, which is suspended inthe composition as particles, microparticles, nanoparticles or colloidalparticles. The antibiotic metal can further be intercalated in achelating substrate.

In further embodiments, the antibiotic metal is ionic. The ionicantibiotic metal can be presented as an inorganic or organic salt(coupled with a counterion), an organometallic complex or anintercalate. Non-binding examples of counter inorganic and organic ionsare sulfadiazine, acetate, benzoate, carbonate, iodate, iodide, lactate,laurate, nitrate, oxide, and palmitate, a negatively charged protein. Inpreferred embodiments, the antibiotic metal salt is a silver salt, suchas silver acetate, silver benzoate, silver carbonate, silver iodate,silver iodide, silver lactate, silver laurate, silver nitrate, silveroxide, silver palmitate, silver protein, and silver sulfadiazine.

In one or more embodiments, the antibiotic metal or metal ion isembedded into a substrate, such as a polymer, or a mineral (such aszeolite, clay and silica).

In one or more embodiments, the antibiotic agent includes strongoxidants and free radical liberating compounds, such as oxygen, hydrogenperoxide, benzoyl peroxide, elemental halogen species, as well asoxygenated halogen species, bleaching agents (e.g., sodium, calcium ormagnesium hypochloride and the like), perchlorite species, iodine,iodate, and benzoyl peroxide. Organic oxidizing agents, such asquinones, are also included. Such agents possess a potent broad-spectrumactivity.

In one or more embodiments, the antibiotic agent is a cationicantimicrobial agent. The outermost surface of bacterial cellsuniversally carries a net negative charge, making them sensitive tocationic substances. Examples of cationic antibiotic agents include:quaternary ammonium compounds (QAC's)—QAC's are surfactants, generallycontaining one quaternary nitrogen associated with at least one majorhydrophobic moiety; alkyltrimethyl ammonium bromides are mixtures ofwhere the alkyl group is between 8 and 18 carbons long, such ascetrimide (tetradecyltrimethylammonium bromide); benzalkonium chloride,which is a mixture of n-alkyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride where thealkyl groups (the hydrophobic moiety) can be of variable length;dialkylmethyl ammonium halides; dialkylbenzyl ammonium halides; and QACdimmers, which bear bi-polar positive charges in conjunction withinterstitial hydrophobic regions.

In one or more embodiments, the cationic antimicrobial agent is apolymer. Cationic antimicrobial polymers include, for example, guanidepolymers, biguanide polymers, or polymers having side chains containingbiguanide moieties or other cationic functional groups, such asbenzalkonium groups or quarternium groups (e.g., quaternary aminegroups). It is understood that the term “polymer” as used hereinincludes any organic material including three or more repeating units,and includes oligomers, polymers, copolymers, block copolymers,terpolymers, etc. The polymer backbone may be, for example apolyethylene, ploypropylene or polysilane polymer.

In one or more embodiments, the cationic antimicrobial polymer is apolymeric biguanide compound. When applied to a substrate, such apolymer is known to form a barrier film that can engage and disrupt amicroorganism. An exemplary polymeric biguanide compound ispolyhexamethylene biguanide (PHMB) salts. Other exemplary biguanidepolymers include, but are not limited to poly(hexamethylenebiguanide),poly(hexamethylenebiguanide) hydrochloride, poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)gluconate, poly(hexamethylenebiguanide) stearate, or a derivativethereof. In one or more embodiments, the antimicrobial material issubstantially water-insoluble.

In some embodiments, the antibiotic agent is selected from the group ofbiguanides, triguanides, bisbiguanides and analogs thereof.

Guanides, biguanides, biguanidines and triguanides are unsaturatednitrogen containing molecules that readily obtain one or more positivecharges, which make them effective antimicrobial agents. The basicstructures a guanide, a biguanide, a biguanidine and a triguanide areprovided below.

In some embodiments, the guanide, biguanide, biguanidine or triguanide,provide bi-polar configurations of cationic and hydrophobic domainswithin a single molecule.

Examples of guanides, biguanides, biguanidines and triguanides that arecurrently been used as antibacterial agents include chlorhexidine andchlorohexidine salts, analogs and derivatives, such as chlorhexidineacetate, chlorhexidine gluconate and chlorhexidine hydrochloride,picloxydine, alexidine and polihexanide. Other examples of guanides,biguanides, biguanidines and triguanides that can conceivably be usedaccording to the present disclosure are chlorproguanil hydrochloride,proguanil hydrochloride (currently used as antimalarial agents),mefformin hydrochloride, phenformin and buformin hydrochloride(currently used as antidiabetic agents).

Yet, in one or more embodiments, the antibiotic is a non-classifiedantibiotic agent, including, without limitation, aabomycin, acetomycin,acetoxycycloheximide, acetylnanaomycin, an Actinoplanes sp. compound,actinopyrone, aflastatin, albacarcin, albacarcin, albofungin,albofungin, alisamycin, alpha-R,S-methoxycarbonylbenzylmonate,altromycin, amicetin, amycin, amycin demanoyl compound, amycine,amycomycin, anandimycin, anisomycin, anthramycin, anti-syphilis immunesubstance, anti-tuberculosis immune substance, an antibiotic fromEscherichia coli, an antibiotic from Streptomyces refuineus, anticapsin,antimycin, aplasmomycin, aranorosin, aranorosinol, arugomycin,ascofuranone, ascomycin, ascosin, Aspergillus flavus antibiotic,asukamycin, aurantinin, an Aureolic acid antibiotic substance, aurodox,avilamycin, azidamfenicol, azidimycin, bacillaene, a Bacillus larvaeantibiotic, bactobolin, benanomycin, benzanthrin, benzylmonate,bicozamycin, bravomicin, brodimoprim, butalactin, calcimycin, calvaticacid, candiplanecin, carumonam, carzinophilin, celesticetin, cepacin,cerulenin, cervinomycin, chartreusin, chloramphenicol, chloramphenicolpalmitate, chloramphenicol succinate sodium, chlorflavonin,chlorobiocin, chlorocarcin, chromomycin, ciclopirox, ciclopirox olamine,citreamicin, cladosporin, clazamycin, clecarmycin, clindamycin,coliformin, collinomycin, copiamycin, corallopyronin, corynecandin,coumermycin, culpin, cuprimyxin, cyclamidomycin, cycloheximide,dactylomycin, danomycin, danubomycin, delaminomycin, demethoxyrapamycin,demethylscytophycin, dermadin, desdamethine, dexylosyl-benanomycin,pseudoaglycone, dihydromocimycin, dihydronancimycin, diumycin, dnacin,dorrigocin, dynemycin, dynemycin triacetate, ecteinascidin, efrotomycin,endomycin, ensanchomycin, equisetin, ericamycin, esperamicin,ethylmonate, everninomicin, feldamycin, flambamycin, flavensomycin,florfenicol, fluvomycin, fosfomycin, fosfonochlorin, fredericamycin,frenolicin, fumagillin, fumifungin, funginon, fusacandin, fusafungin,gelbecidine, glidobactin, grahamimycin, granaticin, griseofulvin,griseoviridin, grisonomycin, hayumicin, hayumicin, hazymicin, hedamycin,heneicomycin, heptelicid acid, holomycin, humidin, isohematinic acid,karnatakin, kazusamycin, kristenin, L-dihydrophenylalanine, aL-isoleucyl-L-2-amino-4-(4′-amino-2′,5′-cyclohexadienyl) derivative,lanomycin, leinamycin, leptomycin, libanomycin, lincomycin, lomofungin,lysolipin, magnesidin, manumycin, melanomycin,methoxycarbonylmethylmonate, methoxycarbonylethylmonate,methoxycarbonylphenylmonate, methyl pseudomonate, methylmonate,microcin, mitomalcin, mocimycin, moenomycin, monoacetyl cladosporin,monomethyl cladosporin, mupirocin, mupirocin calcium, mycobacidin,myriocin, myxopyronin, pseudoaglycone, nanaomycin, nancimycin,nargenicin, neocarcinostatin, neoenactin, neothramycin, nifurtoinol,nocardicin, nogalamycin, novobiocin, octylmonate, olivomycin,orthosomycin, oudemansin, oxirapentyn, oxoglaucine methiodide, pactacin,pactamycin, papulacandin, paulomycin, phaeoramularia fungicide,phenelfamycin, phenyl, cerulenin, phenylmonate, pholipomycin,pirlimycin, pleuromutilin, a polylactone derivative, polynitroxin,polyoxin, porfiromycin, pradimicin, prenomycin, prop-2-enylmonate,protomycin, Pseudomonas antibiotic, pseudomonic acid, purpuromycin,pyrinodemin, pyrrolnitrin, pyrrolomycin, amino, chloro pentenedioicacid, rapamycin, rebeccamycin, resistomycin, reuterin, reveromycin,rhizocticin, roridin, rubiflavin, naphthyridinomycin, saframycin,saphenamycin, sarkomycin, sarkomycin, sclopularin, selenomycin,siccanin, spartanamicin, spectinomycin, spongistatin, stravidin,streptolydigin, Streptomyces arenae antibiotic complex, streptonigrin,streptothricins, streptovitacin, streptozotocine, a strobilurinderivative, stubomycin, sulfamethoxazol-trimethoprim, sakamycin,tejeramycin, terpentecin, tetrocarcin, thermorubin, thermozymocidin,thiamphenicol, thioaurin, thiolutin, thiomarinol, thiomarinol,tirandamycin, tolytoxin, trichodermin, trienomycin, trimethoprim,trioxacarcin, tyrissamycin, umbrinomycin, unphenelfamycin, urauchimycin,usnic acid, uredolysin, variotin, vermisporin, verrucarin and analogs,salts and derivatives thereof.

In one or more embodiments, the antibiotic agent is a naturallyoccurring antibiotic compound. As used herein, the term“naturally-occurring antibiotic agent” includes all antibiotics that areobtained, derived or extracted from plant or vertebrate sources.Non-limiting examples of families of naturally-occurring antibioticagents include phenol, resorcinol, antibiotic aminoglycosides, anamycin,quinines, anthraquinones, antibiotic glycopeptides, azoles, macrolides,avilamycin, agropyrene, cnicin, aucubin antibioticsaponin fractions,berberine (isoquinoline alkaloid), arctiopicrin (sesquiterpene lactone),lupulone, humulone (bitter acids), allicin, hyperforin, echinacoside,coniosetin, tetramic acid, imanine and novoimanine.

Ciclopirox and ciclopiroxolamine possess fungicidal, fungistatic andsporicidal activity. They are active against a broad spectrum ofdermatophytes, yeasts, moulds and other fungi, such as Trichophytonsspecies, Microsporum species, Epidermophyton species and yeasts (Candidaalbicans, Candida glabrata, other candida species and Cryptococcusneoformans). Some Aspergillus species are sensitive to ciclopirox as aresome Penicillium. Likewise, ciclopirox is effective against manyGram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria (e.g., Escherichia coli,Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Staphylococcus andStreptococcus species), as well as Mycoplasma species, Trichomonasvaginalis and Actinomyces.

Plant oils and extracts which contain antibiotic agents are also useful.Non-limiting examples of plants that contain agents include thyme,Perilla, lavender, tea tree, Terfezia clayeryi, Micromonospora,Putterlickia verrucosa, Putterlickia pyracantha, Putterlickiaretrospinosa, Maytenus ilicifolia, Maytenus evonymoides, Maytenusaquifolia, Faenia interjecta, Cordyceps sinensis, couchgrass, holythistle, plantain, burdock, hops, echinacea, buchu, chaparral, myrrh,red clover and yellow dock, garlic, and St. John's wort.Mixtures of theantibiotic agents as described herein may also be employed.

C. Biomarkers

In some embodiments, the analyte or analyte-binding agent is abiomarker. In general, biomarkers of diseases and disorders may bedetected, analyzed and/or quantitated using the devices, compositionsand methods described herein. The detection, analysis and quantificationof a biomarker using the devices, methods and compositions describedherein is particular useful in determining and monitoring the course oftreatment that could be used to treat a condition in a subject (e.g., ahuman subject). Biomarkers can be detected and analyzed locally in theGI tract of a subject to determine whether the subject has or is at riskof developing a disease or disorder. In addition, biomarkers can bemonitored using the compositions and methods described herein todetermine whether a particular course of treatment in a subjectdiagnosed with a disease or disorder is effective or should be altered.For example, in some embodiments, inflammatory biomarker(s) is/aredetected and analyzed in a subject using the ingestible devicesdescribed herein to determine whether a subject has or is at risk ofdeveloping IBD. As necessary, the subject can then be administered oneor more courses of treatment (e.g., an anti-TNFα antibody) and the levelof such inflammatory biomarker(s) can be monitored to assess efficacy oftreatment.

In some embodiments, biomarkers are detected and analyzed in a subjectto determine whether the subject has or is at risk of developing adisease or disorder. These diseases and disorders may occur in the GItract of the subject or at a non-GI tract site in the subject. Forexample, biomarkers present in the GI tract may be indicative of asystemic disease or disorder. In some embodiments, the biomarkers areassociated with a systemic disease or disorder. In some embodiments, thebiomarkers are associated with one or more of a GI disorder,inflammation, cancer, an infectious disease, a liver disease, and aninflammatory disease. Exemplary clases of biomarkers include antibodies(e.g., therapeutic antibodies), antigens (e.g., bacterial antigens), andcytokines). In some embodiments, the analyte or the analyte-bindingagent is a biomarker, e.g., a biomarker of a GI disorder. Anillustrative list of examples of biomarkers for detection, diagnosis ormonitoring of treatment efficacy for GI disorders includes interferon-γ,IL-1β, IL-6, IL-22, IL-17A, TNFα, IL-2, memory cells (CD44⁺CD45RB⁻CD4⁺cells); α4β7; VEGF; ICAM; VCAM; SAA; Calprotectin; lactoferrin; FGF2;TGFb; ANG-1; ANG-2; PLGF; a biologic (e.g., infliximab (REMICADE);adalimumab (HUMIRA); ustekinumab (STELARA); vedolizumab (ENTYVIO);golimumab (SIMPONI); Jak inhibitors; and others); EGF; IL12/23p40;GMCSF; A4 B7; AeB7; CRP; SAA; ICAM; VCAM; AREG; EREG; HB-EGF; HRG; BTC;TGFα; SCF; TWEAK; MMP-9; MMP-6; Ceacam CD66; IL10; ADA; Madcam-1; CD166(AL CAM); FGF2; FGF7; FGF9; FGF19; Anti-neutrophil cytoplasmic antibody(ANCA); Anti-Saccharomyces cerevisiae Antibody IgA (ASCAA);Anti-Saccharomyces cerevisiae Antibody IgG (ASCAG); Anti-Clostridiumcluster XIVa flagellin CBir1 antibody (CBir1); Anti-Clostridium clusterXIVa flagellin 2 antibody (A4-Fla2); Anti-Clostridium cluster XIVaflagellin X antibody (FlaX); Anti-Escherichia coli Outer MembraneProtein C (OmpC); Perinuclear AntiNeutrophil Cytoplasmic Antibody(ANCA); Amphiregulin Protein (AREG); Betacellulin Protein (BTC);Epidermal Growth Factor (EGF); Epiregulin Protein (EREG); HeparinBinding Epidermal Growth Factors (HBEGF); Hepatocyte Growth Factor(HGF); Neuregulin-1 (HRG); Transforming Growth Factor alpha (TGFA);C-Reactive Protein (CRP); Serum Amyloid A (SAA); Intercellular AdhesionMolecule 1 (ICAM-1); Vascular Cell Adhesion Molecule 1 (VCAM-1); andfibroblasts underlying the intestinal epithelium.

In some embodiments, a biomarker is an IBD biomarker, such as, forexample: anti-glycan; anti-Saccharomyces cerevisiae (ASCA);anti-laminaribioside (ALCA); anti-chitobioside (ACCA); anti-mannobioside(AMCA); anti-laminarin (anti-L); anti-chitin (anti-C) antibodies:anti-outer membrane porin C (anti-OmpC), anti-Cbir1 flagellin; anti-I2antibody; autoantibodies targeting the exocrine pancreas (PAB); andperinuclear anti-neutrophil antibody (pANCA); and calprotectin.

In some embodiments, a biomarker is associated with membrane repair,fibrosis, angiogenesis. In certain embodiments, a biomarker is aninflammatory biomarker, an anti-inflammatory biomarker, an MMPbiomarker, an immune marker, or a TNF pathway biomarker. In someembodiments, a biomarker is gut-specific.

For tissue samples, HER2 can be used as a biomarker relating tocytotoxic T cells. Additionally, other cytokine levels can be used asbiomarkers in tissue (e.g., phospho STAT 1, STAT 3 and STAT 5), inplasma (e.g., VEGF, VCAM, ICAM, IL-6), or both.

In some embodiments, the biomarker include one or more immunoglobulins,such as, for example, immunoglobulin M (IgM), immunoglobulin D (IgD),immunoglobulin G (IgG), immunoglobulin E (IgE) and/or immunoglobulin A(IgA). In some embodiments, IgM is a biomarker of infection and/orinflammation. In some embodiments, IgD is a biomarker of autoimmunedisease. In some embodiments, IgG is a biomarker of Alzheimer's diseaseand/or for cancer. In some embodiments, IgE is a biomarker of asthmaand/or allergen immunotherapy. In some embodiments, IgA is a biomarkerof kidney disease.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is High Sensitivity C-reactiveProtein (hsCRP); 7α-hydroxy-4-cholesten-3-one (7αC4); Anti-EndomysialIgA (EMA IgA); Anti-Human Tissue Transglutaminase IgA (tTG IgA); TotalSerum IgA by Nephelometry; Fecal Calprotectin; or Fecal GastrointestinalPathogens.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is:

a) an anti-gliadin IgA antibody, an anti-gliadin IgG antibody, ananti-tissue transglutaminase (tTG) antibody, an anti-endomysialantibody;

b)i) a serological biomarker that is ASCA-A, ASCA-G, ANCA, pANCA,anti-OmpC antibody, anti-CBir1 antibody, anti-FlaX antibody, oranti-A4-Fla2 antibody;

b)ii) an inflammation biomarker that is VEGF, ICAM, VCAM, SAA, or CRP;

b)iii)the genotype of the genetic biomarkers ATG16L1, ECM1, NKX2-3, orSTAT3;

c) a bacterial antigen antibody biomarker;

d) a mast cell biomarker;

e) an inflammatory cell biomarker;

f) a bile acid malabsorption (BAM) biomarker;

g) a kynurenine biomarker; or

h) a serotonin biomarker.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is a bacterial antigen antibodybiomarker selected from the group consisting of an anti-Fla1 antibody,anti-Fla2 antibody, anti-FlaA antibody, anti-FliC antibody, anti-FliC2antibody, anti-FliC3 antibody, anti-YBaN1 antibody, anti-ECFliCantibody, anti-Ec0FliC antibody, anti-SeFljB antibody, anti-CjFlaAantibody, anti-CjFlaB antibody, anti-SfFliC antibody, anti-CjCgtAantibody, anti-Cjdmh antibody, anti-CjGT-A antibody, anti-EcYidXantibody, anti-EcEra antibody, anti-EcFrvX antibody, anti-EcGabTantibody, anti-EcYedK antibody, anti-EcYbaN antibody, anti-EcYhgNantibody, anti-RtMaga antibody, anti-RbCpaF antibody, anti-RgPilDantibody, anti-LaFrc antibody, anti-LaEno antibody, anti-LjEFTuantibody, anti-BfOmpa antibody, anti-PrOmpA antibody, anti-Cp10bAantibody, anti-CpSpA antibody, anti-EfSant antibody, anti-LmOspantibody, anti-SfET-2 antibody, anti-Cpatox antibody, anti-Cpbtoxantibody, anti-EcSta2 antibody, anti-EcOStx2A antibody, anti-CjcdtB/Cantibody, anti-CdTcdA/B antibody, and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is a mast cell biomarker selectedfrom the group consisting of beta-tryptase, histamine, prostaglandin E2(PGE2), and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is an inflammatory biomarker isselected from the group consisting of CRP, ICAM, VCAM, SAA, GROa, andcombinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is a bile acid malabsorptionbiomarker selected from the group consisting of7α-hydroxy-4-cholesten-3-one, FGF19, and a combination thereof.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is a kynurenine biomarker selectedfrom the group consisting of kynurenine (K), kynurenic acid (KyA),anthranilic acid (AA), 3-hydroxykynurenine (3-HK), 3-hydroxyanthranilicacid (3-HAA), xanthurenic acid (XA), quinolinic acid (QA), tryptophan,5-hydroxytryptophan (5-HTP), and combinations thereof.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is a serotonin biomarker selectedfrom the group consisting of serotonin (5-HT), 5-hydroxyindoleaceticacid (5-HIAA), serotonin-O-sulfate, serotonin-O-phosphate, andcombinations thereof.

Additional biomarkers are disclosed, e.g., at U.S. Pat. No. 9,739,786,the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

In some embodiments, the biomarker is associated with a liver disease ordisorder. In some embodiments, the analyte or analyte-binding agent is abiomarker of a liver disease or a liver disorder. In some embodiments,the devices, compositions and methods disclosed herein may be used todetect, analyze and/or quantitate a biomarker associated with a liverdisease or disorder, e.g., to determine whether a subject has or is atrisk of developing a liver disease or disorder. In some embodiments, thedevices, compositions, and methods described herein can be used todetect an analyte (e.g., a biomarker) in a sample from thegastrointestinal tract of the subject to determine whether the subjecthas or is at risk of developing a liver disease or disorder (e.g.,NASH). In some embodiments, the detection, analysis and quantificationof a liver disease biomarker using the devices, methods and compositionsdescribed herein may be used in determining and monitoring the course oftreatment that could be used to treat a liver disease or disorder in asubject (e.g., a human subject). An illustrative list of examples ofbiomarkers that may be used for the detection, diagnosis, or monitoringof treatment efficacy for a liver disease or disorder includesbilirubin, gamma-glutamyl transferase (GGT), haptoglobin, apolipoproteinA1, alpha2-macroglobulin, cholesterol, triglycerides, alanineaminotransferase (ALT), aspartate aminotransferase (AST), glucose,cytokeratin-18 (CK18) fragment, hyaluronic acid, TGF-β, fatty acidbinding protein, hydroxysteroid 17-beta dehydrogenase 13 (17β-HSD13),glutamyl dipeptides, glutamyl valine, glutamyl leucine, glutamylphenylalanine, glutamyl tyrosine, carnitine, butylcarnitine, lysine,tyrosine, isoleucine, glycerophosphatidylcholine,glycerylphsphorylethanolamine, taurine, glycine conjugates, taurocholicacid, taurodeoxycholic acid, lactate, glutamate, cysteine-gluthationedisulfide, caprate, 10-undecenoate, oleoyl-lysophosphatidylcholine,oxidized and reduced gluthatione, glutamate, andenosine triphosphate,creatine, cholic acid, and glycodeoxycholic acid. Additional biomarkers,as well as therapeutic agents, for liver diseases and disorders areknown in the art (see, e.g., Hirsova and Gores (2015) Cell. Mol.Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 1(1): 17-27; Willebrords et al. (2015) Progressin Lipid Research 59: 106-125; Alkhouri et al. (2011) Expert Rev.Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 5(2): 201-12; Wang (2014) Cell Death and Disease5: e996; and Alonso et al. (2017) Gastroenterology 152: 1449-61,incorporated herein by reference).

D. Therapeutic Agents

In some embodiments, the analyte or analyte-binding agent is atherapeutic agent, a fragment of a therapeutic agent and/or a metaboliteof a therapeutic agent. The compositions and methods provided below mayalso be used to detect, analyze and/or quantitate a therapeutic agent, afragment of a therapeutic agent, and/or a metabolite of a therapeuticagent. Exemplary therapeutic agents include antibodies, nucleic acids(e.g., inhibitory nucleic acids), small molecules, and livebiotherapeutics such as probiotics. In some embodiments, the analyte orthe analyte-binding agent used in any of the detection methods describedherein is a drug or a therapeutic agent. In some embodiments, the drugor therapeutic agent is used for the treatment of inflammatory boweldisease (IBD), for example, Crohn's Disease or Ulcerative Colitis (UC).Nonlimiting examples of such agents for treating or preventinginflammatory bowel disease include substances that suppress cytokineproduction, down-regulate or suppress self-antigen expression, or maskthe MHC antigens. Examples of such agents include CHST15 inhibitors(e.g., STNM01); IL-6 receptor inhibitora (e.g., tocilizumab);IL-12/IL-23 inhibitors (e.g., ustekinumab and brazikumab); integrininhibitors (e.g., vedolizumab and natalizumab); JAK inhibitors (e.g.,tofacitinib); SMAD7 inhibitors (e.g., Mongersen); IL-13 inhibitors; IL-1receptor inhibitors; TLR agonists (e.g., Kappaproct); stem cells (e.g.,Cx601); 2-amino-6-aryl-5-substituted pyrimidines (see U.S. Pat. No.4,665,077); nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs); ganciclovir;tacrolimus; glucocorticoids such as Cortisol or aldosterone;anti-inflammatory agents such as a cyclooxygenase inhibitor; a5-lipoxygenase inhibitor; or a leukotriene receptor antagonist; purineantagonists such as azathioprine or mycophenolate mofetil (MMF);alkylating agents such as cyclophosphamide; bromocryptine; danazol;dapsone; glutaraldehyde (which masks the MHC antigens, as described inU.S. Pat. No. 4,120,649); anti-idiotypic antibodies for MHC antigens andMHC fragments; cyclosporine; 6-mercaptopurine; steroids such ascorticosteroids or glucocorticosteroids or glucocorticoid analogs, e.g.,prednisone, methylprednisolone, including SOLU-MEDROL®,methylprednisolone sodium succinate, and dexamethasone; dihydrofolatereductase inhibitors such as methotrexate (oral or subcutaneous);anti-malarial agents such as chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine;sulfasalazine; leflunomide; cytokine or cytokine receptor antibodies orantagonists including anti-interferon-alpha, -beta, or -gammaantibodies, anti-tumor necrosis factor(TNF)-alpha antibodies (infliximab(REMICADE®) or adalimumab), anti-TNF-alpha immunoadhesin (etanercept),anti-TNF-beta antibodies, antiinterleukin-2 (IL-2) antibodies andanti-IL-2 receptor antibodies, and anti-interleukin-6 (IL-6) receptorantibodies and antagonists; anti-LFA-1 antibodies, including anti-CD 1la and anti-CD 18 antibodies; anti-L3T4 antibodies; heterologousanti-lymphocyte globulin; pan-T antibodies, anti-CD3 or anti-CD4/CD4aantibodies; soluble peptide containing a LFA-3 binding domain (WO90/08187 published Jul. 26, 1990); streptokinase; transforming growthfactor-beta (TGF-beta); streptodomase; RNA or DNA from the host; FK506;RS-61443; chlorambucil; deoxyspergualin; rapamycin; T-cell receptor(Cohen et al, U.S. Pat. No. 5,114,721); T-cell receptor fragments(Offner et al, Science, 251: 430-432 (1991); WO 90/11294; Ianeway,Nature, 341: 482 (1989); and WO 91/01133); BAFF antagonists such as BAFFor BR3 antibodies or immunoadhesins and zTNF4 antagonists (for review,see Mackay and Mackay, Trends Immunol, 23: 113-5 (2002) and see alsodefinition below); 10 biologic agents that interfere with T cell helpersignals, such as anti-CD40 receptor or anti-CD40 ligand (CD 154),including blocking antibodies to CD40-CD40 ligand.(e.g., Durie et al,Science, 261: 1328-30 (1993); Mohan et al, J. Immunol, 154: 1470-80(1995)) and CTLA4-Ig (Finck et al, Science, 265: 1225-7 (1994)); andT-cell receptor antibodies (EP 340,109) such as T10B9. Non-limitingexamples of agents also include the following: budenoside; epidermalgrowth factor; aminosalicylates; metronidazole; mesalamine; olsalazine;balsalazide; antioxidants; thromboxane inhibitors; IL-1 receptorantagonists; anti-IL-1 monoclonal antibodies; growth factors; elastaseinhibitors; pyridinylimidazole compounds; TNF antagonists; IL-4, IL-10,IL-13 and/or TGFβ cytokines or agonists thereof (e.g., agonistantibodies); IL-11; glucuronide- or dextran-conjugated prodrugs ofprednisolone, dexamethasone or budesonide; ICAM-I antisensephosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotides (ISIS 2302; Isis Pharmaceuticals,Inc.); soluble complement receptor 1 (TP1O; T Cell Sciences, Inc.);slow-release mesalazine; antagonists of platelet activating factor(PAF); ciprofloxacin; and lignocaine. Examples of agents for UC aresulfasalazine and related salicylate-containing drugs for mild cases andcorticosteroid drugs in severe cases. Exemplary therapeutic agents thatmay be used for the treatment of a liver disease or disorder (e.g.,liver fibrosis or NASH) include elafibranor (GFT 505; Genfit Corp.),obeticholic acid (OCA; Intercept Pharmaceuticals, Inc.), cenicriviroc(CVC; Allergan plc), selonsertib (formerly GS-4997; Gilead Sciences,Inc.), an anti-LOXL2 antibody (simtuzumab (formerly GS 6624; GileadSciences, Inc.)), GS-9450 (Gilead Sciences, Inc.), GS-9674 (GileadSciences, Inc.), GS-0976 (formerly NDI-010976; Gilead Sciences, Inc.),Emricasan (Conatus Pharmaceuticals, Inc.), Arachidyl-amido cholanoicacid (Aramchol™; Galmed Pharmaceuticals Ltd.), AKN-083 (Allergan plc(Akarna Therapeutics Ltd.)), TGFTX4 (Genfit Corp.), TGFTX5 (GenfitCorp.), TGFTX1 (Genfit Corp.), a RoRγ agonist (e.g., LYC-55716; LyceraCorp.), an ileal bile acid transporter (iBAT) inhibitor (e.g.,elobixibat, Albireo Pharma, Inc.; GSK2330672, GlaxoSmithKline plc; andA4250; Albireo Pharma, Inc.), stem cells, a CCR2 inhibitor, bardoxolonemethyl (Reata Pharmaceuticals, Inc.), a bone morphogenetic protein-7(BMP-7) mimetic (e.g., THR-123 (see, e.g., Sugimoto et al. (2012) NatureMedicine 18: 396-404)), an anti-TGF-β antibody (e.g., fresolimumab; seealso U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,527,791 and 8,383,780, incorporated herein byreference), pirfenidone (Esbriet®, Genentech USA Inc.), an anti-integrinαvβ6 antibody, an anti-connective tissue growth factor (CTGF) antibody(e.g., pamrevlumab; FibroGen Inc.), pentoxifylline, vascular endothelialgrowth factor (VEGF), a renin angiotensin aldosterone system (RAAS)inhibitor (e.g., a rennin inhibitor (e.g. pepstatin, CGP2928,aliskiren), or an ACE inhibitor (e.g., captopril, zofenopril, enalapril,ramipril, quinapril, perindopril, lisinopril, benazepril, imidapril,fosinopril, and trandolapril)), thrombospondin, a statin, bardoxolone, aPDES inhibitor (e.g., sidenafil, vardenafil, and tadalafil), a NADPHoxidase-1 (NOX1) inhibitor (see, e.g., U.S. Publication No.2011/0178082, incorporated herein by reference), a NADPH oxidase-4(NOX4) inhibitor (see, e.g., U.S. Publication No. 2014/0323500,incorporated herein by reference), an ET_(A) antagonist (e.g.,sitaxentan, ambrisentan, atrasentan, BQ-123, and zibotentan), nintedanib(Boehringer Ingelheim), INT-767 (Intercept Pharmaceuticals, Inc.),VBY-376 (Virobay Inc.), PF-04634817(Pfizer), EXC 001 (Pfizer), GM-CT-01(Galectin Therapeutics), GCS-100 (La Jolla Pharmaceuticals), hepatocytegrowth factor mimetic (Refanalin®; Angion Biomedica), SAR156597(Sanofi), tralokinumab (AstraZeneca), pomalidomide (Celgene), STX-100(Biogen IDEC), CC-930 (Celgene), anti-miR-21 (Regulus Therapeutics),PRM-151 (Promedior), BOT191 (BiOrion), Palomid 529 (PalomaPharamaceuticals), IMD1041 (IMMD, Japan), serelaxin (Novartis),PEG-relaxin (Ambrx and Bristol-Myers Squibb), ANG-4011 (AngionBiomedica), FT011 (Fibrotech Therapeutics), pirfenidone (InterMune),F351 (pirfenidone derivative (GNI Pharma), vitamin E (e.g., tocotrienol(alpha, beta, gamma, and delta) and tocopherol (alpha, beta, gamma, anddelta)), pentoxifylline, an insulin sensitizer (e.g., rosiglitazone andpioglitazone), cathepsin B inhibitor R-3020, etanercept and biosimilarsthereof, peptides that block the activation of Fas (see, e.g.,International Publication No. WO 2005/117940, incorporated herein byreference), caspase inhibitor VX-166, caspase inhibitor Z-VAD-fmk,fasudil, belnacasan (VX-765), and pralnacasan (VX-740).

Exemplary additional therapeutic agents are provided below and includeexemplary drug classes, and exemplary embodiments for each, that may bedetected and analyzed using the methods herein.

1. TNF Inhibitors

The term “TNFα inhibitor” refers to an agent which directly orindirectly inhibits, impairs, reduces, down-regulates, or blocks TNFαactivity and/or expression. In some embodiments, a TNFα inhibitor is aninhibitory nucleic acid, an antibody or an antigen-binding fragmentthereof, a fusion protein, a soluble TNFα receptor (a soluble TNFR1 or asoluble TNFR2), or a small molecule TNFα antagonist. In someembodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme, small hairpinRNA, a small interfering RNA, an antisense nucleic acid, or an aptamer.

Exemplary TNFα inhibitors that directly inhibit, impair, reduce,down-regulate, or block TNFα activity and/or expression can, e.g.,inhibit or reduce binding of TNFα to its receptor (TNFR1 and/or TNFR2)and/or inhibit or decrease the expression level of TNFα or a receptor ofTNFα (TNFR1 or TNFR2) in a cell (e.g., a mammalian cell). Non-limitingexamples of TNFα inhibitors that directly inhibit, impair, reduce,down-regulate, or block TNFα activity and/or expression includeinhibitory nucleic acids (e.g., any of the examples of inhibitorynucleic acids described herein), an antibody or fragment thereof, afusion protein, a soluble TNFα receptor (e.g., a soluble TNFR1 orsoluble TNFR2), and a small molecule TNFα antagonist.

Exemplary TNFα inhibitors that can indirectly inhibit, impair, reduce,down-regulate, or block TNFα activity and/or expression can, e.g.,inhibit or decrease the level of downstream signaling of a TNFα receptor(e.g., TNFR1 or TNFR2) in a mammalian cell (e.g., decrease the leveland/or activity of one or more of the following signaling proteins:TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK,NIK, IKK, and NF-κB in a mammalian cell), and/or decrease the level ofTNFα-induced gene expression in a mammalian cell (e.g., decrease thetranscription of genes regulated by, e.g., one or more transcriptionfactors selected from the group of NF-κB, c-Jun, and ATF2). Adescription of downstream signaling of a TNFα receptor is provided inWaj ant et al., Cell Death Differentiation 10:45-65, 2003 (incorporatedherein by reference). For example, such indirect TNFα inhibitors can bean inhibitory nucleic acid that targets (decreases the expression) asignaling component downstream of a TNFα receptor (e.g., any one or moreof the signaling components downstream of a TNFα receptor describedherein or known in the art), a TNFα-induced gene (e.g., any TNFα-inducedgene known in the art), or a transcription factor selected from thegroup of NF-κB, c-Jun, and ATF2.

In other examples, such indirect TNFα inhibitors can be a small moleculeinhibitor of a signaling component downstream of a TNFα receptor (e.g.,any of the signaling components downstream of a TNFα receptor describedherein or known in the art), a small molecule inhibitor of a proteinencoded by a TNFα-induced gene (e.g., any protein encoded by aTNFα-induced gene known in the art), and a small molecule inhibitor of atranscription factor selected from the group of NF-κB, c-Jun, and ATF2.

In other embodiments, TNFα inhibitors that can indirectly inhibit,impair, reduce, down-regulate, or block one or more components in amammalian cell (e.g., a macrophage, a CD4+ lymphocyte, a NK cell, aneutrophil, a mast cell, a eosinophil, or a neuron) that are involved inthe signaling pathway that results in TNFα mRNA transcription, TNFα mRNAstabilization, and TNFα mRNA translation (e.g., one or more componentsselected from the group of CD14, MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharide bindingprotein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB,rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR, TTP, and MK2). For example,such indirect TNFα inhibitors can be an inhibitory nucleic acid thattargets (decreases the expression) of a component in a mammalian cellthat is involved in the signaling pathway that results in TNFα mRNAtranscription, TNFα mRNA stabilization, and TNFα mRNA translation (e.g.,a component selected from the group of CD14, MyD88, IRAK,lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2,ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR,TTP, and MK2). In other examples, an indirect TNFα inhibitors is a smallmolecule inhibitor of a component in a mammalian cell that is involvedin the signaling pathway that results in TNFα mRNA transcription, TNFαmRNA stabilization, and TNFα mRNA translation (e.g., a componentselected from the group of CD14, MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharide bindingprotein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB,rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR, TTP, and MK2).

Inhibitory Nucleic Acids

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of TNFα,TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharidebinding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB,NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR, TTP, or MK2 mRNAexpression in a mammalian cell include antisense nucleic acid molecules,i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotide sequence is complementaryto all or part of a TNFα, TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7,JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, CD14, MyD88, IRAK,lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2,ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR,TTP, or MK2 mRNA.

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding a TNFα, TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK,AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK,lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2,ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR,TTP, or MK2 protein. Non-coding regions (5′ and 3′ untranslated regions)are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank the coding region in a gene andare not translated into amino acids.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding a TNFα, TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD,TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK,NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP),TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK,c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR, TTP, or MK2 protein (e.g., specificity for aTNFα, TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1,RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK,lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2,ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR,TTP, or MK2 mRNA.

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of a TNFα,TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharidebinding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB,NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR, TTP, or MK2polypeptide can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequencescomplementary to the regulatory region of the gene encoding the TNFα,TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharidebinding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB,NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR, TTP, or MK2polypeptide (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequence thatis at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of thetranscription initiation start state) to form triple helical structuresthat prevent transcription of the gene in target cells.

In some embodiments, a TNFα inhibitor can be a siRNA molecule used todecrease expression of a TNFα, TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4,MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14,MyD88, IRAK, lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf,MEK1/2, ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6,p38, PKR, TTP, or MK2 mRNA.

Exemplary TNFα inhibitors that are inhibitory nucleic acids targetingTNFα include, e.g., antisense DNA (e.g., Myers et al., J Pharmacol ExpTher. 304(1):411-424, 2003; Wasmuth et al., Invest. Opthalmol. Vis. Sci,2003; Dong et al., J. Orthop. Res. 26(8):1114-1120, 2008; U.S. PatentApplication Serial Nos. 2003/0083275, 2003/0022848, and 2004/0770970;ISIS 104838; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,180,403, 6,080,580, and 6,228,642; Kobziket al., Inhibition of TNF Synthesis by Antisense Oligonucleotides, inManual of Antisense Methodology, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Vol. 4,pp.107-123, 1999; Taylor et al., Antisense Nucleic Acid Drug Develop.8(3):199-205, 1998; Mayne et al., Stroke 32:240-248, 2001; Mochizuki etal., J. Controlled Release 151 (2):155-161, 2011; Dong et al., J.Orthopaedic Res. 26(8):1114-1120, 2008; Dong et al., Pharm. Res.28(6):1349-1356, 2011; and Pampfer et al., Biol. Reproduction52(6):1316-1326, 1995), antisense RNA, short interfering RNA (siRNA)(e.g., Taishi et al., Brain Research 1156:125-132, 2007; Presumey etal., Eur. J. Pharm. Biopharm. 82(3):457-467, 2012; Laroui et al., J.Controlled Release 186:41-53, 2014; D′Amore et al., Int. J.Immunopathology Pharmacol. 21:1045-1047, 2008; Choi et al., J. Dermatol.Sci. 52:87-97, 2008; Qin et al., Artificial Organs 35:706-714, 2011;McCarthy et al., J. Controlled Release 168: 28 -34, 2013; Khoury et al.,Current Opin. Mol. Therapeutics 9(5):483-489, 2007; Lu et al., RNAInterference Technology From Basic Science to Drug Development 303,2005; Xie et al., PharmaGenomics 4(6):28-34, 2004; Aldawsari et al.,Current Pharmaceutical Design 21(31):4594-4605, 2015; Zheng et al.,Arch. Med. Sci. 11:1296-1302, 2015; Peng et al., Chinese J. Surgery 47(5):377-380, 2009; Aldayel et al., Molecular Therapy. Nucleic Acids5(7):e340, 2016; Bai et al., Current Drug Targets 16:1531-1539, 2015;U.S. Patent Application Publications Nos. 2008/0097091, 2009/0306356,and 2005/0227935; and WO 14/168264), short hairpin RNA (shRNA) (e.g.,Jakobsen et al., Mol. Ther. 17(10): 1743-1753, 2009; Ogawa et al., PLoSOne 9(3): e92073, 2014; Ding et al., Bone Joint 94-6(Suppl. 11):44,2014; and Hernandez-Alejandro et al., J. Surgical Res. 176(2):614-620,2012), and microRNAs (see, e.g., WO 15/26249). In some embodiments, theinhibitory nucleic acid blocks pre-mRNA splicing of TNFα (e.g., Chiu etal., Mol. Pharmacol. 71(6): 1640-1645, 2007).

In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid, e.g., an aptamer(e.g., Orava et al., ACS Chem Biol. 2013; 8(1): 170-178, 2013), canblock the binding of a TNFα protein with its receptor (TNFR1 and/orTNFR2).

In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid can down-regulate theexpression of a TNFα-induced downstream mediator (e.g., TRADD, TRAF2,MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB,p38, JNK, IκB-α, or CCL2). Further teachings of downstream TNFα-inducedmediators can be found in, e.g., Schwamborn et al., BMC Genomics 4:46,2003; and Zhou et al., Oncogene 22: 2034-2044, 2003, incorporated byreference herein. Additional aspects of inhibitory nucleic acids aredescribed in Aagaard et al., Adv. Drug Delivery Rev. 59(2):75-86, 2007,and Burnett et al., Biotechnol. J. 6(9):1130-1146, 2011.

In certain embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid targets a nucleicacid encoding a TNFα, TNFR1, TNFR2, TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK,AP-1, ASK1, RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, NF-κB, CD14, MyD88, IRAK,lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), TRAF6, ras, raf, MEK1/2,ERK1/2, NIK, IKK, IκB, NF-κB, rac, MEK4/7, JNK, c-jun, MEK3/6, p38, PKR,TTP, or MK2.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the TNFα inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to any one of TNFα, TNFR1, or TNFR2. In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment of an antibodydescribed herein can bind specifically to TNFα. In some embodiments, anantibody or antigen-binding fragment of an antibody described herein canbind specifically to a TNFα receptor (TNFR1 or TNFR2).

Non-limiting examples of TNF inhibitors that are antibodies thatspecifically bind to TNFα are described in Elliott et al., Lancet 1994;344: 1125-1127, 1994; Rankin et al., Br. J. Rheumatol. 2:334-342, 1995;Butler et al., Eur. Cytokine Network 6(4):225-230, 1994; Lorenz et al.,J. Immunol. 156(4):1646-1653, 1996; Hinshaw et al., Circulatory Shock30(3):279-292, 1990; Wanner et al., Shock 11(6):391-395, 1999; Bongartzet al., JAMA 295(19):2275-2285, 2006; Knight et al., Molecular Immunol.30(16):1443-1453, 1993; Feldman, Nature Reviews Immunol. 2(5):364-371,2002; Taylor et al., Nature Reviews Rheumatol. 5(10):578-582, 2009;Garces et al., Annals Rheumatic Dis. 72(12):1947-1955, 2013; Palladinoet al., Nature Rev. Drug Discovery 2(9):736-746, 2003; Sandborn et al.,Inflammatory Bowel Diseases 5(2):119-133, 1999; Atzeni et al.,Autoimmunity Reviews 12(7):703-708, 2013; Maini et al., Immunol. Rev.144(1):195-223, 1995; Ordas et al., Clin. Pharmacol. Therapeutics91(4):635-646, 2012; Cohen et al., Canadian J. Gastroenterol. Hepatol.15(6):376-384, 2001; Feldmann et al., Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19(1):163-196,2001; Ben-Horin et al., Autoimmunity Rev. 13(1):24-30, 2014; and U.S.Pat. Nos. 6,090,382; 6,258,562; and 6,509,015).

In certain embodiments, the TNFα inhibitor can include or is infliximab(Remicade™), CDP571, CDP 870, golimumab (golimumab™), adalimumab(Humira™), or certolizumab pegol (Cimzia™). In certain embodiments, theTNFα inhibitor can be a TNFα inhibitor biosimilar. Examples of approvedand late-phase TNFα inhibitor biosimilars include, but are not limitedto, infliximab biosimilars such as Remsima™ and Inflectra® (CT-P13) fromCelltrion/Pfizer, GS071 from Aprogen, Flixabi™ (SB2) from SamsungBioepis, PF-06438179 from Pfizer/Sandoz, NI-071 from Nichi-IkoPharmaceutical Co., and ABP 710 from Amgen; adalimumab biosimilars suchas Exemptia™ (ZRC3197) from Zydus Cadila, India, Solymbic® and Amgevita®(ABP 501) from Amgen, Imraldi (SB5) from Samsung Bioepis, GP-2017 fromSandoz, Switzerland, ONS-3010 from Oncobiologics, M923/Viropro, U.S.A.,from Momenta Pharmaceuticals/Baxalta (Baxter spinoff USA), PF-06410293from Pfizer, BMO-2 or MYL-1401-A from Biocon/Mylan, CHS-1420 fromCoherus, FKB327 from Fujifilm/Kyowa Hakko Kirin (Fujifilm Kyowa KirinBiologics), and Cyltezo (BI 695501) from Boehringer Ingelheim, CT-P17from Celltrion, BAX 923 from Baxalta (now a part of Shire), MSB11022from Fresenius Kabi (bought from Merck kGaA (Merck Group) in 2017), LBALfrom LG Life Sciences/Mochida Pharmaceutical, South Korea/Japan, PBP1502from Prestige Biopharma, Adfrar from Torrent Pharmaceuticals, India, abiosimilar of adalimumab in development by Adello Biologics, abiosimilar of adalimumab in development by AET Biotech/BioXpressTherapeutics, Germany/Switzerland, a biosimilar of adalimumab frommAbxience, Spain, a biosimilar of adalimumab in development byPlantForm, Canada; and etanercept biosimilars such as Erelzi™ fromSandoz/Novartis, Brenzys™ (SB4) from Samsung Bioepis, GP2015 fromSandoz, TuNEX® from Mycenax, LBEC0101 from LG Life, and CHS-0214 fromCoherus.

In some embodiments, a biosimilar is an antibody or antigen-bindingfragment thereof that has a light chain that has the same primary aminoacid sequence as compared to a reference antibody (e.g., adalimumab) anda heavy chain that has the same primary amino acid sequence as comparedto the reference antibody. In some examples, a biosimilar is an antibodyor antigen-binding fragment thereof that has a light chain that includesthe same light chain variable domain sequence as a reference antibody(e.g., adalimumab) and a heavy chain that includes the same heavy chainvariable domain sequence as a reference antibody. In some embodiments, abiosimilar can have a similar glycosylation pattern as compared to thereference antibody (e.g., adalimumab). In other embodiments, abiosimilar can have a different glycosylation pattern as compared to thereference antibody (e.g., adalimumab). Changes in the N-linkedglycosylation profile of a biosimilar as compared to a referenceantibody (e.g., adalimumab) can be detected using 2-anthranilic acid(AA)-derivatization and normal phase liquid chromatography withfluorescence detection, as generally described in Kamoda et al., J.Chromatography J. 1133:332-339, 2006. For example, a biosimilar can havechanges in one or more (e.g., two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,nine, ten, or eleven) of the following types of N-glycosylation ascompared to the reference antibody (e.g., adalimumab): neutrally-chargedoligosaccharides; monosialylated fucose-containing oligosaccharides;monosialylated oligosaccharides; bisialylated fucose-containingoligosaccharide; bisialylated oligosaccharides; triantennary,trisiaylated oligosaccharides of form 1; triantennary, trisialylatedoligosaccharides of form 2; mannose-6-phosphate oligosaccharides;monophosphorylated oligosaccharides; tetrasialylated oligosaccharides;monosialylated and monophosphorylated oligosaccharides; andbis-mannose-6-phosphate oligosaccharides.

In some embodiments, the biosimilar can have a change in one, two, orthree of: the percentage of species having one C-terminal lysine, thepercentage of species having two C-terminal lysines, and the percentageof species having three C-terminal lysines as compared to the referenceantibody (e.g., adalimumab).

In some embodiments, the biosimilar can have a change in the level ofone, two, or three of acidic species, neutral species, and basic speciesin the composition as compared to the reference antibody (e.g.,adalimumab).

In some embodiments, the biosimilar can have a change in the level ofsulfation as compared to the reference antibody.

In some embodiments, the TNFα inhibitor can be SAR252067 (e.g., amonoclonal antibody that specifically binds to TNFSF14, described inU.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0315913) or MDGN-002(described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0337046). Insome embodiments, the TNFα inhibitor can be PF-06480605, which bindsspecifically to TNFSF15 (e.g., described in U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication No. 2015/0132311). Additional examples of TNFα inhibitorsinclude DLCX105 (described in Tsianakas et al., Exp. Dermatol.25:428-433, 2016) and PF-06480605, which binds specifically to TNFSF15(described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0132311).

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the TNFα inhibitory agent is a fusion protein(e.g., an extracellular domain of a TNFR fused to a partner peptide,e.g., an Fc region of an immunoglobulin, e.g., human IgG) (see, e.g.,Peppel et al., J. Exp. Med. 174(6):1483-1489, 1991; Deeg et al.,Leukemia 16(2):162, 2002) or a soluble TNFR (e.g., TNFR1 or TNFR2) thatbinds specifically to TNFα. In some embodiments, the TNFα inhibitorincludes or is etanercept (Enbrel™) (see, e.g., WO 91/03553 and WO09/406,476, incorporated by reference herein). In some embodiments, theTNFα inhibitor includes or is r-TBP-I (e.g., Gradstein et al., J.Acquir. Immune Defic. Syndr. 26(2): 111-117, 2001). In some embodiments,the TNFα inhibitor includes or is a soluble TNFα receptor (e.g., Watt etal., J Leukoc Biol. 66(6):1005-1013, 1999; Tsao et al., Eur Respir J.14(3):490-495, 1999; Kozak et al., Am. J. Physiol. Reg. IntegrativeComparative Physiol. 269(1):R23-R29, 1995; Mohler et al., J. Immunol.151(3):1548-1561, 1993; Nophar et al., EMBO J. 9(10):3269, 1990;Bjornberg et al., Lymphokine Cytokine Res. 13(3):203-211, 1994; Piguetet al., Eur. Respiratory J. 7(3):515-518, 1994; and Gray et al., Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87(19):7380-7384, 1990).

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the TNFα inhibitor is a small molecule. In someembodiments, the TNFα inhibitor is C87 (Ma et al., J. Biol. Chem.289(18):12457-66, 2014). In some embodiments, the small molecule isLMP-420 (e.g., Haraguchi et al., AIDS Res. Ther. 3:8, 2006). In someembodiments, the small molecule is a tumor necrosis factor-convertingenzyme (TACE) inhibitor (e.g., Moss et al., Nature Clinical PracticeRheumatology 4: 300-309, 2008). In some embodiments, the TACE inhibitoris TMI-005 and BMS-561392. Additional examples of small moleculeinhibitors are described in, e.g., He et al., Science310(5750):1022-1025, 2005.

In some examples, the TNFα inhibitor is a small molecule that inhibitsthe activity of one of TRADD, TRAF2, MEKK1/4, MEKK4/7, JNK, AP-1, ASK1,RIP, MEKK 3/6, MAPK, NIK, IKK, and NF-κB, in a mammalian cell.

In some examples, the TNFα inhibitor is a small molecule that inhibitsthe activity of one of CD14, MyD88 (see, e.g., Olson et al., ScientificReports 5:14246, 2015), IRAK (Chaudhary et al., J. Med. Chem.58(1):96-110, 2015), lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP) (see,e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,705,398), TRAF6 (e.g.,3-[(2,5-Dimethylphenyl)amino]-1-phenyl-2-propen-1-one), ras (e.g., Bakeret al., Nature 497:577-578, 2013), raf (e.g., vemurafenib (PLX4032,RG7204), sorafenib tosylate, PLX-4720, dabrafenib (GSK2118436),GDC-0879, RAF265 (CHIR-265), AZ 628, NVP-BHG712, SB590885, ZM 336372,sorafenib, GW5074, TAK-632, CEP-32496, encorafenib (LGX818), CCT196969,LY3009120, RO5126766 (CH5126766), PLX7904, and MLN2480), MEK1/2 (e.g.,Facciorusso et al., Expert Review Gastroentrol. Hepatol. 9:993-1003,2015), ERK1/2 (e.g., Mandal et al., Oncogene 35:2547-2561, 2016), NIK(e.g., Mortier et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 20:4515-4520, 2010), IKK(e.g., Reilly et al., Nature Med. 19:313-321, 2013), IκB (e.g., Suzukiet al., Expert. Opin. Invest. Drugs 20:395-405, 2011), NF-κB (e.g.,Gupta et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1799(10-12):775-787, 2010), rac(e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 9,278,956), MEK4/7, JNK (e.g., AEG 3482, BI 78D3,CEP 1347, c-JUN peptide, IQ 1S, JIP-1 (153-163), SP600125, SU 3327, andTCS JNK6o), c-jun (e.g., AEG 3482, BI 78D3, CEP 1347, c-JUN peptide, IQ1S, JIP-1 (153-163), SP600125, SU 3327, and TCS JNK6o), MEK3/6 (e.g.,Akinleye et al., J. Hematol. Oncol. 6:27, 2013), p38 (e.g., AL 8697, AMG548, BIRB 796, CMPD-1, DBM 1285 dihydrochloride, EO 1428, JX 401, ML3403, Org 48762-0, PH 797804, RWJ 67657, SB 202190, SB 203580, SB239063, SB 706504, SCIO 469, SKF 86002, SX 011, TA 01, TA 02, TAK 715,VX 702, and VX 745), PKR (e.g., 2-aminopurine or CAS 608512-97-6), TTP(e.g., CAS 329907-28-0), and MK2 (PF 3644022 and PHA 767491).

2. IL-12/IL-23 Inhibitors

The term “IL-12/IL-23 inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreasesIL-12 or IL-23 expression and/or the ability of IL-12 to bind to anIL-12 receptor or the ability of IL-23 to bind to an IL-23 receptor.IL-12 is a heterodimeric cytokine that includes both IL-12A (p35) andIL-12B (p40) polypeptides. IL-23 is a heterodimeric cytokine thatincludes both IL-23 (p19) and IL-12B (p40) polypeptides. The receptorfor IL-12 is a heterodimeric receptor includes IL-12R β1 and IL-12R β2.The receptor for IL-23 receptor is a heterodimeric receptor thatincludes both IL-12R β1 and IL-23R.

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor can decrease the bindingof IL-12 to the receptor for IL-12. In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23inhibitor can decrease the binding of IL-23 to the receptor for IL-23.In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor decreases the expressionof IL-12 or IL-23. In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitordecreases the expression of a receptor for IL-12. In some embodiments,the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor decreases the expression of a receptor forIL-23.

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitory agent targets IL-12B(p40) subunit. In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitory agenttargets IL-12A (p35). In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitoryagent targets IL-23 (p19). In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23inhibitory agent targets the receptor for IL-12 (one or both of IL-12Rβ1 or IL-12R β2). In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitory agenttargets the receptor for IL-23 (one or both of IL-12R β1 and IL-23R).

In some embodiments, an IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor can be an inhibitorynucleic acid. In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid can be anantisense nucleic acid, a ribozyme, and a small interfering RNA (siRNA).

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of IL-12A(p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R mRNAexpression in a mammalian cell include antisense nucleic acid molecules,i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotide sequence is complementaryto all or part of an IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1,IL-12R β2, or IL-23R mRNA. An antisense nucleic acid molecule can becomplementary to all or part of a non-coding region of the coding strandof a nucleotide sequence encoding an IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23(p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R protein. Non-coding regions (5′and 3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank thecoding region in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding an IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40),IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R protein (e.g., specificityfor an IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, orIL-23R mRNA).

An inhibitor nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule that formstriple helical structures. For example, expression of an IL-12A (p35),IL-12B (p40), IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R protein canbe inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequences complementary to theregulatory region of the gene encoding the IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40),IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R protein (e.g., the promoterand/or enhancer, e.g., a sequence that is at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4kb, or 5 kb upstream of the transcription initiation start state) toform triple helical structures that prevent transcription of the gene intarget cells.

Other examples of a IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor include siRNA that decreasethe level of IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12Rβ2, or IL-23R mRNA.

Non-limiting examples of siRNAs targeting IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40),IL-23 (p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R are described in Tan etal., J. Alzheimers Dis. 38(3): 633-646, 2014; Niimi et al., J.Neuroimmunol. 254(1-2):39-45, 2013. Non-limiting examples of shorthairpin RNA (shRNA) targeting IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23 (p19),IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R are described in Bak et al., BMCDermatol. 11:5, 2011.

Non-limiting examples of inhibitory nucleic acids are microRNAs (e.g.,microRNA-29 (Brain et al., Immunity 39(3):521-536, 2013), miR-10a (Xueet al., J. Immunol. 187(11):5879-5886, 2011), microRNA-155 (Podsiad etal., Am. J. Physiol. Lung Cell Mol. Physiol. 310(5):L465-75, 2016).

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to any one of IL-12A (p35), IL-12B (p40), IL-23(p19), IL-12R β1, IL-12R β2, or IL-23R, or a combination thereof.

In some embodiments, the antibody is ustekinumab (CNTO 1275, Stelara®)or a variant thereof (Krueger et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 356(6):580-592,2007; Kauffman et al., J. Invest. Dermatol. 123(6):1037-1044, 2004;Gottlieb et al., Curr. Med. Res. Opin. 23(5):1081-1092, 2007; Leonardiet al., Lancet 371(9625):1665-1674, 2008; Papp et al., Lancet371(9625):1675-1684, 2008). In some embodiments, the antibody isbriakinumab (ABT-874, J-695) or a variant thereof (Gordon et al., J.Invest. Dermatol. 132(2):304-314, 2012; Kimball et al., Arch Dermatol.144(2): 200-207, 2008).

In some embodiments, the antibody is guselkumab (CNTO-1959)(Callis-Duffin et al., J. Am. Acad. Dermatol. 70(5 Suppl 1), 2014);AB162 (Sofen et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 133: 1032-40, 2014);tildrakizumab (MK-3222, SCH900222) (Papp et al. (2015) Br. J. Dermatol.2015); Langley et al., Oral Presentation at: American Academy ofDermatology, March 21-25, Denver Colo., 2014); AMG 139 (MEDI2070,brazikumab) (Gomollon, Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 38(Suppl. 1):13-19, 2015;Kock et al., Br. J. Pharmacol. 172(1):159-172, 2015); FM-202 (Tang etal., Immunology 135(2):112-124, 2012); FM-303 (Tang et al., Immunology135(2):112-124, 2012); ADC-1012 (Tang et al., Immunology 135(2):112-124,2012); LY-2525623 (Gaffen et al., Nat. Rev. Immunol. 14:585-600, 2014;Sands, Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 12(12):784-786, 2016), LY-3074828 (Coskunet al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 38(2):127-142, 2017), BI-655066(risankizumab) (Singh et al., MAbs 7(4):778-791, 2015; Krueger et al.,J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 136(1):116-124, 2015) or a variant thereof.

See e.g., Tang et al., Immunology 135(2):112-124, 2012. Furtherteachings of IL-12/IL-23 antibodies and antigen-binding fragmentsthereof are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,902,734; 7,247,711; 7,252,971;and 7,491,391; US 2012/0288494; and US 2013/0302343, each of which isincorporated by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor is PTG-200, an IL-23Rinhibitor currently in preclinical development by ProtagonistTherapeutics.

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor is Mirikizumab (LY3074828), an IL-23R inhibitor currently in clinical development (PhaseII) by Eli Lilly.

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor is a fusion protein, asoluble antagonist, or an antimicrobial peptide. In some embodiments,the fusion protein comprises a soluble fragment of a receptor of IL-12or a soluble fragment of a receptor of IL-23. In some embodiments, thefusion protein comprises an extracellular domain of a receptor of IL-12or an extracellular domain of a receptor of IL-23.

In some embodiments, the fusion protein is adnectin or a variant thereof(Tang et al., Immunology 135(2):112-124, 2012). In some embodiments, thesoluble antagonist is a human IL-23Ra-chain mRNA transcript (Raymond etal., J. Immunol. 185(12):7302-7308, 2010). In some embodiments, theIL-12/IL-23 is an antimicrobial peptide (e.g., MP-196 (Wenzel et al.,PNAS 111(14):E1409-E1418, 2014)).

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor is a small molecule. Insome embodiments, the small molecule is STA-5326 (apilimod) or a variantthereof (Keino et al., Arthritis Res. Ther. 10: R122, 2008; Wada et al.,Blood 109(3):1156-1164, 2007; Sands et al., Inflamm. Bowel Dis.16(7):1209-1218, 2010).

3. IL-6 Receptor Inhibitors

The term “IL-6 receptor inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreasesIL-6 receptor expression and/or the ability of IL-6 to bind to an IL-6receptor. In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitor targets theIL-6 receptor β-subunit, glycoprotein 130 (sIL6gp130). In otherembodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitor targets the IL-6 receptorsubunit (IL6R). In other embodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitortargets the complex consisting of both the IL-6 receptor subunit (IL6R)and the IL-6 receptor β-subunit, glycoprotein 130 (sIL6gp130). In someembodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitor targets IL-6.

In some embodiments, an IL-6 receptor inhibitor is an inhibitory nucleicacid, an antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, a fusionprotein, a IL-6 receptor antagonist, or a small molecule. In someembodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid is a small interfering RNA, anantisense nucleic acid, an aptamer, or a microRNA. Exemplary IL-6receptor inhibitors are described herein. Additional examples of IL-6receptor inhibitors are known in the art.

Exemplary aspects of different inhibitory nucleic acids are describedbelow. Any of the examples of inhibitory nucleic acids that can decreaseexpression of an IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 mRNA. Inhibitory nucleic acidsthat can decrease the expression of IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 mRNA in amammalian cell include antisense nucleic acid molecules, i.e., nucleicacid molecules whose nucleotide sequence is complementary to all or partof an IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 mRNA.

Inhibitory Nucleic Acids

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding an IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 protein. Non-coding regions (5′ and3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank thecoding region in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.Exemplary antisense nucleic acids that are IL-6 receptor inhibitors aredescribed in Keller et al., J. Immunol. 154(8):4091-4098, 1995; andJiang et al., Anticancer Res. 31(9): 2899-2906, 2011.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding an IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6protein (e.g., specificity for an IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 mRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of an IL6R,sIL6gp130, or IL-6 polypeptide can be inhibited by targeting nucleotidesequences complementary to the regulatory region of the gene encodingthe IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 polypeptide (e.g., the promoter and/orenhancer, e.g., a sequence that is at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5kb upstream of the transcription initiation start state) to form triplehelical structures that prevent transcription of the gene in targetcells.

Additional examples of IL-6 receptor inhibitors include siRNA thatdecrease the level of IL6R, sIL6gp130, or IL-6 mRNA. Non-limitingexamples of short interfering RNA (siRNA) that are IL-6 receptorinhibitors are described in Yi et al., Int. J. Oncol. 41(1):310-316,2012; and Shinriki et al., Clin. Can. Res. 15(17):5426-5434, 2009).Non-limiting examples of microRNAs that are IL-6 receptor inhibitors aredescribed in miR34a (Li et al., Int. J. Clin. Exp. Pathol.8(2):1364-1373, 2015) and miR-451 (Liu et al., Cancer Epidemiol.38(1):85-92, 2014).

Non-limiting examples of aptamers that are IL-6 receptor inhibitors aredescribed in Meyer et al., RNA Biol. 11(1):57-65, 2014; Meyer et al.,RNA Biol. 9(1):67-80, 2012; and Mittelberger et al., RNA Biol.12(9):1043-1053, 2015. Additional examples of inhibitory nucleic acidsthat are IL-6 receptor inhibitors are described in, e.g., WO 96/040157.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to IL-6. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment described herein binds specifically to IL-6receptor (e.g., one or both of IL6R and sIL6gp130).

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of tocilizumab (artlizumab,Actemra®; Sebba, Am. J. Health Syst. Pharm. 65(15):1413-1418, 2008;Tanaka et al., FEBS Letters 585(23):3699-3709, 2011; Nishimoto et al.,Arthritis Rheum. 50:1761-1769, 2004; Yokota et al., Lancet371(9617):998-1006, 2008; Emery et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis.67(11):1516-1523, 2008; Roll et al., Arthritis Rheum. 63(5):1255-1264,2011); clazakizumab (BMS945429; ALD518, a humanized monoclonal antibodythat binds circulating IL-6 cytokine rather than the IL-6 receptor,blocking both classic signaling and trans-signaling (Weinblatt, MichaelE., et al. “The Efficacy and Safety of Subcutaneous Clazakizumab inPatients With Moderate-to-Severe Rheumatoid Arthritis and an InadequateResponse to Methotrexate: Results From a Multinational, Phase IIb,Randomized, Double-Blind, Placebo/Active-Controlled, Dose-RangingStudy.” Arthritis & Rheumatology 67.10 (2015): 2591-2600.)); sarilumab(REGN88 or SAR153191; Huizinga et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis. 73(9):1626-1634,2014; Sieper et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis.74(6):1051-1057, 2014; Cooper,Immunotherapy 8(3): 249-250, 2016); MR-16 (Hartman et al., PLosOne11(12):e0167195, 2016; Fujita et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta.10:3170-80, 2014; Okazaki et al., Immunol. Lett. 84(3):231-40, 2002;Noguchi-Sasaki et al., BMC Cancer 16:270, 2016; Ueda et al., Sci. Rep.3:1196, 2013); rhPM-1 (MRA; Nishimoto et al., Blood 95: 56-61, 2000;Nishimoto et al., Blood 106: 2627-2632, 2005; Nakahara et al., ArthritisRheum. 48(6): 1521-1529, 2003); NI-1201 (Lacroix et al., J. Biol. Chem.290(45):26943-26953, 2015); EBI-029 (Schmidt et al., ElevenBiotherapeutics Poster #B0200, 2014). In some embodiments, the antibodyis a nanobody (e.g., ALX-0061 (Van Roy et al., Arthritis Res. Ther. 17:135, 2015; Kim et al., Arch. Pharm. Res. 38(5):575-584, 2015)). In someembodiments, the antibody is NRI or a variant thereof (Adachi et al.,Mol. Ther. 11(1):5262-263, 2005; Hoshino et al., Can. Res. 67(3):871-875, 2007). In some embodiments, the antibody is PF-04236921(Pfizer) (Wallace et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis. 76(3):534-542, 2017).

In some embodiments, the antibody is siltuximab (Sylvant®), also knownas CNTO 328, a chimeric, human-murine, immunoglobulin (Ig) Gκ mAb thatbinds and neutralizes human IL-6 with high affinity and specificity. Thevariable region of siltuximab is derived from a murine anti-IL-6antibody, CLB8, and the constant region is derived from a human IgG1κmolecule. Sylvant® is approved for the treatment of patients withmulticentric Castleman's disease (MCD).

In some embodiments, the IL-6R inhibitor is AMG220, also known as C326,an avimer that displays bi-specificity to its interleukin target, aswell as binding to the Fc domain of IgG (resulting in reduced renalclearance and FcRn recycling). The compound has subpicomolar affinityfor IL-6 and displays a moderate serum half-life (˜30 h). Phase Iclinical trials of AMG220 in Crohn's disease revealed dose-dependentreduction in serum C-reactive protein, an inflammation biomarkersynthesized by hepatocytes in response to IL-6. Despite its apparentefficacy, Amgen has suspended the clinical development of the compound.

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitor is a fusion protein, asoluble receptor, or a peptide (see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,591,827). Insome embodiments, the IL-6 receptor fusion protein comprises or consistsof soluble gp130 (Jostock et al., Eur. J. Biochem. 268(1):160-167, 2001;Richards et al., Arthritis Rheum. 54(5):1662-1672, 2006; Rose-John etal., Exp. Opin. Ther. Targets 11(5):613-624, 2007).

In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptor fusion protein comprises orconsists of FE999301 (Jostock et al., Eur. J. Biochem. 268(1):160-167,2001) or sgp130Fc protein (Jones et al., J. Clin. Invest.121(9):3375-3383, 2011). In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptorinhibitor is a peptide (e.g., S7 (Su et al., Cancer Res.65(11):4827-4835, 2005). In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptorinhibitor is a triterpenoid saponin (e.g., chikusetsuaponin IVa butylester (CS-Iva-Be) (Yang et al., Mol. Cancer. Ther. 15(6):1190-200,2016).

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the IL-6 receptor inhibitor is a small molecule(see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 9,409,990). In some embodiments, the smallmolecule is LMT-28 (Hong et al., J. Immunol. 195(1): 237-245, 2015);ERBA (Enomoto et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 323:1096-1102,2004; Boos et al., J. Nat. Prod. 75(4):661-668, 2012), ERBF (TB-2-081)(Hayashi et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 303:104-109, 2002; Vardanyanet al., Pain 151(2):257-265, 2010; Kino et al., J. Allergy Clin.Immunol. 120(2):437-444, 2007), or a variant thereof.

4. Integrin Inhibitors

The term “integrin inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases theexpression of one or more integrins and/or decreases the binding of anintegrin ligand to one or more integrins that play a role in therecruitment, extravasation, and/or activation of a leukocyte. In someembodiments, the integrin inhibitor specifically binds to at least aportion of a ligand binding site on a target integrin. In someembodiments, the integrin inhibitor specifically binds to a targetintegrin at the same site as an endogenous ligand. In some embodiments,the integrin inhibitor decreases the level of expression of the targetintegrin in a mammalian cell. In some embodiments, the integrininhibitor specifically binds to an integrin ligand.

Non-limiting examples of integrins that can be targeted by any of theintegrin inhibitors described herein include: α2β1 integrin, α1β1integrin, α4β7 integrin, integrin α4β1 (VLA-4), E-selectin, ICAM-1, α5β1integrin, α4β1 integrin, VLA-4, α2β1 integrin, α5β3 integrin, α5β5integrin, αIIbβ3 integrin, and MAdCAM-1. A non-limiting example ofintegrin inhibitor that can decrease the expression and/or activity ofα4β7 integrin is FTY720. A non-limiting example of an integrin inhibitorthat specifically targets MAdCAM is PF-547659 (Pfizer). Non-limitingexamples of an integrin inhibitor that specifically targets α4β7 isAJM300 (Ajinomoto), etrolizumab (Genentech), and vedolizumab(Millenium/Takeda).

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an αIIbβ3 integrininhibitor. In some embodiments, the αIIbβ3 integrin inhibitor isabciximab (ReoPro®, c7E3; Kononczuk et al., Curr. Drug Targets16(13):1429-1437, 2015; Jiang et al., Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol.98(1):105-114, 2014), eptifibatide (Integrilin®; Scarborough et al., J.Biol. Chem. 268:1066-1073, 1993; Tcheng et al., Circulation91:2151-2157, 1995) or tirofiban (Aggrastat®; Hartman et al., J. Med.Chem. 35:4640-4642, 1992; Pierro et al., Eur. J. Ophthalmol.26(4):e74-76, 2016; Guan et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol 761:144-152, 2015).In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an αL-selective integrininhibitor. In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is a β2 integrininhibitor.

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an α4 integrin (e.g., anα4β1 integrin (e.g., Very Late Antigen-4 (VLA-4), CD49d, or CD29))inhibitor, an α4β7 integrin inhibitor. In some embodiments, the integrininhibitor targets endothelial VCAM1, fibronectin, mucosal addressincellular adhesion molecule-1 (MAdCAM-1), vitronectin, tenascin-C,osteopontin (OPN), nephronectin, agiostatin, tissue-typetransglutaminase, factor XIII, Von Willebrand factor (VWF), an ADAMprotein, an ICAM protein, collagen, e-cadherin, laminin, fibulin-5, orTGFβ. In some embodiments, the α4 integrin inhibitor is natalizumab(Tysabri®; Targan et al., Gastroenterology 132(5):1672-1683, 2007;Sandborn et al., N. Engl. J. Med. 353(18):1912-1925, 2005; Nakamura etal., Intern. Med. 56(2):211-214, 2017; and Singh et al., J. Pediatr.Gastroenterol. Nutr. 62(6):863-866, 2016). In some embodiments, theintegrin inhibitor is an endogenous integrin inhibitor (e.g., SHARPIN(Rantala et al., Nat. Cell. Biol. 13(11):1315-1324, 2011).

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an αv integrin (e.g., anα5β1 integrin, an α5β3 integrin, an α5β5 integrin inhibitor, and/or anα5β6 integrin) inhibitor.

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an α5β1 integrininhibitor.

In some embodiments, an integrin inhibitor is an inhibitory nucleicacid, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof, a fusion protein,an integrin antagonist, a cyclic peptide, a disintegrin, apeptidomimetic, or a small molecule. In some embodiments, the inhibitorynucleic acid is a small hairpin RNA, a small interfering RNA, anantisense, an aptamer, or a microRNA.

Inhibitory Nucleic Acids

In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid can be an antisensenucleic acid, a ribozyme, a small interfering RNA, a small hairpin RNA,or a microRNA. Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expressionof target integrin mRNA or a target integrin ligand mRNA (e.g., any ofthe exemplary integrins described herein or any of the exemplaryintegrin ligands described herein) in a mammalian cell include antisensenucleic acid molecules, i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotidesequence is complementary to all or part of target integrin mRNA or atarget integrin ligand mRNA. An antisense nucleic acid molecule can becomplementary to all or part of a non-coding region of the coding strandof a nucleotide sequence encoding a target integrin or a target integrinligand (e.g., any of the exemplary target integrins or any of theexemplary integrin ligands described herein). Non-coding regions (5′ and3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank thecoding region in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.Exemplary integrin inhibitors that are antisense nucleic acids includeATL1102 (e.g., Limmroth et al., Neurology 83(20):1780-1788, 2014; Li etal., Dig. Liver Dis. 39(6):557-565, 2007; Goto et al., Inflamm. BowelDis. 12(8):758-765, 2006).

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding a target integrin (e.g., any ofthe exemplary target integrins described herein) or an integrin ligand(e.g., any of the exemplary integrin ligands described herein).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of a targetintegrin (e.g., any of the exemplary target integrins described herein)or an integrin ligand (e.g., any of the exemplary integrin ligandsdescribed herein) can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequencescomplementary to the regulatory region of the gene encoding the targetintegrin (e.g., any of the exemplary target integrins described herein)or the integrin ligand (e.g., any of the exemplary integrin ligandsdescribed herein) (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequencethat is at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of thetranscription initiation start state) to form triple helical structuresthat prevent transcription of the gene in target cells.

In some embodiments, an integrin inhibitor is a siRNA that decreases thelevel of a target integrin (e.g., any of the exemplary target integrinsdescribed herein) mRNA or an integrin ligand (e.g., any of the exemplaryintegrin ligands described herein) mRNA. Non-limiting examples ofintegrin inhibitors that are short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) aredescribed in Wang et al., Cancer Cell Int 16:90, 2016). In someembodiments, the integrin inhibitor is a short hairpin RNA (shRNA).

Non-limiting examples of integrin inhibitors that are microRNA includemiR-124 (Cai et al., Sci. Rep. 7:40733, 2017), miR-134 (Qin et al.,Oncol. Rep. 37(2):823-830, 2017), miR-92b (Ma et al., Oncotarget8(4):6681-6690, 2007), miR-17 (Gong et al., Oncol. Rep. 36(4), 2016),miR-338 (Chen et al., Oncol. Rep. 36(3):1467-74, 2016), and miR-30a-5p(Li et al., Int. J. Oncol. 48(3):1155-1164, 2016).

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, the antibody can be a humanized antibody, a chimericantibody, a multivalent antibody, or a fragment thereof.

In some embodiments, the antibody is a pan-β1 antibody (e.g., OS2966(Carbonell et al., Cancer Res. 73(10):3145-3154, 2013). In someembodiments, the integrin antibody is a monoclonal antibody (e.g., 17E6(Castel et al., Eur. J. Cell. Biol. 79(7):502-512, 2000); Mitjans etal., Int. J. Cancer 87(5):716-723, 2000)). In some embodiments, themonoclonal antibody is vedolizumab (e.g., Entyvio®) or a variant thereof(Feagan et al., N. Engl. J. Med 369:699-710, 2013; Sandborn et al., N.Engl. J. Med. 369:711-721, 2013; Sands et al., Gastroenterology147:618-627, 2014; and Milch et al., Neuroimmunol. 264:123-126, 2013;Wyant et al., J. Crohns Colitis 10(12):1437-1444, 2016; and Feagan etal., Gastroenterology 142(5):5160-5161, 2012).

In some embodiments, the antibody can be a Fab fragment of a monoclonalchimeric mouse-human antibody (e.g., abciximab (ReoPro, c7E3), Kononczuket al., Curr. Drug Targets 16(13):1429-1437, 2015; Jiang et al., Appl.Microbiol. Biotechnol. 98(1):105-114, 2014), or a variant thereof. Insome embodiments, the integrin antibody is a humanized monoclonalantibody. In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody isnatalizumab (Tysabri®) (Targan et al., Gastroenterology132(5):1672-1683, 2007; Sandborn et al., N. Engl. J. Med.353(18):1912-1925, 2005; Nakamura et al., Intern Med. 56(2):211-214,2017; Singh et al., J. Pediatr. Gastroenterol. Nutr. 62(6):863-866,2016). In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody is vitaxin(MEDI-523) or a variant thereof (Huveneers et al., Int. J. Radiat. Biol.81(11-12):743-751, 2007; Coleman et al., Circ. Res. 84(11):1268-1276,1999). In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody isetaracizumab (Abegrin®, MEDI-522, LM609) or a variant thereof (Hersey etal., Cancer 116(6):1526-1534, 2010; Delbaldo et al., Invest New Drugs26(1):35-43, 2008). In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonalantibody is CNTO95 (Intetumumab®) or a variant thereof (Jia et al.,Anticancer Drugs 24(3):237-250, 2013; Heidenreich et al., Ann. Oncol.24(2):329-336, 2013; Wu et al., J. Neurooncol. 110(1):27-36, 2012). Insome embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody is efalizumab(Raptiva®) or a variant thereof (Krueger et al., J. Invest. Dermatol.128(11):2615-2624, 2008; Li et al., PNAS 106(11):4349-4354, 2009;Woolacott et al., Health Technol. Assess 10:1 -233, 2006). In someembodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody is STX-100 (Stromedix®)or a variant thereof (van Aarsen et al., Cancer Res. 68:561-570, 2008;Lo et al., Am. J. Transplant. 13(12):3085-3093, 2013). In someembodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody is 264RAD or a variantthereof (Eberlein et al., Oncogene 32(37):4406-4417, 2013).

In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody is rovelizumab ora variant thereof (Goodman et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci 33:405-412,2012). In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody isCytolin® or a variant thereof (Rychert et al., Virology J. 10:120,2013). In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody isetrolizumab or a variant thereof (Vermeire et al., Lancet 384:309-318,2014; Rutgeerts et al., Gut 62:1122-1130, 2013; Lin et al.,Gastroenterology 146:307-309, 2014; Ludviksson et al., J. Immunol.162(8):4975-4982, 1999; Stefanich et al., Br. J. Pharmacol.162(8):1855-1870, 2011). In some embodiments, the humanized monoclonalantibody is abrilumab (AMG 181; MEDI-7183) or a variant thereof (Pan etal., Br. J. Pharmacol. 169(1):51-68, 2013; Pan et al., Br. J. Clin.Pharmacol. 78(6):1315-1333, 2014). In some embodiments, the humanizedmonoclonal antibody is PF-00547659 (SHP647) or a variant thereof(Vermeire et al., Gut 60(8):1068-1075, 2011; Sandborn et al.,Gastroenterology 1448(4):S-162, 2015). In some embodiments, thehumanized monoclonal antibody is SAN-300 (hAQC2) or a variant thereof(Karpusas et al., J. Mol. Biol. 327:1031-1041, 2003). In someembodiments, the humanized monoclonal antibody is DI176E6 (EMD 5257) ora variant thereof (Goodman et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci 33:405-412,2012; and Sheridan et al., Nat. Biotech. 32:205-207, 2014).

In some embodiments, the integrin antibody is a chimeric monoclonalantibody. In some embodiments, the chimeric monoclonal antibody isvolociximab or a variant thereof (Kuwada et al., Curr. Opin. Mol. Ther.9(1):92-98, 2007; Ricart et al., Clin. Cancer Res. 14(23):7924-7929,2008; Ramakrishnan et al., J. Exp. Ther. Oncol. 5(4):273-86, 2006;Bell-McGuinn et al., Gynecol. Oncol. 121:273-279, 2011; Almokadem etal., Exp. Opin. Biol. Ther. 12:251-7, 2012).

In some embodiments, the antibody specifically binds one or more (e.g.,1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) integrin. In some embodiments, the antibodyspecifically binds an integrin dimer (e.g., MLN-00002, MLN02 (Feagan etal., Clin. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 6(12):1370-1377, 2008; Feagan et al.,N. Engl. J. Med. 352(24):2499-2507, 2005). In certain embodiments, theantibody comprises or consists of an antigen-binding fragment ofabciximab (Reopro™) (Straub et al., Eur. J. Cardiothorac Surg.27(4):617-621, 2005; Kim et al., Korean J. Intern. Med. 19(4):220-229,2004). In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is an antibody-drugconjugate (e.g., IMGN388 (Bendell et al., EJC Suppl 8(7):152, 2010).

Further examples of antibodies and antigen-binding fragments thereof aredescribed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,919,792; 6,214,834; 7,074,408; 6,833,373;7,655,624; 7,465,449; 9,558,899; 7,659,374; 8,562,986; 8,398,975; and8,853,149; US 2007/0117849; US 2009/0180951; US 2014/0349944; US2004/0018192; WO 11/137418; and WO 01/068586; each of which isincorporated by reference in its entirety.

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is a fusion protein (e.g.,an Fc fusion protein of an extracellular domain of an integrin or anintegrin receptor), a soluble receptor (e.g., the extracellular domainof an integrin or an integrin receptor), or a recombinant integrinbinding protein (e.g., an integrin ligand). See, e.g., Lode et al., PNAS96(4):1591-1596, 1999; Stephens et al., Cell Adhesion Comm. 7:377-390,2000; and US 2008/0739003; incorporated by reference herein).Non-limiting examples of fusion proteins that are integrin inhibitorsinclude Ag25426 (Proteintech).

Small Molecules Antagonists

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is a small molecule. In someembodiments, the small molecule is a non-peptide small molecule. In someembodiments, the non-peptide small molecule is a RGD (ArgGlyAsp)-mimeticantagonist (e.g., tirofiban (Aggrastat®); Pierro et al., Eur. J.Ophthalmol. 26(4):e74-76, 2016; Guan et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol761:144-152, 2015. In some embodiments, the small molecule is α4antagonist (e.g., firategrast (Miller et al., Lancet Neurol.11(2):131-139, 2012) AJM300 (Yoshimura et al., Gastroenterology149(7):1775-1783, 2015; Takazoe et al., Gastroenterology 136(5):A-181,2009; Sugiura et al., J. Crohns Colitis 7(11):e533-542, 2013)). In someembodiments, the small molecule is α4β1 antagonist (e.g., IVL745 (Norriset al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 116(4):761-767, 2005; Cox et al., Nat.Rev. Drug Discov. 9(10):804-820, 2010)), BIO-1211 (Abraham et al., Am.J. Respir. Crit. Care Med. 162:603-611, 2000; Ramroodi et al., Immunol.Invest. 44(7):694-712, 2015; Lin et al., J. Med. Chem. 42(5):920-934,1999), HMR 1031 (Diamant et al., Clin. Exp. Allergy 35(8):1080-1087,2005); valategrast (R411) (Cox et al., Nat. Rev. Drug Discov.9(10):804-820, 2010), GW559090X (Ravensberg et al., Allergy61(9):1097-1103, 2006), TR14035 (Sircar et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem.10(6):2051-2066, 2002; Cortijo et al., Br. J. Pharmacol. 147(6):661-670,2006)). In some embodiments, the small molecule is αvβ3 antagonist(e.g., L0000845704, SB273005). In some embodiments, the small moleculeis α5β1 antagonist (e.g., JSM6427). In some embodiments, the smallmolecule is GLPG0974 (Vermeire et al., J. Crohns Colitis Suppl. 1:S39,2015). In some embodiments, the small molecule is MK-0429 (Pickarksi etal., Oncol. Rep. 33(6):2737-45, 2015; Rosenthal et al., Asia Pac J.Clin. Oncol. 6:42-8, 2010). In some embodiments, the small molecule isJSM-6427 or a variant thereof (Zahn et al., Arch.Ophthalmol.127(10):1329-1335, 2009; Stragies et al., J. Med. Chem.50:3786-94, 2007).

In some embodiments, the small molecule targets a β2 integrin. In someembodiments, the small molecule is SAR-118 (SAR1118) or a variantthereof (Zhong et al., ACS Med. Chem. Lett. 3(3):203-206, 2012; Suchardet al., J. Immunol. 184:3917-3926, 2010; Yandrapu et al., J. Ocul.Pharmacol. Ther. 29(2):236-248, 2013; Semba et al., Am. J. Ophthalmol.153:1050-60, 2012). In some embodiments, the small molecule isBMS-587101 or a variant thereof (Suchard et al., J. Immunol.184(7):3917-3926, 2010; Potin et al., J. Med. Chem. 49:6946-6949, 2006).See e.g., Shimaoka et al., Immunity 19(3):391-402, 2003; U.S. Pat. Nos.7,138,417; 7,928,113; 7,943,660; and 9,216,174; US 2008/0242710; and US2008/0300237.

In some embodiments, the small molecule integrin inhibitor can bePTG-100, which is described in, e.g., Shames et al., “Pharmakokineticsand Pharmacodynamics of the Novel Oral Peptide Therapeutic PTG-100 (α4β7Integrin Antagonist) in Normal Healthy Volunteers,” 24th United EuropeanGastroentrology Week, October 15-19, Vienna, Austria, 2016.

Cyclic Peptides

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is a cyclic peptide. In someembodiments, the cyclic peptide comprises or consists of an amino acidsequence as set forth in the amino acid sequence of a ligand recognitionsequence of an endogenous integrin ligand. In some embodiments, thecyclic peptide competes for a target integrin ligand binding site withan endogenous integrin ligand. In some embodiments, the cyclic peptideincludes one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) D-amino acids. Insome embodiments, the cyclic peptide is a synthetic cyclic peptide. Insome embodiments, the synthetic cyclic peptide is a heptapeptide. Insome embodiments, the synthetic cyclic peptide is eptifabitide(Integrilin™), or a variant thereof. In some embodiments, the cyclicpeptide comprises a heterocyclic nucleic (e.g., a benzodiazepinone, apiperazine, a benzoazepinone, a nitroaryl, an isoxazoline, an indazole,or a phenol; Spalluto et al., Curr. Med. Chem. 12:51-70, 2005). In someembodiments, the cyclic peptide is a macrocycle (see, e.g., Halland etal., ACS Med. Chem. Lett. 5(2):193-198, 2014). In some embodiments, thepeptide is ALG-1001 or a variant thereof (Mathis et al., Retin. Phys.9:70, 2012). In some embodiments, the cyclic peptide is animidazolone-phenylalanine derivative, a heteroaryl, hetrocyclic, andaryl derivative, a bicyclic-aromatic amino acid derivative, acyclohexane-carboxylic acid derivative, a di-aryl substituted ureaderivative, a multimeric L-alanine derivative, a L-alanine derivative,or a pyrimidyl-sulfonamide derivative (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.6,630,492; 6,794,506; 7,049,306; 7,371,854; 7,759,387; 8,030,328;8,129,366; 7,820,687; 8,350,010; and 9,345,793).

Peptidomimetics

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor is a peptidomimetic. In someembodiments, the peptidomimetic has an integrin-ligand recognition motif(e.g., RGD, KTS, or MLD). See, e.g., Carron et al., Cancer Research58:1930-1935, 1998; Fanelli et al., Vascular Cell 6:11, 2014; and DeMarco et al., Curr. Top. Med. Chem. 16(3):343-359, 2016.

In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic is an RGD(ArgGlyAsp)-basedpeptide (U.S. Pat. No. 8,809,338, incorporated by reference in itsentirety herein). In some embodiments, the RGD-based peptide can becilengitide or a variant thereof (EMD 12974) (Mas-Moruno et al.,Anticancer Agents Med. Chem. 10:753-768, 2010; Reardon et al., FutureOncol. 7(3):339-354, 2011; Beekman et al., Clin. Genitourin Cancer4(4):299-302, 2006; SC56631 (e.g., Engleman et al., Am Soc. Clin.Invest. 99(9):2284-2292, 1997; Peng et al., Nature Chem Biol. 2:381-389,2006). In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic can be a Lys-Gly-Asp(KGD)-based peptide. In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic can bevipegitide or a variant thereof (Momic et al., Drug Design Devel.Therapy 9:291-304, 2015). In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic can bea peptide conjugated with an antimicrobial synthetic peptide. (e.g.,ACDCRGDCFC conjugated with (KLAKLAK)₂ (Ellerby et al., Nat. Med.5(9):1032-1038, 1999). See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,636,977.

Disintegrins

In some embodiments, the integrin inhibitor can be a disintegrin. Theterm “disintegrin” as used herein refers to a low molecular weightpeptide integrin inhibitor derived from a snake venom (e.g., pit vipervenom). In some embodiments, the disintegrin is a RGD(ArgGlyAsp)-, aKTS- or an MLD-based disintegrin.

Non-limiting examples of disintegrins include accutin, accurhagin-C,albolabrin, alternagin-c, barbourin, basilicin, bitisgabonin-1,bitisgabonin-2, bitistatin, cerastin, cereberin, cumanastatin 1,contortrostatin, cotiarin, crotatroxin, dendroaspin, disba-01, durissin,echistatin, EC3, elegantin, eristicophin, eristostatin, EMS11, EO4, EO5,flavoridin, flavostatin, insularin, jarastatin, jerdonin, jerdostatin,lachesin, lebein (e.g., lebein-1, lebein-2), leberagin-C, lebestatin,lutosin, molossin, obtustatin, ocellatusin, rhodocetin, rhodostomin,R-mojastin 1, salmosin, saxatilin, schistatin, tablysin-15, tergeminin,triflavin, trigramin, trimestatin, VA6, vicrostatin, viridin,viperstatin, VB7, VLO4, and VLO5, or a variant thereof. See, e.g.,Arruda Macedo et al., Curr. Protein. Pept. Sci. 16(6):532-548, 2015; Hsuet al., Sci. Rep. 6:23387, 2016; Kele et al. Curr. Protein Pept. Sci.6:532-548, 2015; Koh et al., Toxicon 59(4):497-506, 2012; Scarborough etal., J. Biol. Chem. 268:1058-1065, 1993; Kisiel et al., FEBS Lett.577:478-482, 2004; Souza et al., Arch. Biochem. Biophys. 384:341-350,2000; Eble et al., J. Biol. Chem. 278:26488-26496, 2003; Marcinkiewiczet al., J. Biol. Chem. 274:12468-12473, 1999; Calvete et al., J.Proteome Res. 6:326-336, 2007; Scibelli et al., FEMS Microbiol. Lett.247:51-57, 2005; Oliva et al., Toxicon 50:1053-1063, 2007; Minea et al.,Toxicon 59:472-486, 2012; Smith et al., FEBS Lett. 512:111-115, 2002;Tselepis et al., J. Biol. Chem. 272:21341-21348, 1997; Da Silva et al.,Tromb. Res. 123:731-739, 2009; Thibault et al., Mol. Pharmacol.58:1137-1145, 2000; Lu et al., Biochem. 1 304:818-825, 1994; Yeh et al.,Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 1425:493-504, 1998; Huang et al., Exp. Hematol.36:1704-1713, 2008; Shih et al., Matrix Biol. 32:152-159, 2013; Wang etal., Br. J. Pharmacol. 160:1338-1351, 2010; Della-Casa et al., Toxicon57:125-133, 2011; Sheu et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 1336:445-454,1997; Fujii et al., J. Mol. Biol. 332:115-122, 2003; Bilgrami et al., J.Mol. Biol. 341:829-837, 2004; Zhou et al., Toxicon 43:69-75, 2004;Scarborough et al., J. Biol. Chem. 268:1066-1073, 1993; Shebuski et al.,J. Biol. Chem. 264:21550-21556, 1989; Lu et al., Biochem. J.304:929-936, 1994; McLane et al., Biochem. J. 301:429-436, 1994; Juarezet al., Toxicon 56:1052-1058, 2010; Olfa et al., Lab. Invest.85:1507-1516, 2005; Elbe et al., Matrix Biol. 21:547-558, 2002;Bazan-Socha et al., Biochemistry 43:1639-1647, 2004; Danen et al., Exp.Cell. Res. 238:188-196, 1998; Marcinkiewicz et al., Biochemistry38(40):13302-13309, 1999; Calvete et al., Biochem. J. 372:725-734, 2003;Swenson et al., Pathophysiol. Haemost. Thromb. 34:169-176, 2005; Kwon etal., PLoS One 8; e81165, 2013; Yang et al., Toxicon 45:661-669, 2005;Limam et al., Matrix Biol. 29:117-126, 2010; Gan et al., J. Biol. Chem.263:19827-19832, 1988; Ma et al., Thromb. Haemost. 105(6):1032-1045,2011; and U.S. Pat. No. 7,074,408, incorporated in their entiretyherein.

5. TLR Agonists/Antagonists

The term “TLR agonist” is an agent that binds to and activates atoll-like receptor (TLR) expressed in a mammalian cell (e.g., a humancell). In some embodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR1.In some embodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR2. Insome embodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR3. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR4. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR5. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR6. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR7. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR8. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR9. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR10. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates TLR11. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist binds to and activates two or more (e.g.,three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, or eleven) TLRs (e.g.,two or more of any of TLR1, TLR2, TLR3, TLR4, TLR5, TLR6, TLR7, TLR8,TLR9, TLR10, and TLR11 (in any combination)).

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist is a synthetic TLR agonist, a TLRmimic, or a small molecule. Non-limiting examples of TLR agonists aredescribed in Bhardwaj et al., Cancer J. 16(4):382-391, 2010; Meyer etal., Exp. Opin. Investig. Drugs 17(7):1051-1065, 2008; Adams,Immunotherapy 1(6):949-964, 2009; Hennessy et al., Nat. Rev. DrugDiscov. 9:293-307, 2010; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,498,409; 9,421,254;8,409,813; 8,361,986; 8,795,678; 8,728,486; 8,636,979; 8,999,946;9,359,360; 9,050,376; and 9,556,167; US 2014/0322271; US 2016/0206690;US 2009/0253622; US 2011/0135669; US 2011/0250175; US 2014/0220074; andUS 2012/0219615; each incorporated in its entirety herein. In someembodiments, the TLR agonist is a peptide or a fusion protein (Huleattet al., Vaccine 25: 763-775, 2007).

In some embodiments, a TLR agonist specifically binds to and activates asingle TLR (e.g., TLR4, TLR7, TLR8, or TLR9; Zhu et al., J. Clin.Invest. 120:607-616, 2010; Zhu et al., PNAS 105:16260-16265, 2008; Wanget al., J. Virol. 79(22):14355-14370, 2005). In some embodiments, theTLR agonist binds to and activates more than one TLR (e.g., Bacillus ofCalmette-Guerin, Myobacterium bovis (BCG); Morton et al., Ann. Surg.180(4):635-643, 1974; Mortoon et al., J. Clin. Oncol. ASCO Ann. MeetingProceedings Part I 25(18 Suppl), 2007). In some embodiments, the TLRagonist is a TLR2/TLR6 agonist (e.g., Pam2CSK4 or MALP-2 (Agnihotri etal., J. Med. Chem. 54: 8148-8160, 2011; Wu et al., J. Med. Chem. 53:3198-3213, 2010)).

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist is an endogenous molecule releasedfrom dead cells (e.g., a heat shock protein (HSP) and mobility group box1 (HMGB1); Asea et al., J. Biol. Chem. 277:15028-15034, 2002; Kepp etal., Cancer Metastasis 30: 61-69, 2011).

TLR3 Agonists

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist specifically binds and activatesTLR3 (e.g., a synthetic agonist). Non-limiting examples of TLR agoniststhat bind and activate TLR3 are described in Nicodemus et al.,Immunotherapy 2:137-140, 2010. In some embodiments, the TLR3 agonist isa synthetic double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) complex (e.g., polyribosinic:polyribocytidic acid (polyI:C); Sivori et al., PNAS 101:10116-10121,2004; Sloat et al., Pharmaceutical Res. 23:1217-1226, 2006; Ichinohe etal., Microbes and infection/Institut Pasteur 9:1333-1340, 2007; Robinsonet al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 57(3):599-602, 1976). In some embodiments,the TLR3 agonist is a TLR3 mimic (e.g., polyadenosine-polyuridylic acid(poly A:U) (Veyrat et al., Oncotarget 7(50):82580-82593, 2016; Alizadehet al., Iran J. Allergy Asthma Immunol. 12(2):161-167, 2013);rintatolimod (polyI: polyCU, Ampligen®) (Steinman et al., Nature 449:419-426, 2007; Jasani et al., Vaccine 27(25-26):3401-3404, 2009; Strayeret al., PLoS One 7(3): e31334, 2012). In some embodiments, the TLR3mimic is polyionisinic-polycytidylic acid stabilized with poly-L-lysineand carboxymethylcellulose (Poly-ICLC, Hiltonol®; Hawkins et al., J.Biol. Resp. Mod. 4:664-668, 1985; Butowski et al., J. Neurooncol.91:175-182, 2009; Jeong et al., J. Neurochem. doi.10.1111, 2015). Insome embodiments, the TLR3 agonist is RGC100 (Naumann et al., Clin. Dev.Immunol. 283649, 2013), IPH-3102 (Basith et al., Exp. Opin. Ther. Pat.21: 927-944, 2011), or a variant thereof. In some embodiments, the TLR3agonist is CQ-07001 (Clinquest). In some embodiments, the TLR3 agonistis Ampligen poly(I):poly(C12U) (Hemispherx Biopharma). In someembodiments, the TLR3 agonist is IPH-31XX (Innate Pharma). In someembodiments, the TLR3 agonist is MCT-465-dsRNA (MultiCell Technologies).

TLR4 Agonists

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist specifically binds to and activatesTLR4 (Peri et al., J. Med. Chem. 57(9):3612-3622, 2014). In someembodiments, the TLR4 agonist is bacterial lipopolysaccharide (LPS) or avariant thereof. In some embodiments, the TLR4 agonist is monophosphoryllipid A (MPL, MPLA, GLA, GLA-SE) (Ribi et al., J. Immunol. 6:567-572,1984; Okemoto et al., J. Immunol. 176:1203-1208, 2006; Matzner et al.,Int. J. Cancer 138:1754-1764, 2016; Cauwelaert et al., PLoS One11(1):e0146372, 2016). In some embodiments, the TLR agonist is AS15 orAS02b (Brichard et al., Vaccine 25(Suppl. 2):B61-B71, 2007; Kruit etal., J. Clin. Oncol. 26(Suppl): Abstract 9065, 2008). In someembodiments, the TLR agonist is an aminoalkyl glucosaminide 4-phosphate(e.g., RC-529, Ribi.529, E6020) or a variant thereof (Baldridge et al.,J. Endotoxin Res. 8:453-458, 2002; Morefield et al., Clin. VaccineImmunol. 14: 1499-1504, 2007). In some embodiments, the TLR agonist ispicibanil (OK-432) (Hazim et al., Med. J. Malaysia 71(6):328-330, 2016;Tian et al., Asian Pac J. Cancer Prey. 16(11):4537-4542, 2015; Rebuffiniet al., Dent Rese. J. 9(Suppl. 2):S192-S196, 2012). In some embodiments,the TLR4 agonist is Spirulina complex polysaccharide (Kwanishi et al.,Microbiol. Immunol. 57:63-73, 2013). In some embodiments, the TLR4agonist is chitohexaose or a variant thereof (Panda et al., 8:e1002717,2012; Barman et al., Cell Death Dis. 7:e2224, 2016). In someembodiments, the TLR4 agonist is E5564 (Eritoran) (Eisai). In someembodiments, the TLR4 agonist is CRX-675 or CRX-527 (GSK).

TLR5 Agonists

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist binds and activates TLR5. In someembodiments, the TLR5 agonist is flagellin or a variant thereof (e.g.,entolimod (CBLB502)) (Yoon et al., Science 335: 859-864, 2012; Fukuzawaet al., J. Immunol. 187:3831-3839, 2011; Brackett et al., PNAS113(7):E874-E883, 2015; Leigh et al., PLoS One 9(1):e85587, 2014;Hossain et al., Blood 120:255, 2012). In some embodiments, the TLR5agonist is flagellin HuHa (Vaxinate) or flagellin HuM2e (Vaxinate).

TLR7/8 Agonists

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist binds and activates TLR7/8 (e.g.,TLR7 agonist, TLR8 agonist, or a TLR7 and TLR8 agonist). In someembodiments, the TLR7/8 agonist is ANA975 (isotorabine)(Anadys/Novartis), ANA773 (Anadys/Novartis),

In some embodiments, the TLR7/8 agonist is an imidazoquinoline or avariant thereof (e.g., imiquimod (Aldara™; Kaspari et al., British J.Dermatology 147: 757-759, 2002; Smorlesi et al., Gene Therapy 12:1324-133, 2005; Prins et al., J. Immunol. 176: 157-164, 2006; Shackletonet al., Cancer Immun. 4:9, 2004; Green et al., Br. J. Dermatol.156(2):337-345, 2007; Geisse et al., Am. Acad. Dermatol. 50(5):722-733,2004; Wolf et al., Arch. Dermatol. 139(3):273-276, 2003), resiquimod(R848; Hemmi et al., Nat. Immunol. 3:196-200, 2002; Jurk et al., Nat.Immunol. 3:49, 2002; Rook et al., Blood 126(12):1452-1461, 2015; Dovediet al., Blood 121: 251-259, 2013). In some embodiments, the TLR agonistis a synthetic imiadzoquinoline mimicking viral single stranded RNA(ssRNA) (852A) or a variant thereof (Dudek et al., Clin. Cancer Res.13(23):7119-7125, 2007; Dummer et al., Clin. Cancer Res. 14(3):856-864,2008; Weigel et al., Am. J. Hematol. 87(10):953-956, 2012; Geller etal., Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 59(12):1877-1884, 2010; Inglefield etal., J. Interferon Cytokine Res. 28(4):253-263, 2008). In someembodiments, the TLR agonist is a small molecule. In some embodiments,the small molecule mimics viral ssRNA (e.g., motolimod (VTX-2337)) or avariant thereof (Dietsch et al., Clin. Cancer Res. 21(24):5445-5452,2015; Northfelt et al., Clin. Cancer Res. 20(14):3683-3691, 2014; Lu etal., Clin. Cancer Res. 18(2):499-509, 2012). In some embodiments, thesmall molecule is GS-9620 or a variant thereof (Bam et al., AntimicrobAgents Chemother. 61(1):e01369, 2016; Rebbapragada et al., PLoS One11(1):e0146835, 2016; Gane et al., J. Hepatol. 63(2): 320-328, 2015;Fosdick et al., J. Med. Chem. 56(18):7324-7333, 2013). In someembodiments, the small molecule is SC1 (Wiedemann et al., Oncoimmunology5(7):e1189051, 2016; Hamm et al., J. Immunol. 6(4):257-265, 2009). Insome embodiments, the small molecule is gardiquimod (Ma et al., Cell.Mol. Immunol. 7:381-388, 2010; Hjelm et al., Hum. Vaccin. Immunother.10(2): 410-416, 2014; Buitendijk et al., AIDS Res. Hum. Retroviruses29(6):907-918, 2013), CL075 (Philbin et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol.130:195-204, 2012; Dowling et al., PLoS One 8(3): e58164, 2013), CL097(Gorden et al., J. Immunol. 174:1259-1268, 2005; Gorski et al., Int.Immunol.18:1115, 2006; Levy et al., Blood 108:1284-1289, 2006;Wille-Reece et al., J. Exp. Med. 203: 1249-1258, 2006), loxoribine (Popeet al., Cell Immunol. 162:333, 1995; Heil et al., Eur. J. Immunol.33:2987-2997, 2003; Lee et al., PNAS 100:6646-6651, 2003), or VTX-294(Dowling et al., PLoS One 8(3):e58164, 2013). In some embodiments, theTLR7/8 agonist is IMO-9200. In some embodiments, the TLR7 agaonist isIPH-32XX (Innate Pharma).

TLR9 Agonists

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist binds and activates TLR9. In someembodiments, the TLR9 agonist is a synthetic oligonucleotide. In someembodiments, the synthetic oligonucleotide contains unmethylated CpGdinucleotide (CpG-ODN) (Krieg, J. Clin. Invest. 117:1184-1194, 2007;Carpentier et al., Neuro-oncol. 8(1):60-66, 2006; Link et al., J.Immunother. 29(5): 558-568, 2006; Pashenkov et al., J. Clin. Oncol.24(36): 5716-5724, 2006; Meng et al., BMC Biotechnol. 11:88, 2011). Insome embodiments, the TLR9 agonist is PF-3512676 or a variant thereof(Hofmann et al., J. Immunother. 31(5):520-527, 2008; Molenkamp et al.,Clin. Caner. Res. 14(14):4532-4542, 2008). In some embodiments, the TLR9agonist is IMO-2055 (EMD1201801) or a variant thereof (Machiels et al.,Investig. New Drugs 31:1207-1216, 2013). In some embodiments, the TLR9agonist is DIMS0150 (Atreya et al., J. Crohns Colitis 10(11):1294-1302,2016). In some embodiments, the TLR9 agonist is CpG7909 (Vaximmune)(Coley, GSK, Novartis, DARPA). In some embodiments, the TLR9 agonist isIMO-9200. In some embodiments, the TLR9 agonist is AVE0675 (Coley,Sanofi Aventis). In some embodiments, the TLR9 agonist is Amplivax(Idera).

Microbial Products as TLR Agonists

In some embodiments, the TLR agonist is a bacterial or viral component.In some embodiments, the TLR agonist is derived from the cell wallMycobacterium bovis (BCG). In some embodiments, the Mycobacterium boviscell wall component is a TLR2 and/or TLR4 agonist (e.g., SMP105 (Murataet al., Cancer Sci. 99:1435-1440, 2008; Miyauchi et al., Drug Discov.Ther. 6: 218-225, 2013; Tsuji et al., Infect Immun. 68: 6883-6890, 2000;Smith et al., Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 63(8):787-796, 2014).Additional examples of TLR agonists are known in the art.

TLR Antagonists

By the term “TLR antagonist” means an agent that decreases the bindingof a TLR agonist to TLR4 or TLR9 expressed in a mammalian cell (e.g., ahuman cell). For example, a TLR antagonist can be a TLR4 antagonist. Inother examples, a TLR antagonist is a TLR9 antagonist. Non-limitingexamples of TLR antagonists are described in Fukata et al., MucosalImmunity 6:451-463, 2013.

A non-limiting example of a TLR4 antagonist is 1A6 (Ungaro et al., Am.J. Physiol. Gastrointest. Liver Physiol. 296:G1167-G1179, 2009) orCRX-526 (Fort et al., J. Immunol. 174:6416-6423, 2005). Additionalexamples of TLR4 antagonists include eritoran tetrasodium (E5564) (Sunet al., Investigative Ophthalmol. Visual Sci. 50(3):1247-1254, 2009),small heat shock protein B8 (HSP22) (Roelofs et al., J. Immunol.176(11):7021-7027, 2006), CRX-527 (Bazin et al., Bioorganic Med Chem.Letters 18(2):5350-5354, 2008), E5564 (Kitazawa et al., J. Gastroentrol.Hepatol. 25(5):1009-1012, 2010), IAXO-102 (Huggins et al.,Atherosclerosis 242(2):563-570, 2015), AG-411 (Kondo et al., TrendsImmunol. 33(9):449-458, 2012), CRX-52624 (Alderson et al., J. EndotoxinRes. 12(5):313-319, 2006), E5531 (Becker et al., Toxicol. Appl.Pharmacol. 207(2):269-275, 2005).

A non-limiting example of a TLR9 antagonist is adenoviraloligodeoxynucleotides (AV-ODN) (Obermeier et al., Gastroenterology129:913-927, 2005). Additional examples of TLR9 antagonists include ODN2088, ODN 4084-F, ODN INH-1, ODN INH-18, ODN TTAGGG (A151), and G-ODN(each commercially available from InvivoGen). In some embodiments, theTLR9 antagonist is CpG-ODN c41 (Li et al., Vaccine 29:2193-2198, 2011).In some embodiments, the TLR9 antagonist is COV08-0064 (Shaker et al.,Biochemical Pharmacol. 112:90-101, 2016; Hoque et al., J. Immunol.190(8):4297-4304, 2013); ODN 1585, ODN 1826, ODN 2395, and ODN 2088(Boivin et al., Antiviral Res. 96(3):414-421, 2012); IMO-8400 (Zhu etal., J. Immunol. 188(1):119, 2012); IRS869 (Mandl et al., Nature Med.14(10:1077-1087, 2008); IMO-3100 (Hennessy et al., Nature Rev. DrugDiscov. 9(4):293-307, 2010); TTAGGG (Carvalho et al., PLoS One6(11):e28256, 2011); and CpG ODN 2088 (David et al., J. Neurotrauma31(21):1800-1806, 2014).

6. SMAD7 Inhibitors

The term “SMAD7 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases SMAD7expression, decreases SMAD7's ability to decrease formation ofSmad2/Smad4 complexes, and/or decreases the ability of SMAD7 to bind toTGF-β type I receptor. In some embodiments, the SMAD7 inhibitordecreases SMAD7 expression in a mammalian cell. In some embodiments, theSMAD7 inhibitor decreases SMAD7's ability to decrease formation ofSmad2/Smad4 complexes in a mammalian cell. In some embodiments, theSMAD7 inhibitor decreases the ability of SMAD7 to bind to a TGF-β type Ireceptor in a mammalian cell. In some embodiments, the SMAD7 inhibitordecreases SMAD7 expression in a mammalian cell.

In some embodiments, a SMAD7 inhibitory agent is an inhibitory nucleicacid. In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid is an antisensenucleic acid, a small interfering RNA, or a microRNA. Examples ofaspects of these different inhibitory nucleic acids are described below.

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of SMAD7expression in a mammalian cell include antisense nucleic acid molecules,i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotide sequence is complementaryto all or part of SMAD7 mRNA. An antisense nucleic acid molecule can becomplementary to all or part of a non-coding region of the coding strandof a nucleotide sequence encoding a SMAD7 protein. Non-coding regions(5′ and 3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flankthe coding region in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.Non-limiting examples of SMAD7 inhibitors that are antisense nucleicacids include mongersen (GED0301) (Monteleon et al., N. Engl. J. Med.372:1104-1113, 2015) and Smad7-as (Kleiter et al., J. Neuroimmunol.187(1-2):61-73, 2007; and Boirivant et al., Gastroenterology131(6):1786-1798, 2006).

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding a SMAD7 protein (e.g.,specificity for a SMAD7 mRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of a SMAD7polypeptide can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequencescomplementary to the regulatory region of the gene encoding the SMAD7polypeptide (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequence thatis at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of thetranscription initiation start state) to form triple helical structuresthat prevent transcription of the gene in target cells.

An inhibitory nucleic acid can be a siRNA that decreases the level of aSMAD7 mRNA. Non-limiting examples of short interfering RNA (siRNA) thattarget nucleic acid that encodes SMAD7 are described in, e.g., Su etal., Mol. Vis. 18:1881-1884, 2012.

Inhibitory nucleic acids targeting SMAD7 also include microRNAs (e.g.,miR-497 (Hu et al., Am. J. Transl. Res. 8(7): 3023-3031, 2016; Liu etal., DNA Cell Biol. 35(9): 521-529, 2016), miR-21 (Lin et al., CellPhysiol. Biochem. 38(6): 2152-2162, 2016; He et al., Heart Vessels31(10):1696-1708, 2016).

7. Inhibitory Agents of Janus Kinase (JAK) Activity and/or Expression

The term “JAK inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases theexpression of Janus kinase 1 (JAK1), JAK2, JAK3, or non-receptor proteintyrosine kinase 2 (TYK-2) and/or the kinase activity of at least one ofJAK1, JAK2, JAK3, and TYK-2. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitordecreases the expression of JAK1. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitordecreases the expression of JAK2. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitordecreases the expression of JAK3. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitordecreases the expression of TYK-2.

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases the kinase activity ofJAK1. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases the kinaseactivity of JAK2. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases thekinase activity of JAK3. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitordecreases the kinase activity of TYK-2. In some embodiments, the JAKinhibitor is a decreases the kinase activity of JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, andTYK2. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases the kinaseactivity of two or more (e.g., 3 or 4) of: JAK1, JAK2, JAK3 and TYK2. Insome embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases the kinase activity of asingle JAK isoform (e.g., JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases the kinase activity ofJAK1 and JAK2. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor decreases thekinase activity of JAK1 and JAK3. In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitordecreases the kinase activity of JAK2 and JAK3. In some embodiments, theJAK inhibitor decreases the kinase activity of JAK1, JAK2 and JAK3.

In some embodiments, a JAK inhibitory agent is an inhibitory nucleicacid or a small molecule. In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleicacid is an antisense nucleic acid, a ribozyme, a small interfering RNA,a small hairpin RNA, or a microRNA. Examples of aspects of thesedifferent inhibitory nucleic acids are described below.

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of JAK1, JAK2,JAK3, or TYK2 mRNA expression in a mammalian cell include antisensenucleic acid molecules, i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotidesequence is complementary to all or part of a JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2mRNA.

Inhibitory Nucleic Acids

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding a JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2 protein. Non-coding regions (5′ and3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank thecoding region in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding a JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2protein (e.g., specificity for a JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2 mRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of a JAK1,JAK2, JAK3, or JAK4 polypeptide can be inhibited by targeting nucleotidesequences complementary to the regulatory region of the gene encodingthe JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2 polypeptide (e.g., the promoter and/orenhancer, e.g., a sequence that is at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5kb upstream of the transcription initiation start state) to form triplehelical structures that prevent transcription of the gene in targetcells.

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a siRNA that decreases the levelof a JAK1, JAK2, JAK3, or TYK2 mRNA. Non-limiting examples of JAKinhibitors that are short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) are described inCook et al., Blood 123:2826-2837, 2014. Non-limiting examples of JAKinhibitors that are short hairpin RNAs (shRNAs) are described inKoppikar et al., Nature 489(7414):155-159, 2012).

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a small molecule. In someembodiments, the JAK inhibitory agent is a pan-JAK inhibitor (e.g.,3-O-methylthespesilactam (Li et al., Biochem. Pharmacol. 86(10):1411-8,2013)).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a JAK1 and JAK2 inhibitor. Insome embodiments, the JAK1 and JAK2 inhibitor is ruxolitinib (Jakafi®,Jakavi®, INCB018424) (Harrison et al., N. Engl. J Med. 366:787-798,2012; Pieri et al., Am. J Hematol. 92(2):187-195, 2017; Mackay-Wiggan etal., JCI Insight 1(15):e89790, 2016; Rudolph et al., Leukemia30(10):2119-2123, 2016; Furqan et al., Biomark Res. 1(1):5, 2013),baricitinib (INCB028050, LY3009104) (Gras, Drugs Today (Barc)52(10):543-550, 2016; Smolen et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis. 76(4):694-700,2016; Kubo et al., Expert. Rev. Clin. Immunol. 12(9):911-919, 2016;Fridman et al., J. Immunol. 84(9):5298-5307, 2010), AZD1480 (Guschin etal., EMBO J. 14:1421-1429, 1995; loannidis et al., J. Med. Chem. 54:262-276, 2011; Moisan et al., Nat. Cell Biol. 17(1):57-67, 2015; Qin etal., J. Neurosci. 36(18):5144059, 2016; Jiang et al., Biochem. Biophys.Res. Commun. 458(4):908-912, 2015; Verstovsek et al., Leuk. Res.39(2):157-163, 2015; Plimack et al., Oncologist 18(7): 819-820, 2013;Yan et al., Oncotarget 4(3):433-445, 2013), filgotinib (GLPG0634,G146034) (Vermeire et al., Lancet 389(10066):266-275, 2017; Menet etal., J. Med. Chem. 57(22):9323-9342, 2014; Van Rompaey et al., J.Immunol. 191(7):3568-3577, 2013; Namour et al., Clin. Pharmacokinet.54(8):859-874, 2015), momelotinib (GS-0387, CYT387) (Pardanani et al.,Leukemia 23: 1441-1445, 2009; Gupta et al., Haematologica 102(1):94-102,2017; Hu et al., Mol. Pharm. 13(2):689-697, 2016; Abubaker et al., BMCCancer 14: 317, 2014; Durmus et al., Pharmacol. Res. 76:9-16, 2013;Pardanani et al., Leukemia 27(6): 1322-1327, 2013; Monaghan et al.,Leukemia 25(12):1891-1899, 2011; Tyner et al., Blood 115(25):5232-5240,2010).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitory agent is a JAK1 inhibitor (e.g.,GSK2586184 (Kahl et al., Lupus 25(13): 1420-1430, 2016; Ludbrook et al.,Br. J. Dermatol. 174(5):985-995, 2016; van Vollenhoven et al., Lupus24(6): 648-649, 2015), oclacitinib (PF03394197, Apoquel®) (Gonzales etal., J. Vet. Pharmacol. Ther. 37(4):317-324, 2014; Collard et al., J.Vet. Pharmacol. Ther. 37(3):279-285, 2014; Cosgrove et al., Vet.Dermatol. 24(6):587-597, 2013), upadacitinib (ABT494) (Kremer et al.,Arthritis Rheumatol. 68(12):2867-2877, 2016; Mohamed et al., Clin.Pharmaco. 55(12): 1547-1558, 2016), GLG0778 (O′Shea et al., Ann. Rev.Med. 66(1):311-28, 2015; Schwartz et al., Nat. Rev. Rheum. 12: 25-36,2016), INCB039110 (Mascarenhas et al., Haematologica 102(2):327-335,2017; Bissonnette et al., J. Dermatolog. Treat. 27(4):332-338, 2016;Rosenthal et al., Exp. Opin. Pharmacother. 15(9):1265-1276, 2014),PF04965842 (Gadina et al., Curr. Opin. Rheumatol. 26(2):237-243, 2014;Degryset et al., J. Hematol. Oncol. 8:91, 2015); SAR-20347 (Works etal., J. Immunol. 193(7):3278-3287, 2014)).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitory agent is a JAK2 inhibitor (e.g.,CEP-33779 (Dugan et al., J. Med. Chem. 55(11):5243-5254, 2012; Seavey etal., Mol. Cancer Ther. 11(4):984-993, 2012; Stump et al., Arthritis Res.Ther. 13(2):R68, 2011), fedratinib (TG101348, SAR302503) (Pardanani etal., J. Clin. Oncol. 29:789-796, 2011; Jamieson et al., J. Transl. Med.13:294, 2015; Zhang et al., Oncotarget 6(16):14329-14343, 2015; Werniget al., Blood 105:4508-4515, 2008); lestaurtinib (CEP-701) (Hexnet etal., Blood 111:5663-5671, 2008; Santos et al., Blood 115: 1131-1136,2010; Smith et al., Blood 103: 3669-3676, 2004; Hexner et al., Leuk.Lymphoma. 56(9):2543, 2015; Geyer et al., Hematology17(Supp11):5129-132, 2012; Diaz et al., PLoS One 6(4):e18856, 2011;Minturn et al., Cancer Chemother. Pharmacol. 68(4):1057-1065, 2011),AC-430 (O′Shea et al., Immunity 36(4):542-550, 2012; Patterson et al.,Clin. Exp. Immunol. 176:1-10, 2014), pacritinib (SB1518) (Deeg et al.,J. Clin. Oncol. 29: Abstract 6515, 2011; Verstovsek et al., J. Hematol.Oncol. 9(1):137, 2016; Chow et al., Onco Targets. Ther. 9:2655-2665,2016; Komrokji et al., Blood 125(17):2649-2655, 2015; Jayaraman et al.,Drug Metab. Lett. 9(1):28-47, 2015), BMS-911543 (Mace et al., Oncotarget6(42):44509-44522, 2015; Wan et al., ACS Med. Chem. Lett. 6(8):850-855,2015; Purandare et al., Leukemia 26(2):280-288, 2012), XL019 (Verstovseket al., Leuk. Res. 38(3):316-322, 2014; Forsyth et al., Bioorg. Med.Chem. Lett. 22(24):7653-7658, 2012), INCB039110 (Mascarenhas et al.,Haematologica 102(2):327-335, 2017; Bissonnette et al., J. Dermatol.Treat. 27(4):332-338, 2016), gandotinib® (LY-2784544) (Ma et al., BloodCancer J. 3:e109, 2013; Verstovsek et al., Blood 122: 665, 2013;Mitchell et al., Org. Process Res. Dev. 16(1):70-81. 2012); R723 (Shideet al., Blood 117(25): 6866-6875, 2011)); Z3 (Sayyah et al., Mol.Cancer. Ther. 7(8):2308-2318, 2008)) or a variant thereof.

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitory agent is a JAK3 inhibitor (e.g.,decernotinib (VX-509) (Elwood et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 2017;Genovese et al., Ann Rheum Dis. 75(11):1979-1983, 2016; Gadina et al.,Arthritis Rheumatol. 68(1):31-34, 2016; Farmer et al., J. Med. Chem.58(18):7195-7216, 2015; Fleischmann et al., Arthritis Rheumatol.67(2):334-343, 2015; Mahajan et al., J. Pharmacol. 353(2):405-414,2015), R348 or a variant thereof (Velotta et al., Transplantation87(5):653-659, 2009; Deuse et al., Transplantation 85(6):885-892,2008)). In some embodiments, the small molecule is R256 or a variantthereof (Ashino et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 133(4):1162-1174,2014). In some embodiments, the small molecule is R333 or a variantthereof. In some embodiments, the small molecule is INCB047986 or avariant thereof (Norman, Exp. Opin. Investig. Drugs 23(8):1067-1077,2014). In some embodiments, the small molecule is INCB16562 or a variantthereof (Koppikar et al., Blood 115(4):2919-2927, 2010; Li et al.,Neoplasia 12(1):28-38, 2010). In some embodiments, the small molecule isNVP-BSK805 or a variant thereof (Ringel et al., Acta Haematol.132(1):75-86, 2014; Baffert et al., Mol. Cancer. Ther. 9(7):1945-1955,2010). In some embodiments, the small molecule is peficitinib (ASP015K,JNJ-54781532) or a variant thereof (Genovese et al., ArthritisRheumatol., 2017; Ito et al., J. Pharmacol. Sci. 133(1):25-33, 2017; Caoet al. (2016) Clin. Pharmacol. Drug Dev. 5(6):435-449, 2016; Takeuchi etal., Ann. Rheum. Dis. 75(6):1057-1064, 2016). In some embodiments, thesmall molecule is tofacitinib (Xeljanz®, Jakvinus®, CP-690, 500) or avariant thereof (Ghoreschi et al., J. Immunol. 186(7):4234-4243, 2011;Yoshida et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun 418(2):234-240, 2012;Calama et al., Pulm. Pharmacol. Ther. S1094-5539(16):30060-30068, 2017;Cutolo et al., J. Inflamm. Res. 6:129-137, 2013). In some embodiments,the small molecule is cucurbitacin I (JSI-124) or a variant thereof (Oiet al., Int. J. Oncol. 49(6):2275-2284, 2016; Qi et al., Am. J. Chin.Med. 43(2):337-347, 2015; Seo et al., Food Chem. Toxicol. 64:217-224,2014). In some embodiments, the small molecule is CHZ868 or a variantthereof (Wu et al., Cancer Cell 28(1):29-41, 2015; Meyer et al., CancerCell 28(1):15-28, 2015).

In some embodiments, the small molecule is a TYK2 inhibitor (e.g., Masseet al., J. Immunol. 194(1):67, 2015; Menet, Pharm. Pat. Anal.3(4):449-466, 2014; Liang et al., Euro. J. Med. Chem. 67: 175-187, 2013;Jang et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 25(18):3947-3952, 2015); U.S. Pat.Nos. 9,296,725 and 9,309,240; US 2013/0231340; and US 2016/0251376). Insome embodiments, the TYK2 inhibitor is Ndi-031301 (Akahane et al.,Blood 128:1596, 2016); BMS-986165 (Gillooly et al., 2016 ACR/ARHP AnnualMeeting, Abstract 11L, 2016); SAR-20347 (Works et al., J. Immunol.193(7):3278-3287, 2014); tyrphostin A1 (Ishizaki et al., Int. Immunol.26(5):257-267, 2014); a triazolopyridine (US 2013/0143915); or a variantthereof.

Additional examples of JAK inhibitors that are small molecules aredescribed in, e.g., Furomoto et al., BioDrugs 27(5):431-438, 2013; O'Shea et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis. 72(2):ii111-ii-115, 2013; Sonbol et al.,Ther. Adv. Hematol. 4(1):15-35, 2013; and Tanaka et al. (2015) J.Biochem. 158(3): 173-179, 2015.

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a pan-JAK inhibitor. As usedherein, the term “pan-JAK inhibitor” is an agent that has an IC₅₀ ofabout 500 nM to 4 μM (e.g., about 500 nM to about 2 μM) for each ofhuman JAK1, human JAK2, and human JAK3 isoforms, when the IC₅₀ isdetermined for each of wildtype human JAK1, wildtype human JAK2, andwildtype human JAK3 using similar assay conditions (e.g., the same assayconditions). In some embodiments, a pan-JAK inhibitor can be an agentthat has an IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK1, wildtype human JAK2, andwildtype human JAK3 that are within ±10% of each other, when each of theIC₅₀ values is assays under similar assay conditions (e.g., the sameassay, e.g., the human wildtype JAK1, wildtype human JAK2, and wildtypehuman JAK3 assay described in Kim et al., J. Med. Chem.58(18):7596-5602, 2015).

In some embodiments, the pan-JAK inhibitor is tofacitinib (Xeljanz®,Jakvinus®, tasocitinib, CP-690550; Yokoyama et al., J. Clin. Immunol.33(3):586-594, 2013; and Thoma et al., J. Med. Chem. 54(1):284-288,2011); cerdulatinib (PRT2070; Coffey et al. (2014) J. Pharmacol. Exp.Ther. 351(3):538-548, 2014; and Ma et al., Oncotarget 6(41):43881-43896,2015); Pyridone 6 (P6; Nakagawa et al., J. Immunol. 187(9): 4611-4620,2011; and Pedranzini et al., Cancer Res. 66(19):9714-9721, 2006);PF-06263276 (Jones et al. “Design and Synthesis of a Pan-Janus KinaseInhibitor Clinical Candidate (PF-06263276) Suitable for Inhaled andTopical Delivery for the Treatment of Inflammatory Diseases of the Lungsand Skin” J. Med. Chem., 2017, 60 (2), pp 767-786); JAK inhibitor 1 (CAS457081-03-07; JAKi; Wang et al., Antimicrob. Agents Chemother.60(5):2834-48, 2016; Bordonaro et al., PLoS One 9:e115068, 2014; andOsorio et al., PLoS Pathogens 10(6):e1004165, 2014); or baricitinib(Olumiant; LY3009104; INCB-28050; and Hsu and Armstrong, J. Immunol.Res. Article ID 283617, 2014).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a selective JAK1/JAK3inhibitor. As used herein, the term “selective JAK1/JAK3 inhibitor”means an agent that has an IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK1 and wildtypehuman JAK3, that are each at least 5-fold (e.g., at least 10-fold or atleast 20-fold) lowerthan the IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK2, when the IC₅₀is determined for each of wildtype human JAK1, wildtype human JAK2, andwildtype human JAK3 using similar assay conditions (e.g., the sameassay, e.g., the human wildtype JAK1, wildtype human JAK2, and wildtypehuman JAK3 assay described in Kim et al., J. Med. Chem.58(18):7596-5602, 2015).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a selective JAK1 inhibitor. Asused herein, the term “selective JAK1 inhibitor” means an agent that hasan IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK1 that is at least 10-fold (e.g., at least20-fold) lower than each of the IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK2 and theIC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK3 when measured using similar assayconditions (e.g., the same assay, e.g., the human wildtype JAK1,wildtype human JAK2, and wildtype human JAK3 assay described in Kim etal., J. Med. Chem. 58(18):7596-5602, 2015). In some embodiments, theJAK1 inhibitor is(31S,4R)-3-ethyl-4-(3H-imidazo[1,2-alpyrrolo[2,3-e]pyrazin-8-yl)-N-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxamideas disclosed in international patent application PCT/US2014/062145,incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a selective JAK3 inhibitor. Asused herein, the term “selective JAK3 inhibitor” means an agent that hasan IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK3 that is at least 10-fold (e.g., at least20-fold) lower than each of the IC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK2 and theIC₅₀ for wildtype human JAK1 when measured using similar assayconditions (e.g., the same assay, e.g., the human wildtype JAK1,wildtype human JAK2, and wildtype human JAK3 assay described in Kim etal., J. Med. Chem. 58(18):7596-5602, 2015).

In some embodiments, the JAK inhibitor is a JAK1 and JAK3 inhibitor(e.g., a selective JAK1/JAK3 inhibitor). In some embodiments, theselective JAK1/JAK3 inhibitor is ZM 39923 (Brown et al., Bioorg. Med.Chem. Lett. 10(6):575-579, 2000; and Lai et al., Chem. Biol.15(9):969-978, 2008); or peficitinib (ASP015K; JNJ-54781532; Ito et al.,J. Pharmacol. Sci. 133(1):25-33, 2017; Cao et al., Clin. Pharmacol. DrugDev. 5(6):435-449, 2016; Takeuchi et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis.75(6):1057-1064, 2016); and Papp et al., Br. J. Dermatol.173(3):767-776, 2015).

In some embodiments, the kinase inhibitor is TOP-1288 from TopiVertPharma Ltd., which is described in “The Pharmacological Profile ofTOP1288, a Narrow Spectrum Kinase Inhibitor (NSKI) in ClinicalDevelopment as an Anti-Inflammatory Treatment for Ulcerative Colitis”Foster, Martyn et al. Gastroenterology, Volume 152, Issue 5, S766.

8. Immunosuppressants

An “immunosuppressant” as disclosed is a low molecular weightimmunosuppressants, with low molecular weight defined as <1500 Da, suchas <1000 Da. The term “immunosuppressant” refers to a corticosteroid, adirect calcineurin inhibitor, a cytostatic, or a direct mTOR inhibitorthat can suppress, restrict, or reduce the response of the immune systemof a subject (e.g., one or both of the innate and adaptive immunesystem). In some examples, an immunosuppressant drug can decrease thelevel of activation and/or migration of a leukocyte (e.g., a Tlymphocyte or a B lymphocyte, a macrophage, a mononcyte, a naturalkiller cell, a neutrophil, an eosinophil, or a basophil).

In some embodiments, the immunosuppressant is methotrexate,sulfasalazine, minocycline, or leflunomide) (Zink et al., Annals of theRheumatic Diseases 64: 1274-1279, 2005).

Non-limiting examples of FDA-approved immunosuppressant drugs include:CellCept®, Rapamune®, Velcade®, Protopic®, Afinitor®, Arava®, Zenapax®,Sandimmune®, Advagraf®, Protopic®, Prograf®, Astagraf XL®, Elidel®,Myfortic®, Imuran®, and Azasan®.

Non-limiting examples of immunosuppressants are described in: Bakr etal., Exp. Clin. Transplant 15(Suppl. 1):16-23, 2017; Palmer et al., Am.J. Kidney Dis. S0272-6386(17):30036-7, 2017; Moran et al., Semin Hematol49(3):270-276, 2012; Kamel et al., World J. Transplant 6(4):697-702,2016; Shrestha et al., Exp. Clin. Transplant. 15(1):1-9, 2017; Liu etal., PLoS One 12(1):e0170246, 2017; Chon and Josephson, Expert Rev.Clin. Immunol. 7(3): 273-281, 2011; Sollinger et al., Transplantation60: 225-232, 1995; Salvardori et al., Am. J. Transplant 4: 231-236,2004; Webster et al., Cochrane Database Syst. Rev. 19(2): CD004290,2006; Nashan et al., Transplantation 78: 1332-1340, 2004; and Hardingeret al., Am. J. Transplant 2: 867-871, 2002.

Exemplary corticosteroids, cytostatics, calcineurin inhibitors, and mTORinhibitors, are described below.

Corticosteroids

In some embodiments, the immunosuppressant drug is a corticosteroid. Insome embodiments, the immunosuppressant drug can be aglucocorticosteroid (Coutinho et al., Mol. Cell. Endocrinol. 335(1):2-13, 2011; van Staa et al., QJM 93: 105-111, 2000; Wust et al., J.Immunol. 180: 8434-8443, 2008) or glucocorticoid. Non-limiting examplesof corticosteroids include: 11-dehydrocorticosterone (also called11-oxocorticosterone and 17-deoxycortisone); 11-deoxycorticosterone(also called deoxycortone, desoxycortone, and 21-hydroxyprogesterone);11-deoxycortisol (also called cortodoxone and cortexolone);11-ketoprogesterone (also called 11-oxoprogesterone and ketogestin);11β-hydroxypregnenolone; 11β-hydroxyprogesterone (also known as21-deoxycorticosterone); 11β,17α,21-trihydroxypregnenolone;17α,21-dihydroxypregnenolone; 17α-hydroxypregnenolone;17α-hydroxyprogesterone; 18-hydroxy-11-deoxycorticosterone;18-hydroxycorticosterone; 18-hydroxyprogesterone; 21-deoxycortisol;21-doxycortisone; 21-hydroxypregnenolone (also known as prebediolone);aldosterone; corticosterone (also known as 17-deoxycortisol); cortisol(also known as hydrocortisone); cortisone; pregnenolone; progesterone;flugestone (also known as flurogestone); fluorometholone; medrysone(also known as hydroxymethylprogesterone); prebediolone acetate (alsoknown as 21-acetoxypregnenolone); chlormadinone acetate; cyproteroneacetate; medrogestone; medroxyprogesterone acetate; megastrol acetate;segesterone acetate; chloropredisone; cloprednol; difluprednate;fludrocortisone; fluocinolone; fluperolone; fluprednisolone;loteprednol; methylprednisolone; prednicarbate; prednisolone;prednisone; tixocortol; triamcinolone; methasone; alclometasone;beclomethasone; betamethasone; clobetasol; clobetasone; clocortolone;desoximetasone; dexamethasone; diflorasone; difluocortolone;fluclorolone; flumetasone; fluocortin; fluocortolone; fluprednidene;fluticasone; fluticasone furoate; halometasone; mepredisone; mometasone;mometasone furoate; paramethasone; prednylidene; rimexolone; ulobetasol(also known as halobetasol); amcinonide; budesonide; ciclesonide;deflazacort; desonide; formocortal (also known as fluoroformylone);fluclorolone acetonide (also known as flucloronide); fludroxycortide(also known as flurandrenolone and flurandrenolide); flunisolide;fluocinolone acetonide; fluocinonide; halcinonide; triamcinoloneacetonide; cortivazol; and RU-28362. In some embodiments, thecorticosteroid can be budesonide (e.g., Entocort®), dexamethasone,hydrocortisone (e.g., Cortef®, Cortenema®, and Proctofoam®),methylprednisolone, prednisolone (e.g., Orapred®), and prednisone.Additional examples of corticosteroids are known in the art.

Cytostatics

In some embodiments, the immunosuppressant drug is a cytostatic (e.g.,an alkylating agent or an antimetabolite) (Mor et al., BioDrugs 8(6):469-88, 1997). In some embodiments, the cytostatic is an antimetabolitedrug (e.g., a folic acid analogue, (e.g., methotrexate), a purineanalogue (e.g., azathioprine or mercaptopurine), a pyrimidine analogue(e.g., fluorouracil), a protein synthesis inhibitors, and cytotoxicantibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin, an anthracycline, mitomycin C,bleomycin, and mithramycin).

In some embodiments, the cytostatic can be an inhibitor of de novopurine synthesis (e.g., azathioprine (AZA, Imuran®, or Azasan®),mycophenolate mofetil (MMF, CellCept®), mycophenolate acid (MPA,Myfortic®), mizoribin, or methotrexate). In some embodiments, thecytostatic is an inhibitor of de novo pyrimidine synthesis (e.g.,leflunomide, brequinar, or methotrexate).

In some embodiments, the cytostatic is an alkylating agent. In someembodiments, the alkylating agent is cyclophosphamide (Luznik et al.,Blood 115(16): 3224-330, 2010). In some embodiments, the cytostatic ischlorambucil (Chen et al., Clin. J. Am. Soc. Nephrol. 8(5):787-796,2013). In some embodiments, the cytostatic is mycophenolate mofetil(MMF, CellCept®) (Mor et al., BioDrugs 8(6):469-88, 1997). In someembodiments, the cytostatic is mycophenolate sodium (Albano et al., AnnTransplant 21: 250-261, 2016). In some embodiments, the cytostatic isazathioprine (Imuran®) (Maley et al., J. Am. Acad Dermatol 73(3):439-43, 2015). In some embodiments, the immunosuppressant drug is6-mercaptopurine (e.g., Purinethol®) (Kombluth et al.,Gastroenterologist 2(3): 239-46, 1994). In some embodiments, thecytostatic is an inhibitor of inosine monophosphate dehydrogenase (e.g.,VX-148; Jain et al., J. Pharmacol Exper Ther 302(2): 1272-1277, 2002).

In some embodiments, the cytostatic is a vitamin D analog (e.g.,MC1288). See, e.g., Binderup et al., Biochem. Pharmacol. 42:1569-1575,1991; and Johnsson et al., Transplant Int 7:392-397, 1994).

In some embodiments, the cytostatic is brequinar (Crramer et al.,Transplantation 53:303-308, 1992; Xu et al., J. Immunol. 160(2):846-53,1998). In some embodiments, the cytostatic is mizoribine (Bredinin)(Aikawa et al., Transplant. Proc. 37(7):2947-50, 2005). In someembodiments, the cytostatic is gusperimus (Perenyei et al., Rheumatology(Oxford) 53(10):1732-1741, 2014).

Calcineurin Inhibitors

In some embodiments, the immunosuppressant is a calcineurin inhibitor.See, e.g., Beland et al., Transpl. Int doi: 10.1111/tri 12934, 2017. Insome embodiments, the calcineurin inhibitor is voclosporin (Luveniq®)(Busque et al., Am. J. Transplant 11(12):2675-2684, 2011). Voclosporinis a structural analog of cyclosporine A, with an additional singlecarbon extension that has a double-bond on one side chain. The bindingaffinities of voclosporin and cyclosporine A for cyclophilin arecomparable; however, upon binding, the ethynyl side chain of voclosporininduces structural changes in calcineurin that may result in increasedimmunosuppressive activity relative to cyclosporine A. In someembodiments, the calcineurin inhibitor is cyclosporin A (e.g., gengraf,Neural®, or Sandimmune®) (Canafax and Ascher, Clin. Pharm. 2(6):515-524,1983; Goring et al., Curr. Med. Res. Opin. 30(8): 1473-87, 2014), acyclosporin analogue (see, e.g., Wenger et al., Transplant Proc.18:213-218, 1986; Jeffery, Clin. Biochem. 24:15-21, 1991; Wenger,Angewandte Chem. 24:77-85, 1985; Lazarova et al., Expert Opin. Ther.Patents 13(9):1327-1332, 2003; Thomson, Lancet 338:195, 1991; U.S. Pat.Nos. 4,885,276, 7,511,013, 8,367,053, 8,481,483, 9,175,042, 9,200,038,and 9,226,927; US 2011/0092669, US 2006/0069016, US 2010/0708671, US2012/0088734, WO 12/051193, WO 15/31381, WO 12/51194, and WO 12/051193),or a cyclosporin analogue (see, e.g., Rothbard et al., Nature6(11):1253-1257, 2000; Cho et al., Arch. Pharm. Res. 27:662, 2004; US2012/0157385; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,316,405). In some embodiments, thecalcineurin inhibitor is tacrolimus, also called FK-506 or fujimycin(e.g., Hecoria®, Prograf®, Astagraf XL®, or Protopic®) (Helmschrott etal., Drug Des. Devel. Ther. 9:1217-1224, 2015; Bloom et al., Clin.Transplant 27(6):E685-93, 2013; Riva et al., Fam. Hosp. 41(2):150-168,2017; McCormack, Drugs 74917, 2014); Cryan et al., Biochem. Biophys.Res. Commun. 180(2): 846-852, 1991; and Graf et al., J. Clin. Rheumatol.9(5):310-315, 2003). In some embodiments, the calcineurin inhibitor ispimecrolimus (Elidel®) (Malachowski et al., Pediatr. Dermatol. 33(6):e360-e361, 2016; Eichenfiled and Eichenfield, J. Pediatr.167(5):1171-1172, 2015). In some embodiments, the calcineurin inhibitoris Sanglifehrin A (SFA) (see, e.g., Hartel et al., Scand. J. Immunol.63(1):26-34, 2006; Zhang et al., J. Immunol. 166(9):5611-5618, 2001; andWoltman et al., J. Immunol. 172(10): 6482-6489, 2004). Additionalexamples of calcineurin inhibitors are described in U.S. Pat. No.7,041,283.

mTOR Inhibitors

In some embodiments, an mTOR inhibitor can be rapamycin (mTOR) inhibitor(e.g., sirolimus (Rapamune®), everolimus) (Forster et al.,Transplantation 100(11):2461-2470, 2016; Opelz et al., Nephrol. Dial.Transplant. 31(8): 1360-1367, 2016; and Baroja-Mazo et al., World J.Transplant. 6(1): 183-92, 2016. Another example of an mTOR inhibitor iseverolimus (e.g., Afinitor® or Zortress®). Another example of an mTORinhibitor is dactolisib (also called BEZ235 or NVP-BEZ235). Anotherexample of an mTOR inhibitor is temsirolimus (also called CCI-779)(e.g., Torisel®).

In some embodiments, the low molecular weight immunosuppressant isselected from (molecular weights are shown in parenthesis):

-   -   a. Cyclosporine (1202 Da);    -   b. Tacrolimus (804 Da);    -   c. Methotrexate (454 Da);    -   d. Sirolimus (914 Da);    -   e. Everolimus (958 Da);    -   f. Corticosteroids (360-430 Da);    -   g. Voclosporin (1214 Da);    -   h. Azathioprine (277 Da); and    -   i. Purinethol or 6-MP (6-mercaptopurine) (152 Da).

9. Live Biotherapeutics

In some embodiments, a live biotherapeutic (also can be referred to as alive cell therapy) can be detected and analyzed by the methods herein.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes populations oflive bacteria and/or yeast, optionally in combination with a prebioticsuch as a non-digestible carbohydrate, oligosaccharide, or shortpolysaccharide (e.g., one or more of inulin, oligofructose,galactofructose, a galacto-oligosaccharides, or a xylo-oligosaccharide)and/or an antibiotic or antifungal agent, or both an antibiotic andantifungal agent. The bacteria or the yeast can be recombinant. Thepopulations of live bacteria and/or yeast can be used to selectivelyalter beneficial species within the GI tract and/or to reducedetrimental species within the GI tract of the subject. See, forexample, U.S. Patent Publication No. 20070258953; U.S. PatentPublication No. 20080003207; WO2007076534; WO2007136719; andWO2010099824.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes one or morespecies of bacteria (e.g., two or more, three or more, four or more,five or more, six or more, or seven or more species) that areunderrepresented in patients with IBD. The microbiotas of Crohn'sdisease (CD) and ulcerative colitis (UC) patients have statisticallysignificant differences from those of non-inflammatory bowel diseasecontrols, including a reduction in beneficial commensal bacteria in IBDpatients relative to non-inflammatory bowel disease patients. Forexample, members of the phyla Firmicutes (e.g., Clostridium clustersXIVa and IV), Bacteroidetes (e.g., Bacteroides fragilis or Bacteroidesvulgatus), and Actinobacteria (e.g., Coriobacteriaceae spp. orBifidobacterium adolescentis) are reduced in CD and UC patients. See,e.g., Frank, et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA, 2007, 104:13780-13785;Forbes, et al., Front Microbiol., 2016; 7: 1081, and Nagao-Kitamoto andKamada, Immune Netw. 2017 17(1): 1-12. Clostridium cluster XIVa includesspecies belonging to, for example, the Clostridium, Ruminococcus,Lachnospira, Roseburia, Eubacterium, Coprococcus, Dorea, andButyrivibrio genera. Clostridium cluster IV includes species belongingto, for example, the Clostridium, Ruminococcus, Eubacterium andAnaerofilum genera. For example, Faecalibacterium prausnitzii (alsoreferred to as Bacteroides praussnitzii), Roseburia hominis, Eubacteriumrectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcus albus, Ruminococcus callidus,and Ruminococcus bromii are less abundant in CD or UC patients. See,e.g., Nagao-Kitamoto and Kamada, 2017, supra.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes one or morespecies of bacteria (e.g., two or more, three or more, four or more,five or more, six or more, or seven or more species) that produce adesired product such as a short chain fatty acid (SCFA) (e.g., butyrate,acetate, or propionate) or induce production (e.g., Clostridiumbutyricum or F. prausnitzii) of an anti-inflammatory agent such asinterleukin-10 in host cells. See, e.g., Hayashi, et al., Cell HostMicrobe (2013) 13:711-722.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes one or morespecies of bacteria (e.g., two or more, three or more, four or more,five or more, six or more, or seven or more species) that areunderrepresented in patients with IBD and one or more probiotics (e.g.,two or more, three or more, four or more, five or more, six or more,seven or more, or eight or more probiotics).

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic is FIN-524 (FinchTherapeutics, Somerville, Mass.), a cocktail of cultured microbialstrains that are linked to positive outcomes among IBD patients.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes one or morespecies of bacteria from a healthy donor (e.g., as collected from astool sample). See, e.g., Vermeire, J Crohns Colitis, 2016, 10(4):387-394. For example, the live biotherapeutic can be FIN-403 (FinchTherapeutics, Somerville, Mass.), a candidate for Clostridium difficiletreatment.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes one or more agentsfor inhibiting the growth of a fungus (e.g., a yeast such as a speciesof Candida). In some subjects with Crohn's disease, the bacterialspecies of E. coli and Serratia marcescens and the yeast species Candidatropicalis are found at higher concentrations versus that of healthyrelatives, indicating that the bacteria and fungus may interact in theintestines. In some embodiments, the agent inhibiting the growth of afungus (i.e., an anti-fungal agent) is amphotericin B, an echinocandinsuch as Caspofungin, Micafungin, or Anidulafungin, or anextended-spectrum triazole. In some embodiments, the therapeuticincludes about 2.5 mg/L of Amphotericin B.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic is a bacteriophage orprophage (i.e., the genetic material of a bacteriophage incorporatedinto the genome of a bacterium or existing as an extrachromosomalplasmid of the bacterium, and able to produce phages if specificallyactivated). The bacteriophage can be lytic or lysogenic. In someembodiments, the bacteriophage can infect bacteria commonly found in theGI tract. For example, the bacteriophage can infect one or more, two ormore, three or more, four or more, five or more, six or more, seven ormore, eight or more, nine or more, or ten or more species of bacteriawithin the GI tract. See, for example, Wang, et al., Inflamm Bowel Dis.,2015; 21(6): 1419-1427. In some embodiments, the bacteriophage can belytic bacteriophage and infect one or more detrimental bacterial speciesin the GI tract to reduce the detrimental species in the GI tract. Forexample, the bacteriophage can infect two or more, three or more, fouror more, five or more, six or more, or seven or more detrimentalbacterial species. In some embodiments, bacteriophage can be a member ofthe families from the order Caudovirales such as Siphoviridae,Myroviridae, Podoviridae, or Microviridae. See, e.g., Babickova andGardlik, World J. Gastroentrol. 2015; 21(40):11321-11330. In someembodiments, the bacteriophage can include one or more of bacteriophageK (such as ATCC strain 19685-B 1), bacteriophage 17 (such as ATCC strain23361-B 1), and Stab8. See, e.g., WO2016172380A1. In some embodiments,the live biotherapeutic includes one or more bacteriophages, and one ormore probiotics or prebiotics, optionally in combination with anantibiotic.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic can include bacteriophageor prophage that are genetically modified to produce one or moreproducts that are anti-inflammatory and/or that can enhance intestinalbarrier function.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic includes regulatory T cells(Treg cells). Autologous Treg cells can be prepared by isolatingperipheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) from the subject's blood andthen expanding ova-specific T cells by culturing the PBMCs in thepresence of ovalbumin using Drosophila derived artificial antigenpresenting cells transfected with specific stimulatory molecules. See,e.g., Brun, et al., Int Immunopharmacol., 2009, 9(5):609-13. T cells canbe cloned and Ova-Treg clones can be selected based on anovalbumin-specific IL-10 production. A phase 1/2a study in 20 patientsshowed that a single injection of antigen-specific (ovalbumin) Tregcells was safe in CD and about 40% of the patients show a clinicalresponse after treatment. See, e.g., Neurath, 2014, supra; andDesreumaux, et al., Gastroenterology, 2012, 143:1207-1217.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic can be bacteriophage orbacteria carrying plasmids that encode a targeted antimicrobial. Atargeted antimicrobial can include RNA-guided nucleases (RGNs) targetingspecific DNA sequences within a target bacteria. For example, a targetedantimicrobial can couple a phage vector with the CRISPR (clusteredregularly interspaced short palindromic repeats)/Cas system (e.g., thebiological nanobots from Eligo Bioscience (Eligobiotics)). Thebiological nanobots can be composed of a capsid from a bacteriophagevirus (modified to not multiply) that infect targeted bacteria anddeliver the CRISPR/Cas9 system into the targeted bacteria, resulting inthe targeted bacteria being killed by cleavage of the bacterial genomeby Cas9 enzyme within a predetermined pathogenic sequence. See, forexample, W02017/009399A1 and Citorik, et al., Nat Biotechnol., 2014,32(11): 1141-1145.

In some embodiments, the live biotherapeutic can comprise stem cells.The term “stem cell” is used herein to refer to a cell that is capableof differentiating into a two or more different cell types. As usedherein, the term “a stem cell” may refer to one or more stem cells.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be hematopoietic stem cells(HSC) capable of differentiating into different types of blood cells,including myeloid and lymphoid lineages of blood cells. HSC can beobtained from bone marrow, cord blood, or peripheral blood, and arecommonly used for bone marrow transfusions in combination withchemotherapy to restart the immune system. HSC are CD34⁺ cells.Cell-surface markers can be identified by any suitable conventionaltechnique, including, for example, positive selection using monoclonalantibodies against cell-surface markers.

In some embodiments, the stem cells are capable of differentiating intotwo or more different cell types other than blood cells. In someembodiments, the stem cells are capable of differentiating into cells ofeach of the three embryonic germ layers (i.e., endoderm, ectoderm, andmesoderm). As used herein, “capable of differentiating” means that agiven cell, or its progeny, can proceed to a differentiated phenotypeunder the appropriate culture conditions. The capacity of the cells todifferentiate into at least two cell types can be assayed by methodsknown in the art.

Non-limiting examples of stem cells include embryonic stem cells oradult stem cells such as mesenchymal stem cells (MSC) (also can bereferred to as mesenchymal stromal cells) or other multipotent stemcells; endothelial progenitor cells; stem cells from a particular tissueor organ such as intestinal stem cells, adipose stem cells, or testesstem cells; or induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSC). In someembodiments, stem cells from a particular tissue also can be classifiedas MSC.

In some embodiments, the stem cells are MSC, which can differentiateinto bone, muscle, cartilage, or adipose type cells. MSC candown-regulate inflammation and have a strong immunoregulatory potential.MSC can be obtained from various tissues, including from, for example,bone marrow, placenta, amniotic fluid, Wharton's jelly, amnioticmembrane, chorionic villi, umbilical cord, umbilical cord blood, adiposetissue, dental pulp, synovial membrane, or peripheral blood. Dependingon the source of MSC and the stemness (i.e., multipotency), the MSC canexpress a variety of different markers, including, for example, one ormore of CD105, CD73, CD90, CD13, CD29, CD44, CD10, Stro-1, CD271,SSEA-4, CD146, CD49f, CD349, GD2, 3G5, SSEA-3, SISD2, Stro-4, MSCA-1,CD56, CD200, PODX1, Sox11, or TM4SF1 (e.g., 2 or more, 3 or more, 4 ormore, 5 or more, 6 or more, 7 or more, 8 or more , 9 or more, or 10 ormore of such markers), and lack expression of one or more of CD45, CD34,CD14, CD19, and HLA-DR (e.g., lack expression of two or more, three ormore, four or more, or five or more such markers). In some embodiments,MSC can express CD105, CD73, and CD90. In some embodiments, MSC canexpress CD105, CD73, CD90, CD13, CD29, CD44, and CD10. In someembodiments, MSC can express CD105, CD73, and CD90 and one or morestemness markers such as Stro-1, CD271, SSEA-4, CD146, CD49f, CD349,GD2, 3G5, SSEA-3. SISD2, Stro-4, MSCA-1, CD56, CD200, PODX1, Sox11, orTM4SF1. In some embodiments, MSC can express CD105, CD73, CD90, CD13,CD29, CD44, and CD10 and one or more stemness markers such as Stro-1,CD271, SSEA-4, CD146, CD49f, CD349, GD2, 3G5, SSEA-3. SISD2, Stro-4,MSCA-1, CD56, CD200, PODX1, Soxll, or TM4SF1. See, e.g., Lv, et al.,Stem Cells, 2014, 32:1408-1419.

Intestinal stem cells (ISC) can be positive for one or more biomarkerssuch as Musashi-1 (Msi-1), Ascl2, Bmi-1, Doublecortin andCa2+/calmodulin-dependent kinase-like 1 (DCAMKL1), and Leucin-richrepeat-containing G-protein-coupled receptor 5 (Lgr5). See, e.g.,Mohamed, et al., Cytotechnology, 2015 67(2): 177-189.

In some embodiments, MSCs are commercially available. See, e.g.Prochymal® from Osiris Therapeutics.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be PF-05285401 cells (Multistem®cells), which are human stem cells obtained from adult bone marrow orother nonembryonic tissue sources. Multistem® cells are commerciallyavailable from Athersys Inc.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be autologous adipose derivedstem cells such as Cx401 cells.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be human iPSCs, which can begenerated from adult somatic cells (e.g., fibroblasts, keratinocytes,dental pulp cells, cord blood, or peripheral blood mononuclear cells) orMSC. iPSCs can be generated using retroviral or non-retroviral methods.See, for example, Loh, et al., Blood 2009, 113:5476-5479, Okita, et al.,Nat Methods. 2011, 8(5):409-12, or Okita, et al., Stem Cells, 2013,31(3): 458-466. In some embodiments, p53 suppression and nontransformingL-Myc can be used to generate human induced pluripotent stem cells(iPSCs) with episomal plasmid vectors encoding OCT3/4, SOX2, KLF4, andLIN28. In some embodiments, adult somatic cells can be transduced withretroviruses encoding four pluripotency factors (50X2, KLF4, c-MYC, andOCT4). Fully reprogrammed iPSCs have similar properties to embryonicstem cells (ESCs). Patient's cells can be used to derive iPSCs, whichcan then be induced to undergo differentiation into various types ofsomatic cells, all with the same genetic information as the patient.See, Azizeh-Mitra, et al., Stem Cells Int. 2016; 6180487. In otherembodiments, allogenic cells are used to derive iPSCs.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be intestinal stem cells (ISC),which can differentiate into intestinal cell subtypes such as globetcells, Paneth cells, and enterocytes. ISC are located at the crypt basewithin the intestine and can be positive for one or more markers such asMusashi-1 (Msi-1), Ascl2, Bmi-1, Doublecortin andCa²⁺/calmodulin-dependent kinase-like 1 (DCAMKL1), and Leucin-richrepeat-containing G-protein-coupled receptor 5 (Lgr5). See, e.g.,Mohamed, et al., Cytotechnology, 2015 67(2): 177-189. In addition, ISCor crypts can be used to produce intestinal organoids using abiodegradable scaffold (e.g., poly-glycolic acid), growth factors suchas epidermal growth factor (EGF), R-spondin, Jagged-1 peptide, orNoggin, and extracellular matrix. In some embodiments, mesenchymal cellsare included in the culture to support the growth. The intestinalorganoid can include a central lumen lined by a villus-like epithelium.See, e.g., US20160287670A1 and WO2015183920A2. Pre-clinical studies havedemonstrated the intestinal organoid efficacy in differentiating intoall GI cell lineages and regrowing parts of the intestine, muscle layerincluded. See, Agopian, et al., J Gastrointest Surg., 2009,13(5):971-82; Kuratnik and Giardina, Biochem Pharmacol., 2013,85:1721-1726; and Belchior et al., Semin Pediatr Surg., 2014,23:141-149.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be allogeneic adipose-derivedstem cells (ASC) such as ALLO-ASC cells or expanded ASC (eASC) (e.g.,Cx601 cells). See, for example, Panes et al., Lancet; 2016, 388:1281-90; and U.S. Patent Publication No. 20120020930. Cx601 cells arecommercially available from TiGenix. Cx601 cells have been used fortreating complex perianal fistulas in Crohn's disease patients. ALLO-ASCcells are commercially available from Anterogen Co., Ltd., and have beenused for treating Crohn's disease.

In some embodiments, the stem cells can be human placental derived stemcells such as PDA-001 cells from Celgene. PDA-001 cells are aculture-expanded, plastic adherent, undifferentiated in vitro cellpopulation that express the nominal phenotype CD34−, CD10+, CD105+ andCD200+. PDA-001 cells constitutively express moderate levels of HLAClass I and undetectable levels of HLA Class II, and they do not expressthe co-stimulatory molecules CD80 and CD86. PDA-001 is geneticallystable, displaying a normal diploid chromosome count, normal karyotypeand exhibit normal senescence after prolonged in vitro culture. See,e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,916,146.

10. Carbohydrate Sulfotransferase 15 (CHST15) Inhibitor

The term “CHST15 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases CHST15activity and/or expression. A non-limiting example of CHST15 activity isthe transfer of sulfate from 3′-phosphoadenosine 5′-phosphosulfate(PAPS) to the C-6 hydroxyl group of the GalNAc 4-sulfate residue ofchondroitin sulfate A.

In some embodiments, a CHST15 inhibitor can be an inhibitory nucleicacid. In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid can be anantisense nucleic acid, a ribozyme, and a small interfering RNA (siRNA).Examples of aspects of these different oligonucleotides are describedbelow. Any of the examples of inhibitory nucleic acids that can decreaseexpression of CHST15 mRNA in a mammalian cell can be synthesized invitro.

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of CHST15 mRNAexpression in a mammalian cell include antisense nucleic acid molecules,i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotide sequence is complementaryto all or part of an CHST15 mRNA.

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding a CHST15 protein. Non-coding regions (5′ and 3′ untranslatedregions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank the coding region in agene and are not translated into amino acids.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding a CHST15 protein (e.g.,specificity for a CHST15 mRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of a CHST15polypeptide can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequencescomplementary to the regulatory region of the gene encoding the CHST15polypeptide (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequence thatis at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of thetranscription initiation start state) to form triple helical structuresthat prevent transcription of the gene in target cells.

An inhibitory nucleic acid is a siRNA molecule that decreases the levelof a CHST15 mRNA. Non-limiting examples of siRNAs targeting CHST15 aredescribed in Takakura et al., PLosOne 10(12):e0142981, 2015; Watanabe etal., Cell Signal. 27(7):1517-1524, 2015; Suzuki et al., PLos One11(7):e0158967, 2016; Kai et al., Mol. Ther. Nucl. Acids 6: 163-172,2017). In some embodiments, the siRNA targeting CHST15 is STNM01 or avariant thereof (Suzuki et al., J. Crohns Colitis 11(2):221-228, 2017;Atreya et al., Eur. Crohn's Colitis Organisation, Congress AbstractDOP073, 2017; US 2016/0355818; US 2017/0067058; US 2016/0348118).

Additional examples of CHST15 inhibitory nucleic acids are described inUS 2015/0337313 and US 2016/0348118, which are incorporated by referencein its entirety.

11. IL-1 Inhibitors

The term “IL-1 inhibitor” refers to an agent that decreases theexpression of an IL-1 cytokine or an IL-1 receptor and/or decreases theability of an IL-1 cytokine to bind specifically to an IL-1 receptor.Non-limiting examples of IL-1 cytokines include IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18,IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, and IL-33. In some examples, an IL-1cytokine is IL-1α. In some examples, an IL-1 cytokine is IL-1β.

As is known in the art, IL-1α and IL-1β each binds to a complex ofIL-1R1 and IL1RAP proteins; IL-18 binds to IL-18Rα; IL-36α, IL-36β, andIL-36γ each binds to a complex of IL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP proteins; andIL-33 binds to a complex of IL1RL1 and IL1RAP proteins. IL-1Ra is anendogenous soluble protein that decreases the ability of IL-1α and IL-1βto bind to their receptor (e.g., a complex of IL-1R1 and IL1RAPproteins). IL-36Ra is an endogenous soluble protein that decreases theability of IL-36α, IL-36β, and IL-36γ to bind to their receptor (e.g., acomplex of IL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP proteins).

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor mimicks native human interleukin1 receptor antagonist (IL1-Ra).

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets IL-1α. In someembodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets IL-1β. In some embodiments, theIL-1 inhibitor targets one or both of IL-1R1 and IL1RAP. For example, anIL-1 inhibitor can decrease the expression of IL-1α and/or decrease theability of IL-1α to bind to its receptor (e.g., a complex of IL-1R1 andIL1RAP proteins). In another example, an IL-1 inhibitor can decrease theexpression of IL-1β and/or decrease the ability of IL-1β to binds to itsreceptor (e.g., a complex of IL-1R1 and IL1RAP proteins). In someembodiments, an IL-1 inhibitor can decrease the expression of one orboth of IL-1R1 and IL1RAP.

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets IL-18. In someembodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets IL-18Rα. In some embodiments,the IL-1 inhibitor decreases the ability of IL-18 to bind to itsreceptor (e.g., IL-18Rα). In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitordecreases the expression of IL-18. In some embodiments, the IL-1inhibitor decreases the expression of IL-18Rα.

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets one or more (e.g., twoor three) of IL-36α, IL-36β, and IL-36γ. In some embodiments, the IL-1inhibitor targets one or both of IL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP. In someembodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor decreases the expression of one or more(e.g., two or three) of IL-36α, IL-36β, and IL-36γ. In some embodiments,the IL-1 inhibitor decreases the expression of one or both of IL-1RL2and IL-1RAP proteins. In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor decreasesthe ability of IL-36α to bind to its receptor (e.g., a complex includingIL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP). In some examples, the IL-1 inhibitor decreases theability of IL-36β to bind to its receptor (e.g., a complex includingIL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP). In some examples, the IL-1 inhibitor decreases theability of IL-36γ to bind to its receptor (e.g., a complex includingIL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP).

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets IL-33. In someembodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor targets one or both of IL1RL1 andIL1RAP. In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor decreases the expressionof IL-33. In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor decreases theexpression of one or both of IL1RL1 and IL1RAP. In some embodiments, theIL-1 inhibitor decreases the ability of IL-33 to bind to its receptor(e.g., a complex of IL1RL1 and IL1RAP proteins).

In some embodiments, an IL-1 inhibitory agent is an inhibitory nucleicacid, an antibody or fragment thereof, or a fusion protein. In someembodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid is an antisense nucleic acid, aribozyme, or a small interfering RNA.

Inhibitory Nucleic Acids

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of IL-1α,IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1, IL1RAP,IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, or IL1RL1 mRNA in a mammalian cell include antisensenucleic acid molecules, i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotidesequence is complementary to all or part of an IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18,IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2,or IL1RL1 mRNA.

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding an IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33,IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, or IL1RL1 protein. Non-coding regions(5′ and 3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flankthe coding region in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding an IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α,IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, orIL1RL1 protein (e.g., specificity for an IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α,IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, orIL1RL1 mRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of an IL-1α,IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1, IL1RAP,IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, or IL1RL1 polypeptide can be inhibited by targetingnucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region of the geneencoding the IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33,IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, or IL1RL1 polypeptide (e.g., thepromoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequence that is at least 1 kb, 2 kb,3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of the transcription initiation startstate) to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription ofthe gene in target cells.

An inhibitory nucleic acid can be a siRNA that decreases the expressionof an IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1,IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, or IL1RL1 mRNA.

As described herein, inhibitory nucleic acids preferentially bind (e.g.,hybridize) to a nucleic acid encoding IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α,IL-36β, IL-36γ, IL-38, IL-33, IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, orIL1RL1 protein to treat allergic diseases (e.g., asthma (Corren et al.,N. Engl. J. Med. 365: 1088-1098, 2011)), radiation lung injury (Chung etal., Sci. Rep. 6: 39714, 2016), ulcerative colitis (Hua et al., Br. J.Clin. Pharmacol. 80:101-109, 2015), dermatitis (Guttman-Yassky et al.,Exp. Opin. Biol. Ther. 13(4):1517, 2013), and chronic obstructivepulmonary disease (COPD) (Walsh et al. (2010) Curr. Opin. Investig Drugs11(11):1305-1312, 2010).

Exemplary IL-1 inhibitors that are antisense nucleic acids are describedin Yilmaz-Elis et al., Mol. Ther. Nucleic Acids 2(1): e66, 2013; Lu etal., J. Immunol. 190(12): 6570-6578, 2013), small interfering RNA(siRNA) (e.g., Ma et al., Ann. Hepatol. 15(2): 260-270, 2016), orcombinations thereof.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to any one of IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-18, IL-36α, IL-36β,IL-36γ, IL-38, and IL-33. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment of an antibody described herein can bindspecifically to one or both of IL-1R1 and IL1RAP. In some embodiments,an antibody or antigen-binding fragment of an antibody described hereincan bind specifically to IL-18Rα. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment of an antibody described herein can bindspecifically to one or both of IL1RL1 and IL1RAP. In some embodiments,an antibody or antigen-binding fragment of an antibody described hereincan bind to one or both of IL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP.

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is canakinumab (ACZ885, Ilaris®(Dhimolea, MAbs 2(1): 3-13, 2010; Yokota et al., Clin. Exp. Rheumatol.2016; Torene et al., Ann. Rheum. Dis. 76(1):303-309, 2017; Gram, Curr.Opin. Chem. Biol. 32:1-9, 2016; Kontzias et al., Semin. Arthritis Rheum42(2):201-205, 2012). In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor isanakinra (Kineret®; Beynon et al., J. Clin. Rheumatol. 23(3):181-183,2017; Stanam et al., Oncotarget 7(46):76087-76100, 2016; Nayki et al.,J. Obstet Gynaecol. Res. 42(11):1525-1533, 2016; Greenhalgh et al., Dis.Model Mech. 5(6):823-833, 2012), or a variant thereof. In someembodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is gevokizumab (XOMA 052; Knicklebein etal., Am. J. Ophthalmol. 172:104-110, 2016; Roubille et al.,Atherosclerosis 236(2):277-285, 2014; Issafras et al., J. Pharmacol.Exp. Ther. 348(1):202-215, 2014; Handa et al., Obesity 21(2):306-309,2013; Geiler et al., Curr. Opin. Mol. Ther. 12(6):755-769, 2010),LY2189102 (Bihorel et al., AAPS J. 16(5):1009-1117, 2014;Sloan-Lancaster et al., Diabetes Care 36(8):2239-2246, 2013), MABp1(Hickish et al., Lancey Oncol. 18(2):192-201, 2017; Timper et al., J.Diabetes Complications 29 (7):955-960, 2015), CDP-484 (Braddock et al.,Drug Discov. 3:330-339, 2004), or a variant thereof (Dinarello et al.,Nat. Rev. Drug Discov. 11(8): 633-652, 2012).

Further teachings of IL-1 inhibitors that are antibodies orantigen-binding fragments thereof are described in U.S. Pat. Nos.5,075,222; 7,446,175; 7,531,166; 7,744,865; 7,829,093; and 8,273,350; US2016/0326243; US 2016/0194392, and US 2009/0191187, each of which isincorporated by reference in its entirety.

Fusion Proteins or Soluble Receptors

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is a fusion protein or a solublereceptor. For example, a fusion can include an extracellular domain ofany one of IL-1R1, IL1RAP, IL-18Rα, IL-1RL2, and IL1RL1 fused to apartner amino acid sequence (e.g., a stabilizing domain, e.g., an IgG Fcregion, e.g., a human IgG Fc region). In some embodiments, the IL-1inhibitor is a soluble version of one or both of IL-1RL1 and IL1RAP. Insome embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is a soluble version of IL-18Rα. Insome embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is a soluble version of one or bothof IL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP.

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is a fusion protein comprisingor consisting of rilonacept (IL-1 Trap, Arcalyst®) (see, e.g., Kapur &Bonk, P.T. 34(3):138-141, 2009; Church et al., Biologics 2(4):733-742,2008; McDermott, Drugs Today (Barc) 45(6):423-430, 2009). In someembodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is a fusion protein that is chimeric(e.g., EBI-005 (Isunakinra®) (Furfine et al., Invest. Ophthalmol. Vis.Sci. 53(14):2340-2340, 2012; Goldstein et al., Eye Contact Lens41(3):145-155, 2015; Goldstein et al., Eye Contact Lens, 2016)).

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor is a soluble receptor thatcomprises or consists of sIL-1RI and/or sIL-1RII (Svenson et al., Eur.J. Immunol. 25(10): 2842-2850, 1995).

Endogenous IL-I Inhibitor Peptides

In some embodiments, the IL-1 inhibitor can be an endogenous ligand oran active fragment thereof, e.g., IL-1Ra or IL-36Ra. IL-1Ra is anendogenous soluble protein that decreases the ability of IL-1α and IL-1βto bind to their receptor (e.g., a complex of IL-1R1 and IL1RAPproteins). IL-36Ra is an endogenous soluble protein that decreases theability of IL-36α, IL-36β, and IL-36γ to bind to their receptor (e.g., acomplex of IL-1RL2 and IL-1RAP proteins).

12. IL-13 Inhibitors

The term “IL-13 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases IL-13expression and/or decreases the binding of IL-13 to an IL-13 receptor.In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor decreases the ability of IL-13to bind an IL-13 receptor (e.g., a complex including IL-4Rα andIL-13Rα1, or a complex including IL-13Rα1 and IL-13Rα2).

In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor targets the IL-4Rα subunit. Insome embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor targets the IL-13Rα1. In someembodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor targets IL-13Rα2. In some embodiments,the IL-13 inhibitor targets an IL-13 receptor including IL-4Rα andIL-13Rα1. In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor targets an IL-13receptor including IL-13Rα1 and IL-13Rα2. In some embodiments, the IL-13inhibitor targets IL-13.

In some embodiments, an IL-13 inhibitor is an inhibitory nucleic acid,an antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, or a fusion protein.In some embodiments, the inhibitory nucleic acid can be an antisensenucleic acid, a ribozyme, a small interfering RNA, a small hairpin RNA,or a microRNA. Examples of aspects of these different inhibitory nucleicacids are described below.

Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression of IL-13,IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4Rα mRNA expression in a mammalian cellinclude antisense nucleic acid molecules, i.e., nucleic acid moleculeswhose nucleotide sequence is complementary to all or part of an IL-13,IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-Rα mRNA.

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding an IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4Rα protein. Non-codingregions (5′ and 3′ untranslated regions) are the 5′ and the 3′ sequencesthat flank the coding region in a gene and are not translated into aminoacids. Non-limiting examples of an inhibitors that are antisense nucleicacids are described in Kim et al., J. Gene Med. 11(1):26-37, 2009; andMousavi et al., Iran J. Allergy Asthma Immunol. 2(3):131-137, 2003.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding an IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, orIL-4Rα (e.g., specificity for an IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4RαmRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of an IL-13,IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4Rα polypeptide can be inhibiting by targetingnucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region of the geneencoding the IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4Rα polypeptide (e.g., thepromoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequence that is at least 1 kb, 2 kb,3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of the transcription initiation start site)to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription of the genein target cells.

As described herein, inhibitory nucleic acid preferentially bind (e.g.,hybridize) to a nucleic acid encoding IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, orIL-4Rα protein to treat allergic diseases (e.g., asthma (Corren et al.,N. Engl. J. Med. 365:1088-1098, 2011), radiation lung injury (Chung etal., Sci. Rep. 6:39714, 2016), ulcerative colitis (Hua et al., Br. J.Clin. Pharmacol. 80:101-109, 2015), dermatitis (Guttman-Yassky et al.,Exp. Opin. Biol. Ther. 13(4):1517, 2013), and chronic obstructivepulmonary disease (COPD) (Walsh et al., Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs11(11):1305-1312, 2010)).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can be a siRNA molecule that decreases thelevel of an IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4Rα mRNA. Non-limitingexamples of siRNAs that are IL-13 inhibitors are described in Lively etal., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 121(1):88-94, 2008. Non-limiting examplesof short hairpin RNA (shRHA) that are IL-13 inhibitors are described inLee et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 22(5):577-586, 2011, and Shilovskiy et al.,Eur. Resp. J. 42:P523, 2013.

In some embodiments, an inhibitory nucleic acid can be a microRNA.Non-limiting examples of microRNAs that are IL-13 inhibitors are let-7(Kumar et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 128(5):1077-1085, 2011).

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to any one of IL-13, IL-13Rα1, IL-13Rα2, or IL-4Rα,or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment of an antibody described herein can bindspecifically to IL-13. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment of an antibody described herein can bindspecifically to an IL-13 receptor (e.g., a complex including IL-4Rα andIL-13Rα1, or a complex including IL-13Rα1 and IL-13Rα2).

In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is a monoclonal antibody(Bagnasco et al., Int. Arch. Allergy Immunol. 170:122-131, 2016). Insome embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is QAX576 (Novartis) or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (see, e.g., Kariyawasam et al., B92 NewTreatment Approaches for Asthma and Allergery San Diego, 2009;Rothenberg et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. 135:500-507, 2015). In someembodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is ABT-308 (Abbott) or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (see, e.g., Ying et al., AmericanThoracic Society 2010 International Conference, May 14-19, 2010, NewOrleans; Abstract A6644). In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor isCNTO-5825 (Centrocore) or an antigen-binding fragment thereof (see,e.g., van Hartingsveldt et al., British J. Clin. Pharmacol.75:1289-1298, 2013). In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor isdupilumab (REGN668/SAR231893) or an antigen-binding fragment thereof(see, e.g., Simpson et al., N. Eng. J. Med. 375:2335-2348, 2016; Thaciet al., Lancet 387:40-52, 2016). In some embodiments, the IL-13inhibitor is AMG317 (Amgen) or an antigen-binding fragment thereof(Polosa et al., Drug Discovery Today 17:591-599, 2012; Holgate, BritishJ. Clinical Pharmacol. 76:277-291, 2013). In some embodiments, the IL-13inhibitor is an antibody that specifically binds to IL-13Rα1 (see, e.g.,U.S. Pat. No. 7,807,158; WO 96/29417; WO 97/15663; and WO 03/080675).

In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is a humanized monoclonalantibody (e.g., lebrikizumab (TNX-650) (Thomson et al., Biologics6:329-335, 2012; and Hanania et al., Thorax 70(8):748-756, 2015). Insome embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is an anti-IL-13 antibody, e.g.,GSK679586 or a variant thereof (Hodsman et al., Br. J. Clin. Pharmacol.75(1):118-128, 2013; and De Boever et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol.133(4):989-996, 2014). In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor istralokinumab (CAT-354) or a variant thereof (Brightling et al., Lancet3(9): 692-701, 2015; Walsh et al. (2010) Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs11(11):1305-1312, 2010; Piper et al., Euro. Resp. 1 41:330-338, 2013;May et al., Br. J. Pharmacol. 166(1): 177-193, 2012; Singh et al., BMCPulm Med. 10:3, 2010; Blanchard et al., Clin. Exp. Allergy 35(8):1096-1103, 2005). In some embodiments, the Il-13 inhibitor isanrukinzumab (IMA-638) (Hua et al., Br. J. Clin. Pharmacol. 80: 101-109,2015; Reinisch et al., Gut 64(6): 894-900, 2015; Gauvreau et al., Am. J.Respir. Crit. Care Med. 183(8):1007-1014, 2011; Bree et al., J. AllergyClin. Immunol. 119(5):1251-1257, 2007). Further teachings of IL-13inhibitors that are antibodies or antigen-binding fragments thereof aredescribed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,067,199; 7,910,708; 8,221,752; 8,388,965;8,399,630; and 8,734,801; US 2014/0341913; US 2015/0259411; US2016/0075777; US 2016/0130339, US 2011/0243928, and US 2014/0105897 eachof which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the IL-13 inhibitor is a fusion protein or asoluble antagonist. In some embodiments, the fusion protein comprises asoluble fragment of a receptor of IL-13 (e.g., a soluble fragment of acomplex including IL-13Rα1 and IL-4Rα, a soluble fragment of a complexincluding IL-13Rα1 and IL-13Rα2, a soluble fragment of IL-13Rα1, asoluble fragment of IL-13Rα2, or soluble fragment of IL-4Rα). In someembodiments, the fusion protein comprises an extracellular domain of areceptor of IL-13 (e.g., a fusion protein including an extracellulardomain of both IL-13Rα1 and IL-4Rα, a fusion protein including anextracellular domain of both IL-13Rα1 and IL-13Rα2, a fusion proteinincluding an extracellular domain of IL-13Rα1, a fusion proteinincluding an extracellular domain of IL-13Rα2, or a fusion proteinincluding an extracellular domain of IL-4Rα).

In some embodiments, the fusion protein comprises or consists ofsIL-13Rα2-Fc (see, e.g., Chiaramonte et al., J. Clin. Invest.104(6):777-785, 1999; Kasaian et al., Am. J. Respir. Cell. Mol. Biol.36(3):368-376, 2007; Miyahara et al., J. Allergy Clin. Immunol.118(5):1110-1116, 2006; Rahaman et al., Cancer Res. 62(4):1103-1109,2002; incorporated by reference herein). In some embodiments, the fusionprotein comprises or consists of an IL-13 fusion cytotoxin (e.g.,IL-13/diphtheria toxin fusion protein (Li et al., Protein Eng.15(5):419-427, 2002), IL-13-PE38QQR (IL-13-PE) (Blease et al. (2001) J.Immunol. 167(11):6583-6592, 2001; and Husain et al., J. Neuro-Oncol.65(1):37-48, 2003)).

13. IL-10 and IL-10 Receptor Agonists

The term “IL-10 receptor agonist” is any molecule that binds to andactivates a receptor for IL-10 expressed on a mammalian cell or anucleic acid that encodes any such molecule. A receptor for IL-10 caninclude, e.g., a complex of two IL-10 receptor-1 (IL-10R1) proteins andtwo IL-10 receptor 2 (IL-10R2) proteins. In some examples, an IL-10receptor agonist is an antibody or an antigen-binding antibody fragmentthat specifically binds to and activates a receptor for IL-10 (e.g., ahuman receptor for IL-10). In some examples, an IL-10 receptor agonistis a recombinant IL-10 (e.g., human recombinant IL-10). In someexamples, an IL-10 receptor agonist is a pegylated recombinant IL-10(e.g., pegylated recombinant human IL-10). In some examples, an IL-10receptor agonist is a fusion protein. In some examples, an IL-10receptor agonist is an IL-10 peptide mimetic.

Further teachings of IL-1 inhibitors that are antibodies orantigen-binding fragments thereof are described in U.S. Pat. Nos.5,075,222; 7,446,175; 7,531,166; 7,744,865; 7,829,093; and 8,273,350; US2016/0326243; US 2016/0194392, and US 2009/0191187, each of which isincorporated by reference in its entirety.

Recombinant IL-10

In some examples, an IL-10 receptor agonist is a recombinant IL-10protein. In some examples, a recombinant IL-10 protein has an amino acidsequence that is identical to a human IL-10 protein. Non-limitingcommercial sources of recombinant human IL-10 protein are available fromPeprotech (Rocky Hill, N.J.), Novus Biologicals (Littleton, Colo.),Stemcell™ Technologies (Cambridge, Mass.), Millipore Sigma (Billerica,Mass.), and R&D Systems (Minneapolis, Minn.). In some examples, arecombinant human IL-10 protein can be Tenovil™ (Schering Corporation).

In some examples, a recombinant IL-10 protein is a functional fragmentof human IL-10 protein. In some examples, a functional fragment of humanIL-10 is a fragment of a human IL-10 protein that is able tospecifically bind to and activate a human receptor of IL-10. Afunctional fragment of a human IL-10 protein can have one, two, three,four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen,fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, or twentyamino acids removed from the N- and/or C-terminus of the wildtype maturehuman IL-10 protein. In some embodiments, the recombinant human IL-10can include a sequence that is at least 80% identical (e.g., at least82% identical, at least 84% identical, at least 86% identical, at least88% identical, at least 90% identical, at least 92% identical, at least94% identical, at least 95% identical, at least 96% identical, at least98% identical, or at least 99% identical) to the sequence of wildtype,mature human IL-10, and is able to specifically bind to and activate ahuman receptor of IL-10. Mutation of amino acids that are not conservedbetween different mammalian species is less likely to have a negativeeffect on the activity of a recombinant IL-10 protein.

In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptor agonist is rhuIL-10 (Tenovil) ora variant thereof. See, e.g., McHutchison et al., J. Interferon CytokineRes. 1:1265-1270, 1999; Rosenblum et al., Regul. Toxicol. Pharmacol.35:56-71, 2002; Schreiber et al., Gastroenterology 119(6):1461-1472,2000; Maini et al., Arthritis Rheum. 40(Suppl):224, 1997.

Exemplary methods of making a recombinant human IL-10 are described inPajkrt et al., J. Immunol. 158: 3971-3977, 1997). Additional exemplarymethods of making recombinant IL-10 are described herein and are knownin the art.

In some embodiments, a recombinant IL-10 is a pegylated recombinantIL-10 (e.g., pegylated recombinant human IL-10) (e.g., a 5kDaN-terminally PEGylated form of IL-10; AM0010) (Infante et al., ASCOMeeting Abstracts 33(15_suppl):3017, 2015; Chan et al., PLoS One11(6):e0156229, 2016; Mumm et al., Cancer Cell 20(6):781-796, 2011; Tenget al., Cancer Cell 20(6):691-693, 2011; U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,691,205;8,865,652; 9,259,478; and 9,364,517; and U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication Nos. 2008/0081031; 2009/0214471; 2011/0250163; 2011/0091419;2014/0227223; 2015/0079031; 2015/0086505; 2016/0193352; 2016/0367689;2016/0375101; and 2016/0166647).

In some embodiments, a recombinant IL-10 is a stabilized isoform of arecombinant IL-10. In some embodiments, the stabilized isoform of arecombinant IL-10 is a viral IL-10 protein (e.g., a humancytomegalovirus IL10 (e.g., cmv-IL10, LA-cmv-IL-10 (e.g., Lin et al.,Virus Res. 131(2):213-223, 2008; Jenkins et al., J. Virol.78(3):1440-1447, 2004; Kotenko et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.97(4):1695-1700, 2000; Jones et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.99(14):9404-9409, 2002) or a latency-associated viral IL-10 protein(e.g., Poole et al., J. Virol. 88(24):13947-13955, 2014).

In some embodiments, the recombinant IL-10 is a mammalian IL-10 homolog(see, e.g., WO 00/073457). In some embodiments, a mammalian IL-10homolog is BCRF1, an EBV homolog of human IL-10, also known as viralIL-10, or a variant thereof (Liu et al., J. Immunol. 158(2):604-613,1997).

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptor agonist is a fusion protein. Insome embodiments, the fusion protein comprises the amino acid sequenceof an IL-10 protein (or a functional fragment thereof) and a fusionpartner (e.g., an Fc region (e.g., human IgG Fc) or human serumalbumin). In some embodiments the fusion partner can be an antibody oran antigen-binding antibody fragment (e.g., an scFv) that targets IL-10receptor agonist to an inflamed tissue. In some embodiments, theantibody or antigen-binding fragment that is a fusion partner can bindspecifically, or preferentially, to inflamed gastrointestinal cells by,e.g., CD69. In some embodiments, an IL-10 receptor agonist that is afusion protein can be, e.g., F8-IL-10, such as Dekavil (Philogen).

In some embodiments, the fusion protein is a L19-IL-10 fusion protein, aHyHEL10-IL-10 fusion protein, or a variant thereof. See, e.g., Trachselet al., Arthritis Res. Ther. 9(1):R9, 2007, and Walmsley et al.,Arthritis Rheum. 39: 495-503, 1996.

IL-10 Peptide Mimetic

In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptor agonist is an IL-10 peptidemimetic. A non-limiting example of an IL-10 peptide mimetic is IT 9302or a variant thereof (Osman et al., Surgery 124 (3):584-92, 1998; Lopezet al., Immunobiology 216(10):1117-1126, 2011). Additional examples ofIL-10 peptide mimetics are described in DeWitt, Nature Biotech. 17:214,1999, and Reineke et al., Nature Biotech. 17:271-275, 1999.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptor agonist is an antibody or anantigen-binding antibody fragment that binds to and activates an IL-10receptor (e.g., a human IL-10 receptor). In some embodiments, theantibody or antigen-binding antibody fragment that specifically binds toan epitope on IL-10R-1 protein (e.g., human IL-10R-1 protein). In someembodiments, the antibody or antigen-binding antibody fragment thatspecifically binds to an epitope on IL-10R-2 protein (e.g., a humanIL-10R-2 protein). In some embodiments, the antibody or theantigen-binding antibody fragment that specifically binds to an epitopeon IL-10R-1 and IL-10R-2 proteins (e.g., human IL-10R-1 and humanIL-10R-2 proteins).

In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptor agonist is an antibody (e.g.,F8-IL10 (also known as DEKAVIL) or a variant thereof (see, e.g.,Schwager et al., Arthritis Res. Ther. 11(5):R142, 2009; Franz et al.,Int. J. Cardiol. 195:311-322, 2015; Galeazzi et al., Isr. Med. Assoc. J.16(10):666, 2014).

Cells Producing a Recombinant IL-10

In some embodiments, a recombinant cell (e.g., a recombinant mammaliancell) secretes a recombinant IL-10 (e.g., any of the recombinant IL-10proteins described herein). In some embodiments, a cell (e.g., amammalian cell) secretes IL-10 (e.g., human IL-10). In some embodiments,the mammalian cell can be a mammalian cell obtained from the subject,after the introduction of a nucleic acid encoding the recombinant IL-10(e.g., any of the recombinant IL-10 proteins described herein) into thecell obtained from the subject.

In some examples, the recombinant mammalian cell can be a ChineseHamster Ovary (CHO) cell, a B cell, a CD8⁺ T cell, a dendritic cell, akeratinocyte or an epithelial cell. See, e.g., Mosser et al., Immunol.Rev. 226:205-218, 2009; Fillatreau et al., Nat. Rev. Immunol. 8:391-397,2008; Ryan et al., Crit. Rev. Immunol. 27:15-32, 2007; Moore et al.,Annu. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765, 2001. In some embodiments, therecombinant mammalian cell can be a mesenchymal stem cell (e.g., Gupteet al., Biomed. J. 40(1):49-54, 2017).

Nucleic Acids and Vectors the Encode an IL-10 Receptor Agonist

In some examples, an IL-10 receptor agonist can be a nucleic acid (e.g.,a vector) that includes a sequence encoding an IL-10 receptor agonist(e.g., any of the IL-10 proteins described herein). In some embodiments,the nucleic acid includes a sequence encoding IL-10 (e.g., human IL-10).In some embodiments, the nucleic acid includes a sequence encoding arecombinant IL-10 (e.g., a recombinant human IL-10).

The nucleic acid can be, e.g., a vector. In some embodiments, a vectorcan be a viral vector (e.g., an adenovirus vector, a herpes virusvector, a baculovirus vector, or a retrovirus vector). A vector can alsobe, e.g., a plasmid or a cosmid. Additional examples of vectors areknown in the art. A vector can include a promoter sequence operablylinked to the sequence encoding an IL-10 receptor agonist (e.g., any ofthe recombinant IL-10 proteins described herein).

A non-limiting example of a composition including a nucleic acid thatencodes an IL-10 receptor agonist is XT-150 (Xalud Therapeutics).

Additional Examples of IL-10 Receptor Agonists

In some embodiments, the recombinant cell is a recombinant Gram-positivebacterial cell (e.g., a genetically modified Lactococcus lactis(LL-Thy12) (see, e.g., Steidler et al., Science 289:1352-1355, 2000;Braat et al., Clin. Gastroenterol. Heptal. 4:754-759, 2006). In someembodiments, the recombinant cell is a recombinant Gram-negativebacterial cell (e.g., a Shigella flexneri cell) that secretes an IL-10receptor agonist (e.g., a recombinant IL-10 protein) (Chamekh et al., J.Immunol. 180(6): 4292-4298, 2008).

In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptor agonist is a cell (e.g., aClostridium butyricum cell) that induces IL-10 production and secretionby a different cell (e.g., a macrophage) (e.g., Hayashi et al., CellHost Microbe 13:711-722, 2013). In some embodiments, the IL-10 receptoragonist is a recombinant bacterial cell (e.g., a Lactobacillusacidophilus cell) that is deficient in lipoteichoic acid and inducesIL-10 production and secretion by a different cell (e.g., a dendriticcell) (e.g., Mohamadzadeh et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.108(Suppl. 1):4623-4630, 2011; Konstantinov et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. U.S.A. 105(49):19474-9, 2008). In some embodiments, the IL-10receptor agonist is a bacterial cell or a fragment of a bacterial cellthat is maintained in the supernatant that induces IL-10 secretion in adifferent cell (e.g., an immune cell) (e.g., a Faecalibacteriumprausnitzii cell or a Faecalibacterium prausnitzii supernatant) (see,e.g., Sokol et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 105(43):16731-16736,2008).

Additional examples of other IL-10 receptor agonists are described in,e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,936,586; WO 96/01318; WO 91/00349; WO 13/130913;each incorporated in its entirety herein.

14. Glatiramer Acetate

Glatiramer acetate, formerly known as copolymer-1, consists of theacetate salts of synthetic polypeptides, containing four naturallyoccurring amino acids: L-glutamic acid, L-alanine, L-tyrosine, andL-lysine with an average molar fraction of 0.141, 0.427, 0.095, and0.338, respectively. The average molecule weight of glatiramer acetateis 4,700-11,000 daltons.

Chemically, glatiramer acetate is designated L-glutamic acid polymerwith L-alanine, L-lysine and L-tyrosine, acetate (salt). The CAS numberfor glatiramer acetate is CAS-147245-92-9. The IUPAC name for glatirameracetate is acetic acid; (2S)-2-amino-3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)propanoic acid;(2S)-2-aminopentanedioic acid; (2S)-2-aminopropanoic acid;(2S)-2,6-diaminohexanoic acid.

Glatiramer acetate is marketed as the active ingredient of Copaxone® byTeva Pharmaceuticals Ltd., Israel. Copaxone® is a clear, colorless toslightly yellow, sterile, nonpyrogenic solution. Each 1 mL of Copaxone®solution contains 20 mg or 40 mg of glatiramer acetate and 40 mg ofmannitol. The pH of Copaxone® solution is approximately 5.5 to 7.0.Copaxone® 20 mg/mL is an FDA-approved product. Copaxone® 40 mg/mL in aprefilled syringe was developed as a newer formulation of the activeingredient glatiramer acetate.

Glatiramer acetate is known as being useful for the treatment ofinflammatory and autoimmune diseases, in addition to its uses fortreating multiple sclerosis, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,033,582, U.S.Pat. No. 7,053,043, U.S. Pat. No. 7,074,580, U.S. Pat. No. 7,279,172,and U.S. Pat. No. 7,425,332, hereby incorporated by reference in theirentirety. Glatiramer acetate has been shown to therapeutically reduceinflammation and ameliorate the pathological manifestations ofinflammatory bowel disease (IBD) in numerous murine models (see, e.g.,Aharoni et al., J. of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics318:68-78, 2006; Yao et al., Eur. J. Immunol. 43:125-136, 2013; andYablecovitch et al., J. of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics337:391-399, 2011, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference inits entirety).

Various glatiramer acetate formulations and methods of preparingglatiramer acetate and glatiramer acetate formulations have beendescribed in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 8,399,413, U.S. Pat. No.8,859,489, U.S. Pat. No. 8,920,373, U.S. Pat. No. 8,921,116, U.S. Pat.No. 8,969,302, U.S. Pat. No. 8,993,722, U.S. Pat. No. 9,018,170, U.S.Pat. No. 9,029,507, U.S. Pat. No. 9,155,775, and U.S. Pat. No.9,402,874, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

15. CD40/CD40L Inhibitors

The term “CD40/CD40L inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreases CD40or CD40L (CD154) expression and/or the ability of CD40 to bind to CD40L(CD154). CD40 is a costimulatory receptor that binds to its ligand,CD40L (CD154).

In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor can decrease the bindingbetween CD40 and CD40L by blocking the ability of CD40 to interact withCD40L. In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor can decrease thebinding between CD40 and CD40L by blocking the ability of CD40L tointeract with CD40. In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitordecreases the expression of CD40 or CD40L. In some embodiments, theCD40/CD40L inhibitor decreases the expression of CD40. In someembodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor decreases the expression of CD40L.

In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor is an inhibitory nucleicacid, an antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, a fusionprotein, or a small molecule. In some embodiments, the inhibitorynucleic acid is a small interfering RNA, an antisense nucleic acid, anaptamer, or a microRNA. Exemplary CD40/CD40L inhibitors are describedherein. Additional examples of CD40/CD40L inhibitors are known in theart.

Exemplary aspects of different inhibitory nucleic acids are describedbelow. Any of the examples of inhibitory nucleic acids that can decreaseexpression of CD40 or CD40L mRNA in a mammalian cell can be synthesizedin vitro. Inhibitory nucleic acids that can decrease the expression ofCD40 or CD40L mRNA in a mammalian cell include antisense nucleic acidmolecules, i.e., nucleic acid molecules whose nucleotide sequence iscomplementary to all or part of a CD40 or CD40L mRNA.

Inhibitory Nucleic Acids

An antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to all or partof a non-coding region of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequenceencoding a CD40 or CD40L protein. Non-coding regions (5′ and 3′untranslated regions) are the 5′ and 3′ sequences that flank the codingregion in a gene and are not translated into amino acids.

Some exemplary antisense nucleic acids that are CD40 or CD40L inhibitorsare described, e.g., in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,197,584 and 7,745,609; Gao etal., Gut 54(1):70-77, 2005; Arranz et al., J. Control Release 165(3):163-172, 2012; Donner et al., Mol. Ther. Nucleic Acids 4:e265, 2015.

Another example of an inhibitory nucleic acid is a ribozyme that hasspecificity for a nucleic acid encoding a CD40 or CD40L protein (e.g.,specificity for a CD40 or CD40L mRNA).

An inhibitory nucleic acid can also be a nucleic acid molecule thatforms triple helical structures. For example, expression of a CD40 orCD40L polypeptide can be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequencescomplementary to the regulatory region of the gene encoding the CD40 orCD40L polypeptide (e.g., the promoter and/or enhancer, e.g., a sequencethat is at least 1 kb, 2 kb, 3 kb, 4 kb, or 5 kb upstream of thetranscription initiation start state) to form triple helical structuresthat prevent transcription of the gene in target cells.

An inhibitory nucleic acid can be a siRNA molecule that decreases thelevel of a CD40 or CD40L mRNA. Non-limiting examples of shortinterfering RNA (siRNA) that are CD40/CD40L inhibitors are described in,e.g., Pluvinet et al., Blood 104:3642-3646, 2004; Karimi et al., CellImmunol. 259(1):74-81, 2009; and Zheng et al., Arthritis Res. Ther.12(1):R13, 2010. Non-limiting examples of short hairpin RNA (shRNA)targeting CD40/CD40L are described in Zhang et al., Gene Therapy21:709-714, 2014. Non-limiting examples of microRNAs that are CD40/CD40Linhibitors include, for example, miR146a (Chen et al., FEBS Letters585(3):567-573, 2011), miR-424, and miR-503 (Lee et al., Sci. Rep.7:2528, 2017).

Non-limiting examples of aptamers that are CD40/CD40L inhibitors aredescribed in Soldevilla et al., Biomaterials 67:274-285, 2015.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to CD40 or CD40L, or to both CD40 and CD40L.

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of PG102 (Pangenetics) (Bankert etal., J. Immunol. 194(9):4319-4327, 2015); 2C10 (Lowe et al., Am. J.Transplant 12(8):2079-2087, 2012); ASKP1240 (Bleselumab) (Watanabe etal., Am. J. Transplant 13(8):1976-1988, 2013); 4D11 (Imai et al.,Transplantation 84(8):1020-1028, 2007); BI 655064 (Boehringer Ingelheim)(Visvanathan et al., 2016 American College of Rheumatology AnnualMeeting, Abstract 1588, September 28, 2016); 5D12 (Kasran et al.,Aliment. Pharmacol. Ther., 22(2):111-122, 2005; Boon et al., Toxicology174(1):53-65, 2002); ruplizumab (hu5c8) (Kirk et al., Nat. Med.5(6):686-693, 1999); CHIR12.12 (HCD122) (Weng et al., Blood104(11):3279, 2004; Tai et al., Cancer Res. 65(13):5898-5906, 2005);CDP7657 (Shock et al., Arthritis Res. Ther. 17(1):234, 2015); BMS-986004domain antibody (dAb) (Kim et al., Am. J. Transplant. 17(5):1182-1192,2017); 5c8 (Xie et al., J. Immunol. 192(9):4083-4092, 2014); dacetuzumab(SGN-40) (Lewis et al., Leukemia 25(6):1007-1016, 2011; and Khubchandaniet al., Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs 10(6):579-587, 2009); lucatumumab(HCD122) (Bensinger et al., Br. J. Haematol. 159: 58-66, 2012; and Byrdet al., Leuk. Lymphoma 53(11): 10.3109/10428194.2012.681655, 2012);PG102 (FFP104) (Bankert et al., J. Immunol. 194(9):4319-4327, 2015); ChiLob 7/4 (Johnson et al., J. Clin. Oncol. 28:2507, 2019); and ASKP1240(Okimura et al., Am. J. Transplant. 14(6): 1290-1299, 2014; and Ma etal., Transplantation 97(4): 397-404, 2014).

Further teachings of CD40/CD40L antibodies and antigen-binding fragmentsthereof are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,874,082;7,169,389; 7,271,152; 7,288,252; 7,445,780; 7,537,763, 8,277,810;8,293,237, 8,551,485; 8,591,900; 8,647,625; 8,784,823; 8,852,597;8,961,976; 9,023,360, 9,028,826; 9,090,696, 9,221,913; US2014/0093497;and US2015/0017155, each of which is incorporated by reference in itsentirety.

Fusion and Truncated Proteins and Peptides

In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor is a fusion protein, atruncated protein (e.g., a soluble receptor) or a peptide. In someembodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor is a truncated protein asdisclosed in, for example, WO 01/096397. In some embodiments, theCD40/CD40L inhibitor is a peptide, such as a cyclic peptide (see, e.g.,U.S. Pat. No. 8,802,634; Bianco et al., Org. Biomol. Chem. 4:1461-1463,2006; Deambrosis et al., J. Mol. Med. 87(2):181-197, 2009; Vaitaitis etal., Diabetologia 57(11):2366-2373, 2014). In some embodiments, theCD40/CD40L inhibitor is a CD40 ligand binder, for example, a TumorNecrosis Factor Receptor-associated Factor (TRAF): TRAF2, TRAF3, TRAF6,TRAF5 and TTRAP, or E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase RNF128.

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the CD40/CD40L inhibitor is a small molecule (see,e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,173,046, U.S. Patent Application No.2011/0065675). In some embodiments, the small molecule is Bio8898(Silvian et al., ACS Chem. Biol. 6(6):636-647, 2011); Suramin(Margolles-Clark et al., Biochem. Pharmacol. 77(7):1236-1245, 2009); asmall-molecule organic dye (Margolles-Clark et al., J. Mol. Med.87(11):1133-1143, 2009; Buchwald et al., J. Mol. Recognit. 23(1):65-73,2010), a naphthalenesulphonic acid derivative (Margolles-Clark et al.,Chem. Biol. Drug Des. 76(4):305-313, 2010), or a variant thereof.

16. CD3 Inhibitors

The term “CD3 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases the abilityof one or more of CD3γ, CD3δ, CD3ε, and CD3ζ to associate with one ormore of TCR-α, TCR-β, TCR-δ, and TCR-γ. In some embodiments, the CD3inhibitor can decrease the association between one or more of CD3γ,CD3δ, CD3ε and CD3ζ and one or more of TCR-α, TCR-β, TCR-δ, and TCR-γ byblocking the ability of one or more of CD3γ, CD3δ, CD3ε, and CD3ζ tointeract with one or more of TCR-α, TCR-β, TCR-δ, and TCR-γ.

In some embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof, a fusion protein, or a small molecule.Exemplary CD3 inhibitors are described herein. Additional examples ofCD3 inhibitors are known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, the CD3 inhibitor is an antibody or antigen-bindingfragment that binds specifically to CD3γ. In some embodiments, the CD3inhibitor is an antibody or antigen-binding fragment that bindsspecifically to CD3δ. In some mebodiments, the CD3 inhibitor is anantibody or antigen-binding fragment that binds specifically to CD3ε. Insome embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor is an antibody or antigen-bindingfragment that binds specifically to CD3ζ. In some embodiments, the CD3inhibitor is an antibody or an antigen-binding fragment that can bind totwo or more (e.g., two, three, or four) of CD3γ, CD3δ, CD3ε, and CD3ζ.

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of visiluzumab (Nuvion; HuM-291;M291; SMART anti-CD3 antibody) (Carpenter et al., Biol. Blood MarrowTransplant 11(6): 465-471, 2005; Trajkovic Curr. Opin. Investig. Drugs3(3): 411-414, 2002; Malviya et al., J. Nucl. Med. 50(10): 1683-1691,2009); muromonab-CD3 (orthoclone OKT3) (Hori et al., Surg. Today 41(4):585-590, 2011; Norman Ther. Drug Monit 17 (6): 615-620, 1995; andGramatzki et al., Leukemia 9(3): 382-390, 19); otelixizumab (TRX4)(Vossenkamper et al., Gastroenterology 147(1): 172-183, 2014; andWiczling et al., J. Clin. Pharmacol. 50(5): 494-506, 2010); foralumab(NI-0401) (Ogura et al., Clin. Immunol. 183: 240-246; and van der Woudeet al., Inflamm. Bowel Dis. 16: 1708-1716, 2010); ChAgly CD3; teplizumab(MGA031) (Waldron-Lynch et al., Sci. Transl. Med. 4(118): 118ra12, 2012;and Skelley et al., Ann. Pharmacother. 46(10): 1405-1412, 2012); orcatumaxomab (Removab®) (Linke et al., Mabs 2(2): 129-136, 2010; andBokemeyer et al., Gastric Cancer 18(4): 833-842, 2015).

Additional examples of CD3 inhibitors that are antibodies or antibodyfragments are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application PublicationNos. 2017/0204194, 2017/0137519, 2016/0368988, 2016/0333095,2016/0194399, 2016/0168247, 2015/0166661, 2015/0118252, 2014/0193399,2014/0099318, 2014/0088295, 2014/0080147, 2013/0115213, 2013/0078238,2012/0269826, 2011/0217790, 2010/0209437, 2010/0183554, 2008/0025975,2007/0190045, 2007/0190052, 2007/0154477, 2007/0134241, 2007/0065437,2006/0275292, 2006/0269547, 2006/0233787, 2006/0177896, 2006/0165693,2006/0088526, 2004/0253237, 2004/0202657, 2004/0052783, 2003/0216551,and 2002/0142000, each of which is herein incorporated by reference inits entirety (e.g., the sections describing the CD3 inhibitors).Additional CD3 inhibitors that are antibodies or antigen-bindingantibody fragments are described in, e.g., Smith et al., J. Exp. Med.185(8):1413-1422, 1997; Chatenaud et al., Nature 7:622-632, 2007.

In some embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor comprises or consists of abispecific antibody (e.g., JNJ-63709178) (Gaudet et al., Blood 128(22):2824, 2016); JNJ-64007957 (Girgis et al., Blood 128: 5668, 2016); MGD009(Tolcher et al., J. Clin. Oncol. 34:15, 2016); ERY974 (Ishiguro et al.,Sci. Transl. Med. 9(410): pii.eaa14291, 2017); AMV564 (Hoseini andCheung Blood Cancer J. 7:e522, 2017); AFM11 (Reusch et al., MAbs 7(3):584-604, 2015); duvortuxizumab (JNJ 64052781); R06958688; blinatumomab(Blincyto®; AMG103) (Ribera Expert Rev. Hematol. 1:1-11, 2017; and Moriet al., N Engl. J. Med. 376(23):e49, 2017); XmAb13676; or REGN1979(Bannerji et al., Blood 128: 621, 2016; and Smith et al., Sci. Rep.5:17943, 2015)).

In some embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor comprises or consists of atrispecific antibody (e.g., ertumaxomab (Kiewe and Thiel, Expert Opin.Investig. Drugs 17(10): 1553-1558, 2008; and Haense et al., BMC Cancer16:420, 2016); or FBTA05 (Bi20; Lymphomun) (Buhmann et al., J. Transl.Med. 11:160, 2013; and Schuster et al., Br. J. Haematol. 169(1): 90-102,2015)).

Fusion and Truncated Proteins and Peptides

In some embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor is a fusion protein, a truncatedprotein (e.g., a soluble receptor), or a peptide. In some embodiments,the CD3 inhibitor can be a fusion protein (see, e.g., Lee et al., Oncol.Rep. 15(5): 1211-1216, 2006).

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the CD3 inhibitor comprises or consists of abispecific small molecule-antibody conjugate (see, e.g., Kim et al.,PNAS 110(44): 17796-17801, 2013; Viola et al., Eur. J. Immunol.27(11):3080-3083, 1997).

17. CD14 Inhibitors

The term “CD14 inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CD14 to bind to lipopolysaccharide (LPS). CD14 acts as aco-receptor with Toll-like receptor 4 (TLR4) that binds LPS in thepresence of lipopolysaccharide-binding protein (LBP).

In some embodiments, the CD14 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCD14 and LPS by blocking the ability of CD14 to interact with LPS.

In some embodiments, the CD14 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof. In some embodiments, the CD14inhibitor is a small molecule. Exemplary CD14 inhibitors are describedherein. Additional examples of CD14 inhibitors are known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD14 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, the CD14 inhibitor is an antibody or antigen-bindingfragment that binds specifically to CD14.

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of IC14 (Axtelle and Pribble, J.Endotoxin Res. 7(4): 310-314, 2001; Reinhart et al., Crit. Care Med.32(5): 1100-1108, 2004; Spek et al., J. Clin. Immunol. 23(2): 132-140,2003). Additional examples of anti-CD14 antibodies and CD14 inhibitorscan be found, e.g., in WO 2015/140591 and WO 2014/122660, incorporatedin its entirety herein.

Additional examples of CD14 inhibitors that are antibodies or antibodyfragments are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Serial No.2017/0107294, 2014/0050727, 2012/0227412, 2009/0203052, 2009/0029396,2008/0286290, 2007/0106067, 2006/0257411, 2006/0073145, 2006/0068445,2004/0092712, 2004/0091478, and 2002/0150882, each of which is hereinincorporated by reference (e.g., the sections that describe CD14inhibitors).

Small Molecules

In some embodiments, the CD14 inhibitor is a small molecule.Non-limiting examples of CD14 inhibitors that are small molecules aredescribed in, e.g., methyl 6-deoxy-6-N-dimethyl-N-cyclopentylammonium-2,3-di-O-tetradecyl-α-D-glucopyranoside iodide (IAXO-101); methyl6-Deoxy-6-amino-2,3-di-O-tetradecyl-α-D-glucopyranoside (IAXO-102);N-(3,4-bis-tetradecyloxy-benzyl)-N-cyclopentyl-N,N-dimethylammoniumiodide (IAXO-103); and IMO-9200.

Additional examples of CD14 inhibitors that are small molecules areknown in the art.

18. CD20 Inhibitors

The term “CD20 inhibitors” refers to an agent that binds specifically toCD20 expressed on the surface of a mammalian cell.

In some embodiments, the CD20 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof, or a fusion protein or peptide.Exemplary CD20 inhibitors are described herein.

Additional examples of CD20 inhibitors are known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD20 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv).

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of rituximab (Rituxan®, MabThera®,MK-8808) (Ji et al., Indian J. Hematol. Blood Transfus. 33(4): 525-533,2017; and Calderon-Gomez and Panes Gastroenterology 142(1): 1741-76,2012); —PF-05280586; ocrelizumab (Ocrevus™) (Sharp N. Engl. J. Med.376(17): 1692, 2017); ofatumumab (Arzerra®; HuMax-CD20) (AlDallal Ther.Clin. Risk Manag. 13:905-907, 2017; and Furman et al., Lancet Haematol.4(1): e24-e34, 2017); PF-05280586 (Williams et al., Br. J. Clin.Pharmacol. 82(6): 1568-1579, 2016; and Cohen et al., Br. J. Clin.Pharmacol. 82(1): 129-138, 2016); obinutuzumab (Gazyva®) (Reddy et al.,Rheumatology 56(7): 1227-1237, 2017; and Marcus et al., N. Engl. J Med.377(14): 1331-1344, 2017); ocaratuzumab (AME-133v; LY2469298) (Cheney etal., Mabs 6(3): 749-755, 2014; and Tobinai et al., Cancer Sci. 102(2):432-8, 2011); GP2013 (Jurczak et al., Lancet Haenatol. 4(8): e350-e361,2017); IBI301; HLX01; veltuzumab (hA20) (Kalaycio et al., Leuk. Lymphoma57(4): 803-811, 2016; and Ellebrecht et al., JAMA Dermatol. 150(12):1331-1335, 2014); SCT400 (Gui et al., Chin. J Cancer Res. 28(2):197-208); ibritumomab tiuxetan (Zevalin®) (Philippe et al., Bone MarrowTransplant 51(8): 1140-1142, 2016; and Lossos et al., Leuk. Lymphoma56(6): 1750-1755, 2015); ublituximab (TG1101) (Sharman et al., Blood124: 4679, 2014; and Sawas et al., Br. J. Haematol. 177(2): 243-253,2017); LFB-R603 (Esteves et al., Blood 118: 1660, 2011; and Baritaki etal., Int. J. Oncol. 38(6): 1683-1694, 2011); or tositumomab (Bexxar)(Buchegger et al., J. Nucl. Med. 52(6): 896-900, 2011; and William andBierman Expert Opin. Biol. Ther. 10(8): 1271-1278, 2010). Additionalexamples of CD20 antibodies are known in the art (see, e.g., WO2008/156713).

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of a bispecific antibody (e.g.,XmAb13676; REGN1979 (Bannerji et al., Blood 128: 621, 2016; and Smith etal., Sci. Rep. 5: 17943, 2015); PRO131921 (Casulo et al., Clin. Immnol.154(1): 37-46, 2014; and Robak and Robak BioDrugs 25(1): 13-25, 2011);or Acellbia).

In some embodiments, the CD20 inhibitor comprises or consists of atrispecific antibody (e.g., FBTA05 (Bi20; Lymphomun) (Buhmann et al., J.Transl. Med. 11:160, 2013; and Schuster et al., Br. J. Haematol. 169(1):90-102, 2015)).

Additional examples of CD20 inhibitors that are antibodies orantigen-binding fragments are described in, e.g., U.S. PatentApplication Publication Nos. 2017/0304441, 2017/0128587, 2017/0088625,2017/0037139, 2017/0002084, 2016/0362472, 2016/0347852, 2016/0333106,2016/0271249, 2016/0243226, 2016/0115238, 2016/0108126, 2016/0017050,2016/0017047, 2016/0000912, 2016/0000911, 2015/0344585, 2015/0290317,2015/0274834, 2015/0265703, 2015/0259428, 2015/0218280, 2015/0125446,2015/0093376, 2015/0079073, 2015/0071911, 2015/0056186, 2015/0010540,2014/0363424, 2014/0356352, 2014/0328843, 2014/0322200, 2014/0294807,2014/0248262, 2014/0234298, 2014/0093454, 2014/0065134, 2014/0044705,2014/0004104, 2014/0004037, 2013/0280243, 2013/0273041, 2013/0251706,2013/0195846, 2013/0183290, 2013/0089540, 2013/0004480, 2012/0315268,2012/0301459, 2012/0276085, 2012/0263713, 2012/0258102, 2012/0258101,2012/0251534, 2012/0219549, 2012/0183545, 2012/0100133, 2012/0034185,2011/0287006, 2011/0263825, 2011/0243931, 2011/0217298, 2011/0200598,2011/0195022, 2011/0195021, 2011/0177067, 2011/0165159, 2011/0165152,2011/0165151, 2011/0129412, 2011/0086025, 2011/0081681, 2011/0020322,2010/0330089, 2010/0310581, 2010/0303808, 2010/0183601, 2010/0080769,2009/0285795, 2009/0203886, 2009/0197330, 2009/0196879, 2009/0191195,2009/0175854, 2009/0155253, 2009/0136516, 2009/0130089, 2009/0110688,2009/0098118, 2009/0074760, 2009/0060913, 2009/0035322, 2008/0260641,2008/0213273, 2008/0089885, 2008/0044421, 2008/0038261, 2007/0280882,2007/0231324, 2007/0224189, 2007/0059306, 2007/0020259, 2007/0014785,2007/0014720, 2006/0121032, 2005/0180972, 2005/0112060, 2005/0069545,2005/0025764, 2004/0213784, 2004/0167319, 2004/0093621, 2003/0219433,2003/0206903, 2003/0180292, 2003/0026804, 2002/0039557, 2002/0012665,and 2001/0018041, each herein incorporated by reference in theirentirety (e.g., sections describing CD20 inhibitors).

Peptides and Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the CD20 inhibitor is an immunotoxin (e.g., MT-3724(Hamlin Blood 128: 4200, 2016).

In some embodiments, the CD20 inhibitor is a fusion protein (e.g.,TRU-015 (Rubbert-Roth Curr. Opin. Mol. Ther. 12(1): 115-123, 2010).Additional examples of CD20 inhibitors that are fusion proteins aredescribed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos.2012/0195895, 2012/0034185, 2009/0155253, 2007/0020259, and2003/0219433, each of which are herein incorporated by reference intheir entirety (e.g., sections describing CD20 inhibitors).

19. CD25 Inhibitors

The term “CD25 inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CD25 (also called interleukin-2 receptor alpha chain) to bindto interleukin-2. CD25 forms a complex with interleukin-2 receptor betachain and interleukin-2 common gamma chain.

In some embodiments, the CD25 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof, or a fusion protein. Exemplary CD25inhibitors are described herein. Additional examples of CD25 inhibitorsare known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD25 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, a CD25 inhibitor is an antibody or an antigen-bindingfragment thereof that specifically binds to CD25. In some embodiments, aCD25 inhibitor is an antibody that specifically binds to IL-2.

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of basiliximab (Simulect™) (Wang etal., Clin. Exp. Immunol. 155(3): 496-503, 2009; and Kircher et al.,Clin. Exp. Immunol. 134(3): 426-430, 2003); daclizumab (Zenapax;Zinbryta®) (Berkowitz et al., Clin. Immunol. 155(2): 176-187, 2014; andBielekova et al., Arch Neurol. 66(4): 483-489, 2009); or IMTOX-25.

In some embodiments, the CD25 inhibitor is an antibody-drug-conjugate(e.g., ADCT-301 (Flynn et al., Blood 124: 4491, 2014)).

Additional examples of CD25 inhibitors that are antibodies are known inthe art (see, e.g., WO 2004/045512). Additional examples of CD25inhibitors that are antibodies or antigen-binding fragments aredescribed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos.2017/0240640, 2017/0233481, 2015/0259424, 2015/0010539, 2015/0010538,2012/0244069, 2009/0081219, 2009/0041775, 2008/0286281, 2008/0171017,2004/0170626, 2001/0041179, and 2010/0055098, each of which isincorporated herein by reference (e.g., sections that describe CD25inhibitors).

Fusion Proteins

In some embodiments, the CD25 inhibitor is a fusion protein. See, e.g.,Zhang et al., PNAS 100(4): 1891-1895, 2003.

20. CD28 Inhibitors

The term “CD28 inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CD28 to bind to one or both of CD80 and CD86. CD28 is areceptor that binds to its ligands, CD80 (also called B7.1) and CD86(called B7.2).

In some embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCD28 and CD80 by blocking the ability of CD28 to interact with CD80. Insome embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCD28 and CD86 by blocking the ability of CD28 to interact with CD86. Insome embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor can decrease the binding of CD28 toeach of CD80 and CD86.

In some embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof, a fusion protein, or peptide.Exemplary CD28 inhibitors are described herein. Additional examples ofCD28 inhibitors are known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv).

In some embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor is a monovalent Fab′ antibody(e.g., CFR104) (Poirier et al., Am. J. Transplant 15(1): 88-100, 2015).

Additional examples of CD28 inhibitors that are antibodies orantigen-binding fragments are described in, e.g., U.S. PatentApplication Publication Nos. 2017/0240636, 2017/0114136, 2016/0017039,2015/0376278, 2015/0299321, 2015/0232558, 2015/0150968, 2015/0071916,2013/0266577, 2013/0230540, 2013/0109846, 2013/0078257, 2013/0078236,2013/0058933, 2012/0201814, 2011/0097339, 2011/0059071, 2011/0009602,2010/0266605, 2010/0028354, 2009/0246204, 2009/0117135, 2009/0117108,2008/0095774, 2008/0038273, 2007/0154468, 2007/0134240, 2007/0122410,2006/0188493, 2006/0165690, 2006/0039909, 2006/0009382, 2006/0008457,2004/0116675, 2004/0092718, 2003/0170232, 2003/0086932, 2002/0006403,2013/0197202, 2007/0065436, 2003/0180290, 2017/0015747, 2012/0100139,and 2007/0148162, each of which is incorporated by reference in itsentirety (e.g., sections that described CD28 inhibitors).

Fusion Proteins and Peptides

In some embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor is a fusion protein (see, e.g.,U.S. Pat. No. 5,521,288; and US 2002/0018783). In some embodiments, theCD28 inhibitor is abatacept (Orencia®) (Herrero-Beaumont et al.,Rheumatol. Clin. 8: 78-83, 2012; and Korhonen and Moilanen Basic Clin.Pharmacol. Toxicol. 104(4): 276-284, 2009).

In some embodiments, the CD28 inhibitor is a peptide mimetic (e.g.,AB103) (see, e.g., Bulger et al., JAMA Surg. 149(6): 528-536, 2014), ora synthetical peptoid (see, e.g., Li et al., Cell Mol. Immunol. 7(2):133-142, 2010).

21. CD49 Inhibitors

The term “CD49 inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CD49 to bind to one of its ligands (e.g., MMP1). In someembodiments, the CD49 inhibitor is an antibody or an antigen-bindingfragment thereof. Exemplary CD49 inhibitors are described herein.Additional examples of CD49 inhibitors are known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD49 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv).

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of natalizumab (Tysabri®; Antegren®)(see, e.g., Pagnini et al., Expert Opin. Biol. Ther. 17(11): 1433-1438,2017; and Chataway and Miller Neurotherapeutics 10(1): 19-28, 2013; orvatelizumab (ELND-004)).

22. CD89 Inhibitors

The term “CD89 inhibitors” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CD89 to bind to IgA. CD89 is a transmembrane glycoproteinthat binds to the heavy-chain constant region of IgA. In someembodiments, the CD89 inhibitor can decrease the binding between CD89and IgA by blocking the ability of CD89 to interact with IgA. In someembodiments, the CD89 inhibitor is an antibody or an antigen-bindingfragment thereof. Exemplary CD89 inhibitors are described herein.Additional examples of CD89 inhibitors are known in the art.

Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CD89 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv).

In certain embodiments, the antibody comprises or consists of anantigen-binding fragment or portion of HF-1020. Additional examples ofCD89 antibodies are known in the art (see, e.g., WO 2002/064634).

23. Chemokine/Chemokine Receptor Inhibitors

The term “chemokine/chemokine receptor inhibitors” refers to an agentwhich decreases the ability of a chemokine to bind to its receptor,where the chemokine is one of CXCL10 (IL-10), CCL11, or an ELRchemokine, or the chemokine receptor is CCR2 or CCR9.

CXCL10 (IP-10) Inhibitors

As used herein “CXCL10”, “interferon gamma-induced protein 10” and“IP-10” can be used interchangeably. CXCL10 binds to the CXCR3 receptor(e.g., CXCR3-A or CXCR3-B).

The term “CXCL10 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CXCL10 to bind to a CXCR3 receptor (e.g., CXCR3-A and/orCXCR3-B).

In some embodiments, the CXCL10 inhibitor can decrease the bindingbetween CXCL10 and CXCR3-A by blocking the ability of CXCL10 to interactwith CXCR3-A. In some embodiments, the CXCL10 inhibitor can decrease thebinding between CXCL10 and CXCR3-B by blocking the ability of CXCL10 tointeract with CXCR3-B.

In some instances, the CXCL10 inhibitor that decreases the bindingbetween CXCL10 and a CXCR3 (e.g., CXCR3-A and/or CXCR3-B) is a smallmolecule. In some instances, the CXCL10 inhibitor that decreases thebinding between CXCL10 and a CXCR3 (e.g., CXCR3-A and/or CXCR3-B) is anantibody or an antigen-binding antibody fragment. In some instances, theCXCL10 inhibitor that decreases the binding between CXCL10 and a CXCR3(e.g., CXCR3-A and/or CXCR3-B) is a peptide (e.g., a peptide antagonistof a CXCR3 receptor, e.g., one or both of CXCR-A and/or CXCR-B).

CXCL10 Inhibitors—Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CXCL10 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to CXCL10 or a CXCR3 receptor (e.g., CXCR3-A and/orCXCR3-B), or both a CXCL10 and a CXCR3 receptor (e.g., CXCR3-A and/orCXCR3-B). In some embodiments, a CXCL10 inhibitor can bind to bothCXCR3-A and CXCR3-B.

In other instances, the CXCL10 inhibitor is a monoclonal antibody (mAb)(see, e.g., WO 05/58815). For example, the CXCL10 inhibitor can beEldelumab® (MDX-1100 or BMS-936557), BMS-986184 (Bristol-Meyers Squibb),or NI-0801 (NovImmune). See, e.g., Kuhne et al., J. Immunol.178(1):5241, 2007; Sandborn et al., J. Crohns Colitis 11(7):811-819,2017; and Danese et al., Gastroenterology 147(5):981-989, 2014.Additional examples of CXCL10 inhibitors that are antibodies aredescribed in U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2017/0158757,2017/0081413, 2016/0009808, 2015/0266951, 2015/0104866, 2014/0127229,2014/0065164, 2013/0216549, 2010/0330094, 2010/0322941, 2010/0077497,2010/0021463, 2009/0285835, 2009/0169561, 2008/0063646, 2005/0191293,2005/0112119, 2003/0158392, 2003/0031645, and 2002/0018776; and WO98/11218, each of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety(e.g., the description of CXCL10 inhibitors).

CCL11 Inhibitors

The term “CCL11 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases theability of CCL11 to bind to one or more of CCR2, CCR3, and CCR5.

In some embodiments, the CCL11 inhibitor can decrease the bindingbetween CCL11 and CCR2 by blocking the ability of CCL11 to interact withCCR2. In some embodiments, the CCL11 inhibitor can decrease the bindingbetween CCL11 and CCR3 by blocking the ability of CCL11 to interact withCCR3. In some embodiments, the CCL11 inhibitor can decrease the bindingbetween CCL11 and CCR5 by blocking the ability of CCL11 to interact withCCR5.

In some embodiments, a CCL11 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof.

CCL11 Inhibitors—Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CCL11 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to CCL11, CCR2, CCR3, or CCR5, or can specificallybind to two or more of CCL11, CCR2, CCR3, and CCR5. In some embodiments,a CCL11 inhibitor can bind to two or more of CCR2, CCR3, and CCR5.

In some examples the chemokine/chemokine receptor inhibitor isbertilimumab (Immune Pharmaceuticals), an anti-eotaxin-1 monoclonalantibody that targets CCL11, and is currently in a Phase II clinicalstudy for ulcerative colitis. Additional examples of CCL11 inhibitorsare described in U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2016/0289329,2015/0086546, 2014/0342450, 2014/0178367, 2013/0344070, 2013/0071381,2011/0274696, 2011/0038871, 2010/0074886, 2009/0297502, 2009/0191192,2009/0169541, 2009/0142339, 2008/0268536, 2008/0241923, 2008/0241136,2005/0260139, 2005/0048052, 2004/0265303, 2004/0132980, 2004/0126851,2003/0165494, 2002/0150576, 2002/0150570, 2002/0051782, 2002/0051781,2002/0037285, 2002/0028436, 2002/0015700, 2002/0012664, 2017/0131282,2016/0368979, 2016/0208011, 2011/0268723, 2009/0123375, 2007/0190055,2017/0049884, 2011/0165182, 2009/0226434, 2009/0110686, 2009/0047735,2009/0028881, 2008/0107647, 2008/0107595, 2008/0015348, 2007/0274986,2007/0231327, 2007/0036796, 2007/0031408, 2006/0229336, 2003/0228306,2003/0166870, 2003/0003440, 2002/0019345, and 2001/0000241, each ofwhich is incorporated by reference in its entirety (e.g., thedescription of CCL11 inhibitors).

CXCL10 Inhibitors—Small Molecules and Peptides

In some instances, the CXCL10 inhibitor is a small molecule. Forexample, the CXCL10 inhibitor can be ganodermycin (see, e.g., Jung etal., J. Antiobiotics 64:683-686, 2011). Additional exemplary smallmolecule CXCL10 inhibitors are described in: U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication No. 2005/0075333; U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2004/0242498; U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0069234; U.S.Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0055054; U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication No. 2002/0169159; WO 97/24325; WO 98/38167; WO 97/44329; WO98/04554; WO 98/27815; WO 98/25604; WO 98/25605; WO 98/25617; WO98/31364; Hesselgesser et al., J. Biol. Chem. 273(25):15687-15692(1998); and Howard et al., J. Med. Chem. 41(13):2184-2193 (1998).

In some examples, the CXCL10 inhibitor is a peptide antagonist of aCXCR3 receptor (e.g., as described in U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication No. 2007/0116669, 2006/0204498, and WO 98/09642). In someexamples, the CXCL10 inhibitor is a chemokine mutant or analogue, e.g.,those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,103, WO 96/38559, and WO98/06751. Additional examples of CXCL10 inhibitors that are smallmolecules or peptides are known in the art.

CCR2 Inhibitors

As used herein “CCR2,” “CC chemokine receptor 2,” or “MCP-1” can be usedinterchangeably. CCL2, CCL8, and CCL16 each individually bind to CCR2.

The term “CCR2 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases the abilityof CCR2 to bind to one or more (e.g., two, or three) of CCL2, CCL8, andCCL16.

In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCCL2 and CCR2 by blocking the ability of CCL2 to interact with CCR2. Insome embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCCL8 and CCR2 by blocking the ability of CCL8 to interact with CCR2. Insome embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCCL16 and CCR2 by blocking the ability of CCL16 to interact with CCR2.

In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor decreases the ability of CCR2 tobind to each of CCL2 and CCL8. In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitordecreases the ability of CCR2 to bind to each of CCL2 and CCL16. In someembodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor decreases the ability of CCR2 to bind toeach of CCL8 and CCL16. In some embodiments, the CCR5 inhibitordecreases the ability of CCR2 to bind to each of CCL2, CCL8, and CCL16.

In some instances, the CCR2 inhibitor is a small molecule. In someinstances, the CCR2 inhibitor is an antibody or an antigen-bindingantibody fragment. In some instances, the CCR2 inhibitor is a peptide.

CCR2 Inhibitors—Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to CCR2. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment described herein binds specifically to CCL2. Insome embodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment describedherein binds specifically to CCL8. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment described herein binds specifically to CCL16.In some embodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment describedherein binds specifically to CCR2 and one or more of (e.g., one, two, orthree) of CCL2, CCL8, and CCL16.

In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor is a monoclonal antibody. Forexample, the CCR2 inhibitor can be MLN1202 (Millennium Pharmaceuticals),C775, STI-B0201, STI-B0211, STI-B0221, STI-B0232, carlumab (CNTO 888;Centocor, Inc.), or STI-B0234, or an antigen-binding fragment thereof.See also, e.g., Vergunst et al., Arthritis Rheum. 58(7):1931-1939, 2008.Additional examples of CCR2 inhibitors that are antibodies orantigen-binding antibody fragments are described in, e.g., U.S. PatentApplication Publication Nos. 2015/0086546, 2016/0272702, 2016/0289329,2016/0083482, 2015/0361167; 2014/0342450, 2014/0178367, 2013/0344070,2013/0071381, 2011/0274696, 2011/0059107, 2011/0038871, 2009/0068109,2009/0297502, 2009/0142339, 2008/0268536, 2008/0241923, 2008/0241136,2007/0128112, 2007/0116708, 2007/0111259, 2006/0246069, 2006/0039913,2005/0232923, 2005/0260139, 2005/0058639, 2004/0265303, 2004/0132980,2004/0126851, 2004/0219644, 2004/0047860, 2003/0165494, 2003/0211105,2002/0150576, 2002/0051782, 2002/0042370, and 2002/0015700; and U.S.Pat. Nos. 6,312,689, 6,084,075, 6,406,694, 6,406,865, 6,696,550,6,727,349, 7,442,775, 7,858,318, 5,859,205, 5,693,762, and 6,075,181,each of which is incorporated by reference (e.g., the description of theCCR2 inhibitors). Additional examples of CCR2 inhibitors are describedin, e.g., WO 00/05265. Additional examples of CCR2 inhibitors that areantibodies or antigen-binding antibodies fragments are described in,e.g., Loberg et al., Cancer Res. 67(19):9417, 2007.

CCR2 Inhibitors—Small Molecules and Peptides

In some examples, the CCR2 inhibitor is a small molecule. For example,the CCR2 inhibitor can be elubrixin, PF-04634817, BMS-741672, or CCX872.See, e.g., US. Pat. No. 9,434,766; U.S. Patent Application PublicationNo. 20070021466; Deerberg et al., Org. Process Rev. Dev.20(11):1949-1966, 2016; and Morganti et al., J. Neurosci. 35(2):748-760,2015.

Additional non-limiting examples of CCR2 inhibitors that are smallmolecules include, e.g., the phenylamino substituted quaternary saltcompounds described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2009/0112004; the biaryl derivatives described in U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 2009/0048238; the pyrazol derivativesdescribed in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2009/0029963; theheterocyclic compounds described in U.S. Patent Application PublicationNo. 2009/0023713; the imidazole derivatives described in U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 2009/0012063; the aminopyrrolidinesdescribed in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0176883; theheterocyclic cyclopentyl tetrahydroisoquinolones andtetrahydropyridopyridines described in U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication No. 2008/0081803; the heteroaryl sulfonamides described inU.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0056509; the triazolylpyridyl benzenesulfonamides described in U.S. Patent ApplicationPublication No. 2010/0152186; the bicyclic and bridged nitrogenheterocycles described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2006/0074121; the fused heteroaryl pyridyl and phenylbenzenesulfonamides described in WO 09/009740; and the3-aminopyrrolidene derivatives described in WO 04/050024.

Additional non-limiting examples of CCR2 inhibitors include:N-((1R,3S)-3-isopropyl-3-{[3-(trifluoromethyl)-7,8-dihydro-1,6-naph-thyri-din-6(5H)-yl]carbonyl}cyclopentyl)-N-[(3S,4S)-3-methoxytetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl]amine;3[(3S,4R)-1-((1R,3S)-3-isopropyl-2-oxo-3-{[6-(trifluoromethyl)-2H-1,3-ben-z-oxazin-3(4H)-yl]methyl}cyclopentyl)-3-methylpiperidin-4-yl]benzoicacid;(3S,48)-N-((1R,3S)-3-isopropyl-3-{[7-(trifluoromethyl)-3,4-dihydroisoquin-olin-2(1B)-yl]carbonyl}cyclopentyl)-3-methyltetrahydro-2H-p-yran-4-aminium; 3-[(3S,4R or3R,4S)-1-((1R,3S)-3-Isopropyl-3-{[6-(trifluoromethyl)-2H-1,3-benzoxazin-3-(4H)-yl]carbonyl}cyclopentyl)-3-methylpiperidin-4-yl]benzoic acid; INCB3284; Eotaxin-3;PF-04178903 (Pfizer), and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

Additional non-limiting examples of CCR2 inhibitors include: bindarit(2-((1-benzyl-1H-indazol-3-yl)methoxy)-2-methylpropionic acid); AZD2423(AstraZeneca); the indole describes described in U.S. Pat. Nos.7,297,696, 6,962,926, 6,737,435, and 6,569,888; the bicyclic pyrrolederivatives described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,441,004 and 6,479,527; theCCR2 inhibitors described in U.S. Patent Application Publications Nos.2005/0054668, 2005/0026975, 2004/0198719, and 2004/0047860, and Howardet al., Expert Opin. Ther. Patents 11(7):1147-1151 (2001).

Additional non-limiting examples of CCR2 inhibitors that are smallmolecules are described in, e.g., WO 97/24325; WO 98/38167; WO 97/44329;WO 98/04554; WO 98/27815; WO 98/25604; WO 98/25605; WO 98/25617; WO98/31364; Hesselgesser et al., J. Biol. Chem. 273(25):15687-15692, 1998;and Howard et al., J. Med. Chem. 41(13):2184-2193, 1998.

In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor is a small nucleic acid, e.g.,NOX-E36 (a 40-nucleotide L-RNA oligonucleotide that is linked to a40-kDa PEG; NOXXON Pharma AG).

In some embodiments, the CCR2 inhibitor is a peptide, e.g., a dominantnegative peptide described in, e.g., Kiyota et al., Mol. Ther.17(5):803-809, 2009, and U.S. Patent Application Publication No.20070004906, or an antagonistic peptide, e.g., the antagonistic peptidesdescribed in WO 05/037305 and Jiang-Hong Gong, et al., J. Exp. Med.186:131, 1997. Additional examples of CCR2 inhibitors that are peptidesare described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,103; WO 96/38559; WO98/06751; and WO 98/09642. In some embodiments, a CCR2 inhibitor is aCCR2 mutein (e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2004/0185450).

Additional examples of CCR2 inhibitors that are small molecules andpeptides are known in the art.

CCR9 Inhibitors

As used herein “CCR9” or “CC chemokine receptor 9” can be usedinterchangeably. CCR9 specifically binds to CCL25.

The term “CCR9 inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreases the abilityof CCR9 to bind to CCL25.

In some embodiments, the CCR9 inhibitor can decrease the binding betweenCCL25 and CCR9 by blocking the ability of CCL25 to interact with CCR9.In some instances, the CCR9 inhibitor is a small molecule. In someinstances, the CCR9 inhibitor is an antibody or an antigen-bindingantibody fragment.

CCR9 Inhibitors—Antibodies

In some embodiments, the CCR9 inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to CCR9. In some embodiments, an antibody orantigen-binding fragment described herein binds specifically to CCL25.In some embodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment describedherein binds specifically to both CCR9 and CCL25.

In other instances, the CCR9 inhibitor is a monoclonal antibody. Forexample, the CCR9 antibody can be 91R, see, e.g., Chamorro et al., MAbs6(4): 1000-1012, 2014. Additional non-limiting examples of CCR9inhibitors are described in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application PublicationNos. 2012/0100554, 2012/0100154, 2011/0123603, 2009/0028866, and2005/0181501.

CCR9 Inhibitors—Small Molecules

In some instances, the CCR9 inhibitor is a small molecule. For example,the CCR9 inhibitor can be Traficet-EN® (also called Vercirnon, CCX282,and GSK1605786) or Tu1652 CCX507. See, e.g., Eksteen et al., IDrugs13(7):472-481, 2010; and Walters et al., Gastroenterology 144(5): S-815,2013.

Additional examples of CCR9 inhibitors that are small molecules areknown in the art.

ELR Chemokine Inhibitors

ELR chemokines are CXC chemokines that have a glutamicacid-leucine-arginine (ELR) motif. See, e.g., Strieter et al., J. Biol.Chem. 270:27348-27357, 1995.

The term “ELR chemokine inhibitor” refers to an agent which decreasesthe ability of CXCR1 and/or CXCR2 to bind to one or more (e.g., two,three, four, five, six, seven, or eight) of CXCL1, CXCL2, CXCL3, CXCL4,CXCL5, CXCL6, CXCL7, and CXCL8.

In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor can decrease thebinding between CXCR1 and CXCL8 by blocking the ability of CXCR1 tointeract with CXCL8. In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitorcan decrease the binding between CXCR1 and CXCL6 by blocking the abilityof CXCR1 to interact with CXCL6. In some embodiments, the ELR chemokineinhibitor can decrease the binding between CXCR1 and each of CXCL8 andCXCL6.

In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor can decrease thebinding between CXCR2 and CXCL1 by blocking the ability of CXCR2 tointeract with CXCL1. In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitorcan decrease the binding between CXCR2 and CXCL2 by blocking the abilityof CXCR2 to interact with CXCL2. In some embodiments, the ELR chemokineinhibitor can decrease the binding between CXCR2 and CXCL3 by blockingthe ability of CXCR2 to interact with CXCL3. In some embodiments, theELR chemokine inhibitor can decrease the binding between CXCR2 and CXCL4by blocking the ability of CXCR2 to interact with CXCL4. In someembodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor can decrease the bindingbetween CXCR2 and CXCL5 by blocking the ability of CXCR2 to interactwith CXCL5. In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor candecrease the binding between CXCR2 and CXCL6 by blocking the ability ofCXCR2 to interact with CXCL6. In some embodiments, the ELR chemokineinhibitor can decrease the binding between CXCR2 and CXCL7 by blockingthe ability of CXCR2 to interact with CXCL7. In some embodiments, theELR chemokine inhibitor can decrease the binding between CXCR2 and oneor more (e.g., two, three, four, five, six, or seven) of CXCL1, CXCL2,CXCL3, CXCL4, CXCL5, CXCL6, and CXCL7.

In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor can decrease thebinding of CXCR1 to one or both of CXCL6 and CXCL8, and can decrease thebinding to CXCR2 to one or more (e.g., two, three, four, five, six, orseven) of CXCL1, CXCL2, CXCL3, CXCL4, CXCL5, CXCL6, and CXCL7.

In some instances, the ELR chemokine inhibitor is a small molecule. Insome instances, the ELR chemokine inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding antibody fragment.

ELR Chemokine Inhibitors—Antibodies

In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor is an antibody or anantigen-binding fragment thereof (e.g., a Fab or a scFv). In someembodiments, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment described hereinbinds specifically to CXCR1 and/or CXCR2. In some embodiments, anantibody or antigen-binding fragment described herein binds specificallyto one or more (e.g., two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight) of:CXCL1, CXCL2, CXCL3, CXCL4, CXCL5, CXCL6, CXCL7, and CXCL8 (IL-8).

An ELR chemokine inhibitor can be, e.g., a monoclonal antibody. Anon-limiting example of an ELR inhibitor is TAB-099MZ. Additionalexamples of ELR chemokine inhibitors that are antibodies orantigen-binding antibody fragments are described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.9,290,570; and U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2004/0170628,2010/0136031, 2015/0160227, 2015/0224190, 2016/0060347, 2016/0152699,2016/0108117, 2017/0131282, 2016/0060347, 2014/0271647, 2014/0170156,2012/0164143, 2010/0254941, 2009/0130110, 2008/0118517, 2004/0208873,2003/0021790, 2002/0082396, and 2001/0006637, each of which is hereinincorporated by reference (e.g., the portions describing ELR chemokineinhibitors).

ELR Chemokine Inhibitors—Small Molecules

In some instances, the ELR chemokine inhibitor is, e.g., a smallmolecule. For example, the ELR chemokine inhibitor can be, e.g.,LY-3041658 or repertaxin (Reparixin; DF 1681Y). Additional non-limitingexamples of ELR chemokine inhibitors that are small molecules aredescribed in, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos.2007/0248594, 2006/0014794, 2004/0063709, 2004/0034229, 2003/0204085,2003/0097004, 2004/0186142, 2004/0235908, 2006/0025453, 2017/0224679,2017/0190681, 2017/0144996, and 2017/0128474, each of which areincorporated by reference (e.g., the portions describing the ELRchemokine inhibitors).

In some embodiments, the ELR chemokine inhibitor is a peptide, e.g., anyof the peptides described in U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos.2009/0270318, 2009/0118469, and 2007/0160574, 2007/0021593,2003/0077705, and 2007/0181987, each of which is incorporated byreference (e.g., the portions describing the ELR chemokine inhibitors).

Combination Detection

Any combination of the analytes, e.g., bacteria, biomarkers, and/ordrugs disclosed herein can be detected using any of the methodsdescribed herein. For example, the methods and devices disclosed hereincan be used to detect combinations of analytes such as a biomarkerindicative of a GI disorder and a drug used to treat the GI disorder.The methods and devices can be used to detect a drug disclosed above andanother drug, e.g., another drug used in combination with the firstdrug. Examples of such drugs include 2-amino-6-aryl-5-substitutedpyrimidines (see U.S. Pat. No. 4,665,077); non-steroidalantiinflammatory drugs (NSAIDs); ganciclovir; tacrolimus; lucocorticoidssuch as Cortisol or aldosterone; anti-inflammatory agents such as acyclooxygenase inhibitor; a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor; or a leukotrienereceptor antagonist; purine antagonists such as azathioprine ormycophenolate mofetil (MMF); alkylating agents such as cyclophosphamide;bromocryptine; danazol; dapsone; glutaraldehyde (which masks the MHCantigens, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,120,649); anti-idiotypicantibodies for MHC antigens and MHC fragments; cyclosporine;6-mercaptopurine; steroids such as corticosteroids orglucocorticosteroids or glucocorticoid analogs, e.g., prednisone,methylprednisolone, including SOLU-MEDROL®, methylprednisolone sodiumsuccinate, and dexamethasone; dihydrofolate reductase inhibitors such asmethotrexate (oral or subcutaneous); anti-malarial agents such aschloroquine and hydroxychloroquine; sulfasalazine; leflunomide; cytokineor cytokine receptor antibodies or antagonists includinganti-interferon-alpha, -beta, or -gamma antibodies, anti-tumor necrosisfactor(TNF)-alpha antibodies (infliximab (REMICADE®) or adalimumab),anti-TNF-alpha immunoadhesin (etanercept), anti-TNF-beta antibodies,anti-interleukin-2 (IL-2) antibodies and anti-IL-2 receptor antibodies,and anti-interleukin-6 (IL-6) receptor antibodies and antagonists;anti-LFA-1 antibodies, including anti-CD 1 la and anti-CD 18 antibodies;anti-L3T4 antibodies; heterologous anti-lymphocyte globulin; pan-Tantibodies, anti-CD3 or anti-CD4/CD4a antibodies; soluble peptidecontaining a LFA-3 binding domain (WO 90/08187 published Jul. 26, 1990);streptokinase; transforming growth factor-beta (TGF-beta);streptodomase; RNA or DNA from the host; FK506; RS-61443; chlorambucil;deoxyspergualin; rapamycin; T-cell receptor (Cohen et al, U.S. Pat. No.5,114,721); T-cell receptor fragments (Offner et al, Science, 251:430-432 (1991); WO 90/11294; Ianeway, Nature, 341: 482 (1989); and WO91/01133); BAFF antagonists such as BAFF or BR3 antibodies orimmunoadhesins and zTNF4 antagonists (for review, see Mackay and Mackay,Trends Immunol, 23: 113-5 (2002) and see also definition below);biologic agents that interfere with T cell helper signals, such asanti-CD40 receptor or anti-CD40 ligand (CD 154), including blockingantibodies to CD40-CD40 ligand. (e.g., Durie et al, Science, 261:1328-30 (1993); Mohan et al, J. Immunol, 154: 1470-80 (1995)) andCTLA4-Ig (Finck et al, Science, 265: 1225-7 (1994)); and T-cell receptorantibodies (EP 340,109) such as T10B9. Non-limiting examples of drugsthat may be detected using any of the methods described herein alsoinclude: budenoside; epidermal growth factor; aminosalicylates;metronidazole; mesalamine; olsalazine; balsalazide; antioxidants;thromboxane inhibitors; IL-1 receptor antagonists; anti-IL-1 monoclonalantibodies; growth factors; elastase inhibitors; pyridinyl-imidazolecompounds; TNF antagonists; IL-4, IL-10, IL-13 and/or TGFβ cytokines oragonists thereof (e.g., agonist antibodies); IL-11; glucuronide- ordextran-conjugated prodrugs of prednisolone, dexamethasone orbudesonide; ICAM-I antisense phosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotides(ISIS 2302; Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc.); soluble complement receptor 1(TP1O; T Cell Sciences, Inc.); slow-release mesalazine; antagonists ofplatelet activating factor (PAF); ciprofloxacin; and lignocaine.Examples of drugs that can be detected using the presently claimedmethods include sulfasalazine, related salicylate-containing drugs, andcorticosteroids. In some embodiments, the methods described herein canbe used to detect iron, antidiarrheal agents, azathioprine,6-mercaptopurine, and/or methotrexate.

In other embodiments, the methods described herein can provide fordetection of a TNF inhibitor as described herein and one or more of: aCHST15 inhibitor, a IL-6 receptor inhibitor, an IL-12/IL-23 inhibitor,an integrin inhibitor, a JAK inhibitor, a SMAD7 inhibitor, a IL-13inhibitor, an IL-1 receptor inhibitor, a TLR agonist, animmunosuppressant, a live biotherapeutic (e.g., bacteria of the speciesRoseburia hominis, Eubacterium rectale, Dialister invisus, Ruminococcusalbus, Ruminococcus callidus, and Ruminococcus bromii), or a stem cell.

Analyte-Binding Agents

Certain detection methods described below can utilize at least oneanalyte-binding agent in order to detect an analyte in a sample. An“analyte-binding agent” is a molecule that binds to a specific analyte.Some analyte-binding agents may comprise analytes (e.g., the analytesdescribed above) in accordance with the ability of the analyte to bindto another molecule to be detected using the methods described below.For example, in some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent comprises anantibody when used as a reagent to detect and/or quantify an antigenthat the antibody specifically binds to. However, in some embodiments,the antibody is an analyte (e.g., an antibody which is a drug, such as aTNFα antibody) and the analyte-binding agent comprises an antigen towhich the antibody specifically binds, thereby allowing for its use as areagent to detect and/or quantify the antibody. In some embodiments, theanalyte-binding agent binds to analyte that is specific to a particulargenus, species, or strain of a microorganism (e.g., a pathogenicbacteria). In some embodiments, an analyte-binding agent has an area onthe surface or in a cavity which specifically binds to and is therebydefined as complementary with a particular spatial and polarorganization of the analyte. In some embodiments, the analyte-bindingagent and the corresponding analyte form a binding pair, such as, butnot limited to, an immunological pair (such as antigen-antibody), abiotin-avidin pair, a hormone-hormone receptor pair, a nucleic acidduplex, IgG-protein A pair, a polynucleotide pair such as DNA-DNA,DNA-RNA, and the like. In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agentcomprises an antibody (e.g., a monoclonal antibody), an affimer, anaptamer, an antigen, a receptor, a small molecule, and a nucleic acid(e.g., a DNA molecule or an RNA molecule). In some embodiments, eithermember of the binding pair (e.g., the analyte-binding agent and/or theanalyte) can be detectably labeled as described herein.

In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent comprises a portion of anucleic acid that is complementary to the nucleic acid sequence of thetarget analyte. As used herein, “complementary” refers to the capacityfor pairing through hydrogen binding between two nucleic acid sequences.For example, if a nucleic acid base at one position of the targetanalyte is capable of hydrogen bonding with a nucleic acid base at acorresponding position of an analyte-binding agent, then the bases areconsidered to be complementary to each other at that position. In someembodiments, 100% complementarity is not required. In some embodiments,100% complementarity is required. Routine methods can be used to designan analyte-binding agent that binds to a nucleic acid sequence of atarget analyte. In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent comprisesa nucleic acid sequence that is complementary to at least 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27,28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65or more contiguous nucleotides or nucleosides present in the nucleicacid sequence of the target analyte (e.g., a DNA molecule or an RNAmolecule). In general, the analyte-binding agents useful in the devicesand methods described herein have at least 80% sequence complementarityto a nucleic acid sequence of a target analyte, e.g., at least 85%, atleast 90%, at last 92%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, atleast 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, or are 100% complementary to anucleic acid sequence of a target analyte).

In some embodiments, the analyte-binding agent comprises a detectablemoiety such as a photosensitizer, a fluorescent compound, and/orchemiluminescent compound descibed herein. In some embodiments, theanalyte-binding agent is capable of being detected by a detection systemof a device described herein, e.g., an optical detection system.

Ingestible Devices

Ingestible devices and their use are described, for example, in thefollowing U.S. patent applications, each of which is hereby incorporatedby reference: U.S. Ser. No. 14/460,893, entitled “Ingestible MedicalDevice,” and filed Aug. 15, 2014; U.S. Ser. No. 15/514,413, entitled“Electromechanical Pill Device with Localization Capabilities,” andfiled Mar. 24, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 15/680,400, entitled “Systems andMethods for Obtaining Samples using Ingestible Devices,” filed on Aug.18, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 15/680,430, entitled “Sampling Systems andRelated Materials and Methods,” filed on Aug. 18, 2017; U.S. Ser. No.15/699,848, entitled “Electromechanical Ingestible Delivery of aDispensable Substance,” filed on Sep. 8, 2017; U.S. Ser. No. 62/480,187,entitled “Localization Systems and Methods for an OptoelectromechanicalPill Device,” filed on Mar. 31, 2017; and U.S. Ser. No. 62/540,873,entitled “Localization Systems and Methods for an Ingestible Device,”filed on Aug. 3, 2017.

In general, an ingestible device is configured to be able to enter theGI tract (e.g., via the mouth) and collect one or more samples whilepassing through one or more regions of the GI tract. Optionally, thedevice can include one or more additional functionalities, including theability to analyze the sample while in the GI tract of the subject (invivo), the ability to deliver a substance (e.g., a therapeutic agent)while in the GI tract of the subject (in vivo) and/or the ability tolocate the device outside the GI tract of the subject (ex vivo).

The ingestible device described herein may generally be in the shape ofa capsule, like a conventional pill. In some embodiments, the device isan ingestible device. In some embodiment, the device is for insertionand removal from the reproductive tract. Accordingly, the shape of thedevice provides for easier ingestion, or insertion and removal, and isalso familiar to healthcare practitioners and patients.

Unlike a conventional pill, the device is designed to withstand thechemical and mechanical environment of the GI tract (e.g., effects ofmuscle contractile forces and concentrated hydrochloric acid in thestomach) or reproductive tract. However, unlike other devices that areintended to stay inside a patient's body (e.g., medical implants), theingestible device is designed (in general) to only temporarily travelwithin the body, or to be selectively inserted and removed from the bodyin the case of the female reproductive tract. Accordingly, theregulatory rules governing the materials and manufacture of theingestible device may be less strict than for the devices that areintended to stay inside the body. Nevertheless, since the ingestibledevice still enters the body, the material(s) used to manufacture theingestible device are generally selected to at least comply with thestandards for biocompatibility (e.g., ISO 10993). Furthermore,components inside the ingestible device are free of any restrictedand/or toxic metals and are lead-free pursuant to the Directive2002/95/EC, which is also known as the Restriction of HazardousSubstances (RoHS).

There is a broad range of materials that may be used for manufacturingthe ingestible device. Different materials may be used for each of thedifferent components of the ingestible device. Examples of thesematerials include, but are not limited to, thermoplastics,fluoropolymers, elastomers, stainless steel and glass complying with ISO10993 and USP Class VI specifications for biocompatibility. In certainembodiments, these materials may further include liquid silicone rubbermaterial with a hardness level of 10 to 90 as determined using adurometer (e.g., MED-4942™ manufactured by NuSil™), a soft biocompatiblepolymer material such as, but not limited to, polyvinyl chloride (PVC),polyethersulfone (PES), polyethylene (PE), polyurethane (PU) orpolytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), and a rigid polymer material coated witha biocompatible material that is soft or pliable (e.g., a poly(methylmethacrylate) (PMMA) material coated with silicone polymer). Use ofdifferent materials for different components may enablefunctionalization of certain surfaces for interaction with proteins,antibodies, and other biomarkers. For example, Teflon® may be used as amaterial in the ingestible device for any movable components in order toreduce friction between these components. Other example materials mayinclude other materials commonly used in micro-fabrication, such aspolydimethylsiloxane (PDMS), borosilicate glass, and/or silicon.

Generally, an enclosure of the ingestible device may be manufacturedfrom a type of plastic, such as a photosensitive acrylic polymermaterial. The enclosure may be formed by coupling two enclosure endstogether. The enclosure, in effect, protects the interior of theingestible device from its external environment and also protects theexternal environment (e.g., the GI tract or reproductive tract) fromcomponents inside the device.

Furthermore, the device may include one or more additional layers ofprotection. The additional protection may protect the patient againstany adverse effects arising from any structural problems associated withthe enclosure (e.g., the two enclosure ends falling apart or a fracturedeveloping in the enclosure). For example, a power supply inside thedevice may be coated with an inert and pliable material (e.g., a thinlayer of silicone polymer) so that only electrical contacts on the powersupply are exposed. This additional protection to the power supply mayprevent chemicals inside the device from seeping into the patient'sbody.

Also, a surface of the device and surfaces of the different componentsin the device may receive different treatments that vary according totheir intended use. For example, the surface of the device may receiveplasma activation for increasing hydrophilic behavior. Dilutionchambers, storage components, ports, valves, pumps and/or conduits thatare intended to come into contact with a fluid such as biological fluidor dilution fluid during normal operation of the device may also receivehydrophilic treatment while certain other components may receivehydrophobic treatments.

FIG. 1 illustrates an example ingestible device 100 with multipleopenings in the housing. The ingestible device 100 has an outer housingwith a first end 102A, a second end 102B, and a wall 104 extendinglongitudinally from the first end 102A to the second end 102B.Ingestible device 100 has a first opening 106 in the housing, which isconnected to a second opening 108 in the housing. The first opening 106of the ingestible device 100 is oriented substantially perpendicular tothe second opening 108, and the connection between the first opening 106and the second opening 108 forms a curved chamber 110 within theingestible device 100.

The overall shape of the ingestible device 100, or any of the otheringestible devices discussed in this disclosure, may be similar to anelongated pill or capsule. This may make the ingestible device 100 easyto consume, and allow it to travel easily through the GI tract. Incertain portions of the GI tract, such as the stomach, the ingestibledevice 100 may be free to move or rotate in any direction. In otherportions of the GI tract, the movement of the ingestible device 100 maybe restricted. For example, in the relatively narrow confines of thesmall intestine, the walls of the small intestine may squeeze down onthe ingestible device, forcing the ingestible device 100 to orientitself longitudinally along the length of the small intestine. In thiscase, the walls of the small intestine wrap around the longitudinallyextending wall 104 of the ingestible device 100, and the ingestibledevice 100 travels through the small intestine with one of the ends 102Aor 102B in front.

For illustrative purposes, the ingestible device 100 of FIG. 1 shows thefirst opening 106 located in a portion of the wall 104 and orientedradially, and the second opening 108 located near the first end 102A andoriented longitudinally. However, in some embodiments, the exactlocation and orientation of the first opening 106 and the second opening108 may be different from that shown in FIG. 1. During transit throughthe GI Tract, natural contractions within the small intestine may applypressure radially to different portions of the wall 104 of theingestible device 100, which may force solids or fluids into the firstopening 106. As new material (e.g., fluid and solid particulates fromthe small intestine or other portions of the GI tract) enters the curvedchamber 110 through the first opening 106, older material alreadylocated in the curved chamber 110 may be naturally forced out of thecurved chamber 110 through the second opening 108.

In some embodiments, a portion of the curved chamber 110 may be used asa sampling chamber, which may hold samples obtained from the GI tract.In some embodiments the curved chamber 110 is subdivided intosub-chambers, each of which may be separated by a series of one or morevalves or interlocks. For example, sub-chambers may be used to retainmultiple samples within different portions of the curved chamber 110. Insome embodiments, the curved chamber 110 is connected to other chamberswithin the ingestible device 100, or other openings located on thehousing of the ingestible device 100. This may allow new samples to beacquired in the curved chamber 110 while older samples of interest arestill stored within the ingestible device 100. In some embodiments, theingestible device 100 is equipped with sensors to detect the propertiesa sample contained in the sampling chamber, or the results of an assaytechnique applied to the sample. In some embodiments, the ingestibledevice 100 is configured to obtain and retain a sample within thesampling chamber, which may be retrieved at a later time.

In some embodiments, the first opening 106, the second opening 108, orthe curved chamber 110 include one or more of a hydrophilic orhydrophobic material, a sponge, a valve, or an air permeable membrane.For example, a one-way valve may prevent material from entering thecurved chamber 110 through the second opening 108. As an alternateexample, placing an air permeable membrane within the curved chamber 110near the second opening 108 may allow unwanted gasses and air bubbles topass through the air permeable membrane and exit the curved chamber 110,while solid or liquid samples may be prevented from passing through theair permeable membrane, and are retained within the curved chamber 110.The air permeable membrane may also prevent solid or liquid samples fromentering the curved chamber 110 through the second opening 108.

The use of a hydrophilic material or sponge may allow samples to beretained within the curved chamber 110, and may reduce the amount ofpressure needed for fluid to enter through the first opening 106 anddislodge air or gas in the curved chamber 110. Examples of hydrophilicmaterials that may be incorporated into the ingestible device 100include hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, and the like. Similarly, materials that have undergonevarious types of treatments, such as plasma treatments, may havesuitable hydrophilic properties, and may be incorporated into theinvestible device 100. Sponges may be made of any suitable material orcombination of materials, such as fibers of cotton, rayon, glass,polyester, polyethylene, polyurethane, and the like. Sponges generallymay be made from commercially available materials, such as thoseproduced by Porex®.

In some embodiments, the sponges may be treated in order to change theirabsorbency or to help preserve samples. Examples of materials which maybe used to treat the sponges, alone or in combination, include sorbicacid, propyl parabene, citric acid, surfactants such as Tween®(polysorbate), DNA inhibitors and stabilizers, RNA inhibitors andstabilizers, protein inhibitors and stabilizers, and the like. In someembodiments, the sponges may be cut or abraded to change theirabsorbency or other physical properties.

Hydrophobic materials located near the second opening 108 may repelliquids, discouraging liquid samples from entering or exiting the curvedchamber 110 through the second opening 108. This may serve a similarfunction as an air permeable membrane. Examples of hydrophobic materialswhich may be incorporated into the ingestible device 100 includepolycarbonate, acrylics, fluorocarbons, styrenes, certain forms ofvinyl, and the like.

The various materials listed above are provided as examples, and are notlimiting. In practice, any type of suitable hydrophilic, hydrophobic, orsample preserving material may be used in the ingestible device 100, andthe teachings discussed in relation to ingestible device 100 may beincorporated into any of the other ingestible devices described in thisdisclosure. Various methods for taking samples, controlling the movementof samples, or removing unwanted gasses, are discussed in detail inrelation to FIGS. 2-9, and any of the various structures or techniquesdescribed in connection with FIGS. 2-9 may be incorporated into theingestible device 100.

FIG. 2 illustrates an example ingestible device 200 with multipleopenings in the housing and various modifications that may be made tothe ingestible device 100 (FIG. 1). Similar to the ingestible device100, the ingestible device 200 has an outer housing with a first end202A, a second end 202B, and a wall 204 extending longitudinally fromthe first end 202A to the second end 202B. Also similar to theingestible device 100, the ingestible device 200 has a first opening 206in the housing, which is connected to a second opening 208 in thehousing. The connection between the first opening 206 and the secondopening 208 forms a curved chamber 210 within the ingestible device 200.

In the ingestible device 200, a portion of the curved chamber 210 formsa sampling chamber 212. In some embodiments, the ingestible device 200may include a sensor (not shown) within or proximate to the samplingchamber. This sensor may be used to detect a property of the sample. Insome embodiments, an assay technique is applied to a sample within thesampling chamber, and the sensor may be used to detect the results ofthe assay technique. A first valve 214 is located between the firstopening 206 and the sampling chamber 212. Similarly, a second valve 216is located between the second opening 208 and the sampling chamber 212.In some embodiments, the valves 214 and 216 prevent a fluid fromentering or exiting the sampling chamber 212, or may be used to isolatea sample within the sampling chamber 212.

The ingestible device 200 includes a mechanical actuator 218 coupled tothe valves 214 and 216. In some embodiments, the mechanical actuator 218is used to move one or both of the valves 214 and 216 between an openand a closed position. In some embodiments, the mechanical actuator 218is controlled by a microcontroller, microprocessor, or other circuitryinside the ingestible device 200. In an open position, the first valve214 may allow a sample to pass in and out of the sampling chamber 212through the portion of the curved chamber 210 connected to the firstopening 206. Similarly, in an open position, the second valve 216 mayallow a sample to pass in and out of the sampling chamber 212 from theportion of the curved chamber 210 connected to the second opening 208.When the valves 214 and 216 are in the closed positions, they may notallow a sample to pass into or out of the sampling chamber 212.

In some embodiments, the valves 214 and 216 are rotary valves, pinvalves, flap valves, butterfly valves, ball valves, plug valves, or anyother suitable type of one-way or two-way valves, and may be the same ordifferent types of valves. In some embodiments, one or both of thevalves 214 and 216 are automatic valves that reseal themselves after asample has been obtained, similar to the osmotic valve mechanismdiscussed in relation to FIG. 3. In some embodiments, one or both of thevalves 214 and 216 include a pumping mechanism, such as the pumpingmechanism discussed in relation to FIG. 9. For illustrative purposes,the ingestible device 200 is depicted with both of the valves 214 and216 as moveable two-way valves coupled to the mechanical actuator 218.However, in some embodiments, the mechanical actuator 218 is coupled toonly one of the valves, and the other valve may be replaced with apassive one-way valve. For example, the mechanical actuator 218 may becoupled to only the first valve 214, and the second valve 216 may bereplaced with a passive one-way valve that allows gases, fluids, orsolids to exit the sampling chamber 212 through the portion of thecurved chamber 210 connected to the second opening 208. This mayrestrict fluid from entering the sampling chamber 212 from the secondopening 208, but allow unwanted material to be removed from the samplingchamber 212 as the sample is obtained.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device 200 may be able to detect theapproximate location of the ingestible device 200 within the GI tract.For example, it may be possible to use various combinations of lightemitting diodes and sensors positioned along the ingestible device 200to determine whether the device is in the stomach, small intestine, orlarge intestine. Methods for determining the location of an ingestibledevice within a GI tract are described in greater detail elsewhereherein. In these embodiments, the ingestible device 200 may beconfigured to use the mechanical actuator 218 to move the valves 214 and216 into an open position in response to determining that the ingestibledevice 200 has reached a predetermined location within the GI tract. Forexample, a microcontroller on board the ingestible device 200 may beconfigured to open the valves 214 and 216 only when the ingestibledevice 200 is within the small intestine, thereby obtaining a samplefrom within the small intestine.

For illustrative purposes, the ingestible device 200 is depicted withthe mechanical actuator 218, the first valve 214, and the second valve216 oriented in a substantially straight line, with a single shaft 220being used to couple the mechanical actuator 218 to the valves 214 and216. However, in some embodiments, the orientation and/or positioning ofthe valves 214 and 216 relative to the position of the mechanicalactuator 218 may be different than that shown, and the coupling of themechanical actuator 218 to the valves 214 and 216 may also be different.In some embodiments, the mechanical actuator 218 simultaneously movesthe valves 214 and 216. For example, in some embodiments the valves 214and 216 are rotary valves, and they may be simultaneously opened andclosed by rotating the shaft 220 that extends from the mechanicalactuator 218 along the length of the ingestible device 200. As analternate example, the valves 214 and 216 may be pin valves, and thepins may be attached to the shaft 220 that extends from the mechanicalactuator 218 along the length of the ingestible device 200. In thiscase, the mechanical actuator 218 may open and close the valves bymoving the shaft 220 linearly. This may be accomplished either byconfiguring mechanical actuator 218 to be a linear actuator, such as asolenoid. Alternately, the mechanical actuator 218 may be a rotaryactuator, and the rotation may be converted into a linear motion. Oneskilled in the art will understand that this may be done any number ofways, for example, by coupling the mechanical actuator 218 to a ballscrew mechanism, a threaded lead nut and lead screw mechanism, a rackand pinion mechanism, or the like.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device 200 does not include thesecond valve 216 at all. In this case, fluids and solids containedwithin the sampling chamber 212 may be free to exit through the secondopening 208. Alternately, the second valve 216 near the second opening208 may be replaced by an air-permeable membrane, which may allow gassesand unwanted air bubbles to exit the sampling chamber 212 through thesecond opening 208, while still retaining fluids and/or solids withinthe sampling chamber 212. Alternately, the second valve 216 near thesecond opening 208 may be replaced with a hydrophobic material. Similarto an air permeable membrane, an appropriately positioned hydrophobicmaterial may be used to line the walls of the curved chamber 210proximate to the second opening 208, which may allow gasses or unwantedair bubbles to exit the sampling chamber 212 through the second opening208, while restricting some fluids from entering or exiting the samplingchamber 212 through the second opening 208. In some embodiments, one ormore of the above described mechanisms may be combined in the sameingestible device. For example, the ingestible device 200 may implementthe second valve 216 as a two-way valve, and also have hydrophobicmaterial and an air-permeable membrane located near the second opening208.

In some embodiments, the curved chamber 210 is connected to one or moresub-chambers (not shown). Each of these sub-chambers may be configuredto hold one or more samples, and isolate the samples from both thesampling chamber 212, and the other sub-chambers. For example, eachsub-chamber may be connected to the curved chamber 210 through a one-wayvalve, allowing samples to enter the sub-chamber from the curved chamber210, but preventing the obtained samples from exiting the sub-chamberand re-entering either the curved chamber 210 or the sampling chamber212. In general, any type of valve or other suitable mechanism may beused to isolate samples contained in the sub-chambers. In someembodiments, the ingestible device 200 distributes different samplesinto different sub-chambers at different times, or from differentlocations of the GI tract. For example, the ingestible device 200 mayobtain a sample from the duodenum and distribute it into a firstsub-chamber, and the ingestible device 200 may later obtain a samplefrom the ileum and distribute it into a second sub-chamber. In someembodiments, different types of assay techniques or diagnostics areapplied to some of the samples contained in the different sub-chambers.

FIG. 3 illustrates an example of an osmotic valve mechanism 300, whichmay be incorporated into an ingestible device in order to obtainsamples. The osmotic valve mechanism 300 may be used in an ingestibledevice that features a first end, a second end, and a wall extendinglongitudinally between the first end and the second end, similar to theshape of the ingestible devices 100 (FIG. 1) and 200 (FIG. 2).

The osmotic valve mechanism 300 includes an inlet port 302, which isconnected to a sampling chamber 304. In some embodiments, the inlet port302 connects sampling chamber 304 directly or indirectly to an openingin the housing of an ingestible device.

The initial state of the osmotic valve mechanism 300 is shown in diagram300A. As shown in diagram 300A, the inlet port 302 of the osmotic valvemechanism 300 is sealed using a single use sealing device 306 positionedwithin the inlet port 302. The single use sealing device 306 ispositioned adjacent to a heating element 308. When it is time for theosmotic valve mechanism 300 to be opened (which may be determined by alocalization mechanism that determines the ingestible device is locatedin a desirable portion of the GI tract), the heating element 308 appliesheat to the sealing device 306, causing the sealing device 306 to deformand unseal the inlet port 302.

In some embodiments, the sealing device 306 may be a plug made out of amaterial that is meltable, deformable, and/or destroyable through theuse of the heating element 308, such as wax. For example, in someembodiments, the heating element 308 may be a resistive heater thatundergoes ohmic heating as an electrical current is passed through it,and the sealing device 306 is a wax plug. In some embodiments, the typeof wax used to form the wax plug has a melting point between 38 degreesand 80 degrees Celsius, which is above the ambient temperature of ahuman body, but which may be easily achieved using the heating element308. Some embodiments of the osmotic valve mechanism 300 may use asealing device 306 that is melted or deformed at temperatures outside ofthe range described above, but practical considerations may be made toensure that the osmotic valve mechanism 300 does not cause unwanteddamage or burning to the GI tract. In some embodiments, a microprocessoris configured to control the heating element 308, causing it to generateheat. For example, the microprocessor may be configured to activate theheating element 308 once the ingestible device reaches a particularlocation within the GI tract. An example mechanism for unsealing theinlet port 302 is described in greater detail in relation to FIGS. 4 and5. Although FIGS. 3, 4, and 5 depict the sealing device 306 as a type ofplug, any type of suitable sealing device may be used. For example, insome embodiments, the sealing device includes a breakable membrane,which may be destroyed when heat is applied to the membrane. In someembodiments, the osmotic valve mechanism 300 does not include a heatingelement 308, and the sealing device 306 is melted, deformed, destroyed,or dislodged from the inlet port 302 by a mechanical actuator, orthrough electromagnetic fields. For example, the sealing device 306 maybe a membrane that will rupture when a sufficiently large electricalcurrent or magnetic field is applied to the membrane.

Inside the sampling chamber 304 of the osmotic valve mechanism 300 ismade of a member including an absorptive material 310, and at least aportion of the absorptive material 310 is located near the inlet port302. The absorptive material 310 may include any suitable spongematerial or hydrophilic material, such as any of the materials describedin relation to FIG. 1. The portion of the absorptive material 310located near the inlet port 302 may have a tendency to expand when itcomes into contact with fluids. The osmotic valve mechanism 300 has abarrier 312 inside the sampling chamber 304, which is divided into threeportions. The first portion of the barrier 312 is a flexible membrane314, the second portion of the barrier 312 adjacent to the flexiblemembrane 314 is a rigid portion 316, and the third portion of thebarrier 312 adjacent to the rigid portion 316 is a semi-permeablemembrane 318.

The barrier 312 within the sampling chamber 304 is positioned betweenthe inlet port 302 and the absorptive material 310, covering a surfaceof the absorptive material 310. When the inlet port 302 is unsealed, asample (e.g., a fluid sample containing solid particulates taken fromthe GI tract) enters the sampling chamber 304 through the inlet port302, and begins to fill the sampling chamber 304. The absorptivematerial 310 may have a natural tendency to expand when it comes intocontact with a fluid sample. However, by covering a surface of theabsorptive material 310, the barrier 312 may allow only certain portionsof absorptive material 310 to expand. The barrier 312 may also directthe flow of a fluid sample as it enters the sampling chamber 304, andallow the fluid sample to come into contact with only certain parts ofthe absorptive material 310.

Diagram 300B shows the osmotic valve mechanism 300 shortly after theinlet port 302 is unsealed. Once the inlet port 302 is unsealed, thesampling chamber 304 may be opened, and a sample may enter the samplingchamber 304 through the inlet port 302. In some embodiments, the samplecannot cross the flexible membrane 314 and contact the absorptivematerial 310. As a result, the flexible membrane 314 may be used toguide the sample as it enters the sampling chamber 304. Similarly, insome embodiments the sample cannot cross the rigid portion 316 of thebarrier 312, and the rigid portion 316 may also be used to guide thesample as it enters the sampling chamber 304. The semi-permeablemembrane 318 allows at least a portion of the sample to pass through thesemi-permeable membrane and contact the absorptive material 310. Thismay allow the sample to be absorbed by the absorptive material 310 afterthe sample has filled the top portion of the sampling chamber 304, whichin turn may cause the absorptive material 310 to begin to expand.

Diagram 300C shows the state of the osmotic valve mechanism 300 afterthe absorptive material 310 has absorbed a portion of the sample. Theportion of the absorptive material 310 under the flexible membrane 314expands when the absorptive material 310 absorbs the sample. As theabsorptive material 310 expands, the flexible membrane 314 is forced upagainst the inlet port 302, effectively sealing the inlet port 302 fromthe sampling chamber 304. In some embodiments, the rigid portion 316prevents the portion of the absorptive material 310 under the rigidportion 316 from expanding. In some embodiments, the semi-permeablemembrane 318 may be rigid, and prevent the portion of the absorptivematerial 310 adjacent to the semi-permeable membrane 318 from expanding.

After the absorptive material 310 expands, causing the inlet port 302 tobe resealed, a portion of the sample may be confined within the samplingchamber 304. Once a sample has been properly confined, it may bepossible to apply a wide range of assay techniques or diagnostics to thesample. In some embodiments, the portion of the sampling chamber 304between the rigid portion 316 and the wall of the sampling chamber formsa testing area. For example, a sensor may be placed within or proximateto the sampling chamber 304 in order to study the portion of the samplecontained within the testing area located above the rigid portion 316.This sensor may be used to study properties of the sample, or it may beused to detect the results of an assay technique applied to the sample.

Diagram 300C is shown for illustrative purposes only, and is notlimiting. In some embodiments, the osmotic valve mechanism 300 does notinclude the barrier 312, or one or more portions of the barrier 312 areexcluded or rearranged within the sampling chamber 304. For example, thelocation of the rigid portion 316 and the semi-permeable membrane 318may be reversed, or the rigid portion 316 may be removed and thesemi-permeable membrane 318 extended so that it connects directly withthe flexible membrane 314. When the osmotic valve mechanism 300 does notinclude a barrier 312 or does not include the flexible membrane 314, aportion of the absorptive material 310 near the inlet port 302 mayexpand and clog the inlet port 302, effectively resealing the inlet port302.

In some embodiments, the material used to form the absorptive material310 expands at a controlled rate, which may ensure that sufficient timehas passed for the sample to enter the sampling chamber 304 and for thesampling chamber 304 to be filled before the inlet port 302 is resealed.This may be particularly useful for embodiments where the osmotic valvemechanism 300 does not include a flexible membrane 314 and/or thesemi-permeable membrane 318. In some embodiments, a portion of theabsorptive material 310 is covered by a dissolvable film or membrane,which may prevent the absorptive material 310 from expanding until asufficient amount of time has passed for the film to dissolve.

In some embodiments, the sampling chamber 304 is connected to one ormore sub-chambers (not shown). Each of these sub-chambers may beconfigured to hold samples, and isolate the samples from both thesampling chamber 304, and the other sub-chambers. For example, eachsub-chamber may be connected to the sampling chamber 304 through aone-way valve, allowing samples to enter the sub-chamber from thesampling chamber, but preventing the obtained samples from exiting thesub-chamber. As an alternate example, each of the sub-chambers mayemploy a sealing device, heating element, and member made of absorptivematerial arranged similar to osmotic valve mechanism 300. In theseembodiments, each of the sub-chambers may be opened by activating theirrespective heating elements, and may be automatically sealed off fromthe sampling chamber 304 after a sufficient amount of the sample hasbeen obtained. In general, any type of valve or other suitable mechanismmay be used to isolate samples contained in the sub-chambers. In someembodiments, similar to ingestible device 200, an ingestible deviceemploying multiple sub-chambers in conjunction with the osmotic valvemechanism 300 may distribute different samples into differentsub-chambers at different times, or from different locations of the GItract.

It will be understood by one skilled in the art that variations of theosmotic valve mechanism 300 may be combined with any of the otheringestible devices described in this disclosure. For example, in someembodiments of the ingestible device 200 shown and described in relationto FIG. 2, one or both of the valves 214 and 216 may be replaced withcertain embodiments of the osmotic valve mechanism 300. One or both ofthe valves 214 and 216 may include a sealing device that can bedestroyed or deformed (e.g., by the mechanical actuator 218 or through aheating element), and one or both of the valves 214 and 216 may beautomatically resealed by the expansion of absorptive material locatedwithin the sampling chamber 212.

FIGS. 4 and 5 illustrate in detail how some embodiments of the osmoticvalve mechanism 300 (FIG. 3) may be operated in order to obtain asample.

FIG. 4 shows a detailed view of an inlet port 400, which may beincorporated into osmotic valve mechanism 300, prior to being unsealed.The inlet port 400 features an exterior portion 402, which is separatedby a middle portion 404 from an interior portion 406. The middle portion404 of the inlet port 400 contains a sealing device 408, which may bethe same as sealing device 306 shown and described in relation to FIG.3. A heating element 410 is located near the middle portion 404, andadjacent to the sealing device 408. The sides of the inlet port 412A and412B form the shape of the inlet port 400, and may be constructed froman insulating material, such as insulating ceramic, or polymers such aspolyamide-imide, polyphenylene sulfide, polyphenylene oxide, and thelike. For illustrative purposes, the exterior portion 402 of the inletport 400 is depicted as being filled with a sample 414, which may be afluid sample obtained from the GI tract. However, in some embodiments,the inlet port 400 may be operated regardless of whether a sample 414 isactually contained in the exterior portion 402. The exterior portion 402and the interior portion 406 are wider than the middle portion 404. Asloped wall 416 gradually reduces the width of the exterior portion 402,to transition from the wider width of the exterior portion 402 to thenarrower width of the middle portion 404. This configuration may reducethe overall volume of the sealing device 408 (compared to aconfiguration with a wider middle portion 404), and reduce the surfacearea of the sealing device 408 exposed to the sample 414, which mayreduce the amount of heat lost from the sealing device 408 to the sample414. In turn, this may make it easier to raise the temperature of thesealing device 408 using the heating element 410. In some embodiments,the geometry of the inlet port 400 may allow an air pocket (not shown)to form in the exterior portion 402, separating the sealing device 408from fluid contained within the GI tract. This may act as an insulatingbarrier around the sealing device 408, and also make it easier to raisethe temperature of the sealing device 408 using the heating element 410.Moreover, the larger width of the interior portion 406 relative to themiddle portion 404 forms a remnant capture area 418, which may hold theremnants of the sealing device 408 after the inlet port 400 is unsealed.

In some embodiments, the exterior portion 402 of the inlet port 400 maybe connected directly or indirectly to an opening in the housing of aningestible device. In some embodiments, there is nothing to restrict asample from entering the opening, and, at any given time, the exteriorportion 402 of the inlet port 400 may be filled with a fluid sample 414gathered from whatever portion of the GI tract the ingestible device islocated within.

Sealing device 408 prevents the fluid sample 414 contained within theexterior portion 402 of the inlet port 400 from entering the interiorportion 406 of the inlet port 400. For simplicity, FIGS. 4 and 5 depictthe sealing device 408 as a plug, which forms a seal that may be brokenby using a heating element 410. However, in some embodiments the sealingdevice 408 may be any other type of breakable seal or valve used withinthe middle portion 404 to separate the exterior portion 402 of the inletport 400 and the interior portion 406 of the inlet port 400.

In some embodiments, the heating element 410 may be operated by amicrocontroller. For example, the microcontroller may be configured tooperate the heating element 410 and unseal the inlet port 400 when theingestible device is in a certain portion of the GI tract. The sides ofthe inlet port 412A and 412B may be formed from an insulating material,which may shield the ingestible device and the fluid sample 414 from theheat generated by the heating element 410. This may also help to focusthe heat produced by heating element 410 in the direction of the sealingdevice 408, and may reduce the total amount of power to drive theheating element 410 to melt, deform, or destroy the sealing device 408.

In some embodiments, the dimensions of the inlet port 400 are chosensuch that a fluid sample 414 is naturally drawn into the exteriorportion 402, and ultimately through the middle portion 404 into theinterior portion 406, through capillary action. Typically, thecross-section of the exterior portion 402, the middle portion 404, andthe interior portion 406 will be square, circular, or rectangular, butany type of cross-section may be used. The overall cross-sectional areaof the exterior portion 402, the middle portion 404, and the interiorportion 406 of the inlet port 400 is typically less than 50 squaremillimeters given the size constraints of the ingestible device, with0.2 to 2 square millimeters being common. However, the cross-sectionalareas listed above are only examples, and any cross-sectional area maybe chosen in order to better draw in samples from the different portionsof the GI tract. One skilled in the art will understand that the exactshape and dimensions will depend on the physical properties of thesample to be acquired, and some embodiments may use cross-sections otherthan the ones mentioned above.

FIG. 5, shows a detailed view of an inlet port 500, which may beincorporated into osmotic valve mechanism 300, after it has beenunsealed.

After the heating element 510 has heated the sealing device 508sufficiently, the sealing device 508 may deform, melt, or otherwise bedestroyed, effectively unsealing the inlet port 500. Once the inlet port500 is unsealed, the fluid sample 514 is able to flow naturally from theexterior portion 502 of the inlet port 500 to the interior portion 506of the inlet port 500 through the middle portion 504. Similar to theembodiments described in relation to FIG. 4, the sides 512A and 512B ofthe inlet port may be made of an appropriate insulating material, andform the shape of the inlet port 500, the exterior portion 502 with thesloped wall 516, the middle portion 504, and the interior portion 506along with the remnant capture area 518. As the fluid sample 514 entersthe interior portion 506 of the inlet port 500, the natural flow of thefluid sample 514 may carry any of the remnants of the sealing device 508into the remnant capture area 518 located within the interior portion506. In some embodiments, once the melted or deformed remnants of thesealing device 508 cease to be in contact with the heating element 510and instead come into contact with the insulating material that make upthe walls of the remnant capture area 518, the remnants of the sealingdevice 508 re-solidifies or re-forms along the walls of the remnantcapture area 518. As a result, the remnant capture area 518 may providea location for the re-solidified remnants of the sealing device 508 tobe stored, and may prevent the remnants of the sealing device 508 fromimpeding the flow of the sample 514.

In some embodiments, electromagnetic forces are used to attract theremnants of the sealing device 508 to the remnant capture area 518. Forexample, the sealing device (e.g., the sealing device 408) may be madefrom a magnetic material, and an induced or permanent magnetic field maybe used to attract the remnants of the sealing device 508 to the remnantcapture area 518. This magnetic field may be applied after the heatingelement 510 is activated, and until the remnants of the sealing device508 re-solidify or re-form within the remnant capture area 518.

It will be understood that the embodiments described by FIGS. 3, 4, and5, are merely illustrative, and they may be modified and combined withother techniques for drawing in or pumping fluid samples withoutdeparting from the spirit and scope of this disclosure. For example, toencourage samples to be drawn into the sampling chamber 304, thesampling chamber 304 may contain a low-pressure vacuum, and samples maybe forcibly drawn into the sampling chamber 304 when the inlet port 302is unsealed. A similar effect may also be produced by connecting thesampling chamber 304 to a sub-chamber containing a low-pressure vacuum,or by using by using a mechanical actuator to either pump the fluidsamples or to increase the volume of the sampling chamber 304. In someembodiments, the geometry and relative size of the exterior portions 402and 502, the middle portions 404 and 504, and interior portions 406 and506, may be different from those depicted in FIGS. 4 and 5. For example,the different portions 402, 404, 406, 502, 504, and 506 may have auniform width, and the sloped walls 416 and 516 and/or the remnantcapture areas 418 and 518 are not included. As another example, a slopedwall may be used to form the remnant capture areas 418 and 518.

FIG. 6 illustrates another example of an ingestible device 600 with asampling chamber that includes an exit port. Similar to the ingestibledevices 100 and 200, the ingestible device 600 is designed to have anouter housing with a first end 602A, a second end 602B, and a wall 604extending longitudinally from the first end 602A to the second end 602B.The ingestible device 600 has an opening 606 in the housing, whichallows samples to enter the ingestible device 600 from the surroundingenvironment. The ingestible device 600 has an inlet region 608 connectedto the opening 606. The inlet region 608 is connected to an entry port610 of a sampling chamber 612. The inlet region 608 is divided intothree portions. A first portion 608A of the inlet region 608 isconnected to the opening 606 and a second portion 608B, and a thirdportion 608C is connected to the entry port 610 of the sampling chamber612. The second portion 608B connects the first portion 608A to thethird portion 608C, and may contain a moveable valve 614 that is used toprevent samples from flowing through the inlet region 608, and isolatethe first portion 608A of the inlet region 608 from the third portion608C of the inlet region 608.

The ingestible device 600 has a mechanical actuator 624 coupled to themoveable valve 614. In some embodiments, a microprocessor ormicrocontroller is configured to control the mechanical actuator 624 andmove the moveable valve 614 between an open and a closed position. Forexample, the microcontroller may be configured to move the moveablevalve 614 into an open position after the ingestible device reaches aparticular location within the GI tract. In some embodiments, themechanical actuator may be driven by a set of batteries or other powersource located within the ingestible device 600. When the moveable valve614 is moved into an open position, a sample may be allowed to flowthrough the inlet region 608, and enter the sampling chamber 612 throughthe entry port 610. When the moveable valve 614 is in a closed position,the sample is prevented from flowing through the inlet region 608 andreaching the sampling chamber 612 from the opening 606.

For illustrative purposes, FIG. 6 depicts the moveable valve 614 as adiaphragm valve, which uses a mechanical actuator 624 to move a flexiblediaphragm in order to seal or unseal an aperture in the second portion608B of the inlet region 608, which may effectively block or unblock theinlet region 608. However, it will be understood that, in someembodiments, the moveable valve 614 may be a different type of valve.For example, in some embodiments the moveable valve 614 may be replacedby a pumping mechanism, such as the pumping mechanism described inrelation to FIG. 9. As another example, in some embodiments the moveablevalve 614 is replaced with an osmotic valve, similar to the embodimentsdescribed in relation to FIGS. 3, 4, and 5. Several examples of otherdifferent valve types are described in relation to FIG. 7.

The sampling chamber 612 of the ingestible device 600 has an exit port616 located on the opposite end of the sampling chamber 612 from theentry port 610. In general, the exit port 616 may be located anywherewithin the sampling chamber 612. The exit port 616 is configured toallow air or gas 618 to exit the sampling chamber 612, while preventingat least a portion of the sample obtained by the ingestible device 600from exiting the sampling chamber 612. For example, the exit port 616may include a gas-permeable membrane, which allows the gas 618 to exitthe sampling chamber 612, but which would prevent a liquid or solidsample from leaving the sampling chamber 612 through the exit port 616.Allowing the gas 618 to exit the sampling chamber 612 may preventpressure from building up within the sampling chamber 612 as the sampleenters through the entry port 610. This may result in the sample beingdrawn into the sampling chamber 612 more easily, and result inincreasing the overall volume of the sample able to be collected by theingestible device 600, and increasing the ease with which the sample isbrought into the sampling chamber 612.

The ingestible device 600 includes a one-way valve 620 as part of theexit port 616. This valve may prevent the gas 618 from re-entering thesampling chamber 612. However, in some embodiments the one-way valve 620may be excluded from the ingestible device 600. In some embodiments, theexit port 616 includes a gas permeable membrane. This gas permeablemembrane may lose its permeability when it is placed in contact with thesample. For example, the gas permeable membrane may include a spongymaterial that allows the gas 618 to exit the sampling chamber 612through the exit port 616. Once the spongy material becomes moistthrough contact with the sample, it may become no longer gas permeable,or the permeability may be greatly reduced, thereby preventing the gas618 from reentering the sampling chamber 612. In some embodiments, thegas permeable membrane may include expanded polytetrafluorethylene,polypropylene, or the like. In some embodiments, the material used tomake the gas permeable membrane may be filter-like, as opposed tosponge-like materials. Generally, the gas permeable membrane may be madeof any material that allow gas to permeate, but which prevents liquidfrom flowing through the membrane due to sufficient resistance orsurface tension effects.

In the ingestible device 600, the exit port 616 is connected to a volumewithin the housing of ingestible device 600 outside of the samplingchamber. Depending on the manufacturing process used to produce theingestible device 600, the volume within the housing of the ingestibledevice 600 may contain air or some other type of gas.

The ingestible device 600 includes an outlet port 622, which isconnected to the volume within housing of the ingestible device 600. Theoutlet port 622 may provide a path for the gas 618 to exit theingestible device 600 and be released into the environment surroundingthe ingestible device 600. This may be advantageous when the volume ofgas 618 is relatively large, since it may prevent pressure from buildingup within the housing of the ingestible device 600. In some embodiments,the ingestible device 600 does not include an outlet port 622, and thegas 618 stays inside the volume of the ingestible device 600. In someembodiments, the outlet port 622 is directly or indirectly connected tothe exit port 616, for example, by a tube or channel. In someembodiments, the exit port 616 leads directly from the sampling chamber612 to an opening in the ingestible device 600, and the exit port 616may effectively replace the outlet port 622. In some embodiments, theoutlet port 622 may contain a gas permeable membrane, a one-way valve, ahydrophobic channel, or some other mechanism to avoid unwanted material,(e.g., fluids and solid particulates from within the GI tract), fromentering the ingestible device 600 through the outlet port 622.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device 600 may include a sensorwithin or proximate to the sampling chamber 612. For example, thissensor may be used to detect various properties of a sample containedwithin the sampling chamber 612, or this sensor may be used to detectthe results of an assay technique applied to the sample contained withinthe sampling chamber 612.

In some embodiments, a hydrophilic sponge is located within the samplingchamber 612, and the hydrophilic sponge may be configured to absorb thesample as the sample enters the sampling chamber 612. In someembodiments, the hydrophilic sponge fills a substantial portion of thesampling chamber 612, and holds the sample for an extended period oftime. This may be particularly advantageous if the sample is collectedfrom the ingestible device 600 after the ingestible device 600 exits thebody. In some embodiments, the hydrophilic sponge is placed on onlycertain surfaces or fills only certain portions of the sampling chamber612. For example, it may be possible to line certain walls (or allwalls) of the sampling chamber 612 with a hydrophilic sponge to assistin drawing in the sample, while leaving some (or none) of the walls ofthe sampling chamber 612 uncovered. Leaving walls uncovered may allowthe use of diagnostics or assay techniques that involve a relativelyun-obscured optical path. An example of such an embodiment is describedin detail in relation to FIG. 8. In some embodiments, the spongematerial may be placed on all walls of the sampling chamber 612. Thismay prevent unwanted ambient light from entering the sampling chamber612, which may be useful for certain types of low light detectionassays. In some embodiments, an opaque material is used to cover some orall sides of the sampling chamber 612. This may also prevent unwantedambient light from entering the sampling chamber 612.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device 600 may include a sealedvacuum chamber connected to the exit port 616, or connected directly orindirectly to the sampling chamber 612. The sealed vacuum chamber mayhave an internal pressure that is substantially lower than ambientpressure of the sampling chamber 612 and/or the inlet region 608. Inthese embodiments, the ingestible device 600 unseals the vacuum chamberin order to reduce the pressure within the sampling chamber. This changein pressure may force the sample to be sucked into the sampling chamber,or allow the sample to be drawn into the sampling chamber quickly.

For simplicity, FIG. 6 depicts only a single sampling chamber 612, butit will be understood that the inlet region 608 may be connected tomultiple sampling chambers arranged throughout the device, each of whichmay be controlled independently through the use of one or more valves.For example, in some embodiments there may be one or more sub-chambersconnected to the inlet region 608. Each of the sub-chambers may beconfigured to hold samples gathered from within the GI tract, and keepthose samples isolated. In general, any type of valve or other suitablemechanism may be used to isolate samples contained in the sub-chambers,including any of the valves or mechanisms described in relation to FIGS.1-5. In some embodiments, the ingestible device 600 distributesdifferent samples into each of the different sub-chambers at differenttimes, or from different locations within the GI tract. For example, theingestible device 600 may accomplish this by opening up a valve toconnect the interior of inlet region 608 to the appropriate sub-chamberbefore opening up the inlet region 608 to draw in the sample from theopening 606 in the housing.

FIG. 7 depicts different types of moveable valves that may beincorporated into an ingestible device, such as the ingestible devices100, 200 or 600. The ingestible device 702 illustrates how a pin valvemay be used as a moveable valve (e.g., as moveable valve 614 ofingestible device 600 (FIG. 6)), with diagram 702A showing the pin valvein a closed position, and diagram 702B showing the pin valve in an openposition. In the ingestible device 702, a mechanical actuator may beconfigured to move the pin valve linearly in order to switch between anopen position and a closed position. For example, in diagram 702A, theingestible device 702 has a pin inserted into the inlet port, therebypreventing the sample from flowing into the sampling chamber from theopening in the ingestible device 702. In diagram 702B, the ingestibledevice 702 has a pin that has been removed from the inlet port, allowingthe sample to flow freely into the sampling chamber from the opening inthe ingestible device 702. In order to generate linear motion, themechanical actuator may be a linear actuator, such as a solenoid.Alternately, the mechanical actuator may be a rotatory actuator, and therotation may be converted into a linear motion. One skilled in the artwill understand that this may be done any number of ways, for example,by coupling the mechanical actuator to a ball screw mechanism, athreaded lead nut and lead screw mechanism, a rack and pinion mechanism,or the like.

Ingestible device 704 illustrates how a rotary valve may be used as amoveable valve (e.g., as moveable valve 614 of ingestible device 600(FIG. 6)), with diagram 704A showing the rotary valve in a closedposition, and diagram 704B showing the rotary valve in an open position.In diagram 704A, the ingestible device 704 has a rotary pin orientedsuch that the sample is prevented from entering the sampling chamberfrom the opening in the ingestible device 704. In diagram 704B, theingestible device 704 has a rotary pin that has been rotated into anorientation where the sample is free to flow into the sampling chamberfrom the opening in the ingestible device 704. In order to operate therotary valve, the mechanical actuator in ingestible device 704 may be arotatory actuator, which is capable of rotating the rotary pin to switchbetween the open position and the closed position.

Ingestible device 706 illustrates how a flexible diaphragm, or diaphragmvalve, may be used as a moveable valve (e.g., as moveable valve 614 ofingestible device 600 (FIG. 6)), with diagram 706A showing the diaphragmvalve in a closed position, and diagram 706B showing the diaphragm valvein an open position. In diagram 706A, the ingestible device 706 has adiaphragm valve in a closed position, with the flexible diaphragm beingpressed against an aperture in the inlet region due to the pressuregenerated by the mechanical actuator against the flexible diaphragm.This may effectively block a sample from flowing through the inletregion, and thereby preventing a sample from entering the samplingchamber from the opening in the ingestible device 706. In diagram 706B,the ingestible device 706 has a diaphragm valve in an open position,with the pressure removed from the flexible diaphragm. The diaphragmreturns to a position away from the aperture in the inlet region,allowing a sample to flow freely into the sampling chamber from theopening the in ingestible device 706.

In some embodiments, ingestible device 706 has a spring mechanism nearthe diaphragm or in direct contact with the diaphragm. The springmechanism may apply pressure to the diaphragm to oppose the pressureapplied by the mechanical actuator, which may cause the flexiblediaphragm to be moved into an open position when the mechanical actuatoris not applying pressure to the flexible diaphragm. Additionally, thismay ensure that the diaphragm valve remains open when the mechanicalactuator is not applying pressure across the flexible diaphragm.

In some embodiments, moving the mechanical actuator from a closedposition to an open position causes a volume of the inlet region withinthe ingestible device to increase. This may cause the pressure withinthe inlet region to be reduced, generating suction to draw a sample intothe inlet region. Similarly, moving the mechanical actuator from an openposition to a closed position may cause the volume of the inlet regionto be reduced. This may cause the pressure within the inlet region to beincreased, pushing the sample out of the inlet region. Depending on thedesign of the inlet region, the mechanical actuator, and the moveablevalve, this may push the sample into the sampling chamber rather thanpushing the sample back through the opening in the ingestible device. Anexample of such a design is described in greater detail in relation toFIG. 9.

FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a sampling mechanism that may beincorporated into an ingestible device, such as the ingestible devices100, 200, 600, and 702-706. The sampling mechanism 800 is partiallylined with hydrophilic sponges 802A and 802B. In between the hydrophilicsponges 802A and 802B is a testing region 804 within the samplingmechanism 800. The hydrophilic sponges 802A and 802B attract a liquid orfluid sample 806, and may draw the sample 806 into the samplingmechanism 800. As the hydrophilic sponges 802A and 802B are saturatedwith the sample 806, a meniscus 808 is formed at the end of the sample806, between the hydrophilic sponges 802A and 802B. This system may beuseful for acquiring particularly viscous samples, which may havedifficulty flowing into the sampling mechanism 800 naturally.

The sampling mechanism 800 includes an exit port 810 connected to achannel 812. As the sample 806 is drawn into the sampling mechanism 800,air or gas contained in the sampling mechanism 800 may be pushed out ofthe sampling mechanism 800 through the exit port 810 and into thechannel 812. This may avoid gas being trapped within the samplingmechanism 800, which in turn may avoid pressure building inside of thesampling mechanism 800 and preventing the sample 806 from being drawninto the testing region 804.

In some embodiments, the sampling mechanism 800 may not include an exitport 810 or a channel 812, and any air or gas in the sampling mechanism800 may be allowed to remain within the sampling mechanism 800. In someembodiments, the sampling mechanism 800 may be filled with a lowpressure vacuum, attached to a pump or other mechanism to create avacuum, or attached to a sealed chamber containing a low pressure vacuumthat may be unsealed. The use of a vacuum may allow the samplingmechanism 800 to forcibly draw in a sample.

In some embodiments, an ingestible device may include sensors ordiagnostics to study the sample 806 contained within the samplingmechanism 800. Because there is no sponge material on the front and backwalls of the testing region 804, information about the sample 806contained within the testing region 804 may be gathered by using sensorsand/or assay techniques that involve a clear optical path, which wouldotherwise be obscured by a sponge (e.g., the hydrophilic sponges 802Aand 802B). For example, light sources and/or optical sensors may beplaced near the front and/or back walls in order to test opticalproperties of the sample, or to detect the results of certain assaytechniques.

It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the samplingmechanism 800 depicted in FIG. 8 is merely illustrative, and the generaltechniques described in relation to FIG. 8 may be applied to a widerange of different chambers, channels, and fluid pathways, andincorporated into a wide range of different ingestible devices.Furthermore, in some embodiments, the overall geometry of FIG. 8 and thepositioning of the sponges and the testing area may be altered. Forexample, the sponge may be formed in the shape of hollow tubes, withtesting areas located in the middle of each tube. In this case, therewould be a clear optical path from one end of the tube to the other.

FIG. 9 illustrates a pumping mechanism 900 that may be incorporated intoan ingestible device, including certain embodiments of ingestibledevices 100, 200, 600, and 702-706. For illustrative purposes, thepumping mechanism 900 may be described in the context of an ingestibledevice similar to ingestible device 600 (FIG. 6). When it isincorporated into an ingestible device similar to ingestible device 600,the pumping mechanism 900 may function as a moveable valve (e.g.,moveable valve 614 of ingestible device 600), and control the ability ofsamples to flow between the opening 606 in the housing and the entryport 610 of the sampling chamber 612. Additionally, the pumping chamber904 of the pumping mechanism 900 may form part of the second portion608B of the inlet region 608. However, the general structure andprinciples of pumping mechanism 900 are not limited to the ingestibledevices described in this disclosure, and they may be applied to a widerange of ingestible devices.

Pumping mechanism 900 is designed to draw in a sample through a firstopening 902 into a pumping chamber 904, and push a portion of the sampleout of the pumping chamber 904 through a second opening 906. In someembodiments, the first opening 902 may be connected directly orindirectly to an opening in the housing of an ingestible device. Forexample, an inlet region (e.g., the first portion 608A of the inletregion 608 of the ingestible device 600 (FIG. 6)) may connect an openingin the housing of an ingestible device (e.g., the opening 606 in thehousing of ingestible device 600 (FIG. 6)) to the first opening 902. Insome embodiments, the second opening 906 is connected directly orindirectly to a sampling chamber of an ingestible device. For example,the second opening 906 may be connected to an entry port of a samplingchamber (e.g., connected via the third portion 608C of the inlet region608 to the entry port 610 of the sampling chamber 612 of the ingestibledevice 600 (FIG. 6)).

The pumping mechanism 900 features a moveable pump head 908 containedwithin the pumping chamber 904. The protrusion 908A of the moveable pumphead 908 is shaped to fit within the first opening 902, or otherwiseblock the first opening 902. The base 908B of the moveable pump head 908is able to cover the second opening 906 or otherwise block the secondopening 906. Moreover, the protrusion 908A and the base 908B of themoveable pump head 908 are sized and oriented from each other in such amanner such that when the protrusion 908A blocks the first opening 902,the base 908B may simultaneously block the second opening 906 or leavethe second opening 906 unblocked. Furthermore, when the base 908B blocksthe second opening 906, the protrusion 908A may always be configured toalso block the first opening 902.

As the moveable pump head 908 is moved up and down, the openings 902 and906 may be sealed or unsealed, switching the pumping mechanism 900across an open position, a partially closed position, and a closedposition. In the open position (as is shown in the diagram 912), boththe first opening 902 and the second opening 906 are unsealed or open.In the partially closed position (as is shown in the diagram 914, themoveable pump head 908 is positioned to only seal the first opening 902,while leaving the second opening 906 open. Finally, in the closedposition (as is shown in the diagrams 910 and 918), both the firstopening 902 and the second opening 906 are sealed.

In some embodiments, the moveable pump head 908 may be connected to amechanical actuator (e.g., the mechanical actuator 624 of the ingestibledevice 600 (FIG. 6)), which may be configured to move the moveable pumphead 908 linearly up and down. For example, the moveable pump head 908may be located on the end of a shaft that is attached to the mechanicalactuator. In some embodiments, the mechanical actuator and thepositioning of the moveable pump head 908 may be controlled by amicrocontroller or microprocessor located within the ingestible device.For example, a microcontroller may be configured to move the pump head908 and begin pumping a sample through the pumping chamber 904 onlyafter the ingestible device has reached a particular location within theGI tract.

Diagram 910 depicts the pumping mechanism 900 in a fully closedposition. When the pumping mechanism 900 is in the fully closedposition, the protrusion 908A of the moveable pump head 908 may bepositioned within the first opening 902, and the base 908B of themoveable pump head 908 may be positioned adjacent to the second opening906. In the fully closed position, the positioning of the moveable pumphead 908 may effectively prevent a sample from entering or exiting thepumping chamber 904 from the openings 902 or 906.

Diagram 912 depicts the pumping mechanism 900 in an open position. Whenthe pumping mechanism 900 is in the open position, the moveable pumphead 908 is moved away from the first opening 902, moving the protrusion908A of the moveable pump head 908 out of the first opening 902, andmoving the base 908B of the moveable pump away from the second opening906. In this position, the pumping mechanism 900 may allow one or moresamples to enter the pumping chamber 904 through the first opening 902,and exit the pumping chamber 904 through the second opening 906. Becausethe effective volume of the pumping chamber 904 increases when themoveable pump head 908 is moved away from the first opening 902, thepumping mechanism 900 may draw a sample into the sampling chamberthrough the first opening 902 when transitioning from a closed positiondepicted in the diagram 910 to an open position depicted in the diagram912. In some embodiments, a one-way valve may be incorporated into aningestible device to prevent samples from being drawn into the pumpingchamber 904 through the second opening 906 when the pumping mechanism900 transitions between the closed position and the open position. Thismay ensure that the only sample entering the pumping chamber 904 isdrawn in through the first opening 902.

Diagram 914 depicts the pumping mechanism 900 in a partially closedposition. When the pumping mechanism 900 is in the partially closedposition, the protrusion 908A of the moveable pump head 908 ispositioned adjacent to the first opening 902, or just inside the firstopening 902. In this position, the protrusion 908A of the moveable pumphead 908 effectively seals off the first opening 902, preventing any ofthe sample remaining in the pumping chamber 904 from exiting pumpingchamber 904 via the first opening 902. In this position, the base 908Bof the moveable pump head 908 is positioned away from the second opening906. This may allow any sample remaining in the pumping chamber 904 toexit the pumping chamber 904 through the second opening 906. Forexample, if the second opening 906 is connected to an entry port of asampling chamber (e.g., connected via the third portion 608C of theinlet region 608 to the entry port 610 of the sampling chamber 612 ofthe ingestible device 600 (FIG. 6)), this may allow the sample to flowfreely from the pumping mechanism 900 into the sampling chamber via theentry port.

Diagram 916 depicts the pumping mechanism 900 as it transitions betweenthe partially closed position to the fully closed position. As thepumping mechanism 900 moves into the fully closed position, the moveablepump head 908 forces any of remaining sample contained within thepumping chamber 904 out of the pumping chamber 904 through the secondopening 906. As this happens, the protrusion 908A of the moveable pumphead 908 remains within the first opening 902, blocking it off andpreventing the sample from exiting the pumping chamber 904 through firstopening 902. By comparison, the base 908B of the moveable pump head 908does not fully cover the second opening 906, and the sample is free toexit the pumping chamber 904 through the second opening 906. Incombination, this may result in a majority of the sample remaining inthe sampling chamber being forced through the second opening 906 as thepumping mechanism 900 moves from the partially closed position depictedin diagram 914 to the fully closed position depicted in diagram 918.

Diagram 918 depicts the pumping mechanism 900 in the fully closedposition, similar to diagram 910. As noted before, in the fully closedposition the moveable pump head 908 is positioned to seal off theopenings 902 and 906, which may prevent a sample from entering orexiting the pumping chamber 904 from the openings 902 or 904. Ingeneral, the pumping mechanism 900 may cycle between the closed positiondepicted in diagrams 910 and 918 and the open position depicted indiagram 912 any number of times in order to draw additional samples intothe pumping chamber 904 through the first opening 902, and force thesamples out of the pumping chamber 904 through the second opening 906.

Although FIG. 9 depicts the protrusion 908A of the moveable pump head908 located in the center of the moveable pump head 908, the location ofthe protrusion 908A may be anywhere on the moveable pump head 908. Forexample, the protrusion 908A of the moveable pump head 908 and the firstopening 902 may be positioned on the side of the pumping chamber 904. Insome embodiments, the moveable pump head 908 is split into two pieces,which may be controlled by one or more actuators. For example, theprotrusion 908A and the base 908B may be two separate pieces, each ofwhich is moved using a different actuator. This may allow the firstopening 902 to be sealed and unsealed independently from the volume ofthe pumping mechanism 900 being increased or decreased.

For illustrative purposes, the diagrams 910-918 depict the base 908B ofthe moveable pump head 908 being used to cover or otherwise block thesecond opening 906. However, in some embodiments, the moveable pump head908 may not cover, fit within, or otherwise block the second opening906, and it will be understood by one skilled in the art that the secondopening 906 does not need to be partially or fully blocked in order topush a sample through the second opening 906. For example, the moveablepump head 908 may not include a base 908B at all. Instead, the moveablepump head 908 may be made of a flexible material that forms a seal withthe underside of the pumping chamber 904. In this case, the moveablepump head 908 may be moved up and down in a manner similar to a plungerin order to change the effective volume of the pumping chamber 904. Whenthe volume decreases, the sample is at least partially forced out of thepumping chamber 904 through the second opening 906.

In general, incorporating the pumping mechanism 900 into an ingestibledevice may not impair the function of the openings, ports, valves,membranes, sampling chambers, or other structures of the ingestibledevice, and any of the teachings or embodiments described in conjunctionwith the ingestible devices 100, 200, 600, or 702-706 may be combined indifferent embodiments of an ingestible device along with the pumpingmechanism 900. For example, the pumping mechanism 900 may replace thefirst valve 214 in the ingestible device 200 (FIG. 2), and may be usedto force the sample into the sampling chamber 212. As an alternateexample, the pumping mechanism 900 may be used to force samples into thesampling chamber 304 of the osmotic valve mechanism 300 (FIG. 3). Asanother example, the pumping mechanism 900 may be incorporated into anembodiment of the ingestible device 600 (FIG. 6) where the exit port 616is not included, and the pumping mechanism 900 may be used to force thesample into the sampling chamber 612 despite the pressure that mayresult from air or gas 618 being trapped within the sampling chamber612.

For illustrative purposes, the examples provided by this disclosurefocus primarily on a number of different example embodiments of aningestible device, such as the ingestible devices 100, 200, 600, and702-706. However, it is understood that variations in the general shapeand design of one or more embodiments of the ingestible devicesdescribed in relation to FIGS. 1-9 may be made without significantlychanging the functions and operations of the device. Furthermore, itshould be noted that the features and limitations described in any oneembodiment may be applied to any other embodiment herein, and thedescriptions and examples relating to one embodiment may be combinedwith any other embodiment in a suitable manner. For example, any of thevalves described in relation to FIG. 7 may be used as the valves 214 and216 described in relation to FIG. 2. As an alternate example, theabsorptive material 310 and flexible membrane 314 described in relationto FIG. 3 may be incorporated into any of the various sampling chambersdescribed in various embodiments of ingestible devices 100, 200, 600,and 702-706 in order to automatically seal the sampling chamber.Moreover, the figures and examples provided in disclosure are intendedto be only exemplary, and not limiting. Only the claims that follow aremeant to set bounds as to what the present invention includes. It shouldalso be noted that the systems and/or methods described above may beapplied to, or used in accordance with, other systems and/or methods,including systems and/or methods that may or may not be directly relatedto ingestible devices.

FIG. 10 illustrates, in a highly schematic fashion, an ingestible device1000 having a housing 1010 that includes a first end 1012 and a secondend 1014 opposite first end 1012. Housing 1010 also includes a wall 1016that connects first end 1012 and second end 1014. Wall 1016 has anopening 1018 that allows fluid from an exterior of the ingestible device1000 (e.g., from the GI tract) and into an interior of ingestible device1000.

FIG. 11 depicts a cross-sectional view of a portion of the interior ofingestible device 1000. As shown in FIG. 11, the interior of ingestibledevice 1000 includes a valve system 1100 and a sampling system 1200.Valve system 1100 is depicted as having a portion that is flush with theopening 1018 so that valve system 1100 prevents fluid exterior toingestible device 1000 from entering sampling system 1200. However, asdescribed in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 12-16, valvesystem 1100 can change position so that valve system 1100 allows fluidexterior to ingestible device 1000 to enter sampling system 1200.

FIGS. 12 and 16 illustrate valve system 1100 in more detail. As shown inFIG. 12, valve system 1100 includes an actuation mechanism 1110, atrigger 1120, and a gate 1130. In FIGS. 12 and 16, a leg 1132 of gate1130 is flush against, and parallel with, housing wall 1016 so that gateleg 1132 covers opening 1018 to prevent fluid exterior to ingestibledevice 1000 (e.g., fluid in the GI tract) from entering the interior ofingestible device 1000. A protrusion 1134 of gate 1130 engages a lip1122 of trigger 1120. A peg 1124 of trigger 1120 engages a wax pot 1112of actuation mechanism 1110. Referring to FIG. 16, a biasing mechanism1140 includes a compression spring 1142 that applies an upward force ongate 1130. Biasing mechanism 1140 also includes a torsion spring 1144that applies a force on trigger 1120 in the counter-clockwise direction.In FIGS. 12 and 16, the force applied by torsion spring 1144 iscounter-acted by the solid wax in pot 1112, and the force applied bycompression spring 1142 is counter-acted by lip 1122.

FIGS. 13A and FIG. 13B show an embodiment of the manner in whichactuation mechanism 1110 actuates movement of trigger 1120. Similar toFIGS. 12 and 16, FIG. 13A shows a configuration in which peg 1124applies a force against solid wax pot 1112 due to torsion spring 1144,and in which the solid nature of wax pot 1112 resists the force appliedby peg 1124. A control unit 1150 is in signal communication with valvesystem 1100. During use of ingestible device 1000, a control unit 1150receives a signal, indicating that the position of valve system 1100should change, e.g., so that ingestible device 1000 can take a sample ofa fluid in the GI tract. Control unit 1150 sends a signal that causes aheating system 1114 of actuation system 1100 to heat the wax in pot 1112so that the wax melts. As shown in FIG. 13B, the melted wax is not ableto resist the force applied by peg 1124 so that, under the force oftorsion spring 1144, trigger 1120 moves in a counter-clockwise fashion.

FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate the interaction of trigger 1120 and gate1130 before and after actuation. As shown in FIG. 14A, when wax pot 1112is solid (corresponding to the configuration shown in FIG. 13A),protrusion 1134 engages lip 1122, which prevents the force ofcompression spring 1142 from moving gate 1130 upward. As shown in FIG.14B, when the wax in pot 1112 melts (FIG. 13B), trigger 1120 movescounter-clockwise, and lip 1122 disengages from protrusion 1134. Thisallows the force of compression spring 1142 to move gate 1130 upward. Asseen by comparing FIG. 14A to FIG. 14B, the upward movement of gate 1130results in an upward movement of an opening 1136 in gate leg 1132.

FIGS. 15A and 15B illustrate the impact of the upward movement ofopening 1136 on the ability of ingestible device 1000 to obtain asample. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the wax in pot 1112 is solid (FIGS.13A and 14A), opening 1136 in is not aligned with opening 1018 in wall1016 of ingestible device 1000. Instead, gate leg 1132 covers opening1018 and blocks fluid from entering the interior of ingestible device1000. As shown in FIG. 15B, when the wax in pot 1112 is melted andtrigger 1120 and gate 1130 have moved (FIGS. 13B and 14B), opening 1136in gate 1130 is aligned with opening 1018 in wall 1016. In thisconfiguration, fluid that is exterior to ingestible device 1000 (e.g.,in the GI tract) can enter the interior of ingestible device 1000 viaopenings 1018 and 1036.

While the foregoing description is made with regard to a valve systemhaving one open position and one closed position (e.g., a two-stagevalve system), the disclosure is not limited in this sense. Rather, theconcepts described above with regard to a two stage valve system can beimplemented with a valve system have more than two stages (e.g., threestages, four stages, five stages, etc.). For example, FIGS. 17A-19Cillustrate cross-sectional views of a three-stage valve system 1700.FIGS. 17A, 18A and 19A illustrate different views of components of valvesystem 1700 in the same position. FIGS. 17B, 18B and 19B illustratedifferent views of components of valve system 1700 in the same position.FIGS. 17C, 18C and 19C illustrate different views of components of valvesystem 1700 in the same position.

As shown in FIGS. 17A-19C, valve system 1700 includes an actuationsystem 1710, a trigger 1720, a gate 1730 and a biasing system 1740.Actuation system 1710 includes a first wax pot 1712, a second wax pot1714, a first heating system 1716 and a second heating system 1718.Trigger 1720 includes a first lip 1722, a second lip 1724, a first peg1726 and a second peg 1728. Gate 1730 includes a gate leg 1732 and aprotrusion 1734. Gate leg 1732 has an opening 1736. Biasing system 1740includes a compression spring 1742 and a torsion spring 1744. Inaddition, the ingestible device includes a control unit 1750.

As shown in FIGS. 17A, 18A and 19A, in the first stage, protrusion 1734engages first lip 1722, and first peg 1726 engages first wax pot 1712.Compression spring 1742 applies an upward force on gate 1730, andtorsion spring 1744 applies a force on trigger 1720 in thecounter-clockwise direction. The force applied by torsion spring 1744 iscounter-acted by the solid wax in first pot 1712, and the force appliedby compression spring 1742 is counter-acted by first lip 1722. Opening1736 is not aligned with opening 1018.

FIGS. 17B, 18B and 19B illustrate the configuration in a second stage,after control unit 1750 sends a signal to first heating system 1716 tomelt the wax in first pot 1712. In the second stage, trigger 1720 hasmoved counter-clockwise relative to its position in the first stage.First peg 1726 is positioned in first pot 1712 because the melted waxcannot prevent this movement. Further counter-clockwise movement oftrigger 1720 is prevented by the engagement of second peg 1728 with thesolid wax in second pot 1714. With the counter-clockwise movement oftrigger 1720, first lip 1722 disengages from protrusion 1734, and gate1730 moves upward so that opening 1736 in leg 1732 is aligned withopening 1018. Further upward movement of gate 1730 is prevented by theengagement of protrusion 1734 with second lip 1724.

FIGS. 17C, 18C and 19C illustrate the configuration in a third stage,after control unit 1750 sends a signal to second heating system 1718 tomelt the wax in second pot 1714. In the third stage, trigger 1720 hasmoved counter-clockwise relative to its position in the second stage.Second peg 1728 is positioned in second pot 1714 because the melted waxcannot prevent this movement. Further counter-clockwise rotation isprevented by the engagement of first and second pegs 1726 and 1728,respectively with first and second pots 1712 and 1714, respectively.Protrusion 1734 is disengaged from second lip 1724, allowing the forceof compression spring 1742 to move gate 1730 upward so that opening 1736is no longer aligned with opening 1018.

FIG. 20 illustrates another embodiment of a three stage valve system2000 that can be used in an ingestible device. Valve system 2000 that issimilar to valve system 1700 except that actuation system 2010 includesthree includes wax pots 2012, 2014 and 2016, respectively, that define atriangle, and trigger 2020 includes three pegs 2022, 2024 and 2026,respectively, that define a corresponding triangle. Actuation system2010 is controlled using a control unit 2050. Actuation system 2010 alsoincludes a first heating system 2018 that heats the wax in pots 2012 and2014 and so that pegs 2022 and 2024 enters their corresponding pot,causing valve system 2000 to move from its first stage to its secondstage. Actuation system 2010 also includes a second heating system 2028that heats the wax in pot 2016 so that pegs 2026 enters pot 2016,causing valve system 2000 to move from its second stage to its thirdstage.

In the foregoing discussion, embodiments actuating systems are describedthat include one or more wax pots and corresponding heating systems. Butthe disclosure is not limited to such actuating systems. Generally, anyactuating system can be used that will provide an appropriate force toresist counter-clockwise movement of the trigger when desired and toremove that force when desired. Examples of such actuation systemsinclude a pot with a silicon or wax seal. A control unit may be used torupture the seal and allow counter clock-wise movement of the trigger.Additionally, or alternatively, the actuation mechanism may usedissolvable coating to that dissolves over time or in the presence of asubstance. As the coating dissolves, the trigger may move further in thecounter clock-wise direction. Other actuation mechanisms may also applyan attractive force rather than remove a resistive force. For example,the actuation mechanism may include magnetic pegs and slidable magnetsThe magnets may be located behind the pots or may slide to a positionbehind the pots when the valve system should change stages. As themagnets behind the pots slide into range of the magnetic trigger pegs,the trigger moves in the counterclockwise direction due to theattractive force between the magnetic peg and the magnets. The slidingmechanism to move the slidable magnets may be powered by an osmoticpump, a pressurized chamber, or any other applicable method of movementpreviously described in other embodiments.

In the discussion above, embodiments of triggers are disclosed thatinclude one or more lips and one or more pegs. However, the disclosureis not limited to such triggers. In general, for example, any triggerdesign can be used that is capable of providing the step-wise movementof the trigger. Such trigger designs include, for example, a releasablelatch coupling or a saw toothed engagement wall. A different embodimentmay utilize a ball in socket joint to engage the trigger and gate, inwhich the “socket” is located on the trigger. It is to be noted thatsuch designs need not be based on counter-clockwise movement and may be,for example, designed for the controlled movement of the trigger in oneor more of various degrees of freedom. For example, rather than rotate,the trigger may be configured to slide laterally to push a peg of thetrigger into a melted wax pot.

The discussion above describes embodiments of gates that include aprotrusion and a leg with an opening. The disclosure is not limited tosuch designs. Generally, any appropriate arrangement can be used so longas it provides the desired step-wise controlled movement of an openingto the interior of the ingestible device. Exemplary designs include agate that is capable of responding to or applying magnetic forces on thetrigger. A saw toothed pattern may also provide a step-wise gatemovement. Additionally, embodiments include a latch designed toreleasably couple the gate to the trigger. A different embodiment mayutilize a ball in socket joint in which the “ball” is located on thegate. Optionally, a gate can include one or regions that include one ormore appropriate sealing materials positioned to cover the opening inthe housing of the ingestible device when the gate is positioned toprevent fluid exterior to the ingestible device from entering theinterior of the device via the opening in the housing of the ingestibledevice.

In the foregoing discussion, embodiments of biasing systems aredescribed that include a compression spring and a biasing spring.However, the disclosure is not limited in this sense. In general, anybiasing elements can be used to provide the counter-clockwise force tothe trigger and/or to provide the upward force to the gate. Exemplarybiasing elements include elastic bands, wherein a stretched elastic bandacts similar to a stretched compression spring as described. Additionalbasing mechanisms may include magnets and/or magnetic forces to inducetrigger or gate movement. For example, a magnet may be located above thegate, where, like the constant force of the stretched compressionspring, the magnet also applies a constant attractive force on the gate.

As noted above in addition to a valve system, an ingestible deviceincludes a sampling system. FIGS. 21A and 21B illustrate a partial crosssectional view of ingestible device 1000 with sampling system 1200 andcertain components of valve system 1100. Sampling system 1200 includes aseries of sponges configured to absorb fluid from an opening, move thefluid to a location within the housing, and prepare the fluid fortesting. Preparation for testing may include filtering the fluid andcombining the fluid with a chemical assay. The assay may be configuredto dye cells in the filtered sample. The series of sponges includes awicking sponge 1210, a transfer sponge 1220, a volume sponge 1230, andan assay sponge 1240.

Wicking sponge 1210 is made of an absorptive material that absorbs thefluid form the opening in the housing when the valve is open i.e. whenthe inlet and the housing are aligned. The wicking sponge transfers thefluid from the opening to a filter. Wicking sponge 1210 includes awicking tongue 1212 extended towards the housing 1016. As shown in FIG.21A, before actuation of the actuation system (FIGS. 13A, 14A, 15A),wicking tongue 1212 is not adjacent opening 1018 in wall 1016 ofingestible device 1000 so that wicking tongue 1212 does not absorb fluidexterior to ingestible device 1000. However, as shown in FIG. 21B, afteractuation of the actuation system (FIGS. 13B, 14B, 15B), wicking tongue1212 is adjacent opening 1018 so that wicking sponge 1212 is made of anabsorptive material that absorbs fluid that passes through opening 1018,e.g., fluid from the GI tract. Fluid absorbed by wicking tongue 1212 cantravel through wicking sponge 1210 to a distal end 1214 of wickingsponge 1210. The wicking sponge 1210 and wicking tongue 1212 may be madeof a VF2 sponge, an Ahlstrom M13 sponge, MF/F material, a Carwild IvalonPolyvinyl Alcohol material, or another suitable absorptive material.Optionally, the dimensions of the sponge material may be selected toenable all its desired functions while remaining precisely packagedwithin the capsule. In some embodiments, Carwild Ivalon PolyvinylAlcohol material is cut to the dimensions 1.4 millimeters (height)×6millimeters (width)×8.5 millimeters (length). In certain embodiments,one or more of the following parameters can be considered when selectingan appropriate material and/or its dimension: ability to load one morepreservative materials; desired preservative material(s) to be loaded;capacity to hold one or more dried preservatives; ability to facilitatehydration of one or more dried preservative materials upon contact withone or more GI fluids; capacity to capture fluid (e.g., GI fluid); andswelling properties upon fluid uptake (generally, it is desirable tohave little or no swelling upon fluid uptake). Typically, thepreservative(s) is (are) selected based on the analyte of interest.

Nucleic acid preservatives can be used to prevent or reduce the rate ofnucleic acid degradation or denaturation, and/or increase the stabilityof nucleic acids, e.g., to maintain nucleic acid structure. In someembodiments, the nucleic acid preservative is nuclease inhibitor(deoxyribonuclease inhibitor). In some embodiments, the nucleic acidpreservative is a ribonuclease inhibitor. Nuclease inhibitors andribonuclease inhibitors are known in the art, and have been describedin, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,224,379, herein incorporated by reference inits entirety. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid preservative mixturecan include EDTA, sodium citrate, an ammonium sulphate. In someembodiments, the RNA preservative mixture includes 2 mL of 0.5M EDTA,1.25 ml of 1 M sodium citrate, 35 g of ammonium sulphate, and 46.8 mL ofdH20. In some embodiments, the RNA preservative is an RNAlater™stabilization solution (ThermoFisher Scientific), as described in U.S.Pat. No. 7,056,673, which is herein incorporated by reference in itsentirety. In some embodiments, an RNA preservative can include one ormore of triphenylmethane dyes (such as methyl green, crystal violet,pararosaniline, or tris-(4-aminophenyl)methane), cresyl violet,polyamines, and cobalt ions. In some embodiments, an RNA preservativecan include one or more of spermine, spermidine,1,10-diamino-4,7-diazadecane, 1,11-diamino-4,8-diazaundecane,1,13-diamino-4,10-diazatridecane, 1,14-diamino-4,11-diazatetradecane,1,15-diamino-4,12-diazapentadecane, 1,16-diamino-4,13-diazahexadecane,1,17-diamino-4,14-diazaheptadecane, 1,18-diamino-4,15-diazanonadecane,1,19-diamino-4,16-diazaeicosane, and 1,20-diamino-4,17-diazaheneicosane.

Protein preservatives can be used to prevent or reduce the rate ofprotein degradation or denaturation, and/or increase the stability ofproteins, e.g., to maintain protein structure. Preservatives caninclude, by way of example, protease inhibitors, surfactants (e.g.,nonionic surfactants), emulsifiers, acids, parabens, esters and proteinstabilizers.

In some embodiments, the preservative can prevent or reduce thedigestion or degradation of proteins by one or more proteases. In someembodiments, the preservative can be a protease inhibitor. In someembodiments, the protease inhibitor is a serine protease inhibitor, ametalloprotease inhibitor, an aminopeptidase inhibitor, a cysteinepeptidase inhibitor, or an aspartyl protease inhibitor. In someembodiments, the protease inhibitor can prevent or reduce digestion byproteases such as, but not limited to, trypsin, chymotrypsin, plasminkallikrein, thrombin, papain, cathepsin B, cathepsin L, calpain andstaphopain, endoproteinase Lys-C, Kallikrein, and thrombin. In someembodiments, the protease inhibitor can be4-(2-aminoethyl)benzenesulfonyl fluoride hydrochloride (AEBSF, CAS30827-99-7), aprotinin (CAS 9087-70-1), bestatin (CAS 58970-76-6), E-64(CAS 66701-25-5), leupeptin (CAS 103476-89-7), pepstatin A (CAS26305-03-3), or N-p-Tosyl-L-phenylalanine chloromethyl ketone (TPCK). Insome embodiments, the protein biomarker preservative includes4-(2-aminoethyl)benzenesulfonyl fluoride hydrochloride (AEBSF, CAS30827-99-7), aprotinin (CAS 9087-70-1), bestatin (CAS 58970-76-6), E-64(CAS 66701-25-5), leupeptin (CAS 103476-89-7), pepstatin A (CAS26305-03-3), DMSA, and bovine serum albumin, and, optionally,N-p-Tosyl-L-phenylalanine chloromethyl ketone (TPCK).

In some embodiments, the preservative can be a protein stabilizer suchas, for example, Trehalose or Dextran.

A preservative as disclosed herein can be an acid. In some embodiments,the preservative can be an acid with a pKa between 3 and 7. In someembodiments, the preservative can be citric acid, or sorbic acid.

In some embodiments, the preservative can be a surfactant such as apolysorbate. Exemplary polysorbates include, for example, polysorbate 20(polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate), polysorbate 40(polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monopalmitate), polysorbate 60(polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate), polysorbate 80(polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate), sorbitan monolaurate,sorbitan monopalmitate, sorbitan monostearate, sorbitan tristearate, andsorbitan monooleate.

In some embodiments, the preservative is a paraben, parahydroxybenzoate,or ester of parahydroxybenzoic acid (4-hydroxybenzoic acid). In someembodiments, the preservative can be propyl paraben.

In some embodiments, the preservative can include dimethyl sulfoxide(DMSA). In some embodiments, the preservative can include bovine serumalbumin.

The preservative can be a mixture of two or more of a proteaseinhibitor, a surfactant, an emulsifier, an acid, a paraben, and anester. For example, a preservative as described herein can include amixture of two or more protease inhibitors. In some embodiments, apreservative as described herein can include a mixture of one or moreprotease inhibitors, and one or more acids. In some embodiments, apreservative as described herein can include a mixture of one or moreprotease inhibitors, one or more acids, and an ester, e.g., a paraben.In some embodiments, a preservative as described herein can include amixture of one or more protease inhibitors, one or more acids, one ormore esters, and one or more surfactants. In some embodiments, thepreservative can include the HALT™ protease inhibitor cocktail (ThermoFisher). In some embodiments, the preservative can include the HALT™protease inhibitor cocktail (Thermo Fisher) and TPCK. In someembodiments, the preservative can be bactericidal to preserve a protein,e.g., a protein biomarker. In some embodiments, the preservative mixturethat is bactericidal includes citric acid (CAS 77-92-9), sorbic acid(CAS 110-44-1), propylparaben (CAS 94-13-3), tween 80 (CAS 9005-65-6),ethanol, bovine serum albumin, and TPCK (CAS 402-71-1).

In some embodiments, a preservative mixture containing one or moreprotease inhibitors can be contacted with a protein in thegastrointestinal tract to stabilize the protein. In some embodiments,the protein is an immunoglobulin. In some embodiments, the protein is anIgA or IgM. In some embodiments, the protein is a secretory IgA. In anexemplary embodiment, a preservative mixture containing AEBSF,aprotinin, bestatin, E-64, leupeptin and pepstatin A protease inhibitors(HALT™, Thermo Fisher), and N-p-Tosyl-L-phenylalanine chloromethylketone (TPCK, Sigma Aldrich) can be used to stabilize one or moreimmunoglobulin proteins in the gastrointestinal tract, e.g., secretoryIgA.

In some embodiments, a preservative mixture containing one or moreprotease inhibitors, acids, parabens, and surfactants can be contactedwith a protein in the gastrointestinal tract to stabilize the protein.In some embodiments, the protein is not an immunoglobulin. In anexemplary embodiment, a preservative mixture containing AEBSF,aprotinin, bestatin, E-64, leupeptin and pepstatin A protease inhibitors(HALT™, Thermo Fisher), N-p-Tosyl-L-phenylalanine chloromethyl ketone(TPCK, Sigma Aldrich), citric acid, sorbic acid, propyl paraben,polysorbate 80 (Tween 80), BSA can be used to stabilize one or morenon-immunoglobulin proteins in the gastrointestinal tract, e.g., acytokine, calprotectin, S100A12, lactoferrin, M2-pyruvate kinase,neopterin, a metalloproteinase, a myeloperoxidase, polymorphonuclearelastase, and/or alpha 1 antitrypsin eosinophilic protein X.

In some embodiments, one or more internal controls are included in aningestible device, as described herein, that is used to collect one ormore analytes. The internal control can be used to monitor the stabilityand degradation of small molecules, nucleic acids, and/or proteins inthe device over time. In some embodiments, the internal control can be asmall molecule, a nucleic acid, and/or a protein. In some embodiments,the small molecule internal control can be 2,4 dinitrophenol (2,4, DNP),femocene, and/or a deuterium-labeled cholesterol. In some embodiments,the nucleic acid internal control can be a DNA internal control. In someembodiments, the nucleic acid internal control can be a RNA internalcontrol. In some embodiments, the RNA internal control can be a G+C-rich(60%) RNA molecule with extensive secondary structure, based on amodified delta virus genome, as described in Dingle et al., J. Clin.Microbiol. 42(3):1003-1011, 2004, herein incorporated by reference inits entirety. In some embodiments, the protein internal control can behuman serum albumin (HSA), fluorescein isothiocyanate, and/or biotin.

In some embodiments, the preservative is a microbial preservative. Inexemplary embodiments, the preservative prevents, inhibits, or reducesthe growth and/or multiplication of a microorganism. In someembodiments, the preservative permanently prevents, inhibits, or reducesthe growth and/or multiplication of a microorganims. In exemplaryembodiments, the preservative prevents, inhibits, or reduces the growthand/or multiplication of bacteria. In some embodiments, the preservativepermanently prevents, inhibits, or reduces the growth and/ormultiplication of bacteria. In some embodiments, the preservative is oneor more of a bacteriostatic, bacteriocidal, and/or fixative compound.

Bacteriostatic preservatives arrest the growth or multiplication of thebacteria. In some embodiments, the preservative kills the bacteria,thereby preventing growth and multiplication. Bactericidal preservativeskill bacteria. Bacteria enter a device as described herein in the GItract of a subject, and are contacted with a bacteriostatic preservativethat arrests bacterial growth and multiplication, or a bactericidalpreservative that kills the bacteria. As a result, the numbers ofbacteria in the device are representative of the bacterial microflorathat was present in the GI tract at the time the bacteria first enteredthe device.

In some embodiments, the preservative can be a bacteriostatic foodpreservative, such as, but not limited to, sorbic acid, citric acid,propyl paraben, nisin, dimethyl dicarbonate, andethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA). In some embodiments, thepreservative can be sodium azide, hydroxyurea, fusidic acid,diazolidinyl urea, imidazolidinyl urea, salicylic acid, barium andnickle chloride, metallic copper, thimerosal, 2-phenoxyethanol, orProClin™. In some embodiments, the preservative can be one or more ofsorbic acid, citric acid, propyl paraben, nisin, dimethyl dicarbonate,ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), sodium azide, hydroxyurea,fusidic acid, diazolidinyl urea, imidazolidinyl urea, salicylic acid,barium and nickle chloride, metallic copper, thimerosal,2-phenoxyethanol, and ProClin™.

In some embodiments, the preservative prevents or reduces nucleic aciddegradation, in addition to preventing or inhibiting the growth and/ormultiplication of bacteria. The preservation of nucleic acid integrityallows for the quantification of bacteria using PCR-based DNA or RNAanalysis methods, e.g., 16S ribosomal RNA PCR and sequencing. In someembodiments, the preservative includes EDTA.

In some embodiments, the bactericidal preservative can include one ormore of citric acid (CAS 77-92-9), sorbic acid (CAS 110-44-1),propylparaben (CAS 94-13-3), Tween 80 (CAS 9005-65-6), ethanol, bovineserum albumin, and TPCK (CAS 402-71-1). In some embodiments, thebactericidal preservative is a mixture of citric acid, sorbic acid,propyl-paraben, and Tween 80, e.g., the bactericidal preservative caninclude 2.5% (m/v) citric acid, 2.5% (m/v) sorbic acid, 2.5% (m/v)propyl-paraben), and 3.13% (m/v) Tween 80. In some embodiments, thebactericidal preservative is a mixture of sorbic acid, Tris, EDTA, Tween80, and NaCl, e.g., the bactericidal preservative can include 2.0% (m/v)sorbic acid, tris, EDTA, 1.0% (m/v) Tween 80, and 1.0% (m/v) NaCl. Insome embodiments, the bactericidal preservative is a heavy metalbactericidal mixture. In some embodiments, the bactericidal preservativeis a mixture that includes barium chloride and nickel chloride. In someembodiments, the bactericidal preservative is thimerosal, e.g., astabilizer that includes 0.1% thimerosal.

A cell filter 1250 is located between distal end 1214 of wicking sponge1210 and a first end 1222 of transfer sponge 1220. The cell filter 1250is configured to prevent undesired cells, such as Hela cells, fromentering one or more downstream sponges in sampling system 1200,particularly sponges used in testing. In some embodiments, the filtercan be used to filter and/or selectively kill eukaryotic cells.Excluding such undesired cells enhances the accuracy of variousanalytical results.

Fluid that passes from wicking sponge 1210 and through cell filter 1250can enter transfer sponge 1220 via its first end first end 1222.Transfer sponge 1220 is configured to move the filtered fluid from cellfilter 1250 to volume sponge 1230 and/or assay sponge 1240.

To allow transfer sponge 1220 (made of an absorptive material) to absorba relatively large volume of fluid, transfer sponge 1220 is shaped(e.g., arc-shaped) to provide a relatively long distance between firstend 1222 of transfer sponge 1220 and a second end 1224 of transfersponge 1220. Second end 1224 contacts both volume sponge 1230 and assaysponge 1240 while preventing volume sponge 1230 and assay sponge 1240from directly contacting each other. A barrier 1260 is located betweenfirst end 1222 and volume sponge 1230 to ensure that fluid absorbed intransfer sponge 1220 at first end 1222 travels to second end 1224 beforebeing absorbed by volume sponge 1230. Although depicted as beingarc-shaped, transfer sponge 1220 can have one or more differentconfigurations, such as, for example, an extended straight line ormultiple curves, depending, for example, on the desired volume of sampleand/or desired transfer speed. In general, the shorter and/or thinnerthe path of transfer sponge 1220, the quicker the transfer speed fromfirst end 1222 to second end 1224. The transfer sponge 1220 may be madeof a VF2 sponge, an Ahlstrom M13 sponge, MF/F material, or anothersuitable absorptive material.

Volume sponge 1230 is made of an absorptive material that absorbsadditional fluid for testing and is in fluid communication with assaysponge 1240 via second end 1224 of transfer sponge 1220. Volume sponge1230 can be particularly useful when fluorescent or optical testing isused. In some embodiments, assay sponge 1240 and transfer sponge 1224may not individually contain a sufficient volume of the sample to attaina confident test result. The volume of volume sponge 1230, assay sponge1240, and second end 1224 of the transfer sponge 1220 sum to asufficient testing volume for optical, and other, tests. Assay sponge1240 contains a chemical assay that is used to test the sample or toprepare the sample for a test. Once assay sponge 1240 is saturated, theassay chemicals are free to flow from assay sponge 1240 and interactwith sample absorbed by transfer sponge 1220 and volume sponge 1230.Volume sponge 1230 and the assay sponge 1240 may be made of a VF2sponge, an Ahlstrom M13 sponge, MF/F material, or another suitableabsorptive material. Preferably, the wicking sponge, wicking tongue,transfer sponge, and assay sponge are Ahlstrom M13 sponges, and thevolume sponge is a VF2 sponge.

Cell filter 1250 can be made from any appropriate material and have anyappropriate dimensions. Exemplary materials include polycarbonate(PCTE), polyethersulfone (PES), polyester (PETE) andpolytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). In some embodiments, the dimensions ofcell filter 1250 can be about 9.5 millimeters by about 6.5 millimetersby about 0.05 millimeter.

Sampling system 1200 also includes a membrane 1270 located between assaysponge 1240 and a vent 1280 for gases to leave sampling system 1200.Membrane 1270 is configured to allow one or more gases to leave samplingsystem 1200 via an opening 1280, while maintaining liquid in samplingsystem 1200.

FIG. 22 illustrates an embodiment of ingestible device 1000 with arelatively detailed view of both valve system 1100 and sampling system1200. FIG. 22 shows valve system 1100 positioned prior to actuation ofactuation system 1110 (e.g., when configured as shown in FIGS. 13A, 14A,15A and 20A).

FIG. 23 illustrates an embodiment of an ingestible device includingsampling system 1200 and three-stage valve system 1700 positioned in itsthird stage.

FIG. 24 illustrates an embodiment of an ingestible device 1000 includingsampling system 1200 and valve system 2000 positioned in its thirdstage.

FIG. 25 is a highly schematic illustration of an ingestible device 3000that contains multiple different systems that cooperate for obtaining asample and analyzing a sample, e.g., within the GI tract of a subject.Ingestible device 3000 includes a power system 3100 (e.g., one or morebatteries), configured to power an electronics system 3200 (e.g.,including a control system, optionally in signal communication with anexternal base station), and an analytic system 3500.

Exemplary analytical systems include assay systems, such as, forexample, optical systems containing one or more sources of radiationand/or one more detectors. Such systems may use, for example, a lightsource that illuminates and a sample and a detector configured to detectlight that is emitted by the sample (e.g., fluorescence spectroscopy),optical density (e.g., the portion of light that passes through thesample), and/or light that is diffracted by sample (e.g., diffractionoptics). An analytical system may use, for example, ELISA (enzyme-linkedimmunosorbent assay). An analytical system may use, for example, LOCI(luminescent oxygen channeling) or LOCI (fluorescent oxygen channeling).An analytical technique may involve incubating and/or diluting a samplebefore or during the analysis/assaying of the sample. An analyticaltechnique may involve the use of staining/dyeing a live cell.

Ingestible device 3000 also includes a sampling system 3400 for takingin a sample from the environment exterior to ingestible device 3000, anda valve system 3300 that regulates the ability of a fluid to accesssampling system 3400.

FIG. 26 provides an exploded view of the ingestible device 3000. FIG. 26includes the exploded view of ingestible device 3000, showing a generalconfiguration of the systems in FIG. 25. FIG. 26 includes power system3100 (e.g., a stack of batteries), electronic system 3200 (e.g., a PCBand associated wiring), valve system 3300, sampling system 3400, andanalytic system 3500.

FIG. 27 illustrates a portion of an ingestible device 4000 with a port4154 b in an open position to the exterior of the ingestible device4000. The ingestible device 4000 may include a cylinder-shaped rotatableelement 4150 that includes sampling ports on the wall of the rotatableelement 4150. The sampling chamber 4150 is wrapped by a shell element4140 with dividers to form a series of dilution chambers 4151 a-nbetween the shell element 4140 and the rotatable element 4150. Inoperation, when the ingestible device 4000 determines the device itselfarrives at a target location within the GI tract, the rotatable element4150 may be rotated into an open position such that an aperture of theshell element 4140 is aligned with the port 4154 b on the wall of therotatable element 4150 and the port 4154 b is exposed to the exterior ofthe ingestible device 4000 through the aperture. In this way, fluid fromthe GI tract can enter the port 4154 b and occupy the volume defined bythe port 154 b. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 24, the port 4154 b maybe a depression on the surface of a rotatable element 4150 and a numberof dilution chambers 4151 a-n are positioned circumferentially aroundthe axis of rotation of the rotatable element 4150. As previouslydiscussed, each of the dilution chambers 4151 a-n may store a dilutionfluid. In some embodiments, the depression is a cylindrical depression.Optionally, the depression may be a rectangular depression, or anyconcave depression forming a regular or irregular shape. In anotherembodiment, the port 4154 b may be connected to a chamber (not shown)within the rotatable element 4150 to create an enlarged space to storethe GI fluid sample from the external environment of the ingestibledevice.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device 4000 may further include acontroller and an actuator. The controller may determine that theingestible device 4000 is located at a target location of the GI tract,and then the actuator may trigger the rotation of the rotatable element4150 to align the port 4154 b at the open position to initiate thesampling. For example, the housing of ingestible device 4000 may have apH-sensitive enteric coating to detect or otherwise be sensitive to a pHlevel of the environment external to the ingestible device 4000, basedon which the controller may determine whether the ingestible device hasarrived at a target location. For another example, the ingestible device4000 may include an optical sensing unit that transmits an illuminationto the environment and collects a reflectance, based on which, theregio-specific location of the ingestible device 4000 may be identifiedbased on optical characteristics of the reflectance.

FIG. 28 shows one embodiment of a portion of an ingestible device with aport 4154 b at a first position aligned with a first dilution chamber4151 a. In operation, the rotatable element 4150 may be rotated to alignthe sampling port 4154 b and the first dilution chamber 4151 a such thatthe fluid sample from the GI tract stored within the volume of thesampling port 4154 b can be combined with dilution fluid in the firstdilution chamber to form a first dilution. The first dilution may thenoccupy the combined volume of the port 4154 b and first dilution chamber4151 a. Optionally, the rotatable element 4150 may be subsequentlyrotated to a second position such that the port 4154 b containing aportion of the first dilution is then moved to be aligned and in fluidcommunication with another dilution chamber, e.g., a second dilutionchamber that is next to the first dilution chamber along the rotationaldirection. In this way, the first dilution stored within the port 4154 bmay then again be diluted with the dilution fluid stored within thesecond dilution chamber. Similarly, if the rotatable element 4150 keepsrotating and allows the port 4154 b to be serially aligned with eachdilution chamber, then the original GI fluid sample may be dilutedserially and each dilution chambers 4151 a-n may be left with a dilutedGI fluid sample at a different dilution ratio.

FIG. 29 shows an embodiment of an element 4140 forming part of a set offive dilution chambers (e.g., including 4151 a-b) for surrounding arotatable element (e.g., 4150 in FIGS. 21-22) in an ingestible device asdescribed herein. In some embodiments, the device may contain a singledilution chamber. Alternatively, the device may contain 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7, 8 or greater than 8 dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, each dilution chamber 4151 a-n may be filled with adilution fluid prior to the ingestible device 4000 being administered.In another embodiment, the dilution fluid may be stored in a separatereservoir (not shown) within the ingestible device 4000. At the timewhen the ingestible device 4000 is determined to be at a target locationwithin the GI tract, a pumping mechanism may pump the dilution fluidinto one or more dilution chambers 4151 a-b via one or more outlet (notshown) of the reservoir.

In some embodiments, the shell element 4140 may have valves or pumps(not shown) between the dilution chambers 4151 a-n. For example, thediluted fluid from a first dilution chamber may be pumped into a seconddilution chamber via a valve between the two chambers.

Devices of the type depicted in FIGS. 27-29 optionally can include asampling system as disclosed herein.

In certain embodiments, an ingestible device includes a microscopicevaluation system. In some embodiments, bacterial cells in a sample maybe first labeled with fluorescent dyes (such as those described herein),and the fluorescently-labeled cells may be imaged and counted by themicroscopic evaluation using an ingestible device as described herein.For example, in some embodiments, the bacterial cells in a sample may belabeled with multiple analyte-binding reagents (e.g., multipleantibodies each specific for different types of analytes (e.g., bacteriaof different genera, species, and/or strains)), each conjugated to adifferent dye, thereby allowing for the imaging, detection and countingof the different types of analytes (e.g., bacteria) present in thesample. In other embodiments, the fluorescently-labeled cells arecounted as they pass through an onboard flow system (e.g., microfluidicsingle cell channeling). Examples of flow cytometry systems includehydrodynamic focusing, small diameter capillary tube flow, andrectangular capillary tube flow. As described herein, live bacteriacells are labeled, and the principles of flow cytometry are used toquantify labeled cells. Generally speaking, the photons from an incidentlaser beam are absorbed by the fluorophore and raised to a higher,unstable energy level. Within less than a nanosecond, the fluorophorere-emits the light at a longer representative wavelength where it ispassed through a series of dichroic filters. This reemitted light can becollected and interpreted as proportional to the number of labeledbacteria cells. In some embodiments, a sheath fluid is not used as partof the flow system to help accommodate the volume restrictions of thedevice. In some embodiments, a rectangular capillary tube is used toachieve a sufficiently large cross-sectional area and relatively thininspection area. The flow cytometry optical system operates parallel tothe fluidics system and serves to observe the redirection of lightpassing through the cell and delivers information about the bacterialcells. In some embodiments, rather than using a conventional laser andspherical lenses to focus the light to a point, an LED and cylindricallenses are used to focus the light to a line across a rectangularcapillary tube. In other embodiments, collimating lenses are used tomake the light source parallel, while cylindrical lenses are used torefine the inspection area. An exemplary optical configuration for thisarrangement can be seen in FIG. 30. In some embodiments, optical filterscan be added to permit the use of fluorophores. The characteristicwavelength of reemitted light from the fluorophores can be isolated anddetected with the use of dichroic, bandpass, and short or long wave passfilters. Generally, multiple dichroic lenses and photomultipliers areused, however, due to space limitations, only a single side-scatterdetector and forward scatter detector may be used in certainembodiments.

One of the design challenges of integrating flow cytometry into thedevice is to provide a pumping mechanism. Without moving fluid,individual bacteria cells cannot be identified and accounted for by flowcytometry within a fixed volume of fluid. In some embodiments, a gearmotor is to move fluid through the device. For example, a micromotorincluding a planetary gearhead (e.g., with a 25:1 reduction) can providethe desired amount of torque to create fluid flow. In anotherembodiment, a series of piezoelectric resistors embedded in the surfaceof a microfabricated plate is used to create flow. In yet anotherembodiment, a micropump that includes a pair of one-way valves and usesa magnetic pump membrane actuated by an external magnetic field is usedto create flow.

In some embodiments, the system architecture includes an opening andsealing mechanism combined with a rotary wiper which creates a pressuredriven flow via a gear motor. The gear motor can be used for otherfunctions in the device. As shown in FIG. 31, the components of theoptics and flow chamber systems fit within the device. In someembodiments, the sample fluid is absorbed via a flexible membrane at thetop of the capsule. In some embodiments, the gear motor has 270° ofpermissible travel which serves to open and fill the fluid chamber.During closure, the motor closes the ingress port while simultaneouslypushing the fluid through the rectangular capillary tube where theoptical system is located. The threaded component allows the flexiblemembrane to close and seal the ingress channel without changing thewiper height. In some embodiments, the volume of the sample chamber is25 μL, 50 μL, 75 μL or more. In some embodiments, two or more samplesare taken from the GI tract to procure a sufficient sample size.Referring to FIG. 31, an LED on the left side of the capillary tube andthe low-light photodetector on the right for capturing forward and sidescatter are shown. Once the fluid passes through the capillary tube, itexits the capsule via a one-way valve. In certain embodiments, the flowsystem allows for the detection of cell size and internal cellcomplexity, in addition to cell quantitation.

The foregoing discussion is not exhaustive with respect to variousingestible device designs, either with respect to sampling componentryor absorbent (sponge) design.

As an example, while ingestible devices have been described that includeone or more optical systems incorporated into the ingestible device, insome embodiments, an ingestible device does not include an opticalsystem. Optionally, such ingestible devices may also not include anyother analytical componentry. In embodiments of an ingestible device,which do not include an optical system and/or other analyticalcomponentry, there may be more room inside the ingestible device tostore one or more samples.

FIG. 32 shows a partial view of an exemplary embodiment of an ingestibledevice 5010 in which a portion of the enclosure of ingestible device5010 has been removed. Ingestible device 5010 may be used for collectingsubstances. Ingestible device 5010 may generally be in the shape of acapsule, like a conventional pill. Accordingly, the shape of ingestibledevice 5010 provides for easier ingestion and is also familiar tohealthcare practitioners and patients.

The structure of ingestible device 5010 includes first portion 5012 andsecond portion 5014. First portion 5012 includes control electronics, apower supply, and a communication system. Second portion 5014 isgenerally configured to interact with the GI tract, such as, for examplebut not limited to, sample collection, substance delivery andenvironmental monitoring. Second portion 5014 includes a storagesub-unit 5016 with one or more chambers 5018 and a chamber enclosure5020 that encloses or overlays a storage sub-unit 5016. Each chamber5018 has a corresponding chamber opening 5022. Chamber enclosure 5020has an access port 5024. In this example embodiment, ingestible device5010 includes three chambers 5018, but there can be other embodimentsthat have one, two or more than three chambers.

FIGS. 33A-33C illustrate operation of ingestible device 5010. Generally,chamber enclosure 5020 operates as a “closed-loop” revolver mechanism.Chamber enclosure 5020 rotates, in a controlled manner, to align theaccess port 5024 with each of chamber openings 5022 for collecting, attargeted locations, samples of the contents in the GI into correspondingchambers 5018 (shown in FIG. 32), and/or for delivering substancesstored in chambers 5018 (shown in FIG. 32) to targeted locations withinthe body.

Generally, during collection of samples, the rotation of chamberenclosure 5020 may be described as a “closed-loop” revolver mechanismbecause each chamber opening 5022 is exposed only once during thepassage of ingestible device 5010 within the body in order to avoidcross-contamination of the collected samples. In other words, in someembodiments, chamber enclosure 5020 ideally rotates only once whencollecting samples during each usage of ingestible device 5010 so thataccess port 5024 aligns with each of chamber openings 5022 serially andonly once. That is, during collection of samples, access port 2224 doesnot bypass any chamber opening 5022 and also does not return to aprevious chamber opening 5022 during its rotation.

In some embodiments, chamber enclosure 5020 can rotate in abidirectional motion before completing one revolution and/or performmultiple revolutions during one usage of the ingestible device 5010 sothat at least one chamber opening 5022 is exposed multiple times. Achamber opening 5022 may need to be exposed multiple times if itscorresponding chamber stores solids or semi-solid reagents, sensors orcleaning agents for cleaning the GI tract.

As illustrated in FIG. 33A, shown therein generally is ingestible device5010 in an open position 5010 a in which access port 5024 on chamberenclosure 5020 is aligned with a chamber opening 5022. In thisconfiguration, ingestible device 5010 may collect substances throughchamber opening 5022. In other words, the contents of the GI tract maybe forced into exposed chamber 5018 (shown in FIG. 32) through muscularcontractions (e.g., peristalsis).

Thereafter, chamber enclosure 5020 may rotate to seal chamber opening5022. FIG. 33B shows ingestible device 5010 with a partiallyopen/partially closed position 5010 b in which access port 5024 has beenrotated such that chamber enclosure 5020 partially seals chamber opening5022.

FIG. 33C shows ingestible device 5010 in a closed position 5010 c, inwhich the chamber enclosure 5020 has been rotated a distance such thataccess port 5024 completely seals chamber opening 5022. If chamberenclosure 5020 has not rotated one revolution, chamber enclosure 5020may continue to rotate in the same direction in order to align accessport 5024 with another chamber opening 5022 depending if ingestibledevice 5010 has been configured to perform another operation (i.e.sampling or distribution).

In another example embodiment, chamber enclosure 5020 may be stationaryand storage sub-unit 5016 (shown in FIG. 32) may instead rotate to alignits one or more chamber openings 5022 with access port 5024. Rotatingstorage sub-unit 5016 instead of chamber enclosure 5020 may providegreater control over the rotation motion and a more constant motionsince storage sub-unit 5016 would not be subjected to a varyingviscosity arising from the contents in the GI tract. This arrangement,however, may limit a volume of at least one of chambers 5018.

In some embodiments, chamber enclosure 5020 or storage sub-unit 5016 mayrotate in a predetermined sequence of bidirectional rotational motions.As described above, when storage sub-unit 5016 is configured to rotateinstead of chamber enclosure 5020, the volume of at least one ofchambers 5018 can be limited. In order to avoid having to limit thevolume of the chambers 5018, non-recess areas that may be used toseparate different chambers 5018 in storage sub-unit 5016 may beminimized in volume or removed. Ingestible device 5010 can rotate in afirst direction for aligning access port 5024 with one of the twoadjacent chambers. Ingestible device 5010 can be configured to rotate ina second direction that is opposite to the first direction in order toavoid cross contamination between samples collected into or substancesreleased from those two adjacent chambers.

Ingestible device 5010 may be used for collecting usable samples fromthe contents of the GI tract (e.g., 100 μL sized samples) andmaintaining each sample in isolation from one another until the samplesare extracted.

In some embodiments, ingestible device 5010 may also be configured toconduct in-vivo measurements. Ingestible device 5010 is introduced intothe body with some of chambers 5018 being empty and some of chambers5018 carrying at least one reagents. At a predefined location in thebody, ingestible device 5010 is configured to collect a sample from theGI tract and to store the sample into a chamber carrying at least onereagent. After collection, in-vivo analysis may be conducted based onhow the collected sample interacts with the reagent inside chamber 5018.For example, ingestible device 5010 may use a biochemistry assay, suchas an enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), for performing in-situexperiments on collected samples. Alternatively, peripherals can beincluded into chambers 5018 for changing the dynamics of several in-vivoanalysis and measurements. The peripherals may include a light source, areceiver, a transducer, a heater, and the like. In general, the in-vivoexperiments vary according to the type of information that is beingsought.

FIG. 34 illustrates an exploded view of the components of ingestibledevice 5010 in one example embodiment. First portion 5012 of ingestibledevice 5010 includes an end closure 5030, and electronic componentsembedded on a main printed circuit board (PCB) 5032 including acommunication subsystem having communication peripherals 5034 and atransceiver 5036, a main microcontroller (i.e. processor) 5038, a powersupply 5040 and other peripheral components, including a magnetic switch5039, described in further detail below. Second portion 5014 ofingestible device 5010 generally includes a motor 5042 with a shaft5042s protrusing from motor 5042, storage sub-unit 5016, a secondary PCB5044, an encoding magnet arrangement 5046m and the chamber enclosure5020. Generally, by placing main PCB 5032 and secondary PCB 5044 indistinct regions inside ingestible device 5010, they may be preventedfrom experiencing the same electrical or physical hazards. Motor 5042 isinserted into a motor compartment 5054 that is located in the center ofstorage sub-unit 5016. PCB 5044 is annular and includes one or moreperipheral electronic components (e.g., a capacitor and a resistor,which can be used as a pull-up resistor), and a sensor 5064. Storagesub-unit 5016 further includes chambers 5018, with chamber openings5022, for storing one or more collected samples and/or for storing oneor more dispensable substances. Access holes 5056 are also located onstorage sub-unit 5016 orineted towards the first portion 5030.

End enclosure 5030 provides a hollow space defined by an inner wall thatis cylindrical with a domed end portion. End enclosure 5030 alsoincludes engagement members for aligning and releasably engaging withstorage sub-unit 5016 to releasably lock end enclosure 5030 in placeduring operation. In particular, engagement members releasably engagecomplementary structures 5052 in storage sub-unit 5016. When endenclosure 5030 locks with storage sub-unit 5016, end enclosure 5030overlaps with a rear of storage sub-unit 5016 and creates a seal. Insome embodiments, the overlap between end enclosure 5030 and storagesub-unit 5016 may span a width of 3 millimeters.

Some or all of the sponges of the above-described sampling systems maycontain one or more preservatives (see discussion above). Typically, theassay sponge and/or the volume sponge and/or the transfer sponge containone or more preservatives. Typically, the preservative(s) are selectedbased on the analyte of interest, e.g., an analyte (such as a nucleicacid or protein biomarker) for a GI disorder.

In some embodiments, an ingestible is configured to delivery one or moresubstances (e.g., one more therapeutic substances). FIGS. 35-55 provideillustrative and non-limiting examples of such ingestible devices. It isto be understood that one more features from such an ingestible devicecan be combined with one or more features of an ingestible deviceconfigured to take one more samples, such as, for example, describedabove with regarding to FIGS. 1-34.

FIG. 35 provides an example mock-up diagram illustrating aspects of astructure of an ingestible device 1600 for delivering a dispensablesubstance, according to some embodiments described herein. In someembodiments, the ingestible device 1600 may generally be in the shape ofa capsule, a pill or any swallowable form that may be orally consumed byan individual. In this way, the ingestible device 1600 may be ingestedby a patient and may be prescribed by healthcare practitioners andpatients.

The ingestible device 1600 includes a housing 1601 that may take a shapesimilar to a capsule, a pill, and/or the like, which may include twoends 1602 a-b. The housing 1601 may be designed to withstand thechemical and mechanical environment of the GI tract (e.g., effects ofmuscle contractile forces and concentrated hydrochloric acid in thestomach). A broad range of materials that may be used for the housing1601. Examples of these materials include, but are not limited to,thermoplastics, fluoropolymers, elastomers, stainless steel and glasscomplying with ISO 10993 and USP Class VI specifications forbiocompatibility; and any other suitable materials and combinationsthereof.

In some embodiment, the wall of the housing 1601 may have a thickness of0.5 mm-1 mm, which is sufficient to sustain an internal explosion (e.g.,caused by hydrogen ignition or over pressure inside the housing).

The housing 1601 may or may not have a pH-sensitive enteric coating todetect or otherwise be sensitive to a pH level of the environmentexternal to the ingestible device. As discussed elsewhere in theapplication in more detail, the ingestible device 1600 may additionallyor alternatively include one more sensors, e.g., temperature sensor, pHsensor, impedance sensor, optical sensor.

The housing 1601 may be formed by coupling two enclosure portionstogether. The ingestible device 1600 may include an electronic componentwithin the housing 1600. The electronic component may be placedproximally to an end 1602 b of the housing, and includes a printedcircuit board (PCB), a battery, an optical sensing unit, and/or thelike.

The ingestible device 1600 further includes a gas generating cell 1603that is configured to generate gas and thus cause an internal pressurewithin the housing 1601. In some embodiments, the gas generating cellmay include or be connected to a separate channel or valve of theingestible device such that gas may be release through the channel orvalve to create a motion to alter the position of the ingestible devicewithin the GI tract. Such gas release can also be used to position theingestible device relative to the intestinal lining. In anotherembodiment, gas may be released through the separate channel or valve toalter the surface orientation of the intestinal tissue prior to deliveryof the dispensable substance.

A traveling plunger 1604 may be placed on top of the gas generating cell1603 within the housing 1601. The traveling plunger 1604 is a membranethat separates the gas generating cell 1603 and a storage reservoir thatstores the dispensable substance 1605. In some embodiments, thetraveling plunger 1604 may be a movable piston. In some embodiments, thetraveling plunger 1604 may instead be a flexible membrane such as butnot limited to a diaphragm. In some embodiments, the traveling plunger1604, which may have the form of a flexible diaphragm, may be placedalong an axial direction of the housing 1601, instead of being placed ontop of the gas generating cell 1603. The traveling plunger or themembrane 1604 may move (when the membrane 1604 is a piston) or deform(when the membrane 1604 is a diaphragm) towards a direction of the end1602 a of the housing, when the gas generating cell 1603 generates gasto create an internal pressure that pushes the membrane 1604. In thisway, the membrane or traveling plunger 1604 may push the dispensablesubstance 1605 out of the housing via a dispensing outlet 1607.

The housing 1601 may include a storage reservoir storing one or moredispensable substances 1605 adjacent to the traveling plunger 1604. Thedispensable substance 1605 may take the form of a powder, a compressedpowder, a fluid, a semi-liquid gel, or any other dispensable ordeliverable form. The delivery of the dispensable substance 1605 maytake a form such as but not limited to bolus, semi-bolus, continuous,systemic, burst delivery, and/or the like.

In some embodiments, the storage reservoir may include multiplechambers, and each chamber stores a different dispensable substance. Forexample, the different dispensable substances can be released at thesame time via the dispensing outlet 1607. Alternatively, the multiplechambers may take a form of different layers within the storagereservoir such that the different dispensable substance from eachchamber is delivered sequentially in an order. In one example, each ofthe multiple chambers is controlled by a separate traveling plunger,which may be propelled by gas generation. The electronic component maycontrol the gas generating cell 1603 to generate gas to propel aspecific traveling plunger, e.g., via a separate gas generation chamber,etc., to delivery the respective substance. In some embodiments, thecontent of the multiple chambers may be mixed or combined prior torelease.

The ingestible device 1600 may include a dispensing outlet 1607 at oneend 1602 a of the housing 1601 to direct the dispensable substance 1605out of the housing. The dispensing outlet 1607 may include an exitvalve, a slit or a hole, a jet injection nozzle with a syringe, and/orthe like. When the traveling plunger 1604 moves towards the end 1602 aof the housing 1601, an internal pressure within the storage reservoirmay increase and push the dispensing outlet to be open to let thedispensable substance 1605 be released out of the housing 1601.

In an embodiment, a pressure relief device 1606 may be placed within thehousing 1601, e.g., at the end 1602 a of the housing 1601.

In some embodiments, the housing 1601 may include small holes (e.g.,with a diameter smaller than 2 mm), e.g., on the side of the housing1601, or at the end 1602 a to facilitate loading the dispensablesubstance into the storage reservoir.

In some embodiments, a feedback control circuit (e.g., a feedbackresistor, etc.) may be added to send feedback from the gas generatingcell 1603 to the electronic component such that when the internalpressure reaches a threshold level, the electronic component may controlthe gas generating cell 1603 to turn off gas generation, or to activateother safety mechanism (e.g., feedback-controlled release valve, etc.).For example, an internal pressure sensor may be used to measure theinternal pressure within the ingestible device and generate feedback tothe feedback control circuit.

FIG. 36 provides an example diagram illustrating aspects of a mechanismfor a gas generating cell 1603 configured to generate a gas to dispensea substance, according to some embodiments described herein. As shown inFIG. 36, the gas generating cell 1603 generates a gas 1611 which canpropel the dispensable substance 1605 out of the dispensing outlet 1607.A variable resistor 1608 may be connected to a circuit with the gasgenerating cell 1603 such that the variable resistor 1608 may be used tocontrol an intensity and/or an amount of gas 1611 (e.g., hydrogen)generated by the cell 1603. Specifically, the gas generating cell 1603may be a battery form factor cell that is capable of generating hydrogenwhen a resistor is applied. In this way, as the gas generating cell 1603only needs the use of a resistor only without any active powerrequirements, the gas generating cell 1603 may be integrated into aningestible device such as a capsule with limited energy/power available.For example, the gas generating cell 1603 may be compatible with acapsule at a size of 26 mm×13 mm or smaller.

In some embodiments, based on the elution rate of gas from the cell, andan internal volume of the ingestible device, it may take time togenerate sufficient gas 1611 to deliver the substance 1605, and the timemay be 30 seconds or longer. For example, the time to generate a volumeof hydrogen equivalent to 500 μL of fluid would be approximately 5minutes. A longer period of time may be needed based upon non-idealconditions within the ingestible device, such as friction, etc. Thus,given that the production of gas (e.g., hydrogen) may take time, gasgeneration may need to start prior to the ingestible device arriving atthe site of delivery to build pressure up within the device. Theingestible device may then need to know when it is approaching the siteof delivery. For example, the device may start producing gas on an“entry transition,” which is determined by temperature, so as to produceenough gas to be close to the pressure high enough to deliver thedispensable substance. The ingestible device may then only startproducing gas again when it arrives at the site of delivery, which willcause the internal pressure within the ingestible device to reach alevel required by the dispensing outlet to release the dispensablesubstance. Also, for regio-specific delivery, the ingestible device mayestimate the time it takes to build up enough pressure to deliver thedispensable substance before the ingestible device arrives at a specificlocation, to activate gas generation.

FIGS. 37-39 illustrate an example of an ingestible device for localizeddelivery of a dispensable substance. The ingestible device 1600 includesa piston or drive element 1634 to push for substance delivery, inaccordance with particular implementations described herein. Theingestible device 1600 may have one or more batteries 1639 placed at oneend 1602 a of a housing 1601 to provide power for the ingestible device1600. A printed circuit board (PCB) 1632 may be placed adjacent to abattery or other power source 1639, and a gas generating cell 1603 maybe mounted on or above the PCB 1632. The gas generating cell 1603 may besealed from the bottom chamber (e.g., space including 1639 and 1632) ofthe ingestible device 1600. A movable piston 1634 may be placed adjacentto the gas generating cell 1603. In this way, gas generation from thegas generating cell 1603 may propel a piston 1634 to move towardsanother end 1602 b of the housing 1601 such that the dispensablesubstance in a reservoir compartment 1635 can be pushed out of thehousing through a dispensing outlet 1607, e.g., the movement is shown at1636, with the piston 1634 at a position after dispensing the substance.The dispensing outlet 1607 may include a plug. The reservoir compartment1635 can store the dispensable substance, or alternatively the reservoircompartment can house a storage reservoir 1661 which includes thedispensable substance. The reservoir compartment 1635 or storagereservoir 1661 may have a volume of approximately 600 μL or even moredispensable substance, which may be dispensed in a single bolus, orgradually over a period of time.

FIGS. 40-42 provide example structural diagrams illustrating aspects ofanchoring mechanisms of an ingestible device to anchor the ingestibledevice to the intestine for dispensable substance delivery. As shown inFIG. 40, the ingestible device 101100 can be anchored within theintestine by extending hooks 101203 a-d from the ingestible device101100 after it has entered the region of interest. At 101201, as theingestible device 101100 travels along the GI tract, the hooks 101203a-d are contained within the ingestible device. At 101202, when theingestible device 101100 determines it has arrived at a location withinthe GI tract, the hooks 101203 a-d can be actuated to extend outside ofthe ingestible device 101100 to catch in the intestinal wall and holdthe ingestible device 101100 in the respective location. The hooks101203 a-d can be oriented to catch the intestinal wall regardless ofthe instant orientation of the ingestible device 101100. The hooks101203 a-d can also retract, dissolve, or detach from the intestinalwall after the dispensable substance has been delivered at the anchoredlocation.

As shown in FIG. 41, the hooks 101203 a-d could also extend radiallyfrom the ingestible device, and pierce into the intestinal wall to holdthe ingestible device 101100 in place. As shown in FIG. 42, if theextending hooks (e.g., 101203 a-b) are hollow, the hooks can be used toboth anchor the ingestible device and inject the dispensable substanceinto the intestinal wall.

FIG. 43 illustrates an ingestible device 4500 including apre-pressurized actuator chamber 4503 and a sliding piston 4504,according to some embodiments described herein.

Ingestible device 4500 includes a device housing 4501. The devicehousing 4501 is composed of a cap portion 4502 a and a base portion 4502b in the illustrated embodiments. Ingestible device 4500 also includes apre-pressurized actuator chamber 4503 that is pressurized to a targetpressure, for example during manufacture or via air fill port 4506 priorto ingestion. The capsule incorporates an active release mechanism thatactivates as the capsule reaches the target location. As the releasemechanism activates, sliding piston 4504 will rapidly move to the left,pushing a high pressure jet of dispensable substance through the nozzle.

Depending on the material used to form the walls of the device housing4501, the material could diffuse the compressed gas in thepre-pressurized actuator chamber 4503 over time, decreasing the internalpressure. To ensure that pressure is maintained in the ingestible device4500 over a period between fabrication and patient use, packaging couldbe pressurized to equal the internal pressure of the pill in certainembodiments; therefore, preventing the permeation of compressed gas fromthe ingestible device 4500. Assuming the gas expansion within thecapsule occurs very fast and an adiabatic polytropic process takesplace, gas laws are used to correlate the initial and final pressure ofthe gas with its volume change ratio.

FIG. 44A illustrates a burst disc 4608 with an in line nozzle 4509. FIG.44B illustrates a partial sectional view of a burst disc holder 4610,according to some embodiments described herein. A burst disc 4608 mayenable the release of a dispensable substance, (for example fromreservoir 4505) by purposefully fracturing at a targeted pressureallowing the dispensable substance to exit a nozzle 4509 to a targetlocation within the GI tract. A burst disc 4608 can be used as the soleocclusion component in certain embodiments and can be used to provideisolation between upstream contamination and the dispensable substancepayload in embodiments including another occlusion component. The burstdisc 4608 can be held in place via clamped outer rings 4611 of discholder 4610 as demonstrated in FIG. 44B.

FIG. 45 illustrates an ingestible device 4900 including a magneticocclusion component 4908 b, a burst disc 4608, and a pre-pressurizedactuator chamber 4903, according to some embodiments described herein.FIG. 46 illustrates an ingestible device 5000 including a magneticocclusion component, a pre-pressurized actuator chamber 4903 and abioabsorbable plug 5008, according to some embodiments described herein.A magnetic stack, which upon peristaltic or osmotic pressure applicationreleases pneumatic pressure, allowing for the delivery of a jet ofdispensable substance through a conduit 4509. Osmotic pressure may beused to reconfigure the occlusion component that includes magnets 4908 aand 4908 b. The enteric coating 4908 c dissolves when exposed to luminalfluid, exposing the membrane 4908 d and osmogen 4908 e. The membrane4908 d and osmogen 4908 e facilitate the movement of liquid to createosmotic pressure on the magnet 4908 a. As the osmotic pressure buildsup, magnet 4908 a will be pushed up in proximity to magnet 4908 b.Magnet 4908 b will be pulled down providing a flow through path for agas from pressurized chamber 4905 to interact with the reservoir 4905via connecting conduit 4911. The advantage of this system is that themechanism may be completely sealed from the exterior of the capsule,allowing for pressure to only project into the chamber 4905. Note thatan enteric coating/membrane stack 4908 c, 4908 d could be replaced by amethod of leveraging peristalsis for pushing magnet 4908 a. FIG. 45 isimplemented with a burst disc 4608 as the sealing/release mechanism oncethe chamber 4905 is exposed to the pressurized chamber 4903. FIG. 46 isimplemented with a bioabsorbable plug 5008 (e.g. enteric coating) thatis dissolved and expelled once the reservoir 4905 is exposed to thepressurized actuator chamber 4903.

FIG. 47 illustrates an ingestible device 5100 including enteric slidingocclusion component 5102, a pre-pressurized actuator chamber 4903 and asliding component 5108, according to some embodiments described herein.An osmotic drive 4908, including an enteric coating 5102 andsemipermeable membrane 5104, is configured to move a sliding component5108. The sliding component 5108, once pushed by the osmotic drive 4908,will allow a flow-through port 4911 to connect the pressurized actuatorchamber 4903 to the reservoir 4905, providing dispensable substancedelivery through the nozzle 5108.

FIG. 48 illustrates an ingestible device 5200 including dissolvable pinocclusion component, a chamber 5202, a pre-pressurized chamber 5204 anda sliding piston 5206, according to some embodiments described herein.In another embodiment, an enteric coating 5208 b is dissolved, exposinga structural pin 5208 a (such as a glucose spike or hydrogel) thatdissolves in the presence of intestinal luminal fluid. With this design,as long as the pin 5208 a is in place, the force exerted on the piston5206 and the chamber 5202 is not large enough for the burst disk 4608 torupture. The enteric coating 5208 b and pin 5208 a will dissolve as thecapsule 5200 is ingested and as a result, the pressure force on thepiston 5206 will increase. The full force of the pre-pressurized chamber5204 translated onto the chamber 5202 via the piston 5206 is largeenough to rupture the burst disk 4608. The rupture of the burst disk4608 results in a pressurized jet of liquid being delivered from thechamber 5202 through the nozzle 4509.

FIG. 49 illustrates an ingestible device 5300 including wax plug 5308 awith wire lead activators 5308 b, according to some embodimentsdescribed herein. In this method, the dispensing site is identifiedbased on collected reflected light. The reflectance of light in greenand red spectrums (with iterations to this methodology and algorithmactively being pursued) are measured and an algorithm is used tocorrelate the measured reflectance with the location in theGastrointestinal (GI) tract. This method provides a non-pH based systemto determine the anatomical locations of the capsule during fastedtransit. As the capsule 5300 reaches the target location, a signal isgenerated which will be used to activate an alternative releasemechanism.

FIG. 50 illustrates an ingestible 5500 device including a springactuator 5503 and a sliding piston 5504, according to some embodimentsdescribed herein. Ingestible device 5500 uses the potential energystored in a spring 5503 when compressed as the driving or actuatingmechanism for jet delivery of the dispensable substance. The occlusioncomponent or release mechanism consists of bioabsorbable plug 5508 aseparated from the reservoir 5505 by a protectant layer 5508 b. In thisembodiment, the inner volume of the capsule 5500 is divided into twosections separated by a sliding piston 5504. The left section (e.g.,reservoir 5505) is filled with dispensable substance and a spring 5503is mounted in the right section. The piston 5504 can freely move to theright or left depending on the net force exerted on the piston 5504. AnO-ring 5511 is used to provide the sealing desired between the twosections, with alternative sealing means possible. Compressed spring5503 applies a force on the piston 5504 and the piston 5504 transfersthis force to the liquid dispensable substance in form of pressure. Thesame pressure will be transferred to the plug 5508 a sealing the nozzle5513. However, this pressure acts on a small area (area of the plug 5508a). Therefore, the large force exerted by the spring 5503 translatesinto a small force on the sealing plug 5508 a. As the capsule 5500 isdigested, it moves through GI tract and the bioabsorbable sealing plug5508 a will start dissolving. After certain amount of time, the plugwill weaken or fully dissolve in GI fluid. As soon as the plug 5508 aweakens to the design threshold, the pressure inside the reservoir 5503drops, the spring 5503 will expand delivering dispensable substance(e.g., in the form of a high-pressure jet of fluid) through the opening.

FIG. 51 illustrates an ingestible device 5600 including a springactuated slidable housing portion 5602 b, according to some embodimentsdescribed herein. Ingestible device 5600 consists of a pressurizedactuator 5603 chamber, a reservoir 5605 separated from the pressureactuator chamber 5603 by a deformable body 5604 such as bellows and aspring/enteric coating release mechanism The spring 5608 a is mounted onthe polycarbonate cap 5602 a from one end and to a sliding cap 5602 b onthe other end. The stainless steel top slider 5602 b can slide to theleft and right opening and closing the nozzle 5611. An enteric ring 5608b is used to keep the top slider closed. An O-ring and a bioabsorbableplug 5609 are used to provide the desired sealing. An adhesive seal 5612is located on the housing, on the opposite end of the capsule 5600 fromthe spring 5608 a. Compressed gas applies a force on the bellows 5604and the bellows 5604 transfer this force to the liquid dispensablesubstance in form of pressure. The same pressure will be transferred tothe slider 5602 b in form of a radial force. However, this pressure actson a small area (area of the exit orifice 5607). Therefore, thetransverse load on the slider 5602 b is relatively small. When thecapsule 5600 is assembled, the spring 5608 a is compressed (slider 5602b in closed mode), and the enteric coating 5608 b keeps the slider 5602b in position. As the capsule 5600 is digested, it moves through GItract. The enteric coating 5608 b will dissolve when the capsule 5600passes through the intestinal fluid. With the dissolution of the entericcoating 5608 b, the spring 5608 a will push the slider 5602 b back awayfrom the capsule 5600 (open mode). As a result, the exit orifice 5607becomes concentric with the nozzle 5611 and the jet of fluid will bereleased.

FIG. 52 illustrates an ingestible device 5700 with another springactuated slidable housing portion 5712, according to some embodimentsdescribed herein. Ingestible device 5700 uses a compressed spring(spring 5703) as the drive mechanism and a compressed spring 5708 a(spring with sliding top cap 5712 as the release mechanism. A piston5704 separates the reservoir 5705 from the spring chamber and an entericcoating 5708 b is used to initiate the release mechanism. An O-ring 5710is used to provide sealing between the piston 5704 and cylinder.Compressed spring 5703 applies a force on the piston 5704 and the piston5704 transfers this force to the liquid dispensable substance in theform of pressure. The same pressure will be transferred to the top capslider 5712 in form of a radial force. However, this pressure acts on asmall area (area of the exit orifice 5714) resulting in a smalltransverse force on the top slider 5712. When the capsule 5700 isassembled, spring 5703 is left in compressed mode (slider 5712 in closedposition). As the capsule 5700 is digested, it moves through GI tract.The enteric coating 5708 b will dissolve when the capsule 5700 passesthrough the intestinal fluid. With the dissolution of the entericcoating 5708 b, the spring 5708 a will push the slider 5712 back awayfrom the capsule 5700 (open mode). As a result, the exit orifice 5714becomes concentric with the nozzle 5716 and the jet of fluid will bereleased.

FIG. 53 illustrates an ingestible device 5800 including a melt awayocclusion component 5808 a and a pressurized chamber 5803, according tosome embodiments described herein. Ingestible device 5800 consists oftwo chambers, one chamber is filled with dispensable substance and theother chamber is filled with pressurized gas. A wax valve 5808 aactuated by localization board 5822 is used as the occlusion component.A large section of the pressure chamber 5803 is occupied by the releasemechanism and the batteries 5821. Wax valve wires 5808 b are connectedto the wax valve 5808 a and will melt the wax using an electric current.The timing of this operation is controlled by the localization board5822. In this embodiment, a fully controlled release mechanism is used.As the capsule 5800 reaches target area, the localization kit willactivate and direct a predetermined electric current toward the waxvalve 5808 a. A heating element will receive this current and will meltor weaken the wax valve 5808 a. With weakening or removal of the waxfrom the nozzle 5810, gas pressure from the pressurized chamber 5803will push the bellows 5804 resulting in a pressurized jet of liquiddispensable substance exiting the nozzle 5810, thus delivering thedispensable substance.

FIG. 54 illustrates an ingestible device 5900 including a dissolvablepin occlusion component 5908 and a spring actuated sliding piston 5914,according to some embodiments described herein. One of the mainchallenges of designing an effective capsule is the sealing between thetwo chambers inside the capsule since there is a significant pressuredifference between the two chambers, the dispensable substance tends tomove from the dispensable substance chamber into the pressure or springchamber. Certain embodiments address this by reducing the pressuredifference between the two chambers during the shelf life and before jetdelivery. For example, ingestible device 5900 includes a compressedspring 5903 is retained using a dissolvable pin 5908. Additionally, anO-ring 5912 is used to provide sealing between the piston 5914 andhousing. With this design, as long as the pin 5908 is in place, there isno force exerted on the piston 5904 and the liquid in chamber 5906. Theforce exerted by the spring 5903 will result in shear stress on the pin5908. The pin 5908 will dissolve as the capsule 5900 is ingested and asa result, the spring force will translate into a pressurized jet ofliquid. An enteric coating on the ends of the pin 5908 could furtherenhance the specificity of the triggering location. During the shelflife and before ingestion of the capsule 5900, there is not asignificant amount of pressure acting on the dispensable substance andconsequently, sealing challenges are easier to address. With a 200-psidesign pressure, the pin would be expected to hold approximately 20 lbf,and would involve design consideration to the shear strength of thedissolvable pin. As the capsule 5900 passes through the GI tract, thepin 5908 will start dissolving. As the pin 5908 dissolves, there is nosupport for the piston 5904 to keep the piston 5904 in place. The forceof the spring 5903 will result in a significant pressure in the fluid.At a certain point the pin 5908 will fail and the piston 5904 will moveto the left releasing a high-pressure jet of fluid through the nozzle5910.

FIG. 55 illustrates an ingestible device 6000 including shuttle sliderocclusion component 6012 and a pressurized chamber 6010, according tosome embodiments described herein. Ingestible device 6000 includes twochambers separated by a wall 6002 made of polycarbonate. The rightchamber is an adhesive seal 6028 and a pressurized chamber 6010,pressurized with gas, and a bellows 6006 is installed in the leftchamber. There are no openings connecting the two chambers 6006, 6010.An osmotic release mechanism is used to connect the two chambers 6006,6010 through a sliding valve 6012. Osmogen 6014 is contained within asmall container below the sliding valve 6012. Osmogen 6014 is separatedfrom the GI fluid by a water permeable membrane 6016 covered withenteric coating 6018. On the top of the osmogen 6014, a shuttle slider6012 is mounted. The slider 6012 has an opening 6020 in the middle. Theslider shuttle 6012 is sandwiched between two slabs of polycarbonatewith a pressure through port 6022. When the slider shuttle 6012 is inclosed form, the holes on the polycarbonate slabs are not concentricwith the hole on the slider shuttle 6012. When the slider shuttle 6012is in open mode, the holes of the slider and polycarbonate slabssurrounding it all will be concentric letting gas and pressure exchangebetween the two chambers 6006, 6010.

In certain embodiments, an ingestible device is configured to determineits location (e.g., within the GI tract of a subject). FIGS. 56-70provide illustrative and non-limiting examples of such ingestibledevices and associated methods. It is to be understood that one morefeatures from such embodiments can be combined with one or more featuresof an ingestible device configured to take one more samples, such as,for example, described above with regarding to FIGS. 1-34, and/or withone or more features of an ingestible device configured to deliver oneor more substances (e.g., one or more therapeutic substances), such as,for example, described above with respect to FIGS. 35-55.

In some embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within the GItract of the subject can be determined to an accuracy of at least 85%,e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least99%, 100%. In such embodiments, the portion of the portion of the GItract of the subject can include, for example, the esophagus, thestomach, duodenum, the jejunum, and/or the terminal ileum, cecum andcolon.

In certain embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within theesophagus of the subject can be determined to an accuracy of at least85%, e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, at least 98%, atleast 99%, 100%.

In some embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within thestomach of the subject can be determined to an accuracy of at least 85%,e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least99%, 100%.

In certain embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within theduodenum of the subject can be determined to an accuracy of at least85%, e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, at least 98%, atleast 99%, 100%.

In some embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within thejejunum of the subject can be determined to an accuracy of at least 85%,e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least99%, 100%.

In certain embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within theterminal ileum, cecum and colon of the subject can be determined to anaccuracy of at least 85%, e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, 100%.

In some embodiments, the location of the ingestible device within thececum of the subject can be determined to an accuracy of at least 85%,e.g., at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least99%, 100%.

As used herein, the term “reflectance” refers to a value derived fromlight emitted by the device, reflected back to the device, and receivedby a detector in or on the device. For example, in some embodiments thisrefers to light emitted by the device, wherein a portion of the light isreflected by a surface external to the device, and the light is receivedby a detector located in or on the device.

As used herein, the term “illumination” refers to any electromagneticemission. In some embodiments, an illumination may be within the rangeof Infrared Light (IR), the visible spectrum and ultraviolet light (UV),and an illumination may have a majority of its power centered at aparticular wavelength in the range of 100 nm to 1000 nm. In someembodiments, it may be advantageous to use an illumination with amajority of its power limited to one of the infrared (750 nm-1000 nm),red (600 nm-750 nm), green (495 nm-600 nm), blue (400 nm-495 nm), orultraviolet (100 nm-400 nm) spectrums. In some embodiments a pluralityof illuminations with different wavelengths may be used. Forillustrative purposes, the embodiments described herein may refer to theuse of green or blue spectrums of light. However, it is understood thatthese embodiments may use any suitable light having a wavelength that issubstantially or approximately within the green or blue spectra definedabove, and the localization systems and methods described herein may useany suitable spectra of light.

Referring now to FIG. 56, shown therein is a view of an exampleembodiment of an ingestible device 65100, which may be used to identifya location within a gastrointestinal (GI) tract. It is to be understoodthat certain details regarding the design of ingestible device 65100 arenot shown in FIG. 56 and the following figures, and that, in general,various aspect of ingestible devices described elsewhere herein can beimplemented in ingestible device 65100 and the ingestible devices shownin the following figures.

In some embodiments, ingestible device 65100 may be configured toautonomously determine whether it is located in the stomach, aparticular portion of the small intestine such as a duodenum, jejunum,or ileum, or the large intestine by utilizing sensors operating withdifferent wavelengths of light. Additionally, ingestible device 65100may be configured to autonomously determine whether it is located withincertain portions of the small intestine or large intestine, such as theduodenum, the jejunum, the cecum, or the colon.

Ingestible device 65100 may have a housing 65102 shaped similar to apill or capsule. The housing 65102 of ingestible device 65100 may have afirst end portion 65104, and a second end portion 65106. The first endportion 65104 may include a first wall portion 65108, and second endportion 65106 may include a second wall portion 65110. In someembodiments, first end portion 65104 and second end portion 65106 ofingestible device 65100 may be manufactured separately, and may beaffixed together by a connecting portion 65112.

In some embodiments, ingestible device 65100 may include an opticallytransparent window 65114. Optically transparent window 65114 may betransparent to various types of illumination in the visible spectrum,infrared spectrum, or ultraviolet light spectrum, and ingestible device65100 may have various sensors and illuminators located within thehousing 65102, and behind the transparent window 65114. This may allowingestible device 65100 to be configured to transmit illumination atdifferent wavelengths through transparent window 65114 to an environmentexternal to housing 65102 of ingestible device 65100, and to detect areflectance from a portion of the illumination that is reflected backthrough transparent window 65114 from the environment external tohousing 65102. Ingestible device 65100 may then use the detected levelof reflectance in order to determine a location of ingestible device65100 within a GI tract. In some embodiments, optically transparentwindow 65114 may be of any shape and size, and may wrap around thecircumference of ingestible device 65100. In this case, ingestibledevice 65100 may have multiple sets of sensors and illuminatorspositioned at different locations azimuthally behind window 65114.

In some embodiments, ingestible device 65100 may optionally include anopening 65116 in the second wall portion 65110. In some embodiments, thesecond wall portion 65110 may be configured to rotate around thelongitudinal axis of ingestible device 65100 (e.g., via a suitable motoror other actuator housed within ingestible device 65100). This may allowingestible device 65100 to obtain a fluid sample from the GI tract, orrelease a substance into the GI tract, through opening 65116.

FIG. 57 shows an exploded view of ingestible device 65100. In someembodiments, ingestible device 65100 may optionally include a rotationassembly 65118. Optional rotation assembly 65118 may include a motor65118-1 driven by a microcontroller (e.g., a microcontroller coupled toprinted circuit board 65120), a rotation position sensing ring 65118-2,and a storage sub-unit 65118-3 configured to fit snugly within thesecond end portion 65104. In some embodiments, rotation assembly 65118may cause second end portion 65104, and opening 65116, to rotaterelative to the storage sub-unit 65118-3. In some embodiments, there maybe cavities on the side of storage sub-unit 65118-3 that function asstorage chambers. When the opening 65116 is aligned with a cavity on theside of the storage sub-unit 65118-3, the cavity on the side of thestorage sub-unit 65118-3 may be exposed to the environment external tothe housing 65102 of ingestible device 65100. In some embodiments, thestorage sub-unit 65118-3 may be loaded with a medicament or othersubstance prior to the ingestible device 65100 being administered to asubject. In this case, the medicament or other substance may be releasedfrom the ingestible device 65100 by aligning opening 65116 with thecavity within storage sub-unit 65118-3. In some embodiments, the storagesub-unit 65118-3 may be configured to hold a fluid sample obtained fromthe GI tract. For example, ingestible device 65100 may be configured toalign opening 65116 with the cavity within storage sub-unit 65118-3,thus allowing a fluid sample from the GI tract to enter the cavitywithin storage sub-unit 65118-3. Afterwards, ingestible device 65100 maybe configured to seal the fluid sample within storage sub-unit 65118-3by further rotating the second end portion 65106 relative to storagesub-unit 65118-3. In some embodiments, storage sub-unit 118-3 may alsocontain a hydrophilic sponge, which may enable ingestible device 65100to better draw certain types of fluid samples into ingestible device65100. In some embodiments, ingestible device 65100 may be configured toeither obtain a sample from within the GI tract, or to release asubstance into the GI tract, in response to determining that ingestibledevice 65100 has reached a predetermined location within the GI tract.For example, ingestible device 65100 may be configured to obtain a fluidsample from the GI tract in response to determining that the ingestibledevice has entered the jejunum portion of the small intestine (e.g., asdetermined by process 65900 discussed elsewhere herein). It isunderstood that any suitable method of obtaining samples or releasingsubstances may be incorporated into some of the embodiments of theingestible devices disclosed herein, and that the systems and methodsfor determining a location of an ingestible device may be incorporatedinto any suitable type of ingestible device.

Ingestible device 65100 may include a printed circuit board (PCB) 65120,and a battery 65128 configured to power PCB 65120. PCB 65120 may includea programmable microcontroller, and control and memory circuitry forholding and executing firmware or software for coordinating theoperation of ingestible device 65100, and the various components ofingestible device 65100. For example, PCB 65120 may include memorycircuitry for storing data, such as data sets of measurements collectedby sensing sub-unit 65126, or instructions to be executed by controlcircuitry to implement a localization process, such as, for example, oneor more of the processes, discussed herein, including those discussedbelow in connection with one or more of the associated flow charts. PCB65120 may include a detector 65122 and an illuminator 65124, whichtogether form sensing sub-unit 65126. In some embodiments, controlcircuitry within PCB 65120 may include processing units, communicationcircuitry, or any other suitable type of circuitry for operatingingestible device 65100. For illustrative purposes, only a singledetector 65122 and a single illuminator 65124 forming a single sensingsub-unit 65126 are shown. However, it is understood that in someembodiments there may be multiple sensing sub-units, each with aseparate illuminator and detector, within ingestible device 65100. Forexample, there may be several sensing sub-units spaced azimuthallyaround the circumference of the PCB 65120, which may enable ingestibledevice 65100 to transmit illumination and detect reflectances or ambientlight in all directions around the circumference of the device. In someembodiments, sensing sub-unit 65126 may be configured to generate anillumination using illuminator 65124, which is directed through thewindow 65114 in a radial direction away from ingestible device 65100.This illumination may reflect off of the environment external toingestible device 65100, and the reflected light coming back intoingestible device 65100 through window 65114 may be detected as areflectance by detector 65122.

In some embodiments, window 65114 may be of any suitable shape and size.For example, window 65114 may extend around a full circumference ofingestible device 65100. In some embodiments there may be a plurality ofsensing sub-units (e.g., similar to sensing sub-unit 65126) located atdifferent positions behind the window. For example, three sensingsub-units may be positioned behind the window at the same longitudinallocation, but spaced 120 degrees apart azimuthally. This may enableingestible device 65100 to transmit illuminations in all directionsradially around ingestible device 65100, and to measure each of thecorresponding reflectances.

In some embodiments, illuminator 65124 may be capable of producingillumination at a variety of different wavelengths in the ultraviolet,infrared, or visible spectrum. For example, illuminator 65124 may beimplemented by using Red-Green-Blue Light-Emitting diode packages(RGB-LED). These types of RGB-LED packages are able to transmit red,blue, or green illumination, or combinations of red, blue, or greenillumination. Similarly, detector 65122 may be configured to sensereflected light of the same wavelengths as the illumination produced byilluminator 65124. For example, if illuminator 65124 is configured toproduce red, blue, or green illumination, detector 65122 may beconfigured to detect different reflectances produced by red, blue, orgreen illumination (e.g., through the use of an appropriately configuredphotodiode). These detected reflectances may be stored by ingestibledevice 65100 (e.g., within memory circuitry of PCB 65120 (FIG. 57)), andmay then be used by ingestible device 65100 in determining a location ofingestible device 65100 within the GI tract (e.g., through the use ofone or more processes described herein).

It is understood that ingestible device 65100 is intended to beillustrative, and not limiting. It will be understood that modificationsto the general shape and structure of the various devices and mechanismsdescribed in relation to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 may be made withoutsignificantly changing the functions and operations of the devices andmechanisms. For example, ingestible device 65100 may have a housingformed from a single piece of molded plastic, rather than being dividedinto a first end portion 65104 and a second end portion 65106. As analternate example, the location of window 65114 within ingestible device65100 may be moved to some other location, such as the center ofingestible device 65100, or to one of the ends of ingestible device65100. Moreover, the systems and methods discussed in relation to FIGS.56-70 may be implemented on any suitable type of ingestible device,provided that the ingestible device is capable of detecting reflectancesor levels of illumination in some capacity. For example, in someembodiments ingestible device 65100 may be modified to replace detector65122 with an image sensor, and the ingestible device may be configuredto measure relative levels of red, blue, or green light by decomposing arecorded image into its individual spectral components. It should benoted that the features and limitations described in any one embodimentmay be applied to any other embodiment herein, and the descriptions andexamples relating to one embodiment may be combined with any otherembodiment in a suitable manner.

FIG. 58 is a diagram of an ingestible device during an example transitthrough a gastrointestinal (GI) tract, in accordance with someembodiments of the disclosure. The ngestible device may include anyportion of any other ingestible device discussed in this disclosure, andmay be any suitable type of ingestible device with localizationcapabilities. For example, the ingestible device may be without anoptional opening for sampling or optional rotation assembly forsampling. In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be ingested bya subject, and as the ingestible device traverses the GI tract, theingestible device determines its location within the GI tract. Forexample, the movement of the ingestible device and the amount of lightdetected by the ingestible device (e.g., via a detector as describedelsewhere herein) may vary substantially depending on the location ofthe ingestible device within the GI tract, and the ingestible device maybe configured to use this information to determine a location of theingestible device within the GI tract. For instance, the ingestibledevice may detect ambient light from the surrounding environment, orreflectances based on illumination generated by the ingestible device(e.g., generated by an illuminator as described elsewhere herein), anduse this information to determine a location of the ingestible devicethrough processes, such as described herein. The current location of theingestible device, and the time that the ingestible device detected eachtransition between the various portions of the GI tract, may then bestored by the ingestible device (e.g., in memory circuitry of a PCB asdescribed elsewhere herein), and may be used for any suitable purpose.

Shortly after the ingestible device is ingested, the ingestible devicewill traverse the esophagus 65302, which may connect the subject's mouthto a stomach 65306. In some embodiments, the ingestible device may beconfigured to determine that it has entered the esophagus portion GItract by measuring the amount and type of light (e.g., via a detector asdescribed elsewhere herein) in the environment surrounding the theingestible device. For instance, the ingestible device may detect higherlevels of light in the visible spectrum (e.g., via a detector asdescribed elsewhere herein) while outside the subject's body, ascompared to the levels of light detected while within the GI tract. Insome embodiments, the ingestible device may have previously stored data(e.g., on memory circuitry of a PCB as described elsewhere herein)indicating a typical level of light detected when outside of the body,and the the ingestible device may be configured to determine that entryto the body has occurred when a detected level of light (e.g., detectedvia a detector as described elsewhere herein) has been reduced beyond athreshold level (e.g., at least a 20-30% reduction) for a sufficientperiod of time (e.g., 5.0 seconds).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to detect atransition from esophagus 65302 to stomach 65306 by passing throughsphincter 65304. In some embodiments, ingestible device 65300 may beconfigured to determine whether it has entered stomach 65306 based atleast in part on a plurality of parameters, such as but not limited tothe use of light or temperature measurements (e.g., via a detector asdescribed elsewhere herein or via a thermometer within the ingestibledevice), pH measurements (e.g., via a pH meter within the ingestibledevice), time measurements (e.g., as detected through the use of clockcircuitry included within a PCB as described elsewhere herein), or anyother suitable information. For instance, the ingestible device may beconfigured to determine that the ingestible device has entered stomach65306 after detecting that a measured temperature of the ingestibledevice exceeds 31 degrees Celsius. Additionally, or alternately, theingestible device may be configured to automatically determine it hasentered stomach 65306 after one minute (or another pre-set time durationparameter, 80 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) has elapsed from the time thatthe ingestible device was ingested, or one minute (or another pre-settime duration parameter, 80 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) from the timethat the ingestible device detected that it has entered the GI tract.

Stomach 65306 is a relatively large, open, and cavernous organ, andtherefore the ingestible device may have a relatively large range ofmotion. By comparison, the motion of the ingestible device is relativelyrestricted within the tube-like structure of the duodenum 65310, thejejunum 65314, and the ileum (not shown), all of which collectively formthe small intestine. Additionally, the interior of stomach 65306 hasdistinct optical properties from duodenum 65310 and jejunum 65314, whichmay enable the ingestible device to detect a transition from stomach65306 to duodenum 65310 through the appropriate use of measuredreflectances (e.g., through the use of reflectances measured by adetector as described elsewhere herein), as used in conjunction with aprocess 65600).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to detect apyloric transition from stomach 65306 to duodenum 65310 through thepylorus 65308. For instance, in some embodiments, the ingestible devicemay be configured to periodically generate illumination in the green andblue wavelengths (e.g., via an illuminator as described elsewhereherin), and measure the resulting reflectances (e.g., via a detector asdescribed elsewhere herein). The ingestible device may be configured tothen use a ratio of the detected green reflectance to the detected bluereflectance to determine whether the ingestible device is located withinthe stomach 65306, or duodenum 65310 (e.g., via process 65600). In turn,this may enable the ingestible device to detect a pyloric transitionfrom stomach 65306 to duodenum 65310, an example of which is discussedin relation to FIG. 61.

Similarly, in some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configuredto detect a reverse pyloric transition from duodenum 65310 to stomach65306. The ingestible device will typically transition naturally fromstomach 65306 to duodenum 65310, and onward to jejunum 65314 and theremainder of the GI tract. However, similar to other ingestedsubstances, the ingestible device may occasionally transition fromduodenum 65310 back to stomach 65306 as a result of motion of thesubject, or due to the natural behavior of the organs with the GI tract.To accommodate this possibility, the ingestible device may be configuredto continue to periodically generate illumination in the green and bluewavelengths (e.g., via an illuminator as described elsewhere herein),and measure the resulting reflectances (e.g., via a detector asdescribed elsewhere herein) to detect whether or not the ingestibledevice has returned to stomach 65306. An exemplary detection process isdescribed in additional detail in relation to FIG. 61.

After entering duodenum 65310, the ingestible device may be configuredto detect a transition to the jejunum 65314 through the duodenojejunalflexure 65312. For example, the ingestible device may be configured touse reflectances to detect peristaltic waves within the jejunum 65314,caused by the contraction of the smooth muscle tissue lining the wallsof the jejunum 65314. In particular, the ingestible device may beconfigured to begin periodically transmitting illumination (andmeasuring the resulting reflectances (e.g., via a detector and anilluminator of a sensing sub-unit as described elsewhere herein) at asufficiently high frequency in order to detect muscle contractionswithin the jejunum 65314. The ingestible device may then determine thatit has entered the jejunum 65314 in response to having detected either afirst muscle contraction, or a predetermined number of musclecontractions (e.g., after having detected three muscle contractions insequence). The interaction of the ingestible device with the walls ofjejunum 65314 is also discussed in relation to FIG. 59, and an exampleof this detection process is described in additional detail in relationto FIG. 64.

FIG. 59 is a diagram of an ingestible device during an example transitthrough a jejunum, in accordance with some embodiments of thedisclosure. Diagrams 65410, 65420, 65430, and 65440 depict ingestibledevice 65400 as it traverses through a jejunum (e.g., jejunum 65314),and how ingestible device 65400 interacts with peristaltic waves formedby walls 65406A and 65406B (collectively, walls 65406) of the jejunum.In some implementations, ingestible device 65400 may include any portionof any other ingestible device discussed in this disclosure, and may beany suitable type of ingestible device with localization capabilities.

Diagram 65410 depicts ingestible device 65400 within the jejunum, whenthe walls 65406 of the jejunum are relaxed. In some embodiments, theconfined tube-like structure of the jejunum naturally causes ingestibledevice 65400 to be oriented longitudinally along the length of thejejunum, with window 65404 facing walls 65406. In this orientation,ingestible device 65400 may use sensing sub-unit 65402 to generateillumination (e.g., via an illuminator as described elsewhere herein)oriented towards walls 65406, and to detect the resulting reflectances(e.g., via a detector as described elsewhere herein) from the portion ofthe illumination reflected off of walls 65406 and back through window65404. In some embodiments, ingestible device 65400 may be configured touse sensing sub-unit 65402 to generate illumination and measure theresulting reflectance with sufficient frequency to detect peristalticwaves within the jejunum. For instance, in a healthy human subject,peristaltic waves may occur at a rate of approximately 0.05 Hz to 0.33Hz. Therefore, the ingestible device 65400 may be configured to generateillumination and measure the resulting reflectance at least once every2.5 seconds (i.e., potentially minimum rate to detect a 0.2 Hz signal),and preferably at a higher rate, such as once every 0.5 seconds, whichmay improve the overall reliability of the detection process due to moredata points being available. It is understood that the ingestible device65400 need not gather measurements at precise intervals, and in someembodiments the ingestible device 65400 may be adapted to analyze datagathered at more irregular intervals, provided that there are still asufficient number of appropriately spaced data points to detect 0.05 Hzto 0.33 Hz signals.

Diagram 65420 depicts ingestible device 65400 within the jejunum, whenthe walls 65406 of the jejunum begin to contract and form a peristalticwave. Diagram 65420 depicts contracting portion 65408A of wall 65406Aand contracting portion 65408B of wall 65406B (collectively, contractingportion 65408 of wall 65406) that form a peristaltic wave within thejejunum. The peristaltic wave proceeds along the length of the jejunumas different portions of wall 65406 contract and relax, causing it toappear as if contracting portions 65408 of wall 65406 proceed along thelength of the jejunum (i.e., as depicted by contracting portions 65408proceeding from left to right in diagrams 65410-65430). While in thisposition, ingestible device 65400 may detect a similar level ofreflectance (e.g., through the use of an illuminator and a detector of asensing sub-unit as described elsewhere herein) as detected when thereis no peristaltic wave occurring (e.g., as detected when ingestibledevice 65400 is in the position indicated in diagram 65410).

Diagram 65430 depicts ingestible device 65400 within the jejunum, whenthe walls 65406 of the jejunum continue to contract, squeezing aroundingestible device 65400. As the peristaltic wave proceeds along thelength of the jejunum, contracting portions 65408 of wall 65406 maysqueeze tightly around ingestible device 65400, bringing the innersurface of wall 65406 into contact with window 65404. While in thisposition, ingestible device 65400 may detect a change in a reflectancedetected as a result of illumination produced by sensing sub-unit 65402.The absolute value of the change in the measured reflectance may dependon several factors, such as the optical properties of the window 65404,the spectral components of the illumination, and the optical propertiesof the walls 65406. However, ingestible device 65400 may be configuredto store a data set with the reflectance values over time, and searchfor periodic changes in the data set consistent with the frequency ofthe peristaltic waves (e.g., by analyzing the data set in the frequencydomain, and searching for peaks between 0.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz). This mayenable ingestible device 65400 to detect muscle contractions due toperistaltic waves without foreknowledge of the exact changes inreflectance signal amplitude that may occur as a result of detecting themuscle contractions of the peristaltic wave. An example procedure fordetecting muscle contractions is discussed further in relation to FIG.64, and an example of a reflectance data set gathered while ingestibledevice 65400 is located within the jejunum is discussed in relation toFIG. 65.

Diagram 65440 depicts ingestible device 65400 within the jejunum, whenthe peristaltic wave has moved past ingestible device 65400. Diagram65440 depicts contracting portions 65408 that form the peristaltic wavewithin the jejunum having moved past the end of ingestible device 65400.The peristaltic wave proceeds along the length of the jejunum asdifferent portions of wall 65406 contract and relax, causing it toappear as if contracting portions 65408 of wall 65406 proceed along thelength of the jejunum (i.e., as depicted by contracting portions 65408proceeding from left to right in diagrams 65410-65430). While in thisposition, ingestible device 65400 may detect a similar level ofreflectance (e.g., through the use of an illuminator and a detector of asensing sub-unit as described elsewhere herein) as detected when thereis no peristaltic wave occurring (e.g., as detected when ingestibledevice 65400 is in the position indicated in diagram 65410, or diagram65420).

Depending on the species of the subject, peristaltic waves may occurwith relatively predictable regularity. After the peristaltic wave haspassed over ingestible device 65400 (e.g., as depicted in diagram65440), the walls 65406 of the jejunum may relax again (e.g., asdepicted in diagram 65410), until the next peristaltic wave begins toform. In some embodiments, ingestible device 65400 may be configured tocontinue to gather reflectance value data while it is within the GItract, and may store a data set with the reflectance values over time.This may allow ingestible device 65400 to detect each of the musclecontractions as the peristaltic wave passes over ingestible device 65400(e.g., as depicted in diagram 65430), and may enable ingestible device65400 to both count the number of muscle contractions that occur, and todetermine that a current location of the ingestible device 65400 iswithin the jejunum. For example, ingestible device 65400 may beconfigured to monitor for possible muscle contractions while is insideeither the stomach or the duodenum, and may determine that ingestibledevice 65400 has moved to the jejunum in response to detecting a musclecontraction consistent with a peristaltic wave.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating some aspects of a localizationprocess used by the ingestible device. In general, the process describedin FIG. 60 can be used with any ingestible device disclosedherein.Furthermore, the features of FIG. 60 may be combined with anyother systems, methods or processes described in this application. Forexample, portions of the process in FIG. 60 may be integrated into orcombined with the pyloric transition detection procedure described byFIG. 61, or the jejunum detection process described by FIG. 64.

At 65502, the ingestible device gathers measurements (e.g., through adetector as described elsewhere herein) of ambient light. For example,the ingestible device may be configured to periodically measure (e.g.,through a detector as described elsewhere herein) the level of ambientlight in the environment surrounding the ingestible device. In someembodiments, the type of ambient light being measured may depend on theconfiguration of the detector within the ingestible device. For example,if the detector is configured to measure red, green, and bluewavelengths of light, the ingestible device may be configured to measurethe ambient amount of red, green, and blue light from the surroundingenvironment. In some embodiments, the amount of ambient light measuredby the ingestible device will be larger in the area external to the body(e.g., a well-lit room where the ingestible device is being administeredto a subject) and in the oral cavity of the subject, as compared to theambient level of light measured by the ingestible device when inside ofan esophagus, stomach, or other portion of the GI tract (e.g.,esophagus, stomach, duodenum, or jejunum).

At 65504, the ingestible device determines (e.g., via control circuitrywithin a PCB as described elsewhere herein) whether the ingestibledevice has detected entry into the GI tract. For example, the ingestibledevice may be configured to determine when the most recent measurementof ambient light (e.g., the measurement gathered at 65502) indicatesthat the ingestible device has entered the GI tract. For instance, thefirst time that the ingestible device gatherers a measurement of ambientlight at 65502, the ingestible device may store that measurement (e.g.,via storage circuitry within a PCB) as a typical level of ambient lightexternal to the body. The ingestible device may be configured to thencompare the most recent measurement of ambient light to the typicallevel of ambient light external to the body (e.g., via control circuitrywithin a PCB as described elsewhere herein), and determine that theingestible device has entered the GI tract when the most recentmeasurement of ambient light is substantially smaller than the typicallevel of ambient light external to the body. For example, the ingestibledevice may be configured to detect that it has entered the GI tract inresponse to determining that the most recent measurement of ambientlight is less than or equal to 20% of the typical level of ambient lightexternal to the body. If the ingestible device determines that it hasdetected entry into the GI tract (e.g., that the ingestible device hasentered at least the esophagus), process 65500 proceeds to 65506.Alternately, if the ingestible device determines that it has notdetected entry into the GI tract (e.g., as a result of the most recentmeasurement being similar to the typical level of ambient light externalto the body), process 65500 proceeds back to 65502 where the ingestibledevice gathers further measurements. For instance, the ingestible devicemay be configured to wait a predetermined amount of time (e.g., fiveseconds, ten seconds, etc.), and then gather another measurement of thelevel of ambient light from the environment surrounding the ingestibledevice.

At 65506, the ingestible device waits for a transition from theesophagus to the stomach (e.g., from the esophagus to the stomach). Forexample, the ingestible device may be configured to determine that ithas entered the stomach (e.g., the stomach) after waiting apredetermined period of time after having entered the GI tract. Forinstance, a typical esophageal transit time in a human patient may be onthe order of 15-30 seconds. In this case, after having detected that theingestible device has entered the GI tract at 65504 (i.e., afterdetecting that the ingestible device has reached at least theesophagus), the ingestible device may be configured to wait one minute,or a similar amount of time longer than the typical esophageal transmittime (e.g., ninety-seconds), before automatically determining that theingestible device has entered at least the stomach (e.g., the stomach).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may also determine whether ithas entered the stomach based on measurements of pH or temperature. Forexample, the ingestible device may be configured to determine that ithas entered the stomach if a temperature of ingestible device hasincreased to at least 31 degrees Celsius (i.e., consistent with thetemperature inside the stomach), or if a measured pH of the environmentsurrounding the ingestible device is sufficiently acidic (i.e.,consistent with the acidic nature of gastric juices that may be foundinside the stomach).

At 65508, the ingestible device (stores data indicating the ingestibledevice has entered the stomach (e.g., the stomach). For example, afterhaving waited a sufficient amount of time at 65506, the ingestibledevice may store data (e.g., within storage circuitry of a PCB 65120 asdescribed elsewhere herein) indicative of the ingestible device havingentered at least the stomach. Once the ingestible device reaches atleast the stomach, process 65500 proceeds to 65510 where the ingestibledevice may be configured to gather data to detect entry into theduodenum (e.g., the duodenum).

In some embodiments, process 65500 may also simultaneously proceed from65508 to 65520, where the ingestible device may be configured to gatherdata in order to detect muscle contractions and detect entry into thejejunum (e.g., the jejunum). In some embodiments, the ingestible devicemay be configured to simultaneously monitor for entry into the duodenumat 65516-65518, as well as detect for entry into the jejunum at65520-65524. This may allow the ingestible device to determine when ithas entered the jejunum (e.g., as a result of detecting musclecontractions), even when it fails to first detect entry into theduodenum (e.g., as a result of very quick transit times of theingestible device through the duodenum).

At 65510, the ingestible device gathers measurements of green and bluereflectance levels (e.g., through the use of an illuminator and adetector of a sensing sub-unit as described elsewhere herein) while inthe stomach. For example, the ingestible device may be configured toperiodically gather measurements of green and blue reflectance levelswhile in the stomach. For instance, the ingestible device may beconfigured to transmit a green illumination and a blue illumination(e.g., via an illuminator as described elsewhere herein) every five tofifteen seconds, and measure the resulting reflectance (e.g., via adetector as described elsewhere herein). Every time that the ingestibledevice gathers a new set of measurements, the measurements may be addedto a stored data set (e.g., stored within memory circuitry of a PCB asdescribed elsewhere herein). The ingestible device may then use thisdata set to determine whether or not the ingestible device is stillwithin a stomach or a duodenum.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to detect afirst reflectance based on generating an illumination of a firstwavelength in approximately the green spectrum of light (between 495-600nm), and detecting a second reflectance based on generating anillumination of the second wavelength in approximately the blue spectrumof light (between 400-495 nm). In some embodiments, the ingestibledevice may ensure that the illumination in the green spectrum and theillumination in the blue spectrum have wavelengths separated by at least50 nm. This may enable the ingestible device to sufficiently distinguishbetween the two wavelengths when detecting the reflectances (e.g., via adetector as described elsewhere herein). It is understood that theseparation of 50 nm is intended to be illustrative, and not limiting,and depending on the accuracy of the detectors within the ingestibledevice, smaller separations may be possible to be used.

At 65512, the ingestible device determines (e.g., using controlcircuitry within a PCB as described elsewhere herein) whether theingestible device has detected a transition from the stomach to aduodenum based on a ratio of green and blue (G/B) reflectance levels.For example, the ingestible device may obtain (e.g., from memorycircuitry of a PCB as described elsewhere herein) a data set containinghistorical data for the respective ratio of the green reflectance to theblue reflectance as measured at a respective time. Generally speaking, aduodenum of a human subject reflects a higher ratio of green light toblue light, as compared to the ratio of green light to blue light thatis reflected by a stomach. Based on this, the ingestible device may beconfigured to take a first set of ratios from the data set, representingthe result of recent measurements, and compare them to a second set ofratios from the data set, representing the results of past measurements.When the the ingestible device determines that the mean value of thefirst set of ratios is substantially larger than the mean value of thesecond set of ratios (i.e., that the ratio of reflected green light toreflected blue light has increased), the ingestible device may determinethat it has entered the duodenum (from the stomach. If the ingestibledevice detects a transition from the stomach to a duodenum (process65500 proceeds to 65514, where the ingestible device stores dataindicating that the ingestible device has entered the duodenum.Alternatively, if the ingestible device determines that the ingestibledevice has not transitioned from the stomach to the duodenum, process65500 proceeds back to 65510 to gather more measurements of green andblue reflectance levels while still in the stomach. An example procedurefor using measurements of green and blue reflectances to monitor fortransitions between the stomach and the duodenum is discussed in greaterdetail in relation to FIG. 61.

In some embodiments, the first time that detects a transition from thestomach to the duodenum, the ingestible device may be configured to takea mean of the second set of data, (e.g., the set of data previouslyrecorded while in the stomach) and store this as a typical ratio ofgreen light to blue light detected within the stomach (e.g., thestomach) (e.g., within memory circuitry of a PCB 65120 (FIG. 57) asdescribed elsewhere herein). This stored information may later be usedby the ingestible device to determine when the ingestible devicere-enters the stomach from the duodenum as a result of a reverse pylorictransition.

At 65514, the ingestible device stores data indicating that theingestible device has entered the duodenum. For example, the ingestibledevice may store a flag within local memory (e.g., memory circuitry of aPCB as described elsewhere herein) indicating that the the ingestibledevice is currently in the duodenum. In some embodiments, the ingestibledevice may also store a timestamp indicating the time when theingestible device entered the duodenum. Once the ingestible devicereaches the duodenum, process 65500 proceeds to 65520 where theingestible device may be configured to gather data in order to detectmuscle contractions and detect entry into the jejunum. Process 65500also proceeds from 65514 to 65516, where the ingestible device may beconfigured to gather data additional data in order to detect re-entryinto the stomach from the duodenum.

At 65516, the ingestible device gathers measurements (e.g., via asensing sub-unit as described elsewhere herein) of green and bluereflectance levels while in the duodenum. For example, the ingestibledevice may be configured to periodically gather measurements (e.g., viaa sensing sub-unit as described elsewhere herein) of green and bluereflectance levels while in the duodenum, similar to the measurementsmade at 65510 while in the stomach. For instance, the ingestible devicemay be configured to transmit a green illumination and a blueillumination (e.g., via an illuminator as described elsewhere herein)every five to fifteen seconds, and measure the resulting reflectance(e.g., via a detectoras described elsewhere herein). Every time that theingestible device gathers a new set of measurements, the measurementsmay be added to a stored data set (e.g., stored within memory circuitryof a PCB). The the ingestible device may then use this data set todetermine whether or the ingestible device is still within the duodenum,or if the ingestible device has transitioned back into the stomach).

At 65518, the ingestible device determines a transition from theduodenum to the stomach based on a ratio of the measured greenreflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels. In someembodiments, the ingestible device may compare the ratio of the measuredgreen reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levelsrecently gathered by the ingestible device (e.g., measurements gatheredat 65516), and determine whether or not the ratio of the measured greenreflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels is similar tothe average ratio of the measured green reflectance levels to themeasured blue reflectance levels seen in the stomach. For instance, theingestible device may retrieve data (e.g., from memory circuitry of aPCB (FIG. 57)) indicative of the average ratio of the measured greenreflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels seen in thestomach, and determine that the ingestible device has transitioned backto the stomach if the recently measured ratio of the measured greenreflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels issufficiently similar to the average level in the stomach (e.g., within20% of the average ratio of the measured green reflectance levels to themeasured blue reflectance levels seen in the stomach, or within anyother suitable threshold level). If the ingestible device detects atransition from the duodenum to the stomach, process 65500 proceeds to65508 to store data indicating the ingestible device has entered thestomach, and continues to monitor for further transitions.Alternatively, if the ingestible device does not detect a transitionfrom the duodenum to the stomach, process 65500 proceeds to 65516 togather additional measurements of green and blue reflectance levelswhile in the duodenum, which may be used to continuously monitor forpossible transitions back into the stomach. An example procedure forusing measurements of green and blue reflectances to monitor fortransitions between the stomach and the duodenum is discussed in greaterdetail in relation to FIG. 61.

At 65520, the ingestible device gathers periodic measurements of thereflectance levels (e.g., via a sensing sub-unit) while in the duodenum.In some embodiments, the ingestible device may gather similar periodicmeasurements while in the stomach as well. In some embodiments, theseperiodic measurements may enable the ingestible device to detect musclecontractions (e.g., muscle contractions due to a peristaltic wave asdiscussed in relation to FIG. 59), which may be indicative of entry intoa jejunum. The ingestible device may be configured to gather periodicmeasurements using any suitable wavelength of illumination (e.g., bygenerating illumination using an illuminator and detecting the resultingreflectance using a detector), or combinations of wavelengths ofillumination. For example, in some embodiments, the ingestible devicemay be configured to generate red, green, and blue illumination, storeseparate data sets indicative of red, green, and blue illumination, andanalyze each of the data sets separately to search for frequencycomponents in the recorded data indicative of detected musclecontractions. In some embodiments, the measurements gathered by theingestible device at 65520 may be sufficiently fast as to detectperistaltic waves in a subject. For instance, in a healthy humansubject, peristaltic waves may occur at a rate of approximately 0.05 Hzto 0.33 Hz. Therefore, the ingestible device may be configured togenerate illumination and measure the resulting reflectance at leastonce every 2.5 seconds (i.e., potentially minimum rate to detect a 0.2Hz signal), and preferably at a higher rate, such as once every 0.5seconds or faster, and store values indicative of the resultingreflectances in a data set (e.g., within memory circuitry of a PCB).After gathering additional data (e.g., after gathering one new datapoint, or a predetermined number of new data points), process 65500proceeds to 65522, where the ingestible device determines whether or nota muscle contraction has been detected.

At 65522, the ingestible device determines (e.g., via control circuitrywithin a PCB) whether the ingestible device detects a muscle contractionbased on the measurements of reflectance levels (e.g., as gathered by asensing sub-unit). For example, the ingestible device may obtain a fixedamount of data stored as a result of measurements made at 65520 (e.g.,retrieve the past minute of data from memory circuitry within a PCB. Theingestible device may then convert the obtained data into the frequencydomain, and search for peaks in a frequency range that would beconsistent with peristaltic waves. For example, in a healthy humansubject, peristaltic waves may occur at a rate of approximately 0.05 Hzto 0.33 Hz, and the ingestible device may be configured to search forpeaks in the frequency domain representation of the data between 0.05 Hzto 0.33 Hz above a threshold value. If the ingestible devicedetects acontraction based on the reflectance levels (e.g., based on detectingpeaks in the frequency domain representation of the data between 0.05 Hzto 0.33 Hz), process 65500 proceeds to 65524 to store data indicatingthat the device has entered the jejunum. Alternatively, if theingestible device does not detect a muscle contraction, process 65500proceeds to 65520 to gather periodic measurements of the reflectancelevels while in the duodenum. In some embodiments, the ingestible devicemay store data (e.g., within memory circuitry of a PCB) indicating thata muscle contraction was detected, and process 65500 will not proceedfrom 65522 to 65524 until a sufficient number of muscle contractionshave been detected.

At 65524, the ingestible device stores data (e.g., within memorycircuitry of a PCB) indicating that the device has entered the jejunum).For example, in response to detecting that muscle contraction hasoccurred at 65522, the ingestible device may determine that it hasentered the jejunum 65314, and is no longer inside of the duodenum orthe stomach. In some embodiments, the ingestible device may continue tomeasure muscle contractions while in the jejunum, and may store dataindicative of the frequency, number, or strength of the musclecontractions over time (e.g., within memory circuitry of a PCB). In someembodiments, the ingestible device may also be configured to monitor forone or more transitions. Such transitions can include a transition fromthe jejunum to the ileum, an ileoceacal transition from the ileum to thececum, a transition from the cecum to the colon, or detect exit from thebody (e.g., by measuring reflectances, temperature, or levels of ambientlight).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may also determine that ithas entered the jejunum after a pre-determined amount of time has passedafter having detected entry into the duodenum. For example, barring areverse pyloric transition from the duodenum back to the stomach, thetypical transit time for an ingestible device to reach the jejunum fromthe duodenum in a healthy human subject is less than three minutes. Insome embodiments, the ingestible device may therefore be configured toautomatically determine that it has entered the jejunum after spendingat least three minutes within the duodenum. This determination may bemade separately from the determination made based on measured musclecontractions (e.g., the determination made at 65522), and in someembodiments, the ingestible device may determine that it has entered thejejunum in response to either detecting muscle contractions, or afterthree minutes has elapsed from having entered the duodenum (e.g., asdetermined by storing data at 65514 indicative of the time thatingestible device entered the duodenum).

For illustrative purposes, 65512-65518 of process 65500 describe theingestible device measuring green reflectances and blue reflectances,calculating a ratio of the two reflectances, and using this informationto determine when the ingestible device has transitioned between theduodenum and stomach. However, in some embodiments, other wavelengths oflight may be used other than green and blue, provided that thewavelengths of light chosen have different reflective properties withinthe stomach and the duodenum (e.g., as a result of different reflectioncoefficients of the stomach tissue and the tissue of the duodenum).

It will be understood that the steps and descriptions of the flowchartsof this disclosure, including FIG. 60, are merely illustrative. Any ofthe steps and descriptions of the flowcharts, including FIG. 60, may bemodified, omitted, rearranged, and performed in alternate orders or inparallel, two or more of the steps may be combined, or any additionalsteps may be added, without departing from the scope of the presentdisclosure. For example, the ingestible device may calculate the meanand the standard deviation of multiple data sets in parallel in order tospeed up the overall computation time. As another example, theingestible device may gather data periodic measurements and detectpossible muscle contractions (e.g., at 65520-65522) while simultaneouslygathering green and blue reflectance levels to determine transitions toand from the stomach and duodenum (e.g., at 65510-65518). Furthermore,it should be noted that the steps and descriptions of FIG. 60 may becombined with any other system, device, or method described in thisapplication, including processes 65600 and 65900, and any of theingestible devices or systems discussed in this application could beused to perform one or more of the steps in FIG. 60.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating some aspects of a process fordetecting transitions from a stomach to a duodenum and from a duodenumback to a stomach, which may be used when determining a location of aningestible device as it transits through a gastrointestinal (GI) tract,in accordance with some embodiments of the disclosure. In someembodiments, process 65600 may begin when an ingestible device firstdetects that it has entered the stomach, and will continue as long asthe ingestible device determines that it is within the stomach or theduodenum. In some embodiments, process 65600 may only be terminated whenan ingestible device determines that it has entered the jejunum, orotherwise progressed past the duodenum and the stomach. The duodenumdetection process 65600 described in FIG. 61 may be applied to anydevice discussed in this application, and any of the ingestible devicesmay be used to perform one or more parts of the process described inFIG. 61. Furthermore, the features of FIG. 61 may be combined with anyother systems, methods or processes described in this application. Forexample, portions of the process described by the process in FIG. 61 maybe integrated into process 65500 discussed in relation to FIG. 60.

At 65602, the ingestible device retrieves a data set (e.g., from memorycircuitry within a PCB) with ratios of the measured green reflectancelevels to the measured blue reflectance levels over time. For example,the ingestible device may retrieve a data set from a PCB containingrecently recorded ratios of the measured green reflectance levels to themeasured blue reflectance levels (e.g., as recorded at 65510 or 65516 ofprocess 65500). In some embodiments, the retrieved data set may includethe ratios of the measured green reflectance levels to the measured bluereflectance levels over time. Example plots of data sets of ratios ofthe measured green reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectancelevels are discussed further in relation to FIG. 62 and FIG. 63.

At 65604, the ingestible device includes a new measurement (e.g., asmade with a sensing sub-unit) of a ratio of the measured greenreflectance level to the measured blue reflectance level in the dataset. For example, the ingestible device may be configured tooccasionally record new data by transmitting green and blue illumination(e.g., via an illuminator), detecting the amount of reflectance receiveddue to the green and blue illumination (e.g., via a detector), andstoring data indicative of the amount of the received reflectance (e.g.,in memory circuitry of a PCB). The ingestible device may be configuredto record new data every five to fifteen seconds, or at any otherconvenient interval of time. For illustrative purposes, the ingestibledevice is described as storing and retrieving the ratio of the measuredgreen reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels (e.g.,if the amount of detected green reflectance was identical to the amountof detected blue reflectance at a given time, the ratio of the green andblue reflectances would be “1.0” at that given time); however, it isunderstood that the green reflectance data and the blue reflectance datamay be stored separately within the memory of the ingestible device(e.g., stored as two separate data sets within memory circuitry of aPCB).

At 65606, the ingestible device retrieves a first subset of recent databy applying a first sliding window filter to the data set. For example,the ingestible device may use a sliding window filter to obtain apredetermined amount of the most recent data within the data set, whichmay include any new values of the ratio of the measured greenreflectance level to the measured blue reflectance level obtained at65604. For instance, the ingestible device may be configured to selectbetween ten and forty data points from the data set, or the ingestibledevice may be configured to select a predetermined range of data valuesbetween fifteen seconds of data and five minutes of data. In someembodiments, other ranges of data may be selected, depending on howfrequently measurements are recorded, and the particular application athand. For instance, any suitable amount of data may be selected in thesliding window, provided that it is sufficient to detect statisticallysignificant differences between the data selected in a second slidingwindow (e.g., the second subset of data selected at 65614).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may also be configured toremove outliers from the data set, or to smooth out unwanted noise inthe data set. For example, the ingestible device may select the firstsubset of data, or any other subset of data, by first obtaining a rawset of values by applying a window filter to the data set (e.g.,selecting a particular range of data to be included). The ingestibledevice may then be configured to identify outliers in the raw set ofvalues; for instance, by identifying data points that are over threestandard deviations away from the mean value of the raw set of values,or any other suitable threshold. The ingestible device may thendetermine the subset of data by removing outliers from the raw set ofvalues. This may enable the ingestible device to avoid spuriousinformation when determining whether or not it is located within thestomach or the duodenum.

At 65608, the ingestible device determines whether the most recentlydetected location was the duodenum. In some embodiments, the ingestibledevice may store a data flag (e.g., within memory circuitry of a PCB65120 (FIG. 57)) indicating the most recent portion of the GI tract thatthe ingestible device detected itself to be within. For instance, everytime the ingestible device detects entry to the stomach (e.g., detectsentry into stomach 65306 as a result of the decision made at 65610), aflag is stored in memory indicating the ingestible device is in thestomach (e.g., as part of storing data at 65612). If the ingestibledevice subsequently detects entry into the duodenum (e.g., detects entryinto the duodenum 65310 as a result of a decision made at 65624),another different flag is stored in memory indicating that theingestible device is in the duodenum (e.g., as part of storing data at65624). In this case, the ingestible device may retrieve the mostrecently stored flag at 65608, and determine whether or not the flagindicates that the ingestible device was most recently within theduodenum. If the ingestible device detects that it was most recently inthe duodenum, process 65600 proceeds to 65610 where the ingestibledevice compares the recent measurements of the ratios of the measuredgreen reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels (e.g.,measurements that include the recent measurement made at 65606) to thetypical ratios measured within the stomach, and uses this information todetermine whether a reverse pyloric transition from the duodenum back tothe stomach has occurred. Alternately, if the ingestible device detectsthat it was not most recently in the duodenum (e.g., because it was inthe stomach instead), process 65600 proceeds to 65614 where theingestible device compares the recent measurements of the ratios of themeasured green reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectancelevels (e.g., measurements that include the recent measurement made at65606) to past measurements, and uses this information to determinewhether a pyloric transition from the stomach to the duodenum hasoccurred.

Process 65600 proceeds from 65608 to 65610 when the ingestible devicedetermined that it was most recently in the duodenum. At 65610, theingestible devicedetermines (e.g., via control circuitry within a PCB)whether the current G/B signal is similar to a recorded average G/Bsignal in the stomach. For example, the ingestible device may beconfigured to have previously stored data (e.g., within memory circuitryof a PCB 65120 (FIG. 57)) indicative of the average ratio of themeasured green reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectancelevels measured in the stomach. The ingestible device may then retrievethis stored data indicative of the average ratio of the measured greenreflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels in thestomach, and compare this against the recent measurements in order todetermine whether or not the ingestible device has returned back to thestomach from the duodenum. For instance, the ingestible device maydetermine if the mean value of the first subset of recent data (i.e.,the average value of the recently measured ratios of the measured greenreflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels) is less thanthe average ratio of the measured green reflectance levels to themeasured blue reflectance levels within the stomach, or less that theaverage ratio measured within the stomach plus a predetermined numbertimes the standard deviation of the ratios measured within the stomach.For instance, if the average ratio of the measured green reflectancelevels to the measured blue reflectance levels in the stomach was “1,”with a standard deviation of “0.2,” ingestible device may determinewhether or not the mean value of the first subset of data is less than“1.0+k*0.2,” where “k” is a number between zero and five. It isunderstood that, in some embodiments, the ingestible device may beconfigured to use a different threshold level to determine whether ornot the mean value of the first subset of recent data is sufficientlysimilar to the average ratio of the measured green reflectance levels tothe measured blue reflectance levels within the stomach. In response todetermining that the recent ratio of the measured green reflectancelevels to the measured blue reflectance levels is similar to the averageratio of measured green and blue reflectance levels seen in the stomach,process 65600 proceeds to 65612 where the ingestible device stores dataindicating that it has re-entered the stomach from the duodenum.Alternately, in response to determining that the recent ratio ofmeasured green and blue reflectance levels is sufficiently differentfrom the average ratio of measured green and blue reflectance levelsseen in the stomach, the ingestible device proceeds directly to 65604,and continues to obtain new data on an ongoing basis.

At 65612, the ingestible device stores data indicating a reverse pylorictransition from the duodenum to the stomach was detected. For example,the ingestible device may store a data flag (e.g., within memorycircuitry of a PCB) indicating that the ingestible device most recentlydetected itself to be within the stomach portion of the GI tract. Insome embodiments, the ingestible device may also store data (e.g.,within memory circuitry of a PCB) indicating a time that the ingestibledevice detected the reverse pyloric transition from the duodenum to thestomach. This information may be used by the ingestible device at 65608,and as a result process 65600 may proceed from 65608 to 65614, ratherthan proceeding from 65618 to 65610. After the ingestible device storesthe data indicating a reverse pyloric transition from the duodenum tothe stomach was detected, process 65600 proceeds to 65604 where theingestible device continues to gather additional measurements, andcontinues to monitor for further transitions between the stomach and theduodenum.

Process 65600 proceeds from 65608 to 65614 when the ingestible devicedetermined that it was not most recently in the duodenum (e.g., as aresult of having most recently been in the stomach instead). At 65614,the ingestible device retrieves a second subset of previous data byapplying a second sliding window filter to the data set. For example,the ingestible device may use a sliding window filter to obtain apredetermined amount of older data from a past time range, which may beseparated from recent time range used to select the first subset of datagathered at 65606 by a predetermined period of time. In someembodiments, any suitable amount of data may be selected by the firstand second window filters, and the first and second window filters maybe separated by any appropriate predetermined amount of time. Forexample, in some embodiments, the first window filter and the secondwindow filter may each be configured to select a predetermined range ofdata values from the data set, the predetermined range being betweenfifteen seconds of data and five minutes of data. In some embodiments,the recent measurements and the past measurements may then be separatedby a predetermined period of time that is between one to five times thepredetermined range of data values. For instance, the ingestible devicemay select the first subset of data and the second subset of data toeach be one minute of data selected from the dataset (i.e., selected tohave a predetermined range of one minute), and the first subset of dataand the second subset of data are selected from recorded measurementsthat are at least two minutes apart (i.e., the predetermined period oftime is two minutes, which is twice the range used to select the subsetsof data using the window filters). As another example, the ingestibledevice may select the first subset of data and the second subset of datato each be five minutes of data selected from the dataset (i.e.,selected to have a predetermined range of five minutes), and the firstsubset of data and the second subset of data are selected from recordedmeasurements that are at least 10 minutes apart (i.e., the predeterminedperiod of time is two minutes, which is twice the range used to selectthe subsets of data using the window filters).

In some embodiments, if the ingestible device recently transitioned tothe stomach from the duodenum (e.g., as determined by checking forrecent data stored within the ingestible device at 65612), theingestible device may select the second subset of data at 65614 from atime frame when the ingestible device is known to be within the stomach.In some embodiments, the ingestible device may alternately select apreviously recorded average and standard deviation for ratios of greenreflectances and blue reflectances within the stomach (e.g., an averageand standard deviation typical of data recorded within the stomach, aspreviously recorded within memory circuitry of a PCB at 65620) in placeof the second subset of data. In this case, the ingestible device maysimply use the previously recorded average and previously recordedstandard deviation when making a determination at 65616, rather thanexpending resources to calculate the mean and standard deviation of thesecond subset.

At 65616, the ingestible device determines whether the differencebetween the mean of the second subset and the mean of the first subsetis greater than a predetermined multiple of the standard deviation ofthe first subset. For example, the ingestible device may compute adifference between a mean of the first subset of recent data and a meanof a second subset of past data, and determine whether this differenceis greater than three times the standard deviation of the second subsetof past data. In some embodiments, it is understood that any convenientthreshold level may be used other than three times the standarddeviation, such as any value between one and five times the standarddeviation. Also, in some embodiments, the ingestible device may insteadset the threshold level based on the standard deviation of the secondsubset instead of the first subset. In response to determining that thedifference between the mean of the first subset and the mean of thesecond subset is greater than a predetermined multiple of the standarddeviation of the second subset, process 65600 proceeds to 65618.Otherwise, process 65600 proceeds back to 65604, where the ingestibledevice 65604 continues to gather new data to be used in monitoring fortransitions between the stomach and the duodenum.

At 65618, the ingestible device determines (e.g., via control circuitrywithin a PCB) whether the determination made at 65616 is the first timethat the difference between the mean of the first subset of recent dataand the mean of the second subset of past data is calculated to begreater than the standard deviation of the second subset. If theingestible device determines that this is the first time that thedifference between the mean of the first subset and the mean of thesecond subset is calculated to be greater than the standard deviation ofthe second subset, process 65600 proceeds to 65620 to store the mean ofthe second subset of past data as an average G/B signal in the stomach.Alternatively, if the ingestible device determines that the immediatelypreceding determination made at 65616 is not the first time that thedifference between the mean of the first subset of recent data and themean of the second subset of past data is calculated to be greater thanthe standard deviation of the second subset, process 65600 proceedsdirectly to 65622.

At 65620, the ingestible device stores the mean of the second subset asan average G/B signal in the stomach. For example, the ingestible devicemay be configured to store the mean of the second subset of past data(e.g., store within memory circuitry of a PCB 65120) as the averageratio of the measured green reflectance levels to the measured bluereflectance levels measured in the stomach. In some embodiments, theingestible device may also store the standard deviation of the secondsubset of past data as a typical standard deviation of the ratios of themeasured green reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectancelevels detected within the stomach. This stored information may be usedby the ingestible device later on (e.g., at 65610) to compare againstfuture data, which may enable the ingestible device to detect reversepyloric transitions from the duodenum back to the stomach, and maygenerally be used in place of other experimental data gathered from thestomach (e.g., in place of the second subset of data at 65616). Afterstoring the mean of the second subset as an average G/B signal in thestomach, process 65600 proceeds to 65622.

At 65622, the ingestible device determines whether a difference of themean of the first subset of recent data to the mean of the second subsetof past data is greater than a predetermined threshold, “M”. In someembodiments, the predetermined threshold, “M,” will be sufficientlylarge to ensure that the mean of the first subset is substantiallylarger than the mean of the second subset, and may enable the ingestibledevice to ensure that it detected an actual transition to the duodenum.This may be particularly advantageous when the determination made at65616 is potentially unreliable due to the standard deviation of thesecond subset of past data being abnormally small. For example, atypical value of the predetermined threshold “M,” may be on the order of0.1 to 0.5. If the ingestible device determines that the difference ofthe mean of the first subset of recent data to the second subset of pastdata is greater than a predetermined threshold, process 65600 proceedsto 65624 to store data indicating that a pyloric transition from thestomach to the duodenum was detected. Alternatively, if the ingestibledevice determines that the ratio of the mean of the first subset to thesecond subset is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold, “M”(i.e., determines that a transition to the duodenum has not occurred),process 65600 proceeds directly to 65604 where the ingestible devicecontinues to make new measurements and monitor for possible transitionsbetween the stomach and the duodenum.

In some embodiments, instead of using a difference of the mean of thefirst subset of recent data to the mean of the second subset of pastdata, the ingestible device determines whether the ratio of the mean ofthe first subset of recent data to the mean of the second subset of pastdata is greater than a predetermined threshold, “M”. In someembodiments, the predetermined threshold, “M,” will be sufficientlylarge to ensure that the mean of the first subset is substantiallylarger than the mean of the second subset, and may enable the ingestibledevice to ensure that it detected an actual transition to the duodenum.This may be particularly advantageous when the determination made at65616 is potentially unreliable due to the standard deviation of thesecond subset of past data being abnormally small. For example, atypical value of the predetermined threshold “M,” may be on the order of1.2 to 2.0. It is understood any convenient type of threshold orcalculation may be used to determine whether or not the first subset ofdata and the second subset of data are both statistically distinct fromone another, and also substantially different from one another in termsof overall average value.

At 65624, the ingestible device stores data indicating a pylorictransition from the stomach to the duodenum was detected. For example,the ingestible device may store a data flag (e.g., within memorycircuitry of a PCB) indicating that the ingestible device most recentlydetected itself to be within the duodenum portion of the GI tract. Insome embodiments, the ingestible device may also store data (e.g.,within memory circuitry of a PCB) indicating a time that the ingestibledevice detected the pyloric transition from the stomach to the duodenum.This information may be used by the ingestible device at 65608, and as aresult process 65600 may proceed from 65608 to 65610, rather thanproceeding from 65618 to 65614. After the ingestible device stores thedata indicating a pyloric transition from the stomach to the duodenumwas detected, process 65600 proceeds to 65604 where the ingestibledevice continues to gather additional measurements, and continues tomonitor for further transitions between the stomach and the duodenum.

It will be understood that the steps and descriptions of the flowchartsof this disclosure, including FIG. 61, are merely illustrative. Any ofthe steps and descriptions of the flowcharts, including FIG. 61, may bemodified, omitted, rearranged, and performed in alternate orders or inparallel, two or more of the steps may be combined, or any additionalsteps may be added, without departing from the scope of the presentdisclosure. For example, the ingestible device may calculate the meanand the standard deviation of multiple data sets in parallel in order tospeed up the overall computation time. Furthermore, it should be notedthat the steps and descriptions of FIG. 61 may be combined with anyother system, device, or method described in this application, and anyof the ingestible devices or systems discussed in this application couldbe used to perform one or more of the steps in FIG. 61. For example,portions of process 65600 may be incorporated into 65508-65516 ofprocess 65500, and may be part of a more general process for determininga location of the ingestible device. As another example, the ratio ofdetected blue and green light (e.g., as measured and added to the dataset at 65604) may continue even outside of the stomach or duodenum, andsimilar information may be recorded by the ingestible device throughoutits transit in the GI tract. Example plots of data sets of ratios ofmeasured green and blue reflectance levels, which may be gatheredthroughout the GI tract, are discussed further in relation to FIG. 62and FIG. 62 below.

FIG. 62 is a plot illustrating data collected during an exampleoperation of an ingestible device, which may be used when determining alocation of an ingestible device as it transits through agastrointestinal (GI) tract, in accordance with some embodiments of thedisclosure.

Although FIG. 62 may be described in connection with the ingestibledevice for illustrative purposes, this is not intended to be limiting,and plot 65700 and data set 65702 may be typical of data gathered by anydevice discussed in this application. Plot 65700 depicts the ratios ofthe measured green reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectancelevels over time. For example, the ingestible device may have computedthe value for each point in the data set 65702 by transmitting green andblue illumination at a given time (e.g., via a illuminator), measuringthe resulting green and blue reflectances (e.g., via a detector),calculating the ratio of the resulting reflectances, and storing theratio in the data set along with a timestamp indicating the time thatthe reflectances were gathered.

At 65704, shortly after the ingestible device begins operation, theingestible device determines that it has reached at least the stomach(e.g., as a result of making a determination similar to thedetermination discussed in relation to 65506 in process 65500). Theingestible device continues to gather additional measurements of greenand blue reflectance levels, and at 65706 the ingestible devicedetermines that a pyloric transition has occurred from the stomach tothe duodenum (e.g., as a result of making a determination similar to thedeterminations discussed in relation to 65616-65624 of process 65600).Notably, the values in data set 65702 around 65706 jump upprecipitously, which is indicative of the higher ratios of measuredgreen reflectance levels to measured blue reflectance levels typical ofthe duodenum.

The remainder of the data set 65702 depicts the ratios of the measuredgreen reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levelsthroughout the remainder of the GI tract. At 65708, the ingestibledevice has reached the jejunum (e.g., as determined through measurementsof muscle contractions, as discussed in relation to FIG. 64), and by65710, the ingestible device has reached the cecum. It is understoodthat, in some embodiments, the overall character and appearance of dataset 65702 changes within the small intestine (i.e., the duodenum,jejunum, and ileum) versus the cecum. Within the jejunum and ileum,there may typically be a wide variation in the ratios of the measuredgreen reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levels,resulting in relatively noisy data with a high standard deviation. Bycomparison, within the cecum the ingestible device may measure arelatively stable ratio of the measured green reflectance levels to themeasured blue reflectance levels. In some embodiments, the ingestibledevice may be configured to determine transitions from the smallintestine to the cecum based on these differences. For example, theingestible device may compare recent windows of data to past windows ofdata, and detect a transition to the cecum in response to determiningthat the standard deviation of the ratios in the recent window of datais substantially less than the standard deviation of the ratios in thepast window of data.

FIG. 63 is another plot illustrating data collected during an exampleoperation of an ingestible device, which may be used when determining alocation of an ingestible device as it transits through agastrointestinal (GI) tract, in accordance with some embodiments of thedisclosure. Similar to FIG. 62, FIG. 63 may be described in connectionwith the ingestible device for illustrative purposes. However, this isnot intended to be limiting, and plot 65800 and data set 65802 may betypical of data gathered by any device discussed in this application.

At 65804, shortly after the ingestible device begins operation, theingestible device determines that it has reached at least the stomach(e.g., as a result of making a determination similar to thedetermination discussed in relation to 65506 in process 65500). Theingestible device continues to gather additional measurements of greenand blue reflectance levels (e.g., via a sensing sub-unit), and at 65806the ingestible device determines that a pyloric transition has occurredfrom the stomach to the duodenum (e.g., as a result of making adetermination similar to the determinations discussed in relation to65616-65624 of process 65600). Notably, the values in data set 65802around 65806 jump up precipitously, which is indicative of the higherratios of measured green reflectance levels to measured blue reflectancelevels typical of the duodenum, before falling shortly thereafter. As aresult of the reduced values in data set 65802, the ingestible devicedetermines that a reverse pyloric transition has occurred from theduodenum back to the stomach at 65808 (e.g., as a result of making adetermination similar to the determinations discussed in relation to65610-65612 of process 65600). At 65810, as a result of the values indata set 65802 increasing again, the ingestible device determines thatanother pyloric transition has occurred from the stomach to theduodenum, and shortly thereafter the ingestible device proceeds onwardsto the jejunum, ileum, and cecum.

The remainder of the data set 65802 depicts the ratios of the measuredgreen reflectance levels to the measured blue reflectance levelsthroughout the remainder of the GI tract. Notably, at 65812, ingestibledevice reaches the transition point between the ileum and the cecum. Asdiscussed above in relation to FIG. 62, the transition to the cecum ismarked by a reduced standard deviation in the ratios of measured greenreflectances and measured blue reflectances over time, and theingestible device may be configured to detect a transition to the cecumbased on determining that the standard deviation of a recent set ofmeasurements is substantially smaller than the standard deviation ofpast measurements taken from the jejunum or ileum.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart of illustrative steps for detecting a transitionfrom a duodenum to a jejunum, which may be used when determining alocation of an ingestible device as it transits through agastrointestinal (GI) tract, in accordance with some embodiments of thedisclosure. Although FIG. 64 may be described in connection with theingestible device for illustrative purposes, this is not intended to belimiting, and either portions or the entirety of process 65900 describedin FIG. 64 may be applied to any device discussed in this application,and any of these ingestible devices may be used to perform one or moreparts of the process described in FIG. 64. Furthermore, the features ofFIG. 64 may be combined with any other systems, methods or processesdescribed in this application. For example, portions of the processdescribed by the process in FIG. 64 may be integrated into thelocalization process 65500 (e.g., as part of 65520-65524). In someembodiments, the ingestible device may perform process 65900 while inthe duodenum, or in response to detecting entry to the duodenum. Inother embodiments, the ingestible device may perform process 65900 whilein the stomach, or in response to detecting entry into the GI tract. Itis also understood that process 65900 may be performed in parallel withany other process described in this disclosure (e.g., process 65600),which may enable the ingestible device to detect entry into variousportions of the GI tract, without necessarily detecting entry into apreceding portion of the GI tract.

For illustrative purposes, FIG. 64 may be discussed in terms of theingestible device generating and making determinations based on a singleset of reflectance levels generated at a single wavelength by a singlesensing sub-unit (e.g., sensing sub-unit 65126). However, it isunderstood that the ingestible device may generate multiple wavelengthsof illumination from multiple different sensing sub-units positionedaround the circumference of ingestible device (e.g., multiple sensingsub-units positioned at different locations behind window 65114 of theingestible device , and each of the resulting reflectances may be storedas a separate data set. Moreover, each of these sets of reflectancelevels may be used to detect muscle contractions by running multipleversions of process 65900, each one of which processes data for adifferent set of reflectances corresponding to data sets obtained frommeasurements of different wavelengths or measurements made by differentsensing sub-units.

At 65902, the ingestible device retrieves a set of reflectance levels.For example, the ingestible device may retrieve a data set of previouslyrecorded reflectance levels from memory (e.g., from memory circuitry ofa PCB). Each of the reflectance levels may correspond to reflectancespreviously detected by the ingestible device (e.g., via a detector) fromillumination generated by the ingestible device (e.g., via anilluminator), and may represent a value indicative of an amount of lightdetected in a given reflectance. However, it is understood that anysuitable frequency of light may be used, such as light in the infrared,visible, or ultraviolet spectrums. In some embodiments, the reflectancelevels may correspond to reflectances previously detected by theingestible device at periodic intervals.

At 65904, the ingestible device includes new measurements of reflectancelevels in the data set. For example, the ingestible device may beconfigured to detect a new reflectance (e.g., transmit illumination anddetect the resulting reflectance using a sensing sub-unit) at regularintervals, or with sufficient speed as to detect peristaltic waves. Forexample, the ingestible device may be configured to generateillumination and measure the resulting reflectance once every threeseconds (i.e., potentially minimum rate to detect a 0.17 Hz signal), andpreferably at a higher rate, as fast at 0.1 second or even faster. It isunderstood that the periodic interval between measurements may beadapted as needed based on the species of the subject, and the expectedfrequency of the peristaltic waves to be measured. Every time theingestible device makes a new reflectance level measurement at 65904,the new data is included to the data set (e.g., a data set stored withinmemory circuitry of a PCB).

At 65906, the ingestible device obtains a first subset of recent data byapplying a sliding window filter to the data set. For example, theingestible device may retrieve a one-minute worth of data from the dataset. If the data set includes values for reflectances measured everysecond, this would be approximately 60 data points worth of data. Anysuitable type of window size may be used, provided that the size of thewindow is sufficiently large to detect peristaltic waves (e.g.,fluctuations on the order of 0.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz for healthy humansubjects). In some embodiments, the ingestible device may also clean thedata, for example, by removing outliers from the first subset of dataobtained through the use of the sliding window filter.

At 65908, the ingestible deviceobtains a second subset of recent data byinterpolating the first subset of recent data. For example, theingestible device may interpolate the first subset of data in order togenerate a second subset of data with a sufficient number of data points(e.g., data points spaced every 0.5 seconds or greater). In someembodiments, this may enable the ingestible device to also replace anyoutlier data points that may have been removed as part of applying thewindow filter at 65906.

At 65910, the ingestible devicecalculates a normalized frequencyspectrum from the second subset of data. For example, the ingestibledevice may be configured to perform a fast Fourier transform to convertthe second subset of data from a time domain representation into afrequency domain representation. It is understood that depending on theapplication being used, and the nature of the subset of data, any numberof suitable procedures (e.g., Fourier transform procedures) may be usedto determine a frequency spectrum for the second subset of data. Forexample, the sampling frequency and size of the second subset of datamay be known in advance, and the ingestible device may be configured tohave pre-stored values of a normalized discreet Fourier transform (DFT)matrix, or the rows of the DFT matrix corresponding to the 0.05 Hz to0.33 Hz frequency components of interest, within memory (e.g., memorycircuitry of a PCB). In this case, the ingestible device may use matrixmultiplication between the DFT matrix and the data set to generate anappropriate frequency spectrum. An example data set and correspondingfrequency spectrum that may be obtained by the ingestible device isdiscussed in greater detail in relation to FIG. 65.

At 65912, the ingestible devicedetermines whether at least a portion ofthe normalized frequency spectrum is between 00.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz above athreshold value of 0.5 Hz. Peristaltic waves in a healthy human subjectoccur at a rate between 0.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz, and an ingestible deviceexperiencing peristaltic waves (e.g., an ingestible device detectingcontractions in the walls of the jejunum) may detect sinusoidalvariations in the amplitude of detected reflectances levels that followa similar 0.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz frequency. If the ingestible devicedetermines that a portion of the normalized frequency spectrum between0.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz is above a threshold value of 0.5 Hz, thismeasurement may be consistent with peristaltic waves in a healthy humansubject, and process 65900 proceeds to 65914 where the ingestible devicestores data indicating a muscle contraction was detected. Alternatively,if the ingestible device determines that no portion of the normalizedfrequency spectrum between 0.05 Hz to 0.33 Hz above a threshold value of0.5, process 65900 proceeds directly to 65904 to make new measurementsand to continue to monitor for new muscle contractions. It is understoodthat a threshold value other than 0.5 may be used, and that the exactthreshold may depend on the sampling frequency and type of frequencyspectrum used by the ingestible device.

At 65914, the ingestible device stores data indicating a musclecontraction was detected. For example, the ingestible device may storedata in memory (e.g., memory circuitry of a PCB) indicating that amuscle contraction was detected, and indicating the time that the musclecontraction was detected. In some embodiments, the ingestible device mayalso monitor the total number of muscle contractions detected, or thenumber of muscle contractions detected in a given time frame. In someembodiments, detecting a particular number of muscle contractions may beconsistent with the ingestible device being within the jejunum) of ahealthy human subject. After detecting a muscle contraction, process65900 proceeds to 65916.

At 65916, the ingestible device determines whether a total number ofmuscle contractions exceeds a predetermined threshold number. Forexample, the ingestible device may retrieve the total number of musclecontractions detected from memory (e.g., from memory circuitry of aPCB), and compare the total number to a threshold value. In someembodiments, the threshold value may be one, or any number larger thanone. The larger the threshold value, the more muscle contractions needto be detected before the ingestible device stores data indicating thatit has entered the jejunum. In practice, setting the threshold value asthree or higher may prevent the ingestible device from detecting falsepositives (e.g., due to natural movement of the GI tract organs, or dueto movement of the subject). If the total number of contractions exceedsthe predetermined threshold number, process 65900 proceeds to 65918 tostore data indicating detection of a transition from the duodenum to thejejunum. Alternatively, if the total number of contractions does notexceed a predetermined threshold number, process 65900 proceeds to 65904to include new measurements of reflectance levels in the data set. Anexample plot of the muscle contractions detected over time is discussedin greater detail in relation to FIG. 66.

At 65918, the ingestible device stores data indicating detection of atransition from the duodenum to the jejunum. For example, the ingestibledevice may store data in memory (e.g., from memory circuitry of a PCB)indicating that the jejunum has been reached. In some embodiments, ifthe ingestible device is configured to perform all or part of process65900 while in the stomach, the ingestible device may store data at65918 indicating detection of a transition from the stomach directly tothe jejunum (e.g., as a result of transitioning too quickly through theduodenum for the pyloric transition to be detected using process 65600).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to obtain afluid sample from the environment external to a housing of theingestible device in response to identifying a change in the location ofthe ingestible device. For example, the ingestible device may beconfigured to obtain a fluid sample from the environment external to thehousing of the ingestible device (e.g., through the use of optionalopening 65116 and optional rotating assembly 65118) in response todetermining that the ingestible device is located within the jejunum. Insome embodiments, the ingestible device may also be equipped withappropriate diagnostics to detect certain medical conditions based onthe retrieved fluid sample, such as small intestinal bacterialovergrowth (SIBO).

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to delivera dispensable substance that is pre-stored within the ingestible devicefrom the ingestible device into the GI tract in response to identifyingthe change in the location of the ingestible device. For example, theingestible device may have a dispensable substance pre-stored within theingestible device (e.g., within a storage chamber or cavity on anoptional storage sub-unitGl and the ingestible device may be configuredto dispense the substance into the gastrointestinal tract (e.g., throughthe use of an optional opening and an optional rotating assembly) whenthe ingestible device detects that the ingestible device is locatedwithin the jejunum. In some embodiments, this may enable the ingestibledevice to deliver substances (e.g., therapeutics and medicaments) attargeted locations within the GI tract.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to performan action based on the total number of detected muscle contractions. Forexample, the ingestible device may be configured to retrieve dataindicative of the total number of muscle contractions (e.g., from memorycircuitry of a PCB), and compare that to an expected number of musclecontractions in a healthy individual. In response, the ingestible devicemay either dispense a substance into the GI tract (e.g., through the useof an optional opening and an optional rotating assembly), or may obtaina fluid sample from the environment external to the housing of theingestible device (e.g., through the use of an optional opening and anoptional rotating assembly). For instance, the ingestible device may beconfigured to obtain a sample in response to determining that a numberof detected muscle contractions is abnormal, and differs greatly fromthe expected number. As another example, the ingestible device may beconfigured to deliver a substance into the GI tract (such as amedicament), in response to determining that the detected musclecontractions are consistent with a functioning GI tract in a healthyindividual.

It will be understood that the steps and descriptions of the flowchartsof this disclosure are merely illustrative. Any of the steps anddescriptions of the flowcharts may be modified, omitted, rearranged,and/or performed in alternate orders or in parallel, two or more of thesteps may be combined, or any additional steps may be added, withoutdeparting from the scope of the present disclosure. For example, theingestible device may calculate the mean and the standard deviation ofmultiple data sets in parallel (e.g., multiple data sets, each onecorresponding to a different wavelength of reflectance or differentsensing sub-unit used to detect the reflectance) in order to speed upthe overall computation time. Furthermore, it should be noted that thesteps and descriptions of FIG. 64 may be combined with any other system,device, or method described in this application, and any of theingestible devices or systems discussed in this application could beused to perform one or more of the steps in FIG. 64.

FIG. 65 is a plot illustrating data collected during an exampleoperation of an ingestible device, which may be used when detecting atransition from a duodenum to a jejunum, in accordance with someembodiments of the disclosure. Diagram 651000 depicts a time domain plot651002 of a data set of reflectance levels measured by an ingestibledevice (e.g., the second subset of data discussed in relation to 65908).In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configured to gatherdata points at semi-regular intervals approximately 0.5 seconds apart.By comparison, diagram 651050 depicts a frequency domain plot 651004 ofthe same data set of reflectance levels measured by an ingestible device(e.g., as a result of the ingestible device calculating a frequencyspectrum at 65910). In some embodiments, the ingestible device may beconfigured to calculate the frequency spectrum through any convenientmeans.

In diagram 651050, the range of frequencies 651006 between 0.05 Hz to0.33 Hz may be the range of frequencies that the ingestible devicesearches in order to detect muscle contractions. As shown in diagram651050, there is a strong peak in the frequency domain plot 651004around 0.14 Hz, which is consistent with the frequency of peristalticmotion in a healthy human individual. In this case, the ingestibledevice analyzing frequency domain plot 651004 may be configured todetermine that the data is consistent with a detected muscle contraction(e.g., using a process similar to 65912 of process 65900), and may storedata (e.g., in memory circuitry of a PCB) indicating that a musclecontraction has been detected. Because the muscle contraction wasdetected from the one-minute window of data ending at 118 minutes, theingestible device may also store data indicating that the musclecontraction was detected at the 118-minute mark (i.e., which mayindicate that the ingestible device was turned on and ingested by thesubject 118 minutes ago).

FIG. 66 is a plot illustrating muscle contractions detected by aningestible device over time, which may be used when determining alocation of an ingestible device as it transits through agastrointestinal (GI) tract, in accordance with some embodiments of thedisclosure. In some embodiments, the ingestible device may be configuredto detect muscle contractions, and store data indicative of when eachmuscle contraction is detected (e.g., as part of 65914 of process65900). Plot 651100 depicts the detected muscle contractions 651106 overtime, with each muscle contraction being represented by a vertical linereaching from “0” to “1” on the y-axis.

At 651102, around the 10-minute mark, the ingestible device first entersthe duodenum (e.g., as determined by the ingestible device performingprocess 65600). Shortly thereafter, at 651108, the ingestible devicebegins to detect several muscle contractions 651106 in quick succession,which may be indicative of the strong peristaltic waves that form in thejejunum. Later, around 651110, the ingestible device continues to detectintermittent muscle contractions, which may be consistent with theingestible device within the ileum. Finally, at 651104, the ingestibledevice transitions out of the small intestine, and into the cecum.Notably, the ingestible device detects more frequent muscle contractionsin the jejunum portion of the small intestine as compared to the ileumportion of the small intestine, and the ingestible device does notmeasure any muscle contractions after having exited the small intestine.In some embodiments, the ingestible device may incorporate thisinformation into a localization process. For example, the ingestibledevice may be configured to detect a transition from a jejunum to anileum in response to determining that a frequency of detected musclecontractions (e.g., the number of muscle contractions measured in agiven 10-minute window) has fallen below a threshold number. As anotherexample, the ingestible device may be configured to detect a transitionfrom an ileum to a cecum in response to determining that no musclecontractions have been detected for a threshold period of time. It isunderstood that these examples are intended to be illustrative, and notlimiting, and that measurements of muscle contractions may be combinedwith any of the other processes, systems, or methods discussed in thisdisclosure.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart 651200 for certain embodiments for determining atransition of the device from the jejunum to the ileum. It is to benoted that, in general, the jejunum is redder and more vascular than theileum. Moreover, generally, in comparison to the ileum, the jejunum hasa thicker intestine wall with more mesentery fat. These differencesbetween the jejunum and the ileum are expected to result in differencesin optical responses in the jejunum relative to the ileum. Optionally,one or more optical signals may be used to investigate the differencesin optical responses. For example, the process can include monitoring achange in optical response in reflected red light, blue light, greenlight, ratio of red light to green light, ratio of red light to bluelight, and/or ratio of green light to blue light. In some embodiments,reflected red light is detected in the process.

Flowchart 651200 represents a single sliding window process. In step651210, the jejunum reference signal is determined based on opticalreflection. Typically, this signal is as the average signal (e.g.,reflected red light) over a period of time since the device wasdetermined to enter the jejunum. The period of time can be, for example,from five minutes to 40 minutes (e.g., from 10 minutes to 30 minutes,from 15 minutes to 25 minutes). In step 651220, the detected signal(e.g., reflected red light) just after the period of time used in step651210 is normalized to the reference signal determined in step 651210.In step 651230, the signal (e.g., reflected red light) is detected. Instep 651240, the mean signal detected based on the single sliding windowis compared to a signal threshold. The signal threshold in step 651240is generally a fraction of the reference signal of the jejunum referencesignal determined in step 651210. For example, the signal threshold canbe from 60% to 90% (e.g., from 70% to 80%) of the jejunum referencesignal. If the mean signal exceeds the signal threshold, then theprocess determines that the device has entered the ileum at step 651250.If the mean signal does not exceed the signal threshold, then theprocess returns to step 651230.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart 651200 for certain embodiments for determining atransition of the device from the jejunum to the ileum using a twosliding window process. In step 651310, the jejunum reference signal isdetermined based on optical reflection. Typically, this signal is as theaverage signal (e.g., reflected red light) over a period of time sincethe device was determined to enter the jejunum. The period of time canbe, for example, from five minutes to 40 minutes (e.g., from 10 minutesto 30 minutes, from 15 minutes to 25 minutes). In step 651320, thedetected signal (e.g., reflected red light) just after the period oftime used in step 651310 is normalized to the reference signaldetermined in step 651310. In step 651330, the signal (e.g., reflectedred light) is detected. In step 651340, the mean difference in thesignal detected based on the two sliding windows is compared to a signalthreshold. The signal threshold in step 651340 is based on whether themean difference in the detected signal exceeds a multiple (e.g., from1.5 times to five times, from two times to four times) of the detectedsignal of the first window. If signal threshold is exceeded, then theprocess determines that the device has entered the ileum at step 651350.If the signal threshold is not exceeded, then the process returns tostep 651330.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart 651400 for a process for certain embodiments fordetermining a transition of the device from the ileum to the cecum. Ingeneral, the process involves detecting changes in the reflected opticalsignal (e.g., red light, blue light, green light, ratio of red light togreen light, ratio of red light to blue light, and/or ratio of greenlight to blue light). In some embodiments, the process includesdetecting changes in the ratio of reflected red light to reflected greenlight, and also detecting changes in the ratio of reflected green lightto reflected blue light. Generally, in the process 651400, the slidingwindow analysis (first and second windows) discussed with respect toprocess 65600 is continued.

Step 651410 includes setting a first threshold in a detected signal,e.g., ratio of detected red light to detected green light, and setting asecond threshold for the coefficient of variation for a detected signal,e.g., the coefficient of variation for the ratio of detected green lightto detected blue light. The first threshold can be set to a fraction(e.g., from 0.5 to 0.9, from 0.6 to 0.8) of the average signal (e.g.,ratio of detected red light to detected green light) in the firstwindow, or a fraction (e.g., from 0.4 to 0.8, from 0.5 to 0.7) of themean difference between the detected signal (e.g., ratio of detected redlight to detected green light) in the two windows. The second thresholdcan be set to 0.1 (e.g., 0.05, 0.02).

Step 651420 includes detecting the signals in the first and secondwindows that are to be used for comparing to the first and secondthresholds.

Step 651430 includes comparing the detected signals to the first andsecond thresholds. If the corresponding value is not below the firstthreshold or the corresponding value is not below the second threshold,then it is determined that the device has not left the ileum and enteredthe cecum, and the process returns to step 651420. If the correspondingvalue is below the first threshold and the corresponding value is belowthe second threshold, then it is determined that the device has left theileum and entered the cecum, and the proceeds to step 651440.

Step 651450 includes determining whether it is the first time that thatthe device was determined to leave the ileum and enter the cecum. If itis the first time that the device was determined to leave the ileum andenter the cecum, then the process proceeds to step 651460. If it is notthe first time that the device has left the ileum and entered the cecum,then the process proceeds to step 651470.

Step 651460 includes setting a reference signal. In this step theoptical signal (e.g., ratio of detected red light to detected greenlight) as a reference signal.

Step 651470 includes determining whether the device may have left thececum and returned to the ileum. The device is determined to have leftthe cecum and returned to the ileum if the corresponding detected signal(e.g., ratio of detected red light to detected green light) isstatistically comparable to the reference signal (determined in step651460) and the coefficient of variation for the corresponding detectedsignal (e.g., ratio of detected green light to detected blue light)exceeds the second threshold. If it is determined that the device mayhave left the cecum and returned to the ileum, the process proceeds tostep 651480.

Step 651480 includes continuing to detect the relevant optical signalsfor a period of time (e.g., at least one minute, from five minutes to 15minutes).

Step 651490 includes determining whether the signals determined in step651480 indicate (using the methodology discussed in step 651470) thatthe device re-entered the ileum. If the signals indicate that the devicere-entered the ileum, the process proceeds to step 651420. If thesignals indicate that the device is in the cecum, the process proceedsto step 651492.

Step 651492 includes continuing to monitor the relevant optical signalsfor a period of time (e.g., at least 30 minutes, at least one hour, atleast two hours).

Step 651494 includes determining whether the signals determined in step651492 indicate (using the methodology discussed in step 651470) thatthe device re-entered the ileum. If the signals indicate that the devicere-entered the ileum, the process proceeds to step 651420. If thesignals indicate that the device is in the cecum, the process proceedsto step 651496.

At step 651496, the process determines that the device is in the cecum.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart 651500 for a process for certain embodiments fordetermining a transition of the device from the cecum to the colon. Ingeneral, the process involves detecting changes in the reflected opticalsignal (e.g., red light, blue light, green light, ratio of red light togreen light, ratio of red light to blue light, and/or ratio of greenlight to blue light). In some embodiments, the process includesdetecting changes in the ratio of reflected red light to reflected greenlight, and also detecting changes in the ratio of reflected blue light.Generally, in the process 651500, the sliding window analysis (first andsecond windows) discussed with respect to process 651400 is continued.

In step 651510, optical signals (e.g., the ratio of reflected red signalto reflected green signal, and reflected blue signal) are collected fora period of time (e.g., at least one minute, at least five minutes, atleast 10 minutes) while the device is in the cecum (e.g., during step651480). The average values for the recorded optical signals (e.g., theratio of reflected red signal to reflected green signal, and reflectedblue signal) establish the cecum reference signals.

In step 651520, the optical signals are detected after it has beendetermined that the device entered the cecum (e.g., at step 651440). Theoptical signals are normalized to the cecum reference signals.

Step 651530 involves determining whether the device has entered thecolon. This includes determining whether any of three different criteriaare satisfied. The first criterion is satisfied if the mean differencein the ratio of a detected optical signal (e.g., ratio of detected redsignal to the detected green) is a multiple greater than one (e.g., 2×,3×, 4×) the standard deviation of the corresponding signal (e.g., ratioof detected red signal to the detected green) in the second window. Thesecond criterion is satisfied if the mean of a detected optical signal(e.g., a ratio of detected red light to detected green light) exceeds agiven value (e.g., exceeds one). The third criterion is satisfied if thecoefficient of variation of an optical signal (e.g., detected bluelight) in the first window exceeds a given value (e.g., exceeds 0.2). Ifany of the three criteria are satisfied, then the process proceeds tostep 651540. Otherwise, none of the three criteria are satisfied, theprocess returns to step 651520.

For illustrative purposes the disclosure focuses primarily on a numberof different example embodiments of an ingestible device, and exampleembodiments of methods for determining a location of an ingestibledevice within a GI tract. However, the possible ingestible devices thatmay be constructed are not limited to these embodiments, and variationsin the shape and design may be made without significantly changing thefunctions and operations of the device. Similarly, the possibleprocedures for determining a location of the ingestible device withinthe GI tract are not limited to the specific procedures and embodimentsdiscussed (e.g., process 65500, process 65600, process 65900, process651200, process 651300, process 651400 and process 651500). Also, theapplications of the ingestible devices described herein are not limitedmerely to gathering data, sampling and testing portions of the GI tract,or delivering medicament. For example, in some embodiments theingestible device may be adapted to include a number of chemical,electrical, or optical diagnostics for diagnosing a number of diseases.Similarly, a number of different sensors for measuring bodily phenomenonor other physiological qualities may be included on the ingestibledevice. For example, the ingestible device may be adapted to measureelevated levels of certain chemical compounds or impurities in the GItract, or the combination of localization, sampling, and appropriatediagnostic and assay techniques incorporated into a sampling chamber maybe particularly well suited to determine the presence of smallintestinal bacterial overgrowth (SIBO).

At least some of the elements of the various embodiments of theingestible device described herein that are implemented via software(e.g., software executed by control circuitry within a PCB 65120) may bewritten in a high-level procedural language such as object orientedprogramming, a scripting language or both. Accordingly, the program codemay be written in C, C++ or any other suitable programming language andmay include modules or classes, as is known to those skilled in objectoriented programming. Alternatively, or in addition, at least some ofthe elements of the embodiments of the ingestible device describedherein that are implemented via software may be written in assemblylanguage, machine language or firmware as needed. In either case, thelanguage may be a compiled or an interpreted language.

At least some of the program code used to implement the ingestibledevice can be stored on a storage media or on a computer readable mediumthat is readable by a general or special purpose programmable computingdevice having a processor, an operating system and the associatedhardware and software to implement the functionality of at least one ofthe embodiments described herein. The program code, when read by thecomputing device, configures the computing device to operate in a new,specific and predefined manner in order to perform at least one of themethods described herein.

Furthermore, at least some of the programs associated with the systems,devices, and methods of the example embodiments described herein arecapable of being distributed in a computer program product including acomputer readable medium that bears computer usable instructions for oneor more processors. The medium may be provided in various forms,including non-transitory forms such as, but not limited to, one or morediscettes, compact discs, tapes, chips, and magnetic and electronicstorage. In some embodiments, the medium may be transitory in naturesuch as, but not limited to, wire-line transmissions, satellitetransmissions, internet transmissions (e.g. downloads), media, digitaland analog signals, and the like. The computer useable instructions mayalso be in various formats, including compiled and non-compiled code.

The techniques described above can be implemented using software forexecution on a computer. For instance, the software forms procedures inone or more computer programs that execute on one or more programmed orprogrammable computer systems (which may be of various architecturessuch as distributed, client/server, or grid) each including at least oneprocessor, at least one data storage system (including volatile andnon-volatile memory and/or storage elements), at least one input deviceor port, and at least one output device or port.

The software may be provided on a storage medium, such as a CD-ROM,readable by a general or special purpose programmable computer ordelivered (encoded in a propagated signal) over a communication mediumof a network to the computer where it is executed. All of the functionsmay be performed on a special purpose computer, or using special-purposehardware, such as coprocessors. The software may be implemented in adistributed manner in which different parts of the computation specifiedby the software are performed by different computers. Each such computerprogram is preferably stored on or downloaded to a storage media ordevice (e.g., solid state memory or media, or magnetic or optical media)readable by a general or special purpose programmable computer, forconfiguring and operating the computer when the storage media or deviceis read by the computer system to perform the procedures describedherein. The inventive system may also be considered to be implemented asa computer-readable storage medium, configured with a computer program,where the storage medium so configured causes a computer system tooperate in a specific and predefined manner to perform the functionsdescribed herein.

For illustrative purposes the examples given herein focus primarily on anumber of different example embodiments of an ingestible device.However, the possible ingestible devices that may be constructed are notlimited to these embodiments, and variations in the general shape anddesign may be made without significantly changing the functions andoperations of the device. For example, some embodiments of theingestible device may feature a sampling chamber substantially towardsthe middle of the device, along with two sets of axial sensingsub-units, each located on substantially opposite ends of the device. Inaddition, the applications of the ingestible device are not limitedmerely to gathering data, sampling and testing portions of the GI tract,or delivering medicament. For example, in some embodiments theingestible device may be adapted to include a number of chemical,electrical, or optical diagnostics for diagnosing a number of diseases.Similarly, a number of different sensors for measuring bodily phenomenonor other physiological qualities may be included on the ingestibledevice. For example, the ingestible device may be adapted to measureelevated levels of certain analytes, chemical compounds or impurities inthe GI tract, or the combination of localization, sampling, andappropriate diagnostic and assay techniques incorporated into a samplingchamber may be particularly well suited to determine the presence ofsmall intestinal bacterial overgrowth (SIBO). It is also noted thatalthough embodiments described herein focus on an ingestible device inthe GI tract, such ingestible device described in FIGS. 1-34 may be usedfor delivering substances including medicaments and therapeutics inother parts of the body, such as but not limited to the femalereproductive tract, and/or the like.

The various embodiments of systems, processes and apparatuses have beendescribed herein by way of example only. It is contemplated that thefeatures and limitations described in any one embodiment may be appliedto any other embodiment herein, and flowcharts or examples relating toone embodiment may be combined with any other embodiment in a suitablemanner, done in different orders, or done in parallel. It should benoted, the systems and/or methods described above may be applied to, orused in accordance with, other systems and/or methods. Variousmodifications and variations may be made to these example embodimentswithout departing from the spirit and scope of the embodiments, which islimited only by the appended embodiments. The appended embodimentsshould be given the broadest interpretation consistent with thedescription as a whole.

Implementations of the subject matter and the operations described inthis specification can be implemented by digital electronic circuitry,or via computer software, firmware, or hardware, including thestructures disclosed in this specification and their structuralequivalents, or in combinations of one or more of them. Implementationsof the subject matter described in this specification can be implementedas one or more computer programs, i.e., one or more modules of computerprogram instructions, encoded on computer storage medium for executionby, or to control the operation of, data processing apparatus.

A computer storage medium can be, or be included in, a computer-readablestorage device, a computer-readable storage substrate, a random orserial access memory array or device, or a combination of one or more ofthem. Moreover, while a computer storage medium is not a propagatedsignal, a computer storage medium can be a source or destination ofcomputer program instructions encoded in an artificially generatedpropagated signal. The computer storage medium can also be, or beincluded in, one or more separate physical components or media (e.g.,multiple CDs, discs, or other storage devices).

The operations described in this specification can be implemented asoperations performed by a data processing apparatus on data stored onone or more computer-readable storage devices or received from othersources.

The term “data processing apparatus” encompasses all kinds of apparatus,devices, and machines for processing data, including by way of example aprogrammable processor, a computer, a system on a chip, or multipleones, or combinations, of the foregoing. The apparatus can includespecial purpose logic circuitry, e.g., an FPGA (field programmable gatearray) or an ASIC (application specific integrated circuit). Theapparatus can also include, in addition to hardware, code that createsan execution environment for the computer program in question, e.g.,code that constitutes processor firmware, a protocol stack, a databasemanagement system, an operating system, a cross-platform runtimeenvironment, a virtual machine, or a combination of one or more of them.The apparatus and execution environment can realize various differentcomputing model infrastructures, such as web services, distributedcomputing and grid computing infrastructures.

A computer program (also known as a program, software, softwareapplication, script, or code) can be written in any form of programminglanguage, including compiled or interpreted languages, declarative orprocedural languages, and it can be deployed in any form, including as astand-alone program or as a module, component, subroutine, object, orother unit suitable for use in a computing environment. A computerprogram may, but need not, correspond to a file in a file system. Aprogram can be stored in a portion of a file that holds other programsor data (e.g., one or more scripts stored in a markup languagedocument), in a single file dedicated to the program in question, or inmultiple coordinated files (e.g., files that store one or more modules,sub programs, or portions of code). A computer program can be deployedto be executed on one computer or on multiple computers that are locatedat one site or distributed across multiple sites and interconnected by acommunication network.

The processes and logic flows described in this specification can beperformed by one or more programmable processors executing one or morecomputer programs to perform actions by operating on input data andgenerating output. The processes and logic flows can also be performedby, and apparatus can also be implemented as, special purpose logiccircuitry, e.g., a FPGA (field programmable gate array) or an ASIC(application specific integrated circuit).

Processors suitable for the execution of a computer program include, byway of example, both general and special purpose microprocessors, andany one or more processors of any kind of digital computer. Generally, aprocessor will receive instructions and data from a read only memory ora random access memory or both. The essential elements of a computer area processor for performing actions in accordance with instructions andone or more memory devices for storing instructions and data. Generally,a computer will also include, or be operatively coupled to receive datafrom or transfer data to, or both, one or more mass storage devices forstoring data, e.g., magnetic, magneto optical discs, or optical discs.However, a computer need not have such devices. Moreover, a computer canbe embedded in another device, e.g., a mobile telephone, a personaldigital assistant (PDA), a mobile audio or video player, a game console,a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, or a portable storage device(e.g., a universal serial bus (USB) flash drive), to name just a few.Devices suitable for storing computer program instructions and datainclude all forms of non-volatile memory, media and memory devices,including by way of example semiconductor memory devices, e.g., EPROM,EEPROM, and flash memory devices; magnetic discs, e.g., internal harddiscs or removable discs; magneto optical discs; and CD ROM and DVD-ROMdiscs. The processor and the memory can be supplemented by, orincorporated in, special purpose logic circuitry.

To provide for interaction with a user, implementations of the subjectmatter described in this specification can be implemented on a computerhaving a display device, e.g., a CRT (cathode ray tube) or LCD (liquidcrystal display) monitor, for displaying information to the user and akeyboard and a pointing device, e.g., a mouse or a trackball, by whichthe user can provide input to the computer. Other kinds of devices canbe used to provide for interaction with a user as well; for example,feedback provided to the user can be any form of sensory feedback, e.g.,visual feedback, auditory feedback, or tactile feedback; and input fromthe user can be received in any form, including acoustic, speech, ortactile input. In addition, a computer can interact with a user bysending documents to and receiving documents from a device that is usedby the user; for example, by sending web pages to a web browser on auser's user device in response to requests received from the webbrowser.

Implementations of the subject matter described in this specificationcan be implemented in a computing system that includes a back endcomponent, e.g., as a data server, or that includes a middlewarecomponent, e.g., an application server, or that includes a front endcomponent, e.g., a user computer having a graphical display or a Webbrowser through which a user can interact with an implementation of thesubject matter described in this specification, or any combination ofone or more such back end, middleware, or front end components. Thecomponents of the system can be interconnected by any form or medium ofdigital data communication, e.g., a communication network. Examples ofcommunication networks include a local area network (“LAN”) and a widearea network (“WAN”), an inter-network (e.g., the Internet), andpeer-to-peer networks (e.g., ad hoc peer-to-peer networks).

The computing system can include users and servers. A user and serverare generally remote from each other and typically interact through acommunication network. The relationship of user and server arises byvirtue of computer programs running on the respective computers andhaving a user-server relationship to each other. In someimplementations, a server transmits data (e.g., an HTML page) to a userdevice (e.g., for purposes of displaying data to and receiving userinput from a user interacting with the user device). Data generated atthe user device (e.g., a result of the user interaction) can be receivedfrom the user device at the server.

While this specification contains many specific implementation details,these should not be construed as limitations on the scope of anyinventions or of what may be claimed, but rather as descriptions offeatures specific to particular implementations of particularinventions. Certain features that are described in this specification inthe context of separate implementations can also be implemented incombination in a single implementation. Conversely, various featuresthat are described in the context of a single implementation can also beimplemented in multiple implementations separately or in any suitablesub combination. Moreover, although features may be described above asacting in certain combinations and even initially claimed as such, oneor more features from a claimed combination can in some cases be excisedfrom the combination, and the claimed combination may be directed to asub combination or variation of a sub combination.

For the purpose of this disclosure, the term “coupled” means the joiningof two members directly or indirectly to one another. Such joining maybe stationary or moveable in nature. Such joining may be achieved withthe two members or the two members and any additional intermediatemembers being integrally formed as a single unitary body with oneanother or with the two members or the two members and any additionalintermediate members being attached to one another. Such joining may bepermanent in nature or may be removable or releasable in nature.

It should be noted that the orientation of various elements may differaccording to other exemplary implementations, and that such variationsare intended to be encompassed by the present disclosure. It isrecognized that features of the disclosed implementations can beincorporated into other disclosed implementations.

FIG. 71 illustrates a nonlimiting example of a system for collecting,communicating and/or analyzing data about a subject, using an ingestibledevice as disclosed herein. For example, an ingestible device may beconfigured to communicate with an external base station. As an example,an ingestible device can have a communications unit that communicateswith an external base station which itself has a communications unit.FIG. 71 illustrates exemplary implementation of such an ingestibledevice. As shown in FIG. 71, a subject ingests an ingestible device asdisclosed herein. Certain data about the subject (e.g., based on acollected sample) and/or the location of the ingestible device in the GItract of the subject is collected or otherwise available and provided toa mobile device, which then forwards the data via the internet and aserver/data store to a physician's office computer. The informationcollected by the ingestible device is communicated to a receiver, suchas, for example, a watch or other object worn by the subject. Theinformation is then communicated from the receiver to the mobile devicewhich then forwards the data via the internet and a server/data store toa physician's office computer. The physician is then able to analyzesome or all of the data about the subject to provide recommendations,such as, for example, general health recommendations, dietary healthrecommendations and/or lifestyle recommendations. While FIG. 71 shows aparticular approach to collecting and transferring data about a subject,the disclosure is not limited. As an example, one or more of thereceiver, mobile device, internet, and/or server/data store can beexcluded from the data communication channel. For example, a mobiledevice can be used as the receiver of the device data, e.g., by using adongle. In such embodiments, the item worn by the subject need not bepart of the communication chain. As another example, one or more of theitems in the data communication channel can be replaced with analternative item. For example, rather than be provided to a physician'soffice computer, data may be provided to a service provider network,such as a hospital network, an HMO network, or the like. In someembodiments, subject data may be collected and/or stored in one location(e.g., a server/data store) while device data may be collected and/orstored in a different location (e.g., a different server/data store).

An ingestible device may include one or more environmental sensors.Environmental sensor may be used to generate environmental data for theenvironment external to device in the GI tract of the subject.Environmental data may be used to further characterize the GI tract ofthe subject either alone or in combination with the spectral data. Insome embodiments, environmental data is generated at the same locationwithin the GI tract of the subject where a sample is procured. Examplesof environmental sensor include, but are not limited to a capacitancesensor, a temperature sensor, an impedance sensor, a pH level sensor, aheart rate sensor, acoustic sensor, image sensor, and/or a movementsensor. In some embodiments, the ingestible device includes a pluralityof different environmental sensors for generating different kinds ofenvironmental data. In some embodiments, the image sensor is a videocamera suitable for obtaining images in vivo of the tissues forming theGI tract of the subject. In some embodiments, the environmental data isused to help determine one or more characteristics of the GI tract thesubject such as for the diagnosis of a medical condition. In someembodiments, the ingestible device may include a camera for generatingvideo imaging data of the GI tract which can be used to determine, amongother things, the location of the device. Examples of video imagingcapsules include Medtronic's PillCam™, Olympus' Endocapsule®, andIntroMedic's MicroCam™ (see Basar et al. “Ingestible Wireless CapsuleTechnology: A Review of Development and Future Indication” InternationalJournal of Antennas and Propagation (2012); 1-14). Other imagingtechnologies include thermal imaging cameras, and those that employultrasound or Doppler principles to generate different images (seeChinese patent disclosure CN104473611: “Capsule endoscope system havingultrasonic positioning function”). In another embodiment, the ingestibledevice described herein may be localized using a gamma scintigraphytechnique or other radio-tracker technology as employed by PhaetonResearch's Enterion™ capsule (See Teng, Renli, and Juan Maya. “Absolutebioavailability and regional absorption of ticagrelor in healthyvolunteers.” Journal of Drug Assessment 3.1 (2014): 43-50), ormonitoring the magnetic field strength of permanent magnet in theingestible device (see T. D. Than, et al., “A review of localizationsystems for robotic endoscopic capsules,” IEEE Trans. Biomed. Eng., vol.59, no. 9, pp. 2387-2399, September 2012). In some embodiments, the oneor more environmental sensors measure pH, temperature, transit times, orcombinations thereof. Examples of devices useful to detect pH changesinclude Medimetrics' IntelliCap® technology (see Becker, Dieter, et al.“Novel orally swallowable IntelliCap® device to quantify regional drugabsorption in human GI tract using diltiazem as model drug.” AAPSPharmSciTech 15.6 (2014): 1490-1497) and Rani Therapeutics' Auto-Pill™technology (see U.S. Pat. No. 9,149,617), hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety.

Detection Methods and Systems

Live Cell Dye

Certain systems described herein employ methods, compositions anddetection systems found to accurately and reliably correlatefluorescence to total bacteria count (TBC) in an autonomous, ingestibledevice, or other similarly-sized device. In some embodiments, themethods and devices described herein can be used for the detection ofTBC in a sample from the gastrointestinal tract of the subject todetermine whether the subject has or is at risk of developing a GIdisorder (e.g., SIBO). The compositions include novel combinations ofdyes, buffers and detergents that allow for the selective staining ofviable bacterial cells in samples that include non-bacterial cells andother components that otherwise make detecting or quantifying livebacterial cells challenging. In some embodiments, the systems allow forbacteria to be quantified in near real-time and the results to be sharedtelemetrically outside of the device. Above, various types of cells(e.g., bacterial cells) are disclosed which can be detected using themethods described in this section.

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a composition including adye and optionally a reagent for selective lysis of eukaryotic cells. Insome embodiments, the composition includes both a dye and a reagent forselective lysis of eukaryotic cells. In some embodiments, thecomposition further comprises one or more reagents independentlyselected from the group consisting of: a second reagent for selectivelysis of eukaryotic cells, an electrolyte (e.g., MgCl₂), an anti-fungalreagent (e.g., amphotericin-B), and an antibiotic. In some embodiments,the composition comprises water and is in the form of an aqueoussolution. In some embodiments, the composition is a solid or semi-solid.In some embodiments, the compositions described here are suitable foruse in a kit or device for detecting or quantifying viable bacterialcells in a sample. In some embodiments, such a device is an ingestibledevice for detecting or quantifying viable bacterial cells in vivo(e.g., in the GI tract). In some embodiments, viable bacterial cells ina sample are detected or quantified in the presence of one or moreantibiotics to determine antibiotic resistance of the bacteria in thesample. In some embodiments, anomalous bacterial populations in a samplemay be detected or quantified, for example through the use of acomposition comprising a dye as disclosed herein, to determine whether asubject has an infection, such as Small Intestinal Bacterial Overgrowth(SIBO), or to characterize bacterial populations within the GI tract fordiagnostic or other purposes.

In some embodiments, the dye suitable for use in the composition of thepresent disclosure is a dye that is capable of being internalized by aviable cell, binding to or reacting with a target component of theviable cell, and having fluorescence properties that are measurablyaltered when the dye is bound to or reacted with the target component ofthe viable cell. In some embodiments, the dye of the present disclosureis actively internalized by penetrating viable cells through a processother than passible diffusion across cell membranes. Suchinternalization includes, but is not limited to, internalization throughcell receptors on cell surfaces or through channels in cell membranes.In some embodiments, the target component of a viable cell to which thedye is bound to or reacted with is selected from the group consistingof: nucleic acids, actin, tubulin, enzymes, nucleotide-binding proteins,ion-transport proteins, mitochondria, cytoplasmic components, andmembrane components. In some embodiments, the dye suitable for useherein is a fluorogenic dye that is capable of being internalized andmetabolized by a viable cell, and wherein the dye fluoresces whenmetabolized by the viable cell. In some embodiments, the dye is achemiluminescent dye that is capable of being internalized andmetabolized by a viable cell, and wherein the dye becomeschemiluminescent when metabolized by the viable cell.

In some embodiments, the composition includes a dye that fluoresces whenbound to nucleic acids. Examples of such dyes include, but are notlimited to, acridine orange (U.S. Pat. No. 4,190,328); calcein-AM (U.S.Pat. No. 5,314,805); DAPI; Hoechst 33342; Hoechst 33258; PicoGreen™;SYTO® 16; SYBR® Green I; Texas Red®; Redmond Red™; Bodipy® Dyes; OregonGreen™; ethidium bromide; and propidium iodide.

In some embodiments, the composition includes a lipophilic dye thatfluoresces when metabolized by a cell. In some embodiments, the dyefluoresces when reduced by a cell or a cell component. Examples of dyesthat fluoresce when reduced include, but are not limited to, resazurin;C¹²-resazurin; 7-hydroxy-9H-(1,3 dichloro-9,9-dimethylacridin-2-ol)N-oxide; 6-chloro-9-nitro-5-oxo-5H-benzo[a]phenoxazine; and tetrazoliumsalts. In some embodiment, the dye fluoresces when oxidized by a cell ora cell component. Examples of such dyes include, but are not limited to,dihydrocalcein AM; dihydrorhodamine 123; dihydroethidium;2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorotetramethyldihydrorosamine; and 3′-(p-aminophenyl)fluorescein.

In some embodiments, the composition includes a dye that becomeschemiluminescent when oxidized by a cell or a cell component, such asluminol.

In some embodiments, the composition includes a dye that fluoresces whende-acetylated and/or oxidized by a cell or a cell component. Examples ofsuch dyes include, but are not limited to, dihydrorhodamines;dihydrofluoresceins; 2′,7′-dichlorodihydrofluorescein diacetate; 5-(and6-)carboxy-2′,7′-dichlorodihydrofluorescein diacetate; andchloromethyl-2′,7′-dichlorodihydrofluorescein diacetate acetyl ester.

In some embodiments, the composition includes a dye that fluoresces whenreacted with a peptidase. Examples of such dyes include, but are notlimited to, (CBZ-Ala-Ala-Ala-Ala)2-R110 elastase 2;(CBZ-Ala-Ala-Asp)2-R110 granzyme B; and 7-amino-4-methylcoumarin,N-CBZ-L-aspartyl-L-glutamyl-L-valyl-L-aspartic acid amide.

In some embodiments, the composition of this disclosure includes a dyeselected from the group consisting of resazurin, fluorescein diacetatefluorescein diacetate (FDA), Calcein AM, and SYTO® 9. In someembodiments, the dye is FDA or SYTO® 9. In some embodiments, the methodsdescribed herein may make use of more than one dye (e.g., two, three,four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, or more dyes). The use ofmultiple dyes allows for the detection of multiple analytes (e.g.,multiplexing), for example, when each dye is detectable at a differentwavelength. More generally, multiple dyes operating with differentfluorescent wavelenths can be used as appropriate.

SYTO® 9, when used alone, labels nucleic acids of bacteria cells. Theexcitation/emission wavelengths for SYTO® 9 is 480/500 nm, with thebackground remaining non-fluorescent. See, e.g., J. Appl. Bacteriol. 72,410 (1992); Lett. Appl. Microbiol. 13, 58 (1991); Curr. Microbiol. 4,321 (1980); J. Microbiol. Methods 13, 87 (1991); and Microbiol. Rev. 51,365 (1987); and J. Med. Microbiol. 39, 147 (1993).

FDA is a non-polar, non-fluorescent compound that can cross themembranes of mammalian and bacterial cells. The acetyl esterases(present only within viable cells) hydrolyze the FDA into thefluorescent compound fluorescein. Fluorescein is a fluorescent polarcompound that is retained within these cells. Living cells can bevisualized in a photospectrometer when assayed with an excitationwavelength of 494 nm and an emission wavelength of 518 nm. See, e.g.,Brunius, G. (1980). Technical aspects of the use of 3′,6′-Diacetylfluorescein for vital fluorescent staining of bacteria. CurrentMicrobiol. 4: 321-323; Jones, K. H. and Senft, J. A. (1985). An improvedmethod to determine cellviability by simultaneous staining withfluorescein diacetate—propidium iodide. J. Histochem. Cytochem. 33:77-79; Ross, R. D. , Joneckis, C. C., Ordonez, J. V., Sisk, A. M., Wu,R. K., Hamburger, A. W., and Nora, R. E. (1989). Estimation of cellsurvival by flow cytometric quantification offluoresceindiacetate/propidium iodide viable cell number. Cancer Research. 49:3776-3782.

Calcein-AM, which is an acetoxylmethyl ester of calcein, is highlylipophilic and cell permeable. Calcein-AM in itself is not fluorescent,but the calcein generated by esterase in a viable cell emits a greenfluorescence with an excitation wavelength of 490 nm and an emission of515 nm. Therefore, Calcein-AM can only stain viable cells. See, e.g.,Kimura, K., et al., Neurosci. Lett., 208, 53 (1998); Shimokawa, I., etal., J. Geronto., 51a, b49 (1998); Yoshida, S., et al., Clin. Nephrol.,49, 273 (1998); and Tominaga, H., et al., Anal. Commun., 36, 47 (1999).

Resazurin (also known as Alamar Blue) is a blue compound that can bereduced to pink resorufin which is fluorescent. This dye is mainly usedin viability assays for mammalian cells. C¹²-resazurin has better cellpermeability than resazurin. When lipohilic C¹²-resazurin crosses thecell membranes, it is subsequently reduced by living cells to make a redfluorescent resorufin. The adsorption/emission of C¹²-resazurin is563/587 nm. See, e.g., Appl Environ Microbiol 56, 3785 (1990); J DairyRes 57, 239 (1990); J Neurosci Methods 70, 195 (1996); J Immunol Methods210, 25 (1997); J Immunol Methods 213, 157 (1998); Antimicrob AgentsChemother 41, 1004 (1997).

In some embodiments, the composition of this disclosure optionallyfurther includes a reagent for selective lysis of eukaryotic cells. Insome embodiments, the composition includes a dye as described herein anda reagent for selective lysis of eukaryotic cells. In some embodiments,the reagent for selective lysis of eukaryotic cells is a detergent, suchas a non-ionic or an ionic detergent. Examples of the reagent forselective lysis of eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to,alkylglycosides, Brij 35 (C12E23 Polyoxyethyleneglycol dodecyl ether),Brij 58 (C16E20 Polyoxyethyleneglycol dodecyl ether), Genapol, glucanidssuch as MEGA-8, -9, -10, octylglucoside, Pluronic F127, Triton X-100™(C₁₄H₂₂O(C₂H₄O)_(n)), Triton X-114 (C₂₄H₄₂O₆), Tween 20 (Polysorbate 20)and Tween 80 (Polysorbate 80), Nonidet P40, deoxycholate, reduced TritonX-100™ and/or Igepal CA 630. In some embodiments, the composition ofthis disclosure includes a dye as described herein and deoxycholate(e.g., sodium deoxycholate) as a reagent for selective lysis ofeukaryotic cells. In some embodiments, the composition of thisdisclosure includes deoxycholate at a concentration selected from0.0001% to 1 wt %. In some embodiments, the composition of thisdisclosure includes deoxycholate at a concentration of 0.005 wt %. Insome embodiments, the composition may include more than one reagent forselective lysis of eukaryotic cells.

In some embodiments, the composition may include two different reagentsfor selective lysis of eukaryotic cells. In some instances, when morethan one selective lysis reagents are used, more effective and/orcomplete selective lysis of eukaryotic cells in a sample may beachieved. For example, the composition may include deoxycholate (e.g.,sodium deoxycholate) and Triton X100™ as two different reagents forselective lysis of eukaryotic cells. In some embodiments, thecomposition includes deoxycholate (e.g., sodium deoxycholate) at aconcentration selected from 0.0001% to 1 wt % (e.g., 0.005 wt %) andTriton X100™ at a concentration selected from 0.1 to 0.05 wt %.

In some embodiments, after a sample (e.g., a biological sample) istreated or contacted with a composition including a dye and one or morereagents for selective lysis of eukaryotic cells as described herein,the eukaryotic cells (e.g., animal cells) in the sample are selectivelylysed whereby a substantial percentage (e.g., more than 20%, 40%, 60%,80%, 90% or even more that 95%) of the bacterial cells in the samesample remains intact or alive.

In some embodiments, the composition does not include a reagent forselective lysis of eukaryotic cells, and such a composition is usefulfor detecting or quantifying viable bacterial cells in a sample (e.g.,an environmental sample such as a water sample) that does not containany eukaryotic cells.

In some embodiments, the composition of this disclosure further includesan electrolyte, such as a divalent electrolyte (e.g., MgCl₂). In someembodiments, the composition includes MgCl₂ at a concentration selectedfrom 0.1 mM to 100 mM (e.g., a concentration selected from 0.5 mM to 50mM).

In some embodiments, the composition of this disclosure further includeswater and is in a form of an aqueous solution. In some embodiments, thecomposition has a pH selected from 5-8 (e.g., a pH selected from 6-7.8,such as pH being 6.0). In some embodiments, the composition is a solidor a semi-solid.

In some embodiments, the composition further includes an anti-fungalagent. Suitable anti-fungal agents for use herein include, but are notlimited to, fungicidal and fungistatic agents including terbinafine,itraconazole, micronazole nitrate, thiapendazole, tolnaftate,clotrimazole and griseofulvin. In some embodiments, the anti-fungalagent is a polyene anti-fungal agent, such as amphotericin-B, nystatin,and pimaricin.

In some embodiments, the composition does not contain any anti-fungalagent. In some embodiments, the composition contains broad spectrumantibiotics but not any anti-fungal agent. Such compositions that do notcontain anti-fungal agents but contain broad spectrum antibiotics may beuseful in detecting or quantifying fungi (e.g., yeast) in a sample.

In some embodiments, the composition does not contain any anti-fungalagent or any antibiotics. Such compositions that do not selectively lysemammalian cells may be useful in detecting or quantifying mammaliancells (e.g., cells from the GI tract) in a sample since many dyes have ahigher affinity for mammalian as compared to bacteria or fungi cells. Insome embodiments, the composition contains broad spectrum antibioticsand one or more anti-fungal agents. Such compositions that containanti-fungal agents and broad spectrum antibiotics may be useful indetecting or quantifying mammalian cells (e.g., cells from the GI tract)in a sample. The detection or quantification of mammalian cells may beuseful for determining cell turnover in a subject. High cell turnover issometimes associated with a GI injury (e.g., lesion), the presence of atumor(s), or radiation-induced colitis or radiation enteropathy.

In some embodiments, the composition further includes an antibioticagent as described herein. Such a composition may be useful in detectingor quantifying antibiotic-resistant strains of bacteria in a sample.

In some embodiments, the composition of this disclosure includes TritonX-100, deoxycholate, resazurin, and MgCl₂. In some embodiments, thecomposition includes Triton X100™, deoxycholate, resazurin,amphotericin-B and MgCl₂. In some embodiments, the composition includes0.1 wt % or 0.05 wt % Triton X-100™; 0.005 wt % deoxycholate; 10 mMresazurin; 2.5 mg/L amphotericin-B and 50 mM MgCl₂. In some embodiments,the composition has a pH of 6.0.

In some embodiments, the compositions of this disclosure are suitablefor use in a kit or device, e.g., for detecting or quantifying viablebacterial cells in a sample. In some embodiments, such a device is aningestible device for detecting or quantifying viable bacterial cells invivo (e.g., in the GI tract).

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a method for detecting thepresence of viable bacterial cells in a sample, including: (a)contacting the sample with a composition as described herein; and (b)measuring total fluorescence or rate of change of fluorescence as afunction of time of the sample, thereby detecting viable bacterial cellsin the sample.

In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (b), therebydetecting viable bacterial cells in the sample. For instance, in someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method further includes correlating the totalfluorescence or the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timedetermined in step (b) to the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample. In some embodiments, the method does not require ex vivo platingor culturing. In some embodiments, the method does not requireaspiration. In some embodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g.,in an ingestible device in vivo). In some embodiments, the methodincludes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to an ex vivoreceiver.

In some embodiments, a control may be employed in the method asdescribed herein. Such a control may be a positive control, e.g., acomposition as described herein further including a known number ofviable bacterial cells. In some embodiments, the control may be anegative control, e.g., a composition as described herein that has notbeen contacted with any viable bacterial cells. In some embodiments,this disclosure provides a method for detecting the presence of viablebacterial cells in a sample, including: (a) contacting the sample with acomposition as described herein; (b) measuring total fluorescence orrate of change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample; and(c) comparing the total fluorescence measured in step (b) to the totalfluorescence produced by a control as described herein, or comparing therate of change of fluorescence as a function of time measured in step(b) to the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time producedby a control as described herein, thereby detecting viable bacterialcells.

In some embodiments of the method, the control may be (1) a compositionidentical to the one used in step (a) but has not been contacted withany viable bacterial cells; or (2) a composition identical to the oneused in step (a) further including a known number of viable bacterialcells (e.g., a composition identical to the one used in step (a) furtherincluding 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells). Insome embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (b), therebydetecting viable bacterial cells in the sample. For instance, in someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method further includes correlating the comparativetotal fluorescence determined in step (c) to the number of viablebacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the rate of changeof fluorescence as a function of time of the sample measured overmultiple time points is determined and compared to the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of a control measured over the sametime points to determine the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample. In some embodiments, the method does not require ex vivo platingor culturing. In some embodiments, the method does not requireaspiration. In some embodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g.,in an ingestible device in vivo). In some embodiments, the methodincludes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to an ex vivoreceiver.

In some embodiments, methods as described herein are highly sensitive indetecting or quantifying viable bacterial cells in various samples. Insome embodiments, the lowest detection or quantification limit of thepresent methods is 10² CFU/mL. In some embodiments, the highestdetection or quantification limit of the present methods is 10⁷ CFU/mL,10⁸ CFU/mL, 10⁹ CFU/mL, 10¹⁰ CFU/mL or more. In some embodiments, themethods allow detection or quantification of 10² to 10⁷ CFU/mL bacterialcells in various samples. In some embodiments, methods of thisdisclosure may be used to distinguish samples bases on the quantity ofviable bacterial cells contained therein. For instance, the methods maybe used to distinguish among samples including 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶,or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells.

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a kit including a composition asdescribed herein and instructions, e.g., for detecting or quantifyingviable bacterial cells in a sample. In another aspect, this disclosureprovides a device (e.g., an ingestible device) including a compositionas described herein, e.g., for detecting or quantifying viable bacterialcells in a sample. The detection of live cells is the gold standard ofviable plate counting and represents one of the advantages of exemplarycompositions and methods described herein.

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) obtaininga sample from the GI tract of the subject; (b) contacting the samplewith a composition as described herein; (c) measuring total fluorescenceor rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample;and (d) correlating the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time measured in step (c) to the number ofviable bacterial cells in the sample, wherein the number of the viablebacterial cells determined in step (d) greater than about 10⁵ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein.

In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (c). Forinstance, in some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate ofchange of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate ofchange of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In some embodiments, themethod does not require ex vivo plating or culturing. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g., in an ingestibledevice in vivo). In some embodiments, the method includes communicatingthe results of the onboard assay(s) to an ex vivo receiver.

In some embodiments, a control may be used in the method of assessingthe need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of overgrowth ofbacterial cells in the GI tract. Such a control may be a positivecontrol, e.g., a composition as described herein further including aknown number of viable bacterial cells. In some embodiments, the controlmay be a negative control, e.g., a composition as described herein thathas not been contacted with any viable bacterial cells. In someembodiments, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) obtaininga sample from the GI tract of the subject; (b) contacting the samplewith a composition as described herein; (c) measuring total fluorescenceof the sample; (d) comparing the total fluorescence measured in step (c)to the total fluorescence produced by a control as described herein; and(e) correlating the comparative fluorescence determined in step (d) tothe number of viable bacterial cells in the sample, wherein the numberof the viable bacterial cells determined in step (e) greater than about10⁵ CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibioticagent as described herein.

In some embodiments, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) obtaininga sample from the GI tract of the subject; (b) contacting the samplewith a composition as described herein; (c) measuring rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample; (d) comparing the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time measured in step (c) tothe rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time produced by acontrol as described herein; and (e) correlating the comparative rate ofchange of fluorescence as a function of time determined in step (d) tothe number of viable bacterial cells in the sample. The number of theviable bacterial cells determined in step (e) greater than about 10⁵CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein.

In some embodiments of the method, the control may be (1) a compositionidentical to the one used in step (b) but has not been contacted withany viable bacterial cells; or (2) a composition identical to the oneused in step (b) further including a known number of viable bacterialcells (e.g., a composition identical to the one used in step (b) furtherincluding 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells). Insome embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (c), therebydetecting viable bacterial cells in the sample. For instance, in someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time ofthe sample measured over multiple time points is determined and comparedto the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time of a controlmeasured over the same time points to determine the number of viablebacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the method does notrequire ex vivo plating or culturing. In some embodiments, the method isperformed in vivo (e.g., in an ingestible device in vivo). In someembodiments, the method includes communicating the results of theonboard assay(s) to an ex vivo receiver. In some embodiments, the methodmay be further used to monitor the subject after the treatment (e.g.,with an antibiotic). In some embodiments, the method may be used toassess the efficacy of the treatment. For example, efficacious treatmentmay be indicated by the decrease of the number of viable bacterial cellsin a sample from the GI tract of the subject post-treatment. Efficacy ofthe treatment may be evaluated by the rate of decrease of the number ofviable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of the subjectpost-treatment. In some embodiments, the method may be used to detectinfection with antibiotic-resistant strains of bacteria in a subject.For instance, such infection may be indicated where the number of viablebacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of the subject does notsubstantially decrease after antibiotic treatment.

In one aspect, the present disclosure provides a member made of anabsorptive material (e.g., an absorptive sponge) having absorbed thereina composition (e.g., a composition as described herein) including a dyeand a reagent for selective lysis of eukaryotic cells. In someembodiments, the absorptive sponge is a hydrophilic sponge. In someembodiments, the absorptive sponge is selected from the group consistingof: fibers of cotton, rayon, glass, polyester, polyethylene,polyurethane, nitrocellulose, and the like. In some embodiments, theabsorptive sponge is polyester or polyethylene. In some embodiments, theabsorptive sponge is selected from the group consisting of: AhlstromGrade 6613H, Porex 1/16″ Fine Sheet 4897, Porex ⅛″ Fine Sheet 4898,Porex 4588 0.024″ Conjugate release pad, Porex PSU-567, and FilterPapers. In some embodiments, the absorptive sponge is Ahlstrom Grade6613H (Lot 150191) or Porex PSU-567.

The present disclosure further provides a method for preparing anabsorptive sponge as described herein, including the step of injectinginto the absorptive sponge an aqueous solution including a compositionof the present disclosure. In some embodiments, the method including astep of drying the absorptive sponge having absorbed therein the aqueoussolution at a temperature in the range of 0-100° C., 0-50° C., 0-40° C.,0-30° C., 0-20° C., 0-10° C., or 0-4° C.), for a time period sufficientto reduce the total water content to below 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%,7%, 5%, 3%, 1%, 0.7%, 0.5%, 0.3%, or 0.1% by weight.

In some embodiments, the absorptive sponge of this disclosure aresuitable for use in a kit or device, e.g., for detecting or quantifyingviable bacterial cells in a sample. In some embodiments, such a deviceis an ingestible device for detecting or quantifying viable bacterialcells in vivo (e.g., in the GI tract).

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a method for detecting thepresence of viable bacterial cells in a sample, including: (a) fully orpartially saturating (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) an absorptivesponge as described herein, or an absorptive sponge prepared accordingto a method as described herein, with the sample; and (b) measuringtotal fluorescence or rate of change of fluorescence as a function oftime of the fully or partially saturated sponge (e.g., 50% orhalf-saturated) prepared in step (a), thereby detecting viable bacterialcells in the sample.

In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (b), therebydetecting viable bacterial cells in the sample. For instance, in someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes, 0-800minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400 minutes,0-350 minutes, or 0-330 minutes. In some embodiments, the totalfluorescence or the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timeof the sample is measured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. Insome embodiments, the method further includes correlating the totalfluorescence or the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timedetermined in step (b) to the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample. In some embodiments, the method does not require ex vivo platingor culturing. In some embodiments, the method does not requireaspiration. In some embodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g.,in an ingestible device in vivo). In some embodiments, the methodincludes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to an ex vivoreceiver.

In some embodiments, a control may be employed in the method asdescribed herein. Such a control may be a positive control, e.g., anabsorptive sponge as described herein further including a known numberof viable bacterial cells. In some embodiments, the control may be anegative control, e.g., an absorptive sponge as described herein thathas not been contacted with any viable bacterial cells.

In some embodiments, this disclosure provides a method for detecting thepresence of viable bacterial cells in a sample, including: (a) fully orpartially saturating (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) an absorptivesponge as described herein, or an absorptive sponge prepared accordingto a method as described herein, with the sample; (b) measuring totalfluorescence or rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time ofthe fully or partially saturated sponge (e.g., at 50% or halfsaturation) prepared in step (a); and (c) comparing the totalfluorescence measured in step (b) to the total fluorescence produced bya control as described herein, or comparing the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time measured in step (b) to the rate ofchange of fluorescence as a function of time produced by a control asdescribed herein, thereby detecting viable bacterial cells.

In some embodiments of the method, the control may be (1) an absorptivesponge identical to the one used in step (a) that has not been contactedwith any viable bacterial cells, or (2) an absorptive sponge identicalto the one used in step (a) and is fully or partially saturated with asolution including a known number of viable bacterial cells (e.g., anabsorptive sponge identical to the one used in step (a) furtherincluding 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells). Insome embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (b), therebydetecting viable bacterial cells in the sample. For instance, in someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method further includes correlating the comparativetotal fluorescence determined in step (c) to the number of viablebacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the rate of changeof fluorescence as a function of time of the fully or partiallysaturated sponge measured over multiple time points is determined andcompared to the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time ofa control measured over the same time points to determine the number ofviable bacterial cells in the sample. In some embodiments, the methoddoes not require ex vivo plating or culturing. In some embodiments, themethod does not require aspiration. In some embodiments, the method isperformed in vivo (e.g., in an ingestible device in vivo). In someembodiments, the method includes communicating the results of theonboard assay(s) to an ex vivo receiver.

In some embodiments, methods as described herein are highly sensitive indetecting and quantifying viable bacterial cells in various samples. Insome embodiments, the lowest detection or quantification limit of thepresent methods is 10² CFU/mL. In some embodiments, the highestdetection or quantification limit of the present methods is 10⁷ CFU/mL,10⁸ CFU/mL, 10⁹ CFU/mL, 10¹⁰ CFU/mL or more. In some embodiments, themethods allow detection or quantification of 10² to 10⁷ CFU/mL bacterialcells in various samples. In some embodiments, methods of thisdisclosure may be used to distinguish samples bases on the quantity ofviable bacterial cells contained therein. For instance, the methods maybe used to distinguish among samples that contain 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵,10⁶, or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells.

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a kit including an absorptivesponge as described herein and instructions, e.g., for detecting orquantifying viable cells using the absorptive sponge. In another aspect,this disclosure provides a device (e.g., an ingestible device) includingan absorptive sponge as described herein, e.g., for detecting orquantifying viable bacterial cells in a sample.

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) obtaininga sample from the GI tract of the subject; (b) fully or partiallysaturating (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) an absorptive sponge asdescribed herein, or an absorptive sponge prepared according to a methodas described herein, with the sample; (c) measuring total fluorescenceor rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time of the fully orpartially saturated sponge (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) prepared instep (b); and (d) correlating the total fluorescence or the rate ofchange of fluorescence as a function of time measured in step (c) to thenumber of viable bacterial cells in the sample, wherein the number ofthe viable bacterial cells determined in step (d) greater than about 10⁵CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein.

In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the fully or partially saturatedsponge is measured over multiple time points for an extended period oftime in step (c). For instance, in some embodiments, the totalfluorescence or the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timeof the fully or partially saturated sponge is measured continuously fora period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500 minutes, 0-1440minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes, 0-800 minutes,0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400 minutes, 0-350minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or 0-220 minutes.In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the fully or partially saturatedsponge is measured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method does not require ex vivo plating or culturing.In some embodiments, the method does not require aspiration. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g., in an ingestibledevice in vivo).

In some embodiments, a control may be used in the method of assessingthe need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of overgrowth ofbacterial cells in the GI tract. Such a control may be a positivecontrol, e.g., an absorptive sponge as described herein furtherincluding a known number of viable bacterial cells. In some embodiments,the control may be a negative control, e.g., an absorptive sponge asdescribed herein that has not been contacted with any viable bacterialcells.

In some embodiments, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) obtaininga sample from the GI tract of the subject; (b) fully or partiallysaturating (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) an absorptive sponge asdescribed herein, or an absorptive sponge prepared according to a methodas described herein, with the sample; (c) measuring total fluorescenceof the fully or partially saturated sponge (e.g., at 50% or halfsaturation) prepared in step (b); (d) comparing the total fluorescencemeasured in step (c) to the total fluorescence produced by a control asdescribed herein; and (e) correlating the comparative fluorescencedetermined in step (d) to the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample, wherein the number of the viable bacterial cells determined instep (e) greater than about 10⁵ CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment,e.g., with an antibiotic agent as described herein.

In some embodiments, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) obtaininga sample from the GI tract of the subject; (b) fully or partiallysaturating (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) an absorptive sponge asdescribed herein, or an absorptive sponge prepared according to a methodas described herein, with the sample; (c) measuring rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the fully or partially saturatedsponge (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) prepared in step (b); (d)comparing the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timemeasured in step (c) to the rate of change of fluorescence as a functionof time produced by a control as described herein; and (e) correlatingthe comparative rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timedetermined in step (d) to the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample, wherein the number of the viable bacterial cells determined instep (e) greater than about 10⁵ CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment,e.g., with an antibiotic agent as described herein.

In some embodiments of the method, the control may be (1) an absorptivesponge identical to the one used in step (a) that has not been contactedwith any viable bacterial cells, or (2) an absorptive sponge identicalto the one used in step (a) and is fully or partially saturated with asolution including a known number of viable bacterial cells (e.g., acomposition identical to the one used in step (b) further including 10²,10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells). In someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (c), therebydetecting viable bacterial cells in the sample. For instance, in someembodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time ofthe fully or partially saturated sponge measured over multiple timepoints is determined and compared to the rate of change of fluorescenceas a function of time of a control measured over the same time points todetermine the number of viable bacterial cells in the sample. In someembodiments, the method does not require ex vivo plating or culturing.In some embodiments, the method does not require aspiration. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g., in an ingestibledevice in vivo). In some embodiments, the method includes communicatingthe results of the onboard assay(s) to an ex vivo receiver. In someembodiments, the method may be further used to monitor the subject afterthe treatment (e.g., with an antibiotic). In some embodiments, themethod may be used to assess the efficacy of the treatment. For example,efficacious treatment may be indicated by the decrease of the number ofviable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of the subjectpost-treatment. Efficacy of the treatment may be evaluated by the rateof decrease of the number of viable bacterial cells in a sample from theGI tract of the subject post-treatment. In some embodiments, the methodmay be used to detect infection with antibiotic-resistant strains ofbacteria in a subject. For instance, such infection may be indicatedwhere the number of viable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tractof the subject does not substantially decrease after antibiotictreatment.

In some embodiments, fluorescence intensity is measured with an opticalreader. The actual configuration and structure of the optical reader maygenerally vary as is readily understood by those skilled in the art.Typically, the optical reader contains an illumination source that iscapable of emitting light at a defined wavelength and a detector that iscapable of registering a signal (e.g., transmitted, reflected, orfluorescence light). Optical readers may generally employ any knowndetection technique, including, for instance, luminescence (e.g.,fluorescence, phosphorescence, etc.), absorbance (e.g., fluorescent ornon-fluorescent), diffraction, etc. Exemplary optical readers,illumination sources and detectors are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.7,399,608, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in itsentirety.

In some embodiments, the illumination source may be any device known inthe art that is capable of providing electromagnetic radiation, such aslight in the visible or near-visible range (e.g., infrared orultraviolet light). For example, suitable illumination sources that maybe used in the present disclosure include, but are not limited to, lightemitting diodes (LED), flashlamps, cold-cathode fluorescent lamps,electroluminescent lamps, and so forth. The illumination may bemultiplexed and/or collimated. In some embodiments, the illumination maybe pulsed to reduce any background interference. In some embodiments,filters may be used to improve optics. See, e.g., Reichman, Jay,Handbook of optical filters for fluorescence microscopy, ChromaTechnology Corporation (2000). In some embodiments, excitation sourcemay be a LED with a band-pass filter, e.g., a filter for 500 nm+/−10 nmwavelength to selectively excite a sample with 500 nm light. In someembodiments, to cut out any stray longer wavelengths from the green LED,a Thorlabs FESH0550 shortpass filter may be used for excitation (FIG.72A). In some embodiments, the emission from a sample is captured at a90° angle with an avalanche photodiode detector with a bandpass filter,e.g., a filter for 590 nm+/−20 nm wavelength, placed in front of thedetector, to selectively capture light emitted at 590 nm. In someembodiments, a Thorlabs FB580-10 bandpass filter may be used as anemission filter (FIG. 72B). A cross sectional view of an exemplaryfluorescent assay test fixture depicting collimating, focusing, andfiltering lenses is shown in FIG. 72C. In some embodiments, a 5-50nanosecond delay may be used before emission is measured. Typicalfluorophore used for time delayed fluorescence are lanthanide metalchelates (Europium, Samarium, Terbium, etc), ruthenium complexes andothers known in the art. In some embodiments, illumination may becontinuous or may combine continuous wave (CW) and pulsed illuminationwhere multiple illumination beams are multiplexed (e.g., a pulsed beamis multiplexed with a CW beam), permitting signal discrimination betweena signal induced by the CW source and a signal induced by the pulsedsource. For example, in some embodiments, LEDs (e.g., aluminum galliumarsenide red diodes, gallium phosphide green diodes, gallium arsenidephosphide green diodes, or indium gallium nitrideviolet/blue/ultraviolet (UV) diodes) are used as the pulsed illuminationsource. In some embodiments, the illumination source may provide diffuseillumination to the dye. For example, an array of multiple point lightsources (e.g., LEDs) may simply be employed to provide relativelydiffuse illumination. In some embodiments, the illumination source iscapable of providing diffuse illumination in a relatively inexpensivemanner is an electroluminescent (EL) device. An EL device is generally acapacitor structure that utilizes a luminescent material (e.g., phosphorparticles) sandwiched between electrodes, at least one of which istransparent to allow light to escape. Disclosure of a voltage across theelectrodes generates a changing electric field within the luminescentmaterial that causes it to emit light.

In some embodiments, the detector may be any device known in the artthat is capable of sensing a signal. In some embodiments, the detectormay be an electronic imaging detector that is configured for spatialdiscrimination. Some examples of such electronic imaging sensors includehigh speed, linear charge-coupled devices (CCD), charge-injectiondevices (CID), complementary-metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) devices,and so forth. Such image detectors, for instance, are generallytwo-dimensional arrays of electronic light sensors, although linearimaging detectors (e.g., linear CCD detectors) that include a singleline of detector pixels or light sensors, such as, for example, thoseused for scanning images, may also be used. Each array includes a set ofknown, unique positions that may be referred to as “addresses.” Eachaddress in an image detector is occupied by a sensor that covers an area(e.g., an area typically shaped as a box or a rectangle). This area isgenerally referred to as a “pixel” or pixel area. A detector pixel, forinstance, may be a CCD, CID, or a CMOS sensor, or any other device orsensor that detects or measures light. The size of detector pixels mayvary widely, and may in some cases have a diameter or length as low as0.2 micrometers.

In other embodiments, the detector may be a light sensor that lacksspatial discrimination capabilities. For instance, examples of suchlight sensors may include photomultiplier devices, photodiodes, such asavalanche photodiodes or silicon photodiodes, and so forth. Siliconphotodiodes are sometimes advantageous in that they are inexpensive,sensitive, capable of high-speed operation (short risetime/highbandwidth), and easily integrated into most other semiconductortechnology and monolithic circuitry. In addition, silicon photodiodesare physically small, which enables them to be readily incorporated intovarious types of detection systems. If silicon photodiodes are used,then the wavelength range of the emitted signal may be within theirrange of sensitivity, which is 400 to 1100 nanometers. In someembodiments, a photomultiplier may be used to increase the intensity ofthe signal.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides ingestible devicescontaining a microscopic evaluation system. In some embodiments,bacterial cells in a sample may be first labeled with fluorescent dyes(such as those described herein), and the fluorescently-labeled cellsmay be imaged and counted by the microscopic evaluation using aningestible device as described herein. In other embodiments, thefluorescently-labeled cells are counted as they pass through an onboardflow system (e.g., microfluidic single cell channeling). Examples offlow cytometry systems include hydrodynamic focusing, small diametercapillary tube flow, and rectangular capillary tube flow. As describedherein, live bacteria cells are labeled, and the principles of flowcytometry are used to quantify labeled cells. Generally speaking, thephotons from an incident laser beam are absorbed by the fluorophore andraised to a higher, unstable energy level. Within less than ananosecond, the fluorophore re-emits the light at a longerrepresentative wavelength where it is passed through a series ofdichroic filters. This reemitted light can be collected and interpretedas proportional to the number of labeled bacteria cells. In someembodiments, a sheath fluid is not used as part of the flow system tohelp accommodate the volume restrictions of the device. In someembodiments, a rectangular capillary tube is used to achieve asufficiently large cross-sectional area and relatively thin inspectionarea. The flow cytometry optical system operates parallel to thefluidics system and serves to observe the redirection of light passingthrough the cell and delivers information about the bacterial cells. Insome embodiments, rather than using a conventional laser and sphericallenses to focus the light to a point, an LED and cylindrical lenses areused to focus the light to a line across a rectangular capillary tube.In other embodiments, collimating lenses are used to make the lightsource parallel, while cylindrical lenses are used to refine theinspection area. An exemplary optical configuration for this arrangementcan be seen in FIG. 30. In some embodiments, optical filters can beadded to permit the use of fluorophores. The characteristic wavelengthof reemitted light from the fluorophores can be isolated and detectedwith the use of dichroic, bandpass, and short or long wave pass filters.Generally, multiple dichroic lenses and photomultipliers are used,however, due to space limitations, only a single side-scatter detectorand forward scatter detector may be used in certain embodiments.

One of the design challenges of integrating flow cytometry into thedevice is to provide a pumping mechanism. Without moving fluid,individual bacteria cells cannot be identified and accounted for by flowcytometry within a fixed volume of fluid. In some embodiments, a gearmotor is to move fluid through the device. For example, a micromotorincluding a planetary gearhead (e.g., with a 25:1 reduction) can providethe desired amount of torque to create fluid flow. In anotherembodiment, a series of piezoelectric resistors embedded in the surfaceof a microfabricated plate is used to create flow. In yet anotherembodiment, a micropump that includes a pair of one-way valves and usesa magnetic pump membrane actuated by an external magnetic field is usedto create flow.

In some embodiments, the system architecture includes an opening andsealing mechanism combined with a rotary wiper which creates a pressuredriven flow via a gear motor. The gear motor can be used for otherfunctions in the device. As shown in FIG. 31, the components of theoptics and flow chamber systems fit within the device. In someembodiments, the sample fluid is absorbed via a flexible membrane at thetop of the capsule. In some embodiments, the gear motor has 270° ofpermissible travel which serves to open and fill the fluid chamber.During closure, the motor closes the ingress port while simultaneouslypushing the fluid through the rectangular capillary tube where theoptical system is located. The threaded component allows the flexiblemembrane to close and seal the ingress channel without changing thewiper height. In some embodiments, the volume of the sample chamber is25 μL, 50 μL, 75 μL or more. In some embodiments, two or more samplesare taken from the GI tract to procure a sufficient sample size.Referring to FIG. 31, an LED on the left side of the capillary tube andthe two low-light detectors on the right for capturing forward and sidescatter are shown. Once the fluid passes through the capillary tube, itexits the capsule via a one-way valve. In certain embodiments, the flowsystem allows for the detection of cell size and internal cellcomplexity, in addition to cell quantitation.

In some embodiment, the ingestible devices as described herein may beused to analyze samples (e.g., samples from the GI tract) to detect orquantify viable bacterial cells in a sample. In some embodiments, thedevices of this disclosure may be used to measure the concentration ofviable bacteria in specific regions of the GI tract. Such data may beused to determine whether a subject has a condition in need fortreatment, such as an infection, Small Intestinal Bacterial Overgrowth(SIBO), or a SIBO-related condition, or to quantify bacterialpopulations within the GI tract (or within specific regions of the GItract) for other diagnostic purposes.

An ingestible device used in a live cell dye method can be configured sothat one or more than one samples may be analyzed.

As an example, in some embodiments, the ingestible device has only onesample chamber. In such embodiments, the chamber can be used to analyzeone sample. In certain embodiments, an ingestible device having a singlesample chamber can be used to analyze multiple different embodiments.The sample chamber may include a sponge that is used such that thedifferent samples are analyzed at different points in time, such as, forexample, taken at different locations within the GI tract (e.g.,duodenum, jejunum, ileum) as the device passes through the GI tract. Forexample, a given sponge may be contacted multiple times and used foranalyte detection. In some embodiments, the sponge may be contacted withnon-saturating amounts of sample multiple times and used for analytedetection. Alternatively or additionally, the sample chamber may be usedwith multiple dyes (e.g., used in a single reaction) that are detectableat different wavelengths. Multiple analytes can be detected, forexample, using different antibodies (e.g., detecting fluorescence atdifferent wavelengths)

As another example, in certain embodiments, the ingestible device hasmultiple chambers for analyzing samples. In such embodiments, eachchamber can be used to analyze different samples. Features noted in thepreceding paragraph may be implemented with an ingestible device havingmultiple sample chambers.

In some embodiments, data may be generated after the ingestible devicehas exited the subject, or the data may be generated in vivo and storedon the device and recovered ex vivo. Alternatively, the data can betransmitted wirelessly from the ingestible device while the device ispassing through the GI tract of the subject.

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a method for detecting thepresence of viable bacterial cells in a sample, including: (a) providingan ingestible device as described herein; (b) transferring a fluidsample from the GI tract of a subject into a sampling chamber of theingestible device in vivo; and (c) detecting the presence of viablebacterial cells in the fluid sample (e.g., in vivo).

In some embodiments, the method for detecting the presence of viablebacterial cells in a sample includes: (a) providing an ingestible deviceas described herein; (b) transferring a fluid sample from the GI tractof a subject into a sampling chamber of the ingestible device in vivo,wherein the sampling chamber of the device is configured to hold anabsorptive sponge as described herein, or an absorptive sponge preparedaccording to the method for preparing an absorptive sponge as describedherein; (c) fully or partially saturating (e.g., at 50% or halfsaturation) the absorptive sponge with the fluid sample; and (d)measuring total fluorescence or rate of change of fluorescence as afunction of time of the fully or partially saturated sponge (e.g., 50%or half-saturated) prepared in step (c), thereby detecting viablebacterial cells in the sample (e.g., in vivo).

In some embodiments, the method described herein further includes a stepof calibrating the ingestible device, wherein the fluorescent propertiesof the absorptive sponge contained in the sampling chamber of the deviceare determined prior to the introduction of the sample. In someembodiments, each ingestible device is calibrated by measuring thefluorescence of the absorptive sponge held in the sampling chamber ofthe device and comparing the measured florescence to a positive ornegative control as described herein. In some embodiments, eachingestible device is calibrated by measuring the fluorescence of theabsorptive sponge held in the sampling chamber of the device to providea baseline fluorescence. In some embodiments, the baseline fluorescenceshould be within a set number (900+/−450 FU). In some embodiments, asubset of ingestible devices may be treated with 0, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶ and10⁷ CFU bacteria in duodenal or jejunal aspirates to generate acalibration curve. The calibration curve may be stored and used toquantify bacteria in all the devices in the batch. See, e.g., DavidWild, Standardization and Calibration, The Immunoassay Handbook, GulfProfessional Publishing, 2005. In some embodiments, the totalfluorescence or the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timeof the sponge is measured over multiple time points for an extendedperiod of time in step (d), thereby detecting viable bacterial cells inthe sample. For instance, in some embodiments, the total fluorescence orthe rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sampleis measured continuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes,0-1500 minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900minutes, 0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes,0-400 minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270minutes, or 0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescenceor the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of time of thesample is measured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method further includes correlating the totalfluorescence or the rate of change of fluorescence as a function of timedetermined in step (d) to the number of viable bacterial cells in thesample. In some embodiments, the method does not require ex vivo platingor culturing. In some embodiments, the method does not requireaspiration. In some embodiments, the method is performed in theingestible device in vivo.

In some embodiments, a control may be employed in the method asdescribed herein. Such a control may be an internal control (e.g., thefluorescence coming from resorufin impurity in resazruin (900+/−450 FU)in the sponge may be used as an internal control for optics and amountof dye in the sponge). In some embodiments, each ingestible device asdescribed herein is individually calibrated wherein the fluorescentproperties of the absorptive sponge contained in the sampling chamber ofthe device are determined prior to the introduction of sample.

In some embodiments, methods as described herein are highly sensitive indetecting and quantifying viable bacterial cells in various samples. Insome embodiments, the lowest detection or quantification limit of thepresent methods is 10² CFU/mL. In some embodiments, the highestdetection or quantification limit of the present methods is 10⁷ CFU/mL,10⁸ CFU/mL, 10⁹ CFU/mL, 10¹⁰ CFU/mL or more. In some embodiments, themethods allow detection or quantification of 10² to 10⁷ CFU/mL bacterialcells in various samples. In some embodiments, methods of thisdisclosure may be used to distinguish samples bases on the quantity ofviable bacterial cells contained therein. For instance, the methods maybe used to distinguish among samples that contain 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵,10⁶, or 10⁷ CFU/mL of bacterial cells.

In one aspect, this disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract, including: (a) providingan ingestible device as described herein; (b) transferring a fluidsample from the GI tract of a subject into a sampling chamber of theingestible device in vivo; and (c) quantifying viable bacterial cellspresent in the fluid sample (e.g., in vivo), wherein the number of theviable bacterial cells determined in step (c) greater than about 10⁵CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein.

In some embodiments, the method of assessing or monitoring the need totreat a subject suffering from or at risk of overgrowth of bacterialcells in the GI tract includes: (a) providing an ingestible device asdescribed herein; (b) transferring a fluid sample from the GI tract of asubject into a sampling chamber of the device in vivo, wherein thesampling chamber of the device as described herein is configured to holdan absorptive sponge as described herein, or an absorptive spongeprepared according to the method for preparing an absorptive sponge asdescribed herein; (c) fully or partially saturating (e.g., at 50% orhalf saturation) the absorptive sponge in the sampling chamber with thefluid sample; (d) measuring total fluorescence of the fully or partiallysaturated sponge (e.g., at 50% or half saturation) prepared in step (c);and (e) correlating the total fluorescence measured in step (d) to thenumber of viable bacterial cells in the sample, wherein the number ofthe viable bacterial cells determined in step (e) greater than about 10⁵CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein.

In some embodiments, the method of assessing or monitoring the need totreat a subject suffering from or at risk of overgrowth of bacterialcells in the GI tract includes: (a) providing an ingestible device asdescribed herein; (b) transferring a fluid sample from the GI tract of asubject into a sampling chamber of the device in vivo, wherein thesampling chamber of the device as described herein is configured to holdan absorptive sponge as described herein, or an absorptive spongeprepared according to the method for preparing an absorptive sponge asdescribed herein; (c) fully or partially saturating (e.g., at 50% orhalf saturation) the absorptive sponge in the sampling chamber with thefluid sample; (d) measuring rate of change of fluorescence as a functionof time of the fully or partially saturated sponge (e.g., at 50% or halfsaturation) prepared in step (c); and (e) correlating the rate of changeof fluorescence as a function of time measured in step (d) to the numberof viable bacterial cells in the sample, wherein the number of theviable bacterial cells determined in step (e) greater than about 10⁵CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein.

In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (d). Forinstance, in some embodiments, the total fluorescence rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total fluorescence or the rateof change of fluorescence as a function of time of the sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method does not require ex vivo plating or culturing.In some embodiments, the method does not require aspiration. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo (e.g., in an ingestibledevice in vivo). In some embodiments, the method includes communicatingthe results of the onboard assay(s) to an ex vivo receiver. In someembodiments, the ingestible device and the method may be further used tomonitor the subject after the treatment (e.g., with an antibiotic). Insome embodiments, the ingestible device and the method may be used toassess the efficacy of the treatment. For example, efficacious treatmentmay be indicated by the decrease of the number of viable bacterial cellsin a sample from the GI tract of the subject post-treatment. Efficacy ofthe treatment may be evaluated by the rate of decrease of the number ofviable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of the subjectpost-treatment. In some embodiments, the ingestible device and themethod may be used to detect infection with antibiotic-resistant strainsof bacteria in a subject. For instance, such infection may be indicatedwhere the number of viable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tractof the subject does not substantially decrease after antibiotictreatment.

In some embodiments, the compositions, methods and devices describedherein may use a combination of (e.g., two or more) analyte-bindingagents to detect, characterize and/or quantitate the type of analyte(e.g., a microorganism and a protein, a metabolite) present in a sample.For example, in some embodiments, the compositions, methods and devicesdescribed herein may be used to determine the types of microorganisms(e.g., bacteria, protozoans, or viruses) present in a sample. In someembodiments, a first analyte-binding agent that binds to an analyte andcomprises a first fluorescent dye, may be used in combination with asecond analyte-binding agent, wherein the second analyte-binding agentcomprises a second fluorescent dye that exhibits increased fluorescencewhen spatially proximal to the first fluorescent dye. In someembodiments, spatial proximity between the first fluourescent dye andthe second fluorescent dye results in energy transfer from the firstfluorescent dye to the second fluorescent dye. The detection of thefluorescence emitted by the second fluorescent dye can be used, forexample, to determine whether both analyte-binding agents are located inclose proximity to each other in the sample. Alternatively, a firstanalyte-binding agent that binds to an analyte and comprises a firstfluorogenic dye may be used in combination with a second analyte-bindingagent, wherein the second analyte-binding agent comprises a secondfluorescent dye that exhibits increased fluorescence when spatiallyproximal to the first fluorogenic dye. In some embodiments, the firstfluorogenic dye exhibits no fluorescence or reduce fluorescence when thefirst-analyte binding agent is not bound to the analayte. In someembodiments, the first fluorogenic dye exhibits increased fluorescenceupon binding of the first analyte-binding agent to the analyte. In someembodiments, spatial proximity between the first fluorogenic dye and thesecond fluorescent dye results in energy transfer from the firstfluorogenic dye to the second fluorescent dye. The detection of thefluorescence emitted by the second fluorescent dye can be used, forexample, to determine whether both analyte-binding agents are located inclose proximity to each other in the sample. In some embodiments, thefirst and the second analyte-binding agents bind to the same region(e.g., epitope) of the analyte (e.g., a protein). For instance, in someembodiments, the first and the second analyte-binding agents comprisethe same type of analyte-binding moiety or reagent (e.g., the sameantibody). In some embodiments, the first and the second analyte-bindingagents bind to separate regions (e.g., epitopes) of the analyte (e.g., aprotein). In some embodiments, the first and the second analyte-bindingagents bind to the separate regions of the analyte (e.g., a protein)that do not spatially overlap. In some embodiments, the firstanalyte-binding agent and the second analyte-binding agent areconfigured such that when both analyte-binding agents are bound to theanalyte, their respective dyes are in close proximity (e.g., allowingfor energy transfer to occur). In some embodiments, the first and/orsecond analyte binding agent(s) is an antigen-binding agent (e.g., anantibody). In some embodiments, the first and/or second analyte bindingagent(s) is an affimer. In some embodiments, the first and/or secondanalyte binding agent(s) is an antigen-binding agent is an aptamer.

In some embodiments, the compositions, methods and devices describedherein make use of fluorescent oxygen channeling immunoassay (FOCI)compositions and methods. FOCI is generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos.5,807,675; 5,616,719; and 7,635,571, the entire contents of which areexpressly incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, a firstanalyte-binding agent that is capable of binding to an analyte andcomprises a photosensitizer is used in combination with a secondanalyte-binding agent comprising a fluorogenic dye. In some embodiments,the photosensitizer of the first analyte-binding agent generates singletoxygen in an excited state thereby causing the fluorogenic dye of thesecond analyte-binding agent to emit fluorescence upon reacting with thesinglet oxygen. In some embodiments, the emitted fluorescence can bedetected to, e.g., determine the presence and/or absence of the analyteand/or to quantitate and/or analyze the analyte in a sample. In someembodiments, the first and the second analyte-binding agents bind to thesame region (e.g., epitope) of the analyte (e.g., a protein). Forexample, in some embodiments, the first and the second analyte-bindingagents comprise the same type of analyte-binding moiety or reagent(e.g., the same antibody). In some embodiments, the first and the secondanalyte-binding agents bind to separate regions (e.g., epitopes) of theanalyte (e.g., a protein). In some embodiments, the first and the secondanalyte-binding agents bind to the separate regions of the analyte(e.g., a protein) that do not spatially overlap. In some embodiments,the first analyte-binding agent and the second analyte-binding agent areconfigured such that when both analyte-binding agents are bound to theanalyte, the singlet oxygen generated by photosensitizer of the firstanalyte-binding agent is in close proximity to the fluorogenic dye ofthe second analyte-binding agent. In some embodiments, the first and/orsecond analyte binding agent(s) is an antigen-binding agent (e.g., anantibody). In some embodiments, the first and/or second analyte bindingagent(s) is an affimer. In some embodiments, the first and/or secondanalyte binding agent(s) is an antigen-binding agent is an aptamer.

In some embodiments, the use of a combination of analyte-binding agentsallows for the detection, analysis and/or quantitation of a multitude ofanalytes. Multiple combinations of analyte-binding agents may be usedfor the detection, analysis and/or quantitation of a complex mixture ofanalytes. For example, multiple analyte-binding agents having differentdyes, and/or analyte specificities may be used to analyze a sample. Forinstance, in order to detect different species of bacteria (or e.g., LTAvs. LPS) present in a sample, one can couple a live cell dye (F1) asdescribed herein to an antibody or to an antibiotic that ismicroorganism-specific (e.g., bacteria specific or bacterialspecies-specific). Antibodies that specifically bind to a biomolecule(e.g., a surface antigen) present in a microorganism (e.g., a bacteria)of a genus, species or strain of interest and do not cross-react withother microorganism biomolecules and/or eukaryotic biomolecules may alsobe used, including the exemplary antibodies described herein. A secondantibody or antibiotic having a fluorescent dye (F2) that binds to thesame microorganism and that gets excited (via an energy transfer from F1to F2) when in close proximity to F1 may be employed to detect, analyzeand/or quantitate the microorganism to which the antibodies and/orantibiotics bind. Two exemplary proximity assays are depicted in FIGS.73A and 73B.

Analyte Diluting and Culturing

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides methods of obtaining,culturing, and/or detecting cells and/or analytes in vivo within thegastrointestinal (GI) tract or reproductive tract of a subject.Associated devices are also disclosed. The methods and devices describedprovide a number of advantages for obtaining and/or analyzing fluidsamples from a subject. In some embodiments, diluting the fluid sampleincreases the dynamic range of analyte detection and/or reducesbackground signals or interference within the sample. For example,interference may be caused by the presence of non-target analytes ornon-specific binding of a dye or label within the sample. In someembodiments, culturing the sample increases the concentration of cells(e.g., a specific type of cells) and/or analytes (e.g., a specificanalyte of interest) produced by the cells thereby facilitating theirdetection and/or characterization. Above, various types of analytes aredisclosed which may be detected and/or characterized as describedherein.

In certain embodiments, the methods and devices a described herein maybe used to obtain information regarding bacterial populations in the GItract of a subject. This has a number of advantages and is less invasivethan surgical procedures such as intubation or endoscopy to obtain fluidsamples from the GI tract. The use of an ingestible device as describedherein also allows for fluid samples to be obtained and data to begenerated on bacterial populations from specific regions of the GItract.

In some embodiments, the methods and devices described herein may beused to generate data such as by analyzing the fluid sample, dilutionsthereof or cultured samples for one or more cells and/or analytes. Thedata may include, but is not limited to, the types of bacteria presentin the fluid sample or the concentration of bacteria in specific regionsof the GI tract. Such data may be used to determine whether a subjecthas an infection, such as Small Intestinal Bacterial Overgrowth (SIBO),or to characterize bacterial populations within the GI tract fordiagnostic or other purposes.

For example, in one aspect, the data may include, but is not limited to,the concentration of bacteria in a specific region of the GI tract thatis one or more of the duodenum, jejunum, ileum, ascending colon,transverse colon or descending colon. In one aspect, the specific regionof the GI tract is the duodenum. In one aspect, the specific region ofthe GI tract is the jejunum. In one aspect, the specific region of theGI tract is the ileum. In one aspect, the specific region of the GItract is the ascending colon. In one aspect, the specific region of theGI tract is the transverse colon. In one aspect, the specific region ofthe GI tract is the descending colon. In a related embodiment, the datamay be generated every one or more days to monitor disease flare-ups, orresponse to the therapeutic agents disclosed herein.

Data may be generated after the device has exited the subject, or thedata may be generated in vivo and stored on the device and recovered exvivo. Alternatively, the data can be transmitted wirelessly from thedevice while the device is passing through the GI tract of the subjector in place within the reproductive tract of the subject.

In some embodiments, a method comprises: providing a device comprisingone or more dilution chambers and dilution fluid; transferring all orpart of a fluid sample obtained from the GI tract or reproductive tractof the subject into the one or more dilution chambers in vivo; andcombining the fluid sample and the dilution fluid to produce one or morediluted samples in the one or more dilution chambers.

In certain embodiments, a method comprises: providing an ingestibledevice comprising one or more dilution chambers; transferring all orpart of a fluid sample obtained from the GI tract into the one or moredilution chambers comprising sterile media; culturing the sample in vivowithin the one or more dilution chambers to produce one or more culturedsamples; and detecting bacteria in the one or more cultured samples.

In some embodiments, a method comprises: providing a device comprisingone or more dilution chambers; transferring all or part of a fluidsample obtained from the GI tract or reproductive tract into the one ormore dilution chambers; combining all or part of the fluid sample with adilution fluid in the one or more dilution chambers; and detecting theanalyte in the one or more diluted samples.

In certain embodiments, a device comprises: one or more dilutionchambers for diluting a fluid sample obtained from the GI tract orreproductive tract; and dilution fluid for diluting the sample withinthe one or more dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, the device comprises: one or more dilution chambersfor culturing a fluid sample obtained from the GI tract; sterile mediafor culturing the sample within the one or more dilution chambers; and adetection system for detecting bacteria.

In certain embodiments, a device comprises: one or more dilutionchambers for culturing a fluid sample obtained from the GI tract;sterile media for culturing the sample within the one or more dilutionchambers; and a detection system for detecting bacteria.

Also provided is the use of a device as described herein for dilutingone or more samples obtained from the GI tract or reproductive tract ofa subject. In one embodiment, there is provided the use of an ingestibledevice as described herein for detecting cells and/or analytes in vivowithin the gastrointestinal (GI) tract of a subject.

Further provided is a system comprising a device as described herein anda base station. In one embodiment, the device transmits data to the basestation, such as data indicative of the concentration and/or types ofbacteria in the GI tract of the subject. In one embodiment, the devicereceives operating parameters from the base station. Some embodimentsdescribed herein provide an ingestible device for obtaining one or moresamples from the GI tract or reproductive tract of a subject anddiluting and/or culturing all or part of the one or more samples. Theingestible device includes a cylindrical rotatable element having a porton the wall of the cylindrical rotatable element. The ingestible devicefurther includes a shell element wrapping around the cylindricalrotatable element to form a first dilution chamber between thecylindrical rotatable element and the shell element. The shell elementhas an aperture that exposes a portion of the wall of the cylindricalrotatable element to an exterior of the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device includes one or more dilutionchambers for receiving a fluid sample from the GI tract or reproductivetract of a subject or a dilution thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore dilutions of the fluid sample are cultured in one or more dilutionchambers. In some embodiments, the dilution chambers each define a knownvolume, optionally the same volume or different volumes. In someembodiments, the dilution chambers define a fluid volume ranging fromabout 10 μL to about 1 mL. The dilution chambers may define a fluidvolume less than or equal to about 500 μL, less than or equal to about250 μL, less than or equal to about 100 μL, or less than or equal toabout 50 μL. In some embodiments, the dilution chambers define a fluidvolume of greater than or equal to about 10 μL, greater than or equal toabout 20 μL, greater than or equal to about 30 μL, or greater than orequal to about 50 μL. In some embodiments, the dilution chambers definea fluid volume between about 10 μL and 500 μL, between about 20 μL and250 μL, between about 30 μL and 100 μL or about 50 μL.

In some embodiments, dilution fluid in the device is combined with allor part of the fluid sample, or dilution thereof, to produce one or moredilutions. In some embodiments, the dilution fluid is sterile mediasuitable for culturing one or more cells within the dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, the one or more dilution chambers may be filledwith the dilution fluid prior to a patient ingesting the ingestibledevice. Alternatively, in another embodiment, the dilution fluid may beadded into the one or more dilution chambers in vivo from a reservoir ofthe ingestible device. Sampling and dilution of the GI fluid sample maytake place in vivo. For example, an actuator of the ingestible devicemay pump the dilution fluid from the reservoir into a dilution chamberwhen it is determined that the ingestible device is located at apredetermined location within the GI tract. In some embodiments, thedilution chambers each contain a volume of sterile media suitable forculturing a fluid sample from the GI tract or reproductive tract. Insome embodiments, the dilution chambers are at least 95%, at least 97%,at least 98%, or at least 99% full of sterile media. In someembodiments, the dilution chambers each contain oxygen to facilitateaerobic bacteria growth. In another embodiment a non-dilution chamberincludes oxygen and is added to one or more of the dilution chambers tofacilitate aerobic bacteria growth.

In some embodiments, the culturing may take place in vivo immediatelyafter the GI fluid sample has been diluted. Or alternatively, theculturing may take place ex vivo, e.g., when the ingestible device hasbeen evacuated and recovered such that the dilution chamber containingthe diluted GI fluid sample may be extracted and the culturing may beperformed in a laboratory. The recovery of the ingestible device may beperformed in a similar manner as embodiments described in U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/434,188, filed on Dec. 14, 2016, which isherein expressly incorporated by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the dilution fluid includes one or more agents forinhibiting the growth of fungus. In some embodiments, the anti-fungalagent is amphotericin B. In some embodiments, the dilution fluidcontains about 2.5 mg/L of Amphotericin B.

In some embodiments, the media includes one or more antimicrobial agentsin order to determine antibiotic sensitivity/resistance of bacteriawithin the fluid sample. For example, if bacteria grow in a dilutionchamber containing media without antibiotics but do not grow in aseparate dilution chamber containing media including antimicrobialagents, the sample may be identified as containing bacteria sensitive tothat antibiotic. Alternatively, if bacteria grow in both dilutionchambers (with and without antibiotics), the sample can be identified ascontaining bacteria resistant to that antibiotic. In some embodiments,the bacteria remaining in the dilution chamber(s) are quantified using,e.g., any detection and/or quantification method described herein. Insome embodiments, the presence and/or absence of a particular type ofbacteria in the dilution chamber (e.g., a bacteria of a particulargenus, species and/or strain) is detected and/or quantified using amethod described herein.

In another embodiment, the dilution fluid includes a substrate orreagent for measuring bacterial activity or response. For example, insome embodiments, the dilution fluid includes one or more conjugatedbile acids and deconjugated bile acids or a reduction in conjugated bileacids are detected in the diluted samples and/or cultured samples as asign of bile salt hydrolase activity. In another embodiment, thesubstrate may be an enzyme, for example, glutamate dehydrogenase (GDH).In the case of GDH, it may be used to detect an antigen that is producedin high amounts by C. difficile, both toxin and non-toxin producingstrains. This test indicates if C. difficile is present but notnecessarily if the bacteria are producing toxins.

In another embodiment, products of the bacteria are detected or measuredwhile the bacteria are being cultured in the media. For example,Clostridium difficile toxin A can be measured to detect if bacteria areproducing toxins.

In some embodiments, the methods and devices described herein may beused to obtain, dilute, culture and/or detect eukaryotic cells from thesubject. For example, epithelial cells or PBMC's from the GI tract canbe diluted or cultured in the ingestible device. Optionally, theeukaryotic cells may be analyzed within the device and/or collected oncethe device has exited. In some embodiments, the dilution fluid furtherincludes a substrate or reagent for measuring eukaryotic activity orresponse in vivo. For example, in some embodiments, a biomarker in thesample may be detected, analyzed and/or quantitated. The detection ofthe biomarker in the sample may be used to diagnose or monitor a diseaseor disorder or the treatment thereof. Exemplary biomarkers are describedin detail above, including biomarkers associated with GI disorders,inflammation, and cancer. In some embodiments, the biomarker is presenton a eukaryotic cell present in the sample. In some embodiments one ormore biomarkers associated with inflammation and/or cancer are detectedwithin the diluted samples and/or cultured samples. In some embodiments,measuring the amount of cell growth proteins or cell-cell adhesionproteins (e.g., beta-catenin, ErbB1, EbrB2, ErbB3, pAkt, c-Met, p53)produced may be correlated to the presence or absence of oncogeniccells, while measuring cytokines (e.g., IL-6 and TNF-alpha) may becorrelated with inflammation.

In some embodiments, a fluid sample is transferred from the GI tractinto one or more dilution chambers while the ingestible device ispassing through the GI tract of a subject in vivo. By controlling whenthe fluid sample is transferred into the one or more dilution chambers,it is possible to obtain a fluid sample from a particular region of theGI tract. In operation, the exterior of the ingestible device will be incontact with biological fluids in the GI tract. As the ingestible devicetravels along the GI tract, it will typically be surrounded by fluidthat is characteristic of that section of the GI tract. For example,when the ingestible device is in the stomach, the device will be incontact with stomach fluid which may include gastric acid, digestiveenzymes, and partially digested food. When the ingestible device is inthe jejunum, the device will be in contact with jejunal fluid.

In some embodiments, the device has one or more ports, valves and/orpumps that are used, either alone or in combination, for controlling thetransfer of fluid from the GI tract or reproductive tract into the oneor more dilution chambers. The device may also contain one or moreports, valves and/or pumps for controlling the transfer of fluid betweendilution chambers within the device, optionally to produce a serialdilution of the original fluid sample from the GI tract or reproductivetract. In some embodiments, the device described herein may be used forobtaining, diluting, culturing, or detecting cells from other parts ofthe body, such as but not limited to the female reproductive tract,and/or the like. Compositions and methods for sampling the GI orreproductive tract are discussed in greater detail in U.S. ProvisionalApplication No. 62/376,688 filed Aug. 18, 2016, which is herebyincorporated by reference herein in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the device includes a microcontroller forcontrolling the one or more ports, valves and/or pumps. In someembodiments, the microcontroller is programmed to control the ports,valves and/or pumps in response to data from the one or moreenvironmental sensors. Alternatively or in addition, the microcontrolleris programmed to control the ports, valves and/or pumps in response towireless a signal from a base station or in response to a signalgenerated by the microcontroller, such as a timer.

In some embodiments the device includes a pump having an input conduiton the exterior of the device and an output conduit into a firstdilution chamber. In some embodiments, the pump is operational totransfer fluid from the GI tract into the first dilution chamber.Preferably, the pump is controllable to transfer a predetermined volumeof liquid from the GI tract into a dilution chamber. In someembodiments, the device includes a pump controllable to transfer apredetermined volume of liquid between dilution chambers, optionally thesame pump or a different pump as used to transfer the fluid sample intothe first dilution chamber. In some embodiments, the pump is a solenoidpump. In some embodiments, the pump is controllable to transfer a fluidvolume from about 1 μL to about 50 μL, about 2 μL to about 20 μL, about3 μL to about 15 μL, or about 5 μL.

In another embodiment, the device includes a port for receiving a fluidsample from the GI tract or reproductive tract. In some embodiments, theport is exposed to the exterior of the device. Optionally, the deviceincludes a cover movable to expose the port to the exterior of thedevice. In operation, when the port is exposed fluid from the GI tractor reproductive tract enters into the port through surface tension,movement of the subject and/or peristaltic effects. Optionally, the portis coated with a hydrophilic coating to encourage fluid to flow into theport.

In some embodiments, the port is movable from an open position such thatthe port is exposed to the exterior of the device, to a first positionsuch that the port is in fluid communication with a first dilutionchamber. In some embodiments, moving the port from the open position tothe first position transfers a predetermined volume of a fluid samplefrom the GI tract or reproductive tract into the first dilution chamber.For example, in some embodiments the port defines a fluid volume ofabout 1 μL to about 50 μL, about 2 μL to about 20 μL, about 3 μL toabout 15 μL or about 5 μL.

A skilled person will appreciate that when the port is in fluidcommunication with the first dilution chamber, the port and the firstdilution chamber will define a combined volume such that any fluid inthe port and dilution chamber will mix to form a dilution. In someembodiments, the mixing of fluid will be enhanced through theperistaltic action of the GI tract as well as movement of the subject.In some embodiments, the first incubation chamber contains dilutionfluid such as sterile media and moving the port to the first positionproduces a first dilution including a predetermined volume of fluidsample from the GI tract and a predetermined volume of dilution fluid.For example, in some embodiments the port has a fluid volume of 5 μl andthe first dilution chamber has 45 μL of dilution fluid, such that thefirst dilution is a 10 fold dilution of the fluid sample.

In some embodiments, the first dilution is cultured to produce a singlecultured sample and cells and/or analytes are detected within thecultured sample. Alternatively, in some embodiments a portion of thefirst dilution is transferred to one or more additional dilutionchambers to produce a serial dilution of the fluid sample from the GItract. In some embodiments, the serial dilution is produced bycontrolling the transfer of fluid between the dilution chambers.

For example, in some embodiments the ingestible device includes a portmovable to sequentially align with one or more additional i dilutionchambers, thereby transferring a portion of first dilution of the fluidsample to each additional dilution chamber. Alternatively or inaddition, one or more pumps and/or valves may be used to sequentiallytransfer a portion of the fluid sample or dilution thereof to eachdilution chamber.

In some embodiments, the device includes a port movable from a firstposition in fluid communication with a first dilution chamber to asecond position such that the port is in fluid communication with asecond dilution chamber. In some embodiments, the port is movable fromthe second position to a third position such that the port is in fluidcommunication with a third dilution chamber. In some embodiments, theport is movable from the third position to a fourth position such thatthe port is in fluid communication with a fourth dilution chamber. Insome embodiments, the port is movable from the fourth position to afifth position such that the port is in fluid communication with a fifthdilution chamber. Optionally, the device may contain more than fivedilution chambers for producing more than five dilutions of the originalfluid sample. In some embodiments, the dilution chambers are suitablefor culturing the dilutions in vivo within the device.

In some embodiments, the port is a depression on the surface of amovable element. In some embodiments, the movable element is coupled toan actuator for moving the port relative to the positions of the one ofmore dilution chambers. Optionally, the actuator is an electric motor.

In some embodiments the port is a depression on the surface of arotatable element. In some embodiments, the device includes an actuatorcoupled to the rotatable element for rotating the port to align with oneor more dilution chambers. In some embodiments, the dilution chambersare positioned circumferentially around the axis of rotation of therotatable element. In some embodiments, rotating the rotatable elementsequentially moves the port from the open position to the first positionand optionally one or more of the second position, third position andfourth position.

FIG. 27 shows one embodiment of a portion of an ingestible device 4000with a port 4154 b in an open position to the exterior of the ingestibledevice 400. The ingestible device 400 may include a cylinder-shapedrotatable element 4150 that includes sampling ports 4154 a-b on the wallof the rotatable element 4150. The sampling chamber 4150 is wrapped by ashell element 4140 with dividers to form a series of dilution chambers4151 a-n between the shell element 4140 and the rotatable element 4150.In operation, when the ingestible device 4000 determines the deviceitself arrives at a target location within the GI tract, the rotatableelement 4150 may be rotated into an open position such that an apertureof the shell element 4140 is aligned with the port 4154 b on the wall ofthe rotatable element 4150 and the port 4154 b is exposed to theexterior of the ingestible device 4000 through the aperture. In thisway, fluid from the GI tract can enter the port 4154 b and occupy thevolume defined by the port 4154 b. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 27,the port 4154 b may be a depression on the surface of a rotatableelement 4150 and a number of dilution chambers 4151 a-n are positionedcircumferentially around the axis of rotation of the rotatable element4150. As previously discussed, each of the dilution chambers 4151 a-nmay store a dilution fluid. In some embodiments, the depression is acylindrical depression. Optionally, the depression may be a rectangulardepression, or any concave depression forming a regular or irregularshape. In another embodiment, the port 4154 b may be connected to achamber (not shown) within the rotatable element 4150 to create anenlarged space to store the GI fluid sample from the externalenvironment of the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device 4000 may further include acontroller and an actuator. The controller may determine that theingestible device 4000 is located at a target location of the GI tract,and then the actuator may trigger the rotation of the rotatable element4150 to align the port 4154 b at the open position to initiate thesampling. For example, the housing of ingestible device 4000 may have apH-sensitive enteric coating to detect or otherwise be sensitive to a pHlevel of the environment external to the ingestible device 4000, basedon which the controller may determine whether the ingestible device hasarrived at a target location. For another example, the ingestible device4000 may include an optical sensing unit that transmits an illuminationto the environment and collects a reflectance, based on which, theregio-specific location of the ingestible device 4000 may be identifiedbased on optical characteristics of the reflectance. Further embodimentsof localization of the ingestible device 4000 may be found in PCTInternational Application No. PCT/US2015/052500, filed on Sep. 25, 2015,which is herein expressly incorporated by reference in its entirety.

FIG. 28 shows one embodiment of a portion of an ingestible device with aport 4154 b at a first position aligned with a first dilution chamber4151 a. In operation, the rotatable element 4150 may be rotated to alignthe sampling port 4154 b and the first dilution chamber 4151 a such thatthe fluid sample from the GI tract stored within the volume of thesampling port 4154 b can be combined with dilution fluid in the firstdilution chamber to form a first dilution. The first dilution may thenoccupy the combined volume of the port 4154 b and first dilution chamber4151 a. Optionally, the rotatable element 4150 may be subsequentlyrotated to a second position such that the port 4154 b containing aportion of the first dilution is then moved to be aligned and in fluidcommunication with another dilution chamber, e.g., a second dilutionchamber that is next to the first dilution chamber along the rotationaldirection. In this way, the first dilution stored within the port 154 bmay then again be diluted with the dilution fluid stored within thesecond dilution chamber. Similarly, if the rotatable element 4150 keepsrotating and allows the port 4154 b to be serially aligned with eachdilution chamber, then the original GI fluid sample may be dilutedserially and each dilution chambers 4151 a-n may be left with a dilutedGI fluid sample at a different dilution ratio.

FIG. 29 shows one embodiment of an element 4140 forming part of a set of5 dilution chambers (e.g., including 4151 a-b) for surrounding arotatable element (e.g., 4150 in FIGS. 28 and 29) in an ingestibledevice as described herein. In some embodiments, the device may containa single dilution chamber. Alternatively, the device may contain 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or greater than 8 dilution chambers.

In some embodiments, each dilution chamber 4151 a-n may be filled with adilution fluid prior to the ingestible device 4000 being administered.In another embodiment, the dilution fluid may be stored in a separatereservoir (not shown) within the ingestible device 4000. At the timewhen the ingestible device 4000 is determined to be at a target locationwithin the GI tract, a pumping mechanism may pump the dilution fluidinto one or more dilution chambers 4151 a-b via one or more outlet (notshown) of the reservoir. The pumping mechanism and the reservoir thatstores the dilution fluid, may take a form similar to theelectromechanical delivery mechanism of an ingestible device asdescribed in U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/385,553, filed on Sep.9, 2016, which is herein expressly incorporated by reference in itsentirety.

In some embodiments, the shell element 4140 may have valves or pumps(not shown) between the dilution chambers 4151 a-n. For example, thediluted fluid from a first dilution chamber may be pumped into a seconddilution chamber via a valve between the two chambers. The pump andvalve mechanism may take a form similar to the electromechanicaldelivery mechanism of an ingestible device as described in U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/385,553, filed on Sep. 9, 2016, which isherein expressly incorporated by reference in its entirety.

In some embodiments, the method and devices described herein involvecombining a fluid sample, or dilution thereof, with dilution fluid toproduce one or more dilutions of the fluid sample. For example, in someembodiments the fluid sample is combined with dilution fluid in a firstdilution chamber to produce a first dilution, a portion of the firstdilution is combined with dilution fluid in a second dilution chamber toproduce a second dilution, a portion of the second dilution is combinedwith dilution fluid in a third dilution chamber to produce a thirddilution, and optionally a portion of the third dilution is combinedwith dilution fluid in a fourth dilution chamber to produce a fourthdilution, and optionally a portion of the fourth dilution is combinedwith dilution fluid in a fifth dilution chamber to produce a fifthdilution.

The relative dilution of the fluid sample will depend on the relativeamount of fluid sample, or dilution thereof, and dilution fluid that iscombined in each dilution chamber. In some embodiments, the fluidsample, or dilution thereof, is combined with dilution fluid at a ratiobetween about 1:1 and about 1:1000, between about 1:1 and 1:100, betweenabout 1:1 and about 1:20, or between about 1:1 and about 1:10.Optionally, the relative amounts of fluid sample, or dilution thereof,and dilution fluid that are combined in each dilution chamber are variedsuch that different dilution chambers contain different dilutions. Insome embodiments, the method and devices described herein produce aseries of 10-fold dilutions of the fluid sample. In some embodiments,the methods and devices described herein produce a series of dilutionsof a fluid sample such that for a given bacterial concentration in thefluid sample, some of the dilutions will not be expected to contain anybacteria, and some of the dilutions will be expected to contain bacteriaand therefore exhibit bacterial growth when cultured.

As set out in examples below, determining the presence or absence ofbacterial growth in one or more dilutions can be used to estimate theconcentration of bacteria within the original fluid sample from the GItract. The use of a dilution series and a binary detection system thatdetects the presence or absence of bacterial growth presents a number ofadvantages over more complicated detection systems that seek to directlyquantify the concentration of bacteria within a sample. For example,binary detection systems are robust and amenable to miniaturization andtherefore suitable for use in an ingestible device as described herein.Also, diluting the fluid sample increases the dynamic range whilereducing interference. Accordingly, in some embodiments the methods anddevices described herein include detecting the presence or absence ofthe growth of a cell, optionally bacterial growth. In some embodiments,the methods and devices described herein include detecting the presenceor absence of bacterial growth in one or more dilutions of the fluidsample from the GI tract.

In some embodiments, the presence or absence of bacterial growth in oneor more dilutions is used to estimate the concentration of bacteria inthe fluid sample. For example, in some embodiments a fluid sample ofabout 5 μL is diluted about 10000 times in one of the dilution chambersand detecting the presence of bacterial growth in the dilution chamberis indicative of a bacterial concentration of 10⁵ or greater colonyforming units/mL (CFU/mL) in the fluid sample. 10 μL of a fluid samplewith a bacterial concentration of 10⁴ CFU/mL would contain about 100CFU. A 10000-fold dilution of such a 10 μL fluid sample would beunlikely to contain any CFUs or bacteria (theoretically 0.01 bacteria)and therefore would not be expected to exhibit bacterial growth whencultured.

Alternatively, in some embodiments the methods and devices describedherein include detecting a level of bacterial concentration within oneor more cultured samples. For example, in some embodiments aquantifiable property of a cultured sample is measured in order toprovide an estimate of the level of bacteria within the cultured samplesin order to estimate the concentration of bacteria within the originalfluid sample.

In some embodiments, the devices described herein include a detectionsystem for detecting one or more cells and/or analytes. In someembodiments the cells are bacteria (e.g., bacteria of a particulargenus, species and/or strain). Different detection systems known in theart for detecting bacteria may be used with the device as describedherein. In some embodiments, the detection system detects the presenceor absence of bacterial growth within a diluted sample. In someembodiments, the detection system detects the presence or absence ofbacterial growth within a cultured sample. Alternatively or in addition,the detection system detects a level of bacteria within one or morecultured samples. For example, in some embodiments a Coulter counter isused to detect and/or quantify bacteria in the fluid samples, dilutionsthereof or cultured samples. In another embodiment, an optical detectionsystem is used to detect and/or quantify bacteria within the fluidsamples, dilutions thereof or cultured samples.

In some embodiments, the detection system detects cells and/or analytesin a dilution or cultured sample within the one or more dilutionchambers. Alternatively, the device includes one or more separatedetection chambers and the detection system detects cells and/oranalytes in the fluid sample or dilutions therefor within the detectionchamber. In some embodiments, fluid communication between one or moredilution chambers and one or more detection chambers is controlled byone or more ports, valves and/or pumps.

In some embodiments, the detection system detects cells and/or analytesat a plurality of time points. For example, in some embodiments thedetection system detects bacteria within the sterile media prior tocombining the fluid sample from the GI tract and the sterile media inorder to ensure that any bacterial growth is due to the bacteriaintroduced into the dilution chambers from the GI tract. In someembodiments, the detection system detects bacteria at a first time pointand at a second time point. In some embodiments, the second time pointis selected to allow for the growth of bacteria within the culturedfluid sample relative to the first time point. For example, in someembodiments the second time point is between about 1 hour and 6 hours,between about 1 hour and 4 hours, or between about 2 hours and 4 hoursafter the first time point. In some embodiments, detecting bacteria atthe first time point serves as a control.

In some embodiments, the detection system detects the level of bacteriaat three or more time points to determine a growth curve for bacteria inthe one or more cultured samples. For example, the level of bacteria maybe detected within one or more culture samples every 30 or 60 minutesafter a sample is collected for a total of 2-12 hours; thereby producinga growth curve. The growth curve may then be compared to one or morestandard growth curves. In some embodiments, the standard growth curvesare representative of the growth of samples with a known concentrationof bacteria. In some embodiments, the standard growth curves arerepresentative of growth curves from subjects with Small IntestinalBacterial Overgrowth (SIBO).

In some embodiments, the embodiments described herein use an opticaldetection system for detecting one or more cells and/or analytes. Insome embodiments, the optical detection system includes a light sourceand a photodetector. In some embodiments, the light source andphotodetector are operable to define a light path through a dilutionchamber or detection chamber. In some embodiments, the optical detectionsystem measures the absorbance of light or optical density along thelight path at one or more wavelengths.

In some embodiments, the optical detection system measures theabsorbance of light at one or more wavelengths between 400 nm and 1000nm. In some embodiments, the optical detection system measures theabsorbance of light at one or more wavelengths between about 500 and 700nm. In some embodiments, the optical detection system measures theabsorbance of light at about 600 nm.

In some embodiments, the device described herein includes one or moreenvironmental sensors for measuring environmental data of the GI tractor reproductive tract external to the device in the subject. In someembodiments, the environmental data is used to help determine one ormore characteristics of the GI tract or reproductive tract of thesubject such as for the diagnosis of a medical condition. Alternativelyor in addition, the environmental data is used to determine the locationof the device within the GI tract of the subject. In some embodiments,the one or more environmental sensors include a capacitance sensor, atemperature sensor, an impedance sensor, a pH level sensor and/or alight sensor. In some embodiments, the one or more environmental sensorsmeasure pH, temperature, transit times, or combinations thereof.Examples of devices that detect pH changes include Medimetrics'IntelliCap® technology (see Becker, Dieter, et al. “Novel orallyswallowable IntelliCap® device to quantify regional drug absorption inhuman GI tract using diltiazem as model drug.” AAPS PharmSciTech 15.6(2014): 1490-1497) and Rani Therapeutics' Auto-Pill™ technology (seeU.S. Pat. No. 9,149,617).

In some embodiments, data regarding the location of the device withinthe GI tract of the subject is used to determine when to obtain a fluidsample from the GI tract and transfer the fluid sample into the one ormore dilution chambers. Accordingly, in some embodiments the deviceincludes a microcontroller configured to transfer the fluid sample fromthe GI tract of the subject to the one or more dilution chambers basedon the location of the device within the GI tract.

In some embodiments, the device includes a communication sub-unit thatis configured to receive operating parameters from an external basestation and/or transmit data to an external base station. Also providedis a system including a device as described herein and an external basestation. In some embodiments, the operating parameters include timinginstructions for obtaining a fluid sample from the GI tract andtransferring the sample into one or more dilution chambers. In someembodiments, the data transmitted to the external base station includesdata indicative of the presence of absence of bacterial growth in thecultured samples.

In general, it is possible for the ingestible device to obtain differentsamples from different predetermined regions of the GI tract, or forcertain actions within the ingestible device to be triggered based onits location in the GI tract. For example, it may be possible for theingestible device to use various combinations of light emitting diodesand sensors to determine whether the device is in the stomach, smallintestine, or large intestine. This may be done by emitting light atdifferent wavelengths, measuring the level of light reflected at eachwavelength by the environment surrounding the ingestible device, andusing this information to determine an approximate location of theingestible device based on the different reflectance properties of thevarious different portions of the GI tract. Once the ingestible devicedetermines that it is in a particular predetermined portion of the GItract (e.g., the small intestine, or a specific part of the smallintestine such as the jejunum), the ingestible device may be configuredto obtain a sample from that portion of the GI tract, and store thesample in one or more sampling or incubation chambers within theingestible device.

In another embodiment, an ingestible device may be localized using agamma scintigraphy technique or other radio-tracker technology asemployed by Phaeton Research's Enterion™ capsule (See Teng, Renli, andJuan Maya. “Absolute bioavailability and regional absorption ofticagrelor in healthy volunteers.” Journal of Drug Assessment 3.1(2014): 43-50), or monitoring the magnetic field strength of permanentmagnet in the ingestible device (see T. D. Than, et al., “A review oflocalization systems for robotic endoscopic capsules,” IEEE Trans.Biomed. Eng., vol. 59, no. 9, pp. 2387-2399, September 2012).

In still other embodiments, an ingestible device may include a camerafor generating video imaging data of the GI tract which can be used todetermine, among other things, the location of the device. Examples ofvideo imaging capsules include Medtronic's PillCam™, Olympus'Endocapsule®, and IntroMedic's MicroCam™ (see Basar et al. “IngestibleWireless Capsule Technology: A Review of Development and FutureIndication” International Journal of Antennas and Propagation (2012);1-14). Other imaging technologies include thermal imaging cameras, andthose that employ ultrasound or Doppler principles to generate differentimages (see Chinese patent application CN104473611: “Capsule endoscopesystem having ultrasonic positioning function”).

LOCI

In some embodiments, the application provides an ingestible device fordetecting an analyte in a sample, wherein the ingestible device includesa sampling chamber that is configured to hold a composition including:(1) a plurality of donor particles, each of the plurality of donorparticles including a photosensitizer and having coupled thereto a firstanalyte-binding agent (e.g., an antigen-binding agent) that binds to theanalyte, wherein the photosensitizer, in its excited state, is capableof generating singlet oxygen; and (2) a plurality of acceptor particles,each of the plurality of acceptor particles including a chemiluminescentcompound and having coupled thereto a second analyte-binding agent(e.g., an antigen-binding agent) that binds to the analyte, wherein saidchemiluminescent compound is capable of reacting with singlet oxygen toemit luminescence. In some embodiments, the first and the secondanalyte-binding agents are antigen-binding agents (e.g., antibodies). Insome embodiments, the first and the second antigen-binding agents bindto the same epitope of the analyte (e.g., a protein). In someembodiments, the first and the second antigen-binding agents bind toseparate epitopes of the analyte (e.g., a protein) that spatiallyoverlap. In some embodiments, the first and the second antigen-bindingagents bind to the separate epitopes of the analyte (e.g., a protein)that do not spatially overlap. In some embodiments, the first and/orsecond analyte binding agent(s) is an antibody. In some embodiments, thefirst and/or second analyte binding agent(s) is an affimer. In someembodiments, the first and/or second analyte binding agent(s) is anantigen-binding agent is an aptamer.

In some embodiments, this application provides an ingestible device fordetecting an analyte in a sample, wherein the ingestible device includesa sampling chamber that is configured to hold a member made of anabsorptive material (e.g., an absorptive pad or absorptive sponge)having absorbed therein a composition including: (1) a plurality ofdonor particles, each of the plurality of donor particles including aphotosensitizer and having coupled thereto a first analyte-binding agent(e.g., an antigen-binding agent) that binds to the analyte, wherein thephotosensitizer, in its excited state, is capable of generating singletoxygen; and (2) a plurality of acceptor particles, each of the pluralityof acceptor particles including a chemiluminescent compound and havingcoupled thereto a second analyte-binding agent (e.g., an antigen-bindingagent) that binds to the analyte, wherein said chemiluminescent compoundis capable of reacting with singlet oxygen to emit luminescence. In someembodiments, the first and the second analyte-binding agents areantigen-binding agents (e.g., antibodies). In some embodiments, thefirst and the second antigen-binding agents bind to the same epitope ofthe analyte (e.g., a protein). In some embodiments, the first and thesecond antigen-binding agents bind to separate epitopes of the analyte(e.g., a protein) that spatially overlap. In some embodiments, the firstand the second antigen-binding agents bind to the separate epitopes ofthe analyte (e.g., a protein) that do not spatially overlap.

In some embodiments, the absorptive material is an absorptive sponge. Insome embodiments, the absorptive sponge is a hydrophilic sponge. In someembodiments, the absorptive sponge is selected from the group consistingof: fibers of cotton, rayon, glass, polyester, polyethylene,polyurethane, nitrocellulose, and the like. In some embodiments, theabsorptive sponge is polyester or polyethylene. In some embodiments, theabsorptive sponge is selected from the group consisting of: AhlstromGrade 6613H, Porex 1/16″ Fine Sheet 4897, Porex ⅛″ Fine Sheet 4898,Porex 4588 0.024″ Conjugate release pad, Porex PSU-567, and FilterPapers. In some embodiments, the absorptive sponge is Ahlstrom Grade6613H (Lot 150191) or Porex PSU-567. The present application furtherprovides a method for preparing an absorptive material as describedherein, including the step of injecting into the absorptive material anaqueous solution including a composition of the present application. Insome embodiments, the method including a step of drying the absorptivematerial having absorbed therein the aqueous solution at a temperaturein the range of 0-100° C., 0-50° C., 0-40° C., 0-30° C., 0-20° C., 0-10°C., or 0-4° C.), for a time period sufficient to reduce the total watercontent to below 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 7%, 5%, 3%, 1%, 0.7%,0.5%, 0.3%, or 0.1% by weight.

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a method of measuring thepresence, absence or amount of one or more analytes from one or moresamples in the gastrointestinal tract. In general, in embodimentsinvolving LOCI, the analyte is capable of being bound by twoanalyte-binding agents at the same time to allow for detection of theanalyte using the methods described herein. Exemplary analytes that canbe be used in embodiments involving LOCI include, but are not limitedto, proteins, peptides, and microorganisms (e.g., bacteria). Variousexamples of analytes suitable for use in embodiments involving LOCI aredescribed above.

In some embodiments the one or more analytes are measured multipletimes, for example, at different time points or at different locations.In one embodiment, a single device measures one or more analytes or moretime points or locations; thereby creating a “molecular map” of aphysiological region. Measurements can be taken at any location in thegastrointestinal tract. For example, in one aspect, analytes fromsamples from one or more of the duodenum, jejunum, ileum, ascendingcolon, transverse colon or descending colon can be measured to create amolecular map of the small and large intestine. In one aspect, thesample is from the duodenum. In one aspect, In one aspect, the sample isfrom the jejunum. In one aspect, the sample is from the ileum. In oneaspect, the sample is from the ascending colon. In one aspect, thesample is from the transverse colon. In one aspect, the sample is fromthe descending colon.

In another aspect, a series of measurements can be taken over a shorterdistance of the gastrointestinal tract (e.g., the ileum) to create ahigher resolution molecular map. In some embodiments, previousendoscopic imaging may identify a diseased area for molecular mapping(e.g., biomarker mapping). For example, a gastroenterologist may useimaging (e.g., an endoscope equipped with a camera) to identify thepresence of Crohn's disease in the ileum and cecum of a patient, and themethods and techniques of the present invention herein may be used tomeasure inflammation-associated analytes in this diseased area of thepatient. In a related embodiment, the inflammation-associated analytes,or any analyte, may be measured every one or more days to monitordisease flare-ups, or response to therapeutics. Exemplaryinflammation-associated analytes include anti-glycan antibodies;anti-Saccharomyces cerevisiae antibodies (ASCA); anti-laminaribiosideantibodies (ALCA); anti-chitobioside antibodies (ACCA);anti-mannobioside antibodies (AMCA); anti-laminarin (anti-L) antibodies;anti-chitin (anti-C) antibodies; anti-outer membrane porin C (anti-OmpC)antibodies; anti-Cbirl flagellin antibodies; anti-I2 antibodies (see,e.g., Mitsuyama et al. (2016) World J. Gastroenterol. 22(3): 1304-10);autoantibodies targeting the exocrine pancreas (PAB); perinuclearanti-neutrophil antibody (pANCA); calprotectin; a cytokine such asvascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), C-reactive protein (CRP),interleukin-6 (IL-6), or tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF-α); anadhesion molecule such as intracellular adhesion molecule (ICAM) (e.g.,ICAM-1) or vascular adhesion molecule (VCAM) (e.g., VCAM-1); or serumamyloid A (SAA).

Photosensitizers that are to be excited by light will be relativelyphotostable and will not react efficiently with singlet oxygen. Severalstructural features are present in most useful sensitizers. Mostsensitizers have at least one and frequently three or more conjugateddouble or triple bonds held in a rigid, frequently aromatic structure.They will frequently contain at least one group that acceleratesintersystem crossing such as a carbonyl or imine group or a heavy atomselected from rows 3-6 of the periodic table, especially iodine orbromine, or they may have extended aromatic structures. Typicalsensitizers include acetone, benzophenone, 9-thioxanthone, eosin,9,10-dibromoanthracene, methylene blue, metallo-porphyrins, such ashematoporphyrin, phthalocyanines, chlorophylls, rose bengal,buckminsterfullerene, etc., and derivatives of these compounds havingsubstituents of 1 to 50 atoms for rendering such compounds morelipophilic or more hydrophilic and/or as attaching groups forattachment. Examples of other photosensitizers that may be utilized inthe present invention are those that have the above properties and areenumerated in N. J. Turro, “Molecular Photochemistry,” page 132, W. A.Benjamin Inc., N.Y. 1965.

In some embodiments, the photosensitizers are relatively non-polar toassure dissolution into a lipophilic member when the photosensitizer isincorporated in an oil droplet, liposome, latex particle, etc.

In some embodiments, the photosensitizers suitable for use hereininclude other substances and compositions that can produce singletoxygen with or without activation by an external light source. Thus, forexample, molybdate (MoO₄ ^(═)) salts and chloroperoxidase andmyeloperoxidase plus bromide or chloride ion (Kanofsky, J. Biol. Chem.(1983) 259 5596) have been shown to catalyze the conversion of hydrogenperoxide to singlet oxygen and water. Either of these compositions can,for example, be included in particles and used in the assay methodwherein hydrogen peroxide is included as an ancillary reagebly,chloroperoxidase is bound to a surface and molybdate is incorporated inthe aqueous phase of a liposome. Also included within the scope of theinvention as photosensitizers are compounds that are not truesensitizers but which on excitation by heat, light, or chemicalactivation will release a molecule of singlet oxygen. The best knownmembers of this class of compounds includes the endoperoxides such as1,4-biscarboxyethyl-1,4-naphthalene endoperoxide,9,10-diphenylanthracene-9,10-endoperoxide and 5,6,11,12-tetraphenylnaphthalene 5,12-endoperoxide. Heating or direct absorption of light bythese compounds releases singlet oxygen.

A chemiluminescent compound is a substance that undergoes a chemicalreaction with singlet oxygen to form a metastable intermediate that candecompose with the simultaneous or subsequent emission of light withinthe wavelength range of 250 to 1200 nm. Exemplary chemiluminescentcompounds suitable for use in the present application include thosedescribed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,251,581 and 7,709,273, and PatentCooperatio Treaty (PCT) International Application Publication No.WO1999/042838. Examplery chemiluminescent compound includes thefollowing:

Chemiluminescer Half-Life Emission Max Thioxene + Diphenyl anthracence:0.6 seconds 430 nm Thioxene + Umbelliferone derivative 0.6 seconds 500nm Thioxene + Europium chelate 0.6 seconds 615 nm Thioxene + SamariumChelate 0.6 seconds 648 nm Thioxene + terbium Chelate 0.6 seconds 540 nmN-Phenyl Oxazine + Umbelliferone  30 seconds 500 nm derivative N-PhenylOxazine + Europium chelate  30 seconds 613 nm N-phenyl Oxazine +Samarium Chelate  30 seconds 648 nm N-phenyl Oxazine + terbium Chelate 30 seconds 540 nm Dioxene + Umbelliferone derivative 300 seconds  500nm Dioxene + Europium chelate 300 seconds  613 nm Dioxene + SamariumChelate 300 seconds  648 nm N-phenyl Oxazine + terbium Chelate 300seconds  540 nm

All of the above mentioned applications are herey expressly incorporatedby reference herein in their entireties. Emission will usually occurwithout the presence of an energy acceptor or catalyst to causedecomposition and light emission. In some embodiments, the intermediatedecomposes spontaneously without heating or addition of ancillaryreagents following its formation. However, addition of a reagent afterformation of the intermediate or the use of elevated temperature toaccelerate decomposition can be desirable for some chemiluminescentcompounds. The chemiluminescent compounds are usually electron richcompounds that react with singlet oxygen, frequently with formation ofdioxetanes or dioxetanones. Exemplary of such compounds are enol ethers,enamines, 9-alkylidenexanthans, 9-alkylidene-N-alkylacridans, aryl vinylethers, dioxenes, arylimidazoles and lucigenin. Other chemiluminescentcompounds give intermediates upon reaction with singlet oxygen, whichsubsequently react with another reagent with light emission. Exemplarycompounds are hydrazides such as luminol and oxalate esters.

The chemiluminescent compounds of interest will generally emit atwavelengths above 300 nanometers and usually above 400 nm. Compoundsthat alone or together with a fluorescent molecule emit light atwavelengths beyond the region where serum components absorb light willbe of particular use in the present invention. The fluorescence of serumdrops off rapidly above 500 nm and becomes relatively unimportant above550 nm. Therefore, when the analyte is in serum, chemiluminescentcompounds that emit light above 550 nm, e.g., above 600 nm may besuitable for use. In order to avoid autosensitization of thechemiluminescent compound, in some embodiments, the chemiluminescentcompounds do not absorb light used to excite the photosensitizer. Insome embodiments, the sensitizer is excited with light wavelengthslonger than 500 nm, it will therefore be desirable that light absorptionby the chemiluminescent compound be very low above 500 nm.

Where long wavelength emission from the chemiluminescent compound isdesired, a long wavelength emitter such as a pyrene, bound to thechemiluminescent compound can be used. Alternatively, a fluorescentmolecule can be included in the medium containing the chemiluminescentcompound. In some embodiments, fluorescent molecules will be excited bythe activated chemiluminescent compound and emit at a wavelength longerthan the emission wavelength of the chemiluminescent compound, usuallygreater that 550 nm. It is usually also desirable that the fluorescentmolecules do not absorb at the wavelengths of light used to activate thephotosensitizer. Examples of useful dyes include rhodamine, ethidium,dansyl, Eu(fod)₃, Eu(TTA)₃, Ru(bpy)₃ ⁺⁺ (wherein bpy=2,2′-dipyridyl,etc. In general these dyes act as acceptors in energy transfer processesand in some embodiments, have high fluorescent quantum yields and do notreact rapidly with singlet oxygen. They can be incorporated intoparticles simultaneously with the incorporation of the chemiluminescentcompound into the particles.

In general, the particles are at least about 20 nm and not more thanabout 20 microns, usually at least about 40 nm and less than about 10microns, e.g., from about 0.10 to 2.0 microns diameter, normally havinga volume of less than 1 picoliter. Exemplary particles (including bothdonor and acceptor particles) suitable for use in the presentapplication include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,251,581, and7,709,273, and PCT International Publication No. WO1999/042838—which arehereby expressly incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.In some embodiments, a particle as used herein may be a bead make ofsuitable material. The particle (e.g., a bead) may be organic orinorganic, swellable or non-swellable, porous or non-porous, having anydensity, but in some embodiments, of a density approximating water,generally from about 0.7 to about 1.5 g/ml, may be suspendible in water,and composed of material that can be transparent, partially transparent,or opaque. The particles may or may not have a charge, and when they arecharged, in some embodiments, they are negative. The particles may besolid (e.g., polymer, metal, glass, organic and inorganic such asminerals, salts and diatoms), oil droplets (e.g., hydrocarbon,fluorocarbon, silicon fluid), or vesicles (e.g., synthetic such asphospholipid or natural such as cells and organelles). The particles maybe latex particles or other particles included of organic or inorganicpolymers; lipid bilayers, e.g., liposomes, phospholipid vesicles; oildroplets; silicon particles; metal sols; cells; and dye crystallites.

The organic particles will normally be polymers, either addition orcondensation polymers, which are readily dispersible in the assaymedium. The organic particles will also be adsorptive orfunctionalizable so as to bind at their surface, either directly orindirectly, an analyte-binding agent and to bind at their surface orincorporate within their volume a photosensitizer or a chemiluminescentcompound.

The particles can be derived from naturally occurring materials,naturally occurring materials which are synthetically modified andsynthetic materials. Natural or synthetic assemblies such as lipidbilayers, e.g., liposomes and non-phospholipid vesicles, are suitablefor use herein. Among organic polymers of particular interest arepolysaccharides, particularly cross-linked polysaccharides, such asagarose, which is available as SEPHAROSE® (Pharmacia Biotech), dextran,available as SEPHADEX® (Pharmacia Biotech) and SEPHACRYL® (PharmaciaBiotech), cellulose, starch, and the like; addition polymers, such aspolystyrene, polyacrylamide, homopolymers and copolymers of derivativesof acrylate and methacrylate, particularly esters and amides having freehydroxyl functionalities including hydrogels, and the like. Inorganicpolymers include silicones, glasses, available as Bioglas, and the like.Sols include gold, selenium, and other metals. Particles may also bedispersed water insoluble dyes such as porphyrins, phthalocyanines,etc., which may also act as photosensitizers. Particles may also includediatoms, cells, viral particles, magnetosomes, cell nuclei and the like.

Where the particles are commercially available, the particle size may bevaried by breaking larger particles into smaller particles by mechanicalmeans, such as grinding, sonication, agitation, etc.

In some embodiments, the particles are polyfunctional or are capable ofbeing polyfunctionalized or are capable of being bound or coupled to orassociated with an analyte-binding agent, photosensitizer, orchemiluminescent compound through specific or non-specific covalent ornon-covalent interactions. A wide variety of functional groups areavailable or can be incorporated. Exemplary functional groups includecarboxylic acids, aldehydes, amino groups, cyano groups, ethylenegroups, hydroxyl groups, mercapto groups and the like. When covalentattachment of an analyte-binding agent, chemiluminescent compound orphotosensitizer to the particle is employed, the manner of linking iswell known and is amply illustrated in the literature. See for exampleCautrecasas, J. Biol, Chem., 245:3059 (1970). The length of a linkinggroup may vary widely, depending upon the nature of the compound beinglinked, the nature of the particle, the effect of the distance betweenthe compound being linked and the particle on the binding ofanalyte-binding agents and the analyte and the like.

The photosensitizer and/or chemiluminescent compound can be chosen todissolve in or noncovalently bind to the surface of the particles. Insome embodiments, these compounds may be hydrophobic to reduce theirability to dissociate from the particle and thereby cause both compoundsto associate with the same particle. This possibly can be furtherreduced by utilizing particles of only one composition that areassociated with either the photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compoundor by using two types of particles that differ in composition so as tofavor association of the photosensitizer with one type of particle andassociation of the chemiluminescent compound with the other type ofparticle.

The number of photosensitizer or chemiluminescent molecules associatedwith each particle will on the average usually be at least one and maybe sufficiently high that the particle consists entirely ofphotosensitizer or chemiluminescer molecules. In some embodiments, thenumber of molecules will be selected empirically to provide the highestsignal to background in the assay. In some cases this will be bestachieved by associating a multiplicity of different photosensitizermolecules to particles. In some embodiments, the photosensitizer orchemiluminescent compound to analyte-binding agent ratio in theparticles should be at least 1, such as at least 100 to 1 up to over1,000 to 1.

Generally, oil droplets are fluid particles included of a lipophiliccompound coated and stabilized with an emulsifier that is an amphiphilicmolecule such as, for example, phospholipids, sphingomyelin, albumin andthe like.

The phospholipids are based upon aliphatic carboxylic acid esters ofaliphatic polyols, where at least one hydroxylic group is substitutedwith a carboxylic acid ester of from about 8 to 36, more usually of fromabout 10 to 20 carbon atoms, which may have from 0 to 3, more usuallyfrom 0 to 1 site of ethylenic unsaturation and at least 1, normally only1, hydroxyl group substituted with phosphate to form a phosphate ester.The phosphate group may be further substituted with small aliphaticcompounds which are of di or higher functionality, generally havinghydroxyl or amino groups.

The oil droplets can be made in accordance with conventional proceduresby combining the appropriate lipophilic compounds with a surfactant,anionic, cationic or nonionic, where the surfactant is present in fromabout 0.1 to 5, more usually from about 0.1 to 2 weight percent of themixture and subjecting the mixture in an aqueous medium to agitation,such as sonication or vortexing. Illustrative lipophilic compoundsinclude hydrocarbon oils, halocarbons including fluorocarbons, alkylphthalates, trialkyl phosphates, triglycerides, etc.

An analyte-binding agent will usually be adsorbed to the surface of theoil droplet or bonded directly or indirectly to a surface component ofthe oil droplet. The analyte-binding agent may be incorporated into theliquid particles either during or after the preparation of the liquidparticles. The analyte-binding agent will normally be present in fromabout 0.5 to 100, about 1 to 90, about 5 to 80 and about 50 to 100 molepercent of the molecules present on the surface of the particle.

The following is a list, by way of illustration and not limitation, ofamphiphilic compounds, which may be utilized for stabilizing oildroplets: phosphatidyl ethanolamine, phosphatidyl choline, phosphatidylserine, dimyristoylphosphatidyl choline, egg phosphatidyl choline,diapalmitoylphosphatidyl choline, phosphatidic acid, cardiolipin,lecithin, galactocerebroside, sphingomyelin, dicetylphosphate,phosphatidyl inositol, 2-trihexadecylammoniumethylamine,1,3-bis(octadecylphosphate)-propanol, stearoyloxyethylene phosphate,phospholipids, dialkylphosphates, sodium dodecyl sulfate, cationicdetergents, anionic detergents, proteins such as albumin, non-ionicdetergents, etc.

Other compounds may also be used which have lipophilic groups and whichhave been described previously. For the most part, these compounds willbe alkylbenzenes, having alkyl groups of from 6 to 20 carbon atoms,usually mixtures of alkyl groups, which may be straight or branchedchain, and having a carboxyl group, an hydroxylic group, a polyoxyalkylene group (alkylene of from 2 to 3 carbon atoms), carboxylic group,sulfonic acid group, or amino group. Aliphatic fatty acids may be usedwhich will normally be of from about 10 to 36, more usually of fromabout 12 to 20 carbon atoms. Also, fatty alcohols having the carbonlimits indicated for the fatty acids, fatty amines of similar carbonlimitations and various steroids may also find use.

The oil droplets can include a fluorocarbon oil or a silicone oil(silicon particle). Such droplets are described by Giaever in U.S. Pat.Nos. 4,634,681 and 4,619,904, each of is incorporated by referenceherein in its entirety. These droplets are formed by dispersing afluorocarbon oil or silicone oil in an aqueous phase. The droplets areprepared by placing a small amount of the selected oil (generally, suchoils are commercially available) in a container with a larger amount ofthe aqueous phase. The liquid system is subjected to agitation to bringabout emulsification and then centrifuged. The homogeneous phase isremoved and the residual droplets are resuspended in an aqueous bufferedmedium. The above centrifugation and decantation steps can be repeatedone or more times before the droplets are utilized.

Analyte-binding agents can be bound to the droplets in a number of ways.As described by Giaever, the particular analyte-binding agents,particularly a proteinoceous analyte-binding agent, can be coated on thedroplets by introducing an excess of the analyte-binding agent into theaqueous medium prior to or after the emulsification step. Washing stepsare desirable to remove excess analyte-binding agent. Functionalizationof the oil introduces functionalities described above for linking toanalyte-binding agents. Such functionalities can also be employed tolink the droplets to a photosensitizer or a chemiluminescent compound.On the other hand, the photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound willfrequently be chosen to be soluble in the oil phase of the oil dropletand will not be covalently bound. When the oil is a fluorocarbon, afluorinated photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound will often bemore soluble than the corresponding unfluorinated derivation. Other oildroplets described by Giaever also find use in the present invention.

In general, liposomes are microvesicles of approximately spherical shapeand are one of the materials for use in the present invention. Theliposomes have a diameter that is at least about 20 nm and not more thanabout 20 microns, usually at least about 40 nm and less than about 10microns. In some embodiments, the diameter of the liposomes will be lessthan about two microns so as to limit settling or floatation.

The outer shell of a liposome consists of an amphiphilic bilayer thatencloses a volume of water or an aqueous solution. Liposomes with morethan one bilayer are referred to as multilamellar vesicles. Liposomeswith only one bilayer are called unilamellar vesicles. Multilamellarvesicles are suitable for use in the present invention when using alipophilic photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound because of theirability to incorporate larger quantities of these materials thanunilamellar vesicles. The amphiphilic bilayer is frequently included ofphospholipids. Phospholipids employed in preparing particles utilizablein the present invention can be any phospholipid or phospholipid mixturefound in natural membranes including lecithin, or synthetic glycerylphosphate diesters of saturated or unsaturated 12-carbon or 24-carbonlinear fatty acids wherein the phosphate can be present as a monoester,or as an ester of a polar alcohol such as ethanolamine, choline,inositol, serine, glycerol and the like. Suitable phospholipids include,but are not limited to, L-α-palmitoyl oleoyl-phosphatidylcholine (POPC),palmitoyl oleoylphosphatidyl-glycerol (POPG),L-α-dioleoylphosphatidylglycerol, L-a(dioleoyl)-phosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE) and L-α(dioleoyl)-phosphatidylβ-(4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-cyclohexane-1-carboxyamido)ethanol (DOPE-MCC).

The phospholipids in the bilayer may be supplemented with cholesteroland may be replaced with other amphiphilic compounds that have a polarhead group, usually charged, and a hydrophobic portion usually includedof two linear hydrocarbon chains. Examples of such substituents includedialkylphosphate, dialkoxypropylphosphates wherein the alkyl groups havelinear chains of 12-20 carbon atoms,N-(2,3-di(9-(Z)-octa-decenyloxy))-prop-1-yl-N,N,N,-trimethyl-ammoniumchloride (DOTMA), as disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.811,146 filed on Dec. 19, 1985, which is hereby incorporated herein byreference, sphingomyelin, cardiolipin, and the like.

In some embodiments, liposomes utilized in the present invention have ahigh negative charge density to stabilize the suspension and to preventspontaneous aggregation.

For use in the present invention the liposomes should be capable ofbinding to an analyte-binding agent and be capable of having aphotosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound associated with either theaqueous or the nonaqueous phase. The liposomes utilized in the presentinvention will usually have analyte-binding agents bound to the outersurface of the lipid vesicle.

Liposomes may be produced by a variety of methods including hydrationand mechanical dispersion of dried phospholipid or phospholipidsubstitute in an aqueous solution. Liposomes prepared in this mannerhave a variety of dimensions, compositions and behaviors. One method ofreducing the heterogeneity and inconsistency of behavior of mechanicallydispersed liposomes is by sonication. Such a method decreases theaverage liposome size. Alternatively, extrusion is usable as a finalstep during the production of the liposomes. U.S. Pat. No. 4,529,561(which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety) discloses amethod of extruding liposomes under pressure through a uniform pore-sizemembrane to improve size uniformity.

Preparation of liposomes containing a hydrophobic or amphiphilicphotosensitizer or a chemiluminescent compound dissolved in the lipidbilayer can be carried out in a variety of methods, including a methoddescribed by Olsen, et al., Biochemica et Biophysica Acta, 557(9), 1979.Briefly, a mixture of lipids containing the appropriate compound in anorganic solvent such as chloroform is dried to a thin film on the wallsof a glass vessel. The lipid film is hydrated in an appropriate bufferby shaking or vortexing. Thereafter, the lipid suspension is extrudedthrough a series of polycarbonate filter membranes having successivelysmaller pore sizes, for example, 2.0, 1.0, 0.8, 0.6, 0.4, and 0.2microns. Repeated filtration through any of the filters, and inparticular through the smallest filter, is desirable. The liposomes canbe purified by, for example, gel filtration, such as through a column ofSEPHACRYL® S-1000 (Pharmacia Biotech). The column can be eluted withbuffer and the liposomes collected. Storage in the cold prolongsshelf-life of the liposomes produced by this method. Alternatively thephotosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound can be added to the liquidsuspension following preparation of the liposomes.

Labeling of droplets and liposomes will often involve, for example,inclusion of thiol or maleimide or biotin groups on the moleculesincluding the lipid bilayer. Photosensitizers, chemiluminescentmolecules or analyte-binding agents may then be bound to the surface byreaction of the particles with one of these materials that is bound to asulfhydryl reactive reagent, a sulfhydryl group, or avidin,respectively. Sulfhydryl reactive groups include alkylating reagentssuch as bromoacetamide and maleimide.

Analyte-binding agents can be attracted to the surface of the liposomeparticles by weak hydrophobic interactions, however such interactionsare not generally sufficient to withstand the shear force encounteredduring incubation and washing. It is possible to covalently bondanalyte-binding agents to a liposome particle that has beenfunctionalized, for example by use of DOPE-MCC, as shown above, bycombining said liposome with the selected analyte-binding agentfunctionalized with a mercaptan group. For example, if theanalyte-binding agent is an antibody, it may be reacted withS-acetyl-mercaptosuccinic anhydride (SAMSA) and hydrolyzed to provide asulfhydryl modified antibody.

Generally, latex signifies a particulate water suspendible waterinsoluble polymeric material usually having particle dimensions of 20 nmto 20 μm, e.g., 100 to 1000 nm in diameter. The latex is frequently asubstituted polyethylene such as: polystyrene-butadiene, polyacrylamidepolystyrene, polystyrene with amino groups, poly-acrylic acid,polymethacrylic acid, acrylonitrile-butadiene, styrene copolymers,polyvinyl acetate-acrylate, polyvinyl pyrridine, vinyl-chloride acrylatecopolymers, and the like. Non-crosslinked polymers of styrene andcarboxylated styrene or styrene functionalized with other active groupssuch as amino, hydroxyl, halo and the like are suitable for use herein.In some embodiments, copolymers of substituted styrenes with dienes suchas butadiene will be used.

The association of the photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound withlatex particles utilized in the present invention may involveincorporation during formation of the particles by polymerization butwill usually involve incorporation into preformed particles, usually bynoncovalent dissolution into the particles. Usually a solution of thechemiluminescent compound or sensitizer will be employed. Solvents thatmay be utilized include alcohols, including ethanol, ethylene glycol andbenzyl alcohol; amides such as dimethyl formamide, formamide, acetamideand tetramethyl urea and the like; sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxideand sulfolane; and ethers such as carbitol, ethyl carbitol, dimethoxyethane and the like, and water. The use of solvents having high boilingpoints in which the particles are insoluble permits the use of elevatedtemperatures to facilitate dissolution of the compounds into theparticles and are particularly suitable. The solvents may be used singlyor in combination. In some embodiments, solvents for incorporatingphotosensitizer are those that will not quench the triplet excited stateof the photosensitizer either because of their intrinsic properties orbecause they can subsequently be removed from the particles by virtue oftheir ability to be dissolved in a solvent such as water that isinsoluble in the particles. Aromatic solvents are also suitable for useherein, such as solvents that are soluble in the particle. Forincorporating chemiluminescent compounds in particles a solvent shouldbe selected that does not interfere with the luminescence because oftheir intrinsic properties or ability to be removed from the particles.In some embodiments, aromatic solvents may be used. Typical aromaticsolvents include dibutylphthalate, benzonitrile, naphthonitrile,dioctylterephthalate, dichlorobenzene, diphenylether, dimethoxybenzene,etc.

Except when the photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound is to becovalently bound to the particles, it may be suitable to useelectronically neutral photosensitizers or chemiluminescent compounds.In some embodiments, the liquid medium selected does not soften thepolymer beads to the point of stickiness. One technique includessuspending the selected latex particles in a liquid medium in which thephotosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound has at least limitedsolubility. In some embodiments, the concentrations of thephotosensitizer and chemiluminescent compound in the liquid media willbe selected to provide particles that have the highest efficiency ofsinglet oxygen formation and highest quantum yield of emission from thechemiluminescent compound in the media but less concentrated solutionswill sometimes be used. Distortion or dissolution of the particles inthe solvent can be prevented by adding a miscible cosolvent in which theparticles are insoluble.

Generally, the temperature employed during the procedure will be chosento maximize the singlet oxygen formation ability of the photosensitizerlabeled particles and the quantum yield of the chemiluminescent compoundparticles with the proviso that the particles should not melt or becomeaggregated at the selected temperature. Elevated temperatures arenormally employed. The temperatures for the procedure will generallyrange from 20° C. to 200° C., more usually from 50° C. to 170° C. It hasbeen observed that some compounds that are nearly insoluble at roomtemperature are soluble in, for example, low molecular weight alcohols,such as ethanol and ethylene glycol and the like, at elevatedtemperatures. Carboxylated modified latex particles have been shown totolerate low molecular weight alcohols at such temperatures.

An analyte-binding agent may be physically adsorbed on the surface ofthe latex particle or may be covalently bonded to the particle. In caseswherein the analyte-binding agent is only weakly bound to the surface ofthe latex particle, the binding may in certain cases be unable to endureparticle-to-particle shear forces encountered during incubation andwashings. Therefore, it may be suitable to covalently bondanalyte-binding agents to the latex particles under conditions that willminimize adsorption. This may be accomplished by chemically activatingthe surface of the latex. For example, the N-hydroxysuccinimide ester ofsurface carboxyl groups can be formed and the activated particles toreduce nonspecific binding of assay components to the particle surfaceare then contacted with a linker having amino groups that will reactwith the ester groups or directly with an analyte-binding agent that hasan amino group. The linker will usually be selected to reducenonspecific binding of assay components to the particle surface and willin some embodiments, provide suitable functionality for both attachmentto the latex particle and attachment of the analyte-binding agent.Suitable materials include maleimidated aminodextran (MAD), polylysine,aminosaccharides, and the like. MAD can be prepared as described byHubert, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 75(7), 3143, 1978.

In one method, MAD is first attached to carboxyl-containing latexparticles using a water soluble carbodiimide, for example,1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide. The coated particles arethen equilibrated in reagents to prevent nonspecific binding. Suchreagents include proteins such as bovine gamma globulin (BGG), anddetergent, such as Tween® 20, (ICI Americas, Inc.) TRITON X-100® (Rohmand Haas Company) and the like. xAn analyte-binding agent having asulfhydryl group, or suitably modified to introduce a sulfhydryl group,is then added to a suspension of the particles, whereupon a covalentbond is formed between the analyte-binding agent and the MAD on theparticles. Any excess unreacted analyte-binding agent can then beremoved by washing.

In general, metal sols are particles included of a heavy metal, i.e., ametal of atomic number greater than 20 such as a Group IB metal, e.g.,gold or silver or chalcogens such as selenium or tellurium.

Metal sol particles are described, for example, by Leuvering in U.S.Pat. No. 4,313,734, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein byreference in its entirety. Such sols include colloidal aqueousdispersion of a metal, metal compound, or polymer nuclei coated with ametal or metal compound.

The metal sols may be of metals or metal compounds, such as metaloxides, metal hydroxides and metal salts or of polymer nuclei coatedwith metals or metal compounds. Examples of such metals are platinum,gold, silver mercury, lead, palladium, and copper, and of such metalcompounds are silver iodide, silver bromide, copper hydrous oxide, ironoxide, iron hydroxide or hydrous oxide, aluminum hydroxide or hydrousoxide, chromium hydroxide or hydrous oxide, vanadium oxide, arsenicsulphide, manganese hydroxide, lead sulphide, mercury sulphide, bariumsulphate and titanium dioxide. In general, the metals or metal compoundsuseful may be readily demonstrated by means of known techniques.

In some embodiments, it may advantageous to use sols included ofdispersed particles consisting of polymer nuclei coated with the abovementioned metals or metal compounds. These particles have similarproperties as the dispersed phase of pure metals or metal compounds, butsize, density and metal contact can be optimally combined.

The metal sol particles may be prepared in a large number of ways whichare in themselves known. For example, for the preparation of a gold solLeuvering refers to an article by G. Frens in Nature Physical Science241, 20 (1973).

The metal sol particles can be modified to contain various functionalgroups as described above for linking to an analyte-binding agent or aphotosensitizer or a chemiluminescent compound. For example, polymericbonding agents can be used to coat the particles such as polymerscontaining thiol groups that bond strongly to many heavy metals orsilylating agents that can bond and form polymeric coatings as, forexample, by reaction of metal particles with trialkoxy aminoalkylsilanesas described in EPO Patent Appl. 84400952.2 by Advanced Magnetics forcoating magnetic particles.

Generally, dye crystallites are microcrystals of pure or mixed solidwater insoluble dyes, such as those described herein. The dyecrystallites useful in the present invention have a size range of 20 nmto 20 μm.

One method for preparing dye crystallites is described in U.S. Pat. No.4,373,932 (Gribnau, et al.), the disclosure of which is incorporatedherein by reference in its entirety. Gribnau describes colloidal dyeparticles and aqueous dispersions of a hydrophobic dye or pigment, whichmay have an immunochemically reactive component directly or indirectlyattached. The dye particles are prepared in general by dispersing a dyein water and then centrifuging. A dye pellet is obtained and resuspendedin water, to which glass beads are added. This suspension is rolled forseveral days at room temperature. The liquid is decanted andcentrifuged, and the dye particles are obtained after aspiration of theliquid.

Another method for preparing dye crystallites is by slow addition of asolution of the dye in a water miscible solvent to water. Another methodis by sonication of a suspension of the solid dye in water.

Binding of analyte-binding agents to the dye particles can be achievedby direct or indirect adsorption or covalent chemical attachment. Thelatter is governed by the presence of suitable functional groups in anycoating material and in the dye. For example, functional groups can beintroduced onto the surface of a dye crystallite by coupling a compoundcontaining a diazotized aromatic amino group and the desired functionalgroup to a phenolic or anilino group of the dye.

Where the dye has a carboxyl group, the dye crystallite can be activatedby a carbodiimide and coupled to a primary amino component. Aliphaticprimary amino groups and hydroxyl groups can be activated, for example,by cyanogen bromide or halogen-substituted di- or tri-azines, afterwhich attachment with a primary amino component or with, for example, acomponent containing a —SH, or —OH or group can take place. Use can alsobe made of bifunctional reactive compounds. For example, glutaraldehydecan be used for the mutual coupling of primary amino components of thedye and an analyte-binding agent, and, for example, ahetero-bifunctional reagent such as N-succinimidyl 3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionate can be employed for the coupling of a primary amino componentto a component containing a thiol group.

In some embodiments, the composition for use in the ingestible devicesof the present application further includes a medium having suspendedtherein said plurality of donor particles and said plurality of acceptorparticles. In some embodiments, the medium is an aqueous medium. In someembodiments, the aqueous medium has a pH selected from 5-8 (e.g., a pHselected from 6-7.8, such as pH being 6.0). The standard buffer was 50mM sodium phosphate/0.15 M NaCl, pH 7.0. St.Av Donar beads are incubatedin lum HABA ((2-(4-HYDROXYPHENYLAZO)BENZOIC ACID) before depositing themon the pad. The assay buffer was 0.1 M Tris' HCl/0.3 M NaCi/bovine serumalbumin (1 mg/ml), pH 8.2.with 50 mM hydroxyl propyl cyclodextrin andtween-20-0.1%.

Suitable acceptor particles for use in the ingestible devices of thisapplication may be any type of particles as described herein. In someembodiments, the acceptor particles are selected from the groupconsisting of latex particles, lipid bilayers, oil droplets, silicaparticles, and metal sols. In some embodiments, the acceptor particlesare latex particles, such as, but not limited Polystyrene latexparticles (175 nm) having about 8.3 carboxyl groups per nm² of surface,and/or the like.

Suitable chemiluminescent compounds for use in the ingestible devices ofthis application include those chemiluminescent compounds or substancesas described in PCT International Publication No. WO1999042838 A1 (Table1); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,709,273. In some embodiments, thechemiluminescent compounds are selected from the group consisting ofexample chemiluminescent compounds described in PCT InternationalPublication No. WO1999042838 A1 (Table 1); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,709,273.The above mentioned applications are hereby expressly incorporated byreference in their entireties.

Suitable donor particles for use in the ingestible devices of thisapplication may be any type of particles as described herein. In someembodiments, the donor particles are selected from the group consistingof latex particles, lipid bilayers, oil droplets, silica particles, andmetal sols. In some embodiments, the donor particles are latexparticles, such as, but not limited to Polystyrene latex particles (175nm) having about 8.3 carboxyl groups per nm² of surface. Latex particlescan vary between 175 nm to 800 nm. In some embodiments, the donorparticles are latex particles (e.g., any type of latex particlesdescribed herein) that are coated with streptavidin.

Suitable photosensitizers for use in the ingestible devices of thisapplication include any of the photosensitizers as described U.S. Pat.Nos. 6,251,581, 5,516,636, 8,907,081, 6,545,012, 6,331,530, 8,247,180,5,763,602, 5,705,622, 5,516,636, 7,217,531, and U.S. Patent PublicationNo. 2007/0059316. In some embodiments, the photosensitizers are selectedfrom the group consisting of t-Bultyl Silicon Pthalocyanine,Chlorophyll, and Silicon Napthalo cyanine.

The photosensitizer and chemiluminescent compound can be incorporatedinto donor and acceptor particles, respectively, by virtue of beingsoluble in at least one phase of the particles, in which case thephotosensitizer and chemiluminescent compound will be at much higherconcentration within the particle than in the bulk assay medium. Whenthe photosensitizer and chemiluminescent compound are covalently boundto donor and acceptor particles, respectively, the photosensitizer andchemiluminescent compound or the particles, or components thereof, arefunctionalized to provide a means of attaching the photosensitizer andchemiluminescent compounds and the particles. Example ways toincorporate photosensitier and chemiluminescent compounds in latexparticles can be found in PCT International Publication No.WO1999/042838 and U.S. Pat. No. 7,709,273. For particles that are oildroplets or liposomes the photosensitizer and chemiluminescent compoundcan be attached to one or more long hydrocarbon chains, each generallyhaving at least 10 to 30 carbon atoms. If the particles are droplets ofa fluorocarbon, the photosensitizer or chemiluminescent compoundincorporated into these particles may be fluorinated to enhancesolubility and reduce exchange into other particles bound with the otherlabel, and the hydrocarbon chain used for linking will preferably bereplaced with a fluorocarbon chain. For silicon fluid particles thephotosensitizer and chemiluminescent compound can be bound to apolysiloxane. In order to maximize the number of photosensitizer orchemiluminescent compound molecules per particle, in some embodiments,it may be desirable to minimize the charge and polarity of thephotosensitizer or chemiluminescent compound so that it resides withinthe non-aqueous portion of the particle. When the particle is a liposomeand it is desired to retain the photosensitizer or chemiluminescentcompound in the aqueous phase of the liposome, in some embodiments,photosensitizers or chemiluminescent compounds that are highly polar orcharged may be used.

In some embodiments, the ratio of the number of donor particles to thenumber of the acceptor particles ranges from 10:1 to 1:10. In someembodiments, the ratio of the number of donor particles to the number ofthe acceptor particles ranges from 5:1 to 1:10. In some embodiments, theratio of the number of donor particles to the number of the acceptorparticles ranges from 5:1 to 10:1.

Suitable analytes to be detected, quantified, or measured by theingestible devices of this application include any of the analytes asdescribed herein. In some embodiments, the analyte is selected from thegroup consisting of proteins, peptides, cell surface receptors, receptorligands, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, cells, microorganisms, andfragments thereof. In some embodiments, the analyte is selected from thegroup consisting of TNFα, lipoteichoic acid (LTA), lipopolysaccharide(LPS), lipopolysaccharide binding protein (LBP), calprotectin, cytokinesand chemokines, IL12/23, IL-6, IL-10, MADCAM, α4β7 integrin, HGF, EGF,HB-EGF, TGFb, Adalimumab, Infliximab, Cimzia, Vedolizumab, Tysabri,Simponi, Remsima, bevacizumab (Avastin), and cetuximab (Erbitux).

The first analyte-binding agent coupled to or associated with the donorparticles and the second analyte-binding agent coupled to or associatedwith the acceptor particles are capable of binding to the same analyte.The analyte, when present, therefore affects the amount of thephotosensitizer of the donor particles and the chemiluminescent compoundof the acceptor particles that can come into close proximity, whereinthe short-lived singlet oxygen generated by the photosensitizer canreact with the chemiluminescent compound prior to its spontaneous decayand upon reaction, the chemiluminescent compound produces luminescence.The intensity of luminescence produced is related to the amount ofanalyte in the sample. The chemiluminescent compound is capable ofactivation by singlet oxygen, and the photosensitizer catalyzes theformation of singlet oxygen usually in response to photoexcitationfollowed by energy transfer to molecular oxygen.

In some embodiments, an analyte causes molecules of the photosensitizerand the chemiluminescent compound to be closer to each other than theiraverage distance in the bulk solution of the assay medium. Thispartitioning will depend upon the amount of analyte present in thesample to be analyzed. The photosensitizer molecules that do not becomeassociated with the chemiluminescent compound produce singlet oxygenthat is unable to reach the chemiluminescent compound before undergoingdecay in the aqueous medium. However, when the photosensitizer and thechemiluminescent compound come in close proximity with each other inresponse to the amount of the analyte, the singlet oxygen produced uponirradiation of the photosensitizer can activate the chemiluminescentcompound before undergoing decay.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent coupled to orassociated with the donor particles and the second analyte-binding agentcoupled to or associated with the acceptor particles are independentlyselected from the group consisting of antibodies, aptamers, cell surfacereceptors, receptor ligands, biotin, streptavidin, avidin, protein A, G,and L, and derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the firstanalyte-binding agent is the same as the second analyte-binding agent.In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent is different fromthe second analyte-binding agent. In some embodiments, the firstanalyte-binding agent is an antibody or a derivative thereof (e.g., abiotinylated antibody). In some embodiments, the second analyte-bindingagent is an antibody or a derivative thereof (e.g., a biotinylatedantibody). In some embodiments, the second analyte-binding agent is anantibody covalently conjugated to the acceptor particles. In someembodiments, the first analyte-binding agent is a biotinylated antibodyand the donor particles are coated with streptavidin. In someembodiments, the first analyte-binding agent is a biotinylated antibodyand the donor particles are coated with streptavidin, and the secondanalyte-binding agent is an antibody covalently conjugated to theacceptor particles.

In some embodiments, the first analyte-binding agent coupled to orassociated with the donor particles is an antibody selected from thegroup consisting of anti-bacterial antibodies. In some embodiments, theantibody is selected from the group consisting of anti-Gram positivebacteria antibodies, anti-Gram positive bacteria LTA antibodies,anti-Gram negative bacteria antibodies, anti-lipoteichoic acidantibodies, anti-E. coli antibodies, anti-lipid A antibodies, anti-TNFαantibodies, and derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the antibodyis selected from the group consisting of MA1-7401 antibody, MA1-40134antibody, ab127996 antibody, ab35654 antibody, ab35654 antibody,ab137967 antibody, ab8467 antibody, and derivatives or fragmentsthereof.

In some embodiments, the second analyte-binding agent coupled to orassociated with the acceptor particles is an antibody selected from thegroup consisting of anti-bacterial antibodies. In some embodiments, theantibody is selected from the group consisting of anti-Gram positivebacteria antibodies, anti-Gram positive bacteria LTA antibodies,anti-Gram negative bacteria antibodies, anti-lipoteichoic acidantibodies, anti-E. coli antibodies, anti-lipid A antibodies, anti-TNFαantibodies, and derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the antibodyis selected from the group consisting of MA1-7401 antibody, MA1-40134antibody, ab127996 antibody, ab35654 antibody, ab35654 antibody,ab137967 antibody, ab8467 antibody, and derivatives or fragmentsthereof.

In some embodiments, the donor particles include more than one type ofanalyte-binding agent. In some embodiments, the acceptor particlesinclude more than one type of analyte-binding agent. For example,analyte-specific reagents can be used on donor and acceptor beads. ForAnalyte 1, parameters are set as excitation at 680 nm, emission at 615nm (half-life 0.6 seconds). For Analyte 2, parameters are set asexcitation at 680 nm, emission at 615 nm (half-life 30 seconds). ForAnaylte 3, parameters are set as excitation at 680 nm, emission at 615nm (half-life 300 seconds). After the first excitation, emission foranalyte 1 is measure from: 0-6 seconds; emission for analyte 2 ismeasured from 6-300 seconds; and emission for analyte 3 is measured from300-600 seconds. Signals are deconvoluted as described in further detailin PCT International Publication No. WO1999/042838. In some embodiments,emission wavelengths may be used to evaluate multiple analytes asdiscussed herein.

In some embodiments, the composition for use in the ingestible devicesof the present application further includes cyclodextrin with aconcentration range of 25-50 mM, or 1-500 mM.

In one aspect, this application provides a kit including an ingestibledevice as described herein. In some embodiments, the kit furtherincludes instructions, e.g., for detecting or quantifying an analyte ina sample. In some embodiments, such a device is an ingestible device fordetecting or quantifying viable bacterial cells in vivo (e.g., in the GItract).

Certain illustrative embodiments will now be described, includingvarious systems and methods for obtaining samples using ingestibledevices. In particular, techniques are described that allow aningestible device to obtain a sample from within a gastrointestinal (GI)tract. These samples may include any of the fluids, solids,particulates, or other substances found within the GI tract. However, itwill be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that the systemsand methods described herein may be adapted and modified as isappropriate for the applications being addressed, and that the systemsand methods described herein may be employed in other suitableapplications, and that such other additions and modifications will notdepart from the scope of the present disclosure. Generally, theingestible devices described herein may include actuators, sensors,valves, chambers, logic devices, telemetry systems, microcontrollers orother devices and processors that may be configured using a combinationof hardware, firmware, and software to carry out one or more of themethods described herein.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further includes anilluminating source. The illuminating source is capable of irradiatingthe composition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestible deviceswith light having a wavelength with energy sufficient to convert thephotosensitizer to an excited state and thereby render it capable ofactivating molecular oxygen to singlet oxygen. The excited state for thephotosensitizer capable of exciting molecular oxygen is generally atriplet state which is more than about 20, e.g., at least 23, Kcal/molmore energetic than the photosensitizer ground state. In someembodiments, the composition is irradiated with light having awavelength of about 450 to 950 nm although shorter wavelengths can beused, for example, 230-950 nm. The luminescence produced may be measuredin any convenient manner such as photographically, visually orphotometrically to determine the amount thereof, which is related to theamount of analyte in the medium.

In some embodiments, the 632.6 nm emission line of a helium-neon laseris an inexpensive light source for excitation. Photosensitizers withabsorption maxima in the region of about 620 to about 650 nm arecompatible with the emission line of a helium-neon laser and are,therefore, useful illuminating sources for use in the presentapplication. Example irradiating wavelengths for diode lasers include680 nm, 780 nm, and/or the like. In some embodiments, the illuminatingsource is capable of irradiating the composition with light having awavelength selected from the group consisting of 678 nm, 633 nm, and 780nm.

Other means of excitation of the photosensitizer are also contemplatedherein. In some embodiments, excitation of the photosensitizer may beachieved by energy transfer from an excited state of an energy donorsuch as a second photosensitizer. When a second photosensitizer is used,wavelengths of light can be used which are inefficiently absorbed by thephotosensitizer but efficiently absorbed by the second photosensitizer.The second photosensitizer may be bound to an assay component that isassociated/coupled, or becomes associated/coupled, with the firstphotosensitizer, for example, bound to a surface or incorporated in theparticle having the first photosensitizer. When a second photosensitizeris employed it will usually have a lowest energy triplet state at higherenergy than the lowest energy triplet state of the firstphotosensitizer.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device includes a detector fordetecting the luminescence emitted by the chemiluminescent compound. Insome embodiments, the detector is a photodiode that is capable ofdetecting the luminescence emitted by the chemiluminescent compound at awavelength selected from 613 nm and 660 nm. Additional suitabledetection wavelengths include but not limited to 430 nm, 500 nm, 540 nm,615 nm, 680 nm, and/or the like.

In some embodiments, chemiluminecence intensity is measured with anoptical reader. The actual configuration and structure of the opticalreader may generally vary as is readily understood by those skilled inthe art. Typically, the optical reader contains an illumination sourcethat is capable of emitting light at a defined wavelength and a detectorthat is capable of registering a signal (e.g., transmitted, reflected,or fluorescence light). Optical readers may generally employ any knowndetection technique, including, for instance, luminescence (e.g.,fluorescence, phosphorescence, etc.), absorbance (e.g., fluorescent ornon-fluorescent), diffraction, etc. Exemplary optical readers,illumination sources and detectors are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.7,399,608, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in itsentirety.

In some embodiments, the illumination source may be any device known inthe art that is capable of providing electromagnetic radiation, such aslight in the visible or near-visible range (e.g., infrared orultraviolet light). For example, suitable illumination sources that maybe used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, lightemitting diodes (LED), flashlamps, cold-cathode fluorescent lamps,electroluminescent lamps, and so forth. The illumination may bemultiplexed and/or collimated. In some embodiments, multiplexed analysisis enabled. For a single sample, multiple different analytes can bemeasured by detecting different wavelengths of emitted lights. Themultiplexing can be further increased by using both emitted light andthe half-life of emitted light (e.g., 0.6seconds to 300 seconds). Forexample, the chemiluminescent compound as used herein can emit lightwithin the wavelength range of 250 to 1200 nm and with emission lifetime of 0.6-300 seconds; and thus emitted lights of differentwavelengths within the wavelength range can be multiplexed (e.g., up to11, etc.). In some embodiments, the illumination may be pulsed to reduceany background interference. In some embodiments, filters may be used toimprove optics. See, e.g., Reichman, Jay, Handbook of optical filtersfor fluorescence microscopy, Chroma Technology Corporation (2000). Insome embodiments, excitation source may be a LED with a band-passfilter, e.g., a filter for 680 or 780 nm+/−20 nm wavelength toselectively excite a sample with 680 or 780 nm light. In someembodiments, to cut out any stray longer wavelengths from the green LED,a Thorlabs FESH0550 shortpass filter may be used for excitation (FIG.72A). In some embodiments, the emission from a sample is captured at a90° angle with an avalanche photodiode detector with a bandpass filter,e.g., a filter for 430 nm+/−20 , 450 nm−/−20, 510 nm−/−20, 6130 nm−/−10,648 nm−/−10 nm wavelength, placed in front of the detector, toselectively capture light emitted at at specific nm. In someembodiments, a Thorlabs FB580-10 bandpass filter may be used as anemission filter (FIG. 72B). A cross sectional view of an exemplaryChemiluminescent assay test fixture depicting collimating, focusing, andfiltering lenses is shown in FIG. 72C. In some embodiments, a 5-50microsecond delay may be used before emission is measured. For example,in some embodiments, LEDs (e.g., aluminum gallium arsenide red diodes,gallium phosphide green diodes, gallium arsenide phosphide green diodes,or indium gallium nitride violet/blue/ultraviolet (UV) diodes) are usedas the pulsed illumination source. In some embodiments, the illuminationsource may provide diffuse illumination to the dye. For example, anarray of multiple point light sources (e.g., LEDs) may simply beemployed to provide relatively diffuse illumination. In someembodiments, the illumination source is capable of providing diffuseillumination in a relatively inexpensive manner is an electroluminescent(EL) device. An EL device is generally a capacitor structure thatutilizes a luminescent material (e.g., phosphor particles) sandwichedbetween electrodes, at least one of which is transparent to allow lightto escape. Application of a voltage across the electrodes generates achanging electric field within the luminescent material that causes itto emit light.

In some embodiments, the detector may be any device known in the artthat is capable of sensing a signal. In some embodiments, the detectormay be an electronic imaging detector that is configured for spatialdiscrimination. Some examples of such electronic imaging sensors includehigh speed, linear charge-coupled devices (CCD), charge-injectiondevices (CID), complementary-metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) devices,and so forth. Such image detectors, for instance, are generallytwo-dimensional arrays of electronic light sensors, although linearimaging detectors (e.g., linear CCD detectors) that include a singleline of detector pixels or light sensors, such as, for example, thoseused for scanning images, may also be used. Each array includes a set ofknown, unique positions that may be referred to as “addresses.” Eachaddress in an image detector is occupied by a sensor that covers an area(e.g., an area typically shaped as a box or a rectangle). This area isgenerally referred to as a “pixel” or pixel area. A detector pixel, forinstance, may be a CCD, CID, or a CMOS sensor, or any other device orsensor that detects or measures light. The size of detector pixels mayvary widely, and may in some cases have a diameter or length as low as0.2 micrometers.

In other embodiments, the detector may be a light sensor that lacksspatial discrimination capabilities. For instance, examples of suchlight sensors may include photomultiplier devices, photodiodes, such asavalanche photodiodes or silicon photodiodes, and so forth. Siliconphotodiodes are sometimes advantageous in that they are inexpensive,sensitive, capable of high-speed operation (short risetime/highbandwidth), and easily integrated into most other semiconductortechnology and monolithic circuitry. In addition, silicon photodiodesare physically small, which enables them to be readily incorporated intovarious types of detection systems. If silicon photodiodes are used,then the wavelength range of the emitted signal may be within theirrange of sensitivity, which is 400 to 1100 nanometers. In someembodiments, a photomultiplier may be used to increase the intensity ofthe signal.

In another aspect, the present application provides ingestible devicescontaining a microscopic evaluation system. In some embodiments,bacterial cells in a sample may be first labeled with fluorescent dyes(such as those described herein), and the fluorescently-labeled cellsmay be imaged and counted by the microscopic evaluation using aningestible device as described herein. In other embodiments, thefluorescently-labeled cells are counted as they pass through an onboardflow system (e.g., microfluidic single cell channeling). Examples offlow cytometry systems include hydrodynamic focusing, small diametercapillary tube flow, and rectangular capillary tube flow. As describedherein, live bacteria cells are labeled, and the principles of flowcytometry are used to quantify labeled cells. Generally speaking, thephotons from an incident laser beam are absorbed by the fluorophore andraised to a higher, unstable energy level. Within less than ananosecond, the fluorophore re-emits the light at a longerrepresentative wavelength where it is passed through a series ofdichroic filters. This reemitted light can be collected and interpretedas proportional to the number of labeled bacteria cells. In someembodiments, a sheath fluid is not used as part of the flow system tohelp accommodate the volume restrictions of the device. In someembodiments, a rectangular capillary tube is used to achieve asufficiently large cross-sectional area and relatively thin inspectionarea. The flow cytometry optical system operates parallel to thefluidics system and serves to observe the redirection of light passingthrough the cell and delivers information about the bacterial cells. Insome embodiments, rather than using a conventional laser and sphericallenses to focus the light to a point, an LED and cylindrical lenses areused to focus the light to a line across a rectangular capillary tube.In other embodiments, collimating lenses are used to make the lightsource parallel, while cylindrical lenses are used to refine theinspection area. An exemplary optical configuration for this arrangementcan be seen in FIG. 30. In some embodiments, optical filters can beadded to permit the use of fluorophores. The characteristic wavelengthof reemitted light from the fluorophores can be isolated and detectedwith the use of dichroic, bandpass, and short or long wave pass filters.Generally, multiple dichroic lenses and photomultipliers are used,however, due to space limitations, only a single side-scatter detectorand forward scatter detector may be used in certain embodiments.

Where the analyte is bacteria cells, one of the design challenges ofintegrating flow cytometry into the device is to provide a pumpingmechanism. Without moving fluid, individual bacteria cells cannot beidentified and accounted for by flow cytometry within a fixed volume offluid. In some embodiments, a gear motor is to move fluid through thedevice. For example, a micromotor including a planetary gearhead (e.g.,with a 25:1 reduction) can provide the desired amount of torque tocreate fluid flow. In another embodiment, a series of piezoelectricresistors embedded in the surface of a microfabricated plate is used tocreate flow. In yet another embodiment, a micropump that includes a pairof one-way valves and uses a magnetic pump membrane actuated by anexternal magnetic field is used to create flow.

In some embodiments, the system architecture includes an opening andsealing mechanism combined with a rotary wiper which creates a pressuredriven flow via a gear motor. The gear motor can be used for otherfunctions in the device. As shown in FIG. 31, the components of theoptics and flow chamber systems fit within the device. In someembodiments, the sample fluid is absorbed via a flexible membrane at thetop of the capsule. In some embodiments, the gear motor has 270° ofpermissible travel which serves to open and fill the fluid chamber.During closure, the motor closes the ingress port while simultaneouslypushing the fluid through the rectangular capillary tube where theoptical system is located. The threaded component allows the flexiblemembrane to close and seal the ingress channel without changing thewiper height. In some embodiments, the volume of the sample chamber is25 μL, 50 μL, 75 μL or more (e.g., within the range of 10-500 μls). Insome embodiments, two or more samples are taken from the GI tract toprocure a sufficient sample size. Referring to FIG. 31, an LED on theleft side of the capillary tube and the two low-light detectors on theright for capturing forward and side scatter are shown. Once the fluidpasses through the capillary tube, it exits the capsule via a one-wayvalve. In certain embodiments, the flow system allows for the detectionof cell size and internal cell complexity, in addition to cellquantitation. The sampling chamber may have a capacity of 100 uls (totalvoume). The sampling chamber may also have mutiple compartments, eachstoring a different assay mix for a different location within the GItract. The compartments of the sampling chamber may each have a capacityof 10-20 uls.

In some embodiments, the ingestible device further includes an internalcalibrator. The mimiaturized device may include 5 ugs of OMNI Beads(Silicon Napthalocyanine+Thioxene+Europium Chelate), having parametersset as: excitation: 780 nm; 50 millisecond delay; record emission at 615nm for 6 seconds. The OMNI beads may be embedded on the pad and signalsmay be used to characterize signal uniformity and reliability of theminiturized device. The ingestible device can be calibrated duringmanufacturing in the factory and before the patients ingests the device.

Internal standards may be used to calibrate the signal from the analyteof interest. The signal from internal standard will be measured at thesame time as the analyte of interest. Donor beads with SA and HABA (10ugs)+Biotin-PEG-2,4 DNP (5 nmoles)+Anti-2,4 DNP labeled acceptor beads(10 ugs) with thioxene and Samarium Chelate or N-pheyl oxazine andSamarium Chelate may be ued. Sample addition to the pad results inacceptor and donar beads binding to Biotin-Peg-2,4 DNP and forming adimer which when excited with 680 nm light generates a chemiluminescentsignal at 648 nm, e.g., with either 0.6 or 30 seconds halflife dependingon the analyte(s) of interest. The internal control may correct sampleeffects and instrument (the ingestible device) drift.

In one aspect, the present application provide methods for detecting,quantifying, or measuring an analyte in a sample using the ingestibledevices as described herein. In some embodiment, the ingestible devicesas described herein may be used to analyze samples (e.g., samples fromthe GI tract) to detect or quantify analytes, such as viable bacterialcells, in a sample in vivo. In some embodiments, the devices of thisapplication may be used to measure the concentration of analytes (e.g.,viable bacteria cells) in various specific regions of the GI tract. Suchdata may be used to determine whether a subject has a condition in needfor treatment (such as an infection, e.g., Small Intestinal BacterialOvergrowth (SIBO), or a SIBO-related condition), the site of disease fortreatment, or to quantify bacterial populations within the GI tract (orwithin specific regions of the GI tract) for other diagnostic purposes.In some embodiments, the ingestible devices described herein may be usedto detect and/or quantify specific genera, species, or strains ofmicroorganisms present in a sample in vivo.

In some embodiments, data may be generated after the ingestible devicehas exited the subject, or the data may be generated in vivo and storedon the device and recovered ex vivo. Alternatively, the data can betransmitted wirelessly from the ingestible device while the device ispassing through the subject (e.g. passing through the GI tract of thesubject).

In some embodiments, this disclosure provides methods for detecting ananalyte in a sample, such as a fluid sample, of a subject. The methodscan include: (1) providing an ingestible device; (2) transferring thefluid sample of the subject into the sampling chamber of said ingestibledevice in vivo; (3) irradiating the composition held in the samplingchamber of the ingestible device with light to excite thephotosensitizer; and (4) measuring total luminescence or rate of changeof luminescence emitted from the composition held in the samplingchamber of the ingestible device as a function of time, therebydetecting the analyte in the fluid sample. In some embodiments, thepresence of an analyte in the sample is used to diagnose and/or monitora disease or disorder in the subject. In some embodiments, the absenceof an analyte in the sample is used to diagnose and/or monitor a diseaseor disorder in the subject.

In some embodiments, this disclosure provides methods of determining thelevel of an analyte in a sample, such as a fluid sample, of a subject.The methods can include: (1) providing an ingestible device; (2)transferring the fluid sample of the subject into the sampling chamberof said ingestible device in vivo; (3) irradiating the composition heldin the sampling chamber of the ingestible device with light to excitethe photosensitizer; and (4) measuring total luminescence or rate ofchange of luminescence emitted from the composition held in the samplingchamber of the ingestible device as a function of time, therebydetermining the level of the analyte in the fluid sample. In someembodiments, the method further comprises comparing the level of theanalyte in the fluid sample with the level of analyte in a referencesample (e.g., a reference sample obtained from a healthy subject). Insome embodiments, the level of the analyte in the sample is used todiagnose and/or monitor a disease or disorder in the subject or thetreatment thereof.

In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rate of change ofluminescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (4). Forinstance, in some embodiments, the total luminescence or rate of changeof luminescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rateof change of luminescence as a function of time of said sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo. In some embodiments, themethod includes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to anex vivo receiver.

In certain embodiments, the disclosure provides methods of determiningthe level of an analyte in a sample of a subject, such as a humansubject. The methods can include: (1) providing an ingestible device,said device including a sampling chamber that is configured to hold amember made of an absorptive material (e.g., an absorptive pad orabsorptive sponge) having absorbed therein a composition, as describedherein; (2) transferring the fluid sample of the subject into thesampling chamber of said ingestible device in vivo; (3) fully orpartially saturating the absorptive material held in the samplingchamber of the ingestible device with the fluid sample; (4) irradiatingthe absorptive material held in the sampling chamber of the ingestibledevice with light to excite the photosensitizer; and (5) measuring totalluminescence or rate of change of luminescence emitted from thecomposition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestible device as afunction of time, thereby detecting the analyte in the fluid sample. Insome embodiments, the presence of an analyte in the sample is used todiagnose and/or monitor a disease or disorder in the subject. In someembodiments, the absence of an analyte in the sample is used to diagnoseand/or monitor a disease or disorder in the subject.

In certain embodiments, the disclosure provides methods of determiningthe level of an analyte in a sample, such as a fluid sample, of asubject. The methods can include: (1) providing a ingestible device,said device including a sampling chamber that is configured to hold an amember made of absorptive material (e.g., an absorptive pad and/or anabsorptive sponge) having absorbed therein a composition, as describedherein; (2) transferring the fluid sample of the subject into thesampling chamber of said ingestible device in vivo; (3) fully orpartially saturating the absorptive material held in the samplingchamber of the ingestible device with the fluid sample; (4) irradiatingthe absorptive material held in the sampling chamber of the ingestibledevice with light to excite the photosensitizer; and (5) measuring totalluminescence or rate of change of luminescence emitted from thecomposition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestible device as afunction of time, thereby determining the level of the analyte in thefluid sample. In some embodiments, the method further comprisescomparing the level of the analyte in the fluid sample with the level ofanalyte in a reference sample (e.g., a reference sample obtained from ahealthy subject). In some embodiments, the level of the analyte in thesample is used to diagnose and/or monitor a disease or disorder in thesubject. In some embodiments, the method further comprises comparing thelevel of the analyte in the fluid sample with the level of analyte in areference sample (e.g., a reference sample obtained from a healthysubject). In some embodiments, the level of the analyte in the sample isused to diagnose and/or monitor a disease or disorder in the subject.

In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rate of change ofluminescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (5). Forinstance, in some embodiments, the total luminescence or rate of changeof luminescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rateof change of luminescence as a function of time of said sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo. In some embodiments, themethod includes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to anex vivo receiver.

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the gastrointestinal (GI) tract,including: (1) providing a ingestible device of the present applicationfor detecting an analyte; (2) transferring a fluid sample from the GItract of the subject into the sampling chamber of said ingestible devicein vivo; (3) irradiating the composition held in the sampling chamber ofthe ingestible device with light to excite the photosensitizer; (4)measuring total luminescence or rate of change of luminescence emittedfrom the composition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestibledevice as a function of time; (5) correlating the total luminescence orthe rate of change of luminescence as a function of time measured instep (4) to the amount of the analyte in the fluid sample; and (6)correlating the amount of the analyte in the fluid sample to the numberof viable bacterial cells in the fluid sample. In some embodiments, anumber of viable bacterial cells determined in step (6) greater than acontrol number of viable bacterial cells, indicates a need for treatment(e.g., with an antibiotic agent described herein). In some embodiments,the control number of viable bacterial cells is 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, 10⁷,10⁸, 10⁹, or more. For example, in some embodiments, a number of viablebacterial cells determined in step (6) greater that about 10³ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of viablebacterial cells determined in step (6) greater that about 10⁴ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of theviable bacterial cells determined in step (6) greater than about 10⁵CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein. In some embodiments, a number of viable bacterialcells determined in step (6) greater that about 10⁶ or more CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment.

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of agastrointestinal (GI) tract microbial infection (e.g., with a pathogenicmicroorganism), including: (1) providing an ingestible device of thepresent application for detecting analyte; (2) transferring a fluidsample from the GI tract of the subject into the sampling chamber ofsaid ingestible device in vivo; (3) irradiating the composition held inthe sampling chamber of the ingestible device with light to excite thephotosensitizer; (4) measuring total luminescence or rate of change ofluminescence emitted from the composition held in the sampling chamberof the ingestible device as a function of time; (5) correlating thetotal luminescence or the rate of change of luminescence as a functionof time measured in step (4) to the amount of the analyte in the fluidsample; and (6) correlating the amount of the analyte in the fluidsample to the number of microorganisms (e.g., pathogenic microorganisms)in the fluid sample. In some embodiments, the analyte is specific for aparticular genus, species, or strain of microorganism. In someembodiments, a number of microorganisms determined in step (6) greaterthan a control number of microorganisms indicates a need for treatment(e.g., with an antibiotic agent described herein). In some embodiments,the control number of microorganisms is 0, 1, 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶,10⁷, 10⁸, 10⁹, or more. For example, in some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (6) greater that about 0 indicates aneed for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of microorganismsdetermined in step (6) greater that about 1 indicates a need fortreatment. In some embodiments, a number of microorganisms determined instep (6) greater that about 10² indicates a need for treatment. In someembodiments, a number of microorganisms determined in step (6) greaterthat about 10³ indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, anumber of microorganisms determined in step (6) greater that about 10⁴indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of themicroorganisms determined in step (6) greater than about 10⁵ indicates aneed for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent as described herein.In some embodiments, a number of microorganisms determined in step (6)greater that about 10⁶ indicates a need for treatment. In someembodiments, the control number of microorganisms is 0, 1, 10², 10³,10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, 10⁷, 10⁸, 10⁹, or more CFU/mL. For example, in someembodiments, a number of microorganisms cells determined in step (6)greater that about 0 CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment. In someembodiments, a number of microorganisms determined in step (6) greaterthat about 1 CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments,a number of microorganisms determined in step (6) greater that about 10²CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (6) greater that about 10³ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (6) greater that about 10⁴ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of themicroorganisms determined in step (6) greater than about 10⁵ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein. In some embodiments, a number of microorganismsdetermined in step (6) greater that about 10⁶ or more CFU/mL indicates aneed for treatment.

In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rate of change ofluminescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (4). Forinstance, in some embodiments, the total luminescence or rate of changeof luminescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rateof change of luminescence as a function of time of said sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo. In some embodiments, themethod includes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to anex vivo receiver. In some embodiments, the ingestible device and themethod may be further used to monitor the subject after the treatment(e.g., with an antibiotic). In some embodiments, the ingestible deviceand the method may be used to assess the efficacy of the treatment. Forexample, efficacious treatment may be indicated by the decrease of thenumber of viable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of thesubject post-treatment. Efficacy of the treatment may be evaluated bythe rate of decrease of the number of viable bacterial cells in a samplefrom the GI tract of the subject post-treatment. In some embodiments,the ingestible device and the method may be used to detect infectionwith antibiotic-resistant strains of bacteria in a subject. Forinstance, such infection may be indicated where the number of viablebacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of the subject does notsubstantially decrease after antibiotic treatment.

In some embodiments, the presence of bacteria of a specific genera,species, and/or strains may be detected using an ingestible devicedescribed herein in order to ascertain which bacteria are resistantand/or sensitive to an antibiotic administered to the subject. Forexample, in some embodiments, the ingestible device and the methodsdescribed herein may be used to monitor a subject before and aftertreatment with an antibiotic to determine the presence and/or absence ofa bacteria of a specific genera, species, and/or strain. A comparison ofthe type of bacteria that are present in the GI tract of the subjectbefore and after the treatment with the antibiotic can be used to assesswhich types of bacteria were susceptible and/or resistant to thetreatment with the antibiotic.

In som embodiments, the ingestible device and the methods describedherein may be used to detect the presence of bacteria of a specificgenera, species, and/or strains in a sample from the GI tract from asubject in order to select an antibiotic treatment that will render thedetected bacteria either susceptible or resistant to the antibiotictreatment.

In certain embodiments, the disclosure provides methods of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk ofovergrowth of bacterial cells in the GI tract. The methods can include:(1) providing an ingestible device for detecting an analyte, said deviceincluding a sampling chamber that is configured to hold an absorptivematerial (e.g., an absorptive pad and/or and absorptive sponge) havingabsorbed therein a composition; (2) transferring a fluid sample from theGI tract of the subject into the sampling chamber of said ingestibledevice in vivo; (3) fully or partially saturating the absorptivematerial held in the sampling chamber of the ingestible device with thefluid sample; (4) irradiating the absorptive material held in thesampling chamber of the ingestible device with light to excite thephotosensitizer; (5) measuring total luminescence or rate of change ofluminescence emitted from the composition held in the sampling chamberof the ingestible device as a function of time; (6) correlating thetotal luminescence or the rate of change of luminescence as a functionof time measured in step (5) to the amount of the analyte in the fluidsample; and (7) correlating the amount of the analyte in the fluidsample to the number of viable bacterial cells in the fluid sample. Insome embodiments, a number of viable bacterial cells determined in step(7) greater than a control number of viable bacterial cells indicates aneed for treatment (e.g., with an antibiotic agent described herein). Insome embodiments, the control number of viable bacterial cells is 10³,10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, 10⁷, 10⁸, 10⁹, or more. For example, in some embodiments,a number of viable bacterial cells determined in step (7) greater thatabout 10³ CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, anumber of viable bacterial cells determined in step (7) greater thatabout 10⁴ CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, anumber of the viable bacterial cells determined in step (7) greater thanabout 10⁵ CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment, e.g., with anantibiotic agent as described herein. In some embodiments, a number ofviable bacterial cells determined in step (7) greater that about 10⁶ ormore CFU/mL indicates a need for treatment.

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a method of assessing ormonitoring the need to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of agastrointestinal (GI) tract microbial infection (e.g., with a pathogenicmicroorganism), including: (1) providing an ingestible device fordetecting an analyte, said device including a sampling chamber that isconfigured to hold a member made of an absorptive material (e.g., anabsorptive pad and/or and absorptive sponge) having absorbed therein acomposition; (2) transferring a fluid sample from the GI tract of thesubject into the sampling chamber of said ingestible device in vivo; (3)fully or partially saturating the absorptive material held in thesampling chamber of the ingestible device with the fluid sample; (4)irradiating the absorptive material held in the sampling chamber of theingestible device with light to excite the photosensitizer; (5)measuring total luminescence or rate of change of luminescence emittedfrom the composition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestibledevice as a function of time; (6) correlating the total luminescence orthe rate of change of luminescence as a function of time measured instep (5) to the amount of the analyte in the fluid sample; and (7)correlating the amount of the analyte in the fluid sample to the numberof microorganisms (e.g., pathogenic microorganisms) in the fluid sample.In some embodiments, the analyte is specific for a particular genus,species, or strain of microorganism. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater than a control number ofmicroorganisms indicates a need for treatment (e.g., with an antibioticagent described herein). In some embodiments, the control number ofmicroorganisms is 0, 1, 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, 10⁷, 10⁸, 10⁹, or more.For example, in some embodiments, a number of microorganisms determinedin step (7) greater that about 0 indicates a need for treatment. In someembodiments, a number of microorganisms determined in step (7) greaterthat about 1 indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, anumber of microorganisms determined in step (7) greater that about 10²indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater that about 10³ indicates aneed for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of microorganismsdetermined in step (7) greater that about 10⁴ indicates a need fortreatment. In some embodiments, a number of the microorganismsdetermined in step (7) greater than about 10⁵ indicates a need fortreatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent as described herein. In someembodiments, a number of microorganisms determined in step (7) greaterthat about 10⁶ indicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, thecontrol number of microorganisms is 0, 1, 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, 10⁷,10⁸, 10⁹, or more CFU/mL. For example, in some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms cells determined in step (7) greater that about 0 CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater that about 1 CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater that about 10² CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater that about 10³ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number ofmicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater that about 10⁴ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment. In some embodiments, a number of themicroorganisms determined in step (7) greater than about 10⁵ CFU/mLindicates a need for treatment, e.g., with an antibiotic agent asdescribed herein. In some embodiments, a number of microorganismsdetermined in step (7) greater that about 10⁶ or more CFU/mL indicates aneed for treatment.

In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rate of change ofluminescence as a function of time of the sponge is measured overmultiple time points for an extended period of time in step (4). Forinstance, in some embodiments, the total luminescence or rate of changeof luminescence as a function of time of the sample is measuredcontinuously for a period of 0-1800 minutes, 0-1600 minutes, 0-1500minutes, 0-1440 minutes, 0-1320 minutes, 0-1000 minutes, 0-900 minutes,0-800 minutes, 0-700 minutes, 0-600 minutes, 0-500 minutes, 0-400minutes, 0-350 minutes, 0-330 minutes, 0-300 minutes, 0-270 minutes, or0-220 minutes. In some embodiments, the total luminescence or the rateof change of luminescence as a function of time of said sample ismeasured continuously for a period of 0-330 minutes. In someembodiments, the method is performed in vivo. In some embodiments, themethod includes communicating the results of the onboard assay(s) to anex vivo receiver. In some embodiments, the ingestible device and themethod may be further used to monitor the subject after the treatment(e.g., with an antibiotic). In some embodiments, the ingestible deviceand the method may be used to assess the efficacy of the treatment. Forexample, efficacious treatment may be indicated by the decrease of thenumber of viable bacterial cells in a sample from the GI tract of thesubject post-treatment. Efficacy of the treatment may be evaluated bythe rate of decrease of the number of viable bacterial cells in a samplefrom the GI tract of the subject post-treatment. In some embodiments,the ingestible device and the method may be used to detect infectionwith antibiotic-resistant strains of bacteria in a subject. Forinstance, such infection may be indicated where the number of viablebacterial cells or pathogens in a sample from the GI tract of thesubject does not substantially decrease after antibiotic treatment orother treatments.

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a method of measuring thepresence, absence or amount of one or more analytes from one or moresamples in the gastrointestinal tract. In some embodiments, the one ormore analytes are measured multiple times, for example, at differenttime points or at different locations. In one embodiment, a singledevice measures one or more analytes or more time points or locations;thereby creating a “molecular map” of a physiological region.Measurements can be taken at any location in the gastrointestinal tract.For example, in one aspect, analytes from samples from one or more ofthe duodenum, jejunum, ileum, ascending colon, transverse colon ordescending colon can be measured to create a molecular map of the smalland large intestine. In one aspect, the sample is from the duodenum. Inone aspect, the sample is from the jejunum. In one aspect, the sample isfrom the ileum. In one aspect, the sample is from the ascending colon.In one aspect, the sample is from the transverse colon. In one aspect,the sample is from the descending colon.

In another aspect, a series of measurements can be taken over a shorterdistance of the gastrointestinal tract (e.g., the ileum) to create ahigher resolution molecular map. In some embodiments, previousendoscopic imaging may identify a diseased area for molecular mapping.For example, a gastroenterologist may use imaging (e.g., an endoscopeequipped with a camera) to identify the presence of Crohn's Disease inthe ileum and cecum of a patient, and the methods and techniques of thepresent invention herein may be used to measure inflammation-associatedanalytes in this diseased area of the patient. In a related embodiment,the inflammation-associated analytes, or any analyte, may be measuredevery one or more days to monitor disease flare-ups, or response totherapeutics.

In certain embodiments, the disclosure provides methods of generating amolecular map of the gastrointestinal (GI) tract. The methods caninclude: (1) providing an ingestible device of the present applicationfor detecting an analyte; (2) transferring a fluid sample from the GItract of the subject into the sampling chamber of said ingestible devicein vivo; (3) irradiating the composition held in the sampling chamber ofthe ingestible device with light to excite the photosensitizer; (4)measuring total luminescence or rate of change of luminescence emittedfrom the composition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestibledevice as a function of time; (5) correlating the total luminescence orthe rate of change of luminescence as a function of time measured instep (4) to the amount of the analyte in the fluid sample; and (6)correlating the amount of the analyte in the fluid sample to a marker ofdisease in the fluid sample.

The presence or amount of one or more markers of disease indicates aneed for treatment, e.g., with an anti-inflammatory agent as describedherein. Markers of disease are described herein and include, but are notlimited, inflammatory markers like cytokines and chemokines. In oneexample, TNFα, calprotectin and C-reactive protein (CRP) are measured atmultiple locations of the colon (ascending, transverse, descending) toidentify “hot spots” in a subject suspected of suffering from ulcerativecolitis. In some embodiments, the same ingestible device, or oneadministered subsequently, is also able to deliver a therapeutic agentat the site of disease as described in the above embodiment. Means fordelivering a therapeutic agent are described in U.S. Provisionalapplications 62/385,553 and 62/478,955, filed Sep. 9, 2016 and Mar. 30,2017, respectively, which are hereby expressly incorporated by referencein their entireties.

In some embodiments, the method described herein further includes a stepof calibrating the ingestible device, e.g., by using OMNI beads asdiscussed herein.

In some embodiments, methods as described herein are highly sensitive indetecting and quantifying an analyte (e.g., viable bacterial cells) invarious samples. Where the analyte is viable bacterial cells, in someembodiments, the lowest detection or quantification limit of the presentmethods is 10² CFU/mL. In some embodiments, the highest detection orquantification limit of the present methods is 10⁷ CFU/mL, 10⁸ CFU/mL,10⁹ CFU/mL, 10¹⁰ CFU/mL or more. In some embodiments, the methods allowdetection or quantification of 10² to 10⁷ CFU/mL bacterial cells invarious samples. In some embodiments, methods of this application may beused to distinguish samples bases on the quantity of viable bacterialcells contained therein. For instance, the methods may be used todistinguish among samples that contain 10², 10³, 10⁴, 10⁵, 10⁶, or 10⁷CFU/mL of bacterial cells. The sensitivity of the assay is similar tothat of the live cell assay.

In some embodiments, the compositions, methods and devices describedherein may be used to determine the types of microorganisms (e.g.,bacteria) present in a sample (e.g., for diagnostic purposes).Microoganisms (e.g., pathogenic microorganisms or commensalmicroorganisms) that may be detected using the compositions, methods,and devices described herein include bacteria, protozoans, viruses, andfungi.

In some aspects, this disclosure provides methods for detecting thepresence of an analyte in a sample, wherein the analyte is amicroorganism of interest (e.g., a microorganism of a particular genus,species and/or strain). In some embodiments, the microorganism ofinterest is a pathogenic microorganism. In some embodiments, themicroorganism of interest is a commensal microorganism. Microorganismsof interest may be specifically detected using an analyte-binding agentdescribed herein that specifically binds to the microorganism ofinterest (or to a molecule thereof (e.g., a protein or nucleic acid)).One of ordinary skill will understand that more than one genus, species,and/or strain of microorganism may be detected using the methodsdescribed herein by, for example, by utilizing analyte-binding agents(e.g., antibodies) that specifically bind to antigens (e.g., surfaceantigens) of the microorganisms that will be detected. Exemplaryantibodies are described above.

In some embodiments, the methods may include: (a) providing a firstcomposition to a subject comprising an analyte-binding agent that bindsto a microorganism of interest (e.g., an antibody), wherein the analytebinding agent comprises a photosensitizer; (b) providing an ingestibledevice to the subjectfor detecting the analyte-binding agent in asample; (c) transferring a sample of the subject into a sampling chamberof said ingestible device in vivo; (d) irradiating the composition heldin the sampling chamber of the ingestible device with light to excitethe photosensitizer of the analyte-binding agent; and (e) measuringtotal luminescence or rate of change of luminescence emitted from thecomposition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestible device as afunction of time, thereby detecting the microorganism of interest in thesample. The first composition may be provided to the subject before,after, or concurrently with the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the methods may include: (a) providing aningestible device for detecting a microorganism of interest in a sampleto a subject; (b) transferring the sample of the subject into a samplingchamber of said ingestible device in vivo, wherein the sampling chambercomprises an analyte-binding agent that binds to the microorganism ofinterest (e.g., an antibody), wherein the analyte binding agentcomprises a photosensitizer; (c) irradiating the composition held in thesampling chamber of the ingestible device with light to excite thephotosensitizer of the analyte-binding agent; and (d) measuring totalluminescence or rate of change of luminescence emitted from thecomposition held in the sampling chamber of the ingestible device as afunction of time, thereby detecting the microorganism of interest in thesample. The first composition may be provided to the subject before,after, or concurrently with the ingestible device.

In some embodiments, the methods may include providing an ingestibledevice for detecting a microorganism of interest in a sample to asubject, wherein the ingestible device includes a sampling chamber thatis configured to hold a composition including: (1) a plurality of donorparticles, each of the plurality of donor particles including aphotosensitizer and having coupled thereto a first analyte-binding agent(e.g., antibody) that binds to the microorganism of interest, whereinthe photosensitizer, in its excited state, is capable of generatingsinglet oxygen; and (2) a plurality of acceptor particles, each of theplurality of acceptor particles including a chemiluminescent compoundand having coupled thereto a second analyte-binding agent (e.g., anantigen-binding agent) that binds to the microorganism of interest,wherein said chemiluminescent compound is capable of reacting withsinglet oxygen to emit luminescence.

In some embodiments, this methods may include providing an ingestibledevice for detecting a microorganism of interest in a sample to asubject, wherein the ingestible device includes a sampling chamber thatis configured to hold a member made of an absorptive material (e.g., anabsorptive pad and/or and absorptive sponge) having absorbed therein acomposition including: (1) a plurality of donor particles, each of theplurality of donor particles including a photosensitizer and havingcoupled thereto a first analyte-binding agent (e.g., an antibody) thatbinds to the microorganism of interest, wherein the photosensitizer, inits excited state, is capable of generating singlet oxygen; and (2) aplurality of acceptor particles, each of the plurality of acceptorparticles including a chemiluminescent compound and having coupledthereto a second analyte-binding agent (e.g., an antigen-binding agent)that binds to the microorganism of interest, wherein saidchemiluminescent compound is capable of reacting with singlet oxygen toemit luminescence. In some embodiments, the first and the secondanalyte-binding agents are antigen-binding agents (e.g., antibodies). Insome embodiments, the first and the second antigen-binding agents bindto the same epitope of the analyte (e.g., a protein). In someembodiments, the first and the second antigen-binding agents bind toseparate epitopes of the analyte (e.g., a protein) that spatiallyoverlap. In some embodiments, the first and the second antigen-bindingagents bind to the separate epitopes of the analyte (e.g., a protein)that do not spatially overlap.

In some embodiments, the methods further comprise quantitating theamount of microorganism (e.g., by using a flow cytometry system presentin the ingestible device),In some embodiments, the compositions, methodsand devices described herein are used to detect and/or quantitate amicroorganism of interest in a first region of the GI tract of thesubject.

In some embodiments, the methods described herein are used to detectand/or quantitate a microorganism of interest in the GI tract of asubject before, after, or during a course of treatment with anantibiotic, thereby allowing for a determination as to whether aparticular microorganism of interest is susceptible or resistant to theantibiotic. For example, when a subject is treated with an antibiotic inorder to reduce the population of bacteria of a particular genus,species and/or strain, the methods can be used to evaluate and/ormonitor the effectiveness of the antibiotic treatment in vivo. In someembodiemts, it may be desireable to administer a microorganism ofinterest (e.g., a commensal bacterial species (e.g., a probiotic or alive biotherapeutic described herein) to a subject in order to increaseto abundance of said microorganism of interest in the GI tract of thesubject (e.g., for therapeutic purposes). In some embodiments, themethods described herein are used to detect and/or quantitate amicroorganism of interest in the GI tract of the subject before, after,or during the administration of the microorganism of interest to thesubject, e.g., to determine whether the microorganism of interest haseffectively colonized a region of the GI tract of the subject.

Diffractive Optics

In some embodiments, the disclosure provides diffractive opticsdetection technology that can be used with, for example, ingestibledevice technology. In some embodiments, an ingestible device includesthe diffractive optics technology (e.g., diffractive optics detectionsystem). In certain embodiments, the disclosure provides diffractiveoptics technology (e.g., diffractive optics detection systems) that areused outside the body of subject. As an example, an ingestible devicecan be used to obtain one more samples in the body (e.g., in the GItract) of a subject, and the diffractive optics technology can be usedto analyze the sample(s). Such analysis can be performed in vivo (e.g.,when the ingestible device contains the diffractive optics) and/or exvivo (e.g., when diffractive optics are external to the ingestibledevice).

Diffraction is a phenomenon that occurs due to the wave nature of light.When light hits an edge or passes through a small aperture, it isscattered in different directions. But light waves can interfere to add(constructively) and subtract (destructively) from each other, so thatif light hits a non-random pattern of obstacles, the subsequentconstructive and destructive interference will result in a clear anddistinct diffraction pattern. A specific example is that of adiffraction grating, which is of uniformly spaced lines, typicallyprepared by ruling straight, parallel grooves on a surface. Lightincident on such a surface produces a pattern of evenly spaced spots ofhigh light intensity. This is called Bragg scattering, and the distancebetween spots (or ‘Bragg scattering peaks’) is a unique function of thediffraction pattern and the wavelength of the light source. Diffractiongratings, like focusing optics, can be operated in both transmission andreflection modes.

FIG. 110 illustrates diffraction of light by an exemplary diffractiongrating operating in reflection mode in which incident illumination isdiffracted into light having different diffraction orders m, where m isan integer (e.g., 0, 1, 2). The grating has a substrate with a regularlyrepeating series of grooves and recessions. The midpoint of adjacentgrooves are a distance P from each other, where P is the period ofdiffraction grating. Likewise, the midpoint of adjacent recessions are adistance P from each other.

The period P of diffraction grating determines the diffraction angle foreach diffraction orders, as given by the ideal grating equation:

mλ=P(sin θ_(m)−sin θ_(i))

where λ is the wavelength of the incident light, θ_(i) is the angle ofthe incident light, θ_(m) is the diffraction angle of the m^(th)diffraction order. Both θ_(i) and θ_(m) are measured from the normal tothe grating plane.

As shown in FIG. 110, a height h corresponds to the distance between thetop of recessions and the bottom of grooves. For the diffraction gratingshown in FIG. 110, changing the height φ results in a change of therelative intensity of light that is diffracted into the differentdiffraction orders m. Thus, for example, binding a material to the uppersurface of the grooves (thereby changing the height h), can change theintensity of light diffracted into a given diffraction order (e.g.,fifth diffraction order).

Thus, from the foregoing, it is apparent that the diffractive propertiesof a given diffraction grating are dependent on a number of differentvariables.

In some embodiments, the disclosure implements the dependence of thediffractive properties of a diffraction grating on the height h todetermine the presence and/or amount of one or more analytes of interestin a sample.

For example, FIG. 111 depicts an embodiment of this approach. Theapproach depicted in FIG. 111 includes two steps for preparing thesystem prior to being exposed to a sample which may contain an analyte.In step 1, the upper surfaces of the grooves of are patterned withsecondary binding partners. The pattern is chosen so that the substrateand secondary binding partners act together as a diffraction gratingproducing a diffracted signal intensity, labelled as “Baseline” atdesirable locations. Next, in step 2, the system is exposed to a mediumcontaining primary binding partners for a period of time to allow forbinding between the secondary and primary binding partners to takeplace. The binding event between the binding partners is accompanied bya change in the local thickness of the layer on the substrate (a firstchange in φ), resulting in a change in the optical properties of thediffraction grating and a corresponding first change in the diffractedsignal intensity, referred to as Δ_(Capture Molecule). The primarybinding partners are then capable of recognizing and binding to ananalyte.

In step 3, the system is exposed to a sample. If the sample contains theanalyte, binding occurs between the primary binding partner and theanalyte. As shown in FIG. 111, such binding results in another change inthe local thickness of the layer (a second change in φ). This causes acorresponding second change in the diffracted signal intensity, referredto as Δ_(Analyte). The ratio between the two signals Δ_(Analyte) andΔ_(Capture Molecule) is used as a measure of analyte binding, e.g., todetermine whether the analyte is present in the sample and/or todetermine how much of the analyte is present in the sample.

Although a reflection diffraction grating is discussed above, moregenerally, any diffraction grating of appropriate design may be used. Insome embodiments, a transmission diffraction grating is used.

In the foregoing discussion, the binding partners and analyte aredepicted as binding to the upper surface of grooves 1002. However, thedisclosure is not restricted to such embodiments. For example, incertain embodiments, the binding partners and analyte bind to the uppersurface of recessions 1004.

In general, the light used in the diffractive optics can be of anyappropriate wavelength. Exemplary wavelengths include visible light,infrared red (IR) and ultraviolet (UV). Optionally, the light can bemonochromatic or polychromatic. The light can be coherent or incoherent.The light can be collimated or non-collimated. In some embodiments, thelight is coherent and collimated. Generally, any appropriate lightsource may be used, such as, for example, a laser (e.g., a laser diode)or a light emitting diode. In some embodiments, the light source is alaser diode operating at 670 nm wavelength, e.g., at 3 mWatts power.Optionally, an operating wavelength of a laser diode can be 780 nm,e.g., when larger grating periods are used. In certain embodiments, thelight source is a laser, such as, for example, a He—Ne laser, a Nd:YVO4laser, or an argon-ion laser. In some embodiments, the light source is alow power, continuous waver laser. In some embodiments, differentwavelengths may be used, and, in such embodiments, a different source ofelectromagnetic radiation may be used.

The diffracted light can be detected using any appropriate lightdetector(s). Examples of light detectors include photodetectors, suchas, for example, position sensitive photodiodes, photomultiplier tubes(PMTs), photodiodes (PDs), avalanche photodiodes (APDs), charged-coupleddevice (CCD) arrays, and CMOS detectors. In some embodiments, thediffracted light is detected via one or more individual photodiodes.

In general, the diffraction grating is made of a material that istransparent in the wavelength of the radiation used to illuminate thesensor. Any appropriate material may be used for the diffraction gratingsubstrate, such as glass or a polymer. Exemplary polymers includepolystyrene polymers (PSEs), cyclo-olefin polymers (COPs), polycarbonatepolymers, polymethyl methacrylates, and methyl methacrylate styrenecopolymers. Exemplary COPs include Zeonex (e.g., Zeonex E48R, ZeonexF52R).

The light may be incident on the diffraction grating any appropriateangle. In some embodiments, the light is incident on the diffractiongrating with an angle of incidence of from 30° to 80° (e.g., from 40° to80°, from 50° to 70°, from 55° to 65°, 60°). Optionally, the system isconfigured so that that diffractive grating and light source can moverelative to each other

In general, the light detector can be positioned with respect to thediffractive grating so that the diffraction grating can be illuminatedat a desired angle of incidence and/or so that diffracted light can bedetected at a desired angle and/or so that diffracted light of a desiredorder can be detected.

The period P of the diffraction grating can be selected as desired. Insome embodiments, the period P is from 0.5 microns to 50 microns (e.g.,from one micron to 15 microns, from one micron to five microns). In someembodiments, the grating is a repeating patter of 1.5 micron and 4.5micron lines with a period of 15 microns.

The height h of the diffraction grating can be selected as desired. Incertain embodiments, the height h is from one nanometer to about 1000nanometers (e.g., from about five nanometers to about 250 nanometers,from five nanometers to 100 nanometers).

In general, the diffractive optics can be prepared using any appropriatemethod, such as, for example, surface ablation, photolithograph (e.g.,UV photolithography), laser etching, electron beam etching, nano-imprintmolding, or microcontact printing.

Optionally, the diffractive optics system can include one or moreadditional optical elements, such as, for example, one or more mirrors,filters and/or lenses. Such optical elements can, for example, bearranged between the light source and the diffractive grating and/orbetween the diffractive grating and the detector.

In general, the diffractive optics disclosure relates to systemsdesigned to determine the presence and/or amount of an analyte (e.g.,bacterial cells) in a sample (e.g., a sample taken from the GI tract)using diffractive optics. The sample can be taken using an ingestibledevice, such as described herein. Typically, in the analyticaltechniques disclosed herein, the primary binding partner is a molecularcompound capable of recognizing and binding to the analyte (i.e., ananalyte-binding agent), such as an antibody, and the secondary bindingpartner is a molecular compound capable of binding to both the primarybinding partner and to the substrate of the diffractive optical system,allowing immobilization of the primary binding partner onto thediffractive optical system.

In some of the embodiments of the devices described herein, a primarybinding partner specifically binds to a secondary binding partnerthrough non-covalent interactions (e.g., electrostatic, van der Waals,hydrophobic effect). In some embodiments, a primary binding partnerspecifically binds to a secondary binding partner via a covalent bond(e.g., a polar covalent bond or a non-polar covalent bond). In someembodiments of any of the devices described herein, the primary and thesecondary binding partner can be interchanged. For example, the primarybinding partner can be biotin, or a derivative thereof, and thesecondary binding partner is avidin, or a derivative thereof. In otherexamples, the primary binding partner can be avidin, or a derivativethereof, and the secondary binding partner is biotin.

In some embodiments, the binding of the primary and the secondarybinding partner is essentially irreversible. In some embodiments, thebinding of the primary and the secondary binding partner is reversible.In some embodiments, the primary binding partner is CaptAvidin™biotin-binding protein and the secondary binding partner is biotin, orvice versa. In some embodiments, the primary binding partner is DSB-X™biotin and the secondary binding partner is avidin, or vice versa. Insome embodiments, the primary binding partner is desthiobiotin and thesecondary binding partner is avidin, or vice versa (Hirsch et al., AnalBiochem. 308(2):343-357, 2002). In some embodiments, the primary bindingpartner is glutathione (GSH) or a derivative thereof, and the secondarybinding partner is glutathione-S-transferase (GST).

The primary and secondary binding partners provided herein can bind witha dissociation equilibrium constant (KD) of less than 1×10⁻⁷ M, lessthan 1×10⁻⁸ M, less than 1×10⁻⁹ M, less than 1×10⁻¹⁰ M, less than1×10⁻¹¹ M, less than 1×10⁻¹² M, less than 1×10⁻¹³ M, less than 1×10⁻¹⁴M, less than 1×10⁻¹⁵ M, less than 1×10⁻¹⁶ M, or less than 1×10⁻¹⁷ M. Insome embodiments, the primary and secondary binding partners providedherein can bind with a K_(D) of about 1.1 nM to about 500 nM, such asfrom about 2.0 nM to about 6.7 nM (inclusive).

In some embodiments of any of the devices described herein, a surface ofthe device includes a plurality of covalently attached secondary bindingpartners that can specifically bind to the primary binding partner.

In some embodiments of any of the devices and methods described herein,the primary binding partner can bind to the secondary binding partnerand the analyte. In some embodiments, the primary binding partnercomprises an antibody (e.g., a bispecific antibody or a single chainantibody), an affimer, an aptamer, an antibody fragment, or anantigen-binding molecule (e.g., a variable light chain domain, avariable heavy chain domain).

In some embodiments, the primary binding partner can bind to any analytedisclosed herein. Exemplary analytes are described in detail above andcan be targeted for detection using the methods described herein. Insome embodiments, the primary binding parter comprises ananalyte-binding agent described herein (e.g., an antibody, an aptamer,an affimer, or a nucleic acid). For example, in some embodiments, theprimary binding partner is a nucleic acid (e.g., a DNA molecule, a RNAmolecule). In some embodiments, the primary binding partner comprises aportion of a nucleic acid that is complementary to the nucleic acidsequence of the analyte.

In some embodiments of any of the devices described herein, the devicecan include a label that binds to the analyte and does not preventbinding of the analyte to the primary binding partner. In someembodiments, the label can amplify the diffraction signal of theanalyte. In some embodiments, the label is an aptamer, a nanoparticle(e.g, a gold nanoparticle (AuNP), a magnetic nanoparticle (MNP)), aquantum dot (QD), or a carbon nanomaterial (e.g., a graphene and carbonnanotube). See, e.g., Zhu et al. (2014) Toxins 6(4): 1325-1348. In someembodiments, the label is a metal nanoparticle or a semi-conductornanoparticle. General methods of using metal nanoparticles for signalamplification are known in the art, e.g., Ju et al. (2011)NanoBiosensing: Principles, Development and Application, Biological andMedical Physics, Biomedical Engineering, Chapter 2: pages 39-84, Dykmanand Khlebtsov (2011) Acta Naturae 3(3): 34-55, and are incorporated byreference herein. Nanoparticles can be used, e.g., as a fluorescentbiological label, a drug delivery system, or a gene delivery system. Insome embodiments, a nanoparticle is used for protein detection, orprotein isolation and/or purification. As used herein, the term“nanoparticle” refers to an object that has a maximum linear dimensionof between 1 nm to about 200 nm (e.g., between 10 to about 100 nm,between 50 to about 100 nm). As an alternative to nanoparticles, or inaddition to nanoparticles, microparticles (e.g., maximum lineardimension of from 0.2 microns to 100 microns) may be used.

In some embodiments, the label is from about 1 nm to 200 nm (e.g., about50 nm to about 200 nm).

In some embodiments, the label (e.g., any of the labels describedherein) includes one or more antibodies (e.g., any of the antibodiesand/or antibody fragments described herein). For example, in someembodiments wherein the label is a gold nanoparticle, the goldnanoparticle is coupled to one or more antibodies or antibody fragmentsthat bind to a portion of the analyte. In some embodiments, the one ormore antibodies or antibody fragments bind to the analyte at a differentsite on the analyte than the primary binding partner, such that theanalyte is bound to the primary binding partner and to one or moreantibodies or antibody fragments of the label at the same time. In someembodiments, the label increases the size of the captured analyte. Insome embodiments, the label increases the refractive index differencebetween the grating and the detected material.

In some embodiments, the label is a nanoparticle (e.g., a goldnanoparticle) that includes the primary binding partner that has anucleic acid sequence that is complementary to the analyte, and iscovalently linked to the nanoparticle.

As used herein, an “aptamer” is a RNA/DNA hybrid molecule that has asecondary and/or tertiary structure and can bind to an analyte. Anaptamer can include any nucleic acid sequence that does not interferewith the binding of the antigen to the primary binding partner.

In some embodiments, the determining step (during which the primarybinding partner binds to the analyte) can detect at least 10² CFU/mL(e.g., at least 10² CFU/mL, at least 10³ CFU/mL, at least 10⁴ CFU/mL, atleast 10⁵ CFU/mL, at least 10⁶ CFU/mL, at least 10⁷ CFU/mL, at least 10⁸CFU/mL, at least 10⁹ CFU/mL, at least 10¹⁰ CFU/mL, at least 10¹¹ CFU/mL,at least 10¹² CFU/mL, at least 10¹³ CFU/mL, at least 10¹⁴ CFU/mL, atleast 10¹⁵ CFU/mL, at least 10¹⁶ CFU/mL, at least 10¹⁸ CFU/mL, such asbetween 10² CFU/mL and 10²⁰ CFU/mL) of an analyte (e.g., any of thebacterium described herein). In some embodiments, the determining stepcan determine between 10⁴ CFU/mL and 10⁶ CFU/mL.

One or more additional steps can be performed in any of the diffractiveoptics methods described herein. In some embodiments, the one or moreadditional steps are performed: prior to the binding of the primarybinding partner to the secondary binding partner, after the binding ofthe primary binding partner to the secondary binding partner, prior tothe binding of the primary binding partner to the analyte, or after thebinding of the primary binding partner to the analyte.

In some embodiments, the one or more additional steps can include: ablocking of the sensors step, at least one (e.g., 1, 2, 3 or 4) washstep, a capturing step, and/or a filtering step. In some embodiments,the blocking step can include blocking a sensor within the ingestibledevice with a solution comprising at least 1% (e.g., at least 2%, atleast 3%, at least 4%, at least 5%, at least 6%, at least 7%, at least8%, at least 9%; 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9% or 10%) bovine serumalbumin (BSA) in a buffered solution (e.g., phosphate buffered saline(PBS), Tris buffered saline (TBS)). In some embodiments, the at leastone wash step can include washing with a buffered solution (e.g.,phosphate buffered saline (PBS), Tris buffered saline (TBS)). Ingeneral, blocking is performed during capsule manufacture, rather thanin vivo.

In some embodiments, the capturing step includes enriching the analyte.In some embodiments, the capturing step includes physically separatingthe analyte from the remaining sample using a filter, a pore, or amagnetic bead. In some embodiments, the analyte is captured by sizeexclusion.

In some embodiments of any of the methods described herein, thedetermining step (during which the primary binding partner binds to theanalyte is detected) can occur in 15 seconds (e.g., at least 30 seconds,at least one minute, at least 2 minutes, at least 5 minutes, at least 15minutes, at least 30 minutes, at least 1 hour, at least 5 hours, atleast 10 hours). In some embodiments, the binding of the primary bindingpartner to the analyte can occur during a period of time of, forexample, in at least 5 seconds.

In some embodiments, the binding of the primary binding partner to theanalyte can occur during a period of time of, for example, five seconds,10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 60 minutes, 5hours, or 24 hours).

EXAMPLES Live Cell Dye Detection Examples

Bacterial organisms used include the ones listed in the table below.

Code Organism Source Dilution* EC Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 1:1,000 SAStaphylococcus aureus ATCC 29213 1:100 KP Klebsiella pneumoniae ATCC4352 1:1,000 PA Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 15442 1:1,000 SMStreptococcus mutans ATCC 25175 1:100 EF Enterococcus faecalis ATCC49533 1:100 GP SA + SM + EF Various 1:1:1 GN EC + PA + KP Various 1:1:1MIX SA + SM + EF + Various 1:1:1:1:1:1:1 EC + PA + KP *Previouslydetermined optimal dilution in 0.9% saline to achieve inoculum densityof 10⁵ CFU/mL

Example 1 Meta-Analysis of Hydrogen Breath Testing

SIBO was reported in 4-78% patients with irritable bowel syndrome (IBS).Quantitative culture of upper gut aspirate, although has been consideredthe gold standard for the diagnosis of SIBO, was invasive. The glucoseand lactulose hydrogen breath tests (GHBT, LHBT) were not invasive, butthere have been contradictory data on their performance in the diagnosisof SIBO. In fact, in a recent study of the utility of early (breathhydrogen increase 20 ppm above basal within 90 min) and double peaks onlactulose and glucose hydrogen breath tests (LHBT and GHBT,respectively) to diagnose SIBO, it was demonstrated that the sensitivityof the GHBT test and the diagnostic performances of the LHBT and breathmethane were all very poor. See Ghoshal, U. C. et al., Breath tests inthe diagnosis of small intestinal bacterial overgrowth in patients withirritable bowel syndrome in comparison with quantitative upper gutaspirate culture. European Journal of Gastroenterology & Hepatology2014, 26:753-760.

For example, FIG. 74 shows a forest plot showing the results of 11studies that compared the results of glucose breath test and endoscopyaspirate culture. The table below shows the fixed-effects andrandom-effects model estimates of the mean positive and negative percentagreement combining the 11 studies. The homogeneity of effects acrossstudies was tested with a Chi-square test and homogeneity of effects wasrejected for both positive percent agreement (c²=91.5, df=10, p-value<0.0001) and negative percent agreement (c²=107.5, df=10, p-value<0.0001). When significant heterogeneity across studies exists, arandom-effect model more accurately models the heterogeneity.

Fixed-effects and random-effects model estimates of the mean positiveand negative percent agreement combining eleven studies.

Mean positive Mean negative percent agreement percent agreement Model(95% CI) (95% CI) Random-effects 54% 76% model (40%, 68%) (65%, 88%)

Example 2 Kinetic Analysis of Dyes 2.1 Culture/Inoculum Preparation:

Using a cryogenic stock (at −70° C.), a first sub-culture of thebacterial organisms was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriatemedia). The plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours andstored wrapped in parafilm (or similar material) at 4° C. The resultingplate may be used for up to 120 hours. From the first sub-culture, asecond sub-culture was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriate media).The resulting plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours.The second sub-culture should be used within 24 hours starting from thetime it was first removed from incubation. Using the second sub-culture,an isolated colony was aseptically removed from the Agar plate andinoculated with 100 mL of TSB (or other appropriate liquid media). Theculture was then placed on an orbital shaker in a humidified incubatorand incubated at 200 rpm at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours. Three (3)samples (200 μL each) of the diluted organism were used for an inoculumcheck by serially diluting and spot plating on TSA. The cultureconditions and incubation times were calibrated such that the initialinoculum density was about 1.0×10⁸ CFU/mL. A dilution range was preparedby aseptically performing appropriate serial dilutions (i.e. 1 mL of 10⁸CFU/mL into 9 mL of sterile PBS to give a dilution of 10⁷ CFU/mL). Thefinal concentrations were confirmed by serial dilution and spot platecounts. See, e.g., Gaudy, A. F., Abu-Niaaj, F., Gaudy, E. T.,Statistical study of the spot plate technique for viable cell counts.Applied Microbiology, Vol 11, 1962 pp. 305-309.

2.2 Sample Capture and Inoculum Adjustment:

A plate was prepared in triplicate using a Sterilin 96 well round bottommicroctitre plate (P/N H511A), where the plate was loaded with 100 μL ofa diluted dynamic range of bacteria. An exemplary plate set-up ispresented in FIG. 75C.

2.3 Live Stain Preparations:

Live stain was prepared fresh on the day of the experiment. The livestain dilutions were protected from light. The live stain treatmentswere aseptically prepared as described below using 15 mL sterile conicaltubes.

Treatment 1 (Resazurin, or “REZ”):

Working stain was prepared according to manufacturer instructions.Resazurin salt was used to prepare a 10 mM stock solution in PBS, pH6.0, with 50 mM MgCl₂, 0.003% Deoxycholate. The stock solution was mixedvia vortexing until a homogenous suspension was produced. The stocksolution was stored in dark until used.

2.4 Test Fixture Preparation:

The spectrophotometer was set and calibrated according to manufacturer'sSOPs. The data program was set up to excite and read the emissionintensity of the culture. Appropriate volume of working stain (20 μL forREZ) was aseptically added and the resulting mixture was mixedthoroughly via pipette mixing in each well. The plate was protected fromlight.

2.5 Sample Acquisition, Incubation and Detection:

Exact inoculation time was recorded in the log book and on the device.The plate was incubated at 37° C. degrees, at 200 rpm and was protectedfrom light. Plate was read and recorded at 530 nm Excitation, detecting600 nm Emission. The plate was covered and returned to the 37° C.incubator @ 200 rpm between readings. This procedure was performed every30 minutes for the test cycle. The test cycle spanned 6 hours. Thekinetic analysis results of resazurin in various concentrations ofbacteria are depicted in FIGS. 75A and 75B.

Example 3 Selective Lysis of HeLa Cells and Selective Detection ofBacterial Cells in the Presence of Mammalian Cells 3.1 Simulated JejunalSample Preparation:

-   -   HeLa grown up to 10⁴ Cells/100 μL in RPMI    -   Bacteria (E. coli ATCC 25922) was added to “Positive Test        Samples” to a final concentration of 10⁵ CFU/mL in HeLa+RPMI        fluid.

3.2 Sample Acquisition (Liquid):

-   -   20 μL various dye formulations including resazruin were added to        wells containing “Positive Test Samples” or HeLa alone in        triplicate.

3.3 Sample Acquisition (Sponge):

-   -   20 μL various dye formulations were added to sponge samples and        allowed to saturate. Sponges were exposed to wells containing        “Positive Test Samples” or HeLa alone in triplicate by placing        with sterile forceps and submerging with a sterile pipette tip.        See FIG. 76A.

3.4 Sample Reading (Liquid and Sponge):

-   -   Plates were placed in the plate reader at 37° C. and read at 550        nm Excitation, detecting 590 nm Emission    -   Reading every 30 minutes.    -   Plates kept at 37° C. in 5% CO₂ between reads.

3.5 Data Acquisition and +/−Calls:

-   -   Kinetic Read Out: increase in fluorescence over time represents        a positive signal    -   Slopes presented from 120 min to 240 min    -   Difference in Slope was the basis for positive/negative calls

Replicates and Control:

-   -   Testing performed in triplicate    -   Each test compared to positive (10⁵ CFU/mL bacteria) and control        (10⁴ HeLa cells alone)    -   Master Control:        -   Negative: PBS alone, no HeLa or bacteria plus baseline dye            (10 mM resazurin, 50 mM MgCl₂, 0.005% Deoxycholate)        -   Positive: PBS alone, plus 10⁵ bacteria plus baseline dye            The kinetic fluorescence measurements with various dye            formulations in the presence or absence of the sponge are            depicted in FIGS. 76B-G. The mean slopes of the kinetic            measurements in the presence or absence of the sponge are            summarized in FIGS. 76H and 76I.

Example 4 Interference Assay 4.1 Culture/Inoculum Preparation:

Using a cryogenic stock (at −70° C.), a first sub-culture of thebacterial organisms was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriatemedia). The plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours andstored wrapped in parafilm (or similar material) at 4° C. The resultingplate may be used for up to 120 hours. From the first sub-culture, asecond sub-culture was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriate media).The resulting plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours.The second sub-culture should be used within 24 hours starting from thetime it was first removed from incubation. Using the second sub-culture,an isolated colony was aseptically removed from the Agar plate andinoculated with 100 mL of TSB (or other appropriate liquid media). Theculture was then placed on an orbital shaker in a humidified incubatorand incubated at 200 rpm at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours. Three (3)samples (200 μL each) of the diluted organism were used for an inoculumcheck by serially diluting and spot plating on TSA. The cultureconditions and incubation times were calibrated such that the initialinoculum density was about 1.0×10⁸ CFU/mL. A dilution range was preparedby aseptically performing appropriate serial dilutions (i.e. 1 mL of 10⁸CFU/mL into 9 mL of sterile PBS to give a dilution of 10⁷ CFU/mL). Thefinal concentrations were confirmed by serial dilution and spot platecounts. See, e.g., Gaudy, A. F., Abu-Niaaj, F., Gaudy, E. T.,Statistical study of the spot plate technique for viable cell counts.Applied Microbiology, Vol 11, 1962 pp. 305-309.

Summary of various samples used in the interference assay:

LOT/PART CODE SAMPLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION HAZARD C PBS Gibco Ref10010-023; Baseline Control See MSDS Lot 1764980 SJ Simulated JejunalFaSSIF-V2 Simulated Jejunal fluid See MSDS Fluid pH FaSSIF-V2 at Batch#3, STF pH 6.5, pH 7.0, pH 8.0 See MSDS modified Ph B Bile Acids addedOxgall (Sigma 1.4, 3, 5.5 mM See MSDS to FaSSIF-V2 Aldrich, SKU B3883) MMucin added to Porcine Mucin 0.5%, 1%, and 1.5% See MSDS FaSSIF-V2(Sigma Aldrich, SKU M2378) F Fungal cells added C. albicans ATCC 1.0 ×10², 1.0 × 10³, 1.0 × 10⁴ CFU/mL to FaSSIF-V2 18804 Hi-Lo High ChallengeStrain 1.0 × 10⁷, 1.0 × 10⁴, 1.0 × 10³ CFU/mL concentration/Sub- LODconcentration

4.2 Sample Capture and Inoculum Adjustment:

A plate was prepared in triplicate using a Sterilin 96 well round bottommicroctitre plate (P/N H511A), where the plate was loaded with 100 μL ofa diluted dynamic range of bacteria. An exemplary plate set-up ispresented in FIG. 75C.

4.3 Live Stain Preparations:

Live stain was prepared fresh on the day of the experiment. The livestain dilutions were protected from light. The live stain treatmentswere aseptically prepared as described below using 15 mL sterile conicaltubes.

Treatment 1 (Resazurin or “REZ”):

Working stain was prepared according to manufacturer instructions.Resazruin salt was used to prepare a 10 mM Resazurin solution in PBS,containing 0.005% Deoxycholate, 0.1% v/v Triton X-100, 2.5 mg/LAmphotericin B, 50 mM MgCl₂ with a pH of 6.0. The solution was mixed viavortexing until a homogenous suspension was produced and was then storedin dark until used.

4.4 Test Fixture Preparation:

The spectrophotometer was set and calibrated according to manufacturer'sSOPs. The data program was set up to excite and read the emissionintensity of the culture. Appropriate volume of working stain (20 μL forREZ) was aseptically added and the resulting mixture was mixedthoroughly via pipette mixing in each well. The plate was protected fromlight.

4.5 Sample Acquisition, Incubation and Detection:

Exact inoculation time was recorded in the log book and on the device.The plate was incubated at 37° C. degrees, at 200 rpm and was protectedfrom light. Plate was read and recorded at 530 nm Excitation, detecting600 nm Emission. The plate was covered and returned to the 37° C.incubator @ 200 rpm between readings. This procedure was performed every30 minutes for the test cycle. The test cycle spanned 6 hours.

The effects of various interfering factors are depicted in FIGS. 77A-D.

Example 5 Failure Modes of the Live Stain Assay 5.1 Culture/InoculumPreparation:

Using a cryogenic stock (at −70° C.), a first sub-culture of thebacterial organisms was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriatemedia). The plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours andstored wrapped in parafilm (or similar material) at 4° C. The resultingplate may be used for up to 120 hours. From the first sub-culture, asecond sub-culture was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriate media).The resulting plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours.The second sub-culture should be used within 24 hours starting from thetime it was first removed from incubation. Using the second sub-culture,an isolated colony was aseptically removed from the Agar plate andinoculated with 100 mL of TSB (or other appropriate liquid media). Theculture was then placed on an orbital shaker in a humidified incubatorand incubated at 200 rpm at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours. Three (3)samples (200 μL each) of the diluted organism were used for an inoculumcheck by serially diluting and spot plating on TSA. The cultureconditions and incubation times were calibrated such that the initialinoculum density was about 1.0×10⁸ CFU/mL. A dilution range was preparedby aseptically performing appropriate serial dilutions (i.e. 1 mL of 10⁸CFU/mL into 9 mL of sterile PBS or Fasted State Simulated IntestinalFluid (FaSSIF) to give a dilution of 10⁷ CFU/mL). Note finalconcentrations were confirmed by serial dilution and spot plate counts.See, e.g., Gaudy, A. F., Abu-Niaaj, F., Gaudy, E. T., Statistical studyof the spot plate technique for viable cell counts. AppliedMicrobiology, Vol. 11, 1962 pp. 305-309.

Simulation of Failure Modes:

1: Opens in Stomach: Dilution in FaSSIF pH 2

2: Opens in Colon. 10¹² CFU/mL E. coli prepared in FaSSIF to simulatefeces.

5.2 Sample Capture and Inoculum Adjustment:

A plate was prepared in triplicate using a Sterilin 96 well round bottommicroctitre plate (P/N H511A), where the plate was loaded with 100 μL ofa diluted dynamic range of bacteria. An exemplary plate set-up ispresented in FIG. 75C.

5.3 Live Stain Preparations:

Live stain was prepared fresh on the day of the experiment. The livestain dilutions were protected from light. The live stain treatmentswere aseptically prepared as described below using 15 mL sterile conicaltubes.

Treatment 1 (Resazurin or “REZ”):

Working stain was prepared according to manufacturer instructions.Resazruin salt was used to prepare a 10 mM Resazurin solution in PBS,containing 0.005% Deoxycholate, 0.1% v/v Triton X-100, 2.5 mg/LAmphotericin B, 50 mM MgCl₂ with a pH of 6.0. The solution was mixed viavortexing until a homogenous suspension was produced and was then storedin dark until used.

5.4 Test Fixture Preparation:

Set and calibrated the spectrophotometer according to manufacturer'sSOPs. Set up the data program to excite and read the emission intensityof the culture. Aseptically added the appropriate volume of workingstain (20 μL for REZ). Mixed thoroughly via pipette mixing in each well.Used fresh tips for each well. Protected the plate from light.

5.5 Sample Acquisition, Incubation and Detection:

Exact inoculation time was recorded in the log book and on the device.The plate was incubated at 37° C. degrees, at 200 rpm and was protectedfrom light. Plate was read and recorded at 530 nm Excitation, detecting600 nm Emission. The plate was covered and returned to the 37° C.incubator @ 200 rpm between readings. This procedure was performed every30 minutes for the test cycle. The test cycle spanned 6 hours.

Simulated failure modes and early detection of SIBO are depicted inFIGS. 78A-E.

Example 6 Jejunal Duodenal Aspriate (MDB) Assay 6.1 Experimental Design:

Subject “MDB” from clinical duodenal aspirates was selected based onnumber of aliquots and sterility testing.

6.2 Culture/Inoculum Preparation:

Using a cryogenic stock (at −70° C.), a first sub-culture of thebacterial organisms was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriatemedia). The plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours andstored wrapped in parafilm (or similar material) at 4° C. The resultingplate may be used for up to 120 hours. From the first sub-culture, asecond sub-culture was streaked out on TSA (or other appropriate media).The resulting plate was then incubated at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours.The second sub-culture should be used within 24 hours starting from thetime it was first removed from incubation. Using the second sub-culture,an isolated colony was aseptically removed from the Agar plate andinoculated with 100 mL of TSB (or other appropriate liquid media). Theculture was then placed on an orbital shaker in a humidified incubatorand incubated at 200 rpm at 35±2° C. for 16 to 24 hours. Three (3)samples (200 μL each) of the diluted organism were used for an inoculumcheck by serially diluting and spot plating on TSA. The cultureconditions and incubation times were calibrated such that the initialinoculum density was about 1.0×10⁸ CFU/mL. A dilution range was preparedby aseptically performing appropriate serial dilutions (i.e. 1 mL of 10⁸CFU/mL into 9 mL of sterile PBS or FaSSIF to give a dilution of 10⁷CFU/mL). Note final concentrations were confirmed by serial dilution andspot plate counts. See, e.g., Gaudy, A. F., Abu-Niaaj, F., Gaudy, E. T.,Statistical study of the spot plate technique for viable cell counts.Applied Microbiology, Vol 11, 1962 pp. 305-309. pH measurements weretaken.

6.3 Sample Capture and Inoculum Adjustment:

A plate was prepared in triplicate using a Sterilin 96 well round bottommicroctitre plate (P/N H511A), where the plate was loaded with 100 μL ofa diluted dynamic range of bacteria. An exemplary plate set-up ispresented in FIG. 79A.

6.4 Live Stain Preparations:

Live stain was prepared fresh on the day of the experiment. The livestain dilutions were protected from light. The live stain treatmentswere aseptically prepared as described below using 15 mL sterile conicaltubes.

Treatment 1 (Resazurin or “REZ”):

Working stain was prepared according to manufacturer instructions.Resazruin salt was used to prepare a 10 mM Resazurin solution in PBS,containing 0.005% Deoxycholate, 0.1% v/v Triton X-100, 2.5 mg/LAmphotericin B, 50 mM MgCl₂ with a pH of 6.0. The solution was mixed viavortexing until a homogenous suspension was produced and was then storedin dark until used.

6.5 Test Fixture Preparation:

Set and calibrated the spectrophotometer according to manufacturer'sSOPs. Set up the data program to excite and read the emission intensityof the culture. Aseptically added the appropriate volume of workingstain (20 μL for REZ). Mixed thoroughly via pipette mixing in each well.Used fresh tips for each well. Protected the plate from light.

6.6 Sample Acquisition, Incubation and Detection:

Exact inoculation time was recorded in the log book and on the device.The plate was incubated at 37° C. degrees, at 200 rpm and was protectedfrom light. Plate was read and recorded at 530 nm Excitation, detecting600 nm Emission. The plate was covered and returned to the 37° C.incubator @ 200 rpm between readings. This procedure was performed every30 minutes for the test cycle. The test cycle spanned 6 hours.

FIG. 79B shows fluorescence detection plotted over time in duodenalaspirate spiked with various concentrations of E. coli. The datademonstrated that there is a strong signal response from spiked duodenalsamples which is in good agreement with simulated data.

Example 7 Simulated Performance of Live Cell Stain Assay with JejunalSamples

7.1 Simulated methodology:

-   -   Matrix of all simulated conditions was generated and assigned to        locations on a 96 well plate    -   Simulated conditions include:        -   pH 6, pH 6.5, pH 7        -   Bile 1.3, 3, 5.5 mM        -   Mucin 0.5%, 1%, 1.5%        -   Yeast 10², 10³, 10⁴ CFU/mL        -   75% Horse Serum in FaSSIF    -   Simulated organism spike was generated and overlaid across the        96 well plate matrix        -   Gram Negative Mix (E. coli, P. aeruginosa, K pneumoniae)        -   Gram Positive Mix (S. aureus, S. mutans, E. faecalis)        -   Total Mix: All 6 strains        -   Dynamic range of each: 10⁷, 10⁶, 10⁵, 10⁴, 0 CFU/mL    -   All Testing done in the presence of HeLa (10⁴ CFU/mL in 50 μL)    -   Testing with liquid DYE (20 μL into 100 μL sample)    -   Read Slope over 330 minutes        -   Algorithm using Early Calls (first 30 minutes) and Late            (slope over full 330 minutes)

7.2 Spiked Human Sample Methodology:

-   -   Pooled Mix of Human Duodenal “DiBaise” samples    -   Pooled samples include:

Initial Sample ID No. MC Micro Pull ERB 115-01-006.1 No growth 1 DKG115-01-032.1 No growth 1 G-S 115-01-037.1 No growth 4 CRM 115-01-038.1No growth 4 M-T 115-01-045.1 No growth 2 MDB 115-01-050.1 No growth 7

-   -   Simulated organism spike was generated and overlaid across the        96 well plate matrix        -   Gram Negative Mix (E. coli, P. aeruginosa, K pneumoniae)        -   Gram Positive Mix (S. aureus, S. mutans, E. faecalis)        -   Total Mix: All 6 strains        -   Dynamic range of each: 10⁷, 10⁶, 10⁵, 10⁴, 0 CFU/mL    -   Testing with liquid DYE (20 μL into 100 μL sample)    -   Read Slope over 330 minutes        -   Algorithm using Early Calls (first 30 minutes) and Late            (slope over full 330 minutes)

Failure modes tested:

Code Failure Mode Simulation FM1 Open in Stomach pH 2 FM2 Open in Colon10{circumflex over ( )}12 CFU/mL FM3 Fail to Open Dry Well FM4 PartialFill 10{circumflex over ( )}5 Sample 25 μL of 10{circumflex over ( )}5mix FM5 Partial Fill 10{circumflex over ( )}6 Sample 25 μL of10{circumflex over ( )}6 mix FM6 PBS control “Master Control” PBS

FIG. 80A shows a simulated performance with jejunal samples and FIG. 80Bshows a simulated performance with human duodenal Samples, wherePe=(PP+PN)×(PP+NP)/N̂2+(PN+NN)×(NP+NN)/N̂2. A kappa statistic equal tozero indicates that agreement is no better than chance, a kappa of 1.0indicates perfect agreement, 0-0.4 indicates poor agreement, 0.4-0.75indicates fair to good agreement and greater than 0.75 indicatesexcellent agreement (Fleiss 1981).

Example 8 Simulated Performance of the Resazurin-Based Viable BacterialCell Quantitation Assay Using Anaerobic Bacteria-Enriched Fecal andDuodenal Samples

To evaluate the lower limit of detection of a resazurin-based viablebacterial cell quantitation under conditions that similar to those foundin the human intestinal tract, the following experiment was performedusing pooled fecal and duodenal clinical samples enriched with anaerobicbacteria.

Clinical samples consisting of pooled isolates of fecal slurries orpooled isolates of duodenal aspirates were used to inoculate anaerobicenrichment media (Reinforced Clostridial Media (RCM)) under strictanaerobic conditions. The samples were enriched for 24 hours at 37° C.and a dynamic dilution range targeting 10⁷ to 10² CFU/mL was prepared ineither liquid format (fecal slurries were diluted to form simulatedfecal fluid analogue (SFFA; 1:7.5 fecal matter:PBS); and duodenalaspirates were diluted in simulated jejunal fluid analogue (SJFA; 1:1:1cRPMI:tryptic soy broth; FASSIF-V2 (Fasted State Simulated IntestinalFluid Version 2; BIORELVANT), pH 6.5) or assay pad (sponge) format(1×10⁵ CFU/mL targeted for pad testing). As control, the same dilutionrange was prepared in phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Total bacterialcount (TBC) was determined using the resazurin assay described above inExamples 2-6 using a 96-well flat plate format. Fluorescence wasdetected using a Plate Reader photospectrometer with kinetic readingsmade at 550 nm excitation and 590 nm emission. Due to the unknown growthcharacteristics of the clinical samples, the target CFU ranges weremissed by an order of 1 Log as confirmed by subsequent viable platecounts, resulting in a 10⁸ to 10⁴ CFU/mL dynamic range). The assay wasperformed kinetically up to 330 minutes and data was collected. Theassay was also run for 22 hours (1,320 minutes) and the data sets werecompared. As an endpoint control, assay plates were left overnight underanaerobic conditions in order to confirm endpoints.

As shown in FIG. 130, the assay was able to detect all mixed clinicalisolates in the liquid format over the entire dynamic range tested(i.e., 1×10⁹ to 1×10⁴). Moreover, as also shown in FIG. 130, the assaysuccessfully detected the pooled clinical isolates in the assay padformat. All bacteria-containing samples scored higher that the slope of3 standard deviations above the highest mean baseline control(4.86+(3×0.16))=5.34. This experiment demonstrates that anresazurin-based assay can be used to effectively quantify totalbacterial count in complex bacterial compositions over a dynamic rangeof CFU.

Example 9 Simulated Performance of a Resazurin-Based Viable BacterialCell Quantitation Assay Using Anaerobic Bacterial Samples

To evaluate the ability of the resazurin-based viable bacterial cellquantitation assay to detect and quantify populations of anaerobicbacterial strains grown to mid-exponential phase, the followingexperiment was performed using clinically-derived fecal sampleconsisting of strict anaerobes (not typed), as well as depositedanalytical strains (ATCC).

Samples consisted of bacterial strains grown to mid-exponential phase(where they are most metabolically active). Without wishing to be boundby any particular theory, bacteria grown at mid-exponential phase shouldcomprise greater NADH activity resulting in a lower limit of detection(e.g., 1×10³ CFU/mL) because of the production of stronger fluorescencesignal when resazurin in reduced. Bacterial strains Bacteroides vulgatus(ATCC 29327), Bacteroides vulgatus (ATCC 8482), Clostridium butyricum(ATCC 19398), Clostridium perfringens (ATCC 13124), Clostridiumsporogenes (ATCC 7955), and a clinical isolate were used to inoculateRCM media under strict anaerobic conditions over a 24 hour period at 37°C. Growth samples were obtained at 2, 4, 6, and 24 hours, diluted inSJFA, and total bacterial count (TBC) was determined using the resazurinassay described above in Examples 2-6 using a 96-well flat plate formatusing a liquid format. Fluorescence was detected using a Plate Readerphotospectrometer with kinetic readings made at 550 nm excitation and590 nm emission. PBS controls were used to evaluate the media reductioneffects and to serve as signal control. The assay was performedkinetically up to 330 minutes and data was collected.

As shown in FIG. 131A and 131B, bacteria grown and collected atmid-exponential growth phase exhibited increased signal detection whenused in the assay. For example, increased signal was detected with thestrains Clostridium butyricum (ATCC 19398), which was detectable at1×10³ CFU/mL, Clostridium perfringens (ATCC 13124), and the clinicalisolate.

Example 10 Simulated Performance of a Resazurin-Based Viable BacterialCell Quantitation Assay Using Anaerobic Bacterial Samples UnderMicroaerophilic and Anaerobic Conditions

To evaluate the lower limit of detection of a resazurin-based viablebacterial cell quantitation assay performed under either microaerophilicor strict anaerobic conditions, the following experiment was performed.

Six test panels were prepared using the bacterial strains Bacteroidesvulgatus (ATCC 8482), Clostridium butyricum (ATCC 19398), Clostridiumsporogenes (ATCC 7955), and two non-typed clinical isolates comprisingstrict anaerobic bacteria were used to inoculate RCM media under strictanaerobic conditions over a 24 hour period at 37° C. Each panel wasprepared by diluting the bacteria in SJFA at a dynamic range of 10⁷ to10² CFU/mL in liquid format and total bacterial count (TBC) wasdetermined using the resazurin assay described above. PBS controls wereused to evaluate the media reduction effects and to serve as signalcontrol. Panels were prepared under strict anaerobic conditions, and 5panels were incubated at 37° C. and assayed at the following timepoints:90 minutes, 150 minutes, 270 minutes, 330 minutes, and 24 hours.Duplicate plates run kinetically under oil using plate sealers to ensuremicroaerophilic conditions were also assayed. Plate counts wereconfirmed by subsequence viable plate counts. Aerobic screening plateswere also run to rule out false positives caused by facultativeanaerobic conditions. Total bacterial count (TBC) was determined usingthe resazurin assay described above in Examples 2-6. Fluorescence wasdetected using a Plate Reader photospectrometer with kinetic readingsmade at 550 nm excitation and 590 nm emission. The assay was performedkinetically up to 330 minutes and data was collected. The assay was alsorun for 22 hours (1,320 minutes) and data sets were compared. As anendpoint control, assay plates were left overnight under anaerobicconditions in order to confirm endpoints.

As shown in FIGS. 132A, 132B, and 132C, Clostridium butyricum (ATCC19398), as well as one of the clinical samples (RNA 6) was detectedbelow 1×10⁵ CFU/mL using both the strict anaerobic and microaerophilicconditions. Further, strict anaerobic conditions improved the detectionof C. butyricum. The assay was also able to detect the mixed clinicalisolates up to a concentration of 1×10² CFU/mL during the extendedkinetic read (i.e., 24 hours). Control assays performed under aerobicconditions confirmed the presence of anaerobic conditions, however, lowlevels of facultative anaerobes were detected in the assays usingclinical isolates.

Example 11 Simulated Performance of a Resazurin-Based Viable BacterialCell Quantitation Assay Using Anaerobic Bacterial Strains Using ExtendedKinetic Read Periods

To evaluate whether extending the period of time in which the kineticassay was read could improve the lower limit of detection of aresazurin-based viable bacterial cell quantitation assay (see, e.g., Vanden Driessche et al. (2014) 98: 31-4, incorporated herein by reference),the following experiment was performed.

Samples consisting of the aerobic bacterial strains Escherichia coli(ATCC 25922), Staphylococcus aureus (ATCC 29213), Klebsiella pneumoniae(ATCC 4352), Pseudomonas aeruginosa (ATCC 15442), Enterobacter aerogenes(ATCC 13048), Streptococcus mutans (ATCC 700610), Enterococcus faecalis(ATCC 49533), and Proteus mirabilis (ATCC 7002) were used to inoculateRCM media under aerobic conditions over a 24 hour period at 37° C. Eachpanel was prepared by diluting the bacteria in SJFA at a dynamic rangeof 10⁸ to 10² CFU/mL in liquid format, and total bacterial count (TBC)was determined using the resazurin assay described above in Examples 2-6using a 96-well flat plate format using a liquid format. Fluorescencewas detected using a Plate Reader photospectrometer with kineticreadings made at 550 nm excitation and 590 nm emission. PBS controlswere used to evaluate the media reduction effects and to serve as signalcontrol. The assays were run on three separate plates on three separatedays to accommodate the different growth profiled and conditions of thebacterial strains. The assay was performed kinetically up to 330 minutesand data was collected. The assay was also run for 20 hours (1,200minutes) and the data sets were compared.

As shown in FIGS. 133A-133H, 134A, 134B, 135A-135D, and 136A-136D, theassay was able to detect all of the bacterial strains over the entiredynamic range, with the exception of S. aureus (ATCC 29213) which had alowest level of detection (LLOD) of 1×10⁴ CFU/mL, and S. mutans (ATCC700610), which had an LLOD of 1×104 CFU/mL. Moreover, E. aerogenes (ATCC13048) exhibited a double peak (FIGS. 136A-136D) which appears to be afalse negative result attributable to in vitro growth conditions of thebacterial strain. Thus, this experiment demonstrates that extending theperiod of time in which the kinetic assay is read improves the lowerlimit of detection of the assay.

Analyte Diluting and Culturing Examples Example 1 Direct OpticalDetection of Bacterial Counts in Samples having a Dynamic Range of 10²CFU/mL to 10⁸ CFU/mL

The concentration of bacteria in a sample can be detected by measuringthe absorbance of light through the sample. Transmission (T) and OpticalDensity (OD) are two common ways to express the absorbance of light.Transmission (T) is normally expressed as a percentage or fraction ofunity (i.e. no absorbance and full transmission of light). OD isexpressed as the negative logarithm of transmission.

Typical optical detection systems include a container for holding thesample, as well as a light source and photodetector. OD₆₀₀ (theabsorbance, or optical density, of a sample measured at a wavelength of600 nm) is preferable to UV spectroscopy when measuring the growth overtime of a cell population because at this wavelength, the cells will notbe killed as may occur under UV light. UV light has also been shown tocause small to medium-sized mutations in bacteria, potentially alteringor destroying genes of interest or altering the growth behavior of abacterial population.

Experiments were conducted to evaluate the ability of a standardlaboratory bench top photospectrometer to accurately predict totalbacterial counts over a dynamic range of 10² CFU/mL to 10⁸ CFU/mL.Another objective was to evaluate the differences (if any) betweenquantifying Gram-Negative and Gram-Positive organism using OD.

Methods and Materials

Two bench top photospectrometers (Spec 1: SpectraMax M5, S/N MV 02773using Softmax Pro5 Software s/n SMP500-14128-ATVW, operating atAbsorbance 600 nm. Spec 2: Fisher Scientific, Cell Density Meter Model40, Serial Number 247, operating at standard setting (A=600 nm)) wereused to determine the CFU/mL of Gram-negative (Escherichia coli ATCC25922 and DH5-Alpha) and Gram-positive (Staphylococcus epidermidis ATCC12228) bacteria diluted phosphate buffered saline over a dynamic rangeof 10⁸ CFU/mL to 10² CFU/mL. Experiments were conducted in triplicate.

Results

Results from testing dilution series of two strains of E. coli(DH5-Alpha and ATCC 25922) and a strain of S. epidermidis (ATCC 12228)using two different spectrophotometers (OD Spec 1 and OD Spec 2) areshown in the following six tables and FIGS. 81-83.

Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SD OD Spec 1 ±SD OD Spec 2 ±SD % Trans ±SD EC 04.67E+09 9.67 0.03 0.961 0.020 1.00 0.092 11.33 0.162 EC 1 3.33E+08 8.520.13 0.186 0.008 0.13 0.012 65.15 1.166 EC 2 6.33E+07 7.80 0.30 0.0800.001 −0.01 0.006 83.25 0.126 EC 3 4.33E+05 5.64 0.63 0.068 0.001 −0.010.017 85.44 0.048 EC 4 4.47E+04 4.65 0.70 0.067 0.001 −0.01 0.006 85.780.063 EC 5 5.50E+03 3.74 0.04 0.066 0.000 −0.01 0.006 85.84 0.024 EC 64.17E+02 2.62 0.08 0.066 0.001 −0.02 0.006 85.81 0.052 EC 7 8.33E+011.92 1.79 0.022 0.038 −0.02 0.015 95.26 8.194E. coli DH5-Alpha mean results (n=3).

Test P S/NS 10{circumflex over ( )}8 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}7 0.0000S 10{circumflex over ( )}7 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.0000 S10{circumflex over ( )}6 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.0000 S10{circumflex over ( )}5 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.0241 S10{circumflex over ( )}4 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}3 0.1161 NS10{circumflex over ( )}3 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}2 0.1142 NSSignificance of distinguishing between dilutions tested usingnon-pairwise two-tailed Student's T-test (for statistical significance,p≤0.05) utilizing data from OD Spec 1.

Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SD OD Spec 1 ±SD OD Spec 2 ±SD % Trans ±SD EC 08.83E+09 9.95 0.06 1.179 0.006 1.31 0.010 6.65 0.122 EC 1 1.13E+09 9.050.12 0.237 0.003 0.21 0.030 57.98 0.376 EC 2 4.17E+08 8.62 0.48 0.0850.001 0.03 0.012 82.32 0.103 EC 3 9.83E+05 5.99 0.10 0.069 0.000 0.010.012 85.39 0.022 EC 4 9.83E+04 4.99 0.08 0.067 0.000 0.01 0.012 85.760.003 EC 5 1.03E+04 4.01 0.68 0.067 0.000 0.01 0.012 85.72 0.064 EC 61.00E+03 3.00 0.24 0.067 0.001 0.02 0.000 85.75 0.061 EC 7 1.00E+02 2.001.83 0.067 0.000 0.01 0.012 85.73 0.049E. coli ATCC 25922 mean results (n=3).

Test P S/NS 10{circumflex over ( )}8 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}7 0.0000S 10{circumflex over ( )}7 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.0000 S10{circumflex over ( )}6 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.0000 S10{circumflex over ( )}5 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.0132 S10{circumflex over ( )}4 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}3 0.3739 NS10{circumflex over ( )}3 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}2 0.3739 NSSignificance of distinguishing between dilutions tested usingnon-pairwise two-tailed Student's T-test (for statistical significance,p≤0.05) utilizing data from OD Spec 1.

Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SD OD Spec 1 ±SD OD Spec 2 ±SD % Trans ±SD EC 05.33E+08 8.73 0.08 1.250 0.015 1.40 0.023 5.63 0.199 EC 1 8.33E+07 7.920.02 0.231 0.003 0.22 0.017 58.68 0.399 EC 2 6.17E+06 6.79 0.23 0.0830.001 0.02 0.000 82.65 0.081 EC 3 7.17E+04 4.86 0.12 0.068 0.000 0.010.010 85.46 0.039 EC 4 5.83E+03 3.77 0.02 0.067 0.000 0.01 0.012 85.730.052 EC 5 5.33E+02 2.73 0.12 0.067 0.001 0.00 0.000 85.79 0.019 EC 61.67E+01 1.22 1.56 0.076 0.001 0.02 0.000 84.50 1.118 EC 7 0.00E+00 0.000.00 0.075 0.001 0.00 0.000 84.17 0.165S. epidermidis ATCC 12228 mean results (n=3).

Test P S/NS 10{circumflex over ( )}8 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}7 0.0000S 10{circumflex over ( )}7 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.0000 S10{circumflex over ( )}6 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.0000 S10{circumflex over ( )}5 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.0550 NS10{circumflex over ( )}4 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}3 0.6779 NS10{circumflex over ( )}3 Vs 10{circumflex over ( )}2 0.1161 NSSignificance of distinguishing between dilutions use tested usingnon-pairwise two-tailed Student's T-test (for statistical significance,p≤0.05) utilizing data from OD Spec 1.

The lower limit of detection for E. coli in a dilute carrier using ODwas determined to be about 10⁵ CFU/mL. The lower limit of detection forS. epidermidis in a dilute carrier using OD was determined to be about10⁶ CFU/mL. Of the two photospectrometers evaluated, only one (ODSpec 1) was able to determine CFU/mL levels below 10⁶ CFU/mL due todesign operational sensitivity. As shown in FIGS. 81-83, the detectionof bacteria in a dilute carrier is non-linear. Furthermore, standardlaboratory bench top photospectrometers do not appear to accuratelypredict total bacterial counts below 10⁶ CFU/mL in a dilute carrier.Accordingly, optical detection assays for the direct evaluation ofsamples from the GI tract appear to be limited to detecting bacterialcounts of 10⁶ CFU/mL and above and may not be useful for detectinglevels of bacteria associated with GI disorders such as SIBO.

Example 2 Optical Detection of Bacterial Counts in Incubated Samples

Experiments were performed to investigate the optical detection ofbacteria in samples that are incubated prior to a detection step. Theexperiments simulated an ingestible device that contains sterile mediawhich is inoculated by a sample from the GI tract and incubated intransit. Growth of the bacteria over time was tracked back to theinitial inoculum in order to provide an estimate of the initial inoculumdensity.

The experiments also evaluated the ability of OD methods to accuratelypredict total bacterial counts over a dynamic range that reflects thelevels of bacterial counts in the GI tract as well as evaluate thedifferences (if any) between the detection of Gram-Negative andGram-Positive bacteria.

Materials and Methods

A standard bench top photo spectrometer (Spec 1: SpectraMax M5, S/N MV02773 using Softmax Pro5 Software s/n SMP500-14128-ATVW, operating atAbsorbance 600 nm) was used to determine the CFU/mL of Gram-negative(Escherichia coli ATCC 25922) and Gram-positive (Staphylococcusepidermidis ATCC 12228) bacteria diluted in a standard growth media(Tryptic Soy Broth; TSB) over a dynamic range of 10⁴ CFU/mL to 10⁶CFU/mL over a re-growth and incubation period. Samples were tested afterincubating at 37° C. for t=0, t=1.5 hour, t=2.25 hours, t=3 hours, andt=4 hours. Experiments were conducted in triplicate.

Results

As shown in the following table and FIG. 84 the inoculation andincubation of sterile media with a bacterial sample and testing thesample for optical density allowed for the accurate prediction (p≤0.005)of the initial inoculum density.

The use of an incubation period followed by OD was able to predict theinitial inoculum density of E. coli ATCC 25922 (FIG. 84A) and S.epidermidis ATCC 12228 (FIG. 84B). An incubation time of about 4 hourswas used to reasonably predict the inoculum density of S. epidermidisATCC 12228. Resolution of the initial inoculum density could be obtainedat 2.25 and 3 hrs for E. coli ATCC 25922.

Under this test system, a standard laboratory bench topphoto-spectrometer accurately differentiated between initial inoculumdensities of 10⁴, 10⁵ and 10⁶ CFU/mL for both Gram-Negative andGram-Positive organisms after 4 hours incubation.

The use of a contained media/incubation system has several advantagesover preforming a direct OD analysis of a GI fluid sample such asjejunal fluid in order to determine bacterial counts. These includeusing a base line reading at time=0 as an internal control and toaccount for possible interference from GI fluids. The use of ananti-fungal agent (i.e. amphotericin B) in the inoculated media may alsobe used to prevent the growth of fungal counts from the system.

Time=0

SE T = 0 S. epidermidis ATCC 12228 Mean Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SD OD Spec 1±SD % Trans ±SD O/N 1.07E+09 9.03 0.23 0.911 0.001 12.49 0.021 SE 46.67E+04 4.82 0.29 0.081 0.001 59.52* 40.650 SE 5 5.67E+05 5.75 0.170.080 0.000 83.08 0.023 SE 6 9.67E+06 6.99 0.01 0.089 0.000 81.98 0.982*Off scale data point EC T = 0 E. coli ATCC 25922 Mean Code CFU/mL Log10±SD OD Spec 1 ±SD % Trans ±SD O/N 1.15E+08 8.06 0.11 0.902 0.003 11.191.223 EC 4 8.67E+05 5.94 0.08 0.086 0.000 82.06 0.007 EC 5 7.00E+06 6.850.25 0.083 0.000 82.67 0.011 EC 6 4.50E+07 7.65 0.53 0.094 0.001 80.600.014Time=1.5 hours

S. epidermidis ATCC 12228 SE T = 1.5 HRS OD % Mean Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SDSpec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD SE 4 1.25E+05 5.10 0.13 0.093 0.000 80.80 0.008 SE5 1.45E+06 6.16 0.25 0.080 0.000 83.10 0.010 SE 6 1.40E+07 7.15 0.140.094 0.000 80.52 0.018 E. coli ATCC 25922 EC T = 1.5 HRS OD % Mean CodeCFU/mL Log10 ±SD Spec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD EC 4 1.43E+06 6.16 0.12 0.0860.000 82.00 0.011 EC 5 9.33E+06 6.97 0.24 0.083 0.001 82.53 0.014 EC 61.70E+08 8.23 0.15 0.109 0.001 77.84 0.092Time=2.25 hours

S. epidermidis ATCC 12228 SE T = 2.25 HRS OD % Mean Code CFU/mL Log10±SD Spec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD SE 4 1.05E+05 5.02 0.15 0.127 0.001 74.92 0.142SE 5 1.07E+06 6.03 0.05 0.100 0.001 95.68 0.048 SE 6 1.22E+07 7.09 0.020.012 0.000 97.38 0.012 E. coli ATCC 25922 EC T = 2.25 HRS OD % MeanCode CFU/mL Log10 ±SD Spec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD EC 4 2.35E+06 6.37 0.03 0.1010.000 79.27 0.017 EC 5 3.98E+07 7.60 0.28 0.113 0.000 77.05 0.032 EC 69.25E+08 8.97 0.31 0.217 0.002 59.93 0.541Time=3 hours

S. epidermidis ATCC 12228 SE T = 3 HRS OD % Mean Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SDSpec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD SE 4 9.33E+04 4.97 0.12 0.118 0.001 76.08 0.125 SE5 6.25E+06 6.80 0.68 0.125 0.001 74.98 0.013 SE 6 1.05E+07 7.02 0.080.102 0.000 79.11 0.031 E. coli ATCC 25922 EC T = 3 HRS OD % Mean CodeCFU/mL Log10 ±SD Spec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD EC 4 9.67E+04 4.99 0.14 0.1630.001 68.65 0.076 EC 5 1.05E+06 6.02 0.08 0.218 0.003 60.27 0.145 EC 61.95E+07 7.29 0.02 0.668 0.001 21.78 0.303Time=4 hours

S. epidermidis ATCC 12228 SE T = 4 HRS OD % Mean Code CFU/mL Log10 ±SDSpec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD 5E4 1.80E+08 8.26 0.04 0.108 0.001 78.10 0.176 SE 52.10E+09 9.32 0.23 0.129 0.001 74.29 0.006 5E6 4.83E+09 9.68 0.16 0.5510.718 73.06 0.087 E. coli ATCC 25922 EC T = 4 HRS OD % Mean Code CFU/mLLog10 ±SD Spec 1 ±SD Trans ±SD EC 4 1.70E+07 7.23 0.20 0.223 0.001 60.100.214 EC 5 2.03E+08 8.31 0.12 0.445 0.003 35.90 0.177 EC 6 5.22E+09 9.720.20 0.955 0.008 11.17 0.065Results from testing incubated samples of E. coli and S. epidermidisusing OD 600 having an initial bacterial density of 10⁴, 10⁵ or 10⁶CFU/mL.

Example 3 OD Testing of Bacterial Samples in Small Sample Volumes andSimulated Jejunal Fluid

Additional experiments were performed similar to those described inExample 2 to assess the robustness of the method using two differentsample volumes (200 μL and 50 μL). For these experiments a plate readerwas used in place of a benchtop photospectrometer. Experiments were alsoperformed to evaluate possible interference effects due to jejunalfluids by testing an inoculum diluted in Fasted State SimulatedIntestinal Fluid Version Two (FaSSIF-V2) available from BioRelevant,London UK (Cat: V2FA501 Lot: 02-1408-07, pH 6.5)

Materials and Methods

Experiments were performed using a plate reader photospectrometer inorder to estimate the CFU/mL of Gram-negative (Escherichia coli ATCC25922) and Gram-positive (Staphylococcus epidermidis ATCC 12228)bacterial samples inoculated into a standard growth media (TSB) havingan initial bacterial concentration of 10⁶ CFU/mL to 10⁴ CFU/mL followingan incubation period or between 0 hours and 5 hours. The FaSSF-V2interference tests utilized an initial bacteria concentration made up to10⁵ CFU/mL in FaSSF-V2 and added to a well containing nutrient buffer(FLUKA Tryptic Soy Broth; L/N BCBL6035V). Bacterial samples werecombined in a 1:1 ratio (vol/vol) with nutrient buffer (e.g. 25 μL ofsample was added to 25 μL TSB, or 100 μL sample was added to 100 μLTSB). Two separate sets of experiments were performed and theexperiments in each set were conducted in quintuplicate (n=5).

Results

The following table shows representative data and FIGS. 85-88 show rawdata presented as optical density (A 600 nm) and % transmittance foreach strain tested over a dynamic range of 10⁴ CFU/mL, 10⁵ CFU/mL and10⁶ CFU/mL using test volumes of 50 or 200 μL. Initial readings attime=0, shortly after (less than 1 minute) the sample was combined withthe media were recorded and may be used to set a baseline.

2 hours is approximately 6 bacterial generations and is about theminimum incubation time to detect discrete differences between theinitial sample concentrations. After an incubation time of 3 hours,there is good discrete resolution between initial sample concentrations.After an incubation time of 4.5 hours, the OD measurements still providediscrete resolution between the different initial sample concentrations.However, as the incubation time is extended, it is expected that adecrease in resolution may occur as the concentration of bacteria and ODmeasurements increase beyond the dynamic range of the assay.

Measuring the OD of incubated samples was able to accuratelydifferentiate between initial inoculum densities of 10⁴, 10⁵ and 10⁶CFU/mL for both Gram-Negative and Gram-Positive organisms after betweenabout 2 and 4 hours incubation. The use of a 50 μL sample size had nonegative impacts on resolution or assay function. Accordingly, smallersample volumes such as those used within an ingestible device areexpected to accurately differentiate between inoculum densities at leastbetween 10⁴ and 10⁶. Furthermore, the presence of simulated jejunalfluid constituents had no significant impacts on resolution or assayfunction.

Time=0 Optical Density (A600 nm)

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 0.05076 0.000378 0.74% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.05026 0.000230.46% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.0486 0.000122 0.25% SE 10{circumflexover ( )}5 0.0486 0.000566 1.16% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.048260.000195 0.40% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.0486 0.000524 1.08% 200 EC10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.0586 0.0003 0.51% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}60.05668 0.001114 1.97% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.05228 0.0004490.86% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.05204 0.000513 0.99% EC10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.05162 0.000228 0.44% SE 10{circumflex over( )}4 0.05124 0.000365 0.71% 50 FEC 0.04692 0.000342 0.73% FSE 0.046860.000385 0.82% 200 FEC 0.04858 0.00013 0.27% FSE 0.04848 0.000683 1.41%

Time=0% Transmittance

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 88.96929 0.077465 0.09% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 89.071760.047212 0.05% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 89.41287 0.025212 0.03% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 89.41292 0.116413 0.13% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 89.4829 0.040165 0.04% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 89.412910.107928 0.12% 200 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 87.37759 0.060358 0.07%SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 87.76496 0.225133 0.26% EC 10{circumflexover ( )}5 88.65846 0.091745 0.10% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 88.707480.10469 0.12% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 88.79327 0.046621 0.05% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 88.87101 0.074608 0.08% 50 FEC 89.759430.070709 0.08% FSE 89.77184 0.079515 0.09% 200 FEC 89.41698 0.0268460.03% FSE 89.43766 0.140643 0.16%Time=2 hours Optical Density (A600 nm)

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 0.09496 0.019572 20.61% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.059780.000811  1.36% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.05656 0.005479  9.69% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.05296 0.007494 14.15% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 0.04966 0.000313  0.63% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.048680.000901  1.85% 200 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.17412 0.00476  2.73%SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.0858 0.04698 54.76% EC 10{circumflex over( )}5 0.07048 0.001542  2.19% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.055740.008028 14.40% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.05366 0.000416  0.78% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.05154 0.001343  2.61% 50 FEC 0.05248 0.004659 8.88% FSE 0.04892 0.002437  4.98% 200 FEC 0.06332 0.001865  2.94% FSE0.05088 0.005232 10.28%Time=2 hours % Transmittance

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 80.42426 3.536326 4.40% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 87.140610.162647  0.19% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 87.79454 1.098591 1.25% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 88.53018 1.510366  1.71% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 89.19491 0.064304 0.07% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 89.396550.185424  0.21% 200 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 66.97317 0.731932 1.09%SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 82.4395 8.278532 10.04% EC 10{circumflexover ( )}5 85.02021 0.301153 0.35% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 87.966821.605999  1.83% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 88.37718 0.084642 0.10% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 88.80996 0.274631  0.31% 50 FEC 88.621670.947562 1.07% FSE 89.34813 0.499954  0.56% 200 FEC 86.43372 0.3718560.43% FSE 88.94982 1.063177  1.20%Time=3 hours Optical Density (A600 nm)

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 0.17258 0.016967 9.83% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.1019 0.004229 4.15% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.06378 0.002404 3.77% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.0569 0.005458  9.59% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 0.05122 0.000904 1.76% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.0495 0.001382 2.79% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.41688 0.014442 3.46% SE10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.15826 0.148057 93.55% EC 10{circumflex over( )}5 0.13256 0.003445 2.60% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.070740.036146 51.10% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.06532 0.000928 1.42% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.05412 0.006027 11.14% 50 FEC 0.05918 0.0017632.98% FSE 0.05126 0.005307 10.35% 200 FEC 0.1338 0.006236 4.66% FSE0.06366 0.033788 53.08%Time=3 hours % Transmittance

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 67.24879 2.617102 3.89% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 79.089070.769339  0.97% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 86.34264 0.478239 0.55% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 87.7258 1.094922  1.25% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 88.87523 0.185061 0.21% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 89.228120.283507  0.32% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 38.3101 1.285504 3.36% SE10{circumflex over ( )}6 72.27026 19.29999 26.71% EC 10{circumflex over( )}5 73.69719 0.584028 0.79% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 85.195926.697644  7.86% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 86.03612 0.183721 0.21% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 88.29036 1.214937  1.38% 50 FEC 87.261540.354801 0.41% FSE 88.87217 1.077773  1.21% 200 FEC 73.4913 1.0597531.44% FSE 86.56754 6.385675  7.38%Time=4.5 hours Optical Density (A600 nm)

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 0.22736 0.026112 11.49% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.22590.009883  4.37% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.13502 0.009231  6.84% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.08518 0.035907  42.15% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 0.06162 0.003552  5.76% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.05260.004575  8.70% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.53434 0.032055  6.00% SE10{circumflex over ( )}6 0.2615 0.165496  63.29% EC 10{circumflex over( )}5 0.35818 0.03018  8.43% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 0.132560.138883 104.77% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.13744 0.006781  4.93% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 0.07006 0.036316  51.84% 50 FEC 0.090560.004601  5.08% FSE 0.06224 0.016994  27.30% 200 FEC 0.30832 0.009083 2.95% FSE 0.1017 0.107891 106.09%Time=4.5 hours % Transmittance

Volume Sample Mean SD CV Sample Mean SD CV 50 EC 10{circumflex over( )}6 59.32856 3.530779 5.95% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 59.45521.34997  2.27% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}5 73.29227 1.549138 2.11% SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 82.40721 6.450136  7.83% EC 10{circumflex over( )}4 86.7744 0.709678 0.82% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}4 88.597040.927041  1.05% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 29.28356 2.22116 7.59% SE10{circumflex over ( )}6 57.49285 16.66898 28.99% EC 10{circumflex over( )}5 43.92071 3.108927 7.08% SE 10{circumflex over ( )}5 76.3387719.42472 25.45% EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 72.87896 1.130378 1.55% SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 85.33154 6.738642  7.90% 50 FEC 81.181950.857394 1.06% FSE 86.70049 3.30725  3.81% 200 FEC 49.17635 1.0346052.10% FSE 80.88278 16.85387 20.84%Results from testing different initial concentrations of E. coli (EC)and S. epidermidis (SE) using 50 μL and 200 μL samples.

Example 4 Testing of Bacterial Samples under Conditions that Simulate anIngestible Device in the GI Tract

Experiments were performed in order to simulate an ingestible devicethat contains sterile media that is inoculated with a sample of fluidfrom the GI tract and incubated in transit. The experiments weredesigned to evaluate whether the assay could predict total bacterialcounts over a dynamic range of 10³ CFU/mL to 10⁷ CFU/mL under a seriesof different conditions of pH, bile acids, fungal strains, mucinconcentrations. The samples were also incubated under conditions ofshear forces and temperature that simulate conditions of an ingestibledevice in transit within the GI tract.

Materials and Methods

Gram-negative (Escherichia coli ATCC 25922) and Gram-positive(Staphylococcus epidermidis ATCC 12228) bacterial cultures were dilutedin a standard growth media (TSB) over a dynamic range of 10⁷ CFU/mL to10³ CFU/mL. The assay utilized 50 μL sample volumes, under shear (110rpm) and at body temperature (37° C.) over a 4 hour incubation period tosimulate transit of an ingestible device within the GI tract.Experiments were performed under various conditions as indicatedincluding: different pH levels (6.5, 7.0 and 7.8); differentconcentrations of bile acids (1.4, 3 and 5.5 mM; Oxgall Sigma Aldrich,SKU B3883); the presence of fungal cells (C. albicans at 0, 1×10³CFU/mL) with or without modified anti-fungal recovery media (TSBcontaining 2.5 mg/L Amphotericin B (Sigma-Aldrich, P/N A9528); anddifferent concentrations of mucin (0.5%, 1% and 1.5%). Experiments wereconducted in quintuplicate. All testing was completed in simulatedjejunal fluid (FaSSIF-V2; available from BioRelevant (London, UK) Cat:V2FA501 Lot: 02-1408-07, pH 6.5) using a 50 μL sample volume and a 4hour incubation period.

Results

Results from testing the bacterial samples under different conditionsare shown in the following two tables (E. coli, S. epidermidis) as wellas FIGS. 89-96.

Bile

As shown in FIG. 89 (E. coli) and FIG. 93 (S. epidermidis) the presenceof bile reduced the optical density of the samples relative to thegrowth control. The observed reduction in OD increased with increasedbile concentration. This did not limit the ability of the assay toresolve discrete differences in initial inoculum density. The lowerlimit of detection was 10⁴ CFU/mL.

Mucin

Mucin at 1.5% limited the ability of the assay to predict initialinoculum concentration of S. epidermidis to 10⁶ CFU/mL, however theassay was able to accurately resolve differences in the initial inoculumdensity when greater than 10⁵ CFU/mL at 1% and 0.5% mucin concentrations(FIG. 94).

Under the conditions tested, mucin did not have any significant impacton the optical density of samples of E. coli relative to the growthcontrol. The addition of mucin up to a concentration of 1.5% did notlimit the ability of the assay to resolve discrete differences in theinitial inoculum density. The lower limit of detection was 10⁴ CFU/mL.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 95, increasing the pH reduced the opticaldensity of the tested samples compared to the growth control. This didnot limit the ability of the assay to resolve discrete differences ininitial inoculum density. The lower limit of detection was 10⁴ CFU/mL.

Fungal Contamination

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 96, fungal contamination did not limit theability of the assay to resolve discrete differences in initial inoculumdensity. The lower limit of detection was 10⁴ CFU/mL. The addition ofamphotericin B reduced the background fungal growth (as determined byplate counts and reduced optical density) and did not impact the abilityof the assay to resolve discrete differences in initial inoculumdensity.

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Growth Control

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1739 0.1333 0.0665 0.0504 0.0511 SD 0.0048 0.02220.0056 0.0010 0.0020 CV 2.73% 16.68% 8.36% 1.95% 3.84%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Bile 3.3 mM

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1348 0.1210 0.0679 0.0432 0.0393 SD 0.0104 0.00860.0056 0.0004 0.0004 CV 7.68% 7.11% 8.26% 0.99% 1.06%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Bile 4 mM

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1292 0.1152 0.0627 0.0427 0.0392 SD 0.0124 0.00930.0043 0.0005 0.0003 CV 9.58% 8.11% 6.87% 1.23% 0.67%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Bile 5.5 mM

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1447 0.1138 0.0625 0.0481 0.0395 SD 0.0130 0.00290.0058 0.0093 0.0002 CV 9.00% 2.57% 9.25% 19.37% 0.49%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Mucin 0.5%

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1643 0.1451 0.0909 0.0540 0.0496 SD 0.0073 0.01090.0020 0.0003 0.0008 CV 4.43% 7.52% 2.25% 0.60% 1.57%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Mucin 1.0%

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1484 0.1319 0.0965 0.0562 0.0511 SD 0.0268 0.01580.0027 0.0038 0.0030 CV 18.06% 12.02% 2.76% 6.70% 5.79%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Bile 1.5%

EC EC Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 10{circumflex over ( )}4 10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1583 0.1496 0.0948 0.0620 0.0575 SD 0.0182 0.0038 0.00320.0012 0.0004 CV 11.53% 2.54% 3.33% 1.97% 0.68%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 pH 6.5

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1383 0.1036 0.0525 0.0416 0.0402 SD 0.0271 0.01740.0095 0.0026 0.0006 CV 19.62% 16.79% 18.04% 6.28% 1.48%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 pH 7.0

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1432 0.1026 0.0566 0.0422 0.0399 SD 0.0175 0.02070.0139 0.0020 0.0016 CV 12.24% 20.22% 24.55% 4.76% 3.98%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 pH 8.0

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1530 0.0868 0.0507 0.0424 0.0389 SD 0.0481 0.01350.0098 0.0043 0.0004 CV 31.43% 15.55% 19.34% 10.09% 0.95%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Yeast

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6 EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1468 0.1267 0.0782 0.0531 0.0495 SD 0.0256 0.01750.0059 0.0032 0.0049 CV 17.47% 13.85% 7.52% 6.06% 9.81%

-   -   E. coli ATCC 25922 Yeast+Amphotericin B

Sample EC 10{circumflex over ( )}7 EC 10{circumflex over ( )}6EC10{circumflex over ( )}5 EC10{circumflex over ( )}4 EC10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1274 0.1038 0.0562 0.0432 0.0410 SD 0.0181 0.02030.0056 0.0020 0.0011 CV 14.21% 19.53% 10.03% 4.73% 2.71%Results from testing the OD (600 nm) of different initial concentrationsof E. coli ATCC 25922 under various conditions of mucin, bile pH andyeast after a 4 hour incubation.

-   -   Growth Control—S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE 10{circumflexover ( )}3 Mean 0.1443 0.1061 0.0576 0.0516 0.0510 SD 0.0074 0.00870.0015 0.0009 0.0013 CV 5.10% 8.18% 2.58% 1.81% 2.59%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Bile 3.3 mM

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1373 0.0602 0.0413 0.0396 0.0398 SD 0.0086 0.0080 0.00030.0002 0.0005 CV 6.23% 13.22% 0.63% 0.55% 1.14%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Bile 4 mM

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1179 0.0493 0.0400 0.0392 0.0400 SD 0.0068 0.0026 0.00030.0003 0.0004 CV 5.76% 5.29% 0.85% 0.83% 1.08%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Bile 5.5 mM

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.0907 0.0449 0.0422 0.0400 0.0397 SD 0.0073 0.0010 0.00320.0004 0.0003 CV 8.07% 2.26% 7.49% 0.98% 0.70%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Mucin 0.5%

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1550 0.0616 0.0503 0.0495 0.0489 SD 0.0090 0.0007 0.00160.0005 0.0008 CV 5.78% 1.06% 3.26% 1.05% 1.65%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Mucin 1.0%

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1340 0.0650 0.0562 0.0587 0.0689 SD 0.0162 0.0105 0.00250.0008 0.0007 CV 12.11% 16.14% 4.44% 1.32% 1.00%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Mucin 1.5%

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1177 0.0841 0.0851 0.0916 0.0857 SD 0.0112 0.0094 0.00670.0063 0.0094 CV 9.50% 11.20% 7.93% 6.83% 10.98%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 pH 6.5

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1104 0.0587 0.0420 0.0401 0.0398 SD 0.0167 0.0047 0.00080.0004 0.0005 CV 15.12% 7.98% 2.01% 1.08% 1.18%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 pH 7.0

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1373 0.0624 0.0411 0.0394 0.0394 SD 0.0304 0.0128 0.00060.0004 0.0006 CV 22.17% 20.56% 1.38% 1.10% 1.41%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 pH 8.0

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1570 0.0591 0.0410 0.0389 0.0390 SD 0.0149 0.0062 0.00110.0009 0.0006 CV 9.49% 10.52% 2.69% 2.32% 1.47%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 Yeast

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.1216 0.0640 0.0544 0.0518 0.0501 SD 0.0117 0.0078 0.00650.0051 0.0044 CV 9.59% 12.11% 12.02% 9.83% 8.70%

-   -   S. epiderimidis ATCC Yeast Amphotericin B

Sample SE 10{circumflex over ( )}7 SE 10{circumflex over ( )}6 SE10{circumflex over ( )}5 SE10{circumflex over ( )}4 SE10{circumflex over( )}3 Mean 0.0971 0.0611 0.0454 0.0437 0.0425 SD 0.0237 0.0097 0.00260.0015 0.0015 CV 24.37% 15.91% 5.75% 3.53% 3.48%Results from testing OD (600 nm) for samples of different initialconcentrations of S. epiderimidis ATCC 12228 under various conditions ofmucin, bile pH and yeast after a 4 hour incubation.

Example 5 Development of a Miniature OD Reader for Use in an IngestibleDevice

Experiments were performed to assess a low-cost miniature opticaldetection system suitable for use in an ingestible device.

Materials and Methods

An exemplary miniature optical detection system was assembled using aKingbright 1608SURCK LED centered around 640 nanometers with a maximumluminous intensity of approximately 80 millicandela. The LED was drivenby a bipolar junction transistor constant current source. An operationalamplifier provided a servo arrangement to set the current through thetransistor proportional to the input voltage to the operationalamplifier. This precisely linearly modulates the light output of the LEDproportional to the applied voltage. The detector was an OSRAM SFH 2430photodiode. This photodiode features a large active area (7 mm²) and hasa spectral response fairly well-matched to the LED. The photodiode wasused in the low-speed photovoltaic mode as it provides better linearityand lower dark current than the higher-speed photoconductive mode. AMAX9617 zero-drift chopper operational amplifier used as atransconductance amplifier to convert the small photocurrents to areadable voltage.

The LED and photodiode were mounted on separate tabs and inserted intoheader sockets so that the LED and photodiode were approximately alignedvertically with a gap between them. A 3D printed shroud isolated the LEDand photodiode from ambient light and provided a slot to hold the 50 μLcuvette. Data acquisition was accommodated through a standard BNC Jack.Current data acquisition in the BSL-2 lab was acquired through the useof voltage detection through a standard QMS multimeter.

Test measurements were performed by passing a DC-offset signal generatorsource through the system. Square, sine, and ramp waveforms were allreproduced faithfully. (Data not Shown).

Prior to testing with live bacterial cultures, the miniature OD readerwas tested utilizing a dilution range of optically appropriate dye(0.25% w/v CoomassR-250). A dilution range was prepared from 100% to1.562% in sterile 0.9% saline. Serial dilutions were prepared X2 inquintuplicate. 50 μL Samples were read in parallel using the miniaturedevice and compared to a standard high performance bench topphotospectrometer S/N 01164 (Spec 1: SpectraMax M5, S/N MV 02773 usingSoftmax Pro5 Software s/n SMP500-14128-ATVW, operating at Absorbance 600nm).

For testing the miniature OD reader with live bacterial cultures, anovernight culture of E. coli ATCC 25922 was prepared in Tryptic SoyBroth. Samples having a calibrated dynamic concentration range of 10⁷CFU/mL, 10⁶ CFU/mL and 10⁵ CFU/mL were then prepared in sterile 0.9%saline. Plate counts were performed to confirm cell density. 50 μLsamples were read in parallel using the miniature OD reader and comparedto a standard high performance bench top spectrophotometer (Spec 2:Fisher Scientific, Cell Density Meter Model 40, Serial Number 247,operating at standard setting (A=600 nm)). Testing was performed intriplicate.

Results

Results of pre-qualification dye testing (repeated in quintuplicate)using Coomassie R-250 are shown in FIG. 97. Within the context of thetest matrix and test conditions, the miniature OD reader performedwithin similar specifications to the standard bench topspectrophotometer. Both the miniature OD reader and laboratory gradespectrophotometer had lower resolutions (and increased CV) as theconcentration of the dye approached 100%. 0% dye (baseline data) for theminiature OD reader had an increased CV (3.48% vs. 0.25%) compared tothe laboratory grade spectrophotometer. This is likely due to reducedlight path and alignment issues as a result of the higher tolerancesbuilt into the 3D printed shroud to allow for large sample cuvettes.

Results of biological testing of the miniature OD reader with E. coli(repeated in triplicate) are shown in FIG. 98. Within the context of thetest matrix and test conditions, the miniature OD reader performedwithin similar specifications to the standard bench topspectrophotometer it was compared against. Both the miniature OD readerand laboratory grade spectrophotometer had good resolutions within thedynamic range tested.

At a concentration of 0 CFU/mL (baseline data) the miniature OD readerhad an increased CV (0.39% vs. 0.01%) compared to the laboratory gradespectrophotometer. This was also seen at 10⁶ CFU/mL. Again, this islikely due to reduced light path and alignment issues as a result of thehigher tolerances built into the 3D printed shroud to allow for largesample cuvettes. Addition modifications and alignment of the miniatureOD reader should further improve resolution of the device for use in aningestible device.

While the miniature OD reader exhibited increased CV relative to thelaboratory grade spectrophotometer, it was still capable of quantifyingthe concentration of bacteria in cell culture samples. Furthermore, theminiature OD reader can readily be used to detect the presence orabsence of bacterial growth in a sample as a relative increase in the ODof the sample over time

Example 6 Detection of Bacterial Counts in a Serial Dilution Using SmallSample Volumes

Additional experiments were conducted to investigate the detection ofbacterial counts in serial dilutions using small sample volumes. Use ofa serial dilution may allow for the detection of a broader range ofinitial bacterial densities within the dynamic range of the OD assay.The use of a serial dilution may also allow for the prediction ofinitial bacterial density based on the binary detection of the presenceor absence of bacterial growth within each serial dilution. Thissimplifies the desired property that the response of the miniature ODreader accurately reflect the concentration of bacteria within thesample chamber and merely involves the OD reader detect whether or notbacterial growth has occurred. Experiments were conducted to simulateserial dilutions made from a small initial sample volume (˜5 μL) in aseries of dilution chambers in an ingestible device each containing apre-determined amount of growth media (˜45 μL).

Materials and Methods

Cultures of Gram-negative (Escherichia coli ATCC 25922) andGram-positive (Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 29213) bacteria were generatedin Tryptic Soy Broth (TSB) prepared according to manufacturer'sdirections. Bacterial cultures were diluted in Phosphate Buffered Saline(Gibco Ref 10010-023; Lot 1764980, pH 6.8) over a dynamic range of 10⁸CFU/mL to 0 CFU/mL. The concentration of the bacterial cultures wasconfirmed by plating on Tryptic Soy Agar (TSA).

10×, 100×, 1,000× and 10,000× serial dilutions of 5 μL samples of E.coli and S. epidermidis at initial concentrations from 0 (negativecontrol) to 10⁸ CFU/mL were then generated in 96 well microtiter platesin a 50 μL total volume of TSB. The plates were incubated for 16 hoursat 35°±2° C. at 200 RPM before measuring the OD of each sample at 600 nmusing a plate reader. The experiment was run in triplicate (3 Repeats).

Results

The following table provides the theoretical number of individualbacterial organisms within different sample volumes for initial sampleshaving a bacterial concentration between 10³ CFU/ml and 10⁸ CFU/ml. Fora sample having an initial bacterial concentration of 10⁴ CFU/ml, a 5 μlsample contains about 50 CFUs or bacteria. A 10× dilution of the initial5 μl sample contains about 5 CFUs or bacteria. A 100× dilution of theinitial 5 μl sample is unlikely to contain more than one bacteria(theoretically 0.5 CFUs). A 1,000× dilution is unlikely to contain anybacteria (theoretically 0.05 CFUs or bacteria). Diluted samples that arestatistically unlikely to contain more than one bacteria are unlikely toshown bacterial growth and an associated increase in OD when incubatedin growth media. By generating a dilution series such that at least onesample in the series contains one or more CFUs and at least one samplein the series does not contain any CFUs, it is possible to estimate theapproximate concentration of bacteria in the initial sample by detectingthe presence of absence of growth in the samples.

Volume (ml) (μl) 1.00E+03 1.00E+04 1.00E+05 1.00E+06 1.00E+07 1.00E+080.001 1  1  10  100  1000  10000  100000 0.005 5   5*   50*   500*  5000*   50000*   500000* 0.01 10  10  100  1000  10000  100000 1000000 0.02 20  20  200  2000  20000  200000  2000000 0.03 30  30  300 3000  30000  300000  3000000 0.05 50  50  500  5000  50000  500000 5000000 0.075 75  75  750  7500  75000  750000  7500000 0.1 100 1001000 10000 100000 1000000 10000000Theoretical numbers of bacteria within different sample volumes across arange of 10³ to 10⁸ CFU/ml. *=theoretical number of bacteria for asample volume of 5 μl at various initial concentrations.

The following table shows the expected results of growth (cells with“X”) or no growth (empty cells) for a dilution series based on aninitial 5 μl sample with bacterial concentrations ranging from 10⁸ to 0CFU/ml.

Chamber Media Input Dilution 10⁸ 10⁷ 10⁶ 10⁵ 10⁴ 10³ 10² 10¹ 0 1 45 uL 5uL    10X X X X X X X X 2 45 uL 5 uL   100x X X X X X X 3 45 uL 5 uL 1,000x X X X X X 4 45 uL 5 uL 10,000x X X X XExpected pattern of growth/no growth for a dilution series of bacteriaat initial sample concentrations of 0 to 10⁸ CFU/ml. Empty cellsrepresent no expected bacteria or growth; cells with “X” representexpected growth.

The following table shows the experimental results from incubating adilutions series of E. coli or S. aureus cultures in a 96 well plate for16 hours followed by measuring the OD of each well. The assay showed abinary response and clearly distinguished between wells that exhibitedgrowth and a corresponding increase in OD and wells that did not exhibitany bacterial growth. The visual appearance of part of a 96 well platecontaining serial dilutions of S. aureus after incubation for 16 hoursis shown in FIG. 99. Wells that exhibited bacterial growth are readilydistinguished by a cloudy appearance compared to wells that did notcontain any CFU and did not exhibit any bacterial growth.

The OD for cells expected to contain more than 1 CFU did not necessarilyincrease in samples that contained a higher initial concentration ofbacteria. Accordingly, shorter incubation times may also provide binaryresults with respect to determining the presence or absence of bacterialgrowth within dilution samples.

Rep 1 Dil. 10⁸ 10⁷ 10⁶ 10⁵ 10⁴ 10⁵ 10² 10¹ 0 E. coli    10X 0.16676*0.21836* 0.19176* 0.19726* 0.08216* 0.22276* 0.21336* 0.21126* 0.00376  100x 0.18846* 0.24286* 0.21806* 0.23596* 0.24406* 0.24706* 0.002560.00326 0.00216  1,000x 0.24026* 0.29146* 0.23136* 0.24576* 0.26736*0.00296 0.00196 0.00306 0.00056 10,000x 0.29436* 0.28946* 0.27426*0.28086* 0.00136 0.00246 0.00106 0.00196 0.00046 S.    10X 0.29706*0.27506* 0.25366* 0.16046* 0.19186* 0.20196* 0.22216* 0.00116 0.00086aureus   100x 0.16876* 0.09296* 0.15956* 0.09466* 0.14066* 0.12216*0.00066 0.00136 −0.00064  1,000x 0.09536* 0.07506* 0.09106* 0.09046*0.07576* 6E−05 0.00026 −0.00044 −0.00034 10,000x 0.09106* 0.08776*0.09746* 0.08326* 0.01946 0.00066 0.00056 0.00046 −0.00034 Rep 2 Dil.10⁸ 10⁷ 10⁶ 10⁵ 10⁴ 10³ 10² 10¹ 0 E. coli    10X 0.21968* 0.19858*0.21688* 0.22928* 0.24658* 0.22718* 0.26508* 0.00248 0.00388   100x0.22248* 0.23578* 0.24018* 0.25708* 0.26868* 0.26378* 0.00288 0.004280.00208  1,000x 0.25848* 0.28168* 0.26978* 0.26718* 0.26718* 0.002180.00118 0.00248 0.00068 10,000x 0.32398* 0.31988* 0.27258* 0.27938*−0.00012 0.00258 0.00038 0.00198 0.00028 S.    10X 0.32518* 0.31738*0.26428* 0.31508* 0.20918* 0.24698* 0.29648* 0.00028 −2E−05 aureus  100x 0.36178* 0.32758* 0.30898* 0.26408* 0.25748* 0.00078 0.000380.00078 −0.00062  1,000x 0.33968* 0.31208* 0.26818* 0.31538* 0.28798*0.00018 0.00068 0.00068 0.00118 10,000x 0.31388* 0.27688* 0.27578*0.28988* 0.00058 −2E−05 −0.00022 −0.00022 −0.00082 Rep 3 Dil. 10⁸ 10⁷10⁶ 10⁵ 10⁴ 10³ 10² 10¹ 0 E. coli    10X 0.27164* 0.23844* 0.22834*0.23974* 0.25164* 0.26804* 0.25984* 0.00224 0.00894   100x 0.30464*0.29534* 0.26794* 0.27094* 0.26474* 0.29604* 0.00214 0.00424 0.00294 1,000x 0.27224* 0.32274* 0.29104* 0.26684* 0.00104 0.00164 0.000640.00344 0.00534 10,000x 0.36004* 0.34164* 0.32164* 0.34874* 0.001140.00124 0.00594 0.00244 0.00094 S.    10X 0.36064* 0.34184* 0.29064*0.31634* 0.25164* 0.26924* −0.00016 0.00384 −6E−05 aureus   100x0.38244* 0.34314* 0.34474* 0.30034* 0.17124* 0.00324 0.00204 0.00504−0.00086  1,000x 0.39924* 0.35684* 0.28994* 0.28854* 0.10174* 0.005440.00154 0.00434 0.00034 10,000x 0.33174* 0.29154* 0.34714* 0.28974*4E−05 0.00054 0.00074 0.00324 −0.00036 OD results following a 16 hourincubation for serial dilutions of different initial concentrations ofE. coli and S. aureus. Values with asterisks (*) are representative ofbacterial growth, and values without asterisksare not. Dil. = Dilution.

LOCI Examples Example 1 TNFα Detection and Quantification in Samplesusing Various Concentrations of the Biotinylated Antibody, AcceptorBeads, and Donor Beads

Assay components, including Biotinylated Antibody, Donor Beads andAcceptor Beads, were combined in a test matrix to optimize utilizationin a homogenous test environment (i.e. on a sample pad within aningestible device, such as an ingestible smart capsule). Concentrationsof the Biotinylated Antibody, Donor Beads and Acceptor Beads were variedin a test matrix and assay sensitivity was compared across the testmatrix.

Test I: Varying Concentrations of the Acceptor Beads and Donor Beads.Experimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidign (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100 μLmilli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 384-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-384 (Cat #6007290) were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston,Mass., USA). All data were analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1,BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.). GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads with a gainof 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120 msec,integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

A standard curve of pTNFα was prepared according to the kit instructionswith a range of 300,000 pg/mL in 5 μL to 1 pg/mL in 5 μL. Four bufferonly samples were loaded and treated as blanks for zero analyte controlreads. The standard curve and samples were loaded in white 384 wellmicrotitire plates.

Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   Once the standard dilutions and samples (10, 3, 1 pg/mL in 5 μL)        were added to the plate, the acceptor beads were added to the        appropriate wells. Either 2 or 1 μL of Acceptor beads was used.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate to prevent cross        contamination during incubation.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 2 hours.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   The plate was removed from the incubator, and the plate seal was        removed and discarded.    -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        to each well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 1 hour.

Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the Dark)

-   -   The plate was removed from the incubator, and the plate seal was        removed and discarded.    -   Using a multichannel pipette add either 10 or 5 uL of SA-Donor        Beads to each well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 30 minutes

Immediately after 30 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve. The results of this test are summarized inFIG. 100.

Test II: Varying Concentrations of the Acceptor Beads and Donor Beads.Experimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidign (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100 μLmilli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 384-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-384 (Cat #6007290) were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston,Mass., USA). All data were analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1,BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.) using GEN 5 Software version3.02.1 utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads witha gain of 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120msec, integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

A standard curve of pTNFα was prepared according to the kit instructionswith a range of 300,000 pg/mL in 5 μL to 1 pg/mL in 5 μL. Four bufferonly samples were loaded and treated as blanks for zero analyte controlreads. The standard curve and samples were loaded in white 384 wellmicrotitire plates.

Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   Once the standard dilutions and samples (10, 3, 1 pg/mL in 5 μL)        were added to the plate, the acceptor beads were added to the        appropriate wells. Either 2 or 1 μL of Acceptor beads was used.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate to prevent cross        contamination during incubation.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 2 hours.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   The plate was removed from the incubator, and the plate seal was        removed and discarded.    -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        to each well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 1 hour.

Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the Dark)

-   -   The plate was removed from the incubator, and the plate seal was        removed and discarded.    -   Using a multichannel pipette add 10 μL of SA-Donor Beads to each        well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 30 minutes.

Immediately after 30 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve. The results of this test are summarized inFIG. 101.

Test III: Varying Concentrations of the Biotinylated AntibodyExperimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidign (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100 μLmilli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 384-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-384 (Cat #6007290) were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston,Mass., USA). All data were analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1,BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.) using GEN 5 Software version3.02.1 utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads witha gain of 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120msec, integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

A standard curve of pTNFα was prepared according to the kit instructionswith a range of 300,000 pg/mL in 5 μL to 1 pg/mL in 5 μL. Four bufferonly samples were loaded and treated as blanks for zero analyte controlreads. The standard curve and samples were loaded in white 384 wellmicrotitire plates.

Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   Once the standard dilutions and samples (10, 3, 1 pg/mL in 5 μL)        were added to the plate, the acceptor beads were added to the        appropriate wells. Either 2 or 1 μL of Acceptor beads was used.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        and hydroxyl propyl cyclodextrin to each well containing        solution.

Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the Dark)

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add either 5 or 10 μL of SA-Donor        Beads coated with HABA to each well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 30 minutes.

Immediately after 30 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve. The results of this test are summarized inFIG. 102.

Example 2 TNFα Detection and Quantification in Samples Using VariousConcentrations of Cyclodextrin

The assay components (used in a homogenous assay fashion in determinedconcentrations from the homogenous assay development tests) werecombined with varying concentrations of cyclodextrin to mitigate theeffects of bile acids that may be present in patient samples. The assaywas conducted over a dynamic range of cyclodextirn and the sensitivitywas compared across the test matrix.

Experimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidign (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100 μLmilli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 384-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-384 (Cat #6007290) were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston,Mass., USA). All data were analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1,BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) rom BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.) using GEN 5 Software version3.02.1 utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads witha gain of 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120msec, integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

2 Hydroxypropyl β-Cyclodextrin (P/N C0926-5G) from Sigma Aldrich (St.Louis, Mo.) was mixed over a dynamic range of 1000 mg/mL to 60 mg/mL inAlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C) for all integrationexperiments.

A standard curve of pTNFα was prepared according to the kit instructionswith a range of 300,000 pg/mL in 5 μL to 1 pg/mL in 5 μL. Four bufferonly samples were loaded and treated as blanks for zero analyte controlreads. The standard curve and samples were loaded in white 384 wellmicrotitire plates.

Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   Once the standard dilutions in various concentrations of        cyclodextrin were added to the plate, the acceptor beads were        added to the appropriate wells. 2 μL of Acceptor beads was used.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        to each well containing solution.        Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the dark)    -   Using a multichannel pipette add 10 μL of SA-Donor Beads to each        well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 30 minutes.

Immediately after 30 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve. The results of this test are summarized inFIGS. 103A and 103B.

Example 3 TNFα Detection and Quantification in Samples on a Sample Pad

In order to integrate the assay into an ingestible device such as aningestible smart capsule, in some embodiments, the assay may beintegrated onto an absorptive sample pad (e.g., to allow wicking of thesample into the capsule). The assay components were homogenouslycombined onto various sponge samples. The assay was conducted over adynamic range of TNFα and the sensitivity was compared across the testmatrix.

Experimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidign (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100 μLmilli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 96-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-96 were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA). All datawere analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1, BioTek U.S.(Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (SN1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.). GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads with a gainof 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120 msec,integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

Samples of sponge material (M13: Ahlstrom (6613H)) and (O3: Whatman(Grade F/F) (29009411) were cut to fit the 96 well microtitire plateconfiguration using a whole punch and trimmed with sterile scissors. SeeFIG. 104.

A standard curve of pTNFα was prepared according to the kit instructionswith a range of 100,000 pg/mL in 5 μL to 1 pg/mL in 5 μL. Four bufferonly samples were loaded and treated as blanks for zero analyte controlreads. The standard curve and samples were loaded in white 96 wellmicrotitire plates and kept protected from light until ready for use.

Sponge Preparation: Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   Sponges or no sponge samples were identified in the test plate.    -   Sponge types were added to the identified wells or left blank.    -   the acceptor beads were added to the appropriate wells. 2 μL of        Acceptor beads was used.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        to each well containing solution.

Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the Dark)

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 10 μL of SA-Donor Beads to each        well containing solutions.    -   NOTE: at this point wells either contain sponges or blank wells        with the homogeneous AlphaLISA reagents.    -   5 μL of pTNFα standard was added to the sponge or control wells.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 30 minutes.

Immediately after 30 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve. The results of this test are summarized inFIG. 105.

Example 4 Continuous TNFα Detection and Quantification

In some embodiments, the assay may be exposed to multiple samples ofanalyte (i.e. adiluminab, TNFα etc.) during the transit of theingestible device (e.g., an ingestible smart capsule) in vivo toinvestigate localization of analytes of interest and targeted drugdeployment. The assay components were homogenously combined. The assaywas conducted over a dynamic range of TNFα with repeat addition ofanalyte into the same sample well over time. The sensitivity wascompared over time to evaluate this mode of sampling.

Experimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidign (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100 μLmilli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 384-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-384 (Cat #6007290) were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston,Mass., USA). All data were analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1,BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.). GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads with a gainof 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120 msec,integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

A standard preparation of pTNFα was prepared according to the kitinstructions with a range of 5000 pg/mL in 5 μL.

Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   The plate was set up to with 5 uL of control 5000 pg/mL in 5 μL        of pTNFα or TEST: uL of 5000 pg/mL in 5 μL of pTNFα that would        have an additional 5000 pg/mL in 5 μL of pTNFα continually added        over time.    -   Once the standard dilutions were added to the plate, the        acceptor beads were added to the appropriate wells. 2 μL of        Acceptor beads was used.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        to each well containing solution.

Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the Dark)

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 10 μL of SA-Donor Beads to each        well containing solution.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 15 minutes.

Immediately after 15 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve.

Step 4: Repeat Testing

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 5 μL of buffer was added to the        control or 5 μL of control 5000 pg/mL in 5 μL of pTNFα was added        to the test.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 15 minutes.    -   The plate was re-read.    -   This was repeated over the course of 6 hours.

The test results are summarized in FIGS. 106A and 106B.

Example 5 TNFα Detection and Quantification on Various Sample Pads

In some embodiments, the assay may be formulated with cyclodextrin (tomitigate bile acid effects in the samples) and to be integrated onto anabsorptive assay sampling pad. The following sets of experimentsevaluate this combination. The assay was prepared with variousconcentrations of cyclodextrin on a selection of assay sample pads.Testing was conducted over a dynamic range of TNFα. The sensitivity wascompared over time.

Experimental Materials:

AlphaLISA TNFα (porcine) detection kit product number AL548 Hv/C/Fobtained from PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimentalwork. Specifically the following reagent used consisted of thefollowing: AlphaLISA Anti-p TNFα acceptor beads (5 mg/mL) stored in PBS,0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.2; Streptavidin (SA)-coated donor beads (5mg/mL) stored in 25 mM HEPES, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Proclin-300, pH 7.4;Biotinylated Antibody Anti-p TNFα (500 nM) stored in PBS, 0.1% Tween-20,0.05% NaN₃, pH 7.4, AlphaLISA Immunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C).Standard analyte used for standard curves and analyte detection waslyophilized pTNFα (Cat #AL548S) (0.3 μg) was reconstituted in 100milli-Q grade water and was used with 60 minutes or aliquoted intoscrew-capped polypropylene vials and stored at −20° C. until desired.Other chemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and fromSigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 96-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-96 were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA). All datawere analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1, BioTek U.S.(Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.). GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads with a gainof 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120 msec,integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

2 Hydroxypropyl β-Cyclodextrin (P/N C0926-5G) from Sigma Aldrich (St.Louis, Mo.) was mixed at either 50, 25 or 0 mg/mL in AlphaLISAImmunoassay Buffer (10×) (Cat #AL000C) for all integration experiments.

Samples of sponge material (M13: Ahlstrom (6613H)) and (O3: Whatman(Grade F/F) (29009411) were cut to fit the 96 well microtitire plateconfiguration using a whole punch and trimmed with sterile scissors.See, e.g., FIG. 104.

A standard curve of pTNFα was prepared according to the kit instructionswith a range of 100,000 pg/mL in 5 μL to 1 pg/mL in 5 μL. Four bufferonly samples were loaded and treated as blanks for zero analyte controlreads. The standard curve and samples were loaded in white 96 wellmicrotitire plates and kept protected from light until ready for use.

Sponge Preparation: Step 1: Acceptor Beads

-   -   Sponges or no sponge samples were identified in the test plate.    -   Sponge types were added to the identified wells or left blank.    -   The acceptor beads were added to the appropriate wells. 2 μL of        Acceptor beads was used.

Step 2: Biotinylated Antibody

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 2.5 μL of Biotinylated antibody        to each well containing solution.

Step 3: Donor Beads (Performed in the Dark)

-   -   Using a multichannel pipette add 10 μL of SA-Donor Beads to each        well containing solutions.    -   NOTE: at this point wells either contain sponges or blank wells        with the homogeneous AlphaLISA reagents.    -   5 μL of pTNFα standard was added to the sponge or control wells.    -   An adhesive seal was placed on top of the plate.    -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 37° C. incubator        for 30 minutes

Immediately after 30 minutes, the plate was spun down in a centrifuge ata pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediately read the plateon the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensure properwavelengths. The concentrations of pTNFα in the samples were calculatedfrom the calibration curve. The results of this test are summarized inFIGS. 107A and 107B, where the results demonstrated that cyclodextrin at25 mg yielded greater sensitivity under the test conditions.

Example 6 Dynamic Range Testing of Omnibeads in Solution

In some embodiments, the ingestible devices as described herein utilizeOMNI Beads, which have been designed as a tool to identifyinstrument-related variability in AlphaScreen assays. These beadscontain all of the chemical components for the generation of a strongsignal without requiring the presence of AlphaScreen Acceptor and Donorbeads. Omnibeads are therefore suitable for the regular verification ofthe performance of instruments used for AlphaScreen assays. Initial OMNIBead utility testing was conducted using commercially sourced Omni beadsto evaluate the utility of the present assay system.

Experimental Materials:

AlphaScreen® OminBeads™ (P/N 6760626D) (5 mg/mL in 100 μL) fromPerkinElmer (Boston, Mass., USA) was used for experimental work. Otherchemicals and reagents used were of analytical grade and from SigmaAldrich (St. Louis, Mo.). White 384-well microplates (whiteOptiPlate-384 (Cat #6007290) were supplied by PerkinElmer (Boston,Mass., USA). All data were analyzed using GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1,BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.).

Apparatus:

The AlphaLISA signal was read by a Cytation 5 spectrophotometer (S/N1609299) from BioTek U.S. (Winooski, Vt.). GEN 5 Software version 3.02.1utilizing an AphaCube 384 (p/n 1325001). Apha Endpoint reads with a gainof 200, Excitation time 80 msec, delay after excitation of 120 msec,integration time of 160 msec and read height of 11.5 mm.

Preparation of Standards and Samples:

A standard curve of omni beads was prepared according to the kitinstructions with a 5 μg/mL stock into PBS Buffer to make a 0.5 μg/mLsolution was serially diluted down 1:10 from Row A to Row G, and read onthe plate reader at 680/615 nm. The standard curve and samples wereloaded in white 384 well microtitire plates.

-   -   This was wrapped in tin foil, and placed in a 25° C. incubator        for 5 and 2 hours respectively.

Immediately after the incubation periods, the plate was spun down in acentrifuge at a pulse for 30 seconds at 9×g. The plate was immediatelyread the plate on the Cytation 5 Imager using the Alpha Cube to ensureproper wavelengths. The test results are summarized in FIG. 108.

Example 7 Bacterial Detection (SIBO)

In some embodiments, the ingestible devices of the present applicationmay be used for total bacterial quantification. To that end, thechemiluminescent particles may be coated with specific antibodies thatare capable of binding to the conserved antigens lipoteichoic acid (LTA)or lipopolysaccharide (LPS) found on aerobic and anaerobic Gram-positive(GP) and Gram-negative (GN) bacteria, respectively. LTA and LPS targetsare located on the surface of their respective bacteria and are primaryconstituents of the cell walls. LTA and LPS antigens can be found onrapidly growing as well as stationary phase bacteria. AlternativelyLipopolysaccharide Binding Protein (LBP) (which binds with high affinity(Kd=1 nM) to lipid A), the common moiety of LPS, is a good alternativeto LPS alone. This immuno-based analytical approach is similar to theone used by the Platelet PGD® Test (Verax Biomedical). Chemiluminescentparticles labeled with antibodies targeting proteoglycans (PG) presentin both GP and GN bacteria will also be tested. While LOCI has not beenpreviously used for detection of viable bacteria, Mechaly et al. (2013)describe its application for detection of anthrax spores using asandwich assay format. See, e.g., Mechaly, A., Cohen, N., Weiss, S. etal. Anal Bioanal Chem (2013) 405: 3965. This provides proof-of-principlefor detection and quantification of bacterial cells using LOCI.

-   a. LOCI Detection of Gram-Negative and Gram-Positive Bacteria:    -   1. Experimental design: Various antibodies to LBP, LPS or LTA        were biotinylated and tested for detection limits across a        dynamic range of Gram-Negative and Gram-Positive organism        concentrations. Assay sensitivity was compared across a test        matrix of various rations of SA-donor beads, acceptor beads,        antibody type and concentrations to facilitate a down selection        process:

Materials LOCI Beads:

-   -   AlphaLISA unconjugated Europium Acceptor beads from PerkinElmer        #6772002    -   AlphaPlex unconjugated Samarium acceptor beads from PerkinElmer        #6792002    -   AlphaScreen SA-Donor beads from PerkinElmer #6760002

Antibodies (a number was assigned to each Ab to facilitate experimentsand results viewing) used in this test include those listed in Table 1.

TABLE 1 Antibodies tested in the current study Ab ID Antigen Clone#Provider Cat# Ab lot# 1 Anti-Gram Positive 3801 abm Y070061 AP4902(3801) 2 Anti-Lipoteichoic acid 5E367 US Biological L2610-01 L15120226 3Anti-Lipoteichoic acid 5E368 US Biological L2610-02 L15120225/L101210634 Gram Positive G35C Thermo Fisher MA1-7401 Q12081161/QL2120881 BacteriaLTA 5 Gram Positive BDI813 GeneTex GTX42624 821504924 Bacteria 6 GramPositive 3811 ProSci 35-578 17646-1504 Bacteria 7 Gram Positive BDI380Abcam ab20344 GR215075- Bacteria 5/GR2511764-1 8 Anti-E. coli LPS 2D7/1Abcam ab35654 GR236327- 1/GR236327-2 9 Anti-Gram negative 13- Abcamab41199 GR183947-1 337.5 10 Anti-Gram negative 11- Abcam ab41202GR211477-1 445.2 11 Anti-Gram negative GNE11- Abcam ab111016 GR251899-1270.3.1 12 Anti-Lipid A 26-5 Abcam ab8467 GR205999-1 Anti-DNP SPE-7Sigma D8406 123M4894 Anti-DNP 2-9(4) Abcam Ab24319 GR163969-5 Anti-DNPLO- Fisher MA5- QL2131322 DNP-30 16776

Bacteria Strains:

-   -   Escherichia coli from ATCC #25922    -   Staphylococcus aureus from ATCC #29213    -   Staphylococcus epidermis from ATCC #14990 lot #63229747    -   Klebsiella pneumonia from ATCC #4352 lot #61698735    -   Pseudomonas aeruginosa from ATCC #15442 lot #63229753    -   Clostridium sporogenes from ATCC #7955 lot #61203517    -   Bacteroides vulgatus from ATCC #8482 lot #62382072    -   Enterobacter aerogenes from ATCC #13048 lot #61741619    -   Streptococcus pneumonia from ATCC #27336 lot #58049252    -   Streptococcus mutans from ATCC #25175 lot #62284317    -   Enterococcus faecalis from ATCC #49533 lot #62175902    -   Proteus mirabilis from ATCC #25933 lot #61757217

Reagents for Bead Conjugation and Biotinylation:

-   -   Chromalink Biotin from Solulink #B1001-105    -   Sodium phosphate from Fisher #BP331-500    -   Na cyanoborohydride from Sigma #156159    -   PBS from Corning #21-040-CV lot #21040337    -   Proclin-300 from Supelco #48912-U lot #LC00240    -   Carboxymethoxylamine from Sigma #C13408 lot#MKBV4120V    -   10% Tween-20 from Thermo, #28320 lot #OC183327

Reagents for Antibody Purification:

-   -   Zeba desalting column 0.5 mL from Thermo Scientific #89882    -   Zeba desalting column 2 mL from Thermo Scientific #89880    -   Amicon Ultra 0.5 mL Ultracell (30,000 MWCO) from Millipore, cat        #UFC503024    -   BSA removal kit from Abcam #ab173231

Reagents for Buffer Preparation:

-   -   HEPES acid free from BioBasic #7365-45-9    -   HEPES sodium salt from MP Biochemicals #105593    -   5% Alkali-soluble Casein from EMD Millipore #70955-225 mL    -   Dextran from Spectrum #D1004    -   Human IgG from Jackson #009-000-002

Dinitrophenyl (DNP)-Biotin-BSA protein conjugate from Alpha DiagnosticIntl #DNP35-BTN-10

-   384-well white opaque OptiPlate from PerkinElmer #6007290-   Top Seal-A from PerkinElmer #6050185-   EnVision Multimode Plate Reader Model 2104 from PerkinElmer-   Lambda Bio+ spectrophotometer from PerkinElmer-   Incubator set at 37° C.

Methods

Antibody Purification (Pre-Rreatment)

Antibodies 1 to 7 listed in Table 1 were provided at a low concentration(0.1 mg/mL) and in a solution containing sodium azide, which is notcompatible with the biotinylation reaction. Therefore, the antibodysolution was first concentrated using an AMICON centrifugal filter andthen passed through a ZEBA desalting column using PBS as the solvent toremove the sodium azide. Antibody 12 contained BSA in its formulation.BSA removal was performed using the ABCAM BSA removal kit and theantibody pellet resuspended in PBS. Following this pre-treatmentprocedures, the antibody concentrations were determinedspectrophotometrically and are listed in Table 2.

TABLE 2 Final antibody concentrations after treatment [Ab] Antibody IDCat# (mg/mL) 1 Y070061 0.94 2 L2610-01 0.94 3 L2610-02 0.76 4 MA1- 0.627401 5 GTX42624 0.64 6 35-578 1.04 7 ab20344 0.65 12 ab8467 0.63

Biotinylation of Ab

For biotinylation of Abs, 0.04 mg of Ab and 3.05 μL of Chromalink biotin(2 mg/mL) were mixed together for a 30:1 ratio biotin/Ab. The 0.08 mLreaction volume was completed with PBS pH 7.4 and the reaction wasincubated for 2 hours at 23° C. Purification of biotinylated antibodywas performed using ZEBA 0.5 mL desalting columns. Ratio ofbiotinylation was measured at 354 nm along with reading at 280 nM forprotein recovery. Final biotin/Ab labeling ratios are summarized inTable 3.

TABLE 3 Biotin per antibody ratio Antibody ID Cat# Biotin/Ab ab1 Y0700612.4 ab2 L2610-01 4.8 ab3 L2610-02 1.9 ab4 MA1-7401 3.9 ab5 GTX42624 2.5ab6 35-578 3.8 ab7 ab20344 1.3 ab8 ab35654 0.8 ab9 ab41199 6.1 ab10ab41202 7.6 ab11 ab111016 6.4 ab12 ab8467 7.7

AlphaLISA Europium and Samarium Acceptor Beads Conjugation

For Acceptor bead conjugation, 0.02 mg of antibody, 0.0625% of Tween-20,1.0 mg of AlphaLISA beads and 1.25 mg/mL of NaBH₃CN were mixed together.The 0.045 mL reaction volume was completed with a solution of 130 mM ofNa Phosphate buffer pH 8.0 and the reaction was incubated for 18 hoursat 37° C. The reaction was stopped by the addition of 2 of a 65 mg/mL ofa CMO solution and the reaction was allowed to proceed for one hour at37° C. Beads were then washed by centrifugation 2 times for 15 minutes(14,000 rpm/4° C.) and bead pellets were resuspended in 0.2 mL of 100 mMTris pH 8.0. Afterward, a third centrifuge step was done and beads wereresuspended in PBS pH 7.2 containing 0.05% Proclin-300 for a 5 mg/mLconcentration.

AlphaLISA Detection Assay: Antibody Screening

The assay buffer (Buffer B) consisted of 25 mM HEPES pH 7.4, 0.1%Casein, 1 mg/mL Dextran-500.

The protocol was as follows. In a 1.5 mL assay tube, 40 μL of bacteriaat 5E10⁵ CFU/mL (1E10⁵ CFU/mL final) was mixed with 80 μL of Biotin-Ab(10 nM final). The reaction was incubated for 60 minutes at 37° C. Afterthe incubation, bacteria were centrifuged for 15 minutes at 6,000 g.Supernatant was carefully removed and 200 μL of SA-coated Donor andSA-coated Acceptor bead mix (10 μg/mL and 40 μg/mL final, respectively,in assay Buffer B) were added under subdued light conditions and thepellet was gently resuspended. The reaction was incubated for another 60minutes at 37° C. and finally 50 μL were distributed in triplicate in anOptiPlate-384 prior to reading the plate using an EnVision reader.

AlphaLISA Detection Assay: Matrix and Titration Experiment

Unless otherwise stated in the text and/or figures, the general protocolwas as follows. In an OptiPlate-384, 10 μL of bacteria at 5E10⁵ CFU/mL(1E10⁵ CFU/mL final) was mixed with 20 μL of Biotin-Ab and AlphaLISA Abbeads (10 nM and 40 μg/mL final, respectively). The reaction wasincubated for 60 minutes at 37° C. Finally, 20 μL of SA-coated Donorbeads (10 μg/mL final) were added under subdued light conditions andplate was then incubated for 30 minutes in the dark (37° C.) prior toreading the plate using an EnVision reader. All LOCI reagents werediluted in assay Buffer B.

DNP Internal Control Assay

Unless otherwise stated in the text and/or figures, the general protocolwas as follows. In an OptiPlate-384, 5 μL of the diluted DNP probe wasmixed with 10 μL of Anti-DNP Sm Acceptor beads (10 or 20 μg/mL final).The reaction was incubated for 60 minutes at 37° C. Finally, 10 μL ofSA-coated Donor beads (20 μg/mL final) were added under subdued lightconditions and plate was then incubated for 30 minutes in the dark (37°C.) prior to reading the plate using an EnVision reader equipped withAlphaPlex Samarium detection features (optical module #2102-5910 and aSm emission filter at 644 nm). All LOCI reagents were diluted in assayBuffer B.

Bacterial Culture Conditions

Bacteria cultures were prepared pursuant to SOPs MP-0001 and MP-0004with appropriate modifications.

Streaking and Isolating Bacteria

Day 1. Using a sterile loop, bacterial glycerol stock (from ATCC) weregently spread over a section of an agar plate to create streak #1. Usinga freshly sterilized loop, the bacteria from streak #1 were spread overa second section of the agar plate to generate streak #2. Finally, usinga third sterile loop, the bacteria from streak #2 were spread over thelast section of the agar plate, to create streak #3. Plates wereincubated for 24-48 hours at 37° C. For anaerobic cultures, inoculationwas done in liquid medium, since the bacteria would not grow on agarplates.

Day 2. A single colony from the agar plate was re-streaked onto a newagar plate (as above), and incubated for 24-48 hours at 37° C. Anaerobicstrains were cultured for 4 days. For anaerobic bacteria, 100 μL ofliquid culture was used to inoculate 30 mL liquid medium.

Liquid Bacterial Culture and Glycerol Stock (Note: Overnight Culture wasused for the Glycerol Stock)

Day 3. A single colony (or 125 μL liquid culture) was used to inoculate30 mL of liquid broth, which was grown overnight at 37° C. (24 to 48hours) at 300 rpm or no shaking for anaerobic bacteria.

Day 4. The next day, bacterial glycerol stocks were generated by adding50% glycerol stock to a final concentration of 10% glycerol to thebacterial culture. Aliquots (of at least 200 μL) he bacterial glycerolstocks were stored at −80° C. In some cases the cultures werecentrifuged at 5100 rpm for 5 min, and resuspended to adequatedensities. Aliquots varied from 200 μL to 1 mL depending on growth andsuspended volumes.

Day 5. The next day, bacterial glycerol stocks were thawed and seriallydiluted: 10⁻², 10⁻⁴, 10⁻⁶, 10⁻⁷, 10⁻⁸ and 10⁻⁹. 0.1 and 0.4 mL of theserial dilutions were plated in duplicate and incubated overnight.

Day 6. Bacterial counts were determined.

Selected test results are summarized in FIGS. 109A-109I.

Diffractive Optics Examples A. Materials and Methods

The following materials and methods were used in the examples set forthherein.

Polystyrene Beads

Commercially available biotinylated yellow-green fluorescent polystyrenebeads (FluoSpheres®, Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.) were used inparticle-size sensitivity experiments. The beads had nominal diametersof 0.2 μm and 1.0 μm and were supplied as suspensions (2% solids) inwater containing 2 mM sodium azide at 2.5×10¹² particles/mL, 1.4×10¹⁰particles/mL, respectively.

Commercially available biotin coated polystyrene beads (Spherotech, LakeForest, Ill.) were used in flow characterization experiments. The beadshad a nominal diameter of 0.7-0.9 μm and were suspended in PBS buffer at3.1×10¹⁰ particles/mL.

Bacterial Cultures

Live bacteria preparations of Staphylococcus aureus (Sporometrics,Toronto, Canada), 1.1×10⁸ CFU/mL, and Escherichia coli (Sporometrics,Toronto, Canada), 9.5×10⁷ CFU/mL were stored at 4° C. until use. Beforeuse, bacteria suspensions were vortexed vigorously, and an aliquot wasaseptically removed from the stock vial and diluted in PBS to achievethe desired concentration. Bacteria dilutions were stored on ice andvortexed vigorously before loading into the dotLab mX System.

Gold Nanoparticles

Dressed Gold goat anti-mouse (H+L) antibody conjugated goldnanoparticles with a nominal diameter of 40 nm were used in proteindetection experiments. The gold nanoparticles were obtained fromBioassay Works (Ijamsville, Md.).

Antibodies

Commercially available monoclonal antibodies for anti-lipoteichoic acid,(US Biologicals) and anti-Gram negative endotoxin (Abcam, Cambridge,Mass.) were used. Antibodies were obtained unlabeled from the vendor andsubsequently biotinylated and purified by BioAuxilium Research(Saint-Laurent, Canada).

Conjugated, antibody activities were tested by Progenity (Ann Arbor,Mich.).

Polyclonal BacTrace antibodies for Escherichia coli O145:H2 andStaphylococcus aureus were obtained from KPL (Milford, Mass.) to performperformance comparisons between monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies.The BacTrace® antibodies were biotinylated using the Lightning-Link®Biotin kit (Innova Biosciences, Cambridge, UK).

Biotinylated rabbit anti-mouse Fc antibodies, biotinylated goatanti-mouse IgG antibodies and purified mouse IgG were obtained fromAxela, Inc. (Toronto, Canada).

Blocking and Wash Buffers

TheBlockingSolution block buffer was purchased from Candor Bioscience(Germany). Phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), PBS containing 0.1% Tween-20(PBST) and Tris buffered saline (TBS) were from Axela, Inc. (Toronto,Canada).

Avidin Diffraction Grating Sensors

Avidin diffraction grating sensors included a flow channel containing acontiguous array of assay spots. Each assay spot consisted of avidinarranged in a distinct pattern of parallel lines forming a diffractiongrating. Once mated with a fluidic adaptor which connected the sensor tothe instrument microfluidic pump system, the flow channel above thespots had a capacity of 10 μL. An integrated prism below the flowchannel allowed an incoming laser beam to enter the system anddiffracted light to exit the system without disruption. Reflectionrather than transmission through the flow channel was used to avoidpotential interference from the sample. The diffraction grating sensorswere imaged using the Axela dotLab mX System. The diffraction gratingsensors were illuminated at a 60° incidence angle and the diffractionintensities from the 5th order mode were measured.

Fluidic Protocol

Avidin-coated diffraction grating sensors were mated to the dotLab mXSystem, which provided fluidic pump controls. The sensors were firstwashed with phosphate buffered saline with 0.1% Tween-20 (PBST) for oneminute, blocked with TheBlockingSolution for two minutes, then washedagain with PBST for one minute. The chips were then incubated with abiotinylated capture antibody solution (further described in theexamples below) suspended in phosphate buffer saline (PBS) for 10-15minutes. The chips were washed again with PBST for one minute andincubated with the bacterial suspension (further described in theexamples below) for between 10-25 minutes. Unless otherwise specified,the mixing flow rate was set to 500 μL/min.

No-Flow Protocol

To achieve incubations without flow while still utilizing the dotLab mXSystem for diffraction analysis, a sensor scanning software was used.This software provided a general surface scan of the spots in a sensorand outputted a trace in which the x-axis represented the lateralposition on a sensor, and the y-axis represented the diffractionintensity at each position. From sensor scans performed before and after“off-line” sample incubations, the relative changes in diffractionsignal were estimated.

Washes were performed by gently pipetting fluid into the sensor cavity,incubating briefly on a rotary mixer, then aspirating the fluid off ofthe sensor. First, the sensors were washed with PBS, incubated withblocking solution for 1 hour at 150 RPM on a rotary mixer, then washedagain with PBS. After blocking, a surface scan of the sensor wasperformed. Next, the sensor was incubated with a biotinylated captureantibody solution (further described in the examples below) suspended inPBS for 1 hour at 150 RPM on a rotary mixer. The sensor was rewashedwith PBS to remove unbound capture antibody before a second sensor scan.After scanning, the sensor was incubated with the bacterial suspension(further described in the examples below) for 1 hour at 150 RPM. Thesensor was washed with PBS to remove unbound bacteria before a finalsensor scan occurs.

B. Sensitivity of Avidin Diffraction Grating Sensors to Particle Sizeand Flow Rate

Previous embodiments of diffraction grating sensors were optimized todetect molecules such as antibodies, approximately 10 nm in size. Incontrast, live bacteria typically range from 0.5 to 5.0 μm in size. Totest the ability of the system to capture large particles, incubationexperiments were performed using fluorescent polystyrene beads withnominal diameters of 0.2 μm and 1.0 μm. The flow rate was set at 100μL/min. Upon microscopic examination, sensors incubated with 1.0 μmbeads were found to have an uneven coating of beads (FIG. 112),suggesting that most beads failed to bind or were sheared off duringincubation, while sensors incubated with 0.2 μm beads were observed havean even coating of beads (FIG. 113).

To investigate whether shear force was the sole contributor of decreasedbinding performance in larger particles, the experiments were repeatedunder no-flow incubation conditions. Under microscopic examination,sensors incubated with 1.0 μm beads were again found to have more unevencoating than sensors incubated with 0.2 μm beads (FIG. 114), suggestingthat steric hindrance may also have contributed to decreased binding atlarger particle sizes.

To determine the effect of flow rate on immobilization, 0.83 μmbiotinylated polystyrene beads were used for direct immobilization onavidin sensors. Immobilization experiments were performed at varyingflow between 0-500 μL/min. The flow rate was found to significantlyimpact the binding signal, with lower flow rates producing higherbinding signal (FIG. 115). While significant bead binding was observed,the binding was not uniform at very high flow rates, as shear forcesprevented the beads from binding to the avidin sensors (FIG. 116). Thebinding signal was maximized when immobilization was performed with noflow through the sensor (FIG. 117). These results suggested that for thedetection of bacterial cells, flow rates should be significantly reducedcompared to previous embodiments of diffraction grating sensors.

C. Biotinylated Anti-Lipoteichoic Acid, Anti-Gram Negative Endotoxin,Polyclonal Anti-S. aureus, and Anti-E. coli Antibodies Bound to AvidinSensors

Capture antibodies biotin-anti-lipoteichoic acid and biotin-anti-Gramnegative endotoxin were characterized. Antibodies were immobilized toavidin diffraction grating sensors and monitored using the dotLab mXSystem. Each biotinylated capture antibody tested demonstrateddetectable binding to avidin sensors, with biotinylatedanti-lipoteichoic acid showing the highest binding signal (FIG. 118).Next, commercially available polyclonal S. aureus and E. coli captureantibodies were evaluated for suitability in an avidin sensor. Bothantibodies were biotinylated and immobilized on avidin sensors andshowed excellent binding signals. These results showed that the avidinsensor platform was capable of binding a variety of biotin-taggedantibodies.

D. Immobilized Biotinylated Anti-Lipoteichoic Acid Binds specifically toS. aureus,

To characterize the sensitivity and specificity of bacteria capture bythe monoclonal antibody-coated diffraction grating sensors, the sensorswere incubated with bacterial suspensions of S. aureus and E. coli.Anti-lipoteichoic acid antibodies were expected to bind to S. aureus,while anti-Gram negative endotoxin antibodies were expected to bind toE. coli. Biotinylated anti-lipoteichoic acid coated sensors showedreadily detectible S. aureus binding at 1.1×10⁸ CFU/mL, but no signalchange in response to E. coli (FIG. 119). These findings demonstratedthat the anti-lipoteichoic acid sensors were effectively capturingtarget bacteria in a highly specific manner. In contrast, biotinylatedanti-Gram negative endotoxin coated sensors did not show a correspondingsensitivity to E. coli (FIG. 120). These results showed effectivebinding of S. aureus but not E. coli to their respective antibodies. Theresults demonstrated that diffraction grating sensors functionalizedwith monoclonal antibodies were capable of detecting bacteria-specificbinding.

E. Polyclonal Anti-S. aureus Binds Specifically to S. aureus, andImmobilized Biotinylated Polyclonal Anti-E. coli Binds Specifically toE. coli

To characterize the sensitivity and specificity of polyclonalantibody-coated diffraction grating sensors, experiments were performedwere performed using polyclonal antibodies (BacTrace® Goatanti-Staphylococcus aureus, BacTrace® Goat anti-Escherichia coli).Biotinylated anti-S. aureus coated sensors yielded similar results toanti-lipoteichoic acid coated sensors, showing specific binding signalto S. aureus. A small amplification of the bacteria binding signal wasobserved by subsequent incubation with unlabeled anti-S. aureus antibodydemonstrating specificity of the S. aureus binding signal (FIG. 121).Use of a polyclonal anti-E. coli antibody produced a small butdetectable binding signal (FIG. 122). These results showed thatdiffraction grating sensors functionalized with polyclonal antibodiesare capable of detecting bacteria-specific binding.

F. Covalently Linkage Improves the Detection Characteristics of AvidinSensors

Because the binding of large particles can be hindered by shear forces,experiments were performed to functionalize the polystyrene surface ofthe avidin sensors with epoxysilane((3-Glycidyloxypropyl)trimethoxysilane) to establish covalent linkagesbetween the sensor substrate and the avidin capture molecules. Initialexperiments showed that silanized sensors had similar diffractionintensities to control sensors, but exhibited a gradual increase indiffraction intensity during the blocking step (FIG. 123). Theelimination of this signal by pre-washing the sensor in Tris buffer toinactivate available epoxy groups suggested that it was caused by thecovalent binding of blocking buffer components to the sensor (FIG. 124).

Bacterial assays conducted with avidin-coated epoxysilane sensors (Triswashed) yielded a lower intensity difference between the binding signaland immobilized antibody signal but resulted in an overall better ratiobetween binding signal and immobilized antibody signal (FIG. 125). Theimproved ratio was crucial to the sensitivity performance of the device,and these results showed that silanization is a desirable modificationfor designing a bacterial assay.

G. Signal Generation in Avidin Diffraction Grating Sensors is Due toChanges Diffraction Grating

To verify that the signal observed in avidin diffraction grating sensorsarises from changes in the diffraction grating as opposed to some otherphenomenon, a set of diffraction grating sensors were manufactured witha reverse detection geometry; instead of standard functionalization ofthe lines corresponding to the diffraction grating, avidin was depositedinto the troughs of the diffraction grating. On these reversediffraction gratings, a binding signal would be expected to be observedas a decrease as opposed to an increase in the diffraction intensity.Bead experiments showed that the reverse geometry sensors performedidentically to standard sensors, but with an inverted signal (FIG. 126).These results showed that the signal observed in the sensors arisesentirely from changes in the diffraction grating.

H. Signal Amplification Using Gold Nanoparticles

Experiments were performed using mouse IgG to demonstrate the system'ssensitivity to antibody binding when using gold nanoparticles. Unlikeprevious embodiments of diffraction grating sensors, a signalamplification step was added to the protocol, where the sensor wasincubated with anti-mouse IgG gold-nanoparticle conjugates. The goldnanoparticles enhanced the signal from the associated analyte in twoways: (1) they increased the apparent size of the captured antibody andthus the measurable change in the diffraction grating, and (2) they hada significantly different refractive index which resulted in strongerdiffraction signals from the same geometric variation in the diffractiongrating. Experiments showed that the nanoparticle assay had a mouse IgGdetection limit of roughly 100 pg/mL, equivalent to a sensitivity of 667amol/L (FIG. 127). These results illustrated the ability to achieve highanalytical sensitivity using gold nanoparticle-based amplificationstrategies.

Grating Period, Illumination Wavelength, and Angle of Incidence can beTuned to Optimize Detection of Large Particle Sizes

In simulation studies, a significant increase in the detectionefficiency of large particles was achieved by optimizing opticalparameters, namely grating period, illumination wavelength, and angle ofincidence. Performance of diffraction grating sensors was enhanced todetect particles sized at 120 and 350 nm. By modifying the illuminationwavelength and/or grating period, sensitivity to larger particles around1.0 μm in size could be enhanced (e.g., by a factor of 2.5 time) (FIG.128). By changing the incidence angle of illumination (e.g., to 70° from45°), the sensitivity is increased (e.g., five-fold increase insensitivity) (FIG. 129). These results showed that the optical design ofthe system can significantly affect the sensitivity of the diffractiongrating sensor to different analyte sizes.

Localization Examples Experiment 1

An ingestible medical device according to the disclosure (“TLC1”) wastested on 20 subjects to investigate its localization ability. TLC1 wasa biocompatible polycarbonate capsule that contained a power supply,electronics and software. An onboard software algorithm used time,temperature and reflected light spectral data to determine the locationof the capsule as it traveled the GI tract. The capsule is 0.51×1.22inches which is larger than a vitamin pill which is 0.4×0.85 inches. Thesubjects fasted overnight before participating in the study.Computerized tomography (“CT”) were used as a basis for determining theaccuracy of the localization data collected with TLC1. One of the 20subjects did not follow the fasting rule. CT data was lacking foranother one of the 20 subjects. Thus, these two subjects were excludedfrom further analysis. TLC1 sampled RGB data (radially transmitted)every 15 seconds for the first 14 hours after it entered the subject'sstomach, and then samples every five minutes after that until batterydies. TLC1 did not start to record optical data until it reached thesubject's stomach. Thus, there was no RGB-based data for themouth-esophagus transition for any of the subjects.

In addition, a PillCam® SB (Given Imaging) device was tested on 57subjects. The subjects fasted overnight before joining the study.PillCam videos were recorded within each subject. The sampling frequencyof PillCam is velocity dependent. The faster PillCam travels, the fasterit would sample data. Each video is about seven to eight hours long,starting from when the capsule was administrated into the subject'smouth. RGB optical data were recorded in a table. A physician providednotes on where stomach-duodenum transition and ileum-cecum transitionoccurred in each video. Computerized tomography (“CT”) was used as abasis for determining the accuracy of the localization data collectedwith PillCam.

Esophagus-Stomach Transition

For TLC1, it was assumed that this transition occurred one minute afterthe patient ingested the device. For PillCam, the algorithm was asfollows:

-   -   1. Start mouth-esophagus transition detection after capsule is        activated/administrated    -   2. Check whether Green <102.3 and Blue <94.6        -   a. If yes, mark as mouth-esophagus transition        -   b. If no, continue to scan the data    -   3. After detecting mouth-esophagus transition, continue to        monitor Green and Blue signals for another 30 seconds, in case        of location reversal        -   a. If either Green >110.1 or Blue >105.5, mark it as            mouth-esophagus location reversal        -   b. Reset the mouth-esophagus flag and loop through step 2            and 3 until the confirmed mouth-esophagus transition            detected    -   4. Add one minute to the confirmed mouth-esophagus transition        and mark it as esophagus-stomach transition

For one of the PillCam subjects, there was not a clear cut differencebetween the esophagus and stomach, so this subject was excluded fromfuture analysis of stomach localization. Among the 56 valid subjects, 54of them have correct esophagus-stomach transition localization. Thetotal agreement is 54/56=96%. Each of the two failed cases had prolongedesophageal of greater than one minute. Thus, adding one minute tomouth-esophagus transition was not enough to cover the transition inesophagus for these two subjects.

Stomach-Duodenum

For both TLC1 and PillCam, a sliding window analysis was used. Thealgorithm used a dumbbell shape two-sliding-window approach with atwo-minute gap between the front (first) and back (second) windows. Thetwo-minute gap was designed, at least in part, to skip the rapidtransition from stomach to small intestine and capture the smallintestine signal after capsule settles down in small intestine. Thealgorithm was as follows:

-   -   1. Start to check for stomach-duodenum transition after capsule        enters stomach    -   2. Setup the two windows (front and back)        -   a. Time length of each window: 3 minutes for TLC1; 30            seconds for PillCam        -   b. Time gap between two windows: 2 minutes for both devices        -   c. Window sliding step size: 0.5 minute for both devices    -   3. Compare signals in the two sliding windows        -   a. If difference in mean is higher than 3 times the standard            deviation of Green/Blue signal in the back window            -   i. If this is the first time ever, record the mean and                standard deviation of signals in the back window as                stomach reference            -   ii. If mean signal in the front window is higher than                stomach reference signal by a certain threshold (0.3 for                TLC1 and 0.18 for PillCam), mark this as a possible                stomach-duodenum transition        -   b. If a possible pyloric transition is detected, continue to            scan for another 10 minutes in case of false positive flag            -   i. If within this 10 minutes, location reversal is                detected, the previous pyloric transition flag is a                false positive flag. Clear the flag and continue to                check            -   ii. If no location reversal has been identified within                10 minutes following the possible pyloric transition                flag, mark it as a confirmed pyloric transition        -   c. Continue monitoring Green/Blue data for another 2 hours            after the confirmed pyloric transition, in case of location            reversal            -   i. If a location reversal is identified, flag the                timestamp when reversal happened and then repeat steps                a-c to look for the next pyloric transition            -   ii. If the capsule has not gone back to stomach 2 hours                after previously confirmed pyloric transition, stops                location reversal monitoring and assume the capsule                would stay in intestinal area

For TLC1, one of the 18 subjects had too few samples (<3 minutes) takenin the stomach due to the delayed esophagus-stomach transitionidentification by previously developed localization algorithm. Thus,this subject was excluded from the stomach-duodenum transition algorithmtest. For the rest of the TLC1 subjects, CT images confirmed that thedetected pyloric transitions for all the subjects were located somewherebetween stomach and jejunum. Two out of the 17 subjects showed that thecapsule went back to stomach after first the first stomach-duodenumtransition. The total agreement between the TLC1 algorithm detection andCT scans was 17/17=100%.

For one of the PillCam subjects, the capsule stayed in the subject'sstomach all the time before the video ended. For another two of thePillCam subjects, too few samples were taken in the stomach to run thelocalization algorithm. These three PillCam subjects were excluded fromthe stomach-duodenum transition localization algorithm performance test.The performance summary of pyloric transition localization algorithm forPillCam was as follows:

-   -   1. Good cases (48 subjects):        -   a. For 25 subjects, our detection matches exactly with the            physician's notes        -   b. For 19 subjects, the difference between the two            detections is less than five minutes        -   c. For four subjects, the difference between the two            detections is less than 10 minutes (The full transition            could take up to 10 minutes before the GB signal settled)    -   2. Failed cases (6 subjects):        -   a. Four subjects had high standard deviation of Green/Blue            signal in the stomach        -   b. One subject had bile in the stomach, which greatly            affected Green/Blue in stomach        -   c. One subject had no Green/Blue change at pyloric            transition

The total agreement for the PillCam stomach-duodenum transitionlocalization algorithm detection and physician's notes was 48/54=89%.

Duodenum-Jeiunum Transition

For TLC1, it was assumed that the device left the duodenum and enteredthe jejunum three minutes after it was determined that the deviceentered the duodenum. Of the 17 subjects noted above with respect to theTLC1 investigation of the stomach-duodenum transition, 16 of thesubjects mentioned had CT images that confirmed that theduodenum-jejunum transition was located somewhere between stomach andjejunum. One of the 17 subjects had a prolonged transit time induodenum. The total agreement between algorithm detection and CT scanswas 16/17=94%.

For PillCam, the duodenum-jejunum transition was not determined.

Jejunum-Deum Transition

It is to be noted that the jejunum is redder and more vascular thanileum, and that the jejunum has a thicker intestine wall with moremesentery fat. These differences can cause various optical responsesbetween jejunum and ileum, particularly for the reflected red lightsignal. For both TLC1 and PillCam, two different approaches wereexplored to track the change of red signal at the jejunum-ileumtransition. The first approach was a single-sliding-window analysis,where the window is 10 minutes long, and the mean signal was comparedwith a threshold value while the window was moving along. The secondapproach was a two-sliding-window analysis, where each window was 10minutes long with a 20 minute spacing between the two windows. Thealgorithm for the jejunum-ileum transition localization was as follows:

-   -   1. Obtain 20 minutes of Red signal after the duodenum-jejunum        transition, average the data and record it as the jejunum        reference signal    -   2. Start to check the jejunum-ileum transition 20 minutes after        the device enters the jejunum        -   a. Normalize the newly received data by the jejunum            reference signal        -   b. Two approaches:            -   i. Single-sliding-window analysis                -   Set the transition flag if the mean of reflected red                    signal is less than 0.8            -   ii. Two-sliding-window analysis:            -   Set the transition flag if the mean difference in                reflected red is higher than 2× the standard deviation                of the reflected red signal in the front window

For TLC1, 16 of the 18 subjects had CT images that confirmed that thedetected jejunum-ileum transition fell between jejunum and cecum. Thetotal agreement between algorithm and CT scans was 16/18=89%. This wastrue for both the single-sliding-window and double-sliding-windowapproaches, and the same two subjects failed in both approaches.

The performance summary of the jejunum-ileum transition detection forPillCam is listed below:

-   -   1. Single-sliding-window analysis:        -   a. 11 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected            somewhere between jejunum and cecum        -   b. 24 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected after            cecum        -   c. 19 cases having no jejunum-ileum transition detected        -   d. Total agreement: 11/54=20%    -   2. Two-sliding-window analysis:        -   a. 30 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected            somewhere between jejunum and cecum        -   b. 24 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected after            cecum        -   c. Total agreement: 30/54=56%

Ileum-Cecum Transition

Data demonstrated that, for TLC1, mean signal of reflected red/greenprovided the most statistical difference before and after theileum-cecum transition. Data also demonstrated that, for TLC1, thecoefficient of variation of reflected green/blue provided the moststatistical contrast at ileum-cecum transition. The analysis based onPillCam videos showed very similar statistical trends to those resultsobtained with TLC1 device. Thus, the algortithm utilized changes in meanvalue of reflected red/green and the coefficient of variation ofreflected green/blue. The algorithm was as follows:

-   -   1. Start to monitor ileum-cecum transition after the capsule        enters the stomach    -   2. Setup the two windows (front (first) and back (second))        -   a. Use a five-minute time length for each window        -   b. Use a 10-minute gap between the two windows        -   c. Use a one-minute window sliding step size    -   3. Compare signals in the two sliding windows        -   a. Set ileum-cecum transition flag if            -   i. Reflected red/green has a significant change or is                lower than a threshold            -   ii. Coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue is                lower than a threshold        -   b. If this is the first ileum-cecum transition detected,            record average reflected red/green signal in small intestine            as small intestine reference signal        -   c. Mark location reversal (i.e. capsule returns to terminal            ileum) if            -   i. Reflected red/green is statistically comparable with                small intestine reference signal            -   ii. Coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue is                higher than a threshold        -   d. If a possible ileum-cecum transition is detected,            continue to scan for another 10 minutes for TLC1 (15 minutes            for PillCam) in case of false positive flag            -   i. If within this time frame (10 minutes for TLC1, 15                minutes for PillCam), location reversal is detected, the                previous ileum-cecum transition flag is a false positive                flag. Clear the flag and continue to check            -   ii. If no location reversal has been identified within                this time frame (10 minutes for TLC1, 15 minutes for                PillCam) following the possible ileum-cecum transition                flag, mark it as a confirmed ileum-cecum transition        -   e. Continue monitoring data for another 2 hours after the            confirmed ileum-cecum transition, in case of location            reversal            -   i. If a location reversal is identified, flag the                timestamp when reversal happened and then repeat steps                a-d to look for the next ileum-cecum transition            -   ii. If the capsule has not gone back to small intestine                2 hours after previously confirmed ileum-cecum                transition, stop location reversal monitoring and assume                the capsule would stay in large intestinal area

The flag setting and location reversal criteria particularly designedfor TLC1 device were as follows:

-   -   1. Set ileum-cecum transition flag if        -   a. The average reflected red/Green in the front window is            less than 0.7 or mean difference between the two windows is            higher than 0.6        -   b. And the coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue            is less than 0.02    -   2. Define as location reversal if        -   a. The average reflected red/green in the front window is            higher than small intestine reference signal        -   b. And the coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue            is higher than 0.086

For TLC1, 16 of the 18 subjects had CT images that confirmed that thedetected ileum-cecum transition fell between terminal ileum and colon.The total agreement between algorithm and CT scans was 16/18=89%.Regarding those two subject where the ileum-cecum transitionlocalization algorithm failed, for one subject the ileum-cecumtransition was detected while TLC1 was still in the subject's terminalileum, and for the other subject the ileum-cecum transition was detectedwhen the device was in the colon.

Among the 57 available PillCam endoscopy videos, for three subjects theendoscopy video ended before PillCam reached cecum, and another twosubjects had only very limited video data (less than five minutes) inthe large intestine. These five subjects were excluded from ileum-cecumtransition localization algorithm performance test. The performancesummary of ileum-cecum transition detection for PillCam is listed below:

-   -   1. Good cases (39 subjects):        -   a. For 31 subjects, the difference between the PillCam            detection and the physician's notes was less than five            minutes        -   b. For 3 subjects, the difference between the PillCam            detection and the physician's notes was less than 10 minutes        -   c. For 5 subjects, the difference between the PillCam            detection and the physician's notes was less than 20 minutes            (the full transition can take up to 20 minutes before the            signal settles)    -   2. Marginal/bad cases (13 subjects):        -   a. Marginal cases (9 subjects)            -   i. The PillCam ileum-cecum transition detection appeared                in the terminal ileum or colon, but the difference                between the two detections was within one hour        -   b. Failed cases (4 subjects)            -   i. Reasons of failure:                -   1. The signal already stabilized in the terminal                    ileum                -   2. The signal was highly variable from the entrance                    to exit                -   3. There was no statistically significant change in                    reflected red/green at ileum-cecum transition

The total agreement between ileocecal transition localization algorithmdetection and the physician's notes is 39/52=75% if considering goodcases only. Total agreement including possibly acceptable cases is48/52=92.3%

Cecum-Colon Transition

Data demonstrated that, for TLC1, mean signal of reflected red/greenprovided the most statistical difference before and after thececum-colon transition. Data also demonstrated that, for TLC1, thecoefficient of variation of reflected bluee provided the moststatistical contrast at cecum-colon transition. The same signals wereused for PillCam. The cecum-colon transition localization algorithm wasas follows:

-   -   1. Obtain 10 minutes of reflected red/green and reflected blue        signals after ileum-cecum transition, average the data and        record it as the cecum reference signals    -   2. Start to check cecum-colon transition after capsule enters        cecum (The cecum-colon transition algorithm is dependent on the        ileum-cecum transition flag)        -   a. Normalize the newly received data by the cecum reference            signals        -   b. Two-sliding-window analysis:            -   i. Use two adjacent 10 minute windows            -   ii. Set the transition flag if any of the following                criteria were met                -   The mean difference in reflected red/green was more                    than 4× the standard deviation of reflected                    red/green in the back (second) window                -   The mean of reflected red/green in the front (first)                    window was higher than 1.03                -   The coefficient of variation of reflected blue                    signal in the front (first) window was greater than                    0.23

The threshold values above were chosen based on a statistical analysisof data taken by TLC1.

For TLC1, 15 of the 18 subjects had the cecum-colon transition detectedsomewhere between cecum and colon. One of the subjects had thececum-colon transition detected while TLC1 was still in cecum. The othertwo subjects had both wrong ileum-cecum transition detection and wrongcecum-colon transition detection. The total agreement between algorithmand CT scans was 15/18=83%.

For PillCam, for three subjects the endoscopy video ended before PillCamreached cecum, and for another two subjects there was very limited videodata (less than five minutes) in the large intestine. These fivesubjects were excluded from cecum-colon transition localizationalgorithm performance test. The performance summary of cecum-colontransition detection for PillCam is listed below:

-   -   1. 27 cases had the cecum-colon transition detected somewhere        between the cecum and the colon    -   2. one case had the cecum-colon transition detected in the ileum    -   3. 24 cases had no cecum-colon transition localized

The total agreement: 27/52=52%.

The following table summarizes the localization accuracy results.

Transition TLC1 PillCam Stomach-Duodenum 100% (17/17)  89% (48/54)Duodenum-Jejunum 94% (16/17) N/A Ileum-Cecum 89% (16/18) 75% (39/52)Ileum-terminal 100% (18/18)  92% (48/52) ileum/cecum/colon

Other Embodiments

While certain embodiments have been described, the disclosure is notlimited to such embodiments.

As an example, while embodiments have been described in which asecondary binding partner is used, the disclosure is not limited to suchembodiments. In such embodiments, the baseline can be generated from theprimary binding partner bound to the substrate.

As another example, while the use of a secondary binding partner, suchas, for example, avidin, can enhance versatility and allowimmobilization of a primary binding partner (e.g., a capture antibody)as desired, other embodiments are also contemplated. For example, adifferent method can be used to immobilize a primary binding partnerwhich may yield enhanced performance and/or simplified sensormanufacture. An example is the use of an epoxysilane coated surface todirectly immobilize the primary binding partner.

As a further example, embodiments have been described in which theprimary binding partner is immobilized during the assay and in which itsbinding signal (Δ_(Capture Molecule)) is used to normalize the analytebinding signal (Δ_(Analyte)). However, the disclosure is not limited tosuch embodiments. For example, in some embodiments, the primary bindingpartner can be pre-immobilized on a diffraction grating. In suchembodiments, an in situ assay can be a one step process involvingbinding of analyte to the primary binding partner (e.g., withoutratio/normalization).

As another example, although embodiments are disclosed in which blockingsteps were used, the disclosure is not limited in this regard. Forexample, in some embodiments, a sensor can be pre-blocked, e.g., duringsensor manufacturing.

As a further example, while detection methods have been disclosed thatare based on electrical current, the disclosure is not limited in thismanner. For example, in certain embodiments, other detection methods canbe used. Examples of such detection methods include fluorescentdetection (e.g., using one or more dyes, using quantum dots),photoactivatable enzymes, and photocleavable substrates.

As an additional example, in some embodiments, a diffraction gratingmaterial can include one or more patterned proteins and/or one or moreother patterned biomolecules. Patterning can be implemented using anyappropriate technique, such as a stamp (e.g., a polydimethylsiloxanestamp) or photolithography.

Ingestible Device Localization

An ingestible device according to the disclosure (“TLC1”) was tested on20 subjects to investigate its localization ability. TLC1 was abiocompatible polycarbonate capsule that contained a power supply,electronics and software. An onboard software algorithm used time,temperature and reflected light spectral data to determine the locationof the capsule as it traveled the GI tract. The capsule is 0.51×1.22inches which is larger than a vitamin pill which is 0.4×0.85 inches. Thesubjects fasted overnight before participating in the study.Computerized tomography (“CT”) were used as a basis for determining theaccuracy of the localization data collected with TLC1. One of the 20subjects did not follow the fasting rule. CT data was lacking foranother one of the 20 subjects. Thus, these two subjects were excludedfrom further analysis. TLC1 sampled RGB data (radially transmitted)every 15 seconds for the first 14 hours after it entered the subject'sstomach, and then samples every five minutes after that until batterydies. TLC1 did not start to record optical data until it reached thesubject's stomach. Thus, there was no RGB-based data for themouth-esophagus transition for any of the subjects.

In addition, a PillCam® SB (Given Imaging) device was tested on 57subjects. The subjects fasted overnight before joining the study.PillCam videos were recorded within each subject. The sampling frequencyof PillCam is velocity dependent. The faster PillCam travels, the fasterit would sample data. Each video is about seven to eight hours long,starting from when the capsule was administrated into the subject'smouth. RGB optical data were recorded in a table. A physician providednotes on where stomach-duodenum transition and ileum-cecum transitionoccured in each video. Computerized tomography (“CT”) was used as abasis for determining the accuracy of the localization data collectedwith PillCam.

Esophagus-Stomach Transition

For TLC1, it was assumed that this transition occurred one minute afterthe patient ingested the device. For PillCam, the algorithm was asfollows:

-   -   5. Start mouth-esophagus transition detection after capsule is        activated/administrated    -   6. Check whether Green <102.3 and Blue <94.6        -   a. If yes, mark as mouth-esophagus transition        -   b. If no, continue to scan the data    -   7. After detecting mouth-esophagus transition, continue to        monitor Green and Blue signals for another 30 seconds, in case        of location reversal        -   a. If either Green >110.1 or Blue >105.5, mark it as            mouth-esophagus location reversal        -   b. Reset the mouth-esophagus flag and loop through step 2            and 3 until the confirmed mouth-esophagus transition            detected    -   8. Add one minute to the confirmed mouth-esophagus transition        and mark it as esophagus-stomach transition

For one of the PillCam subjects, there was not a clear cut differencebetween the esophagus and stomach, so this subject was excluded fromfuture analysis of stomach localization. Among the 56 valid subjects, 54of them have correct esophagus-stomach transition localization. Thetotal agreement is 54/56=96%. Each of the two failed cases had prolongedesophageal of greater than one minute. Thus, adding one minute tomouth-esophagus transition was not enough to cover the transition inesophagus for these two subjects.

Stomach-Duodenum

For both TLC1 and PillCam, a sliding window analysis was used. Thealgorithm used a dumbbell shape two-sliding-window approach with a twominute gap between the front (first) and back (second) windows. The twominute gap was designed, at least in part, to skip the rapid transitionfrom stomach to small intestine and capture the small intestine signalafter capsule settles down in small intestine. The algorithm was asfollows:

-   -   4. Start to check for stomach-duodenum transition after capsule        enters stomach    -   5. Setup the two windows (front and back)        -   a. Time length of each window: 3 minutes for TLC1; 30            seconds for PillCam        -   b. Time gap between two windows: 2 minutes for both devices        -   c. Window sliding step size: 0.5 minute for both devices    -   6. Compare signals in the two sliding windows        -   a. If difference in mean is higher than 3 times the standard            deviation of Green/Blue signal in the back window            -   i. If this is the first time ever, record the mean and                standard deviation of signals in the back window as                stomach reference            -   ii. If mean signal in the front window is higher than                stomach reference signal by a certain threshold (0.3 for                TLC1 and 0.18 for PillCam), mark this as a possible                stomach-duodenum transition        -   b. If a possible pyloric transition is detected, continue to            scan for another 10 minutes in case of false positive flag            -   i. If within this 10 minutes, location reversal is                detected, the previous pyloric transition flag is a                false positive flag. Clear the flag and continue to                check            -   ii. If no location reversal has been identified within                10 minutes following the possible pyloric transition                flag, mark it as a confirmed pyloric transition        -   c. Continue monitoring Green/Blue data for another 2 hours            after the confirmed pyloric transition, in case of location            reversal            -   i. If a location reversal is identified, flag the                timestamp when reversal happened and then repeat steps                a-c to look for the next pyloric transition            -   ii. If the capsule has not gone back to stomach 2 hours                after previously confirmed pyloric transition, stops                location reversal monitoring and assume the capsule                would stay in intestinal area

For TLC1, one of the 18 subjects had too few samples (<3 minutes) takenin the stomach due to the delayed esophagus-stomach transitionidentification by previously developed localization algorithm. Thus,this subject was excluded from the stomach-duodenum transition algorithmtest. For the rest of the TLC1 subjects, CT images confirmed that thedetected pyloric transitions for all the subjects were located somewherebetween stomach and jejunum. Two out of the 17 subjects showed that thecapsule went back to stomach after first the first stomach-duodenumtransition. The total agreement between the TLC1 algorithm detection andCT scans was 17/17=100%.

For one of the PillCam subjects, the capsule stayed in the subject'sstomach all the time before the video ended. For another two of thePillCam subjects, too few samples were taken in the stomach to run thelocalization algorithm. These three PillCam subjects were excluded fromthe stomach-duodenum transition localization algorithm performance test.The performance summary of pyloric transition localization algorithm forPillCam was as follows:

-   -   3. Good cases (48 subjects):        -   a. For 25 subjects, our detection matches exactly with the            physician's notes        -   b. For 19 subjects, the difference between the two            detections is less than five minutes        -   c. For four subjects, the difference between the two            detections is less than 10 minutes (The full transition            could take up to 10 minutes before the GB signal settled)    -   4. Failed cases (6 subjects):        -   a. Four subjects had high standard deviation of Green/Blue            signal in the stomach        -   b. One subject had bile in the stomach, which greatly            affected Green/Blue in stomach        -   c. One subject had no Green/Blue change at pyloric            transition

The total agreement for the PillCam stomach-duodenum transitionlocalization algorithm detection and physician's notes was 48/54=89%.

Duodenum-Jejenum Transition

For TLC1, it was assumed that the device left the duodenum and enteredthe jejenum three minutes after it was determined that the deviceentered the duodenum. Of the 17 subjects noted above with respect to theTLC1 investigation of the stomach-duodenum transition, 16 of thesubjects mentioned had CT images that confirmed that theduodenum-jejenum transition was located somewhere between stomach andjejunum. One of the 17 subjects had a prolonged transit time induodenum. The total agreement between algorithm detection and CT scanswas 16/17=94%.

For PillCam, the duodenum-jejenum transition was not determined.

Jejenum-Ileum Transition

It is to be noted that the jejunum is redder and more vascular thanileum, and that the jejenum has a thicker intestine wall with moremesentery fat. These differences can cause various optical responsesbetween jejunum and ileum, particularly for the reflected red lightsignal. For both TLC1 and PillCam, two different approaches wereexplored to track the change of red signal at the jejunum-ileumtransition. The first approach was a single-sliding-window analysis,where the window is 10 minutes long, and the mean signal was comparedwith a threshold value while the window was moving along. The secondapproach was a two-sliding-window analysis, where each window was 10minutes long with a 20 minute spacing between the two windows. Thealgorithm for the jejunum-ileum transition localization was as follows:

-   -   3. Obtain 20 minutes of Red signal after the duodenum-jejenum        transition, average the data and record it as the jejunum        reference signal    -   4. Start to check the jejunum-ileum transition 20 minutes after        the device enters the jejunum        -   a. Normalize the newly received data by the jejunum            reference signal        -   b. Two approaches:            -   i. Single-sliding-window analysis                -   Set the transition flag if the mean of reflected red                    signal is less than 0.8            -   ii. Two-sliding-window analysis:                -   Set the transition flag if the mean difference in                    reflected red is higher than 2× the standard                    deviation of the reflected red signal in the front                    window

For TLC1, 16 of the 18 subjects had CT images that confirmed that thedetected jejunum-ileum transition fell between jejunum and cecum. Thetotal agreement between algorithm and CT scans was 16/18=89%. This wastrue for both the single-sliding-window and double-sliding-windowapproaches, and the same two subjects failed in both approaches.

The performance summary of the jejunum-ileum transition detection forPillCam is listed below:

-   -   3. Single-sliding-window analysis:        -   a. 11 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected            somewhere between jejunum and cecum        -   b. 24 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected after            cecum        -   c. 19 cases having no jejunum-ileum transition detected        -   d. Total agreement: 11/54=20%    -   4. Two-sliding-window analysis:        -   a. 30 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected            somewhere between jejunum and cecum        -   b. 24 cases having jejunum-ileum transition detected after            cecum        -   c. Total agreement: 30/54=56%

Ileum-Cecum Transition

Data demonstrated that, for TLC1, mean signal of reflected red/greenprovided the most statistical difference before and after theileum-cecum transition. Data also demonstrated that, for TLC1, thecoefficient of variation of reflected green/blue provided the moststatistical contrast at ileum-cecum transition. The analysis based onPillCam videos showed very similar statistical trends to those resultsobtained with TLC1 device. Thus, the algortithm utilized changes in meanvalue of reflected red/green and the coefficient of variation ofreflected green/blue. The algorithm was as follows:

-   -   4. Start to monitor ileum-cecum transition after the capsule        enters the stomach    -   5. Setup the two windows (front (first) and back (second))        -   a. Use a five minute time length for each window        -   b. Use a 10 minute gap between the two windows        -   c. Use a one minute window sliding step size    -   6. Compare signals in the two sliding windows        -   a. Set ileum-cecum transition flag if            -   i. Reflected red/green has a significant change or is                lower than a threshold            -   ii. Coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue is                lower than a threshold        -   b. If this is the first ileum-cecum transition detected,            record average reflected red/green signal in small intestine            as small intestine reference signal        -   c. Mark location reversal (i.e. capsule returns to terminal            ileum) if            -   i. Reflected red/green is statistically comparable with                small intestine reference signal            -   ii. Coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue is                higher than a threshold        -   d. If a possible ileum-cecum transition is detected,            continue to scan for another 10 minutes for TLC1 (15 minutes            for PillCam) in case of false positive flag            -   i. If within this time frame (10 minutes for TLC1, 15                minutes for PillCam), location reversal is detected, the                previous ileum-cecum transition flag is a false positive                flag. Clear the flag and continue to check            -   ii. If no location reversal has been identified within                this time frame (10 minutes for TLC1, 15 minutes for                PillCam) following the possible ileum-cecum transition                flag, mark it as a confirmed ileum-cecum transition        -   e. Continue monitoring data for another 2 hours after the            confirmed ileum-cecum transition, in case of location            reversal            -   i. If a location reversal is identified, flag the                timestamp when reversal happened and then repeat steps                a-d to look for the next ileum-cecum transition            -   ii. If the capsule has not gone back to small intestine                2 hours after previously confirmed ileum-cecum                transition, stop location reversal monitoring and assume                the capsule would stay in large intestinal area

The flag setting and location reversal criteria particularly designedfor TLC1 device were as follows:

-   -   3. Set ileum-cecum transition flag if        -   a. The average reflected red/Green in the front window is            less than 0.7 or mean difference between the two windows is            higher than 0.6        -   b. And the coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue            is less than 0.02    -   4. Define as location reversal if        -   a. The average reflected red/green in the front window is            higher than small intestine reference signal        -   b. And the coefficient of variation of reflected green/blue            is higher than 0.086

For TLC1, 16 of the 18 subjects had CT images that confirmed that thedetected ileum-cecum transition fell between terminal ileum and colon.The total agreement between algorithm and CT scans was 16/18=89%.Regarding those two subject where the ileum-cecum transitionlocalization algorithm failed, for one subject the ileum-cecumtransition was detected while TLC1 was still in the subject's terminalileum, and for the other subject the ileum-cecum transition was detectedwhen the device was in the colon.

Among the 57 available PillCam endoscopy videos, for three subjects theendoscopy video ended before PillCam reached cecum, and another twosubjects had only very limited video data (less than five minutes) inthe large intestine. These five subjects were excluded from ileum-cecumtransition localization algorithm performance test. The performancesummary of ileum-cecum transition detection for PillCam is listed below:

-   -   3. Good cases (39 subjects):        -   a. For 31 subjects, the difference between the PillCam            detection and the physician's notes was less than five            minutes        -   b. For 3 subjects, the difference between the PillCam            detection and the physician's notes was less than 10 minutes        -   c. For 5 subjects, the difference between the PillCam            detection and the physician's notes was less than 20 minutes            (the full transition can take up to 20 minutes before the            signal settles)    -   4. Marginal/bad cases (13 subjects):        -   a. Marginal cases (9 subjects)            -   i. The PillCam ileum-cecum transition detection appeared                in the terminal ileum or colon, but the difference                between the two detections was within one hour        -   b. Failed cases (4 subjects)            -   i. Reasons of failure:                -   1. The signal already stabilized in the terminal                    ileum                -   2. The signal was highly variable from the entrance                    to exit                -   3. There was no statistically significant change in                    reflected red/green at ileum-cecum transition

The total agreement between ileocecal transition localization algorithmdetection and the physician's notes is 39/52=75% if considering goodcases only. Total agreement including possibly acceptable cases is48/52=92.3%

Cecum-Colon Transition

Data demonstrated that, for TLC1, mean signal of reflected red/greenprovided the most statistical difference before and after thececum-colon transition. Data also demonstrated that, for TLC1, thecoefficient of variation of reflected bluee provided the moststatistical contrast at cecum-colon transition. The same signals wereused for PillCam. The cecum-colon transition localization algorithm wasas follows:

-   -   3. Obtain 10 minutes of reflected red/green and reflected blue        signals after ileum-cecum transition, average the data and        record it as the cecum reference signals    -   4. Start to check cecum-colon transition after capsule enters        cecum (The cecum-colon transition algorithm is dependent on the        ileum-cecum transition flag)        -   a. Normalize the newly received data by the cecum reference            signals        -   b. Two-sliding-window analysis:            -   i. Use two adjacent 10 minute windows            -   ii. Set the transition flag if any of the following                criteria were met                -   The mean difference in reflected red/green was more                    than 4× the standard deviation of reflected                    red/green in the back (second) window                -   The mean of reflected red/green in the front (first)                    window was higher than 1.03                -   The coefficient of variation of reflected blue                    signal in the front (first) window was greater than                    0.23

The threshold values above were chosen based on a statistical analysisof data taken by TLC1.

For TLC1, 15 of the 18 subjects had the cecum-colon transition detectedsomewhere between cecum and colon. One of the subjects had thececum-colon transition detected while TLC1 was still in cecum. The othertwo subjects had both wrong ileum-cecum transition detection and wrongcecum-colon transition detection. The total agreement between algorithmand CT scans was 15/18=83%.

For PillCam, for three subjects the endoscopy video ended before PillCamreached cecum, and for another two subjects there was very limited videodata (less than five minutes) in the large intestine. These fivesubjects were excluded from cecum-colon transition localizationalgorithm performance test. The performance summary of cecum-colontransition detection for PillCam is listed below:

-   -   4. 27 cases had the cecum-colon transition detected somewhere        between the cecum and the colon    -   5. one case had the cecum-colon transition detected in the ileum    -   6. 24 cases had no cecum-colon transition localized

The total agreement: 27/52=52%.

The following table summarizes the localization accuracy results.

Transition TLC1 PillCam Stomach-Duodenum 100% (17/17)  89% (48/54)Duodenum-Jejenum 94% (16/17) N/A Ileum-Cecum 89% (16/18) 75% (39/52)Ileum-terminal 100% (18/18)  92% (48/52) ileum/cecum/colon

1. A composition, comprising: a dye; and a reagent capable ofselectively lysing eukaryotic cells. 2.-130. (canceled)
 131. Thecomposition of claim 1, wherein the dye is capable of binding to orreacting with a target component of a viable cell.
 132. The compositionof claim 131, wherein the dye exhibits fluorescence that is measurablyaltered when the dye is bound to or reacted with the target component ofthe viable cell.
 133. The composition of claim 11, wherein the dyeexhibits fluorescence when bound to a nucleic acid.
 134. The compositionof claim 1, wherein the dye is a lipophilic dye that exhibitsfluorescence when metabolized by a cell.
 135. The composition of claim1, wherein the dye exhibits fluorescence when reduced by a cell or acell component.
 136. The composition of claim 1, wherein the dyecomprises a member selected from the group consisting of resazurin,C¹²-resazurin, 7-hydroxy-9H-(1,3 dichloro-9,9-dimethylacridin-2-ol)N-oxide, 6-chloro-9-nitro-5-oxo-5H-benzo[a]phenoxazine, and atetrazolium salt.
 137. The composition of claim 1, wherein the dyeexhibits fluorescence when oxidized by a cell or a cell component. 138.The composition of claim 1, wherein the dye exhibits fluorescence whende-acetylated and/or oxidized by a cell or a cell component.
 139. Thecomposition of claim 1, wherein the dye exhibits fluorescence whenreacted with a peptidase.
 140. The composition of claim 1, wherein thedye comprises a chemiluminescent dye that exhibits chemiluminescencewhen metabolized by a viable cell.
 141. The composition of claim 1,wherein the dye comprises luminol.
 142. The composition of claim 1,wherein the reagent comprises a detergent.
 143. The composition of claim1, wherein the reagent comprises a non-ionic detergent.
 144. Thecomposition of claim 1, further comprising a second reagent capable ofselectively lysing eukaryotic cells.
 145. The composition of claim 1,further comprising an electrolyte.
 146. The composition of claim 1,further comprising an electrolyte.
 147. An article, comprising: a membercomprising an absorptive material; and a composition comprising a dyeand a reagent capable of selectively lysing eukaryotic cells, whereinthe composition is at least partially absorbed in the absorptivematerial.
 148. The article of claim 147, wherein the absorptive materialcomprises a sponge.
 149. A device, comprising: a member comprising anabsorptive material; and a composition comprising a dye and a reagentcapable of selectively lysing eukaryotic cells, wherein the compositionis at least partially absorbed in the absorptive material, and thedevice is an ingestible device.
 150. A method, comprising: disposing asample in a device according to claim 149, thereby producing a product;and after disposing the sample is in the device, measuring a parameterselected from total fluorescence of the sample, and a rate of change offluorescence as a function of time of the product in the sample.